JP7315071B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a plate storing part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storing part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area according to the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. In a pachinko machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions. In this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and excess game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP 2017-23329 A

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably managing the gaming machine.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 includes a history storage execution means for storing history information of a game corresponding to a game ball flowing down a game area between a door body and a game board when it enters a predetermined ball entering means in a history storage means;
information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to game results by using the history information stored in the history storage means;
mode information storage means for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means;
mode information display control means for controlling display corresponding to the mode information stored in the mode information storage means on the information display means;
a predetermined response display control means for performing control so that the information display means displays a predetermined response display before the display corresponding to the mode information is newly started based on the occurrence of a predetermined display opportunity;
with
The mode information storage means comprises a plurality of specific storage areas so as to be able to store each of the plurality of mode information derived at different timings by the information derivation means,
The mode information display control means performs control so that the information display means sequentially displays the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas in accordance with a predetermined display order, and when the information display means is caused to perform the display corresponding to the mode information after the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display means, the display corresponding to the mode information corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order is started.
The history storage execution means stores history information corresponding to when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means in either the closed state or the open state of the door, in the history storage means.
This game machine is
a control means capable of executing various processes including a predetermined progress process for progressing a game and temporarily storing information in a predetermined internal storage means when executing the process;
means for executing a display output process for enabling the information display means to perform a check display for confirming whether or not the information display means is normal after the supply of operating power is started;
with
A configuration in which the predetermined progress process can be executed even in a situation where control is being performed so that the check display is performed on the information display means,
The control means is
In-area processing executing means for executing in-area processing, which is processing using a program stored in a storage area of a predetermined address range in the program storage means;
an out-of-area process execution means for executing an out-of-area process, which is a process using a program stored in a storage area of an address range outside the predetermined address range in the program storage means;
saving executing means for saving information stored in the predetermined internal storage means to a saving storage means when or after the out-of-area processing is started;
a return execution means for returning the information saved in the save storage means to the predetermined internal storage means when or after the out-of-area processing is finished;
with
The display output processing is included in the intra-region processing,
The information deriving means executes a derivation process for deriving the mode information when a process execution trigger occurs, and is characterized by executing the derivation process a plurality of times from when the derivation of the mode information is started until the derivation of the mode information is completed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably manage a gaming machine.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball that has flowed down the game area. It is a front view of a main controller. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in a main-side ROM; It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation start process executed by the main side CPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting a detection result of a ball-entering detection sensor to the main side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the entering ball detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the various devices which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by payout side CPU. 3 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence memory; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory; It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) to (d) are time charts showing how information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and signal types is stored in a correspondence memory. 9 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU; 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; (a) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. 9 is a flowchart showing output processing of a set value update signal executed by the main CPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing display output processing executed by a management CPU; 4 is a flow chart showing display processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) It is a flowchart which shows the data output process performed by main side CPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the external output process which is performed by management side CPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in a main ROM in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of another storage memory in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing repeated change monitoring processing executed by a management CPU; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing repeated change monitoring processing executed by the main CPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the sixth embodiment; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; 4 is a flowchart showing display output processing executed by a management CPU; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F in the ninth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) to (h) are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for transmitting detection results of each ball-entering detection sensor to the main side CPU and management IC in the tenth embodiment; It is a front view of the main controller in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices under the control of the MPU; 4 is a flow chart showing display processing executed by a management-side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices when the management result of the game history is displayed, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices when the setting state of the pachinko machine is changed. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the first to fourth notification display devices enter the display state. (a) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 1st information display apparatus in 12th Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 2nd information display apparatus. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine is changeable is displayed. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an abnormality display area in the thirteenth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality setting process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an abnormality display performed by main side CPU. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU in another form. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of programs and data in a main ROM in the fifteenth embodiment; It is an explanatory view for explaining a setting mode of each area in main side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of a non-specific control work area used for managing game histories; It is a flowchart which shows the check process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal ball entry management process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the result calculation process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed by main side CPU. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the twentieth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration in the twenty-first embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the twenty-second embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting confirmation performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing RAM monitoring processing executed by the main CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU in another form. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU in another form. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing RAM monitoring processing executed by the main CPU in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing RAM monitoring processing executed by the main CPU in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the another monitoring process performed by main side CPU. 29 is a flow chart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the twenty-sixth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the twenty-ninth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the thirtieth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed by main side CPU. (a) It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of MPU, (b) is a time chart which shows the mode of the output of the reset signal by a reset signal output part. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing setting monitoring processing executed by the main CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the another monitoring process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the thirty-first embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the clear processing at the time of abnormality performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the clear processing for non-specific control performed by main side CPU. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing power failure information storage processing executed by the main CPU in the thirty-second embodiment; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing checksum monitoring processing executed by the main CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the clear processing for non-specific control performed by main side CPU. 29 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the thirty-third embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting confirmation performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing setting monitoring processing executed by the main CPU; FIG. 4 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration for display control of various display circuits by a main CPU; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers provided in a work area for specific control; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various storage areas provided in a work area for non-specific control; It is an explanatory view for explaining an electric composition of display IC. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how type data and display data are transmitted from the main CPU to the display IC and the display data transmitted from the display IC is received by the first display circuit or the second display circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices in a situation where the setting value is updated, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices in a situation where the setting value is confirmed. 29 is a flowchart showing set value update processing executed by the main CPU in the thirty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a calculation result storage area in the thirty-fifth embodiment; (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices. 4(a) to 4(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices; FIG. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how the base values of various areas are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices. It is a flowchart which shows the result calculation process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of the normal time performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting confirmation performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. (a) to (f) are time charts for explaining display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices when supply of operating power to the main CPU is started. 29 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the thirty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing normal setting processing executed by the main CPU in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. FIGS. 13A to 13D are explanatory diagrams for explaining setting correspondence storage areas provided in the main ROM in the thirty-ninth embodiment; FIGS. It is a flowchart which shows the read-out process of the success/failure table performed by main side CPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing setting processing to the fifth display data buffer during setting update executed by the main CPU; FIG. FIGS. 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams for explaining setting correspondence storage areas provided in the main ROM in the 40th embodiment; FIGS. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various display units provided in an area that can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine through the window panel in the forty-first embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the round display unit. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the forty-second embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing result calculation processing executed by the main CPU in the forty-third embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed by main side CPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the base values of various areas are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the base values of various areas are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices in the forty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the forty-fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area related to set values provided in a work area for specific control; It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting confirmation performed by main side CPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing to the fifth display data buffer during setting confirmation executed by the main CPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing setting processing to the fifth display data buffer during setting update executed by the main CPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the details of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is restarted after the power failure processing is executed while the set value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is being executed. 10A to 10E are time charts showing end timings of setting value update processing and setting confirmation processing in relation to operation states of a setting key insertion unit; FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the forty-sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the details of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is restarted after the power failure processing is executed while the set value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is being executed. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the details of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is restarted after the power failure processing is executed while the set value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is being executed in the forty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power failure processing is executed while the set value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is being executed in the forty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the forty-ninth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting confirmation performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how interrupts of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are permitted while the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. (a) to (g) are time charts showing the progress of processing when an abnormality related to a power failure flag, checksum, or set value occurs. (a) to (g) are time charts showing display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices when supply of operating power to the main CPU is started. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the details of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is restarted after the power failure processing is executed while the set value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is being executed. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device; It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing performed by sound and light side CPU. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an action corresponding to the content of the processing executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing performed by sound and light side CPU in 50th Embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an action corresponding to the content of the processing executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU; FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the fifty-first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the fifty-second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the fifty-third embodiment; FIG. (a) to (g) are time charts showing the state of subsequent processing when the supply of operating power to the main CPU is stopped while the set value update processing is being executed. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area provided in a work area for specific control; (a) to (f) are time charts showing how setting values to be updated are updated. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the fifty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the fifty-fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a clear target area and a non-clear target area provided in a work area for specific control; It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display unit and the normal figure display unit corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area of the work area for specific control in the fifty-sixth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed by main side CPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display unit and the normal figure display unit corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU in the fifty-seventh embodiment; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display unit and the normal figure display unit corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area and the non-clear target area of the work area for specific control in the fifty-eighth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed by main side CPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a detachment display lottery table for a special figure, and (b) an explanatory diagram for describing a detachment display lottery table for a normal figure. FIG. 222 is a flow chart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU in the fifty-ninth embodiment; FIG. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an initial display lottery table for a special figure, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an initial display lottery table for a normal figure. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display unit and the normal figure display unit corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU in the 60th embodiment; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display unit and the normal figure display unit corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU in the 61st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing set value update processing executed by the main CPU in the 62nd embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed by main side CPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display sorting table for special figures, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display sorting table for special figures, (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display sorting table for normal maps, and (d) is an explanatory view for explaining the second display sorting table for general maps. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU in the 63rd embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view of a game board in the 64th embodiment; (a) A vertical cross-sectional view of the second operating portion in the non-guiding state, and (b) a vertical cross-sectional view of the second operating portion in the guiding state. (a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents of the symbol display device when a game cycle is executed. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining main symbols and sub-symbols that are variably displayed in each symbol row. It is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the distribution winning device. It is an explanatory view for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in main side CPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success/failure table of the first special figure, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the success/failure table of the second special figure. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the type table for the big win, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each of a plurality of types of jackpot results, (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the type table for the small win, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each of the plurality of types of small win results. It is a flow chart which shows the general figure general electric control processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation start process executed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure determination executed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric end processing performed by main side CPU. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area of the work area for specific control; It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. (a) is a flowchart showing setting processing to the first display data buffer during setting update executed by the main CPU, and (b) is a flowchart showing setting processing to the sixth display data buffer during setting confirmation executed by the main CPU. (a) ~ (g) is a time chart showing how the display contents of the first special figure display section, the second special figure display section and the special display section change according to the state of the pachinko machine. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU in the sixty-fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU in the sixty-sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU in the sixty-seventh embodiment; FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the special display section in the 68th embodiment, and (b) is a time chart showing the display contents of the 15R display section, the 6R display section, and the small hit display section in a situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is being executed. FIG. 30 is a front view of a game board in the sixty-ninth embodiment; It is an explanatory view for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in main side CPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right/wrong table for low probability, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right/wrong table for high probability, (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second right/wrong table for low probability, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second right/wrong table for high probability. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each of a plurality of types of jackpot results and the contents of one type of small winning result, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a support mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of a display duration period of game rounds; It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special figure special electric control processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric control processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation start process executed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure determination executed by the main side CPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right/wrong table for the low probability in the seventieth embodiment, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right/wrong table for the high probability, (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second right/wrong table for the low probability, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second right/wrong table for the high probability. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right/wrong table for the low probability in the seventy-first embodiment, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right/wrong table for the high probability, (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second right/wrong table for the low probability, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second right/wrong table for the high probability. FIG. 32 is a front view of a main controller in the 72nd embodiment; 3 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for emitting light from a confirmation notification light emitting device, a change notification light emitting device, and a clear notification light emitting device under the control of an MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting confirmation performed by main side CPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the 1st RAM clearing process which is performed by main side CPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing changes in the state of the change notification light-emitting device when an illegal change of setting values is performed. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the seventy-third embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting confirmation performed by main side CPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the 1st RAM clearing process which is performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for alerting|reporting performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. FIG. 32 is a front view of a main controller in the seventy-fourth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows setting processing during switching performed by main side CPU.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko machine 10, which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 2, the configuration inside the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 has, as shown in FIG. 1, an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may have a structure in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 of the game machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 23 of the resin base 21 .

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

An inner rail part 25 and an outer rail part 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 25 and the outer rail part 26 constitute a guide rail as a guide means. A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by guide rails.

Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and a solenoid 27c that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied onto the launch rail 27a toward the guide rail. When a shooting operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, a solenoid 27c is driven and controlled to shoot a game ball.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general prize winning port 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a general figure unit 38, and the like. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and the others are provided one each.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when one game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or when one game ball enters the second operation opening 34, one prize ball is paid out, and when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, ten prize balls are paid out, and one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32. When it occurs, the payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may have a larger number of prize balls than the first operation port 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entering ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and includes not only a mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also a mode in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the game ball entering the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, the second operating hole 34, and the through gate 35 are also expressed as winning.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24 . Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. A game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34 when the universal electrical role 34a is closed, and the winning to the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball entering the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. - 特許庁

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the variable display of the pattern is performed in the normal pattern display portion 38a of the normal pattern unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal diagram display section 38a ends, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the common electric open state, the common electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the normal figure display unit 38a is configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of LED display segments are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of winning game balls in the through gate 35 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the lottery is clearly indicated through the display effect on the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. - 特許庁

In detail, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery with the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the winning of the second operation opening 34 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the special figure display unit 37a is configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of LED display segments are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be configured by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed can be considered.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls winning the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the special figure reservation display part 37b.

More specifically, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device.

In the pattern display device 41, when the variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed in the special symbol display part 37a based on the winning to the first operation port 33 or the winning to the second operation port 34, the variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed accordingly. For example, on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, three pattern rows of upper, middle and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas, and in each pattern row, main patterns with numbers '1' to '9' are scroll-displayed in a state of being arranged in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display in all pattern rows is started first, the scroll display is switched to the standby display in the order of upper pattern row→lower pattern row→middle pattern row, and finally the predetermined patterns are displayed in each pattern row in a stationary state. Then, in a game turn in which the game result is a jackpot result, a combination of predetermined symbols is stopped and displayed on the preset effective line on the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41 . Specifically, the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols is stop-displayed when the result of the maximum winning jackpot to be described later is obtained, the combination of the same even-numbered symbols is stopped-displayed when the result of the low-probability jackpot to be described later is obtained, and the combination of symbols which are not the same combination of symbols but are not stop-displayed when the result of the low-prize-high-probability jackpot is not the result of the low-prize-high-probability jackpot is stop-displayed.

In the pattern display device 41, not only the display performance triggered by the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. Also, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33 and 34, the display is started on the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the time until the predetermined result is displayed and terminated corresponds to one game cycle. In addition, the pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily change the pattern display mode without being limited to the one described above, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, the number of symbols in each pattern row, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

When a big win is won in a winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible. The special electric prize winning device 32 has a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and has an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win prizes when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area PA.

As already explained, a game ball entering any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the out opening 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowed into the game area PA is ejected from the game area PA by entering one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the out opening 24a. A game ball entering any one of the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a is led to the back side of the game board 24.例文帳に追加

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a, respectively. The game balls flowing into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are led to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the discharged discharge passages 42 to 48, and are collected by a discharge ball collecting part (not shown). Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collecting section are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls are provided in the discharge passages 42 to 48, respectively. These discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since four general prize winning openings 31 are provided as already explained, there are discharge passage portions 42 to 44 corresponding to each of these four openings. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, 43a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general prize winning port 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the general prize winning port 31 adjacent to it. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so as to have a detection range in the middle of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to have a detection range in the middle of the second discharge passage portion 43. A game ball entering the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by a first winning hole detection sensor 42a while passing through a first discharge passage part 42, and a game ball entering the general winning hole 31 on the right side is detected by a second winning hole detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage part 43.例文帳に追加In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 is formed so as to join the two general prize winning openings 31 on the right side at a midway position. The third discharge passage portion 44 has entrance side areas corresponding to the two general winning openings 31 respectively, and has one exit side area by joining the entrance side areas in the middle. A third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage portion 44 . A game ball entering one of the two right-side general winning holes 31 is detected by the third winning hole detecting sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44. - 特許庁

A fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32 . A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so as to have a detection range in the middle of the fourth discharge passage part 45, and the game ball entering the special electric prize winning device 32 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a while passing through the fourth discharge passage part 45.例文帳に追加A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first operation port 33 . A first operation opening detection sensor 46a is provided so as to have a detection range in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and the game ball entering the first operation opening 33 is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a while passing through the fifth discharge passage portion 46. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second operation port 34 . A second operating opening detection sensor 47a is provided so as to have a detection range in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and the game ball entering the second opening 34 is detected by the second operating opening detection sensor 47a while passing through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 is present corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so as to have a detection range in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball entering the out port 24a is detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a while passing through the seventh discharge passage portion 48.例文帳に追加

A game ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 on the way down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

Electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, but any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be detected individually. Further, the various detection sensors 42a-49a are electrically connected to a main controller 60 which will be described later, and detection results of the various detection sensors 42a-49a are output to the main controller 60. FIG. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when the game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball is detected. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed without being limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21 . As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 through which substantially the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, but is not limited to this, and may be made of a synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner, or may be formed in a colored and transparent manner as long as the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52.例文帳に追加

A display light-emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51 . A pair of left and right speaker units 54 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 55 bulging forward and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged below the window portion 51 . An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. As shown in FIG. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) for main control of the game. FIG. 5 is a front view of the main controller 60. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5, the main controller 60 has a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. An MPU 62 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 61 . The board box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 accommodated in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. Although the board box 60a is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 accommodated in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. The main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a such that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the pachinko machine 10 rearward. Therefore, by opening the game machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the rear surface of the resin base 21, it is possible to visually see the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a and to visually see the MPU 62 through the opposing wall portion 60b.

The board box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c back and forth, and the plurality of case bodies 60c are provided with a connecting portion 60e for preventing separation of the case bodies 60c and for leaving traces when the case bodies 60c are separated. A plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 60a. As a result, even if the case body 60c is separated by destroying the part of the joints 60e in a state in which the separation of the case body 60c is prevented by using the part of the joints 60e, the separation of the case body 60c can be prevented again by subsequently bringing another joint 60e into the jointed state. In addition, when the case body 60c is separated, the connecting part 60e is destroyed and a trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body 60c is illegally separated by visually checking the connecting part 60e. In addition, a sealing seal 60f is attached to one side of the substrate box 60a opposite to the one side on which the connecting portions 60e are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c. When the sealing seal 60f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body 60c. As a result, when the sealing seal 60f is peeled off when the case body 60c is separated, it is possible to leave a trace.

In the main control device 60 having the above configuration, the main control board 61 includes a setting key insertion unit 68a into which a setting key owned by the manager of the game hall is inserted and turned ON in order to generate an opportunity to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 within the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6"; A reset button 68c operated to clear data in the main RAM 65, which will be described later, and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management results of the game history are provided. In addition, the MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 is provided with a reading terminal 68d for connecting the connection terminal of the external device in order to read the information (program and data) stored in the management result of the game history or the main ROM 64 with the external device. Incidentally, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and any number of stages may be used.

These setting key insertion portion 68a, update button 68b, reset button 68c, reading terminal 68d (that is, MPU 62), and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all provided on the device mounting surface of the main control board 61. The device mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a as already described, but the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d are not covered by the opposing wall portion 60b. That is, the opposed wall portion 60b has individual openings in areas opposed to the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d. As a result, it is possible to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion portion 68a without opening the board box 60a, to press the update button 68b, to press the reset button 68c, and to connect the connection terminal of the external device to the reading terminal 68d.

By inserting the setting key into the setting key inserting portion 68a and rotating it in a predetermined direction, the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned on. By starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in that state (that is, by starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60), the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. In this state, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed step by step in the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6" in ascending order. When the update button 68b is operated in the state of "setting 6", the state is updated to "setting 1". The setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion portion 68a from the ON position in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction to return to the initial position. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off, the changeable state ends, and the game can be played with the set values at that time. In other words, even if the update button 68b is operated after the changeable state ends, the setting value cannot be changed.

The ON operation for the setting key insertion portion 68a is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned ON after the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has completed the operation power supply start process, the setting value cannot be changed.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the higher the value of 'setting n' (n is an integer of '1' to '6') (that is, the higher the set value), the higher the advantage. Although the details will be described later, there are a low-probability mode in which the probability of winning is relatively low and a high-probability mode in which the probability of winning is relatively high as a success/fail lottery mode for determining the probability of winning the jackpot result, and the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot result in the low-probability mode is set. On the other hand, the winning probability of the jackpot results in the high probability mode is constant regardless of the set value.

The reset button 68c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65 as described above, but in order to clear the data, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c (that is, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). The ON operation for the reset button 68c is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the reset button 68c is pressed after the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 completes the operation power supply start process, the data in the main RAM 65 cannot be cleared.

As described above, the reading terminal 68d is connected to the connection terminal of the external device in order to read the management result of the game history or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. In order to output to the external device, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the connecting terminal of the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d (that is, to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). The connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is enabled only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d after the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has completed the processing for starting the supply of operating power, no external output to the external device is performed.

Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged, but is not limited to this, and may be a single multicolor light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is installed so that its display surface faces the direction of the element mounting surface of the main control board 61, and is covered with the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is transparent, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. Further, as already explained, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a so that the facing wall 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the game machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third notification display devices are displayed through the facing wall 60b. The display surfaces 69a to 69c can be visually observed.

On the display surface of the first notification display device 69a, not only numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters including alphabetic characters are displayed. On the other hand, the numbers "0" to "9" are displayed on the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c. The management results of the game history are notified using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the content of this notification will be described in detail later. Further, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, a value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. The value corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the first notification display device 69a, or may be displayed on the second notification display device 69b. Further, the setting value before entering the changeable state may be displayed on one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the current setting value may be displayed on another one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60 . The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism 73 and a controller assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72 .

The payout mechanism part 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76.例文帳に追加The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power ON and OFF.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76, and a power supply/launch control device 78 for generating and outputting predetermined electric power required by various control devices, etc., and for controlling the launching of game balls accompanying the operation of the shooting operation device 28 by the player. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged so that the payout control device 77 is located behind the pachinko machine 10 .

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61 that controls the main game, and a power outage monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 . The MPU 62 incorporates a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section. In addition to the elements described above, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used exclusively for reading. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to retain data, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64 .

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages game history based on information supplied from the main CPU 63 . Although the details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of game balls to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first working opening 33, the second working opening 34, and the out opening 24a, and the frequency of ball entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 is grasped according to the grasped ball entering history. Further, the management IC 66 grasps the occurrence frequency of the opening/closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode, which will be described later.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 . A power supply/emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67 , and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67 .

Various sensors such as ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62 . Each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a includes, as already described, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, the second operation opening detection sensor 47a, the out opening detection sensor 48a, and the gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of these ball-entering detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether a ball is entering each ball-entering section. Further, in the main CPU 63, various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33, and various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the second operating port 34.

The input side of the MPU 62 is provided with a setting key insertion portion 68a, an update button 68b and a reset button 68c provided on the main control board 61 . A sensor (not shown) is provided in the setting key inserting portion 68a, and the sensor detects whether the setting key inserting portion 68a is arranged at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position. Based on the detection result from the sensor, the main CPU 63 identifies whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is located at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position. The update button 68b is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the update button 68b is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the update button 68b is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor. The reset button 68c is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected with a power failure monitor board 67, a payout control device 77 and a sound emission control device 81. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on, for example, a game ball entering a prize ball-corresponding ball entry portion corresponding to the payout of the game ball among the above-mentioned ball entry portions. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81 .

On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the opening and closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34, a special figure unit 37 and a general figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure reservation display section 37b, but all of these are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Similarly, the normal map unit 38 is provided with a normal map display unit 38a and a normal map reservation display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the driving control of the special electric driving unit 32b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the general electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the main side CPU 63 executes drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b so that the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Moreover, display control of the special figure display part 37a is performed in main side CPU63 in the case of each game time. In addition, when the lottery result of whether or not to set the general electric accessory 34a to the open state is specified, the main side CPU 63 controls the display of the general pattern display unit 38a. Further, when the winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the display control of the special figure reservation display unit 37b is executed in the main side CPU 63, When the winning to the through gate 35 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the general figure display unit 38a, the display control of the general figure reservation display unit 38b is performed in the main side CPU 63.

First to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. FIG. In addition, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 is notified through the display on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In this case, the display of the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b is controlled by the management IC 66 and not controlled by the main CPU 63, while the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled by the main CPU 63 and controlled by the management IC 66. Display control by the main side CPU 63 has priority over display control by the management IC 66 for the display of the third notification display device 69c.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third notification display device 69c may also be configured so that the display is controlled by the management IC 66 and the display is not controlled by the main CPU 63 . In this case, when the current set value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the main side CPU 63 may instruct the management IC 66 to display the set value.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d. A sensor (not shown) is provided at the reading terminal 68d, and the sensor detects whether or not a connection terminal of an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d based on the detection result from the sensor. When an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d, the game history management result in the management IC 66 or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 is output to the external device.

The blackout monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power/launch control device 78 and monitors the maximum voltage output from the power/launch control device 78, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 .

The power/emission control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply/emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, power for memory retention is supplied to the main RAM 65 of the main controller 60 and the payout control device 77 from the power supply unit for power failure. The power/shooting control device 78 controls the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 27, and the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Further, the payout mechanism part 73 is provided with a power switch as already explained, and when the power switch is turned ON, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and when the power switch is turned OFF, the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

The audio light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. The display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81 .

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lottery Draws by Main Side CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

During the game, the main CPU 63 uses various counter information to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, the display setting of the special figure display unit 37a, the pattern display setting of the pattern display device 41, the display setting of the normal figure display unit 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. A reach random number counter C3 used for hit generation lottery, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS for determining the display duration time in the special figure display unit 37a and the pattern display device 41 are used. Furthermore, it is decided to use the general electric accessory open counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 is in the general electrical open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in a reserve storage area 65a provided as acquisition information storage means in the main side RAM 65 when a prize is won in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.

The pending storage area 65a comprises a pending area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3, and a fourth reservation area RE4, and a combination of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reservation information in one of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in accordance with the winning history of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, each numerical information is stored in the order of the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area RE2 → the third reservation area RE3 → the fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are retained and stored.

It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display part 37a, and at the start of one game round, a winning judgment is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the universal electrical role item release counter C4 will be described. For example, the general electric role item release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the general electric reservation area 65c of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric role item 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric role item opening counter C4.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the mode of support by the general electric role item 34a is different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of opening the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 per unit time becomes relatively high and low when compared in a situation where game balls are continued to be shot in the same manner in the game area PA.

In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electrical open state in the general electrical open lottery using the general electrical role opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5), but in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the general electrical role 34a is opened when the general electrical open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is set longer. In this case, when the common electric open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the common electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is set shorter than the one open time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (that is, the display duration of one time in the normal diagram display part 38a) is set shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation port 33 is higher than that of the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than that of the first operation port 33. When a winning to the second operation port 34 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are put out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls in his hand too much.

In addition, the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequent than the low-frequency support mode to become the general power open state per unit time is not limited to the above, and for example, it may be configured to increase the probability of winning the general power open state in the general power open lottery. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of reserved time (for example, time of variable display executed in the general diagram display unit 38a based on winning to the through gate 35) are prepared after one general electric open lottery is performed and the next general electric open lottery is performed, it may be set so that a short reserved time is more likely to be selected in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode, or the average reserved time is shorter. Furthermore, the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be enhanced by applying any one of the following conditions: increasing the number of opening times, lengthening the opening time, shortening the secured time secured after one electrical open lottery is performed and then performing the next electrical open lottery, shortening the average time of such secured time, and increasing the winning probability.

Here, as already described, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6", but the opening frequency and opening mode of the general electrical role 34a in the low frequency support mode are the same regardless of the setting value, and the opening frequency and opening mode of the general electrical role 34a in the high frequency support mode are also the same regardless of the setting value. However, it is not limited to this, and at least one of the opening frequency and opening mode of the general electric role 34a for at least one of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode may be configured to vary according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Good. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the opening frequency of the general electrical role 34a in the low-frequency support mode, or the higher the probability of a game ball entering the second operating port 34 when the general electrical role 34a is opened once in the low-frequency support mode. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the opening frequency of the general electric role 34a in the high frequency support mode, and the higher the probability of the game ball entering the second operation opening 34 when the general electric role 34a is opened once in the high frequency support mode.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation storage area 65a of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening .

The values of random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored in the main ROM 64 as a success/failure table. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64. As shown in FIG. Low-probability tables 64a to 64f for the low-probability mode and a high-probability table 64g for the high-probability mode are stored as the correctness tables.

The low certainty tables 64a to 64f are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". That is, the low accuracy table 64a for setting 1 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1", the low accuracy table 64b for setting 2 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2", the low accuracy table 64c for setting 3 to be referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3", and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 being "setting 4" There are a low accuracy table 64d for setting 4 to be referred to, a low accuracy table 64e for setting 5 to be referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5", and a low accuracy table 64f for setting 6 to be referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6".

These low probability tables 64a to 64f are set so that the higher the setting value, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result. Specifically, when the low-certainty table 64a for setting 1 is referred to, a jackpot result is about 1/320, when the low-certainty table 64b for setting 2 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/310, when the low-certainty table 64c for setting 3 is referred to, about 1/300, and when the low-certainty table 64d for setting 4 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/290. Thus, when the low certainty table 64e for setting 5 is referred to, a jackpot result is obtained at approximately 1/280, and when the low certainty table 64f for setting 6 is referred, a large winning result is obtained at approximately 1/270. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high setting value, it becomes easier for a large winning result to occur in the low-probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, the high certainty table 64g is provided with only one type so as to be common to any setting state of "setting 1" to "setting 6". The high-probability table 64g is set so that the winning probability of the jackpot results is higher than the low-probability tables 64a-64f in any setting state of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Specifically, when the high certainty table 64g is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/30. As a result, regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the high-probability mode can be made more advantageous than the low-probability mode. Further, even in the lowest setting state "setting 1", the high probability mode can be set to make the probability of a big winning result higher than the low probability mode of the highest setting state "setting 6". In addition, the high probability mode can be prevented from being advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and the storage capacity for pre-storing the high probability table 64g in the main side ROM 64 can be suppressed.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening .

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are set by providing differences in three conditions: (1) opening/closing control mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) lottery mode in the success/failure lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

A high frequency prize winning mode and a low frequency prize winning mode are set as modes of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode so that the frequency of occurrence of prizes to the special electric prize winning device 32 is relatively high or low during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, in both the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the round game is executed up to a predetermined number of times.

A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined upper limit continuous time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a special electric prize winning device 32.例文帳に追加In addition, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the big win is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of the result of the big win triggered by the shift. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of the jackpot result.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from opening to closing of the special electric prize winning device 32.例文帳に追加Specifically, a long time mode in which the open duration is set to 29 seconds, which is a long time, and a short time mode, in which the open duration is set to a short time shorter than the long time, 0.06 seconds, are set.

In the pachinko machine 10, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open continuation time is set to be longer than the product of the shooting cycle of the game ball and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, when the game is opened once in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric prize-winning device 32 will win the maximum number of prizes in one round game.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

The number of openings and closings of the special electric winning device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the open duration time for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are not limited to the above values and are arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning to the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode.

As shown in FIG. 8, the distribution destination of the jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table 64h. In the distribution table 64h, low-probability jackpot results, low-win high-probability jackpot results, and maximum-benefit jackpot results are set as jackpot results in the case of a jackpot result.

A low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize-winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition.

The result of the low-prize high-probability jackpot is the result of the opening/closing execution mode becoming the low-frequency prize-winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success/failure lottery results in a big-hit state winning, and the game shifts to a big-hit state.

The maximum profit jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success/failure lottery results in a big-hit state winning, and the game shifts to a big-hit state.

In relation to each game state described above, the normal game state is not the open/close execution mode, but the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In addition, as the game result, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the low winning high probability jackpot result is not set. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode in the low winning high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be less than in the case of the low probability jackpot result and the maximum profit jackpot result.

In the distribution table 64h, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of ``0 to 29'', ``0 to 9'' correspond to the results of the low-probability jackpot, ``10 to 14'' correspond to the results of the low-prize winning, high-probability jackpot, and ``15 to 29'' correspond to the results of the maximum profit jackpot.

Only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so as to be common to any of the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from producing an advantage or a disadvantage in the way of distributing the result of the big win, and it is possible to suppress the memory capacity for pre-storing the distribution table 64h in the main side ROM 64.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the distribution mode of the jackpot result is different according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 . For example, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of being assigned to the maximum advantageous jackpot result, or the higher the set value, the higher the probability of being assigned to the maximum advantageous jackpot result or the low winning high probability jackpot result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of entering the high-probability mode after a big win. Further, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of being distributed to the low winning high probability jackpot result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加In a game machine having a pattern display device 41 capable of performing variable display of patterns, and in a game cycle that results in a predetermined big win, the final stop result is a grant correspondence result, and the expected performance refers to a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the grant correspondence result in a stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display of the symbols on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁Concretely, a combination of symbols having the same number on any of the activated lines is stopped and displayed for the award correspondence result.

There are two types of expectation effects: a ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the occurrence of the grant correspondence result in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

The ready-to-win display includes a display state in which a combination of ready-to-win patterns is displayed by stopping and displaying the patterns of some of the plurality of pattern rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and in this state, patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner. In addition, in a state where the ready-to-win pattern combination is displayed as described above, patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform a ready-to-win effect. Alternatively, a ready-to-win effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after the combination of the ready-to-win symbols is displayed in a reduced size or not displayed.

The advance notice display includes a mode of displaying a character separately from the patterns on the pattern row in a situation where the patterns are variably displayed in all the pattern rows after the fluctuation display of the patterns is started on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, or in a situation where the patterns are variably displayed in a plurality of pattern rows in a part of the pattern rows. It also includes a background screen in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern row in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such advance notice display can occur in any game cycle when the ready-to-win display is performed and when the ready-to-win display is not performed, but is set to occur with a higher probability when the ready-to-win display is performed than when not to be performed.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in game rounds in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Also, in a game cycle corresponding to a big hit result in which the same combination of symbols is not stop-displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Also, in the game round corresponding to the result of losing, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 is executed when the reach display corresponds to the generation of the reach display.

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission control device 81 . In this case, the sound emission control device 81 executes lottery processing for notice display so as to satisfy at least one condition that the notice display is more likely to occur in the game round corresponding to one of the big winning results than the game round corresponding to the result of losing, or that the notice display with a low appearance rate is more likely to occur. Incidentally, the result of the lottery is reflected when the symbol display device 41 executes an effect for a game cycle.

Here, the probability of occurrence of the ready-to-win display in game rounds resulting in a loss is the same regardless of the setting state of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from giving an advantage or a disadvantage with respect to the probability of occurrence of the ready-to-win display in game rounds resulting in a loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the set value, the higher the probability of occurrence of the ready-to-win display in game rounds that result in an error.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main side CPU 63 determines the display continuation time in the special figure display unit 37a and the display continuation time of the design in the design display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the special figure display unit 37a and at the start of variation in the design by the design display device 41.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 can be roughly classified into main processing that is activated upon power-on and timer interrupt processing that is periodically activated (at 4 millisecond cycles in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the start of operation and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102).

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on (step S103). If the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned ON (step S103: NO), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S104). When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S104: YES), each area of the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main side RAM 65, and the area cleared to "0" is initialized (step S105). That is, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while pressing the reset button 68c without turning ON the setting key inserting part 68a, the main side RAM 65 is cleared while maintaining the state before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and the memory area where the clearing process is performed is initialized. As a result, other areas of the main RAM 65 can be initialized without changing the set values. In step S105, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also initialized after being cleared to "0".

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S104: NO), it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S106). A power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 65, and when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation result matches the checksum saved when the power was shut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S107). When the process of step S105 is executed, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S107, it is determined whether or not the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by confirming the main side RAM 65 (step S108). Specifically, if the setting value is any one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal.

When a negative determination is made in any of steps S106 to S108, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after executing an error notification process for notifying the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S109), an infinite loop occurs. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the all clear process (step S117), which will be described later.

If affirmative determinations are made in all steps S106 to S108, power-on setting processing is executed (step S110). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 65 is set to an initial value such as initialization of a power failure flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Further, after executing the processing of step S110, recognition processing (step S111) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and data output processing for outputting various data to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62 are executed (step S112). The details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when the main processing is started. The state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S112 is completed and the process of step S113 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S112 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S113 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 does not start the process for advancing the game until the relevant situation is reached.

After that, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps S113 to S116. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S113 to S116 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, the remaining processes of steps S113 to S116 can be said to be non-periodic processes that are executed non-periodically.

In the remaining process, first, in step S113, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S114, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S115, a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, they are cleared to "0" when the counter value exceeds the maximum value. After that, in step S116, an interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. When the process of step S116 has been executed, the process returns to step S113, and the processes of steps S113 to S116 are repeated.

On the other hand, when the setting key insertion part 68a is ON-operated (step S103: YES), all the areas of the main side RAM 65 are cleared to "0", including the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main side RAM 65, and the area cleared to "0" is initialized (step S117). That is, when the operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, all the areas of the main side RAM 65 are cleared to "0" even if the reset button 68c is not pressed, and the memory area subjected to the clear processing is initialized. In step S117, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also initialized after being cleared to "0". It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and even when an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is being performed, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, the all clear processing of the main side RAM 65 is not executed, and the all clear processing is executed when the operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is being performed and the reset button 68c is being pressed.

After that, in step S118, the setting value update process is executed, and in step S119, the output process of the setting value update signal is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S110. The set value update process will be described below. The output processing of the set value update signal will be described later in detail. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the set value update process.

First, "1" is set in the set value counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S201). The setting value counter is a counter for specifying which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is by the main side CPU 63 . By setting "1" to the set value counter, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point when the set value update process is executed.

After that, a set value display start process is executed (step S202). In the setting value display start process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number "1" corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed. The manager of the game hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by confirming the third notification display device 69c when changing the setting value.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned off (step S203: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S204, the process returns to step S203 to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204: YES), 1 is added to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S205). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S206: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S207). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to be one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

When a negative determination is made in step S206, or when the process of step S207 is executed, the setting value display update process is executed (step S208). In the set value display update process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main side RAM 65 is displayed. By confirming the third notification display device 69c, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process of step S208, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S203: NO), the processing after step S204 is executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S203: YES), the setting value display termination process is executed (step S209). In the setting value display end processing, the display of the setting values on the third notification display device 69c is ended.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

First, power failure information storage processing is executed (step S301). In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of the power failure is specified, an infinite loop occurs after the power failure processing is executed. In the power failure process, the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S302). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electrical role release counter C4, and after executing the processing of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, the processing of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, they are cleared to "0" when the counter value exceeds the maximum value. After that, in step S303, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S114, and in step S304, variation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S115.

After that, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S305). In the fraud detection process, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred. In the subsequent step S306, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S306, the processes after step S307 are executed.

In step S307, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the driving signal to the driving part 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set, the output of the driving signal is stopped. In addition, when the information for switching the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the driving signal to the general electric driving part 34b is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set, the output of the driving signal is stopped.

After that, read processing is executed (step S308). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S309). In the ball-entering detection process, signals received from the ball-entering detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the reading results, the presence or absence of a ball entering the out-port 24a, the general prize-winning port 31, the special electric prize-winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 is specified. Details of the ball-entering detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer update process is executed for collectively updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 (step S310). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively.

After that, a shooting control process for controlling shooting of game balls is executed (step S311). In a situation where the shooting operation to the shooting operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is shot in 0.6 seconds, which is a predetermined shooting cycle. In the following step S312, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S308, disconnection confirmation of each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed.

After that, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game round and execution control of the opening and closing execution mode is executed (step S313). Special figure special electric control processing is explained in detail later.

After that, the general map general electric control process is executed (step S314). In the general pattern/general electric control processing, processing for acquiring reservation information on the general pattern side is executed when winning to the through gate 35 is generated, and when the reservation information on the general pattern side is stored, open determination is made for the reservation information, and further, processing for performance for the general pattern is executed with the open determination as a trigger. Moreover, based on the result of open determination, the process which opens and closes the universal electrical accessory 34a of the 2nd operation|movement opening 34 is performed. In this case, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Further, when the opening/closing execution mode is selected, the low-frequency support mode is set even if the immediately preceding support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

In the subsequent step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S313 and step S314, output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information pertaining to the special figure display unit 37a to the special figure pending display unit 37b, along with setting the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information related to the normal figure display unit 38a to the normal figure pending display unit 38b. Also, in step S315, based on the processing results of steps S313 and step S314 just before, output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a is set, and the output information for updating the display contents of the normal figure display unit 38a is set.

After that, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and payout state reception processing for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S316). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S317). Also, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S318). Thereafter, a management output process for outputting information corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S319). Details of the management output process will be described later.

Next, the special figure special electric control process of step S313 is demonstrated, referring the flowchart of FIG.

First, a hold information acquisition process is executed (step S401). In the reservation information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, and if a prize has been won, it is determined whether the number of reservations in the reservation storage area 65a is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). When the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, the number of reservations is incremented by 1, and each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S302 is stored in the first reservation area among the empty reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE. In addition, when winning to the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 occurs at the same time, the process for acquiring the above-described pending information is executed multiple times within the range where the process for acquiring the pending information is executed once. Also, when the hold information is newly acquired, a command at the time of acquisition corresponding to it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . When receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of pieces of pending information on the pattern display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the increase of the pending information.

After that, the information of the special special electric counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S402), and the special special electric address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S403). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is obtained from the special figure special electric address table (step S404), and jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address among the processes of steps S406 to S412 (step S405). The special special electric counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the various processes of steps S406 to S412 should be executed, and the special special electric address table corresponds to the numerical information of the special special electric counter, and the start address of the program for executing the processing of steps S406 to S412 is set.

In step S406, special figure fluctuation start processing is executed. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the special figure variation start process.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, on condition that the number of pieces of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE is 1 or more (step S501: YES), data setting processing is executed (step S502). In the data setting process, first, the number of reservations is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas RE1 to RE4 to the lower area side. More specifically, after shifting the data in each area such as the second reservation area RE2 → the first reservation area RE1, the third reservation area RE3 → the second reservation area RE2, the fourth reservation area RE4 → the third reservation area RE3, the fourth reservation area RE4 is cleared to "0". At this time, a shift command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 for recognizing that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. When receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of pieces of pending information on the pattern display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the decrease of the pending information.

After executing the data setting process, the right/wrong table is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). Specifically, first, the current winning/failing lottery mode is grasped by reading information indicating the winning/failure lottery mode from the main RAM 65 . In the case of the high probability mode, the high probability table 64g is read from the main side ROM64. On the other hand, in the low probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is grasped by reading the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65 . Then, the low accuracy tables 64a to 64f corresponding to the comprehended setting values are read from the main ROM 64. FIG.

Thereafter, the success/failure determination processing is executed with reference to the success/failure tables 64a to 64g read out in step S503 (step S504). In the success/failure determination process, the information for success/failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1 is set in the success/failure tables 64a to 64g read in step S503.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S505: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S506). In the distribution determination process, out of the information stored in the execution area AE, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information relating to the jackpot type counter C2 is read. Then, referring to the distribution table 64h provided in the main ROM 64, it specifies which jackpot result the numerical information related to the read jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to. Specifically, it specifies which one of the low probability jackpot result, the low prize winning high probability jackpot result, and the maximum profit jackpot result corresponds.

After that, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S507). Specifically, the information of the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display part 37a in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main side ROM 64, and the specified information is written in the main side RAM 65.例文帳に追加In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the form of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

After that, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S508). Specifically, the main side RAM 65 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result, and in step S508, among the flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result, "1" is set to the flag corresponding to the result of distribution determination processing in step S506.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S509). Specifically, the information of the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display part 37a in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the outlier result stored in advance in the main side ROM 64, and the specified information is written in the main side RAM 65.例文帳に追加The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After executing the process of either step S508 or step S509, the process of grasping the duration of the game round is executed (step S510). In this process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Also, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is the result of the low-probability jackpot or the result of the maximum profit jackpot, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. In addition, when neither of the jackpot results is obtained and the numerical information relating to the ready-to-win random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it is determined that a ready-to-win display occurs.

When it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs, a continuous period table for ready-to-win occurrence generation stored in the main side ROM 64 is referred to, and the duration of the game cycle corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ready-to-win display does not occur, a continuous period table for non-to-win-win occurrence stored in the main side ROM 64 is referred to, and the continuous period of the game cycle corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Incidentally, the duration of the game times that can be obtained by referring to the non-reach duration table is different from the duration of the game times that can be obtained by referring to the duration table for reach occurrence.

It should be noted that the continuation period of the game round when the ready-to-win situation does not occur is set so that the continuation period of the game round becomes shorter as the number of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE increases. In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, compared with the case where the number of reservation information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the continuation period table for non-reach is set so that a shorter continuation period of game rounds is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the duration of the game cycle does not change according to the number of pieces of pending information or the support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the continuation period of the game cycle when reach occurs. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, the duration table may be set individually for each of the case of the loss reach and the case of the loss result of no reach. In this case, the continuation period of the game round is distributed according to each game result.

After that, the information of the duration of the game round acquired in step S510 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S511). The update of the numerical information set in the special special electric timer counter is executed in the timer update process (step S310). By the way, as an effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a and the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 are performed, but when each of these variable displays is finished, the final stop display is performed over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a state where the stop result of the game round is displayed (a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the active line in the pattern display device 41). In this case, the duration of the game round acquired in step S510 is the total time for one game round.

After that, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S512). The variation command includes information on the duration of game rounds. Here, as described above, the duration of the game round acquired by referring to the non-reach duration table is different from the duration of the game round acquired by referring to the reach occurrence duration table. Therefore, even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not the reach occurs, the sound emission control device 81 can specify whether or not the reach occurs from the information on the duration of the game round. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach occurs. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach occurrence. Also, the type command includes information on the game result.

When the voice emission control device 81 receives the variation command and the type command from the main side CPU 63, the display emission section 53, the speaker section 54 and the pattern display device 41 execute the effect for the game round. In this case, the effect for the game round is performed in a mode corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command. In addition, the pattern display device 41 carries out variable display of patterns as a performance for the game cycle, and when the performance for the game cycle ends, the combinations of symbols corresponding to the results of win/fail determination processing and allocation determination processing are stopped and displayed.

Then, the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display part 37a is started (step S513). Then, 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter (step S514). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is "0", the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1". After that, the eleventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S515). The eleventh output flag is a flag for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that a game cycle has started to the management IC 66 .

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 52), in step S407, the special figure fluctuation processing is executed. In the special figure fluctuation process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing before the final stop display during the continuation time of the game cycle, and if it is before the final stop display, the process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display part 37a is executed. When the timing for final stop display comes, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 to update the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the one corresponding to the special figure fixing process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 63 does not send the final stop command to the sound emission control device 81 .

In step S408, processing during special figure determination is executed. In the process during special figure determination, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display section 37a is set to the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. Also, in the special figure finalizing process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and when the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs. When the transition to the opening/closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special special electric counter is cleared to "0". When the shift to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 to update the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special figure fixing process to the one corresponding to the special figure start processing.

In step S409, special electric start processing is executed. In the special electric start process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not yet been executed, the opening period setting process is executed. Also, an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Upon receiving the opening command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display emission section 53, the speaker section 54 and the pattern display device 41 to perform the opening effect. When the opening period has passed, a start process for starting the first round game is executed. In the start process, the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in an open state, and conditions for ending the round game are set. When setting the termination condition, the upper limit duration time for continuing the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open state in the first round game of this time is set, and the upper limit number of game balls that can win the prize of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the first round game of this time is set in a winning number counter provided in the main side RAM 65.例文帳に追加

In step S410, special electric open processing is executed. In the special electric open process, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is established. When the termination condition is established, the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. If the round game ended this time is not the last execution round game, the numerical information of the special electric counter is updated by adding 1 to the numerical information corresponding to the special electric closing processing, and if the round game ended this time is the last executing round game, the numerical information of the special electric counter is updated by adding 2 to the numerical information corresponding to the special electric electric end processing.

In step S411, processing during special electric closing is executed. In the special electric closing process, it is determined whether or not the interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set when the previous round game ends. When the interval period has passed, the special electric prize winning device 32 is put into an open state, and the end condition of the round game is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical value information of the special special electric counter, the numerical value information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing to the one corresponding to the special electric open processing.

In step S412, special electric end processing is executed. In the special electric end processing, when the processing for starting the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not yet been executed, the ending period (for example, 5 seconds) is set and the ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81.例文帳に追加By receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53, the speaker section 54 and the pattern display device 41 to execute the ending effect. When the ending period elapses, each of the success/failure lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set to a mode corresponding to the result of the big win that triggered the start of the opening/closing execution mode this time.

Next, the main side CPU 63, based on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34, and the configuration for specifying the presence or absence of the game ball entering the through gate 35 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a to the main side CPU 63. As shown in FIG.

The main side CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle 8 types of signals simultaneously. Areas for storing "0" or "1" information according to the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7. In addition, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is switched through switching control by the driver IC in order to limit the targets to be input simultaneously to eight types.

In the entering ball detection process (step S309) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. In this setting, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the first bit D1 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the fourth bit. D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working opening detection sensor 46a, fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working opening detection sensor 47a, sixth bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

Each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating non-detection as a detection signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected, and outputs a HI level signal indicating that detection is being performed as the detection signal when the passage of the game ball is detected. When the input port 63a receives a LOW level signal, it stores "0" information in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HI level signal, it stores "1" information in the corresponding bit. That is, in a situation where the passage of the game ball is not detected by the entering detection sensors 42a to 49a, '0' information corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and in the situation in which the passage of the game ball is detected, '1' information corresponding to the information indicating the detection is stored in the corresponding bit.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S309 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 is switched to the state in which the information "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a (step S601: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S602), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S603). The first output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a should be output to the management IC 66. The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and when the 10 prize ball command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state where the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the state where the information of "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a (step S604: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S605), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S606). The second output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a should be output to the management IC 66.

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S607: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S608), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S609). The third output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a should be output to the management IC 66.

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 changes from the state where the information of "0" is stored to the state where the information of "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S610: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S611), the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S612), and the value of the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S613). The special electric prize flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game in the open/close execution mode. In the special electric prize control processing (step S313) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), by confirming that the special electric prize winning flag is set to "1", it is specified that one game ball has entered the special electric prize winning device 32, and 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of balls that can enter the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game. When the process of subtracting 1 from the possible number of winning balls is executed, the special electric winning prize flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be output to the management IC 66. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 15 game balls should be executed. When the value of the 15 ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and when the 15 ball command is output once, the value of the 15 ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state where the information of "0" is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the state where the information of "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a (step S614: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S615), the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S616), and the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S617). The first operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 that one game ball has entered the first operation opening 33 . In the special figure special electric control processing (step S313) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), by confirming that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", the number of pieces of pending information stored in the pending area RE of the pending storage area 65a is less than 4, which is the upper limit number. In the special electric special electric control processing (step S313), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". The fifth output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operating opening detection sensor 46a should be output to the management IC 66. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. When the value of the one-ball counter is 1 or more, the one-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and when the one-ball command is output once, the value of the one-ball counter is subtracted by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from "0" information to "1" information, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operating opening detection sensor 47a (step S618: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S619), the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S620), and the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S621). The second operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 that one game ball has entered the second operation opening 34 . In the special figure special electric control processing (step S313) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", the number of pieces of pending information stored in the pending area RE of the pending storage area 65a is less than 4, which is the upper limit number. It is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1" in the special electric special electric control processing (step S313), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". The sixth output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a should be output to the management IC 66.

When it is confirmed that the state where information "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the state where information "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S622: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S623). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the state in which information "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S624: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S625). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35 . By confirming that "1" is set to the gate winning prize flag in the normal diagram general electric control process (step S314) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the number of the general diagram side reservation information stored in the general electric reservation area 65c is less than 4, which is the upper limit number. It is confirmed that "1" is set to the gate winning flag in the general/universal electric control processing (step S314), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

In addition, since the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started at a period of 4 milliseconds as already explained, when the detection of one game ball is started by one of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main side CPU 63 specifies that one game ball is detected by the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a while the detection of the one game ball is continued by the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

Next, the contents of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices communicating with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The payout control device 77 has an MPU 91 . The MPU 91 incorporates a payout side CPU 92, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, as well as a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 92 .

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM that requires external power supply for memory retention (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The payout-side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and has a faster read time than the payout-side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93 .

The payout side CPU 92 can perform two-way communication with the main side CPU 63 . When the payout side CPU 92 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. In addition, the CPU 92 on the payout side monitors whether or not the game balls can be put out normally, and when it is specified that the state cannot be put out normally, the CPU 92 on the putout side stops the putout device 76 even in a situation where the information on the number of prize balls not put out is stored in the RAM 94 on the putout side. Also, the payout CPU 92 transmits to the main CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that the payout cannot be performed normally. When receiving the payout restriction command, the main side CPU 63 transmits a notification command to the sound light emission control device 81 so that the symbol display device 41, the display light emission part 53 and the speaker part 54 execute the notification indicating that the game balls cannot be normally paid out. As states in which the game balls cannot be normally put out, there are a full state in which the lower tray 56a is full of game balls, a no ball state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with game balls, an abnormal payout state in which the payout device 76 does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the game machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13.

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a. A payout side CPU 92 specifies that the full tank state is reached when the full tank detecting sensor continuously detects the game balls, and specifies that the full tank state is canceled when the full tank detecting sensor cancels the state in which the game balls are continuously detected.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76 , and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92 . A put-out side CPU 92 specifies the no-ball state when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball no-detection sensor, and specifies that the no-ball state is canceled when the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the no-ball detection sensor is cancelled.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76 , and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. The put-out side CPU 92 specifies that the put-out abnormal state is canceled when the put-out detecting sensor does not continue to detect the game balls in spite of driving and controlling the put-out device 76 so that the game balls are put out, and the put-out abnormal state is canceled when the put-out detecting sensor cancels the state in which the game balls are not continuously detected.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92 . In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closed detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and when the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. A payout side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in a closed state when receiving a closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in an open state when receiving an opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95.例文帳に追加Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing specified that the front door frame 14 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and transmits the front door closing command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing specified that the front door frame 14 is changed from the open state to the closed state. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door open command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the front door closing command.

A main body open sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92 . In this case, when the game machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closed detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and when the game machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 sends an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. A payout side CPU 92 specifies that the game machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closed detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and specifies that the game machine main body 12 is in the open state when receiving the open detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96.例文帳に追加In addition, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing specified that the game machine body 12 changes from the closed state to the open state, and transmits the body closing command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing specified that the game machine body 12 changes from the open state to the closed state. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when receiving the main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the main body closing command.

The timer interrupt processing executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 17 . The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds).

First, the full-tank process is executed (step S701). In the full-tank processing, as already explained, whether or not the tank is full is specified based on the detection result of the full-tank detection sensor, and when the tank is full, a process for stopping the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating the full-tank state is transmitted to the main side CPU 63. Further, when the full tank state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state has been canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

After that, a ball useless process is executed (step S702). In the no-ball processing, as already explained, whether or not there is no ball is specified based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor. Further, when the no-ball state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S703). In the abnormal payout monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the payout is in an abnormal state based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and in the case of the abnormal payout state, a process for stopping the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating the abnormal payout state is transmitted to the main side CPU 63. Further, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, front door opening monitoring processing is executed (step S704). In the front door opening monitoring process, as already explained, it is specified whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95, and when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the game ball payout is stopped and the front door opening command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, main body opening monitoring processing is executed (step S705). In the main body opening monitoring process, as already described, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, a process of stopping the payout of game balls is executed, and a main body opening command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, command reading processing is executed (step S706). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted by the main side CPU 63 is executed, and the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94 . Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the undistributed prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S707), a payout control process for performing execution control of the payout of game balls by the payout device 76 is executed (step S708). In the payout control process, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled when the unpaid ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, and the value of the prize ball number information is subtracted by 1 when one game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the driving control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, external information setting processing is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processing executed in the current timer interrupt processing (step S709).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97 . The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are a plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and some of which are a plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal plate 97, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 can output information to the hall computer HC as shown in FIG.

One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95 and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96 . More specifically, a signal relay board 98 is provided in the middle of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92 . The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 directed from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal plate 97 for opening the front door. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97 . As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without going through the control by the payout side CPU 92 .

More specifically, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 extending from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92 . The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal plate 97 for opening the main body. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the body on the external terminal plate 97 . This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without intervention of the control by the payout side CPU 92 .

Next, the contents of the information externally output from the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the content of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

The main CPU 63 performs information output setting to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S318) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). Information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal plate 97 includes information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, information indicating that one game cycle has ended, and information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls have been discharged from the game area PA through any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34; Information indicating that a game ball has entered the first operating port 33 and information indicating that a game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included.

The payout side CPU 92 performs information output setting to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S709) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). Information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal plate 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the manner in which game balls are put out in the pachinko machine 10 according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97 . for example,
- Ball payout ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game balls that have been discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 until 100 game balls are discharged -Ball payout ratio in the normal game state other than the opening/closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode (hereafter, this ball payout ratio is referred to as "B")
- Ball output rate in open/close execution mode - Ball output rate in high frequency support mode - Number of game rounds executed until 100 game balls are ejected from game area PA of pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S")
・ BS x “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34”
・The number of game balls entering the first operation opening 33 until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
- The number of game balls entering the second operation opening 34 until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
・B-(S1דNumber of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33”+S2דNumber of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34”)
・Probability of occurrence of opening/closing execution mode per unit game time ・Probability of occurrence of high-frequency support mode per unit game time, etc. are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls means the number of game balls paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry portion.

<Structure for managing winning modes of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. FIG. In addition to these, the MPU 62 has an I/F 101 as well as the already-described reading terminal 68d.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from equipment outside the MPU 62 . The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63 via the internal bus 103 . Through the input port of the I/F 101, detection results from sensors such as the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, commands from the payout side CPU 92, etc. are input to the MPU 62, and based on the input detection results and command contents, the main side CPU 63 executes various processes as already described. In addition, as a result of executing various processes in the main CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the drive unit 32b for special electric power, the signal is output through the output port of the I/F 101. When a command is output to the payout CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81 as a result of executing various processes in the main CPU 63, the command is outputted through the output port of the I/F 101.

The management IC 66 includes a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, a history memory 117, and a calculation result memory 131. These devices are connected through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be bidirectionally communicable.

The management side I/F 111 is an interface for receiving various signals from the main side CPU 63 via a signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 68d via a signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. Various signals from the main side CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 68d are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111. FIG. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d via a signal path group 120 for two-way communication built in the MPU 62. FIG.

The management-side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management-side ROM 113 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside for storing data such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The management-side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management-side CPU 112 . The management-side RAM 114 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside for storage (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and has a shorter time required for reading than the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113 .

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, which constantly measures year/month/day information and time information and can output the measured year/month/day information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date/time information) in accordance with an instruction from the management side CPU 112. In addition, the RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold data, and is used for both reading and writing. Correspondence memory 116 is used to store information on correspondence between buffers 122a to 122p provided at input port 121 of management side I/F 111 and types of signals input to buffers 122a to 122p. The details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

The history memory 117 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require power supply from the outside (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding game history received from the main side CPU 63 through the management side I/F 111 . The details of the contents of history memory 117 will be described later.

The calculation result memory 131 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside to hold data such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The calculation result memory 131 is used to sequentially store various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 using history information stored in the history memory 117 . The contents of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c and output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. As shown in FIG.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a-122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through signal paths 118a to 118p. Each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p stores "0" information as the first data when the signal to be input is at the LOW level, and stores "1" information as the second data when the signal to be input is at the HI level. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the first signal of LOW level when the first winning hole detection sensor 42a does not detect a new game ball, and outputs the first signal of HI level over a specific period when one game ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal of HI level is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the second signal of LOW level when the second winning hole detecting sensor 43a does not detect a new game ball, and outputs the second signal of HI level over a specific period when one game ball is detected by the second winning hole detecting sensor 43a. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the second signal of HI level is input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the third signal of LOW level when the third winning hole detecting sensor 44a does not detect a new game ball, and outputs the third signal of HI level over a specific period when one game ball is detected by the third winning hole detecting sensor 44a. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when no new game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and outputs a HI level fourth signal for a specific period when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal of HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, and outputs a HI level fifth signal over a specific period when one game ball is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal of HI level is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when no new game ball is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a, and outputs a HI level sixth signal over a specific period when one game ball is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the sixth buffer 122f is receiving the HI level sixth signal.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the seventh signal of LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, and outputs the seventh signal of HI level over a specific period when one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth buffer 122h receives an eighth signal corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in progress. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level eighth signal in the non-opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in the opening/closing execution mode.

The ninth buffer 122i receives a ninth signal corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is set.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continuously outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open.

An eleventh signal corresponding to whether or not a game round has been started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eleventh signal until the game starts, and outputs the HI level eleventh signal for a specific period when the game starts. This specified period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the 11th signal of HI level is input to the 11th buffer 122k.

A set value update signal is inputted to the fifteenth buffer 122o to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set by the main side CPU 63. FIG. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level setting value update signal when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not newly set, and outputs a number of pulse signals corresponding to the newly set setting value in which the HI level setting value update signal is maintained over a specific period when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to identify that the HI level set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

An output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p to cause the management side CPU 112 to recognize the trigger for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when the history information does not need to be output, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when the history information needs to be output. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the 16th buffer 122p is receiving the HI level output instruction signal.

The twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m and the fourteenth buffer 122n can receive signals from the main side CPU 63, but in the pachinko machine 10, they are blank to which normal signals cannot be input. As the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, the number of buffers 122a to 122p larger than the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided in the pachinko machine 10, so that the management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 . Incidentally, the signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one with the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p.

The input of the set value update signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the input of the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p are determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management CPU 112 can specify that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p without receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are specified by the management side CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main side CPU 63. The types of these signals are specified by the management side CPU 112, which will be described later in detail, by transmitting a type identification command from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 when control is started in the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 as the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and the information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to when the management side CPU 112 specifies the types of the various signals under the condition that the operating power is supplied.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. As shown in FIG. The correspondence memory 116 is provided with first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided at the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. FIG.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is the general prize winning port 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating the number of game balls (10) to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 is stored together with the information indicating the general winning hole 31.例文帳に追加In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the number of game balls (10) to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize winning opening 31 is stored together with information indicating the general winning opening 31.例文帳に追加In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the number of game balls (10) to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize winning opening 31 is stored together with information indicating the general winning opening 31.例文帳に追加

In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d by the management CPU 112. FIG. In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating the special electric prize winning device 32 and information of the number of game balls paid out when one game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32 (15 pieces) are stored. Information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the first operating port 33 and information (one) on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 are stored. Information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the number of game balls (one) to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation opening 34 is stored together with information indicating that it is the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加Information indicating the output port 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

Information indicating the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h by the management CPU 112. FIG. Information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. Information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j. The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information indicating the start of a game round as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any kind of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them is stored. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that it is blank and does not correspond to any of the types of signals input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n.

As described above, the types of signals to be input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are specified by the management side CPU 112 upon receiving an instruction from the main side CPU 63, so that the management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

In addition, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, information for recognizing the type of the signal is output in advance, and information for specifying the type of the signal to be input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management side CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information output from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 each time a signal is output, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of signal is output each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

Information for identifying the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is output by the management CPU 112 at the start of supply of operating power. As a result, when a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, the management side CPU 112 can specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

Further, information setting indicating that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and information setting indicating that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are performed in the design stage of the management IC 66. FIG. As a result, it is possible to omit the processing for specifying the types of signals to be input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the sixteenth buffer 122p for the setting value update signal and the output instruction signal to be reliably used not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other types of pachinko machines using the management IC 66.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing for specifying the type of such signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be explained. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the structure of the history memory 117. As shown in FIG.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set with serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set corresponding to each piece of pointer information on a one-to-one basis. The history information storage area 125 can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing correspondence information. When it becomes necessary to store the correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n (actually the first to eleventh buffers 122a to 122k in the case of the pachinko machine 10), first, the date and time information measured by the current RTC 115 is stored in the area for storing the RTC information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the current pointer information to be written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be currently written.

Specifically, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, so that the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the types of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of ball entry corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a are all for detecting game balls entering the general winning hole 31, so that the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a store information indicating that all of them are the general winning hole 31. Further, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32, the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operating opening 33, the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating opening 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the outlet 24a. If the buffer 122a-122n that triggered the current information storage is any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a-122g, the information on the type of ball entry corresponding to that buffer 122a-122g is read from any one of the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a-123g, and the read information on the type of ball entry is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 as it is. be done.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is on, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether or not the high-frequency support mode is on, the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open, and the eleventh buffer 122k receives a signal indicating whether or not a game cycle has started. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the open/close execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating the high-frequency support mode, the tenth correspondence area 123j stores information indicating the front door frame 14, and the eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information indicating the game cycle.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level eighth signal in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in a situation in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the management side CPU 112 can identify that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and can identify that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. When the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 identifies that a trigger for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read out from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information are stored together in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125.例文帳に追加When the eighth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read out from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information are stored together in an area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125.例文帳に追加

As described above, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is set. Therefore, the management CPU 112 can identify that the high frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and can identify that the high frequency support mode has ended when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. When the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 identifies that the opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high-frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information are stored together in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125.例文帳に追加When the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating the high-frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information are stored together in an area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125.例文帳に追加

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continuously outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. It becomes possible to specify that the frame 14 is closed. When the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 identifies that a trigger for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored together in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125.例文帳に追加When the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together in an area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125.例文帳に追加

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eleventh signal until the game round start timing, and outputs the HI level eleventh signal for a specific period when the game round start timing comes. Therefore, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that a game cycle has started when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level. That is, when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the information indicating the game round read from the eleventh correspondence area 123k is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125.

A history information storage area 125 is provided for several minutes so as to be able to store all the history information generated during ten business days in which game balls are continuously shot from the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, the history information storage area 125 for 600,000 or more pieces is provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least ten days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 separately from the history area 124 . The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify the pointer information currently being written in the history memory 117 . Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information designating the pointer information of "0" to be written. Then, each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the pointer information in the last order is to be written and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the pointer information of "0" is to be written. As a result, when a trigger for storing history information is generated exceeding the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which the old history information is stored.

Further, when the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the external device, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to "0" and the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the pointer information of "0" is written. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information that has been read once from being read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing recognition processing executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9).

First, "14" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S801). The recognition output counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining required number of information outputs for making the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the management I/F 111 correspond to. As already explained, 14 of the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are subject to signal type recognition, so "14" is set in the recognition output counter.

Thereafter, an identification start command output process is executed (step S802). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 to make the management CPU 112 recognize which kind of signals the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. The first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used for this command output. That is, by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information, a command is output to make the management side CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced and the configuration can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the signal paths for outputting the command are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification start command output process, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. The period during which the identification start command and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. By receiving the identification start command, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 should be started.

Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S803). In this case, the signal type recognition setting corresponding to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is performed so that the first buffer 122a is the first to be set for the signal type, and then the n+1th buffer is to be the next to the n+1th buffer. Therefore, if the output counter for recognition is "14" to "12", it is the general winning hole 31 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read. If the output counter for recognition is "11", it is the special electric prize winning device 32 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read. If the output counter for recognition is "8", read the type identification command indicating the outlet 24a; if the output counter for recognition is "7", read the type identification command indicating the open/close execution mode; if the output counter for recognition is "6", read the type identification command indicating the high frequency support mode; , a type identification command indicating blank is read if the recognition output counter is "3" to "1".

After that, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S804). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification type command output process, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification type command so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. The period during which the identification type command and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. By receiving the identification type command, the management side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the identification type command in the correspondence area 123a-123n corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a-122n.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S805), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement of 1 is "0" (step S806). When the value of the output counter for recognition is 1 or more (step S806: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the output counter for recognition after subtracting 1 is executed (steps S803 and S804).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S806: YES), output processing of an identification end command is executed (step S807). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification end command output process, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification end command in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. The period during which the identification end command and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. By receiving the identification end command, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed.

Next, the management processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is higher than that of the main side CPU 63, and the combination of the processing after step S908 in the management processing is executed 16 times or more after one time timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started in the main side CPU 63 before the next timer interruption processing (FIG. 11) is started.

First, it is determined whether or not an identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S901). If the identification start command has not been received (step S901: NO), after executing the setting update recognition process (step S902), the process returns to step S901. In the setting update recognition process, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by the main side CPU 63, the corresponding process is executed, although the details will be described later.

When the identification start command is received from the main side CPU 63 (step S901: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S903). The setting target counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffers 122a to 122n for which the type of signal is to be set. The signal type of the first buffer 122a is set first, and then the signal type of the (n+1)th buffer is set after the nth buffer.

Thereafter, on condition that the type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S905). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n of the correspondence memory 116, the information of the signal type set in the type identification command received this time is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114. After that, 1 is added to the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 (step S906).

When a negative determination is made in step S904, or when the process of step S906 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907). If the identification end command has not been received (step S907: NO), the process returns to step S904, and on condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), the processing of steps S905 and S906 is executed again.

If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907: YES), the processing of steps S908 to S910 is repeatedly executed. In step S<b>908 , history setting processing for storing history information corresponding to the type of the signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed, the details of which will be described later. In step S909, although the details will be described later, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and display output processing for notifying the calculation results on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is performed. In step S910, although the details will be described later, an external output process is executed for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d.

FIG. 24 is a time chart showing how information on correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. FIG. 24(a) shows the period during which commands are output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), FIG. 24(b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is HI level, and FIG. FIG. 24D shows the timing of execution of the correspondence setting process (step S905) by the management side CPU 112. FIG.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the identification start command output using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 24(a). At the timing t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). After that, at timing t2 in which the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). A management side CPU 112 identifies that a command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level, and grasps the contents of the command received from the main side CPU 63 by confirming the information of the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S901 of the management processing (FIG. 23) to enter the identification state. After that, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

After that, at timing t4, output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 24(a). At the timing t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). After that, at timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and by confirming the information of the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h, the management side CPU 112 grasps the contents of the command received from the main side CPU 63. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 24(d). In the correspondence setting process, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information on the number of prize balls is stored in the first correspondence area 123 a of the correspondence memory 116 . After that, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

After that, at timing t7 to timing t9, timing t10 to timing t12, timing t13 to timing t15, and timing t16 to timing t18, similarly to timing t4 to timing t6, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the main CPU 63. In this case, the correspondence relationship setting process corresponding to the 14th type identification command is completed between timing t16 and timing t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 24(a), the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. At the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). After that, at the timing t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and by confirming the information of the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h, the management side CPU 112 grasps the contents of the command received from the main side CPU 63. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing t20 as shown in FIG. 24(c). After that, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

As described above, the management side CPU 112 is configured to recognize whether or not a command is being output using the ninth signal, so that the management side CPU 112 can be made to clearly recognize that a command is being output even in a configuration in which command output is performed using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store history information.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the management output process is executed at step S319 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, "11" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1001). The managed object counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to identify whether or not there is a managed object for which it is not specified whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process, and for the main side CPU 63 to identify for which managed object the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed. In one management output process, the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not to change the signal output state to the management side CPU 112. The management targets are seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, whether or not the open/close execution mode is executed, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed, whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened and closed, and whether or not the game cycle is started. Therefore, "11" is set to the managed counter first.

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current management target counter value is HI level (step S1002). If it is not HI level (step S1002: NO), by determining whether the value of the managed object counter is 5 or more, it is determined whether the managed object corresponding to the value of the managed object counter is one of the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a (step S1003).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1004). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "11" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1", when the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the management target counter is "9" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. If the value of the managed counter is "8" and corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, it is determined whether or not the fifth output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "6" and the second output flag is set. It is determined whether or not the sixth output flag is set to "1" when it corresponds to the operating port detecting sensor 47a, and it is determined whether or not the seventh output flag is set to "1" when the value of the managed counter is "5" and it corresponds to the out port 24a. As already described, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1004: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level (step S1005). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S1006).

If a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed to HI level (step S1007). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "4", it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening/closing execution mode has occurred, if the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether or not the transition to the high-frequency support mode has occurred, if the value of the managed counter is "2", it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and if the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether or not the eleventh output flag is set to "1". By judging, it is judged whether or not a game round has been started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to HI level (step S1008). When the value of the managed counter is "1" and the process of step S1008 is executed, the eleventh output flag is cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed to LOW level (step S1009). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is 5 or more or "1" and the current managed object is one of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a or the start of the game round, it is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 milliseconds) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals and the eleventh signal was switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI output continuation period is set by the management side CPU 112 to be longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S908) of the management process (FIG. 23), and is a period in which the management side CPU 112 can reliably specify the output state of the signal that has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When the value of the managed object counter is ``4'' and the current managed object is the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode has ended, when the value of the managed object counter is ``3'' and the current managed object is the high frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode has ended, and when the value of the managed object counter is ``2'' and the current managed object is the front door frame 14, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. If there is an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to LOW level (step S1009: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to LOW level (step S1010).

When a negative determination is made in step S1004, when the process of step S1006 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S1007, when the process of step S1008 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S1009, or when the process of step S1010 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the managed counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1012). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or more (step S1012: NO), the process after step S1002 is executed for the managed object corresponding to the new value of the managed object counter.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S908 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1101). Specifically, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the specified number of information is set in the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level by checking whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from "0" to "1" (step S1102). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122n are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "11", the 11th buffer 122k is the target of confirmation of numerical information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the target of confirmation of numerical information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1103). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1104). In the write processing, the pointer information of the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the RTC information read in step S1103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current check target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open/close execution mode, the information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123n becomes the read target of the correspondence information. For example, if the confirmation target counter value is "11", the correspondence information is read from the 11th correspondence area 123k, and if the confirmation target counter value is "5", the correspondence information is read from the fifth correspondence area 123e.

By executing the writing process as described above, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the game round, the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written is stored. Correspondence information indicating that it is one of the game rounds, and a combination of these are stored as history information. Further, when the value of the check target counter is any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written is in a state in which a combination of the RTC information, the correspondence relationship information indicating any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the start information is stored as history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1105). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. When the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, or if the process of step S1105 is executed, it is determined whether or not correspondence information to be checked as to whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level is stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current confirmation target counter value (step S1106). Specifically, when the current value of the check target counter is "8" to "10", the corresponding correspondence area 123h to 123j stores information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, information indicating the high-frequency support mode, or information indicating the front door frame 14, so an affirmative determination is made in step S1106.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from HI level to LOW level by checking whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from "1" to "0" (step S1107). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, the RTC information is read (step S1108) as in step S1103, and the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1109). In the write process, the RTC information read in step S1108 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current check target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, not only the correspondence relationship information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation object counter is any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written is in a state in which a combination of the RTC information, the correspondence relationship information indicating any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information. After that, similar to step S1105, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1110).

When a negative determination is made in step S1106, when a negative determination is made in step S1107, or when the process of step S1110 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S1111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1112). When the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S1112: NO), the process after step S1102 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 27(a) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to any one of the first to seventh, eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k, FIG. 27(b) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h, FIG. 27(c) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. is input, and FIG. 27(e) shows the timing of writing the history information to the history memory 117. FIG.

At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 27(a), the output state of the signal input to any one of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from LOW level to HI level. Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 27(e). After that, at the timing of t2, the signal that was switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 27(a). However, since this signal is input to any one of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and the switching of the LOW level is not an object to store the history information, the history information is not written at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 27(e).

After that, as shown in FIG. 27(a), the output state of the signal input to any one of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k is switched from LOW level to HI level at each of timing t3, timing t5, timing t6, timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, and timing t14. Accordingly, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 27(e).

As shown in FIG. 27(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the open/close execution mode is generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), history information is written at timing t4 at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to HI level and at timing t7 at which the output state of the signal switches to LOW level. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117 .

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the opening/closing execution mode. Also, since the history information includes the RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 27(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is HI level from timing t8 to timing t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high frequency support mode is generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the history information is written at timing t8 at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to HI level and at timing t11 at which the output state of the signal switches to LOW level. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. As a result, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode.

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the high frequency support mode. Also, since the history information includes the RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 27(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is HI level from timing t12 to timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the history information is written at timing t12, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to HI level, and at timing t15, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to LOW level. In this case, the history information written at timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t15 includes end information. Accordingly, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the opening of the front door frame 14. Also, since the history information includes the RTC information, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the opening of the front door frame 14 by comparing the RTC information.

Next, the output processing of the setting value update signal executed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set by the main side CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing output processing of the set value update signal executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. Note that output processing of the set value update signal is executed in step S119 in the main processing (FIG. 9).

A value corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is set in the pulse number counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S1201). Specifically, the value of the set value counter of the main side RAM 65 is set in the pulse number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting value update signal directed to the management side CPU 112 is at HI level (step S1202). As already explained, the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the IC 66 for management. Here, the output processing of the set value update signal is performed at a timing before the recognition processing, which is the processing for causing the management CPU 112 to identify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the main processing (FIG. 9). On the other hand, since the fact that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is set in the management IC 66 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, even if the output processing of the set value update signal is executed before the recognition processing, the management side CPU 112 can specify that the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is the set value update signal.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the value of the LOW level counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1203), and it is determined whether or not the value of the LOW level counter after the decrement of 1 is "0" (step S1204). The LOW level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not the set value update signal has been maintained at the LOW level for a predetermined period while the set value update signal is outputting a plurality of HI level pulses. If the value of the LOW level counter is "0" (step S1204: YES), it means that it is time to set the setting value update signal to HI level, so the setting value update signal is set to HI level (step S1205).

After that, the HI level counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "20" (step S1206). The HI level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the period during which the set value update signal is maintained at HI level. Since the value set in the HI level counter is decremented by 1 at intervals of about 10 microseconds, the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level for 200 microseconds when one pulse is output. This HI level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from LOW level to HI level.

If the setting value update signal is HI level (step S1202: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the HI level counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the HI level counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1208). If the value of the HI level counter is "0" (step S1208: YES), it means that it is time to set the setting value update signal to LOW level, so the setting value update signal is set to LOW level (step S1209).

After that, 1 is subtracted from the pulse number counter value of the main RAM 65 (step S1210), and it is determined whether or not the pulse number counter value after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1211). If the value of the pulse number counter is not "0" (step S1211: NO), it means that the output of the pulse signal by the setting value update signal for the number corresponding to the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time has not been completed, so the LOW level counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "20" (step S1212). Since the value set in the LOW level counter is decremented by 1 at intervals of about 10 microseconds, it is maintained at the LOW level for 200 microseconds between a plurality of pulse outputs by the set value update signal. This LOW level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from HI level to LOW level.

When the value of the pulse number counter is "0" (step S1211: YES), it means that the output of the pulse signal by the setting value update signal for the number corresponding to the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed, so the output processing of the setting value identification end command is executed (step S1213). The setting value identification end command is a command for making the management side CPU 112 recognize that the output of the setting value update signal for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. When outputting the set value identification end command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used in the same way as the identification start command, type identification command and identification end command. However, the signal pattern of the setting value identification end command is different from those of the identification start command, the type identification command and the identification end command.

As described above, in the setting value update signal output process, a pulse signal corresponding to the number of setting value update signals for the pachinko machine 10 set at the start of supply of operating power this time is output to the management IC 66. By executing the setting update recognition process, the management side CPU 112 grasps the number of pulse signals by the setting value update signal, and grasps the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time based on it.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a setting update recognition process executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the setting update recognition process is executed in step S902 of the management process (FIG. 23).

It is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level (step S1301). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", and if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S1303). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S1304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S1303 or if the process of step S1304 is executed, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121 (step S1305). If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the process returns to step S1303.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1306). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1307). In the write processing, the pointer information of the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the RTC information read in step S1306 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, both the information for identifying the set value and the information on the value of the set value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and information of the set value when the setting is performed is stored as history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1308). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. When the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set by executing the setting update recognition processing as described above, the fact that the setting is performed, the date and time when the setting is performed, and the combination of the setting values when the setting is performed are stored in the history area 124 as history information. As a result, by reading and analyzing the information stored in the history memory 117 using an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is possible to grasp the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was newly set and the content of the set value when the setting was performed.

Here, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information stored in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. As a result, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information in the history memory 117 can be prevented from being erased, and various parameters described later are calculated using the history information existing before and after the change timing of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加In this case, since the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is stored in the history memory 117 as described above, by connecting an external device to the reading terminal 68d and reading the information stored in the history memory 117, it becomes possible to calculate various parameters in the period after the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting state is maintained.

Next, the display output processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the display output process is executed in step S909 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, it is determined whether or not it is the calculation timing (step S1401). If 51 seconds have passed since the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 was started, or if 51 seconds have passed since the previous affirmative determination was made in step S1401, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the number of different types of ball hits during normal times is calculated (step S1402). Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 that store correspondence information indicating that the player is the out port 24a in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of balls entering the out port 24a is calculated. Also, the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 is calculated by counting the number of the history information storing area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117.例文帳に追加Also, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the special electric prize winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 is calculated. Also, the number of balls entering the first working opening 33 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first working opening 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. Also, the number of balls entering the second working opening 34 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second working opening 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117.

After that, by referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 that stores the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the history information storage area 125 that stores the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, and the special electric winning that occurred in the state where the front door frame 14 is open are referred to. The number of balls entered into each of the device 32, the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 is calculated (step S1403). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the period between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the end information is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information with serial numbers, when there are a plurality of sections between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the end information, the total number of balls entered in the sections is calculated. Also, if the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information exists, but the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the end information are not stored in the history information storage area 125 storing the RTC information corresponding to the time later than the history information storage area 125, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information. All the history information stored in the history information storage area 125 are treated as those in the open state of the front door frame 14 .

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1402 and S1403 (step S1404). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1403 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1402. Then, the following 1st to 8th parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entering the outlet 24a calculated in step S1403 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1402 is defined as the number of balls entering K1, the difference between the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1403 and the number of balls entering in the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1402 is defined as the number of balls entering K2, and the number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1402 is defined as step S1. The difference in the number of balls entering the special electric winning device 32 calculated in 403 is defined as the number of balls entering K3, the number of balls entering the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1403 to the number of balls entering the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1402 is defined as the number of balls entering K4, and the number of balls entering the second working hole 34 calculated in step S1403 relative to the number of balls entering the second working hole 34 calculated in step S1402 is defined as the number of balls entering in step K5. and
First parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of winning balls to special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of winning balls to winning to first operating opening 33" + K5 x "number of winning balls to winning to second operating opening 34") / total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4) +K5) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D1”)
・Second parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls K2 entering the general prize winning opening 31/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) Third parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 K3/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) Fourth parameter: First operation opening The ratio of the total number K4 of game balls entering 33 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D2")
· Fifth parameter: the ratio of the total number K5 of game balls entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3")
・Sixth parameter: D1-(D2 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x " 8th parameter: K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "Number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operating opening 33" + K5 x "Second operating opening 3" 4”) In step S1404, the first to eighth parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the normal storage area of the calculation result memory 131. FIG. The first to eighth parameters stored in the normal storage area are retained until step S1404 is executed next time. That is, when the next step S1404 is executed and the first to eighth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighth parameters are stored in the normal storage area, thereby overwriting the previous calculation results of the first to eighth parameters stored in the normal storage area.

After that, by referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 that stores the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and the start information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 that stores the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and the end information, the outlet 24a, the general prize opening 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, and the first operation opening 3 generated in the state of the opening/closing execution mode are referred to. 3 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 (step S1405). The period between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and the start information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and the end information is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information with serial numbers, if there are a plurality of sections between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and the end information, the total number of balls entered for the sections is calculated. Also, if there is a history information storage area 125 that stores start information and correspondence information indicating that the open/close execution mode is present, but the history information storage area 125 that stores RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 does not store correspondence information and end information that indicate the open/close execution mode, history information that stores RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 that stores correspondence information and start information indicating the open/close execution mode. All the history information in the storage area 125 is treated as in the open/close execution mode.

After that, during the period of the opening and closing execution mode specified in step S1405, the number of balls entering each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 that occurred while the front door frame 14 was in the open state is calculated (step S1406). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as in step S1403, except that the period of the open/close execution mode specified in step S1405 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1405 and S1406 (step S1407). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1406 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1405. Then, the following 11th to 18th parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the outlet 24a calculated in step S1406 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1405 is defined as the number of balls entering K11, the difference between the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1406 and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1405 is defined as the number of balls entering K12, and the number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1405 is defined as the number of balls entering K11. The difference in the number of balls entering the special electric winning device 32 calculated in S1406 is defined as the number of balls entering K13, the number of balls entering the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1406 to the number of balls entering the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1405 is defined as the number of balls entering K14, and the number of balls entering the second working hole 34 calculated in step S1406 relative to the number of balls entering the second working hole 34 calculated in step S1405 is entered. Let the number of balls be K15.
11th parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K13 x "number of winning balls to special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "number of winning balls to winning to first operating opening 33" + K15 x "number of winning balls to winning to second operating opening 34") / total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K11 + K1) 2 + K13 + K14 + K15) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D11")
・Twelfth parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls K12 entering general winning port 31/total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ・Thirteenth parameter: Total number of game balls entering special electric prize winning device 32 K13/total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K) Ratio of 15) 14th parameter: ratio of total number K14 of game balls entering first operation port 33/total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D12")
· Fifteenth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K15 entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D13")
16th parameter: D11-(D12 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning apparatus 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33") " + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the second operation opening 34") ratio Eighteenth parameter: K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the general winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operation opening 33" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operation opening 33"number" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning to the second operation port 34") In step S1407, the 11th to 18th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the storage area for open/close execution mode in the memory 131 for calculation results. The 11th to 18th parameters stored in the storage area for the opening/closing execution mode are retained until the next step S1407 is executed. That is, when the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated by executing the next step S1407, the newly calculated 11th to 18th parameters are stored in the open/close execution mode storage area, thereby overwriting the previous calculation results of the 11th to 18th parameters stored in the open/close execution mode storage area.

After that, by referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 that stores the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 that stores the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that it is the high-frequency support mode. The number of balls entered into each of the working holes 33 and the second working holes 34 is calculated (step S1408). The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the end information are stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entirety of the consecutively numbered pointer information, if there are a plurality of sections between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the end information, the number of hit balls for the total number of the sections is calculated. Also, if there is a history information storage area 125 that stores correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is present, but the history information storage area 125 that stores RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 does not store correspondence relationship information and end information that indicate the high-frequency support mode, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 that stores correspondence information and start information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is stored. Any of the history information in the history information storage area 125 is treated as in the high-frequency support mode.

After that, during the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1408, the number of balls entering each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open is calculated (step S1409). The method of calculating the number of hits is the same as in step S1403, except that the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1408 and S1409 (step S1410). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1409 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1408. Then, the following 21st to 26th parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the outlet 24a calculated in step S1409 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1408 is defined as the number of balls entering K21, the difference between the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1409 and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1408 is defined as the number of balls entering K22, and the number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1408 is defined as K22. The difference between the number of balls entering the special electric winning device 32 calculated in S1409 is defined as the number of balls entering K23, the number of balls entering the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1409 relative to the number of balls entering the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1408 is defined as the number of balls entering K24, and the number of balls entering the second working hole 34 calculated in step S1409 relative to the number of balls entering the second working hole 34 calculated in step S1408 is entered. Let the number of balls be K25.
21st parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K23 x "number of winning balls to special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "number of winning balls to winning to first operating opening 33" + K25 x "number of winning balls to winning to second operating opening 34") / total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K21 + K2) 2 + K23 + K24 + K25) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D11")
22nd parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls K22 entering general winning hole 31/total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) 23rd parameter: total number of game balls entering special electric prize winning device 32 K23/total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K) Ratio of 25) 24th parameter: ratio of total number K24 of game balls entering first operation port 33/total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D22")
· 25th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K25 entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D23")
26th parameter: D21-(D22 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
In step S1410, the 21st to 26th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the memory area for the high-frequency support mode in the calculation result memory 131. FIG. The twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1410 is executed. That is, when the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated by executing the next step S1410, the newly calculated 21st to 26th parameters are stored in the storage area for the high-frequency support mode, thereby overwriting the previous calculation results of the 21st to 26th parameters stored in the storage area for the high-frequency support mode.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is calculated and stored (step S1411). Specifically, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. In addition, the number of occurrences of game rounds is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating the start of game rounds is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 . Then, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game is calculated. The number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode is defined as the number of times of occurrence K31, and the number of times of occurrence of the game cycle is defined as the number of times of occurrence K32.
・The 31st parameter: K31/K32
In step S1411, the 31st parameter, which is the calculation result, is stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. FIG. The thirty-first parameter stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area is retained until step S1411 is executed next time. That is, when the next step S1411 is executed and the 31st parameter is calculated, the newly calculated 31st parameter is stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area, thereby overwriting the previous calculation result of the 31st parameter stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area.

After that, the occurrence frequency of the high frequency support mode is calculated and stored (step S1412). Specifically, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 that store correspondence information and start information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode is calculated. In addition, the number of occurrences of game rounds is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating the start of game rounds is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 . Then, the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game time and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode are calculated. The number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode is K41, the number of game rounds is K42, and the opening/closing execution mode calculated in step S1411 is K43.
・The 41st parameter: K41/K42
・42nd parameter: K41/K43
In step S1412, the 41st to 42nd parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. FIG. The 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area are stored and held until the next step S1412 is executed. In other words, when the next step S1412 is executed and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 41st to 42nd parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area, thereby overwriting the previous calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, or if the processing of step S1412 is executed, display processing is executed (step S1413). FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing display processing.

First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update timing counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1501). The update timing counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the timing of updating the display contents of the management results of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management CPU 112 controls the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to notify the calculation results of the 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameters, and the 41st to 42nd parameters. In this case, information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified is displayed on the first notification display device 69a. In addition, of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the one place is displayed by the third notification display device 69c. In the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display corresponding to the calculation results of the 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, is displayed, the calculation result of the first parameter, which is the first display target, is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is two seconds.

Here, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management side CPU 112 is 51 seconds. On the other hand, the number of various parameters is 25, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. Therefore, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 are to be displayed on the first to third display devices 69a to 69c at least once.

When the process of step S1501 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1502). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, 1 is added to the value of the display target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1503). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "24" (step S1504: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S1505).

The display target counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the types of parameters to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters correspond one-to-one with the possible values of the display target counter of "0" to "24". For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the first parameter, which is the first display target, becomes the display target of the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c, and when the display target counter value is "24", the last display target, the 42nd parameter, becomes the display target of the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c.

When a negative determination is made in step S1504, or when the process of step S1505 is executed, display control is performed on the first notification display device 69a so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is displayed (step S1506). In addition, the parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the calculation result memory 131, and the read parameter is multiplied by 100 so that the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b and the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S1507). The contents displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in steps S1506 and S1507 are continued until the next update timing or until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is stopped. Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management RAM 114 as the value corresponding to the next update timing (step S1508).

By executing the display processing as described above, when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and regardless of whether the game machine body 12 is operated to open the outer frame 11 and the main controller 60 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加By executing the display control of the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c regardless of the game situation and the state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for the display control of the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c.

The display of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is started after the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is stored and held even when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, similarly to the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the information corresponding to the setting value being changed is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Starts after the end command is sent. As a result, even if the third notification display device 69c is used as a display device for displaying information corresponding to the set value and for displaying the management result of the game history, it is possible to prevent the display periods of these displays from overlapping.

Further, when the information corresponding to the set value is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not displayed. On the other hand, when the game history management result is being displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not hidden. This makes it possible to identify which of the display of the information corresponding to the set value and the display of the management result of the game history is being performed on the third notification display device 69c.

Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 32(a) is a flow chart showing data output processing executed by the main side CPU 63. FIG. The data output process is executed at step S112 in the main process (FIG. 9).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that an external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d has been received from the reading terminal 68d (step S1601). If a negative determination is made in step S1601, the data output processing ends. In this case, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 must be restarted in order to execute the data output process. Therefore, in order to output the history information and various parameters to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the main CPU 63 while an external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. Since the power switch for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is provided in the payout mechanism 73 mounted on the back of the back pack unit 15, it is necessary to open the game machine main body 12 from the outer frame 11 to expose the back of the back pack unit 15 in order to perform these stop and start operations. Under such circumstances, in order to externally output the history information and various parameters, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the main CPU 63 while the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it difficult for anyone other than the manager of the game hall to read the history information and various parameters.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined whether the current connection of the external device to the read terminal 68d corresponds to the confirmation of the control information (program and data) in the main ROM 64 by determining whether or not a control information confirmation signal has been received from the read terminal 68d (step S1602). The external device is configured to be able to perform both confirmation of control information and confirmation of history information and various parameters. When confirmation of control information is selected by manual operation of the external device, a signal for confirmation of control information is transmitted from the external device, and when confirmation of history information and various parameters is selected by manual operation of the external device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device. The configuration is not limited to this, and the external device for checking control information and the external device for checking history may be separate. In this case, when an external device for checking control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, a signal for checking control information is transmitted from the external device, and when an external device for checking history is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, a signal for checking history is sent from the external device.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S1603). In the output process, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, the control information can be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and it is possible to check whether the control information is legitimate or normal.

If a negative determination is made in step S1602, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management side CPU 112 (step S1604). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the 16th buffer 122p is receiving the HI level output instruction signal. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, management-side CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32(b), when the output state of the output instruction signal input to the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 is switched from LOW level to HI level (step S1701: YES), the management side CPU 112 reads the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and outputs the read history information and various parameters to the reading terminal 68d ( step S1702). As a result, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the information of the management result of the game history can be analyzed. When the management CPU 112 outputs the history information to the reading terminal 68d, it clears the history memory 117 to "0" (step S1703). The history information in the history memory 117 is erased only when the history information is read by an external device.

Returning to the description of the data output process (FIG. 32(a)), when the process of step S1603 or the process of step S1604 is performed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is continued (step S1605). If it is continued (step S1605: YES), it stands by at step S1605. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released. If the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is canceled (step S1605: NO), this data output process is terminated.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the game ball is put out when it enters any one of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, the player plays the game expecting that the game ball enters one of these ball entering parts. In this configuration, when a game ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as a history target ball entering portion), the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, information for managing the number of game balls entered into each history target ball entry part or the ball entry frequency can be stored in the pachinko machine 10, and by using the managed information, it is possible to appropriately manage the game ball entry mode into each history target ball entry part. Further, since the history information is stored and held by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized alteration of the history information.

All the ball-entering units that discharge game balls from the game area PA are subject to execution of history information storage processing and subject to management using history information. This makes it possible to manage the ball-entering frequency for any history-targeted club by using the history information. In addition, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball entering portion to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball entered the history target ball-entering portion that triggered the storage of the history information. As a result, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the history of the game ball entering the history target ball entering section.

The history memory 117 stores not only the history information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the history target ball entry part, but also the history information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is on, the history information indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is on, and the history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between each of these situations and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the history target ball entering section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to an external device, which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, it becomes possible to read the history information by the external device and analyze the manner of entry of the game ball into the history target ball entry section using the read history information.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d, and the program can be read from the main ROM 64 by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to externally output the history information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Either the program or the history information is specified as the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d, and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 68d. Thus, in a configuration in which the history information is output to the outside using the reading terminal 68d for outputting the program to the outside, it is specified on the pachinko machine 10 side whether the information to be output to the outside is the program or the history information, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, even if the reading terminal 68d is also used, it is possible to read out only the necessary information.

Based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is the program or history information. This makes it possible to avoid complicating the configuration regarding the selection of information to be externally output.

An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 storing programs in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to concentrate the signal paths for the reading terminal 68 d within the MPU 62 . Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 68d difficult.

A management side CPU 112 is provided separately from a main side CPU 63 for executing processing for making game balls pay out based on the game balls entering any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34, and the management side CPU 112 executes the processing for storing the history information in the history memory 117. - 特許庁As a result, it becomes possible to manage the manner of entry of game balls into the respective history object entry sections while preventing the processing load of the main side CPU 63 from excessively increasing.

The main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62 . This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 .

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to the respective buffers 122a to 122g of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 correspond to the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, the respective signal paths), and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information in the management CPU 112 can be simplified.

The main side CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, information corresponding to the high frequency support mode, information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and information corresponding to the start of the game cycle to each of the buffers 122h to 122k of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the type of information corresponding to each situation and each buffer 122h to 122k (that is, each signal path) correspond to each other, and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management side CPU 112 can be simplified.

The master side CPU 63 transmits to the management side CPU 112 correspondence relationship information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122k (that is, each signal path 118a to 118k) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . As a result, in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, the management IC 66 can specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the main side CPU 63 and the history target ball entry section.

Correspondence information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry portion. This makes it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting correspondence information.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116 , and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116 . This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry part corresponding to the information to be transmitted each time the main side CPU 63 transmits information on the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main side CPU 63. FIG.

When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from LOW level to HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d. In this case, the management side CPU 112 can specify that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving the correspondence relation information from the main side CPU 63. FIG. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of buffers being greater than the number of types of information to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases according to the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with the situation without changing the configuration of the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d, each piece of history information includes correspondence information indicating the type of the history target ball-entering club corresponding to the history information. As a result, it is possible to specify the entry mode of the game ball into each history target ball entry section by using the read history information.

In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, 41st to 42nd parameters) corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA in a predetermined period are calculated. Various parameters resulting from these calculations are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. As a result, it becomes possible for the pachinko machine 10 to notify various parameters that are the result of calculation using the history information.

Various parameters are calculated while excluding the history information corresponding to the situation in which the front door frame 14 is being opened. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Further, various parameters corresponding to each of the conditions of the opening/closing execution mode and the condition of the high-frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball according to each situation.

When the history information in the history memory 117 is output to an external device, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing clearing processing of the history memory 117 . As a result, history information exceeding the storage capacity of the history memory 117 is to be stored in the history memory 117, and the event that the history information that should be stored and held is erased by overwriting can be made difficult to occur.

History information is stored in the history memory 117 in a configuration in which an external output corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is performed through the external terminal plate 97 . As a result, the number and frequency of game balls entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be easily grasped by using the information externally output through the external terminal plate 97, and the number and frequency of game balls entering the history target ball entering portion can be accurately grasped by using the history information stored in the history memory 117.

In the low-probability mode, the probability of a big win result varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, even with a single pachinko machine 10, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of a jackpot result is advantageous or disadvantageous in the low-probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The probability of getting a big win result in the low probability mode varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of ``setting 1'' to ``setting 6'', while the probability of getting a big win result in the high probability mode does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko game machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 on the probability of a jackpot result to the situation in the low-probability mode. In addition, since the high-probability table 64g referred to in the high-probability mode can be made common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity for pre-storing the success/failure tables 64a to 64g in the main ROM 64.例文帳に追加

In the low-probability mode, the probability of a big winning result varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of ``setting 1'' to ``setting 6'', while the sorting mode of the types of big winning results does not vary according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the situation in the low-probability mode. In addition, since the distribution table 64h referred to when distributing the types of jackpot results can be shared regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for pre-storing the distribution table 64h in the main side ROM 64.例文帳に追加

Even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased. Thus, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information until then can be continuously stored in the history memory 117, and the management result of the game history can be specified by using the history information accumulated in the history memory 117 over a long period of time.

In a configuration in which the history information stored in the history memory 117 is not erased and held even when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the history memory 117.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to distinguish between the history information before the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the history information after the setting is made.

When the history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the history memory 117, the information corresponding to the setting value is included in the history information. This makes it possible to identify the contents of the setting values that were set in the past by referring to the history information.

When the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is started, the setting value is changed from a predetermined starting setting value. As a result, in the setting value update process (FIG. 10), regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is started, it is possible to change the setting value from a certain starting setting value. Therefore, it becomes easy for the operator to understand the work content of the setting value changing operation.

Specifically, the set value corresponding to the start is "setting 1", which has the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the set value update process (FIG. 10) is started, the set value is changed from "setting 1" with the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally terminates the set value update process (FIG. 10) immediately after the start of the set value update process (FIG. 10), the set value has the lowest advantage, so that unintended disadvantages can be prevented from occurring in the game hall in such a situation.

In addition, when calculating various parameters at the calculation timing, the history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 is used as a reference, and the various parameters are calculated using the history information stored after that. In this case, it is possible to derive the management result of the game history at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set as various parameters.

Further, when various parameters are calculated at the time of calculation, the history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 and the history information corresponding to the change of the setting value may be used as a reference, and the various parameters may be calculated using the history information stored after that. In this case, it is possible to derive the management result of the game history at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed as various parameters.

Further, although the circuit board box 60a of the main controller 60 has an opening for exposing the reading terminal 68d, the opening may not be provided and the reading terminal 69d may be covered with the facing wall 60b. In this case, it is necessary to open the board box 60a in order to connect an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the contents of the win/fail table corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are different from those in the first embodiment. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main ROM 64 is provided with a setting 1 area 161, a setting 2 area 162, a setting 3 area 163, a setting 4 area 164, a setting 5 area 165, and a setting 6 area 166. In an area 161 for setting 1, a low probability table 161a for setting 1 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is ``setting 1'' and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and a high probability table 161b for setting 1 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is ``setting 1'' and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode are stored. In an area 162 for setting 2, a low probability table 162a for setting 2 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is ``setting 2'' and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and a high probability table 162b for setting 2 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is ``setting 2'' and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode are stored. An area 163 for setting 3 stores a low probability table 163a for setting 3 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is ``setting 3'' and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and a high probability table 163b for setting 3 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is ``setting 3'' and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode.

An area 164 for setting 4 stores a low probability table 164a for setting 4 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is ``setting 4'' and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and a high probability table 164b for setting 4 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is ``setting 4'' and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. An area 165 for setting 5 stores a low probability table 165a for setting 5 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is ``setting 5'' and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and a high probability table 165b for setting 5 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is ``setting 5'' and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. An area 166 for setting 6 stores a low probability table 166a for setting 6 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is ``setting 6'' and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and a high probability table 166b for setting 6 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is ``setting 6'' and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode.

Winning probabilities of the jackpot result set in each of the low certainty tables 161a to 166a are different from each other. Specifically, when the low certainty table 161a for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/320, when the low certainty table 162a for setting 2 is referred, the big winning result is about 1/310, when the low certainty table 163a for setting 3 is referred, the big winning result is about 1/300, and when the low certainty table 164a for setting 4 is referred, about 1/290. When the low probability table 165a for setting 5 is referred to, the result is about 1/280, and when the low probability table 166a for setting 6 is referred, the result is about 1/270. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high set value, it becomes easier for the player to get a big hit result in the low probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

Winning probabilities of the jackpot result set in each of the high certainty tables 161b to 166b are different from each other. Specifically, when the high certainty table 161b for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/45, when the high certainty table 162b for setting 2 is referred, the big winning result is about 1/40, when the high certainty table 163b for setting 3 is referred, the big winning result is about 1/35, and when the high certainty table 164b for setting 4 is referred, the big winning result is about 1/30. Thus, when the high probability table 165b for setting 5 is referred to, a jackpot result is obtained at about 1/25, and when the high probability table 166b for setting 6 is referred, a jackpot result is obtained at about 1/20. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high setting value, it becomes easier for the player to get a big hit result in the high probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

In other words, in the first embodiment, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low-probability mode is, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode is the same regardless of the setting state of "setting 1" to "setting 6". are This makes it possible to increase the player's advantage over the fact that a high set value is set.

Also, even the winning probability of the jackpot results in the low probability mode in the case of the highest setting state "setting 6" is set lower than the winning probability of the big winning results in the high probability mode in the case of the lowest setting state "setting 1". As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely low when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is 'setting 1', and to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely high when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is 'setting 6'.

On the other hand, the sorting table 64h is provided with only one type so as to be common to any of the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6", as in the first embodiment. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from producing an advantage or a disadvantage in the way of distributing the result of the big win, and it is possible to suppress the memory capacity for pre-storing the distribution table 64h in the main side ROM 64.例文帳に追加

The winning probability of the big winning result in the low probability mode is higher when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the big winning result in the high probability mode is lower when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is higher. In this case, the higher the set value of the pachinko machine 10 in the low-probability mode, the better the player, and the lower the set value of the pachinko machine 10 in the high-probability mode, the better the player.

The winning probability of the big winning result in the high probability mode is higher when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the big winning result in the low probability mode may be constant in the setting states of ``setting 1'' to ``setting 6''. In this case, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the high-probability mode, the more advantageous the player is, and in the low-probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not advantageous or disadvantageous.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the handling of the game history management results when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The management IC 66 is provided with a separate storage memory 171 as a memory for storing information in addition to each memory in the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the separate storage memory 171. As shown in FIG. The separate storage memory 171 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing.

The separate storage memory 171 is provided with a first separate storage area 172 , a second separate storage area 173 , a third separate storage area 174 , a fourth separate storage area 175 and a fifth separate storage area 176 . In these first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, information on the management result of the game history calculated when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, more specifically, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, 41st to 42nd parameters) described in the first embodiment are sequentially stored. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters are first stored in a first separate storage area 172, and thereafter, each time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the areas to be stored are switched from the nth separate storage areas 172 to 176 to the (n+1)th separate storage areas 172 to 176.例文帳に追加When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set after the various parameters are stored in the fifth separate storage area 176, the various parameters are stored again in the first separate storage area 172.例文帳に追加At this time, various parameters already stored in the first separate storage area 172 are erased. As a result, various parameters are stored in the memory 171 for separate storage until the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed five times, and the oldest parameters are stored by deleting the parameters exceeding five times.

Various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting it to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the setting state is newly set in the pachinko machine 10 .

Next, the setting update recognition processing according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level (step S1801: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1802). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", and if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S1803). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S1804). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803 or if the process of step S1804 is executed, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main side CPU 63 based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121 (step S1805). If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process returns to step S1803.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, repeated change monitoring processing is executed (step S1806). In the repeated change monitoring process, details of which will be described later, but when new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 occur repeatedly in a short period of time, a process for notifying it is executed. In a configuration in which various parameters are stored in a memory 171 for separate storage each time a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is assumed that the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to intentionally erase the management result of the game history when the game is played over a predetermined period. On the other hand, by executing the repeated change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, a notification corresponding to it is executed.

After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S1807). In the various arithmetic processing, the processing of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output processing (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time.

After that, the various parameters calculated in step S1807 are stored in the current storage target area among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1808). A pointer information area is set in the separate storage memory 171 so that the management side CPU 112 can specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 . The information in the pointer information area is updated so that when various parameters are stored in the area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage object is changed to the next area. By executing the process of step S1808, various parameters at that point in time for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the separate storage memory 171. FIG.

Thereafter, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S1809). That is, in this embodiment, not only when the history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information in the history memory 117 is erased.

Thereafter, the RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1810). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1811). In the write processing, the pointer information of the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the RTC information read in step S1810 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, both the information for identifying the set value and the information of the value of the set value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and information of the set value when the setting is performed is stored as history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1812). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. When the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the repeated change monitoring process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of times the game has been executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set last time is within the reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) (step S1901). Specifically, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating the start of game rounds is stored in a history area 124 of a history memory 117, the number of game rounds executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set last time is grasped, and it is further determined whether or not the grasped number of game rounds is within a reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, 1 is added to the value of the repetition change counter provided in the separate storage memory 171 (step S1902). Since the separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require power supply from the outside to hold data as described above, it does not require power supply from the outside to hold the value of the repetition change counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value of "5" (step S1903). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171 . Therefore, in step S1903, it is determined whether or not the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening execution of game times exceeding the reference number exceeds the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, display processing for repetitive changes is executed (step S1904). In the repetitive change display processing, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are set to the repetitive change display contents corresponding to the fact that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated the number of times exceeding the notification reference value in a short period of time. The display content of the repeated change is the display content of displaying "E" on all of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and this display content does not occur in other situations. Further, the state in which the repeated change display contents are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c continues until the repeated change flag provided in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0". The repetitive change flag is a flag for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the display contents of repetitive change should be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when the repeat change flag is set to "1" and the repeat change display content is displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment is not executed. Thereafter, the repeat change flag of the separate storage memory 171 is set to "1" (step S1905).

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repetition change counter in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0" (step S1906). Thereafter, on condition that the repetitive change flag of the separate storage memory 171 is set to "1" (step S1907: YES), the display of the repetitive change display contents on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is terminated (step S1908), and the repetitive change flag is cleared to "0" (step S1909).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased. As a result, it is possible to leave in the history memory 117 the history information of the game executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information of the history memory 117 at that time is used to calculate various parameters as the game history management result. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the state before the setting state is newly set in the pachinko machine 10 . Also, even if the history information in the history memory 117 is erased when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history by the history information to be erased.

In a configuration in which various parameters are calculated using history information in a history memory 117 at the time when a new setting state is set in a pachinko machine 10, the calculated various parameters are stored in a separate storage memory 171.例文帳に追加As a result, even if the setting state is newly set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting is performed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

By providing a plurality of separate storage areas 172 to 176 in the separate storage memory 171, it is possible to store various parameters corresponding to the setting timings of the setting state for a plurality of times. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods based on the timing at which the setting state is newly set. Moreover, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated under the condition that the game is not performed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the various parameters calculated using the history information of the condition that the game is actually performed remain in the separate storage memory 171.例文帳に追加

Various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting it to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the setting state is newly set in the pachinko machine 10 .

In a configuration in which various parameters are stored in a memory 171 for separate storage each time a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is assumed that the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to intentionally erase the management result of the game history when the game is played over a predetermined period. On the other hand, by executing the repeated change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, a notification corresponding to it is executed. As a result, it is possible to notify the administrator or the like that the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

Notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeated in a short period of time is performed by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thus, by using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management result of the game history, it is possible to notify that the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

In a situation where it should be reported that new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the display contents of the repetitive change are continuously displayed on the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c, and the management result of the game history in the normal time is not reported by the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, it is possible to emphasize the notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

Although the number of game rounds executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number of times and the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which, when events continue to exceed the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. In addition, in a situation where the total number of discharged game balls entering a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, any one or a predetermined combination of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34) after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number, when the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value, the notification corresponding to it may be executed. In addition, in a situation where the total number of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number, when the event of the new setting continues exceeding the notification reference value, the notification corresponding to it may be executed.

Further, when the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed exceeding the notification reference value within the monitoring reference period (for example, 600 seconds), the corresponding notification may be executed.

In addition, when the number of game rounds executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number of times and the event of the new setting continues exceeding the notification reference value, notification corresponding to it is executed, but in the situation where the number of game rounds executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number of times, when the event of the setting value change continues exceeding the notification reference value. It is good also as a structure by which alerting|reporting is performed.

In addition, when the number of game rounds executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number of times and the event of the new setting continues exceeding the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which notification corresponding to it is executed when it continues.

In addition, in a situation where the number of game rounds executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number of times, when the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed, but in addition or instead, the progress of the game may be restricted for a predetermined period (for example, one hour).

<Fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the third embodiment in that the main CPU 63 executes the repeated change monitoring process. The configuration that is different from the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing a repeated change monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. Note that the repeated change monitoring process is executed when the set value update process (step S118) is executed in the main process (FIG. 9). That is, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the repeated change monitoring process is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the change monitoring process is repeatedly executed when the set value is changed.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of times the game has been executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set last time is within the reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) (step S2001). A main side RAM 65 is provided with a game number counter for counting the number of games executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, and the main side CPU 63 adds 1 to the value of the game number counter each time a game is newly executed. The number-of-games counter is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the clearing process (steps S105 and S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, 1 is added to the value of the repetition change counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2002). The repetitive change counter is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the clearing process (steps S105 and S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetitive change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value of "5" (step S2003). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171 . Therefore, in step S2003, it is determined whether or not the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening execution of game times exceeding the reference number exceeds the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176.例文帳に追加

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the repeat change flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2004). The repetitive change flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the repetitive change should be notified. The repetitive change flag is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the clearing process (steps S105 and S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repetition change counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2005). Thereafter, on condition that the repeat change flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2006: YES), the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S2007).

In the repetitive change monitoring process, if the repetitive change flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2008: YES), a repetitive change notification command is sent to the sound emission control device 81 (step S2009). When receiving the repetitive change notification command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to repeatedly notify the change. Notification of the repeated change is continued until the supply of operating power to the sound emission control device 81 is stopped.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time based on the control by the main side CPU 63 . In addition, since the notification is performed by the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting part 53 and the speaker part 54, the manager can be made to recognize that the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time without opening the game machine main body 12 forward with respect to the outer frame 11. - 特許庁

When the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, in addition to or in place of the configuration in which the notification command for repeated change is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81, the corresponding external output may be performed.

Further, the main CPU 63 may be configured to execute the repetitive change monitoring process in this embodiment, and the management side CPU 112 may be configured to execute the repetitive change monitoring process in the third embodiment. As a result, it becomes possible to strictly monitor whether or not the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the third embodiment in the processing configuration of the setting update recognition processing in the management side CPU 112 . The configuration that is different from the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing processing for setting update recognition in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 .

When the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2101: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S2102). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", and if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S2103). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2104). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, or if the process of step S2104 is executed, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main side CPU 63 based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121 (step S2105). If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process returns to step S2103.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of predetermined history information exist in the history memory 117 (step S2106). Specifically, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of game rounds is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of game rounds executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set last time is grasped, and it is further determined whether or not the grasped number of game rounds exceeds the reference number of times (specifically, 100 times). However, it is not limited to this, and it may be determined in step S2106 whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 storing correspondence information indicating that game balls have been discharged from the game area PA exceeds a reference number (specifically, 1000). In addition, it may be determined in step S2106 whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 storing correspondence information indicating that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34, or a predetermined combination) exceeds the reference number (specifically, 1000 pieces). Further, it may be determined in step S2106 whether or not the total number of pieces of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the reference number (specifically, 1000 pieces).

Although the number of game rounds executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number of times and the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which, when events continue to exceed the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. In addition, in a situation where the total number of discharged game balls entering a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, any one or a predetermined combination of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34) after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number, when the event in which the new setting is performed continues exceeding the notification reference value, the notification corresponding to it may be executed. In addition, in a situation where the total number of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is within the reference number, when the event of the new setting continues exceeding the notification reference value, the notification corresponding to it may be executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In the various arithmetic processing, the processing of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output processing (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time.

Thereafter, the various parameters calculated in step S2107 are stored in the current storage target area among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S2108). A pointer information area is set in the separate storage memory 171 so that the management side CPU 112 can specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 . The information in the pointer information area is updated so that when various parameters are stored in the area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage object is changed to the next area. By executing the process of step S2108, various parameters at that point in time for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the separate storage memory 171. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process of step S2108 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). That is, in this embodiment, not only when the history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information in the history memory 117 is erased.

Thereafter, the RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2110). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2111). In the write processing, the pointer information of the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the RTC information read in step S2110 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, both the information for identifying the set value and the information of the value of the set value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and information of the set value when the setting is performed is stored as history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S2112). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. When the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

According to the above configuration, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 under the condition that a predetermined number or more of history information are stored in the history memory 117. Thus, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the memory 171 for separate storage can store the information of the management result of the game history as the result of the actual playing of the game.

Note that the processing of step S2109 may be executed on the condition that the processing of steps S2107 and S2108 are executed. In other words, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased under the condition that a predetermined number or more of history information are stored in the history memory 117 . This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even if new settings of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time.

<Sixth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141 , a first status area 142 , a second status area 143 and a third status area 144 . 1st to 14th counters 141a to 141n, 142a to 142n, 143a to 143n and 144a to 144n are provided in each of these areas 141 to 144, respectively. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of the areas 141 to 144, respectively. The second counters 141b to 144b of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 141c to 144c of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from LOW level to HI level. The tenth counters 141j to 144j of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from LOW level to HI level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 14th counters 141n to 144n of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing history setting processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 .

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the specified number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, so in step S2201, "11" is set in the check target counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122n corresponding to the current check target counters are the buffers to which the status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, the information indicating the high frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current confirmation target counter values.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, a state information setting process is executed (step S2203). In the setting processing, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is switched from LOW level to HI level, the first state information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the first state information is erased from the management side RAM 114.例文帳に追加Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is switched from LOW level to HI level, second state information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the ninth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the second state information is erased from the management side RAM 114.例文帳に追加Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from LOW level to HI level, third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the third state information is erased from the management side RAM 114. - 特許庁

If a negative determination is made in step S2202, or if the process of step S2203 is executed, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level by confirming whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from "0" to "1" (step S2204). ). When the numerical information stored in the eighth buffer 122h is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is the value corresponding to the eighth buffer 122h, the first state information is stored in the management side RAM 114 in step S2203, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. In addition, when the numerical information stored in the ninth buffer 122i is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the check target counter corresponds to the value corresponding to the ninth buffer 122i, the second state information is stored in the management side RAM 114 in step S2203, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. In addition, when the numerical information stored in the tenth buffer 122j is changed from "0" to "1" in the situation where the current value of the check target counter is the value corresponding to the tenth buffer 122j, the third state information is stored in the management side RAM 114 in step S2203, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, addition processing of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S2205). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth total counters 141 a to 141 n in the total area 141 of the history memory 117 . For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "11", the 11th total counter 141k is to be added, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth total counter 141e is to be added, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "1", the first counter 141a is to be added.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the corresponding counter for the first state is added (step S2207). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth counters 142 a to 142 n for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 . For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "11", the 11th counter 142k for the first state is to be added, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is to be added, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is to be added.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the corresponding counter for the second state is added (step S2209). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth counters 143 a to 143 n for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the 11th counter 143k for the second state is added, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is added, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is added.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the corresponding counter for the third state is added (step S2211). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth counters 144 a to 144 n for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 . For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "11", the eleventh counter 144k for the third state is to be added, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state is to be added, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state is to be added.

When a negative determination is made in step S2204, when a negative determination is made in step S2210, or when the process of step S2211 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2213). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the process after step S2202 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the number of game balls entering the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the number of occurrences of the open/close execution mode, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode, and the number of game rounds are stored as number information instead of being stored as history information as in the first embodiment. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

Since the information is stored as the number of times information instead of the history information, there is no need to perform the process of deriving the number of times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for computing various parameters.

Next, the setting update recognition processing according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level (step S2301: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S2302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", and if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S2303). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303 or if the process of step S2304 is executed, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121 (step S2305). If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process returns to step S2303.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, an eleventh total counter 141k for counting the number of game rounds executed in the total area 141 of the history memory 117, an eighth total counter 141h for counting the number of occurrences of the open/close execution mode in the total area 141 of the history memory 117, and a ninth total counter 141i for counting the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode in the total area 141 of the history memory 117. is cleared to "0" (steps S2306 to S2308). As a result, each number information of the number of execution times of the game round, the number of times of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode and the number of times of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode is cleared to "0" when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Therefore, the calculation results of the 31st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game, the 41st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game, and the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode correspond to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, it is possible to determine whether or not the calculation result of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter and the 42nd parameter is appropriate based on the current setting value by making the calculation result of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter and the 42nd parameter correspond to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above.

On the other hand, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the counters in the history memory 117 other than the eighth total counter 141h, the ninth total counter 141i and the eleventh counter 141k are not cleared to "0". As a result, the number of game balls entered into each history target ball entry section or the frequency of entry can be managed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

According to the above configuration, the number of game balls entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the number of times the high-frequency support mode occurs, and the number of times the game cycle occurs are stored as number information instead of being stored as history information as in the first embodiment. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

In addition, since the information is stored as the number of times information instead of the history information, there is no need to perform the process of deriving the number of times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

The number of times information of the number of times of execution of game times, the number of times of occurrence of opening/closing execution mode, and the number of times of occurrence of high frequency support mode is cleared to "0" when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Therefore, the calculation results of the 31st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game, the 41st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game, and the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode correspond to the game contents after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, it is possible to judge whether or not the calculation result of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter and the 42nd parameter is appropriate based on the current setting value by making the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter and the 42nd parameter correspond to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above.

On the other hand, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the counters in the history memory 117 other than the eighth total counter 141h, the ninth total counter 141i and the eleventh counter 141k are not cleared to "0". As a result, the number of game balls entered into each history target ball entry section or the frequency of entry can be managed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Note that the configuration of the history memory 117 as in this embodiment may be applied to the above-described first to fifth embodiments and embodiments described after this embodiment. For example, when applied to the first embodiment, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. Further, when applied to the third embodiment, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the entire history memory 117 is cleared to "0".

Further, the processing of steps S2306 to S2308 may be executed in the setting update recognition processing (FIG. 41) when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. As a result, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, if the set values are not changed before and after that, the information on the number of execution times of the game round, the information on the number of occurrence times of the opening/closing execution mode, and the information on the number of occurrence times of the high-frequency support mode are not cleared to "0", and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the information on the number of execution times of the game round, the information on the number of occurrence times of the opening/closing execution mode, and the information on the number of occurrence times of the high-frequency support mode can be cleared to "0". .

Further, various parameters may be calculated using the counters 141 to 144 of the history memory 117 before the processing of steps S2306 to S2308 in the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41) is executed, and the calculated various parameters may be stored in the calculation result memory 131.

<Seventh embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

As the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, ie, "setting 1" to "setting 6" are provided. Specifically, a history memory 181 for setting 1 is provided in correspondence with "setting 1", a history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided in correspondence with "setting 2", a history memory 183 for setting 3 is provided in correspondence with "setting 3", a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided in correspondence with "setting 4", and a history memory 185 for setting 5 is provided in correspondence with "setting 5". A history memory 186 for setting 6 is provided in association with "setting 6".

Each of history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 is provided with a combination of history area 124 and pointer area 126 of history memory 117 in the first embodiment. Thereby, it becomes possible to store the history information corresponding to each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting is performed are stored as history information, so that the history information can be stored separately for each setting value without erasing the history information when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. In addition, since various parameters are calculated using history information corresponding to the currently set pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each setting value.

A combination of the total area 141, the first state area 142, the second state area 143, and the third state area 144 in the sixth embodiment may be set in each of the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6.

Next, the setting update recognition processing according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2401: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2402). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", and if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6". Further, in this embodiment, the set value grasping counter is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require an external power supply for storing, so that even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, the value stored in the set value grasping counter is stored.

After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S2403). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasping counter in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2404). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403, or if the process of step S2404 is executed, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121 (step S2405). If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the process returns to step S2403.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the value of the set value grasping counter of the calculation result memory 131 are set as objects to be stored in history information and to be referred to when calculating various parameters (step S2406). Specifically, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means that "setting 1" has been set. Therefore, the history memory 181 for setting 1 is set as a storage object of history information and a reference object when calculating various parameters. Also, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "2", it means that "setting 2" has been set, so the history memory 182 for setting 2 is set as a storage target of history information and a reference target when calculating various parameters. Also, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "3", it means that "setting 3" has been set. Therefore, the history memory 183 for setting 3 is set as an object for storing history information and a reference object when calculating various parameters. Also, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "4", it means that "setting 4" is set, so the history memory 184 for setting 4 is set as an object for storing history information and a reference object when calculating various parameters. Also, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "5", it means that "setting 5" has been set, so the history memory 185 for setting 5 is set as a storage target of history information and a reference target when calculating various parameters. Also, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that "setting 6" has been set, so the history memory 186 for setting 6 is set as an object to store history information and a reference object when calculating various parameters.

Thereafter, the RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2407). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2408). In the write process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the history information storage targets in step S2406 are selected from among the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6. FIG. By referring to the pointer area 126 in the history memories 181 to 186 to be stored, the pointer information of the history area 124 to be currently written is specified, and the RTC information read in step S2407 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, information for identifying the set value is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set and the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed is stored as the history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S2409). In the updating process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the storage target of the history information in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, and the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memories 181 to 186 is read and incremented by one. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

According to the above configuration, history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 are provided as history memory 117 so as to correspond to "setting 1" to "setting 6," respectively. As a result, it is possible to store the game history corresponding to each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting is performed are stored as history information, so that the history information can be stored separately for each setting value without erasing the history information when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. In addition, since various parameters are calculated using history information corresponding to the currently set pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each setting value.

Note that the history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which six memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided. 5 and an area corresponding to the history memory 186 for setting 6 may be set.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

As the history memory 117, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192 are provided. Each of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set in a situation in which one of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is used to store the history information, the history information in the one history memory 191 or 192 can be left without being erased until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memory 191 or 192, and the other history memory 192 can store the history information. It is possible to newly store history information in both the history memories 191 and 192 until a predetermined number or more of history information are stored in the memories 91 and 192 .

Next, the setting update recognition processing according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2501: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S2502). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", and if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S2503). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2504). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, or if the process of step S2504 is executed, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main side CPU 63 based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121 (step S2505). If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the process returns to step S2503.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, the setting change occurrence flag provided in the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2506). The setting change occurrence flag is a flag for a management side CPU 112 to specify whether or not not only the history memories 191 and 192 which have been set to store history information but also the other history memories 191 and 192 among a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192 after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Further, since the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require power supply from the outside for storing, is provided with a setting change occurrence flag, the value stored in the setting change occurrence flag is stored and held even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped.

Thereafter, the RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2507). Then, write processing to the history memories 191 and 192 is executed (step S2508). In the writing process, first, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be currently written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191, and the RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, both the information for identifying the set value and the information of the value of the set value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and information of the set value when the setting is performed is stored as history information in the first history memory 191.例文帳に追加In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192, and the RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, both the information for identifying the set value and the information of the value of the set value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and information of the set value when the setting is performed is stored as history information in the second history memory 192.例文帳に追加

Thereafter, update processing for each target pointer is executed (step S2509). In the updating process, first, numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. When the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information. Also, in the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192 is read out and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. When the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is not set to "1" (step S2601: NO), it means that the history information should be stored only in the memory target side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. In this case, first, the history memories 191 and 192 that are currently stored are grasped (step S2602). A memory object flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, and when the value of the memory object flag is "0", the first history memory 191 becomes the object of storage, and when the value of the memory object flag is "1", the second history memory 192 becomes the object of storage. Note that since the flag to be stored is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require power supply from the outside to hold the data, the value of the flag to be stored is stored and held even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped.

After that, history setting execution processing is executed for the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored (step S2603). Specifically, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored. As a result, the history information is stored in one of the history memories 191 and 192, which is a storage target.

On the other hand, if the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2601: YES), it means that the history information should be stored not only in the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 but also in the other memory. In this case, history setting execution processing is executed for both history memories 191 and 192 (step S2604). Specifically, first, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for the first history memory 191. FIG. As a result, history information is stored in the first history memory 191 . After that, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for the second history memory 192. FIG. As a result, history information is stored in the second history memory 192 .

When the process of step S2603 or the process of step S2604 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2605). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of ball ejection histories exist in the non-stored history memories 191 and 192 (step S2606). Specifically, when the storage target flag value of the calculation result memory 131 is "0", the first history memory 191 is the storage target, so it is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA is stored in the second history memory 192. Further, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is "1", since the second history memory 192 is the storage target, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that game balls have been discharged from the game area PA is stored in the first history memory 191.例文帳に追加Instead of determining whether or not a predetermined number (specifically "1000") or more of history information indicating that game balls have been discharged from the game area PA are stored, it may be configured to determine whether or not a predetermined number (specifically "100") or more of history information indicating that a game round has been performed is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, storage target change processing is executed (step S2607). In the storage target change processing, the storage target side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is changed by setting the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 to a value different from the current value between two values. Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the storage target is changed from the first history memory 191 to the second history memory 192 by setting the storage target flag to "1". Also, if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the storage target is changed from the second history memory 192 to the first history memory 191 by clearing the storage target flag to "0". As a result, the history memories 191 and 192 in which only the history information of the game executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set are set as storage targets. Various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memories 191 and 192, which are newly stored, so that various parameters of the game executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set can be derived.

After that, clear processing is executed for the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 that has been the object of storage until then (step S2608). Specifically, the second history memory 192 is cleared to "0" if the value of the storage target flag is "0", and the first history memory 191 is cleared to "0" if the value of the storage target flag is "1". Thereafter, the setting change occurrence flag in the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0" (step S2609).

Next, the display output processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If it is the calculation timing (step S2701: YES), the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 to be stored is grasped (step S2702). Specifically, if the storage target flag value of the calculation result memory 131 is "0", the first history memory 191 is recognized as the storage target, and if the storage target flag value is "1", the second history memory 192 is recognized as the storage target. After that, by executing steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment using the history information stored in the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored grasped in step S2702, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated, and the calculated various parameters are calculated. It is stored in the result memory 131 (step S2703). In this case, even if history information is stored in both the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 because the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1", various parameters are calculated using one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored.

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or if the processing of step S2703 is executed, display processing is executed (step S2704). The processing contents of the display processing are the same as the display processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117, and when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memories 191 and 192 which have been stored until then are stored as they are, and the history information is also stored in the history memories 191 and 192 which are not stored. When a predetermined number or more of the history information corresponding to the discharge of the game ball from the game area PA is stored in the history memories 191, 192 on the side not to be stored, the history memories 191, 192 on the side not to be stored are stored as they are, and the history memories 191, 192 on the side that have been stored so far are cleared to "0". As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters can be calculated using only the history information of games performed with the newly set setting values.

On the other hand, according to the above configuration, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to prevent the appropriate calculation of various parameters, the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored are maintained without being changed. As a result, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, it is possible to appropriately derive the management result of the game history up to that point.

The history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which two memories, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, are provided, and a configuration in which a first history area corresponding to the first history memory 191 and a second history area corresponding to the second history memory 192 are set for one memory may be employed.

Also, a configuration in which only one history memory 117 is provided may be employed. In this case, when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set exceeds a predetermined number, the history information before the timing when the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is deleted, and the history information after the timing when the setting is performed is stored and held without being deleted. Thus, it is possible to erase the history information before the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set at the timing when the predetermined number or more of the history information is accumulated after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Further, by storing the history information corresponding to the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set in the history memory 117, the history information before the timing when the setting state is newly set in the history memory 117 can be distinguished from the history information after the timing.

Also, the timing of erasing the history information is not limited to the case where the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set exceeds a predetermined number, but may be the case where the number of games executed after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set exceeds the predetermined number.

Also, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, if the setting value is not changed before and after that, the change of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored and the deletion of the history information are not performed, and if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting value is changed before and after that, the change of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored and the deletion of the history information are performed.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111, the type of the buffer whose type of input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 is different from the first embodiment. Also, the configuration of processing executed by the main CPU 63 to allow the management CPU 112 to specify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second buffer 122b receives the second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third buffer 122c receives the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the fourth buffer 122d receives the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet opening detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal, the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, the signal corresponding to the start of the game round is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as the eleventh signal, and the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122. 0, the buffers to which these signals are input are different in this embodiment. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the start of a game cycle is input to the 11th buffer 122k as a game cycle signal, a set value update signal is input to the 12th buffer 122l, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the 13th buffer 122m as an opening/closing execution mode signal, a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the 14th buffer 122n as a high frequency support mode signal, and a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the 15th buffer 12 as a door opening signal. 2o.

It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the game cycle signal is input to the 11th buffer 122k, the set value update signal is input to the 12th buffer 122l, the open/close execution mode signal is input to the 13th buffer 122m, the high frequency support mode signal is input to the 14th buffer 122n, the door opening signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o, and the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. Therefore, without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 can specify that the corresponding signals are input to the 11th to 16th buffers 122k to 122p. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are specified by the management side CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main side CPU 63. The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment.

First, "10", which is the number of the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j whose signal types are to be recognized, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2801). After that, an identification start signal output process is executed (step S2802). In the output process, the output state of each of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the opening/closing execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is set to HI level, thereby starting the output of the identification start signal. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

After that, the output frequency information corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read output frequency information is set in the output frequency counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2803). The number-of-outputs counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal is output by the main CPU 63 .

In this embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 recognizes the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j, the type identification signal is output the same number of times as the number of prize balls set for the ball entrance section corresponding to the type of the signal. Management-side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of first buffer 122a to tenth buffer 122j in first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of correspondence memory . That is, the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j are grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry portion corresponding to the types of the signals.

In step S2803, when the value of the output counter for recognition is one of "10", "9" and "8", "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning hole 31 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "7", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "6", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation opening 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "5", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operation opening 34 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the output counter for recognition is "4", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a corresponding to the out port 24a, the game ball is not put out, so the output number counter is set to "0". Also, if the value of the recognition output counter is any one of "3" to "1", the corresponding ball-entering portion does not exist and is blank, so the output count counter is set to "0".

After that, output processing of a start opportunity signal is executed (step S2804). In the output process, by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to HI level, the output of the start trigger signal is started. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Thereafter, on condition that the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2805: YES), that is, on condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output counter in step S2803, the process proceeds to step S2806. In step S2806, output processing of a type identification signal is executed. In the output process, by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to HI level, output of the type identification signal is started. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2807), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2808). If the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S2808: NO), the process returns to step S2806.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, output processing of an end trigger signal is executed (step S2809). In the output process, by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to HI level, the output of the termination trigger signal is started. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2810), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement of 1 is "0" (step S2811). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2811: NO), the process returns to step S2803 to execute processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtracting 1.

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S2811: YES), output processing of an identification end signal is executed (step S2812). In the output processing, the output state of each of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the opening/closing execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is set to HI level, thereby starting the output of the identification end signal. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

First, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2901). If the identification start signal has not been received, the setting update recognition process is executed in step S2902, and then the process of step S2901 is executed again. The processing contents of the setting update recognition processing are the same as those of the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 is completed (step S2901: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2903). Thereafter, on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether or not a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63 . If the type identification signal has been received (step S2905: YES), 1 is added to the value of the reception counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S2906). The reception number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main side CPU 63 by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the value of the reception number counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S2904.

When a negative determination is made in step S2905, or when the process of step S2906 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2907). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S2907: NO), the process returns to step S2905, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S2907: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S2908). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116, the value set in the reception count counter is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114. In this case, the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b and the third correspondence area 123c are set with "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general prize winning opening 31, the fourth correspondence area 123d is set with "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, the fifth correspondence area 123e is set with "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation opening 33, and the sixth correspondence area 123e. 23f is set to "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operation port 34. As shown in FIG. Also, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, 1 is added to the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 (step S2909).

When a negative determination is made in step S2904, or when the process of step S2909 is executed, it is determined whether reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2910). If the identification end signal has not been received yet (step S2910: NO), the process returns to step S2904, and on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process from step S2905 onwards is executed. If the identification end signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2910: YES), the history setting process in step S2911, the display output process in step S2912, and the external output process in step S2913 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 51 is a time chart showing how information on correspondence between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 51(a) shows the period during which the output state of the first signal is at HI level, FIG. 51(b) shows the period during which the output state of the second signal is at HI level, FIG. 51(c) shows the period during which the output state of the third signal is at HI level, FIG. 51(d) shows the period during which the output state of the open/close execution mode signal is at HI level, FIG. 1(f) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j is executed, FIG.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, at timing t1, the output states of the first signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level, as shown in FIGS. As a result, output of an identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is started. After that, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from HI level to LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the management processing (FIG. 50), thereby entering the identification state as shown in FIG. 51(f).

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(a) from timing t3 to timing t4. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(b) from timing t5 to timing t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at the timing of t6, 1 is added to the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 as shown in FIG. 51(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at HI level as shown in FIG. 51(c) from timing t8 to timing t10. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at timing t9, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception counter is "1" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "1" information is stored as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. - 特許庁

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at HI level as shown in FIG. 51(a) from timing t11 to timing t12. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51B over the timings t13 to t15, t16 to t18, t19 to t21, and t22 to t24. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management side CPU 112 once. In this case, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at each of timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23, as shown in FIG. 51(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(c) from timing t25 to timing t27. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at timing t26, as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is "10" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "10" information is stored as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116.例文帳に追加

After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 51(c), 51(d), and 51(e), the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level. As a result, output of an identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2910 of the management process (FIG. 50), thereby canceling the identification state as shown in FIG. 51(f).

In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to the ball entering section that triggered the storage of the history information as the correspondence information. In this configuration, if there are a plurality of types of ball-entering parts with the same number of winning balls, the history information cannot distinguish between the ball-entering parts. Specifically, since the number of winning balls is one for each of the first working port 33 and the second working port 34, the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 cannot be distinguished from each other in the history information. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls may be different between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 . As a result, even with a configuration in which history information is stored as in the present embodiment, it is possible to distinguish between the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 in the history information.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the set value update signal and the output instruction signal, but also the information corresponding to whether the game round has started, the information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the high frequency support mode, the information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state, etc. can be identified by the management side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence relationship information from the main side CPU 63 as the signal path corresponding to these information. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of the respective ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a is the information that requires the main side CPU 63 to make the management side CPU 112 recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a-118j. Then, when the management side CPU 112 recognizes the correspondence information, pulse signals of the same number as the number of prize balls corresponding to the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are output from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the second signal. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Tenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the configuration for providing the management IC 66 with information on each ball entry result. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the signal path for inputting the detection results of the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main side CPU 63 and the management IC 66. As shown in FIG.

The detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. Also, the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Also, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operation opening detection sensor 46a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operation opening detection sensor 47a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch path SL21 is formed by branching from the middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed by branching from the middle position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC66. A third branch path SL23 is formed by branching from the middle position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed by branching from the middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed by branching from the middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed by branching from the middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed by branching from the middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main side CPU 63. FIG. This eliminates the need for the main side CPU 63 to execute processing for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the ball entry results of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, so that the processing load of the main side CPU 63 can be reduced.

Further, the branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 are present in the MPU62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branching point and the branching paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and to prevent fraudulent acts of inputting an abnormal ball entry result only to the management IC 66.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the display device for displaying the management results of the game history. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 53 is a front view of main controller 60 in this embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the first notification display device 69a, the second notification display device 69b, and the third notification display device 69c, but in this embodiment, the first notification display device 201, the second notification display device 202, the third notification display device 203, and the fourth notification display device 204 are provided. These first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 .

Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged, but is not limited to this, and may be a single multicolor light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 is installed so that its display surface faces the direction of the element mounting surface of the main control board 61, and is covered with the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is transparent, the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. In addition, since the main control device 60 is mounted on the back of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a so that the facing wall 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the back of the pachinko machine 10, when the game machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 201 through the facing wall 60b are displayed. It becomes possible to visually observe the display surface of 204 .

On the display surface of the first notification display device 201, alphabets such as "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O" are displayed. On the other hand, in the second notification display device 202, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, numbers within the range of "0" to "9" are displayed. The management result of the game history is notified using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. In this case, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 display corresponding to the types of game history management results (the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to the twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters, and the forty-first to the forty-second parameters in the first embodiment) to be notified, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display the types of notification targets. A display corresponding to the content of the management result of the game history is performed.

Specifically, the types of game history management results include the 1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st to 42nd parameters in the first embodiment. On the first notification display device 201, a display corresponding to the type of parameter group to be notified is performed. Specifically, when any of the 1st to 8th parameters is to be notified, "A" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, when any of the 11th to 18th parameters is to be notified, "E" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and when any of the 21st to 26th parameters is to be notified, "H" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and any of the 31st parameters is the notification. When the 41st to 42nd parameters are subject to notification, "L" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 201 when the 41st to 42nd parameters are subject to notification.

The second notification display device 202 displays the order corresponding to the type of the game history management result to be notified among the arrangement order of the game history management results in the parameter group to be notified. Taking the parameter group of the first to eighth parameters as an example, when the first parameter is to be notified, "1" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, when the second parameter is to be notified, "2" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, when the third parameter is to be notified, "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the fourth parameter is to be notified, the second notification display device 2. 02, "4" is displayed, and when the fifth parameter is to be notified, "5" is displayed by the second notification display device 202; when the sixth parameter is to be notified, "6" is displayed by the second notification display device 202; when the seventh parameter is to be notified, "7" is displayed by the second notification display device 202; displayed. Taking the parameter group of the 21st to 26th parameters as an example, when the 21st parameter is to be notified, "1" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, when the 22nd parameter is to be notified, "2" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, when the 23rd parameter is to be notified, "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the 24th parameter is to be notified. "4" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, "5" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the 25th parameter is to be notified, and "6" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the 26th parameter is to be notified.

In detail, the display contents of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are as follows: of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display corresponding to the calculation results of the 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, is displayed, the calculation result of the first parameter, which is the first display target, is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is two seconds. On the other hand, the management CPU 112 has a calculation period of 51 seconds for the various parameters, and the number of the various parameters is 25. Therefore, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 are to be notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 202 at least once.

In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, not only the management result of the game history is notified as in the first embodiment, but also the value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. Specifically, in the changeable state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off, while the fourth notification display device 204, which is present at the right end of the horizontally arranged first to fourth notification display devices 204, displays a value corresponding to the current setting value. That is, when "setting 1" is selected in the changeable state, "1" is displayed on the fourth display device 204, when "setting 2" is selected in the changeable state, "2" is displayed on the fourth display device 204, when "setting 3" is selected in the changeable state, "3" is displayed on the fourth display device 204, and when "setting 4" is selected in the changeable state, the fourth display device 204. '4' is displayed at , and '5' is displayed at the fourth notification display device 204 when 'setting 5' is selected in the changeable state, and '6' is displayed at the fourth notification display device 204 when 'setting 6' is selected in the changeable state.

Next, an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the control of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the control of the MPU 62. As shown in FIG.

As already explained, the main control board 61 is provided with the MPU 62 and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . Also, the main control board 61 is provided with a first display IC 205 , a second display IC 206 , a third display IC 207 and a fourth display IC 208 .

The first display IC 205 is provided corresponding to the first notification display device 201, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 via a signal path SL31 and electrically connected to the first notification display device 201 via a signal path SL32. The first display IC 205 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, the display control of the first notification display device 201, that is, the light emission control of each display segment is performed. The first display IC 205 is capable of storing and holding the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and causes the first notification display device 201 to continuously display display contents corresponding to the stored display data. Then, by changing the display data by the MPU 62, the display of the first notification display device 201 is changed to display contents corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, after the supply of operating power to the first display IC 205 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data is all "0" data, but in this case the first notification display device 201 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

However, it is not limited to this configuration, and even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the first display IC 205, the first display IC 205 may store and hold display data. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed by the first notification display device 201 immediately before the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is started on the first notification display device 201.例文帳に追加

The second display IC 206 is provided corresponding to the second notification display device 202, is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL33, and is electrically connected to the second notification display device 202 through the signal path SL34. The second display IC 206 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, the display control of the second notification display device 202, that is, the light emission control of each display segment is performed. The second display IC 206 is capable of storing and holding the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and causes the display device for second notification 202 to continuously display the display contents corresponding to the display data stored and held. Then, by changing the display data by the MPU 62, the display of the second notification display device 202 is changed to display contents corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, after the supply of operating power to the second display IC 206 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data is all "0" data, but in this case the second notification display device 202 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

However, it is not limited to this configuration, and even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the second display IC 206, the second display IC 206 may store and hold display data. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed by the second notification display device 202 immediately before the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is started on the second notification display device 202.例文帳に追加

The third display IC 207 is provided corresponding to the third notification display device 203, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL35 and electrically connected to the third notification display device 203 through the signal path SL36. The third display IC 207 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, the display control of the third notification display device 203, that is, the light emission control of each display segment is performed. The third display IC 207 is capable of storing and holding the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and causes the third notification display device 203 to continuously display the display contents corresponding to the display data stored and held. Then, by changing the display data by the MPU 62, the display of the third notification display device 203 is changed to display contents corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, after the supply of operating power to the third display IC 207 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data is all "0" data, but in this case the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

However, it is not limited to this configuration, and even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying the backup power to the third display IC 207, the third display IC 207 may store and hold the display data. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed by the third information display device 203 immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is started on the third information display device 203.

A fourth display IC 208 is provided corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 via a signal path SL37 and electrically connected to the fourth notification display device 204 via a signal path SL38. The fourth display IC 208 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, the display control of the fourth notification display device 204, that is, the light emission control of each display segment is performed. The fourth display IC 208 is capable of storing and holding the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and causes the display device 204 for fourth notification to continuously display the display contents corresponding to the display data stored and held. Then, by changing the display data by the MPU 62, the display of the fourth notification display device 204 is changed to display contents corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, after the supply of operating power to the fourth display IC 208 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data is all "0" data, but in this case the fourth notification display device 204 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

However, it is not limited to this configuration, and even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the fourth display IC 208, the fourth display IC 208 may store and hold display data. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed by the fourth information display device 204 immediately before the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is started on the fourth information display device 204.例文帳に追加

The output of display data to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 is performed by the MPU 62, but the output setting of the display data is performed by the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112, respectively. That is, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the management CPU 112 executes display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. In this case, the period during which the display data output setting is performed is adjusted in each of the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 so that the display data output setting is not performed at the same time. Specifically, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, the display data output setting is performed by the main side CPU 63, whereas the display data output setting is not performed by the management side CPU 112.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in a state in which the setting value cannot be changed, the display data output setting is performed by the management side CPU 112, whereas the display data output setting is not performed by the main side CPU 63. FIG.

If the display data output setting by the main side CPU 63 and the display data output setting by the management side CPU 112 are performed at the same time, the display data output setting by the main side CPU 63 is given priority. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the display data output setting by the management side CPU 112 is given priority.

Next, the display processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3001). The update timing counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the timing for updating the display contents of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . After that, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3002).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, 1 is added to the value of the display target counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S3003). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "24" (step S3004: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S3005). The display target counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the types of parameters to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . The 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters correspond one-to-one with the possible values of the display target counter of "0" to "24". For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the first parameter to be displayed first becomes the display target of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, and when the value of the display target counter is "24", the 42nd parameter which is the last display target becomes the display target of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204.

When a negative determination is made in step S3004, or when the process of step S3005 is executed, the display data corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the management ROM 113 (step S3006). Then, display data setting processing corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is executed (step S3007), and display data setting processing corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is executed (step S3008). For example, if the value of the display target counter is "0" and the first parameter is to be displayed, the display data for displaying "A" on the first notification display device 201 is output to the first display IC 205, and the display data for displaying "1" on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206. Further, for example, if the value of the display target counter is "24" and the 42nd parameter is the display target, display data for displaying "O" on the first display device 201 for notification is output to the first display IC 205, and display data for displaying "2" on the display device for second notification 202 is output to the second display IC 206.

After that, the parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the calculation result memory 131, and the display data corresponding to the 10's place and the display data corresponding to the 1's place of the result of multiplying the read parameter by 100 are read from the management side ROM 113 (step S3009). Then, display control is performed on the third notification display device 203 so that the number corresponding to the tens digit of the result is displayed (step S3010), and display control is performed on the fourth notification display device 204 so that the number corresponding to the one digit is displayed (step S3011). For example, when the result of multiplying by 100 is "53", display data for displaying "5" on the third notification display device 203 is output to the third display IC 207, and display data for displaying "3" on the fourth notification display device 204 is output to the fourth display IC 208.

Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management RAM 114 as the value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3012).

By executing the display processing as described above, the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and regardless of whether the main controller 60 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by operating the game machine body 12 to open the outer frame 11.例文帳に追加By executing the display control of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 regardless of the game situation and the state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for the display control of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204.

The display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started after the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is stored and held even when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, similarly to the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

The first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 store and hold the display data output from the MPU 62 while the operating power is being supplied, and control the display of the corresponding first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. Therefore, after the display of the management result of the game history is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not put into a light-off state (that is, a non-display state), but are in a lighting state (that is, a display state) corresponding to some kind of display.

Next, setting value update processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are extinguished (step S3101). Specifically, it outputs display data of all “0” to the first to third display ICs 205 to 207 . As a result, the display segments of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are all turned off, and the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off. Immediately after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display segments of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are all in the off state, and the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are in the non-display state. Therefore, step S3101 is a process of keeping the first to third information display devices 201 to 203 in a non-display state, and if any of the first to third information display devices 201 to 203 is in a display state due to some influence, it is a process of turning it into a non-display state.

After that, "1" is set in the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3102). The setting value counter is a counter for specifying which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is by the main side CPU 63 . By setting "1" to the set value counter, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point when the set value update process is executed.

After that, display start processing of the setting value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3103). In the setting value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208 . As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 .

After that, on the condition that the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned off (step S3104: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3105). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process returns to step S3104 to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3105: YES), 1 is added to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3106). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S3107: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S3108). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to be one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

When a negative determination is made in step S3107, or when the process of step S3108 is executed, the setting value display update process in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3109). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main side RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208 . As a result, the number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 . By confirming the fourth notification display device 204, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the update button 68b is pressed.

After executing the process of step S3109, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3104: NO), the processing after step S3105 is executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3104: YES), the management result display start processing is executed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (step S3110).

In the display start process, a management result display start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 . Upon receiving the management result display start command, the management CPU 112 executes processing for displaying the first parameter among various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 . The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). As a result, the display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operation power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

Next, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the game history management result is displayed and when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated will be described. FIG. 57(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the management result of the game history is displayed, and FIG. 57(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

When the management result of the game history is displayed, at least one display segment in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is turned on as shown in FIG. 57(a). In other words, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 enters the display state. This is the same regardless of which of the 1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st to 42nd parameters is to be notified. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the management result of the game history is displayed in the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 by visually observing that all the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state.

On the other hand, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, all the display segments of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off as shown in FIG. 57(b). That is, each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is put into a non-display state. Further, any one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. FIG. In this way, one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the fourth information display device 204 and each of the first to third information display devices 201 to 203 is in a non-display state, so that the manager of the game hall can grasp that the display corresponding to the setting value is performed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, and can clearly grasp the current setting value.

Next, referring to the time charts of FIGS. 58(a) to 58(h), how the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are brought into the display state will be described. FIG. 58 shows a period of change possible state that can change the setting status of pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 58 (B) shows the timing of updating the settings in the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, and Fig. 58 (C) shows the management results of the gaming history management results. The period shown in 201 to 204 shows the timing of display corresponding to the management results of the gaming history in the first to fourth alarm display, the first to fourth alarm display, and FIG. Indicates the period in which the second reward display device 202 is displayed, shows the period in which the third reward display device 203 is displayed, and FIG. 58 (H) shows the period in which the fourth alarm display device 204 is displayed.

When the setting key inserting part 68a is turned ON, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, so that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 58(a). At the timing t1, the setting display is updated as shown in FIG. 58(b), and the fourth notification display device 204 enters the display state as shown in FIG. 58(h), and the display state is continued. In this case, since "setting 1" is selected, "1" is displayed on the display device 204 for fourth notification. On the other hand, at timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are kept in a non-display state, that is, all display segments are turned off.

After that, by operating the update button 68b to change the setting value at each of timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, and timing t5, the setting value display is updated at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 58(b). In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(h), in the fourth notification display device 204, at each timing, the display content is switched to the number corresponding to the setting value after the change. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are also in the non-display state at each of the setting value display update timings, that is, all the display segments are kept turned off.

After that, the changeable state is terminated as shown in FIG. In this case, the display period of the management result of the game history is started at the timing t6 as shown in FIG. 58(c). Specifically, the display of the first parameter stored in the calculation result memory 131 is started. Therefore, at the timing t6, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are switched from the non-display state to the display state as shown in FIGS.

After that, timing t7, timing t8, timing t9, timing t10, timing t11 and timing t12 are timings for updating the display of the management result of the game history as shown in FIG. 58(d). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(h), the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are switched at each timing to correspond to the management result of the game history after the update.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a structure in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, corresponding display is performed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204.例文帳に追加As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be used not only for displaying the management results of the game history, but also as a display device for displaying corresponding information in the changeable state.

A period during which the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 and a period during which a display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are distinguished. As a result, by grasping the state of display being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed, the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is controlled so that the display mode is different from the display mode when the management result of the game history is displayed. As a result, by grasping the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. As a result, it is possible to perform a wide variety of displays as displays corresponding to the management results of the game history. In addition, due to the presence of a plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204, the display mode can be greatly different between when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed.

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 which are not in the non-display state when displaying the management result of the game history are in the non-display state. As a result, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed by the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 only by confirming whether or not the first to third display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state.

When the display corresponding to the set value changeable state is performed, the fourth information display device 204 is brought into the display state, and the display content is the display content that can be displayed on the fourth information display device 204 when the management result of the game history is displayed. By allowing the display contents to overlap in the fourth notification display device 204 in this way, it is possible not to restrict the display contents when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed. In addition, even if the display contents of the fourth notification display device 204 can overlap in this way, when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are set to the non-display state, so it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the game history management result is displayed, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. As a result, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be clearly differentiated between when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed.

When the management result of the game history is displayed, even if the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is changed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in the non-display state. This makes it possible to specify the management result of the game history regardless of the timing of checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the management result of the game history is displayed. In addition, regardless of the timing of confirming the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify which of the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is being performed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204.

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, only one of the fourth notification display devices 204 is in the display state. This makes it easier to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is being performed.

In the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged in the horizontal direction, only the fourth notification display device 204 arranged at the right end is used to display the setting value changeable state. This makes it easier to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is being performed.

When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display corresponding to the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is performed using the first display device 201 and the second display device 202, and the display corresponding to the content of the management result of the game history is performed using the third display device 203 and the fourth display device 204. This makes it easier to grasp the management result of the game history. In this case, both the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, which display the types of game history management results, are in a non-display state when the setting value can be changed. As a result, the non-display state of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 for displaying the type corresponds to the changeable state of the set value, and it becomes easy to grasp that the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is being performed.

Further, when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, not only the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 for displaying the type of the management result of the game history but also the third notification display device 203 for displaying the content of the management result of the game history are put into a non-display state. This makes it easier to understand that the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is being performed.

Display data is output from the MPU 62 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, and the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 cause the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined displays according to the display data. As a result, for example, even if the main CPU 63 stops the execution of the process for progressing the game due to the occurrence of radio wave detection abnormality or vibration detection abnormality (when affirmative determination is made in step S306), it is possible to maintain the display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In addition, among the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, the target to be in the non-display state (all extinguished state) in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed is not limited to the first to third information display devices 201 to 203, and may be the first and second information display devices 201 and 202. In this case, the third notification display device 203 may display a predetermined value (for example, "5") different from the current setting value, and the fourth notification display device 204 may display a number corresponding to the current setting value. It is good also as a structure displayed. Alternatively, the first information display device 201 and the third information display device 203 may be in a non-display state (all off state) and the second information display device 202 and the fourth information display device 204 may be in a display state. The second information display device 202 and the third information display device 203 may be in a non-display state (all off state), and the first information display device 201 and the fourth information display device 204 may be in a display state. may be in a display state.

Further, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first information display device 201 may be in a non-display state (all off state), only the second information display device 202 may be in a non-display state (all off state), only the third information display device 203 may be in a non-display state (all off state), and only the fourth information display device 204 may be in a non-display state (all off state). It is good also as composition which becomes.

Further, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in the display state, only the second notification display device 202 may be in the display state, or only the third notification display device 203 may be in the display state.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in the setting value changeable state are different from those in the eleventh embodiment. The configuration that is different from the eleventh embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

59(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first notification display device 201, and FIG. 59(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the second notification display device 202. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), the first notification display device 201 has seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g is shaped like a bar and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are arranged so that the first notification display device 201 serves as a so-called seven segment display.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), the second notification display device 202 has seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is shaped like a bar and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g are arranged so that the second notification display device 202 becomes a so-called seven segment display.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 when displaying the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and when displaying that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changeable.

The display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 when displaying the management result of the game history are the same as those in the eleventh embodiment. Therefore, any one of "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and "1" to "8" is displayed on the second notification display device 202.

In this case, each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g of the first notification display device 201 is a light emitting target in at least one type of display among the “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” displays on the first notification display device 201. In other words, even if any of "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, there are no display segments 201a to 201g that are not subject to light emission.

Similarly, with respect to the second notification display device 202, each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g of the second notification display device 202 becomes a light emitting target in at least one type of display among the "1" to "8" displays on the second notification display device 202. In other words, even if any one of "1" to "8" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, there are no display segments 202a to 202g that are not subject to light emission.

In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, in the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state. As described above, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e can be in a luminous state when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first notification display device 201. FIG. Furthermore, in any case where the management result of the game history is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state. On the other hand, the display content of the first notification display device 201, in which only the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e among the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are in the light emitting state, does not exist when the game history management result is displayed. Thus, in the set value changeable state, while using the display segments 201b and 201e which can be in a light emitting state when displaying the management result of the game history, it is possible to display the display mode which is not displayed when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first notification display device 201.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to cause the first notification display device 201 to perform a display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value while also using the display segments 201a to 201g used when displaying the management result of the game history.

In the setting value changeable state, in the second notification display device 202, the third display segment 202c is in a light emitting state. As already explained, the third display segment 202c can be in a luminous state when the management result of the game history is displayed on the second notification display device 202. FIG. On the other hand, the display contents of the second notification display device 202, in which only the third display segment 202c of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is in the light emitting state, does not exist when the game history management results are displayed. Thus, in the set value changeable state, while using the display segment 202c which can be in a light emitting state when displaying the management result of the game history, it is possible to display the display mode which is not displayed when the management result of the game history is displayed on the second notification display device 202.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to cause the second notification display device 202 to perform a display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value while also using the display segments 202a to 202g used when displaying the management result of the game history.

Next, setting value update processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, processing for starting display of set values in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3201). Specifically, for the first notification display device 201, display data is output to the first display IC 205 so that the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light-emitting state and the other display segments 201a, 201c, 201d, 201f, and 201g are in a light-out state. Further, for the second notification display device 202, display data is output to the second display IC 206 so that the third display segment 202c is in a light emitting state and the other display segments 202a, 202b, 202d to 202g are in a non-lighting state. As a result, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 start displaying to notify that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changeable.

After that, a process for turning off the third notification display device 203 is executed (step S3202). Specifically, display data that is all “0” is output to the third display IC 207 . As a result, all the display segments of the third notification display device 203 are turned off, and the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state.

After that, "1" is set in the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3203). The setting value counter is a counter for specifying which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is by the main side CPU 63 . By setting "1" to the set value counter, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point when the set value update process is executed.

After that, display start processing of the setting value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3204). In the setting value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208 . As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 .

After that, on the condition that the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned off (step S3205: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the process returns to step S3205 to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206: YES), 1 is added to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3207). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S3208: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S3209). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to be one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

When a negative determination is made in step S3208, or when the process of step S3209 is executed, the display update process of the setting value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3210). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main side RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208 . As a result, the number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 . By confirming the fourth notification display device 204, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the update button 68b is pressed.

After executing the process of step S3210, the process returns to step S3205 to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3205: NO), the processing after step S3206 is executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3205: YES), the management result display start processing is executed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (step S3211).

In the display start process, a management result display start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 . Upon receiving the management result display start command, the management CPU 112 executes processing for displaying the first parameter among various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 . The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). As a result, the display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operation power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

By setting the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, which can be in the light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed, to the light emitting state, the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed. As a result, in order to diversify the display of the management result of the game history, it is possible to limit the contents of the display corresponding to the management result of the game history as little as possible. On the other hand, for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed is a combination that does not exist when the management result of the game history is displayed. As a result, by grasping the combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in the light emitting state for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, it is possible to grasp which of the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is being performed.

For each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, there are no display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that do not emit light even if all patterns of display of game history management results are performed. As a result, it is possible to minimize restrictions on the display contents of the management result of the game history in order to diversify the display corresponding to the management result of the game history.

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the third notification display device 203, which is not in the non-display state when displaying the management result of the game history, is in the non-display state. As a result, by checking not only the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 but also whether the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which only one type of display content corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is set, and a configuration in which a plurality of types are set is also possible. In this case, the display order of the plurality of types of display contents is predetermined, and each time the changeable state is newly executed, the display contents to be displayed may be changed according to the display order. Even when there are a plurality of kinds of display contents corresponding to the changeable state of the set value, the display contents are displayed using the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g which are in a light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed, and are not displayed when the management result of the game history is displayed.

In one of the case of displaying the management result of the game history and the case of performing the display corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 perform blinking display, and in the other case, the display that keeps lighting up may be performed. In this case, depending on the blinking display or lighting display, the gaming hall administrator can identify which of the display of the management result of the gaming history management result and the changeable status can be identified, so the display segment for displayed in the display corresponding to the changing status, which is the light emitting state of 201a to 201A to 202A to 202G, is a combination of the game. It may be a combination used to display the history management result, or a combination that is not used when displaying the management result of the gaming history. Further, the lighting period and the extinguishing period in the blinking display may be configured to match each other between the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, may be completely shifted, or may be partially overlapped.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the eleventh embodiment in that when an abnormal state occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the corresponding display is performed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The configuration that is different from the eleventh embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the structure of the abnormality display area 211 provided in the main RAM 65. As shown in FIG.

The abnormality display area 211 is an area for storing information on abnormal conditions to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . The abnormality display area 211 is provided with a plurality of unit areas 211a to 211d. Specifically, a first unit area 211a, a second unit area 211b, a third unit area 211c, and a fourth unit area 211d are provided. Each of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d can store information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10, one by one. That is, in the abnormality display area 211, a maximum of four pieces of information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 can be stored.

Here, in this embodiment, all the information of the abnormal state that occurs in the pachinko machine 10 is specified by the main CPU 63 . For example, when an abnormality related to the payout of game balls occurs (for example, the lower tray 56a is full, the tank 75 is empty, the payout abnormality of the payout device 76) occurs, a command corresponding to the occurred abnormality is sent from the payout side CPU 92 to the main side CPU 63. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a radio wave detection sensor and a vibration detection sensor (not shown), and when the radio wave detection sensor detects an illegal radio wave, an abnormal signal corresponding thereto is transmitted to the main side CPU 63, and when abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor, an abnormal signal corresponding thereto is transmitted to the main side CPU 63. Also, based on identifying that normal signal transmission is not performed from each of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, occurrence of disconnection abnormality of these entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a is specified.

The types of abnormal conditions specified by the main CPU 63 are larger than the maximum number of abnormal condition information that can be stored in the abnormal display area 211 . Then, when many abnormal states occur simultaneously, it is assumed that new abnormal information will be generated even though the maximum number of abnormal state information has already been stored in the abnormal display area 211 . On the other hand, the storage priority is set for the information on the abnormal state in the setting stage of the pachinko machine 10, and when a new abnormal state occurs in the situation where the maximum number of information on the abnormal state is already stored in the abnormality display area 211, the information on the abnormal state with the high storage priority is left in the abnormality display area 211.例文帳に追加As a result, it becomes possible to preferentially execute notification of an abnormal state with a high storage priority.

Next, the abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The abnormality setting process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, it is determined whether or not an abnormal display target has occurred (step S3301). Types of abnormal display targets include full tank 56a, no balls in tank 75, abnormal dispensing by dispensing device 76, abnormal radio wave detection, abnormal vibration detection, and disconnection abnormality of each incoming ball detection sensor 42a-49a. The number of types of abnormal display targets is greater than the number of first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormal display area 211. FIG.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, it is determined whether information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that occurred this time is already stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211 (step S3302). If it has already been stored, the information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target that occurred this time is not stored in the abnormal display area 211 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the same type of abnormal state information from being redundantly stored in the abnormal display area 211 .

If a negative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is the maximum value (specifically, "4") (step S3303). The abnormality target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of areas in which abnormal state information is stored among the first to fourth unit areas 211 a to 211 d in the abnormality display area 211 .

If the value of the abnormality target counter is the maximum value (step S3303: YES), priority comparison processing is executed (step S3304). In the priority comparison process, first, among the abnormal state information stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information with the lowest storage priority is specified. The storage priority is determined in advance at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and specifically, the storage priority is increased in the order of full tank 56a → no ball in tank 75 → abnormal vibration detection → abnormal payout by payout device 76 → abnormal disconnection of incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a → abnormal radio wave detection. In the priority comparison process, it is compared and determined which of the abnormal state information with the lowest storage priority stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d and the abnormality display target that has occurred this time has a higher storage priority.

If the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is lower (step S3305: NO), the abnormality information corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is not stored in the abnormality display area 211 . As a result, in a configuration in which the number of types of abnormality display targets is greater than the number of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211, it is possible to leave information on abnormal states with high storage priority in the abnormality display area 211.

If the storage priority of the abnormality display target that occurred this time is higher (step S3305: YES), the abnormality display area 211 is set (step S3306). In the setting processing of the abnormality display area 211 executed when the affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the unit areas 211a to 211d specified as storing the information of the abnormal state with the lowest storage priority are overwritten with the information of the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that occurred this time.

On the other hand, if the value of the abnormality target counter of the main RAM 65 has not reached the maximum value (step S3303: NO), after adding 1 to the value of the abnormality target counter (step S3307), the abnormality display area 211 is set (step S3306). In the setting process, one area is selected from among the unit areas 211a to 211d in which no abnormal state information is stored in the abnormal display area 211, and the abnormal state information corresponding to the abnormal display target that occurred this time is stored in the selected area.

In step S3306, if only one piece of abnormal state information is stored in the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and if there is a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b in descending order of the value of "n".

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not a cancellation event for an abnormality display target has occurred (step S3308). For example, it is determined whether or not a command indicating that the full tank of the lower tray 56a is released, that the tank 75 is free of balls, or that the delivery abnormality of the delivery device 76 is released is received from a payout side CPU 92.例文帳に追加Further, it is determined whether or not an abnormality cancellation operation has been performed for the occurrence of radio wave detection abnormality, whether or not an abnormality cancellation operation has been performed for the occurrence of vibration detection abnormality, or whether or not an abnormality cancellation operation has been performed for the occurrence of disconnection abnormality.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3308, the process of erasing the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3309). In the erasing process, it is determined whether or not the abnormal state information corresponding to the abnormal display target to be canceled this time is stored in any one of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211, and if it is stored, the abnormal state information is erased by clearing "0" to the stored area. In this case, if only one item of abnormal state information is stored in the abnormal display area 211 after erasing, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and if a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information are stored in the abnormal display area 211 after erasing, the abnormal state information is stored in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b in descending order of the value of "n". Also, 1 is subtracted from the value of the abnormality object counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3310).

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an abnormality display start operation has occurred (step S3311). The abnormal display start operation is performed by pressing an update button 68b with the game machine main body 12 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changeable.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3311, it is determined whether information on one or more abnormal states is stored in the abnormality display area 211 (step S3312). If the information of the abnormal state is not stored, the abnormal display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the abnormal display from being started even though there is no abnormal state information to be notified.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, the abnormal display flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3313). The abnormal display flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the display corresponding to the management result of the game history should be stopped and the display corresponding to the abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211 should be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Even if the abnormal display start operation is performed in a situation where the abnormal display flag is already set to "1", a negative determination is made in step S3311.

After that, a management result display cancellation setting process is executed (step S3314). In the stop setting process, a stop display command is sent to the management side CPU 112 to temporarily stop updating the display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . Upon receiving the display stop command, the management CPU 112 stops execution of the display processing (FIG. 55). However, even if the management side CPU 112 receives the display stop command, it does not set display data that is all "0" data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 . Therefore, until display data is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the display of the management result of the game history at that time is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an operation to end the abnormality display has occurred (step S3315). The termination operation of the abnormal display is performed by pressing the reset button 68c with the game machine main body 12 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changeable. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3315, the abnormal display flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3316). It should be noted that even if an operation to end the abnormal display is performed in a situation where the value of the abnormal display flag is already "0", a negative determination is made in step S3315.

After that, the management result display cancellation processing is executed (step S3317). In the cancellation cancellation process, by transmitting a cancellation cancellation command to the management side CPU 112, the state in which updating of the display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is cancelled. The management-side CPU 112 resumes the execution of the display processing (FIG. 55) by receiving the cancellation cancellation command. However, even if the management side CPU 112 receives the cancellation cancellation command, it does not set the display data to be all "0" data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 . Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the management side CPU 112 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the abnormal display at that time is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. In addition, the management side CPU 112 continues to store the history information and to calculate various parameters even in a situation where updating of the display of the management result of the game history is stopped, and the results of the calculation of the various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131.例文帳に追加Therefore, when the state in which the update of the display of the management result of the game history is canceled is canceled, the display of the latest management result of the game history is immediately resumed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In the abnormality setting process, when "1" is set in the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3318: YES), the abnormality display process is executed (step S3319). FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing processing for displaying an abnormality.

First, extinguishing processing of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3401). Specifically, the display data of all “0” is output to the first and second display ICs 205 and 206 . As a result, all of the display segments of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off, and the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are put into a non-display state.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update timing counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3402). The update timing counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the timing for updating the display contents of the abnormality display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . If the value of the update timing counter is already "0", that state is maintained. After that, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter is "0" (step S3403).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, update processing of the display target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S3404). In the update process, if this is the first error display process after the error display flag of the main RAM 65 was set to "1", the display object counter is set to "0". The display target counter value corresponds to the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. Specifically, the display target counter value "0" corresponds to the first unit area 211a, the display target counter value "1" corresponds to the second unit area 211b, the display target counter value "2" corresponds to the third unit area 211c, and the display target counter value "3" corresponds to the fourth unit area 2. 11d compatible. In the updating process, if this time is not the first abnormal display process after the abnormal display flag of the main RAM 65 was set to "1", 1 is added to the value of the display object counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not abnormal state information is stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be displayed among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d (step S3405). Here, as already explained, when only one piece of abnormal state information is stored, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and when a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information are stored, the abnormal state information is stored in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b in descending order of the value of "n". Therefore, when information on an abnormal state is not stored in an area corresponding to the current value of a counter to be displayed, information on an abnormal state is not stored in an area corresponding to a value larger than the value of the counter to be displayed. Further, when the value of the counter to be displayed after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "3", the corresponding area does not exist in the first place, so the information of the abnormal state is treated as not stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the value of the display target counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3406). Here, it is assumed that all the abnormal states that are the targets of the abnormal display are canceled in the situation where the abnormal display is being performed. In this case, even if the abnormality display process is executed, the abnormality display area 211 does not store information on the abnormality. In such a situation, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 display that no abnormal state information is stored.

When a negative determination is made in step S3405, or when the process of step S3406 is executed, the display data to be displayed corresponding to the value of the display counter in the main RAM 65 is read out from the main ROM 64 (step S3407). Specifically, among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211, the information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter of the main RAM 65 is read. Then, display data corresponding to the information is read from the main ROM 64 . The display data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information on the abnormal state, and the display contents of the third and fourth display devices 203 and 204 based on the display data differ for each type of information on the abnormal state. There is also display data corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information, and this display data is different from the display data corresponding to the abnormal state information. Therefore, when there is no abnormal state information, the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are different from those when there is abnormal state information.

On the other hand, the display content of the display corresponding to the information of the abnormal state and the display content of the display corresponding to the absence of the information of the abnormal state in the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 overlap with the display content when the management result of the game history is displayed in the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 and the display content of the set value in the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, all of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state when the management result of the game history is displayed, and when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the first to third information display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state and the fourth information display device 204 is in the display state. As a result, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are displayed, so even if the display contents overlap as described above, it is possible for the manager of the game hall to grasp which situation the display corresponds to.

Thereafter, display control is performed on the third notification display device 203 according to the display data read out in step S3407 (step S3408), and display control is performed on the fourth notification display device 204 (step S3409). In this case, the display device 203 for notification and the display device 204 for notification 204 are not in a non-display state (that is, they are not in a completely extinguished state), and are in some display state, regardless of whether the display corresponding to the information of the abnormal state is performed or the display corresponding to the absence of the information of the abnormal state is performed.

Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set as a value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3410).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the configuration in which the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be used not only for displaying the management results of the game history, but also as display devices for performing display corresponding to abnormal states.

When the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification are made to display corresponding to the abnormal state when no abnormal state occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the display corresponding to the absence of the abnormal state is performed in the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 by checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

A period during which the game history management result is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a period during which the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are distinguished. As a result, by grasping the status of display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to identify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is controlled so that the display mode is different from the display mode when the management result of the game history is displayed. As a result, by grasping the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. As a result, it is possible to perform a wide variety of displays as displays corresponding to the management results of the game history. In addition, since a plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 exist, the display mode can be greatly different between when the game history management result is displayed and when the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed.

When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, which are not in the non-display state when displaying the management result of the game history, are in the non-display state. Thus, only by confirming whether the first and second information display devices 201 and 202 are in a non-display state, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204.例文帳に追加

When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the third and fourth information display devices 203 and 204 are put into the display state, and the display contents are the display contents which can be displayed on the third and fourth information display devices 203 and 204 when the management result of the game history is displayed. By overlapping the display contents in the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 in this way, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being restricted when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In addition, even if the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 can overlap in this way, when the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are made non-display.

It should be noted that when an abnormality display start operation is performed in a situation where no abnormal state information is stored in the abnormal display area 211, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time may display information corresponding to the fact that the abnormal state information is not stored.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management output process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the first embodiment. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing management output processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 .

First, it is determined whether or not the management start flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3501). The management start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether history information should be stored in the history memory 117 or not. In the present embodiment, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started) becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value, and when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the storage of the history information in the history memory 117 is started. Let At the stage of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is sometimes checked before shipment, and at that time, game balls are put in each ball entry section and the operation after that is checked. On the other hand, by not storing the history information in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, it is possible to prevent the result of entering a ball or the like at the time of the above operation check from being stored as the history information.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501, "7" is set in the starting control counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3502). The start time management counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify which of the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is in a situation where the detection state of the game ball is to be specified in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1".

After that, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the control counter at start is set to "1" (step S3503). Specifically, when the value of the control counter at the start is "7" and corresponds to the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1", when the value of the control counter at the start is "6" and corresponds to the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the control counter at the start is "5" and corresponds to the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. If so, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", if the value of the control counter at start is "4" and corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", if the value of the control counter at start is "3" and corresponds to the first operation port detection sensor 46a, it is determined whether or not the fifth output flag is set to "1", and the value of the control counter is set to "2". and if it corresponds to the second operation port detection sensor 47a, it is determined whether or not the sixth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the control counter at start is "1" and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether or not the seventh output flag is set to "1". As already explained, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management counter at start is cleared to "0" (step S3504). After that, 1 is added to the value of the discharged number counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3505). The discharge number counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where the management start flag of the main side RAM 65 is not set to "1".

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the discharged number counter is greater than or equal to the management start reference value (step S3506). Although the management start reference value is set to "300", it is not limited to this and may be configured to be a number less than "300" or to be a number greater than "300".

If a negative determination is made in step S3503 or if a negative determination is made in step S3506, 1 is subtracted from the value of the control counter at the start of the main RAM 65 (step S3507). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start time management counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3508). If a negative determination is made in step S3508, the process returns to step S3503, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3508, this management output process ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the discharge number counter of the main RAM 65 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value (step S3506: YES), the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3509). Thereafter, management processing is executed (step S3510). Also, if the management start flag is set to "1" and the determination in step S3501 is affirmative, the management process is executed (step S3510). The contents of the management process are the same as steps S1001 to S1012 of the management output process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started) becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value. let it start. At the stage of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is sometimes checked before shipment, and at that time, game balls are put in each ball entry section and the operation after that is checked. On the other hand, by not storing the history information in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, it is possible to prevent the result of entering a ball or the like at the time of the above operation check from being stored as the history information.

Here, in the configuration in which the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started as described above, the management result of the game history during that period cannot be calculated. Therefore, in such a situation, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to display corresponding to the situation. For example, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, all the display segments may be configured to emit light. Since the display contents are not displayed either when the management result of the game history is displayed or when the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed is displayed, it is possible to identify whether or not the history information is not stored as described above by checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The configuration may be such that the setting mode of the management start flag information in the main side RAM 65 differs depending on whether or not the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the main processing in the alternative mode executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. In steps S3601 to S3609, the same processes as steps S101 to S109 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed, and in steps S3611 to S3620, the same processes as steps S110 to S119 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the determination in step S3608 is affirmative, the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3610), and after the processing of step S3620 is executed, the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3621). According to this configuration, when the processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and when the processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the game after the start of supplying the operating power to the pachinko machine 10. History information is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the number of game balls discharged. As a result, it is possible to manage the game history immediately after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where there is a high possibility that the operation check at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 is not performed.

Further, instead of storing the history information in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started reaches the management start reference value or more, an area may be provided separately from the history memory 117 for storing the history information until the total number of game balls reaches the management start reference value or more. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in the situation.

Further, as a condition that the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value, a condition that the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 may be added. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the history information is already stored in the history memory 117, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 from the beginning regardless of whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the control start reference value.

Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started reaches the management start reference value or more, when an abnormal state such as radio wave detection abnormality or vibration detection abnormality occurs, the history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 until the abnormal state is released. As a result, it is possible to prevent history information from being stored for an event that occurred in an abnormal state.

In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started reaches the management start reference value or more, the history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 in a situation where the game machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is opened. As a result, it is possible to prevent history information from being stored with respect to an event that occurs while the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the execution subject of the processing for managing the game history. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the first embodiment, the MPU 62 is provided with the management IC 66, but in this embodiment, the MPU 62 is not provided with the management IC 66. FIG. Instead of providing the management IC 66, the main side CPU 63 executes the processing for managing the game history in this embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs various controls by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control. Specifically, control related to game history management is defined as non-specific control, and control other than non-specific control, including control for progressing a game based on game operations by the player, is defined as specific control.

Specifically, the specific control includes all the control by the main process (FIG. 9) that is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In the present embodiment, recognition processing (step S111), data output processing (step S112), and setting value update signal output processing (step S119) of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are not executed. Also in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed by interrupting the processing of steps S113 to S116 in the main processing (FIG. 9), but among the various types of processing of the timer interrupt processing, all processing other than the management processing described later is included in the specific control. Part of management processing is also included in specific control.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how programs and data are set in the main-side ROM 64. As shown in FIG. Corresponding to the fact that the control executed by the main CPU 63 is distinguished between specific control and non-specific control, as shown in FIG. 67, the main ROM 64 also clearly distinguishes the addresses of the areas in which the program for specific control and data for specific control and the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control are stored.

Specifically, specific control programs are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses X(1) to X(k+2). Further, addresses X(k+3) to X(k+5) consecutive to addresses X(1) to X(k+2) are addresses of unused areas in which data is not stored, and subsequently, data for specific control are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses X(k+6) to X(m+2). Addresses X(m+3) to X(m+5) consecutive to addresses X(k+6) to X(m+2) are addresses of unused areas in which data is not stored, and programs for non-specific control are collectively stored in successive address areas within the range of addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2). Further, addresses X(n+3) to X(n+5) consecutive to addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2) are addresses of unused areas in which data is not stored, and data for non-specific control are collectively stored in successive address areas within the range of addresses X(n+6) to X(p+2). The relationship between programs and data and addresses as described above is set in both physical addresses in the main ROM 64 and logical addresses on the memory map recognized by the main CPU 63 .

As described above, the specific control program and specific control data, and the non-specific control program and non-specific control data are stored in different address areas regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding controls. Therefore, for example, when checking only the specific control program and specific control data, it is sufficient to check only the address range area where these specific control programs and specific control data are stored. is checked, only the area of the address range in which the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored should be checked. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently perform work when checking programs and data by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control. In addition, along with this, it becomes possible to efficiently perform the work for correcting programs and data by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control.

Since the address range of the unused area in which no data is stored is set between the address range of the area in which the program for specific control and the data for specific control are stored and the address range of the area in which the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control are stored, the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control can be easily grasped in the checking work.

In each of the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control, the program and data are stored in different address areas regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding control. This makes it possible to perform the work of distinguishing and checking the program and data efficiently. In addition, since the address range of the unused area in which no data is stored is set between the address range of the area where the program is stored and the address range of the area where the data is stored, the boundary between the address range of the program and the address range of the data can be easily grasped in checking work.

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how each area in the main RAM 65 is set. Corresponding to the fact that the control executed by the main CPU 63 is distinguished between the specific control and the non-specific control, as shown in FIG. 68, the main RAM 65 also clearly distinguishes between the address range of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and the address range of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Specifically, an area of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses Y(1) to Y(r+2) is set as a work area 221 for specific control. In addition, addresses Y(r+3) to Y(r+5) consecutive to the addresses Y(1) to Y(r+2) are addresses of unused areas, and consecutive address areas within the range of addresses Y(r+6) to Y(s+2) are set as stack areas 222 for specific control. Further, the addresses Y(s+3) to Y(s+5) consecutive to the addresses Y(r+6) to Y(s+2) are the addresses of unused areas, and the areas of consecutive addresses within the range of the addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2) are set as the work area 223 for non-specific control. Further, addresses Y(t+3) to Y(t+5) consecutive to the addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2) are addresses of unused areas, and subsequently, areas of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses Y(t+6) to Y(u+2) are set as stack areas 224 for non-specific control. The relationship between each area and address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main RAM 65 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main CPU 63 .

Since the work area 221 for the specific control and the work area 223 for the non-specific control are set separately as described above, different areas of the main RAM 65 are used when various calculations are executed depending on whether the main CPU 63 executes the specific control or the non-specific control. As a result, when one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to cause an event in which necessary information in the main RAM 65 is erased in the other. Incidentally, when writing information to the work areas 221 and 223 and reading information from the work areas 221 and 223, the main CPU 63 executes a load command.

Since the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are set separately, different areas of the main RAM 65 are used when saving information stored in the register of the main CPU 63 and when storing return address information on the program, depending on whether the main CPU 63 executes the specific control or the non-specific control. As a result, when saving information stored in the register of the main side CPU 63 or storing information of the return address on the program in a situation where one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to cause an event such that the information used in the other is erased. Incidentally, when writing information to the stack areas 222 and 224, the main CPU 63 issues a push instruction, and when reading information from the stack areas 222 and 224, the main CPU 63 issues a pop instruction. When reading information from each of the stack areas 222 and 224, the information written later in the stack area 222 and 224 is read first.

Here, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, and can read information from the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, but cannot write information to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control from being erroneously erased while the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed.

When the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and can read information from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but cannot write information to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control from being erroneously deleted while the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed.

The backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and the backup power is supplied to all of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is stored and held while the backup power is supplied even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

Next, timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As in the first embodiment, the timer interrupt process is performed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) while the processes of steps S113 to S116 are being performed in the main process (FIG. 9). The program corresponding to timer interrupt processing is set as a program for specific control.

In steps S3701 to S3718, the same processes as steps S301 to S318 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. Management processing is executed in step S3719 in the timer interrupt processing. When the management process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the management process set in the specific control program is executed. When the subroutine program is executed, information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process after execution of the management process is written in the specific control stack area 222 by a push instruction. Then, when the management process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop instruction, and the program for the timer interrupt process indicated by the return address is returned to.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing management processing. The processing of steps S3801 to S3805 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and specific control data.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S3801). As a result, it is possible to prevent timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of management execution processing, which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, which will be described later.

Thereafter, as "PUSH PSW", the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction (step S3802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving the information of the flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, it is possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before being changed after the subroutine is called or the subroutine is started in the stack area 222 for specific control. The amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

After that, by reading out the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution processing set in the program for non-specific control, the management execution processing is started (step S3803). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the specific control stack area 222 by the push instruction. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop instruction, and the program for management processing indicated by the return address is returned to.

When returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S3802 is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 by the pop instruction as "POP PSW" (step S3804). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S3802 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

After that, in order to switch from the state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, interrupt permission is set (step S3805). This enables a new execution of timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing management execution processing. Note that the processing of steps S3901 to S3915 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, as "LD SP, Y(u+2)", Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S3901). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main CPU 63 to specify a storage area to which information is to be written by a push instruction in the stack areas 222 and 224 . Each time a push instruction is performed, the information of the stack pointer is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time the pop instruction is performed, the information of the stack pointer is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order. When the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and each time the information to be stored is added, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S3901, the information of the last address in stack area 224 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer. The fact that the information is stored from the storage area of the last address to the storage area of the first address in this way is the same for the stack area 222 for specific control.

Incidentally, in both the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, if a push instruction is additionally executed even though information is set in all storage areas, all areas of the main side RAM 65 are cleared to "0" assuming that an abnormality has occurred in storage processing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding despite the occurrence of an abnormality in the memory processing.

Thereafter, as "LD (_WABUF), WA", the information in the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the WA buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S3902). Also, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the information in the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the BC buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S3903). Also, "LD
(_DEBUF), DE”, the information in the DE register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the DE buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S3904). Also, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the HL buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S3905). Also, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", the information in the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the IX buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S3906). Also, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the information in the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the IY buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S3907).

The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the already-described flag registers. In this case, in steps S3902 to S3907, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, is saved in the corresponding buffer in the non-specific control work area 223. The amount of information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register is all 2 bytes.

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are registers used in check processing (step S3908) which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers to the work area 223 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the check process (step S3908), the information of these registers used for the specific control can be saved before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, the information saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control is returned to these registers when the non-specific control is finished, so that the state of these registers can be restored to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the work area 223 for non-specific control, by selectively saving the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in the check processing corresponding to the non-specific control to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to reduce the capacity to be secured for saving the register information in the work area 223 for non-specific control. . Therefore, it is possible to save the above register information while ensuring a large capacity of the non-specific control work area 223 that can be used for the check processing. Of course, among the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main CPU 63, for registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, the information set before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is stored and held until the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is finished and the processing corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

In addition, by saving register information in the work area 223 for non-specific control instead of saving it in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control can be reduced accordingly. In addition, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, as already explained, the later information is read out first in the writing order of the information. Therefore, if the information reading order is deviated due to some noise or the like, all the information in the subsequent reading order will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above event even when there is a large amount of information to be saved.

After executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907, check processing is executed (step S3908). When the check process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When the subroutine program is executed, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the check process is executed is written in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push instruction. Then, when the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address is returned to. Details of the check processing will be described later.

After executing the check process, Y(r+α) is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 as a fixed address at the time of return to the specific control by the load instruction as "LD SP, Y(r+α)" (step S3909). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

The amount of information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control is always constant immediately before the subroutine of the management execution process is executed in step S3803 of the management process (FIG. 70), and accordingly the stack pointer information (that is, the value of the stack pointer) of the main CPU 63 at that timing is constant. In this case, the information stored in the specific control stack area 222 includes, for example, information on the return address of the management process (FIG. 70) after the management execution process (FIG. 71) ends, and information on the return address of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) after the management process (FIG. 70) ends. The constant information of the stack pointer is Y(r+α). Therefore, when the check process, which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control, is completed and the process corresponding to the specific control is returned to, by setting the constant information Y(r+α) to the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63, the information of the stack pointer can be restored to the information immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. By setting the fixed information in the stack pointer in this manner, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, so that the information of the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control does not need to be saved in the main side RAM 65 before starting the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and eliminate the need to secure an area for saving in the main RAM 65 .

Thereafter, as "LD WA, (_WABUF)", the WA register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the WA buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S3910). Also, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the BC buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S3911). Also, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the DE buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S3912). Also, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the HL buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S3913). Also, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the IX buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S3914). Also, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the IY buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S3915). By executing the processes of steps S3910 to S3915, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 can be restored to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

Information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed is not saved in the main RAM 65 when the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted. This eliminates the need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control.

Further, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed is the information that is not used when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is restarted after returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. In other words, information necessary for a plurality of times of processing corresponding to non-specific control executed with processing corresponding to specific control in between is stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control or stack area 224 for non-specific control, and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main side CPU 63 is not saved in the main side RAM 65 when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, there is no problem in executing the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

Next, the check processing executed by calling the subroutine program in step S3908 will be described. In the check process, a process for collecting game history information, a process for deriving the management result of the game history, and a process for notifying the management result are executed. That is, the processing for collecting game history information, the processing for deriving the management result of the game history, and the processing for notifying the management result are executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Before explaining the check process, the contents of various areas 231 to 234 of the non-specific control work area 223 used to manage the game history will be explained. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas 231 to 234 of the work area 223 for non-specific control used for managing game histories.

The non-specific control work area 223 is provided with a normal counter area 231 , an opening/closing execution mode counter area 232 , and a high-frequency support mode counter area 233 . Each of these areas 231 to 233 is provided with general winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a, special electric winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b, first operation counters 231c, 232c, 233c, second operation counters 231d, 232d, 233d, and out counters 231e, 232e, 233e. The general winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a are counters for measuring the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The special electric prize-winning counters 231b, 232b, and 233b are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the special electric prize-winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The first operation counters 231c, 232c, and 233c are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the first operation opening 33 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The second operation counters 231d, 232d, and 233d are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the second operation opening 34 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The out counters 231e, 232e, 233e are counters for measuring the number of game balls entered into the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start timing.

Each of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 is used to measure the number of game balls entering the target ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode. Each of the counters 232a to 232e of the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232 is used to count the number of game balls entered into the target ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 in the state in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening/closing execution mode. Each of the counters 233a to 233e of the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 is used to count the number of game balls entering the target ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 in the state of the high-frequency support mode when the front door frame 14 is closed.

The reason why the state in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state is excluded from the measurement is that the number of entering balls when the game balls enter the ball entering portions 24a, 31 to 34 by maintenance while the front door frame 14 is opened is excluded from the object of measurement. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the state in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state may be measured in the same manner as the state in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state.

In addition to the normal counter area 231 , open/close execution mode counter area 232 , and high-frequency support mode counter area 233 , the non-specific control work area 223 includes a calculation result storage area 234 . The calculation result storage area 234 is an area for storing information on the game history management results calculated using the normal counter area 231 , the open/close execution mode counter area 232 and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 . The information of the management result of the game history stored in the calculation result storage area 234 is stored and held until the newly calculated information of the management result of the game history is overwritten by the newly calculated information.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the check processing executed by calling the subroutine program in step S3908. Note that the processing of steps S4001 to S4008 in the check processing, including subroutine processing, is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. When executing the subroutine processing, the return address information after execution of the subroutine processing is written in the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer value of the main side CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and the stack pointer value is updated to the address information of the next storage target storage area. When the processing of the subroutine is completed, the information of the return address is read from the storage area corresponding to the value of the previous order with respect to the value of the current stack pointer of the main side CPU 63, the program corresponding to the information of the return address is returned, and the value of the stack pointer is updated to the information of the address of the storage area from which the information of the return address is read.

In the check processing, if the front door frame 14 is open (step S4001: YES), the result calculation processing (step S4007) and the display processing (step S4008), which will be described later, are executed without executing the normal ball entry management processing (step S4004), the ball entry management processing during the opening/closing execution mode (step S4005), and the ball entry management processing during the high-frequency support mode (step S4006). Since the space partitioned in the front and rear by the rear surface of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24 forms the game area PA, when the front door frame 14 is opened, the game area PA is opened forward, and even if the game ball is shot toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot normally flow down the game area PA. The case where the game ball enters the ball entry parts 24a, 31 to 34 under the condition that the front door frame 14 is open means that the front door frame 14 is opened by the manager of the game hall for the purpose of maintenance or the elimination of troubles, and the game ball enters due to maintenance or the like. Since such a game ball entry is not a game ball entry in a regular game execution situation, it is not necessary to manage such a game ball entry. Therefore, in the check process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes in steps S4004 to S4006 are executed.

If the front door frame 14 is closed and neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is set (steps S4001 to S4003: NO), normal ball entry management processing is executed (step S4004). When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening/closing execution mode is set (step S4001: NO, step S4002: YES), ball entry management processing during the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S4005). If the front door frame 14 is closed and the high-frequency support mode is set (step S4001: NO, step S4003: YES), ball entry management processing during the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S4006).

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing normal ball entry management processing in step S4004.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a (step S4101: YES), that is, when it is confirmed that the signal received from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a has switched from LOW level to HI level, when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a (step S4103: YES), that is, when it is received from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a If it is confirmed that the signal received has changed from LOW level to HI level, or if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a (step S4105: YES), that is, if it is confirmed that the signal received from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a has changed from LOW level to HI level, the value of the general winning counter 231a for normal use is increased by 1 (step S4102, step S4 104, step S4106).

If the ball entry management process is performed during the opening/closing execution mode, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter 232a for the opening/closing execution mode as processing corresponding to steps S4102, S4104, and S4106. Also, in the entering ball detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as a process corresponding to the specific control, the detection results of the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a are monitored, and when it is determined that one game ball is detected by any one of the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a, a process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the general winning hole 31 is executed.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S4107: YES), that is, when it is confirmed that the signal received from the special electric detection sensor 45a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the value of the special electric winning counter 231b for normal use is incremented by 1 (step S4108).

In the case of ball entry management processing during the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the special electric prize counter 232b for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as processing corresponding to step S4108, and in the case of ball entry management processing during the high frequency support mode, the value of the special electric prize counter 233b for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as processing corresponding to step S4108. Also, in the entering ball detection processing (step S3709) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) executed as processing corresponding to the specific control, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is monitored, and when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, the processing for making the number of game balls payout corresponding to the special electric winning device 32 is executed, and the processing for specifying the end trigger of the round game is executed.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a (step S4109: YES), that is, when it is confirmed that the signal received from the first operation opening detection sensor 46a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the value of the first operation counter 231c for normal use is added by 1 (step S4110).

If the ball entry management process is in the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 232c for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as processing corresponding to step S4110, and if the ball entry management process is in the high frequency support mode, the value of the high frequency support mode first operation counter 233c is incremented by 1 as processing corresponding to step S4110. Also, in the entering ball detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as a process corresponding to the specific control, the detection result of the first operation opening detection sensor 46a is monitored, and when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, the processing for making the number of game balls corresponding to the first operation opening 33 be paid out and the processing for specifying the acquisition timing of the holding information for the special figure are executed.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a (step S4111: YES), that is, when it is confirmed that the signal received from the second operation opening detection sensor 47a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the value of the second operation counter 231d for normal use is incremented by 1 (step S4112).

If the ball entry management process is in the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 232d for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as processing corresponding to step S4112, and if the ball entry management process is in the high frequency support mode, the value of the second operation counter 233d for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as processing corresponding to step S4112. Also, in the entering ball detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as a process corresponding to the specific control, the detection result of the second operation opening detection sensor 47a is monitored, and when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a, the process for making the game balls of the number corresponding to the second operation opening 34 be paid out and the process for specifying the acquisition timing of the reservation information for the special figure are executed.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S4113: YES), that is, when it is confirmed that the signal received from the outlet detection sensor 48a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1 (step S4114).

If the ball entry management process is performed during the opening/closing execution mode, 1 is added to the value of the out counter 232e for the opening/closing execution mode as a process corresponding to step S4114. Further, in the entering ball detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is not monitored.

By executing the processing of steps S4004 to S4006 as described above, the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 is measured using the general winning counters 231a, 232a and 233a, the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 is measured using the special electric winning counters 231b, 232b and 233b, and the number of game balls entering the first operating opening 33 is measured. is measured using first operation counters 231c, 232c, 233c, the number of game balls entering the second operation opening 34 is measured using second operation counters 231d, 232d, 233d, and the number of game balls entering the out opening 24a is measured using out counters 231e, 232e, 233e. As a result, the main side CPU 63 can grasp the ball entry history to each of the ball entry portions 24a, 31-34. In addition, since the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are separately provided, it is possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the ball-entering history of each of the ball-entering sections 24a, 31 to 34 by distinguishing between a situation in which neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is present, a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode is present, and a situation in which the high-frequency support mode is present.

Returning to the description of the check processing (FIG. 73), if an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, if the processing in step S4004 is performed, if the processing in step S4005 is performed, or if the processing in step S4006 is performed, result calculation processing is performed in step S4007, and display processing is performed in step S4008.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing result calculation processing in step S4007.

First, it is determined whether or not the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step S4201). The management start flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether or not the game history collection for calculating the management result of the game history should be executed. In the present embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA does not collect the game history for calculating the management result of the game history until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value. When the number is equal to or more than the number, collection of game histories is executed for calculating management results of game histories. At the stage of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is sometimes checked before shipment, and at that time, game balls are put in each ball entry section and the operation after that is checked. On the other hand, until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the collection of the game history for calculating the management result of the game history is not executed, so that the ball entry result at the time of the operation check as described above is not collected as the game history for calculating the management result of the game history.

Here, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the value of the management start flag is "0". In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are also "0". On the other hand, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped in the situation where the value of the management start flag is '1', and then the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in the situation where the backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65, the value of the management start flag remains '1'. In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are also maintained in the state before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Due to the above configuration, when the value of the management start flag is "0", the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e of the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e of the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are also "0".

Incidentally, when the main-side RAM 65 is cleared in step S105 or step S117 in the main process (FIG. 9), the target of the clearing process is the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are excluded from the targets of the clearing process. As a result, the manager of the game hall cannot intentionally clear the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0".

Further, the main CPU 63 may be configured to check whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) described later, and clear the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0" when it is confirmed that an abnormality has occurred. This makes it possible to initialize the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control when an abnormality occurs. Further, in this configuration, when an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" without clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0". Further, even if an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the calculation result storage area 234 may be configured to be excluded from being cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the total number is calculated by summing the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 (step S4202). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is greater than the management start reference value of "300" (step S4203).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, the management start flag of the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S4204). Further, the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e of the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0" (step S4205). As a result, after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started), all the information of the game history collected until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value is deleted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game history collection for calculating the management result of the game history until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, the total number is calculated as in step S4202 (step S4206). That is, the total number is calculated by summing the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is equal to or greater than "6000", which is the calculation reference number (step S4207).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4207, various parameters are calculated (step S4208). Specifically, the following 61st to 68th parameters are calculated when the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are K61 to K65, the values of the various counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232 are K71 to K75, and the values of the various counters 233a to 233e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are K81 to K85.
61st parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (“K61+K71+K81”דNumber of prize balls for winning in general prize-winning port 31”+“K62+K72+K82”דNumber of prize balls for winning in special electric prize-winning device 32”+“K63+K73+K83”דNumber of prize balls for winning in first operation port 33”+“K64+K74+K84” × "Number of prize balls for winning to the second operation opening 34") / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) 62nd parameter: Total number of game balls paid out in normal time (K61 × "general winning opening 31” + K62 × “Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize device 32” + K63 × “Number of prize balls for winning to first operation port 33” + K64 × “Number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34”) / ratio of total number of game balls discharged from game area PA in normal time (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65) 63rd parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out in open/close execution mode (K71 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K72 x "number of winning balls to special electric winning device 32" + K73 x "number of winning balls to winning to first operating opening 33" + K74 x "number of winning balls to winning to second operating opening 34") / total number of game balls discharged from game area PA in opening/closing execution mode (K71) + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75) ratio 64th parameter: Total number of game balls paid out in high-frequency support mode (K81 x "Number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K82 x "Number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K83 x "Number of winning balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K84 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" )/ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in the high-frequency support mode (K81+K82+K83+K84+K85) 65th parameter: total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 (K61+K71+K81)/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K61+K62+K63+K64+K65+K71+K7) 2 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) 66th parameter: total number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 (K63 + K73 + K83) / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) ratio 67th parameter: ("K62 + K72 + K82" x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + "K64 + K74 + K84" x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out ("K61 + K71 + K81" x "general entry "Number of prize balls for winning to prize opening 31" + "K62 + K72 + K82" x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize device 32" + "K63 + K73 + K83" x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + "K64 + K74 + K84" x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34") 68th parameter: "K62 + K7" 2 + K82" x "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric prize winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out ("K61 + K71 + K81" x "Number of prize balls for winning to the general prize winning port 31" + "K62 + K72 + K82" x "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric prize winning device 32" + "K63 + K73 + K83" x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operation port 33" Number of prize balls" + "K64 + K74 + K84" × "number of prize balls for winning to the second operation port 34") After that, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated in step S4208 are overwritten in the calculation result storage area 234 (step S4209). In this case, the 61st to 68th parameters of the calculation result of the previous processing that have already been stored in the calculation result storage area 234 are deleted. Since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the information of the 61st to 68th parameters calculated before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is stored in the calculation result storage area 234 even immediately after the start of supplying the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 when the backup power is supplied.

After that, the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e of the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0" (step S4210). As a result, it is possible to once erase the game history information at the moment when the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated.

It should be noted that immediately after the management start flag is set to "1", when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the value obtained by subtracting the management start reference value from the calculation reference number, the processing of steps S4208 to S4210 may be executed, and thereafter, when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the calculation reference number, the processing of steps S4208 to S4210 may be executed.

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing display processing in step S4008 in the check processing (FIG. 73).

First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is subtracted by 1 (step S4301). The update timing counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the timing for updating the display contents of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The main CPU 63 notifies the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters by controlling the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In this case, information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified is displayed on the first notification display device 69a. In addition, of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the one place is displayed by the third notification display device 69c. In the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the displays corresponding to the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters are sequentially switched in accordance with a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 68th parameter, which is the last display target, is displayed, the calculation result of the 61st parameter, which is the first display target, is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds.

Here, the calculation cycle of the 61st to 68th parameters in the main CPU 63 is 60 minutes at the shortest. On the other hand, the number of the 61st to 68th parameters is 8, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds. Therefore, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated by the main CPU 63 are displayed on the first to third display devices 69a to 69c at least once.

When the process of step S4301 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S4302). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4302, 1 is added to the value of the display object counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4303). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "7" (step S4304: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S4305).

The display target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the types of parameters to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the 61st to 68th parameters and the possible values of the display object counters "0" to "7". For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the 61st parameter which is the first display target is the display target of the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c, and when the display target counter value is "7", the 68th parameter which is the last display target is the display target of the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c.

When a negative determination is made in step S4304, or when the process of step S4305 is executed, display control is performed on the first notification display device 69a so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is displayed (step S4306). Also, the parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the calculation result storage area 234, and the read parameter is multiplied by 100 so that the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b and the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S4307).

Here, a display IC is provided corresponding to each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In step S4306, the main CPU 63 outputs display data to the display IC corresponding to the first notification display device 69a, and in step S4307, the main CPU 63 outputs display data to each of the display ICs corresponding to the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c. These display ICs can store display data when operating power is supplied, and display contents corresponding to the stored display data are continuously displayed on the corresponding notification display devices 69a to 69c. By changing the display data by the main side CPU 63, the display of the notification display devices 69a to 69c is changed to display contents corresponding to the changed display data. As a result, even after the management execution process (FIG. 71), which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control, is completed and the process corresponding to the specific control is resumed, the display corresponding to the display data set in the execution status of the process corresponding to the non-specific control is continued on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

Thereafter, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set as a value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4308).

By executing the display processing as described above, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the game history management results are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and regardless of whether the main controller 60 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by operating the game machine body 12 to open the outer frame 11.例文帳に追加By executing the display control of the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c regardless of the game situation and the state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for the display control of the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, and a work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control. The work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control can store and read information when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to specific control using a program for specific control and data for specific control. In addition, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control can store and read information when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63, whereas information can be read but cannot be stored when processing corresponding to specific control is executed by the main CPU 63. As a result, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control can be treated as dedicated storage areas for processing corresponding to specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control can be treated as storage areas dedicated for processing corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to clearly differentiate the storage destination of information in the main RAM 65 between the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information used in one of the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control from being erased when the other processing is executed.

The processing corresponding to specific control includes processing for controlling the progress of the game, and the processing corresponding to non-specific control includes processing for managing game history. As described above, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as dedicated storage areas for processing corresponding to specific control, while the work area 223 for non-specific control and stack area 224 for non-specific control are treated as dedicated storage areas for processing corresponding to non-specific control. As a result, information used in the processing for managing the game history, such as the information stored in the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234, can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

The main RAM 65 is provided with a normal counter area 231 in which information for managing the game history is stored, an opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, a high frequency support mode counter area 233, and a calculation result storage area 234. This allows the main CPU 63 to complete the processing for managing the game history. In addition, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the information on the game history and the information on various parameters calculated using the information on the game history.

Information of various registers of the main side CPU 63 is saved in the main side RAM 65 when the state of executing the processing corresponding to the specific control changes to the state of executing the processing corresponding to the non-specific control or when the state changes to the state of executing the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. Thus, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the various registers of the main side CPU 63 from being rewritten when executing the processing corresponding to the specific control. Further, when or after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is ended, the information saved in the main side RAM 65 is restored to various registers of the main side CPU 63 . As a result, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends, it is possible to execute the process corresponding to the specific control from the state of the various registers of the main CPU 63 before executing the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

When the state of executing the processing corresponding to the specific control changes to the state of executing the processing corresponding to the non-specific control or when the state of executing the processing corresponding to the non-specific control changes, the information of some registers among the various registers of the main side CPU 63 is saved in the main side RAM 65. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for saving the information in the registers of the main CPU 63 in the main RAM 65 .

When the state in which the process corresponding to the specific control is executed changes to the situation in which the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed or the situation changes to the situation in which the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the information of the register to be stored in the process corresponding to the non-specific control among the various registers of the main side CPU 63 is saved in the main side RAM 65. As a result, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the processing corresponding to the specific control can be resumed from the state of the register of the main CPU 63 before the execution of the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, and at the same time, the storage capacity necessary for saving the information of the register of the main CPU 63 in the main RAM 65 can be reduced.

When processing corresponding to non-specific control is started, information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control in processing corresponding to specific control, and each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control in processing corresponding to non-specific control. As a result, it becomes possible to save each information stored in various registers of the main CPU 63 at a timing preferable for each information, and to execute the processing for saving the information by distributing it between the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. In this case, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in the process corresponding to the specific control before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. As a result, it is possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before it changes after the call of the subroutine corresponding to the non-specific control or the start of the subroutine in the stack area 222 for specific control.

By saving the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register to the work area 223 for non-specific control rather than to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control can be reduced accordingly. Further, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the order of writing information is read first from the later information, so if the order of reading information is deviated due to some noise or the like, all the information of the subsequent reading order will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above event even when there is a large amount of information to be saved.

When the state of executing the processing corresponding to the specific control changes to the state of executing the processing corresponding to the non-specific control or the state of executing the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, the information of the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 is fixed information, and the information of the stack pointer is not saved in the main side RAM 65 at the start of the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, since it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving stack pointer information in the main RAM 65, the storage capacity of the main RAM 65 can be reduced accordingly. In addition, even if the information of the stack pointer is not saved in this way, when the process corresponding to the specific control changes to the process corresponding to the non-specific control or when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 becomes fixed information. is possible.

Although the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the configuration is not limited to this, and the information in the flag register may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. In addition, after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the processing corresponding to the specific control.

Further, the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. In addition, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to the registers by the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configuration of management processing. The configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the processing of steps S4401 to S4405 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S4401). As a result, it is possible to prevent timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of management execution processing, which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, which will be described later.

Thereafter, as "LD (_PSWBUF), PSW", the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the PSW buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by the load instruction (step S4402). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving the information of the flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, it is possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before being changed after the subroutine is called or the subroutine is started, in the work area 221 for specific control.

After that, by reading out the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution processing set in the non-specific control program, the management execution processing is started (step S4403). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the specific control stack area 222 by the push command. Then, when the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop command, and the program for the management process indicated by the return address is returned to.

When returning to the program for management processing after execution of the management execution processing, the information of the flag register saved in the PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S4402 is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)" (step S4404). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S4402 was executed last time. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

After that, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, interrupt permission is set (step S4405). This enables a new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 immediately before switching from specific control to non-specific control is saved in the work area 221 for specific control, not in the stack area 222 for specific control. This makes it possible to save the information of the flag register while suppressing the capacity of the stack area 222 for specific control.

Although the PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control is reserved as a dedicated area, it is not limited to this, and may be configured as a shared area in which other information can also be written. In other words, since it is not necessary to save the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control in a situation in which the management process is not executed, a shared area that is also used as a PSW buffer may be used when executing a predetermined arithmetic process in the process corresponding to the specific control in a situation in which the management process is not executed. In this case, since the shared area is certainly used to save the information in the flag register when executing the management process, it is necessary to write unnecessary information in the shared area before the management process is executed as information other than the information in the flag register.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configuration of the management execution process. The configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing management execution processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the processing of steps S4501 to S4515 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, Y(u+2) is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 by a load instruction as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control (step S4501).

After that, as "PUSH WA", the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push instruction (step S4502). In this case, the information in the WA register is saved in a storage area corresponding to the fixed address set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in step S4501. Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

After that, as "PUSH BC", the information of the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push instruction (step S4503). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

After that, as "PUSH DE", the information of the DE register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push instruction (step S4504). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

After that, as "PUSH HL", the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push instruction (step S4505). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

After that, as "PUSH IX", the information of the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push instruction (step S4506). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

After that, as "PUSH IY", the information of the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 (step S4507). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

After executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507, check processing is executed (step S4508). When executing the check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the check process is written by a push instruction to a storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Then, when the check process is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address is returned to. The contents of the check processing are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment.

After that, similarly to step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, Y(r+α) is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 by a load instruction as a fixed address when returning to the specific control (step S4509). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "POP IY", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the order preceding the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by the pop instruction (step S4510). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the memory area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP IX", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the order preceding the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by the pop instruction (step S4511). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the memory area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP HL", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information preceding the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by the pop instruction (step S4512). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the memory area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP DE", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the order preceding the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by the pop instruction (step S4513). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the memory area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP BC", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the order preceding the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by the pop instruction (step S4514). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the memory area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP WA", the WA register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the order preceding the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by the pop instruction (step S4515). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the memory area to be written in the previous order.

By executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main CPU 63 can be restored to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers. In this case, in steps S4502 to S4507, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, is saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are registers used in check processing (step S4508) which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers to the stack area 224 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the check process (step S4508), the information of these registers used for the specific control can be saved before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, the information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is returned to these registers when the non-specific control is finished, so that the state of these registers can be restored to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, by selectively saving the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in the check processing corresponding to the non-specific control to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, it is possible to reduce the capacity to be secured for saving the register information in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. . Therefore, it is possible to save the above register information while securing a large capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control that can be used in the check process.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configuration of the management execution process. The configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing management execution processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps S4601 to S4605 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, Y(u+2) is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 by a load instruction as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control (step S4601).

After that, as "LD (_ALLBUF), ALL", the information of all the registers of the main side CPU 63 is saved in the ALL buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S4602). As a result, not only the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register used in the check processing, which is the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but also the other registers, the information of all registers is collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. By saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control work area 223 in this way, there is no need to selectively save the information of the registers of the main CPU 63 .

Here, the registers to be saved include the flag register. The flag register information is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S3802 of the management process (FIG. 70), but in step S4602 the flag register information is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control. This eliminates the need to selectively save the information in the registers of the main CPU 63, including the information in the flag registers. Even if the information in the flag register is redundantly saved in this way, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored from the special control stack area 222 in step S3804 of the management process (FIG. 70) after the management execution process is completed.

Thereafter, check processing is executed (step S4603). When executing the check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the check process is written by a push instruction to a storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Then, when the check process is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address is returned to. The contents of the check processing are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment.

After that, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, Y(r+α) is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 by a load instruction as a fixed address when returning to the specific control (step S4604). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "LD ALL, (_ALLBUF)", the information saved in the ALL buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the corresponding registers of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S4605). This makes it possible to restore the information in all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

According to the above configuration, the information in the register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the non-specific control work area 223 instead of being saved in the non-specific control stack area 224, so that the capacity of the non-specific control stack area 224 can be reduced accordingly. Further, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the order of writing information is read first from the later information, so if the order of reading information is deviated due to some noise or the like, all the information of the subsequent reading order will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above event even when there is a large amount of information to be saved.

Further, when the information of the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the information of all the registers including not only the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register but also other registers used in the check processing which is the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. By saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control work area 223 in this way, there is no need to selectively save the information of the registers of the main CPU 63 .

It should be noted that after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. In addition, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is restored to all the registers by the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information may be restored to all the registers by the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configuration of the management execution process. The configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing management execution processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the processing of steps S4701 to S4706 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, as "LD (_SPBUF), SP", the information of the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 is saved in the SP buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by a load instruction (step S4701). As a result, the information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

After that, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S4702).

After that, as "PUSH ALL", the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 and the storage area continuous from this storage area (step S4703). In this case, since the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 cannot be stored in one storage area in the non-specific control stack area 224, as described above, the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 and the storage area continuous from this storage area are used as the save destinations of the register information. Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written next to the storage area in which the last information is stored when the information of all the registers is saved.

After that, check processing is executed (step S4704). When executing the check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the check process is written by a push instruction to a storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Then, when the check process is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address is returned to. The contents of the check processing are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment.

After that, as "POP ALL", the memory area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 and the information saved in the storage area contiguous from the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 are overwritten in the registers corresponding to each of the main CPU 63 by the pop instruction (step S4705). As a result, the information in all the registers of the main CPU 63 can be restored to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

Thereafter, as "LD SP, (_SPBUF)", the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the SP buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S4706). As a result, the information in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

According to the above configuration, when the information of the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the information of all the registers including not only the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register used in the check processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but also other registers are collectively saved to the stack area 224 for non-specific control. By saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 in this way, there is no need to selectively save the information in the registers of the main CPU 63 .

Information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Thereby, even if the information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started can be varied, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished and the process corresponding to the specific control is returned, the information of the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 can be restored to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

It should be noted that after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. In addition, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is restored to all the registers by the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information may be restored to all the registers by the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configuration of management processing and management execution processing. The configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps S4801 to S4811 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and specific control data.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S4801). As a result, it is possible to prevent timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of management execution processing, which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, which will be described later.

Thereafter, as "PUSH PSW", the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction (step S4802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving the information of the flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, it is possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before the subroutine is called or changed after the subroutine is started in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "LD WA, 0", the WA register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S4803). Also, as "LD BC, 0", the BC register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S4804). Also, as "LD DE, 0", the DE register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S4805). Also, as "LD HL, 0", the HL register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S4806). Also, as "LD IX, 0", the IX register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S4807). Also, as "LD IY, 0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S4808).

The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers. In this case, in steps S4803 to S4808, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are cleared to "0". These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are registers used in check processing (step S4902) which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. By clearing such registers to "0" prior to execution of management execution processing (step S4809), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, the state of these registers can be set to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started before processing corresponding to non-specific control is started.

In addition, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is unnecessary information in the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the specific control that is returned after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

After executing the processes of steps S4803 to S4808, the management execution process is started by reading out the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S4809). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the specific control stack area 222 by the push command. Then, when the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop command, and the program for the management process indicated by the return address is returned to.

When returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S4802 is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 by the pop instruction as "POP PSW" (step S4810). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S4802 was executed last time. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

After that, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, interrupt permission is set (step S4811). This enables a new execution of timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing management execution processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the processes of steps S4901 to S4909 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, Y(u+2) is set to the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control by a load instruction as "LD SP, Y(u+2)" (step S4901).

After that, check processing is executed (step S4902). When the check process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When the subroutine program is executed, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the check process is executed is written in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push instruction. Then, when the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address is returned to. The contents of the check processing are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment.

After that, as "LD WA, 0", the WA register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S4903). Also, as "LD BC, 0", the BC register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S4904). Also, as "LD DE, 0", the DE register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S4905). Also, as "LD HL, 0", the HL register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S4906). Also, as "LD IX, 0", the IX register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S4907). Also, as "LD IY, 0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S4908).

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are registers used in the check processing (step S4902) which is processing corresponding to non-specific control as already described. By clearing such registers to "0" prior to returning from the processing corresponding to the non-specific control to the processing corresponding to the specific control, the state of these registers can be set to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started before returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control.

Further, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the processing corresponding to the specific control is started is unnecessary information in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control after the processing corresponding to the specific control is finished. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem occurs in the process corresponding to the non-specific control that is returned after the process corresponding to the specific control is completed.

After that, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, Y(r+α) is set in the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 by a load instruction as a fixed address when returning to the specific control (step S4909). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

According to the above configuration, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main side CPU 63 are cleared to "0" when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed. This eliminates the need to save the information in each of these registers to the main RAM 65 . Therefore, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving each of these pieces of information.

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main side CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control from the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. As a result, when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to restore the state of each of these registers to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

The state where each register is cleared to "0" is the state when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting each register to a predetermined state when starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control.

When starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the registers to be cleared to "0" are some of the various registers of the main side CPU 63 . As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting each register to a predetermined state when starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control.

In the configuration in which the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are cleared to "0" when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and returning to processing corresponding to specific control, the other registers are not cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the information necessary for the process corresponding to the specific control from being erased at the start of the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

Information in registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is not saved in the main RAM 65 at the start of processing corresponding to non-specific control. This eliminates the need to secure an area in the main RAM 65 for saving these pieces of information.

The information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is the information that is not used in the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. Thus, even if each register is cleared to "0" when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, it is possible not to affect the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is finished.

Instead of clearing the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main side CPU 63 at steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 81), these registers may be initialized. In other words, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" once, and then the information of each register is set so as to be in the initial state. In this case, by configuring each register to be set to the initial state in steps S4903 to S4908, when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control, the state of each register can be returned to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

Further, instead of clearing the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main side CPU 63 to "0" at steps S4803 to S4808 in the management processing (FIG. 81), all of these registers may be set to "1". In this case, by setting "1" to all of the above registers in steps S4903 to S4908, when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control, the state of each of these registers can be returned to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the specific control. In addition, after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the processing corresponding to the specific control.

Further, the processing for clearing the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 to "0" is executed in the processing corresponding to the specific control before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for clearing these registers to "0" may be executed in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the processing of clearing the above registers to "0" is performed in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

Also, in the management process (FIG. 81), the "PUSH PSW" process in step S4802 is executed before setting "0" to each register in steps S4803 to S4808. It may be configured to be executed before the subroutine program is read. This makes it possible to save the information in the flag register after being changed by the load instructions in steps S4803 to S4808 to the stack area 222 for specific control.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in the configuration for collecting information on game history. The configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration in this embodiment.

The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64 and a main RAM 65 as in the fifteenth embodiment. Moreover, unlike the fifteenth embodiment, the MPU 62 is electrically connected to a management RAM 241 . In other words, a management RAM 241 is provided separately from the main RAM 65 built into the MPU 62 , and the management RAM 241 is externally attached to the MPU 62 .

The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control, as in the fifteenth embodiment. Therefore, when the main CPU 63 uses the specific control program and the specific control data in the main ROM 64 to execute the process corresponding to the specific control, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 in the main RAM 65 are used. 23 and a stack area 224 for non-specific control.

The management RAM 241 is provided with a normal counter area 231 , an opening/closing execution mode counter area 232 , a high-frequency support mode counter area 233 , and a calculation result storage area 234 . The contents of these areas 231 to 234 are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment. Also in this embodiment, management execution processing including check processing is executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control in the main CPU 63 . In the check process, game histories are collected by updating the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 in the same manner as in the fifteenth embodiment, and the 61st to 68th parameters calculated using the collected game histories are written to the calculation result storage area 234. That is, since the management RAM 241 is used when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the management RAM 241 is used as a work area for non-specific control.

In addition, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control of the main side RAM 65 are appropriately used when collecting the game history and calculating the 61st to 68th parameters using the collected history information.

According to the above configuration, the normal counter area 231 , open/close execution mode counter area 232 , high frequency support mode counter area 233 and calculation result storage area 234 are provided in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62 . As a result, it is possible to store the collected game history information without increasing the necessary storage capacity in the non-specific control work area 223 in the main RAM 65, and to store the 61st to 68th parameters calculated using the game history. In addition, it is possible to increase the storage capacity for storing game history information while using the general-purpose MPU 62 .

The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control of the main side RAM 65 are appropriately used when collecting the game history and calculating the 61st to 68th parameters using the collected history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing speed from being extremely lowered when executing the processing related to the history information.

In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the management RAM 241 is provided with the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234, a storage area corresponding to the history memory 117 in the first embodiment may be set. In this case, it is necessary to increase the storage capacity required to store the history information, but since the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62 is used as a storage means for storing the history information, it is possible to flexibly cope with the increase in storage capacity.

<Twenty-Second Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 . The configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps S5001 to S5019 in the main processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S5001). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the start of operation and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5002).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5003), whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step S5004), whether or not the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13 (step S5005), and whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11 (step S5006).

In this embodiment, a front door open sensor 95 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the main side CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closed detection signal to the main side CPU 63, and when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the main side CPU 63. A main side CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in a closed state when receiving a closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in an open state when receiving an opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95.例文帳に追加

Further, in this embodiment, a body open sensor 96 for detecting whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the detection result of the body open sensor 96 is input to the main side CPU 63. In this case, when the game machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closed detection signal to the main side CPU 63, and when the game machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 sends an open detection signal to the main side CPU 63. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the game machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closed detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and specifies that the game machine main body 12 is in the open state when receiving the open detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96.例文帳に追加

If the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S5003: YES) and a negative determination is made in any one of steps S5004 to S5006, then clear processing at non-setting update is executed (step S5007). In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the area cleared to "0" is initialized except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, the area indicating whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display part 38a is not variably displayed and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general electricity reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the reservation information for the general figure display unit 38a is erased. Also, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the various registers of the main side CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized.

In the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". Thus, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while the reset button 68c is pressed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0".

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S5003: NO), it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S5008). A power failure flag is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and when predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation result matches the checksum saved when the power was shut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S5009). When the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed in step S5007, or when the affirmative determination is made in step S5009, it is determined whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S5010). Specifically, when the set value set in the set value counter is one of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, it is determined to be normal, and when it is “0” or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5008 to S5010, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after executing an error notification process for notifying the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S5011), an infinite loop is formed. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a clear process (step S5018) at the time of setting update, which will be described later.

If affirmative determinations are made in all of steps S5008 to S5010, power-on setting processing is executed (step S5012). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 .

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when the main processing is started. The state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited is canceled at the timing before the processing of step S5012 is completed and the processing of step S5013 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt processing is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power-on setting process of step S5012 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S5013 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 does not start the process for advancing the game until the relevant situation is reached.

After that, the remaining processing of steps S5013 to S5016 is performed. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S5013 to S5016 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S5013 to S5016 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps S5013 to S5016, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

On the other hand, if the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S5003: YES) and all of steps S5004 to S5006 are affirmative, processing for updating the set values is executed. Specifically, first, copy processing of the setting value is executed (step S5017). In the copy processing, the information of the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in the copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, even if the information of the setting value counter is cleared to "0" in the setting update clearing process (step S5018) to be executed later, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped) before the clearing process at the setting value update is executed can be grasped.

After that, clear processing at the time of setting update is executed (step S5018). In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the area cleared to "0" is initialized except for the area indicating whether the lottery mode in the work area 221 for specific control is the high probability mode and the copy area. As a result, the game cycle is not executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not executed, and the general pattern display part 38a is not variably displayed and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general electricity reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the reservation information for the general figure display unit 38a is erased. In addition, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the area cleared to "0" is initialized. In addition, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the set value counter used to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the clearing process at the time of updating the settings, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized.

On the other hand, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the area indicating whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is not cleared to "0", so even if the setting value updating process (step S5019) is executed, the winning lottery mode can be maintained in the mode before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, since the copy area is not cleared to "0" in the clear processing at the time of setting update, it is possible to specify the set value that was set before the execution of the clear processing at the time of setting update.

In the clear processing at the time of setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". Thus, even if set value update processing capable of changing the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, it is possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0".

Then, after executing the set value update process in step S5019, the process proceeds to step S5012. The set value update process will be described below. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing setting value update processing. The processes of steps S5101 to S5114 in the set value update process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and specific control data.

First, a set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5101). The setting value counter is a counter for specifying which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is by the main side CPU 63 . By setting "1" to the set value counter, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point when the set value update process is executed.

After that, the setting value display start process is executed (step S5102). In the setting value display start process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number "1" corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed. The manager of the game hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by confirming the third notification display device 69c when changing the setting value.

After that, it is determined whether or not one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S5103). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal received from the outlet detection sensor 48a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S5103, it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process returns to step S5103, and it is determined whether or not one game ball has been detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S5104: YES), the value of the set value counter in the specific control work area 221 is incremented by 1 (step S5105). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S5106: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S5107). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to be one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

When a negative determination is made in step S5106, or when the process of step S5107 is executed, the setting value display update process is executed (step S5108). In the setting value display update process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the specific control work area 221 is displayed. By checking the third notification display device 69c, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the update button 68b is pressed.

After executing the process of step S5108, it returns to step S5103 and it is determined whether one game ball was detected by the out mouth detection sensor 48a. When one game ball is not detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a (step S5103: NO), the processing after step S5104 is executed again. When one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S5103: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5109). In this case, it is not specified whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is in the OFF state, but it is specified whether or not switching from the ON state to the OFF state has occurred, and if it is specified that the switching has occurred, an affirmative determination is made in step S5109.

If not switched to the OFF state (step S5109: NO), the process of step S5109 is executed again. As a result, the process waits until the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off. If it has been switched to the OFF state (step S5109: YES), the setting value display end processing is executed (step S5110). In the setting value display end processing, the display of the setting values on the third notification display device 69c is ended. In this case, display of information of various parameters stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is started on the first to third display devices 69a to 69c.

After that, the set value comparison process is executed (step S5111). In the set value comparison process, it is determined whether or not the information of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control matches the information stored in the copy area in the work area 221 for specific control. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting value set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is the same as the setting value set in the current setting value updating process.

When the setting value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the setting value set in the current setting value updating process are the same (step S5112: NO), the notifying process at the time of non-change is executed (step S5113). In the non-change notification process, a setting maintenance command indicating that the setting value has not been changed is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Upon receiving the setting maintenance command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting maintenance, and also outputs the sound "setting maintenance" from the speaker section 54 . In addition, the character image "The setting is maintained." is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁

These notifications are maintained until the notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting maintenance command is transmitted, and are terminated when the notification execution period elapses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the set value is maintained. In the notifying process at the time of non-change, the display content on at least one of the first to third notifying display devices 69a to 69c is changed to the display content corresponding to the setting maintenance, so that the setting value is maintained.

When the setting value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the setting value set in the current setting value updating process are not the same (step S5112: YES), a notification process at the time of change is executed (step S5114). In notification processing at the time of change, a setting change command indicating that the setting value has been changed is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Upon receiving the setting change command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the setting change, and outputs a voice saying "Setting change" from the speaker unit 54 . In addition, the character image of "The setting is changed." is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁

These notifications are maintained until the notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting change command is transmitted, and are terminated when the notification execution period elapses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the setting value has been changed. In addition, in the notification processing at the time of change, the display content on at least one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is changed to display content corresponding to the setting change.

As described above, in order to execute the setting value updating process in the present embodiment, it is necessary that not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, but also that the reset button 68c is pressed, the front door frame 14 is opened, and the gaming machine body 12 is opened. This makes it difficult to illegally execute the set value update process.

Also, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 must be in an open state in order to execute the set value update process. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally execute the set value update processing, the fraudulent act is conspicuous because the front door frame 14 and the game machine main body 12 are in the open state, and the manager of the game hall can easily find the fraudulent act.

In particular, in order to execute the setting value updating process, not only the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 are required, so that the work of the fraudulent act can be complicated and the fraudulent act can be conspicuous.

In addition, in a configuration in which the processing for progressing the game is not resumed when the set value update processing is not completed, in order to finalize the set value selected in the set value update processing and finish the set value update processing, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the out port 24a, cause the out port detection sensor 48a to detect the game ball, and then turn off the setting key insertion portion 68a. As a result, even if the set value update process is illegally executed, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for ending the set value update process and returning to the process for progressing the game.

Also, the set value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is compared with the set value selected in the set value updating process, and a notification corresponding to whether or not both set values are the same is executed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the setting value has been changed by the setting value updating process.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The timer interrupt process is performed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) while the processes of steps S5013 to S5016 are being performed in the main process (FIG. 84). The program corresponding to timer interrupt processing is set as a program for specific control.

In steps S5201 to S5205, the same processes as steps S301 to S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

After that, a setting confirmation process is executed (step S5206). When executing the setting confirmation process, a subroutine program corresponding to the setting confirmation process set in the specific control program is executed. When the subroutine program is executed, information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process after execution of the setting confirmation process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the setting confirmation process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop instruction, and the program for the timer interrupt process indicated by the return address is returned to.

FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process. The processing of steps S5301 to S5312 in the setting confirmation processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, it is determined whether or not the setting value corresponding to the information of the setting value counter in the specific control work area 221 is being displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S5301). If a negative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether it is neither the game round nor the opening/closing execution mode (step S5302), and the pattern fluctuation display time in the general pattern display unit 38a and the general electrical role 34a It is determined whether it is neither a general electrical open state (step S5303), the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 It is determined (step S5304), and the outer frame 11 is played It is determined whether or not the technical device main body 12 is in the open state (step S5305), and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON (step S5306). Whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is determined based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 as in step S5005 in the main process (FIG. 84), and whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is open is determined based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 as in step S5006 in the main process (FIG. 84).

If a negative determination is made in any one of steps S5302 to S5306, this setting confirmation process ends without executing the processes of steps S5307 to S5309. If all of steps S5302 to S5306 result in an affirmative determination, a setting value display start process is executed (step S5307). In the setting value display start process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number of the setting value corresponding to the information of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is displayed. When confirming the setting values, the manager of the game hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by looking at the third notification display device 69c.

After that, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5308). The game stop flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is a situation in which an affirmative determination is made in step S5207 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86) and the processing of steps S5208 to S5221 is not executed, that is, whether or not the execution of the processing for progressing the game should be stopped. By setting the game stop flag to "1", the process of steps S5208 to S5221 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S5207 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86). As a result, the setting value is confirmed while the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped. However, even in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S5201 to S5205 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86) is executed, so even in a situation where the set value is being checked, blackout monitoring is executed, and the hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is performed.

After that, a confirmation notification start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5309). Upon receiving the confirmation notification start command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission part 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the setting confirmation, and outputs the sound "Setting confirmation is in progress" from the speaker part 54. - 特許庁In addition, the character image "Confirming settings" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁These notifications are continued until a confirmation notification end command is received from the main side CPU 63 . It should be noted that an external output indicating that the setting value is being checked may be provided.

As described above, it is neither the game time nor the opening/closing execution mode, and neither the pattern fluctuation display time in the general pattern display unit 38a nor the general electrical open state in which the general electrical accessory 34a can be in the open state.

In addition, in order to make the display for confirming the set value on the third notification display device 69c, it is necessary not only to turn on the setting key insertion part 68a, but also to open the front door frame 14 and open the game machine main body 12.例文帳に追加As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally perform display for confirming the set values, it is possible to make it difficult to do so.

Also, in order for the display for confirming the set value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 must be in an open state. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally perform display for confirming the set value, the fraudulent act is conspicuous because the front door frame 14 and the game machine main body 12 are in an open state, and the manager of the game hall can easily find the fraudulent act.

In particular, in order to make the display for confirming the set value appear on the third notification display device 69c, not only the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 necessary to expose the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 are required.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off (step S5310). If the OFF operation is performed (step S5310: YES), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5311). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S5207 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86), so that the processing of steps S5208 to S5221 is executed. As a result, the state in which the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped is cancelled.

Thereafter, a confirmation notification end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5312). Upon receiving the confirmation notification end command, the sound emission control device 81 terminates the notification indicating that the set values are being confirmed in the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section .

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86), after the setting confirmation processing in step S5206 is finished, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped (step S5207). In this case, when the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" in the setting confirmation process of step S5206, an affirmative determination is made in step S5207 and the processes of steps S5208 to S5221 are not executed. Further, even if the occurrence of fraud is detected in the fraud detection processing of step S5205, an affirmative determination is made in step S5207 and the processing of steps S5208 to S5221 is not executed.

In steps S5208 to S5219, the same processes as steps S307 to S318 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. Also, in step S5221, the same processing as in step S3719 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) in the fifteenth embodiment is executed.

On the other hand, in step S5220, RAM monitoring processing is executed. When the RAM monitoring process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the RAM monitoring process set in the specific control program is executed. When the subroutine program is executed, information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process after the RAM monitoring process is executed is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. When the RAM monitoring process ends, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop instruction, and the program for the timer interrupt process indicated by the return address is returned to.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing RAM monitoring processing. The processing of steps S5401 to S5412 in the RAM monitoring processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5401). In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, it is possible to monitor whether or not the state of a storage area in which information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 in the work area 221 for specific control is different from the initial state, and if the state is different from the initial state, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. In this case, when the initial state of the storage area is set to a value of '0', occurrence of an abnormality is determined when '1' is stored in the storage area, and when the initial state of the storage area is set to a value of '1', occurrence of an abnormality is determined when the value of the storage area is set to '0'. In addition to the monitoring method described above, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

If it is determined at step S5401 that there is an abnormality (step S5402: YES), the processing from step S5409 to step S5412 is executed. If it is determined that there is no abnormality in step S5401 (step S5402: NO), the process proceeds to step S5403.

In step S5403, monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, it is possible to monitor whether or not the state of a storage area in which information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is different from the initial state, and if the state is different from the initial state, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. In this case, when the initial state of the storage area is set to a value of '0', occurrence of an abnormality is determined when '1' is stored in the storage area, and when the initial state of the storage area is set to a value of '1', occurrence of an abnormality is determined when the value of the storage area is set to '0'. In addition to the monitoring method described above, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

If it is determined at step S5403 that there is an abnormality (step S5404: YES), the processing from step S5409 to step S5412 is executed. If it is determined that there is no abnormality in step S5403 (step S5404: NO), the process proceeds to step S5405.

In step S5405, monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the non-specific control work area 223 due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, it is possible to monitor whether or not the state of a storage area in which information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control work area 223 is different from the initial state, and if the state is different from the initial state, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. In this case, when the initial state of the storage area is set to a value of '0', occurrence of an abnormality is determined when '1' is stored in the storage area, and when the initial state of the storage area is set to a value of '1', occurrence of an abnormality is determined when the value of the storage area is set to '0'. In addition to the monitoring method described above, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

If it is determined at step S5405 that there is an abnormality (step S5406: YES), the processing from step S5409 to step S5412 is executed. If it is determined that there is no abnormality in step S5405 (step S5406: NO), the process proceeds to step S5407.

In step S5407, monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the stack area 224 for non-specific control due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, it is possible to monitor whether or not the state of a storage area in which information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is different from the initial state, and if the state is different from the initial state, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. In this case, when the initial state of the storage area is set to a value of '0', occurrence of an abnormality is determined when '1' is stored in the storage area, and when the initial state of the storage area is set to a value of '1', occurrence of an abnormality is determined when the value of the storage area is set to '0'. In addition to the monitoring method described above, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte differs from the value that can be set in a normal state.

If it is determined at step S5407 that there is an abnormality (step S5408: YES), the processing from step S5409 to step S5412 is executed. Specifically, first, copy processing of the setting value is executed (step S5409). In the copy process, the information of the set value counter used for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in the copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to "0" in the abnormal clearing process (step S5410) executed later, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormal clearing process is executed can be grasped.

After that, a clear process at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5410). In the error clearing process, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". Initialization is performed after clearing to "0". That is, in the RAM monitoring process, when it is specified that any one of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control has an abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control except the copy area is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". do. As a result, when there is a possibility that some kind of information abnormality has occurred in the main side RAM 65, it is possible to prevent the execution of both the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control in that state.

When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the return address information after execution of the RAM monitoring process is also erased. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", after the process of step S5412 is completed, the predetermined program is uniquely restored. Specifically, it is configured to return to the process of step S5013 in the main process (FIG. 22) univocally. However, the program that returns uniquely is not limited to step S5013, and may be step S5221 in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86). When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, an abnormality command indicating that the clear processing at the time of abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5411). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clear, and outputs the sound "forced clear" from the speaker unit 54. In addition, the character image "Forcibly cleared" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the notification is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. The notification end operation may be, for example, pressing the update button 68b or pressing the reset button 68c. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the main side RAM 65 has been forcibly cleared.

Thereafter, set value update processing is executed (step S5412). That is, when the clearing process at the time of abnormality occurs, "0" clear including the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is executed, so the set value update processing is executed to reset the set value of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁The contents of the set value update process are the same as those in step S5019 of the main process (FIG. 84). Therefore, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated step by step, and the selected set value is determined by detecting the game ball with the out-hole detection sensor 48a. The set value being updated and the determined set value are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. After that, when the setting key insertion portion 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the end condition of the setting value updating process is satisfied.

Here, it is not determined that the termination condition is satisfied only when the setting key insertion part 68a is in the OFF state, but it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied when the setting key insertion part 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. When the setting value update process is executed in the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88), the setting key insertion part 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the setting value update process. Therefore, in order to satisfy the condition for ending the setting value update process, it is necessary to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion part 68a, perform the ON operation, and then perform the OFF operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value update process from ending even though the manager of the game hall has not performed a normal operation.

When the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the condition for terminating the setting value update processing is satisfied, step S5111 in the setting value update processing (FIG. 85) is executed to compare whether or not the setting value stored in the copy area in the specific control work area 221 and the setting value currently set in the setting value counter in the specific control work area 221 are the same. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value set before the execution of the error clearing process (step S5410) is the same as the set value set in the current set value update process. If both setting values are the same (step S5112: NO), the setting maintenance notification described above is performed by executing the notification processing for non-change (step S5113). On the other hand, if the two setting values are different (step S5112: YES), the already explained setting change notification is performed by executing the change notification processing (step S5114).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In order to execute the setting value updating process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, it is necessary that not only the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on but also the reset button 68c is pressed, the front door frame 14 is opened, and the game machine main body 12 is opened. This makes it difficult to illegally execute the set value update process.

In order to execute the set value update process, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine body 12 must be open. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally execute set value update processing, the fraudulent act is conspicuous because the front door frame 14 and the game machine main body 12 are in an open state, and the manager of the game hall can easily find the fraudulent act.

In particular, in order to execute the setting value updating process, not only the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 are required, so that the work of the fraudulent act can be complicated and the fraudulent act can be conspicuous.

In a configuration that does not return to the processing for progressing the game when the set value update processing is not completed, in order to finalize the set value selected in the set value update processing and finish the set value update processing, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the out port 24a, cause the out port detection sensor 48a to detect the game ball, and then turn off the setting key insertion part 68a. As a result, even if the set value update process is illegally executed, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for ending the set value update process and returning to the process for progressing the game.

A set value set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is compared with a set value selected in set value update processing, and a notification corresponding to whether or not both set values are the same is executed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the setting value has been changed by the setting value updating process.

Under the condition that neither the game time nor the opening/closing execution mode, and neither the pattern fluctuation display times in the general pattern display unit 38a nor the general electrical open state in which the general electrical accessory 34a can be in the open state, the display for confirming the set value is performed on the third notification display device 69c, whereby it is possible to prevent the work of confirming the set value from being performed in the situation where the game is being played.

In order to perform the display for confirming the setting value on the third notification display device 69c, it is necessary not only to turn on the setting key insertion part 68a but also to open the front door frame 14 and open the game machine main body 12.例文帳に追加As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally perform display for confirming the set values, it is possible to make it difficult to do so.

The front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 must be in an open state so that the display for confirming the set value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally perform display for confirming the set values, the fraudulent act is conspicuous because the front door frame 14 and the game machine main body 12 are in an open state, and the manager of the game hall can easily find the fraudulent act.

In particular, in order to make the display for confirming the set value appear on the third notification display device 69c, not only the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 necessary to expose the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 are required.

When it is specified that any one of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control has an abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". Thus, when there is a possibility that some kind of information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 65, it is possible to prevent the execution of both the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control in that state.

In the process corresponding to the specific control, it is monitored whether or not an information abnormality has occurred not only in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but also in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which whether or not an information abnormality has occurred is monitored separately for the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

When it is specified that any one of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control has an abnormality, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0" in the process corresponding to the specific control. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to the configuration in which the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control are separately cleared to "0".

When the error clearing process is executed due to the occurrence of an information error, the set value updating process is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing even though the setting value is not set. In this case, setting maintenance notification is performed when the set value set before the execution of the clear processing at the time of abnormality is the same as the set value set by the set value update processing after the execution of the clear processing at the time of the abnormality. As a result, setting maintenance information is performed by resetting the set value set in the previous situation even if the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed, and it is possible to clearly inform the player that the set value has not changed even if the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed. Incidentally, since it is common to record the set values of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall, it is possible to execute the set value update processing after the execution of the clear processing at the time of abnormality so that the recorded set values become the set values.

The condition for executing the setting value updating process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started may be different from the above embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing another form of main processing. In the main process, steps S5501 to S5506 and steps S5508 to S5520 are the same as steps S5001 to S5019 of the main process (FIG. 84) in the above embodiment. On the other hand, in the main process, in step S5507, it is determined whether or not the operation handle of the shooting operation device 28 operated to shoot the game ball to the game area PA has been rotated from the initial rotation position. Then, the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5503: YES), the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON (step S5504: YES), the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S5505: YES), the gaming machine body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S5506: YES), and the operation handle of the shooting operation device 28 is moved from the initial rotation position. If the rotating operation is performed (step S5507: YES), set value update processing (step S5520) is executed. As a result, in order to execute the set value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, it is necessary not only to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion part 68a and perform the ON operation, but also to start the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the operation handle of the shooting operation device 28 is rotated. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally changing the set value. Incidentally, in step S5507, instead of determining whether or not the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 has been rotated from the initial rotation position, it may be determined whether or not the firing operation device 28 is being touched by the player.

In addition, as conditions for executing the set value updating process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, both the conditions that the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the game machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 are set, but only one of these conditions may be set.

In addition, as a condition for executing the setting value updating process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed is set, but the condition may not be set.

Further, as a condition for executing the setting value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the condition that the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while the game ball is being detected by the gate detection sensor 49a may be set. As a result, in order to execute the set value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, it is necessary not only to insert the setting key into the setting key inserting part 68a and perform the ON operation, but also to start the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the game balls staying in the through gate 35.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally changing the set value.

Further, the content of the operation for finalizing the set value in the set value update process may be different from that in the above embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing a set value update process in another form. In the set value update process, steps S5601 to S5602 and steps S5604 to S5614 are the same as steps S5101 to S5102 and steps S5104 to S5114 of the set value update process (FIG. 85) in the above embodiment. On the other hand, in the set value update process, in step S5603, it is not determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, but it is determined whether or not the ON continuation period during which the ON signal is continuously output from the gate detection sensor 49a is equal to or longer than the end reference period (specifically, 5 seconds). Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, the setting value being selected is fixed, and the process proceeds to step S5609. According to this configuration, in order to fix the set value being selected, it is necessary to intentionally retain the game ball in the through gate 35 for the end reference period or more. The game ball stays in the through gate 35 for more than the end reference period does not occur in the situation where the normal game is played. As a result, it is possible to make it so that the condition for fixing the set value being selected is not established or is difficult to be established in a situation where a normal game is being played. Moreover, even if the setting value update process is started due to fraud, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for fixing the setting value being selected in the setting value update process.

Further, in the set value update process, the selected setting value may be determined when the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position, or the selected setting value may be determined when the shooting operation device 28 is touched by the player.

In the set value update process, the selected setting value may be determined when the special electric detection sensor 45a detects that the game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 provided with the opening/closing member, or the selected setting value may be determined when the second operation opening detection sensor 47a detects that the game ball has entered the second operation opening 34 provided with the opening/closing member. In this case, in order to fix the set value being selected, it is necessary to maintain the game ball after manually opening the target ball entry part, so that the act of illegally changing the set value can be made difficult.

Further, in the setting value updating process, the set value being selected may be determined based on detection of the game ball entering the second ball entering part after the game ball entering the first ball entering part is detected. In this case, in order to fix the set value being selected, it is necessary to enter game balls into a plurality of ball entry parts by maintenance according to a predetermined order, so that it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the set value. In this case, by setting both the first ball-entering part and the second ball-entering part to be ball-entering parts that are not provided with an opening/closing member, it is possible to prevent the workability of regular work from being extremely lowered.

Further, in the setting value update process, by switching the setting key insertion part 68a from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting value being selected may be determined and the end condition of the setting value update process may be satisfied.

Further, the operation for updating the setting value by one step in the setting value update process is not limited to the configuration in which the update button 68b is pressed, and the setting value may be updated by one step by pressing the reset button 68c.

In addition, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a state where the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON by the setting key, and the front door frame 14 is not in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 or the gaming machine main body 12 is not in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the clear processing at non-setting update (step S5007) is not limited to being executed, and the clear processing at non-setting update is not executed. may be configured. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update against the will of the manager of the game hall.

In addition, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a state where the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned ON by the setting key, and the front door frame 14 is not in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 or the gaming machine main body 12 is not in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the clear processing at the time of non-setting update (step S5007) is not limited to the configuration in which the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed. It may be configured without As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally execute the clear processing at the time of non-setting update.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the twenty-second embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing. The configuration different from that of the twenty-second embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the twenty-second embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . It should be noted that the processing of steps S5701 to S5720 in the main processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S5701). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the start of operation and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5702).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 (step S5703), and based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11 (step S5704), and it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5705). If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5703 to S5705, the processing of steps S5706 to S5714 is executed. These steps S5706 to S5714 are the same as steps S5008 to S5016 of the main process (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

If affirmative determinations are made in all of steps S5703 to S5705, selection processing is executed (step S5715). In the selection process, a process for determining which one of a situation in which the clear process is executed and the set value update process is not executed when the setting is not updated, and a situation in which the clear process is executed and the set value update process is executed when the setting is updated is executed based on the selection operation by the manager of the game hall. Specifically, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the state in which one of the above states is selected is switched to the state in which the other state is selected. Note that the selection operation may be performed by operating the reset button 68c, or may be performed by operating another operation unit. Further, when a situation is selected in which clear processing is executed during non-setting update and setting value update processing is not executed, "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c are turned off, and when a situation in which clear processing is executed during setting update and setting value update processing is selected, "O" is displayed on the second notification display device 69b and the first notification display device 69a and the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69a are displayed. 3 The notification display device 69c is turned off. Also, when the reset button 68c is continuously pressed for a fixed selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or longer, the selected situation among the above situations is confirmed as the current selection target.

In addition, when the update button 68b is continuously pressed for a fixed selection period (specifically 10 seconds) or longer, the selected status may be confirmed as the current selection target, or when another operation unit is continuously pressed for the fixed selection period (specifically 10 seconds) or longer, the selected status may be confirmed as the current selection target. Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the situation selected from among the above situations is determined as the current selection target by rotating the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 .

In the selection process, if a situation in which the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the setting value update process is not executed is confirmed as the current selection target (step S5716: NO), the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S5717). The processing contents of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update are the same as step S5007 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

In the selection process, if the situation in which the setting update clear process and the setting value update process are to be executed is confirmed as the current selection target (step S5716: YES), the setting value copy process is executed (step S5718), the setting update clear process is executed (step S5719), and the setting value update process is executed (step S5720). The processing contents of these steps S5718 to S5720 are the same as steps S5017 to S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

According to the above configuration, even in a configuration in which the setting key insertion part 68a is not provided, it is possible for the manager of the game hall to select which of the two situations, the clearing process is executed when the setting is not updated and the setting value updating process is not executed, and the setting value updating process is executed while the clearing process is executed when the setting is updated.

Also, not only when executing the setting value updating process but also when executing the clearing process when the setting is not updated, it is necessary not only to start supplying the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 under the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed, but also to open the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 and open the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally execute the clear processing at the time of non-setting update.

As a condition for executing the selection process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, both the condition that the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 are set, but only one of these conditions may be set.

Further, as a condition for executing the selection process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the configuration may be such that the condition that the firing handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated, the configuration that the firing operation device 28 is being touched, or the condition that the game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a may be added.

<24th Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the twenty-second embodiment in the processing configuration of the RAM monitoring process. The configuration different from that of the twenty-second embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the twenty-second embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing RAM monitoring processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps S5801 to S5814 in the RAM monitoring processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and specific control data.

First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5801). The content of the monitoring process is the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined at step S5801 that there is an abnormality (step S5802: YES), the processing from step S5805 to step S5808 is executed.

If it is not determined in step S5801 that there is an abnormality (step S5802: NO), the stack area 222 for specific control is monitored (step S5803). The content of the monitoring process is the same as step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined at step S5803 that there is an abnormality (step S5804: YES), the processing from step S5805 to step S5808 is executed.

In details of the processing of steps S5805 to S5808, first, copy processing of setting values is executed (step S5805). In the copy processing, the information of the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in the copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. Thus, even if the information of the setting value counter is cleared to "0" in the abnormal clearing process (step S5806) to be executed later, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormal clearing process is executed can be grasped.

After that, clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5806). In the error clearing process, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Initialization is performed after clearing to "0". On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". That is, in the RAM monitoring process of the present embodiment, when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in either the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and the specific control stack area 222 is cleared to "0", except for the copy area. Thereby, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, it is possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the specific control from being executed as it is. Further, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0", thereby preventing the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" by the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. becomes.

Note that when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the return address information after execution of the RAM monitoring process is also erased. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", after the process of step S5808 is completed, the predetermined program is uniquely returned to. Specifically, it is configured to return to the process of step S5013 in the main process (FIG. 22) univocally. However, the program that returns uniquely is not limited to step S5013, and may be step S5221 in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86). When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, an abnormality command indicating that the clear processing at the time of abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5807). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clear, and outputs the sound "forced clear" from the speaker unit 54. In addition, the character image "Forcibly cleared" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the notification is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. The notification end operation may be, for example, pressing the update button 68b or pressing the reset button 68c. By confirming the notification, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control have been forcibly cleared.

Thereafter, set value update processing is executed (step S5808). The contents of the set value update process are the same as those in step S5412 in the RAM monitor process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in both steps S5801 and S5803 (steps S5802 and S5804: NO), the work area 223 for non-specific control is monitored (step S5809). The content of the monitoring process is the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5809 (step S5810: YES), the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to "0" and initial setting is performed (step S5811). In this case, the normal counter area 231, open/close execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233, calculation result storage area 234, and management start flag are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S5811, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". Thus, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0".

In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, open/close execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233, and calculation result storage area 234 may be cleared to "0", but the management start flag may not be cleared to "0". In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag may be cleared to "0", but the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0." In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 may be cleared to "0", but the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag may not be cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S5810 or if the processing of step S5811 is executed, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is monitored (step S5812). The content of the monitoring process is the same as step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5812 (step S5813: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initial setting is performed (step S5814). This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S5814, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". Thus, even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0".

According to the above configuration, when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in either the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area is cleared to "0" and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Thus, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, it is possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the specific control from being executed in that state.

Even if an information error occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" by an information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control.

Even if an information error occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" by the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Even if an information error occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" by the information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

When an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area may be cleared to "0", while the stack area 222 for specific control may not be cleared to "0".

Further, when an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 222 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control may be cleared to "0" while the work area 221 for specific control may not be cleared to "0". In this case, even if the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the processing of steps S5805 to S5808 may not be executed.

<Twenty-Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the twenty-second embodiment in the processing configuration for monitoring whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in each of the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 . The configuration different from that of the twenty-second embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the twenty-second embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing RAM monitoring processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps S5901 to S5908 in the RAM monitoring processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and specific control data.

First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5901). The content of the monitoring process is the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined at step S5901 that there is an abnormality (step S5902: YES), the processing from step S5905 to step S5908 is executed.

If it is not determined in step S5901 that there is an abnormality (step S5902: NO), the stack area 222 for specific control is monitored (step S5903). The content of the monitoring process is the same as step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined at step S5903 that there is an abnormality (step S5904: YES), the processing from step S5905 to step S5908 is executed.

In details of the processing of steps S5905 to S5908, first, copy processing of setting values is executed (step S5905). In the copy process, the information of the set value counter used for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in the copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to "0" in the abnormal clearing process (step S5906) to be executed later, it is possible to grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormal clearing process is executed.

After that, a clearing process at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5906). In the error clearing process, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Initialization is performed after clearing to "0". On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". That is, in the RAM monitoring process of the present embodiment, when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in either the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and the specific control stack area 222 is cleared to "0", except for the copy area. Thereby, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, it is possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the specific control from being executed as it is. Further, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0", thereby preventing the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" by the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. becomes.

After that, an abnormality command indicating that the clear processing at the time of abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5907). By receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission part 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clearing of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and outputs a voice saying "forced clearing has been executed for specific control" from the speaker part 54. Also, a character image saying "Forcible clearing has been executed for specific control" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control have been forcibly cleared.

Thereafter, set value update processing is executed (step S5908). The contents of the set value update process are the same as those in step S5412 in the RAM monitor process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

As described above, in the RAM monitoring process that is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are monitored for information abnormality, but the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not monitored for information abnormality. Monitoring of information abnormalities in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is performed by processing corresponding to non-specific control using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing management execution processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The management execution process is executed by reading out a subroutine program in the management process (FIG. 70) as in the fifteenth embodiment. Further, the processing of steps S6001 to S6016 in the management execution processing is executed by the main side CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In steps S6001 to S6008 and steps S6010 to S6016, the same processes as steps S3901 to S3915 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment are executed. Further, in step S6009, another monitoring process is executed. When executing the separate monitoring process, a subroutine program corresponding to the separate monitoring process set in the program for non-specific control is executed. When executing the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after execution of the separate monitoring process is written in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the separate monitoring process ends, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop command, and the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address is returned to.

FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing another monitoring process. Note that the processes of steps S6101 to S6108 in the separate monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, a process for monitoring the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S6101). The content of the monitoring process is the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S6101 (step S6102: YES), the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to "0" and initial setting is performed (step S6103). In this case, the normal counter area 231, open/close execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233, calculation result storage area 234, and management start flag are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S6103, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". Thus, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0".

In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, open/close execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233, and calculation result storage area 234 may be cleared to "0", but the management start flag may not be cleared to "0". In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag may be cleared to "0", but the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0." In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 may be cleared to "0", but the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag may not be cleared to "0".

After that, clear notification processing is executed (step S6104). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the non-specific control work area 223 has been cleared to "0" is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . By receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission part 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clearing of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and also outputs the sound "history information is forcibly cleared" from the speaker part 54. - 特許庁In addition, the character image "history information has been forcibly cleared" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

When a negative determination is made in step S6102 or when the process of step S6104 is executed, the process of monitoring the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S6105). The content of the monitoring process is the same as step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S6105 (step S6106: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized (step S6107). This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S6107, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". Thus, even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0".

After that, clear notification processing is executed (step S6108). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the non-specific control stack area 224 has been cleared to "0" is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . By receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission part 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clearing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and also outputs the sound "The stack for non-specific control is forcibly cleared" from the speaker part 54. - 特許庁In addition, the symbol display device 41 is made to display a character image saying "Unspecified control stack is forcibly cleared." These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the stack area 224 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

When the non-specific control stack area 224 is forcibly cleared, the address of the program in step S6010 in the management execution process (FIG. 94) is uniquely set as return address information after execution of the separate monitoring process. As a result, even if the non-specific control stack area 224 is forcibly cleared, it is possible to return to the original program to be returned in the management execution process. When the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

According to the above configuration, the main CPU 63 monitors whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control in the process corresponding to the specific control, and monitors whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is performed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control in the main CPU 63. This makes it possible not only to clearly distinguish the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 to be used but also to clearly distinguish the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 to be monitored between the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

When the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0", the information saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control, which is the information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the specific control, is also cleared to "0". In this case, even if the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed and the processing corresponding to the specific control is resumed, there is a possibility that the state before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started cannot be restored. Therefore, when the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0", the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control may also be cleared to "0". In this configuration, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0". Therefore, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the set value update process may be executed first as the process corresponding to the specific control.

<26th Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the twentieth embodiment in the processing configuration of management processing. The configuration that is different from the twentieth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the twentieth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps S6201 to S6219 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and specific control data.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S6201). As a result, it is possible to prevent timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of management execution processing, which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, which will be described later.

After that, as "LD HL, SP", the information of the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main side CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6202). In this case, since the amount of information of the stack pointer is 16 bits and the amount of information of each of the H and L registers is 8 bits, the H register is overwritten with 8-bit information continuing from the upper side of the stack pointer, and the L register is overwritten with 8-bit information continuing from the lower side of the stack pointer.

After that, as "LD (HL), 0", a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6203). Note that the HL register of the main CPU 63 has been overwritten with the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in step S6202, and the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 has not been updated until the processing of step S6203 is executed.

After that, as "LD SP, SP-1", the information of the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the next write target storage area in the specific control stack area 222 by the load instruction (step S6204). When the stack area 222 for specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and each time the information to be stored is added, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222 for specific control. Therefore, in step S6204, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area with the smaller address by one in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the processing in step S6204, the storage area next in order to the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6203 is set as the target for storing information by the next push command, and the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6203 is set as the target for reading information by the next pop command.

After that, as "LD WA, 0", the WA register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6205). Also, as "LD BC, 0", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S6206). Also, as "LD DE, 0", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S6207). Also, as "LD HL, 0", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S6208). Also, as "LD IX, 0", the IX register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S6209). Also, as "LD IY, 0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S6210).

The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers. In this case, in steps S6205 to S6210, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are cleared to "0". These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in management execution processing (step S6212), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. By clearing such registers to "0" prior to execution of the management execution process (step S6212), which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control, the state of these registers can be set to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

Further, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is unnecessary information in the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the specific control that is returned after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

After that, as "POP PSW", the information is read from the storage area of the writing order immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by the pop instruction, and the read information is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6211). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the pop instruction in step S6211 is executed is information corresponding to the storage area in the order of writing next to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control cleared to "0" in step S6203. Therefore, the memory area in the write order that is one block before the memory area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 becomes the memory area cleared to "0" in step S6203. By overwriting the flag register of the main CPU 63 with the information read from this storage area, the flag register is cleared to "0". One storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), and the flag register of the main side CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). By clearing the flag register to "0" prior to execution of the management execution process (step S6212), which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control, the state of the flag register can be changed to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

After that, the management execution processing is started by reading out the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution processing set in the non-specific control program (step S6212). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the specific control stack area 222 by the push instruction. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop instruction, and the program for management processing indicated by the return address is returned to.

The contents of the management execution process are the same as those of the management execution process (FIG. 82) in the twentieth embodiment. Therefore, after the check process is completed in the management execution process, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are cleared to "0". As a result, these registers are cleared to "0" prior to returning from the processing corresponding to the non-specific control to the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the state of these registers can be set to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started before returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control.

When returning to the management processing program after executing the management execution processing, processing for clearing the flag register of the main side CPU 63 to "0" is executed. Specifically, first, as "PUSH HL", information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction (step S6213). After the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 becomes information corresponding to the storage area in the order of writing next to the storage area where the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "LD HL, SP", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6214). In this case, since the amount of information of the stack pointer is 16 bits and the amount of information of each of the H and L registers is 8 bits, the H register is overwritten with 8-bit information continuing from the upper side of the stack pointer, and the L register is overwritten with 8-bit information continuing from the lower side of the stack pointer.

After that, as "LD (HL), 0", a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S6215). The HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in step S6214, and the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is not updated until the process of step S6215 is executed.

After that, as "LD SP, SP-1", the information of the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the next write target storage area in the specific control stack area 222 by the load instruction (step S6216). When the stack area 222 for specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and each time the information to be stored is added, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222 for specific control. Therefore, in step S6216, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area with the smaller address by one in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the processing of step S6216, the storage area next in order to the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6215 is set as the target for storing information by the next push command, and the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6215 is set as the target for reading information by the next pop command.

After that, as "POP PSW", information is read from the storage area in the write order immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the read information is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6217). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the pop instruction in step S6217 is executed is information corresponding to the storage area in the order of writing next to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control cleared to "0" in step S6215. Therefore, the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control which is written in the order immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 becomes the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control cleared to "0" in step S6215. By overwriting the flag register of the main CPU 63 with the information read from this storage area, the flag register is cleared to "0". One storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), and the flag register of the main side CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). By clearing the flag register to "0" after executing the management execution process (step S6212), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, the state of the flag register can be changed to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. Further, when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area one ahead in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", the information in the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6213 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6218). Since the HL register is cleared to "0" immediately before the management execution process (step S6212) ends, the information cleared to "0" is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6213, and the information cleared to "0" is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 in step S6218. Also, when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, interrupt permission is set (step S6219). This enables a new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects described in the twentieth embodiment.

It is configured to clear the flag register of the main side CPU 63 to "0" when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed. As a result, there is no need to save the information of the flag register used in the process corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. Therefore, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving the information.

The flag register of the main side CPU 63 is also cleared to "0" when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is returned to the process corresponding to the specific control. As a result, when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to restore the state of the flag register to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

The state in which the flag register is cleared to "0" is the state when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the flag register to a predetermined state when starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control.

The information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is the information that is not used in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished. Thus, even if the flag register is cleared to "0" when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, it is possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control from being affected.

A predetermined storage area of the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", and information in the "0"-cleared storage area is overwritten on the flag register by a pop instruction to clear the flag register to "0". This makes it possible to clear the flag register to "0" even in a configuration in which direct clearing of the flag register to "0" by a load instruction is regulated.

Instead of clearing the flag register to "0", the flag register may be initialized. That is, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to "0", and information is set so as to be in the initial state. However, in steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211, the flag register may be set so as to be in the initial state. In this case, in steps S6213 to S6218, the flag register is set so as to be in the initial state, so that when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the state of the flag register can be returned to the state immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

Further, in steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211, instead of clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0", the flag register may be set to "1". In this case, by setting "1" to all the flag registers in steps S6213 to S6218 as well, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the state of the flag register can be returned to the state immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

Further, instead of the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211, the flag register of the main side CPU 63 may be directly cleared to "0" by the load instruction as "LD PSW, 0". Further, instead of the processing of steps S6213 to S6218, the flag register of the main side CPU 63 may be directly cleared to "0" by the load instruction as "LD PSW, 0".

Also, instead of executing the processing of steps S6213 and S6218, a configuration may be used in which the HL register is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD HL, 0". Even in this case, it is possible to restore the state of the HL register to the state immediately before execution of the management execution process, which is the process corresponding to non-specific control.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the processing for clearing the flag register to "0" is executed in the processing corresponding to the specific control, it may be configured to be executed in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

<27th Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the twentieth embodiment in the processing configuration of management processing. The configuration that is different from the twentieth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the twentieth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the processing of steps S6301 to S6323 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and specific control data.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S6301). This makes it possible to prevent timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of management execution processing, which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, which will be described later.

After that, as "PUSH AF", the information of the A register and the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 are each saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 and the storage area of the next write order for this storage area (step S6302). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually saved in two storage areas with consecutive addresses. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information in the A register and the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6302 by a pop instruction (step S6303). In this case, the information in the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control overwrites the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control overwrites the L register of the main CPU 63. The H register and L register of the main side CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "LD A, 0", the A register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S6304). Then, as "LD L, A", the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6305), and as "LD H, A", the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6306). Since the A register has been cleared to "0" in step S6304, by overwriting the information in the A register to the L and H registers, the L and H registers are cleared to "0".

After that, as "PUSH HL", the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 and the next storage area in the order of writing to this storage area (step S6307). Since the H register and L register of the main CPU 63 each have an amount of information of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the H register and the information of the L register are individually saved in two storage areas with consecutive addresses. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "LD BC, 0", the BC register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S6308). Also, as "LD DE, 0", the DE register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S6309). Also, as "LD IX, 0", the IX register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S6310). Also, as "LD IY, 0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S6311).

The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers. In this case, in steps S6308 to S6311, the BC register, DE register, IX register and IY register, which are some of these general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers, are cleared to "0". Also, the HL register is cleared to "0" in steps S6305 and S6306. These BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in management execution processing (step S6313), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. By clearing such registers to "0" prior to execution of the management execution process (step S6313), which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control, the state of these registers can be set to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

In addition, each information of the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is unnecessary information in the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the specific control that is returned after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

Thereafter, as "POP AF", the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 are overwritten with the information in the H register and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6307 by a pop instruction (step S6312). In this case, the information in the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63. Since the information in the H register and the information in the L register saved in the specific control stack area 222 are all "0" information, the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" and the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by executing the process of step S6312. As a result, it is possible to change the state of the flag register to the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the management execution processing is started by reading out the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution processing set in the non-specific control program (step S6313). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the specific control stack area 222 by the push instruction. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop instruction, and the program for management processing indicated by the return address is returned to.

After the check process is completed in the management execution process, the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are cleared to "0". As a result, these registers are cleared to "0" prior to returning from the processing corresponding to the non-specific control to the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the state of these registers can be set to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started before returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control.

When returning to the management processing program after executing the management execution processing, processing for clearing the flag register of the main side CPU 63 to "0" is executed. Specifically, first, as "PUSH HL", information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction (step S6314). After the push instruction is executed, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 becomes information corresponding to the storage area in the order of writing next to the storage area where the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "PUSH AF", each of the information of the A register and the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 and the next storage area in the order of writing to this storage area (step S6315). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually saved in two storage areas with consecutive addresses. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "POP HL", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information in the A register and the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6315 by a pop instruction (step S6316). In this case, the information in the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control overwrites the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control overwrites the L register of the main CPU 63. The H register and L register of the main side CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "LD A, 0", the A register of the main side CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S6317). Then, as "LD L, A", the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6318), and as "LD H, A", the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6319). Since the A register was cleared to "0" in step S6317, by overwriting the information in the A register to the L and H registers, the L and H registers are cleared to "0".

After that, as "PUSH HL", the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 and the next storage area in the order of writing to this storage area (step S6320). Since the H register and L register of the main CPU 63 each have an amount of information of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the H register and the information of the L register are individually saved in two storage areas with consecutive addresses. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP AF", the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 are overwritten with the information in the H register and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6320 by a pop instruction (step S6321). In this case, the information in the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63. Since the information in the H register and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control are all "0" information, the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" and the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by executing the process of step S6321. By clearing the flag register to "0" after the execution of the management execution process (step S6313), which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control, the state of the flag register can be changed to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", the information in the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6314 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6322). Since the HL register is cleared to "0" immediately before the management execution process (step S6313) ends, the information cleared to "0" is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6314, and the information cleared to "0" is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 in step S6322. Also, when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, interrupt permission is set (step S6323). This enables a new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to clear the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" without executing the process of clearing the predetermined storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" by the load instruction. This makes it possible to clear the flag register of the main side CPU 63 to "0" even in a configuration in which it is regulated to clear "0" to a predetermined storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control by a load instruction.

Instead of clearing the flag register to "0", the flag register may be initialized. That is, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to "0", and information is set so as to be in the initial state. However, in steps S6302 to S6307 and step S6312, the flag register may be set so as to be in the initial state. In this case, by configuring the flag register to be in the initial state in steps S6314 to S6322 as well, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the state of the flag register can be returned to the state immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

Further, in steps S6302 to S6307 and step S6312, instead of clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0", the flag register may be set to "1". In this case, by setting "1" to all the flag registers in steps S6314 to S6322 as well, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the state of the flag register can be returned to the state immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

Alternatively, the processing of steps S6302 and S6303 may not be executed. In this case, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Alternatively, the processing of steps S6315 and S6316 may not be executed. In this case, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Further, instead of executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6306, as "LD HL, 0", after the HL register is cleared to "0" by the load instruction, the HL register cleared to "0" is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction, and then the saved information is returned to the AF register by the pop instruction, thereby clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0".

Further, instead of the configuration in which the processing for clearing the flag register to "0" is executed in the processing corresponding to the specific control, it may be configured to be executed in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

<28th Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configuration of management processing. The configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps S6401 to S6416 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and specific control data.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S6401). This makes it possible to prevent timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of management execution processing, which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, which will be described later.

After that, as "PUSH WA", the information in the WA register (that is, the W register and the A register) of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 and the next storage area in the order of writing to this storage area (step S6402). Since the W register and A register of the main side CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the W register and A register are individually saved in two storage areas with consecutive addresses. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "LD A, PSW", the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6403). In this case, both the flag register and the A register have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). Then, as "LD (_FGBUF), A", the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the FG buffer set in the specific control work area 221 by the load instruction (step S6404). Since the A register is overwritten with the information of the flag register in step S6403, the information of the flag register is saved in the work area 221 for specific control by executing step S6404.

Thereafter, as "POP WA", the information in the WA register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6402 is returned to the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6405). Thus, even if the A register is used to save the information of the flag register to the work area 221 for specific control, the state of the A register can be restored to the state before the saving. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the management execution processing is started by reading out the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution processing set in the non-specific control program (step S6406). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the specific control stack area 222 by the push command. Then, when the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop command, and the program for the management process indicated by the return address is returned to.

The contents of the management execution process are the same as those of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment. Therefore, before the check process is started in the management execution process, the information in the WA, BC, DE, HL, IX, and IY registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the non-specific control work area 223, and after the check process in the management execution process is completed, the information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 is saved in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. be returned. As a result, the states of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main side CPU 63 can be made the same before and after the check processing.

However, it is not limited to this, and the processing contents of the management execution processing may be the same as the management execution processing (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment, may be the same as the management execution processing (FIG. 79) in the eighteenth embodiment, or may be the same as the management execution processing (FIG. 80) in the nineteenth embodiment.

When returning to the management processing program after executing the management execution processing, a processing for returning the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state before the management execution processing is executed is executed. Specifically, first, as "PUSH HL", the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction (step S6407). After the push instruction is executed, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 becomes information corresponding to the storage area in the order of writing next to the storage area where the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "PUSH WA", the information in the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction (step S6408). After the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 becomes information corresponding to the storage area in the order of writing next to the storage area where the information of the WA register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "LD HL, SP", the information of the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main side CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6409). In this case, since the amount of information of the stack pointer is 16 bits and the amount of information of each of the H and L registers is 8 bits, the H register is overwritten with 8-bit information continuing from the upper side of the stack pointer, and the L register is overwritten with 8-bit information continuing from the lower side of the stack pointer.

Thereafter, as "LD A, (_FGBUF)", the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6406 by the load instruction (step S6410). Then, as "LD (HL), A", the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 is stored in the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by the load instruction (step S6411). As a result, the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6404 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "LD SP, SP-1", the information of the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the next write target storage area in the specific control stack area 222 by the load instruction (step S6412). When the stack area 222 for specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and each time the information to be stored is added, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222 for specific control. Therefore, in step S6412, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area with the smaller address by one in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the processing of step S6412, the storage area next in order to the storage area in which the information in the A register was saved in step S6411 is set as the information storage target by the next push instruction, and the storage area in which the information in the A register was saved in step S6411 is set as the information read target by the next pop instruction.

After that, as 'POP PSW', information is read from the storage area in the order of writing immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by the pop instruction, and the read information is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6413). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the pop instruction in step S6413 is executed is the information corresponding to the storage area in the order of writing next to the storage area where the information of the A register was saved in step S6411. Therefore, the storage area in the write order that is one block before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 becomes the storage area where the information of the A register is saved in step S6411. By overwriting the flag register of the main CPU 63 with the information read from this storage area, the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6404 is restored to the flag register of the main CPU 63. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area one ahead in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP WA", the information in the WA register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6408 is returned to the WA register of the main CPU 63 by the pop instruction (step S6414). When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control. Also, as "POP HL", the information in the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6407 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the pop instruction (step S6415). When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, interrupt permission is set (step S6416). This enables a new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started in a situation where processing corresponding to specific control is being executed, information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 can be saved in the work area 221 for specific control instead of the stack area 222 for specific control. When the process corresponding to the specific control is returned from the state in which the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed, the information of the flag register saved in the work area 221 for specific control is returned to the flag register of the main side CPU 63. As a result, information can be returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 from the storage area of the work area 221 for specific control designated on the program without referring to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63, so even if the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is rewritten due to noise or the like, the information can be returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63.

Further, the processing for saving the information of the flag register to the main RAM 65 may be configured to be executed by the processing corresponding to the non-specific control instead of the processing corresponding to the specific control. Further, instead of the configuration in which the processing for returning the information in the flag register saved in the main RAM 65 to the flag register in the main CPU 63 is executed in the processing corresponding to the specific control, the processing may be executed in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

<Twenty-ninth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configuration of management processing. The configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps S6501 to S6519 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S6501). This makes it possible to prevent timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of management execution processing, which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, which will be described later.

After that, as "PUSH HL", the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 and the next storage area in the order of writing to this storage area (step S6502). Since the H register and L register of the main side CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the H register and L register is individually saved in two storage areas with consecutive addresses. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "PUSH AF", the information of the A register and the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 are each saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 and the next storage area in the order of writing to this storage area (step S6503). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually saved in two storage areas with consecutive addresses. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information in the A register and the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6503 by a pop instruction (step S6504). In this case, the information in the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control overwrites the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control overwrites the L register of the main CPU 63. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "LD A, L", the information in the L register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6505). Since the L register has been overwritten with the flag register information of the main CPU 63 in step S6504, by overwriting the A register with the L register information, the A register is overwritten with the flag register information. Then, as "LD (_FGBUF), A", the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the FG buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by the load instruction (step S6506). Since the A register is overwritten with the information of the flag register in step S6505, the information of the flag register is saved in the work area 221 for specific control by executing step S6506.

After that, as "PUSH HL", the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 and the next storage area in the order of writing to this storage area (step S6507). In this case, since the HL register was overwritten with the information of the A register and the information of the flag register in step S6504, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6507. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP AF", the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 are overwritten with the information in the H register and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6507 by a pop instruction (step S6508). In this case, the information in the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63. The information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the information of the A register at the time of step S6503, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the information of the flag register at the time of step S6503. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6508, the states of the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 are restored to the states at the time of step S6503. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", the information in the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6502 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6509). As a result, the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the state at the time of step S6502. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the management execution processing is started by reading out the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution processing set in the non-specific control program (step S6510). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the specific control stack area 222 by the push instruction. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop instruction, and the program for management processing indicated by the return address is returned to.

In the management execution process, each information of the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the non-specific control work area 223 before the check process is started, and each information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 is returned to the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 after the check process is finished in the management execution process. As a result, the states of the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main side CPU 63 can be made the same before and after the check processing.

However, it is not limited to this, and the processing contents of the management execution processing may be the same as the management execution processing (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment, may be the same as the management execution processing (FIG. 79) in the eighteenth embodiment, or may be the same as the management execution processing (FIG. 80) in the nineteenth embodiment.

When returning to the management processing program after executing the management execution processing, a processing for returning the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state before the management execution processing is executed is executed. Specifically, first, as "PUSH HL", the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction (step S6511). After the push instruction is executed, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 becomes information corresponding to the storage area in the order of writing next to the storage area where the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "PUSH AF", each of the information of the A register and the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 and the next storage area in the order of writing to this storage area (step S6512). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually saved in two storage areas with consecutive addresses. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "POP HL", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information in the A register and the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6512 by a pop instruction (step S6513). In this case, the information in the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control overwrites the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control overwrites the L register of the main CPU 63. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "LD A, (_FGBUF)", the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information in the flag register at the time of step S6503, which was saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6506 by the load instruction (step S6514). Then, as "LD L, A", the L register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6515). Since the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 at the time of step S6503 is restored to the A register in step S6514, by overwriting the information of the A register on the L register, the L register is overwritten with the information of the flag register at the time of step S6503.

After that, as "PUSH HL", the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 and the next storage area in the order of writing to this storage area (step S6516). In this case, since the information in the A register at the time of step S6512 is overwritten in the H register in step S6513, the information in the A register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516. Since the L register is overwritten with the information of the flag register at the time of step S6503 in step S6515, the information of the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516.

Thereafter, as "POP AF", the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 are overwritten with the information in the H register and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516 by a pop instruction (step S6517). In this case, the information in the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control overwrites the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control overwrites the flag register of the main CPU 63. The information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the information of the A register at the time of step S6512, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the information of the flag register at the time of step S6503. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6517, the state of the A register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state of step S6512, and the state of the flag register returns to the state at the time of step S6503.

Incidentally, the A register of the main side CPU 63 is not used in the management execution process. Therefore, the state of the A register at step S6512 is the state of the A register at step S6508, and the state of the A register at step S6508 is the state of the A register at step S6503. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6517, the states of the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 are restored to the states at the time of step S6503. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", the information in the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6511 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6518). As a result, the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the state at the time of step S6511. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, interrupt permission is set (step S6519). This enables a new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 can be saved to the work area 221 for specific control without directly overwriting the information of the flag register from the flag register of the main CPU 63 to another register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction.

It should be noted that, instead of executing the processing of steps S6505 to S6508, after executing the processing of step S6504, the information of the L register overwritten by the information of the flag register may be saved in the FG buffer as "LD (_FGBUF), L" by the load instruction, thereby saving the information of the flag register to the work area 221 for specific control.

Alternatively, without executing the processing of steps S6514 and S6515, instead, after executing the processing of step S6513, the L register may be overwritten with the information of the flag register saved in the work area 221 for specific control by the load instruction as "L L, (_FGBUF)".

Further, the processing for saving the information of the flag register to the main RAM 65 may be executed by the processing corresponding to the non-specific control instead of the processing corresponding to the specific control. Further, instead of the configuration in which the processing for returning the information in the flag register saved in the main RAM 65 to the flag register in the main CPU 63 is executed in the processing corresponding to the specific control, the processing may be executed in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

<Thirtieth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 . The configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . It should be noted that the processing of steps S6601 to S6621 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S6601). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the start of operation and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S6602).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S6603). If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S6603: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6604).

Any method can be used to calculate the checksum, but for example, there is a method of adding all numerical values in the storage area that is the object of checksum calculation. This checksum calculation method is the same calculation method as the checksum calculation method in the power failure processing described later. The checksum calculated in the power failure processing to be described later is stored in the work area 221 for specific control, but the storage area of the work area 221 for specific control in which the checksum is stored is excluded from the storage areas to be calculated when calculating the checksum.

That is, when calculating the checksum, part of the storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are subject to calculation. The storage area to be calculated is a storage area in which information is basically not rewritten when power supply such as backup power to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is continued until the checksum is calculated in the power failure processing when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped and the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is restarted and the process of step S6604 is executed. Therefore, if the information in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 is not changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped until the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is resumed, the checksums for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are the same as immediately before the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. It should be noted that the storage area to be calculated when calculating this checksum includes an area (specifically, a set value counter) in which set value information indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control.

After that, the checksum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 calculated in the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 is read from the specific control work area 221, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S6604 (step S6605). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S6606).

Here, power failure information storage processing executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 101 . The power failure information storage process is executed in step S6801 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) described later.

In the power failure information storage process, first, the repetition counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "10", which is the number of repetition times information for the power failure signal (step S6701), and the power failure detection counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6702).

After that, the process of reading the power failure signal information received at the input port of the MPU 62 is executed (step S6703). In this case, when a power failure signal (LOW level power failure signal) corresponding to no power failure has been received, information "0" is stored as non-power failure information in the input port, and when receiving a power failure signal (HI level power failure signal) corresponding to power failure has occurred, "1" information is stored as power failure occurrence information in the input port. In step S6703, a process of reading the power failure signal information into the register of the main CPU 63 is executed.

If the power failure signal information read in step S6703 corresponds to the occurrence of power failure (power failure) (step S6704: YES), 1 is added to the numerical information of the power failure detection counter (step S6705). If a negative determination is made in step S6704 or if the process of step S6705 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the numerical information of the repetition counter (step S6706). Then, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the repetition counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S6707). If a negative determination is made in step S6707, the process returns to step S6703 to repeat the processing of steps S6703 to S6706. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6707, the process proceeds to step S6708.

In step S6708, it is determined whether or not the current numerical information of the power failure detection counter is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number corresponding to the occurrence of power failure. If it is less than the trigger reference number of times, the power failure information storage processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of times, power failure processing of steps S6709 to S6712 is executed.

Specifically, first, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6709). As a result, when the power failure processing is normally executed and information is normally stored and held in the main RAM 65, the power failure flag of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted.

Thereafter, a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6710). In this case, the storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, which are the objects of calculation when calculating the checksum, are the same as the storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, which are the objects for checksum calculation in step S6604 of the main process (FIG. 100). In addition, the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum includes an area (specifically, a set value counter) in which set value information indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. Then, the calculated checksum is stored in a storage area for storing the checksum in the work area 221 for specific control and excluded from checksum calculation targets.

After that, all output port information in the register of the main CPU 63 is set to "0" (step S6711), and access to the main RAM 65 is prohibited (step S6712). Then, the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

By executing the power failure information storage process as the first process of the timer interrupt process, it is not necessary to execute the timer interrupt process from the middle after the power is restored. This eliminates the need to store the address of the process being executed at the time of power failure in the main RAM 65 as stack information, making it possible to reduce the processing load of the process at the time of power failure.

Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 100), if a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, clear processing during non-setting update is executed (step S6607). In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, the area indicating whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display part 38a is not variably displayed and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general electricity reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the reservation information for the general figure display unit 38a is erased. In addition, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial setting is executed. In addition, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the various registers of the main side CPU 63 are also cleared to "0", and then the initial setting is executed.

On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0" in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update. This makes it possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" even if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing is not normally executed. Also, even if an abnormality occurs in the checksum of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, it is possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0".

When a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, after executing the clear processing at the time of non-setting update in step S6607, it is determined whether or not the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6608). Specifically, when the set value set in the set value counter is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is abnormal (step S6608: NO), the processing for newly setting the set value (steps S6619 to S6621) to be described later is executed. As a result, even when a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606 and the clearing process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is executed, it is possible to monitor whether the setting value is normal or not, and to reset the setting value when the setting value is abnormal.

If the setting value is normal (step S6608: YES), power-on setting processing is executed (step S6609). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 .

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when the main processing is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S6609 is completed and the process of step S6610 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power-on setting process of step S6609 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S6610 is started. Therefore, the main side CPU 63 does not start the processing for advancing the game until this situation is reached.

After that, the remaining processing of steps S6610 to S6613 is performed. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there will be a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S6610 to S6613 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S6610 to S6613 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps S6610 to S6613, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, if the power failure flag of the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", or if the checksum does not match, and if the setting value is normal after executing the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S6608: YES), the process proceeds to the process for progressing the game. Thus, even if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing is not normally executed, it is not necessary to turn the power on/off again after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. Further, even if an abnormality occurs in the checksum of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, it is not necessary to turn on/off the power again after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started.

If both steps S6603 and S6606 result in an affirmative determination, it is determined whether or not the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the value of the setting value counter in the specific control work area 221 (step S6614). Specifically, when the set value set in the set value counter is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the setting value is abnormal (step S6614: NO), the processing for newly setting the setting value (steps S6619 to S6621) to be described later is executed.

If the set value is normal (step S6614: YES), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S6615), whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step S6616), whether or not the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13 is determined (step S6617), and whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11 is determined. It is determined whether or not (step S6618).

In this embodiment, a front door open sensor 95 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the main side CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closed detection signal to the main side CPU 63, and when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the main side CPU 63. A main side CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in a closed state when receiving a closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in an open state when receiving an opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95.例文帳に追加

Further, in this embodiment, a body open sensor 96 for detecting whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the detection result of the body open sensor 96 is input to the main side CPU 63. In this case, when the game machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closed detection signal to the main side CPU 63, and when the game machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 sends an open detection signal to the main side CPU 63. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the game machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closed detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and specifies that the game machine main body 12 is in the open state when receiving the open detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96.例文帳に追加

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S6615: NO), the power-on setting process is executed in step S6609, and then the remaining processes of steps S6610 to S6613 are repeated. That is, when the reset button 68c is not pressed, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is performed without executing the clear processing of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S6615: YES), and a negative determination is made in any of steps S6616 to S6618, after executing the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607), on condition that the setting value is normal (step S6608: YES), the process proceeds to the process for controlling the progress of the game after step S6609. The processing contents of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update are as already explained.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S6615: YES) and all of steps S6616 to S6618 are affirmative, processing for updating the set values is executed. Also, if it is determined in step S6608 or step S6614 that the setting value is abnormal, processing for updating the setting value is executed.

Specifically, first, copy processing of the setting value is executed (step S6619). In the copy processing, the information of the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in the copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, even if the information of the setting value counter is cleared to "0" in the setting update clearing process (step S6620) executed later, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped) before the clearing process at the setting value update is executed can be grasped.

After that, clear processing at the time of setting update is executed (step S6620). In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the area indicating whether the lottery mode in the work area 221 for specific control is the high probability mode and the copy area, and the initial setting is performed. As a result, the game cycle is not executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not executed, and the general pattern display part 38a is not variably displayed and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general electricity reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the reservation information for the general figure display unit 38a is erased. Also, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial setting is executed. In addition, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the set value counter used to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the clearing process at the time of updating the settings, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0", and then the initial settings are executed.

On the other hand, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the area indicating whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is not cleared to "0", so even if the set value updating process (step S6621) is executed, the winning lottery mode can be maintained in the mode before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, since the copy area is not cleared to "0" in the clear processing at the time of setting update, it is possible to specify the set value that was set before the execution of the clear processing at the time of setting update. The configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 may not be cleared to "0" in the clearing process at the time of setting update, and the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode may be cleared to "0" in the clearing process at the time of setting update.

In the clear processing at the time of setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". Thus, even if set value update processing capable of changing the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0".

Then, in step S6621, set value update processing is executed. The contents of the set value update process are the same as those of the set value update process (FIG. 85) in the twenty-second embodiment. After executing the set value update process, the process moves to the process for controlling the progress of the game from step S6609 onwards.

According to the above configuration, when the set value is abnormal, the set value update process is started without requiring a special operation by the manager of the game hall. Then, when the set value update process is completed, the process shifts to the process for controlling the progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to play a game in a situation in which normal setting values are set. On the other hand, in order to complete the setting value update processing, it is necessary to perform an OFF operation by a setting key for the setting key insertion part 68a, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which a person other than the manager of the game hall sets the setting value without permission and starts a game.

Next, a configuration for forcibly stopping the progress of the game when the main CPU 63 cannot perform various processes normally will be described. FIG. 102(a) is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the MPU 62. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 102( a ), the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63 , a main ROM 64 and a main RAM 65 , as well as a reset signal output section 251 and a program monitor section 252 . The reset signal output unit 251 has a function of outputting a reset signal to the main CPU 63 . Specifically, the reset signal output unit 251 outputs a reset signal to the main CPU 63 as a HI level signal when operating power is supplied from the power supply/emission control device 78 and the output disabling condition is not satisfied, and does not output the reset signal to the main side CPU 63 when operating power is not supplied from the power supply/emission control device 78 or when the output disabling condition is satisfied even if operating power is supplied. The main CPU 63 executes various processes when operating power is supplied from the power supply/emission control device 78 and when a reset signal is received from the reset signal output unit 251, and does not execute various processes when operation power is supplied from the power supply/emission control device 78 but the reset signal is not received from the reset signal output unit 251. In addition, the main CPU 63 starts the main process (FIG. 100) when the state in which the reset signal is not received from the reset signal output unit 251 is switched to the state in which the reset signal is received while the operating power is supplied from the power supply/launch control device 78.

The program monitoring unit 252 has a function of monitoring whether or not the main CPU 63 is in a state where various processes can be normally performed. Specifically, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the value of the program counter provided in the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value. The program counter is for storing addresses where instructions to be executed in the main CPU 63 are stored. Possible values of the program counter are determined, and the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether or not the value of the program counter is a value other than the possible values. In addition, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether or not the address specified as the write destination area is an abnormal address when information is written to the specific control work area 221 by a load instruction. The program monitoring unit 252 may be configured to monitor whether or not an address designated as a read target area is an abnormal address when information is read from the specific control work area 221 by a load command.

When the program monitoring unit 252 determines that the value of the program counter is abnormal, or determines that the address specified when writing information by the load instruction is an abnormal address, the program monitoring unit 252 outputs a monitoring abnormality signal to the reset signal output unit 251. When the reset signal output unit 251 receives a monitoring abnormality signal from the program monitoring unit 252, it temporarily stops outputting the reset signal even when operating power is supplied from the power supply/launch control device 78, and restarts the output of the reset signal after stopping the output of the reset signal for the duration of the stop. The stop continuation period is a period sufficient for the main CPU 63 to identify that the output of the reset signal is stopped. As a result, when the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value, or when the address specified when writing information by a load instruction becomes an abnormal address, the main processing is executed by the main CPU 63 by turning the reset signal OFF/ON.

FIG. 102(b) is a time chart showing how the reset signal output section 251 outputs the reset signal. 102(b1) shows the period during which operating power is supplied from the power supply/launch control device 78, FIG. 102(b2) shows the period during which the reset signal is output from the reset signal output unit 251, and FIG.

First, a case where the program monitoring unit 252 does not output a monitoring abnormality signal will be described. At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 102(b1), the supply of operating power from the power supply/emission control unit 78 to the MPU 62 is started, and at timing t2, the reset signal output unit 251 starts outputting a reset signal, as shown in FIG. 102(b). After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 102(b1), the supply of operating power from the power supply/emission control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped, and at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG.

Next, a case where the program monitoring unit 252 outputs a monitoring abnormality signal will be described. At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 102(b1), the supply of operating power from the power supply/emission control device 78 to the MPU 62 is started, and at timing t6, the reset signal output unit 251 starts outputting a reset signal, as shown in FIG. 102(b). After that, at timing t7, the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value or the address specified when writing information by the load instruction becomes an abnormal address, so that the program monitoring unit 252 outputs a monitoring abnormality signal to the reset signal output unit 251 as shown in FIG. 102(b3). As a result, as shown in FIG. 102(b2), the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is temporarily stopped at timing t7, and then restarted at timing t8.

In this case, the main CPU 63 stops executing various processes at the timing t7, and starts the main process (FIG. 100) at the timing t8 when the rise of the reset signal is confirmed. However, since the power failure process is not executed when the execution of the various processes of the main CPU 63 is stopped, the main process (FIG. 100) is started in a situation where the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", and the main process (FIG. 100) is started without saving the checksums for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. Therefore, in the main processing (FIG. 100), a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, and clear processing (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is executed. As a result, when the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value or the address specified by the load instruction becomes an abnormal address, and a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252, it is possible to execute the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, in which a predetermined storage area of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0".

However, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0" in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update. This makes it possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" even if a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252 because the program counter value becomes an abnormal value or the address specified when information is written by a load instruction becomes an abnormal address.

Returning to the description of FIG. 102(b), after that, as shown in FIG. 102(b1) at the timing of t9, the supply of operating power from the power supply/emission control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped, and at the timing of t10, the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is stopped as shown in FIG. 102(b2).

Next, timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) while the processes of steps S6610 to S6613 are being executed in the main process (FIG. 100). The program corresponding to timer interrupt processing is set as a program for specific control.

In steps S6801 to S6819, the same processes as steps S5201 to S5219 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86) in the twenty-second embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. Thereafter, setting monitoring processing is executed (step S6820). FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing setting monitoring processing.

By checking the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control, it is determined whether or not the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal (step S6901). Specifically, when the set value set in the set value counter is one of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, it is determined to be normal, and when it is “0” or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal.

If the setting value is abnormal (step S6901: NO), the setting value is copied (step S6902). In the copy process, the information of the set value counter used for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in the copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, it is possible to grasp the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 before execution of the setting value update processing which is executed thereafter.

Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the set value is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S6903). By receiving the abnormality command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission part 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the setting value abnormality, and outputs the sound "Abnormality of the setting value is detected" from the speaker part 54. In addition, the character image "abnormal setting value detected" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the setting value abnormality has occurred.

Thereafter, set value update processing is executed (step S6904). That is, every time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 103) is executed, it is monitored whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and when the occurrence of the set value abnormality is specified, the set value update processing is executed to reset the set value of the pachinko machine 10. The contents of the set value update process are the same as those of the set value update process (FIG. 85) in the twenty-second embodiment. Therefore, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated step by step, and the selected set value is determined by detecting the game ball with the out-hole detection sensor 48a. The set value that is being updated and the set value that has been finalized are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. After that, when the setting key insertion portion 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the end condition of the setting value updating process is met. After executing the set value update process, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103).

Here, in the setting value updating process, it is not determined that the end condition is satisfied only when the setting key insertion part 68a is in the OFF state, but it is determined that the end condition is satisfied when the setting key insertion part 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. When the setting value update process is executed in the setting monitoring process, the setting key insertion part 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the setting value update process. Therefore, in order to satisfy the conditions for ending the setting value update process, it is necessary to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion part 68a, perform the ON operation, and then perform the OFF operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value update process from ending even though the manager of the game hall has not performed a normal operation.

When the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the condition for terminating the setting value update processing is satisfied, step S5111 in the setting value update processing (FIG. 85) is executed to compare whether or not the setting value stored in the copy area in the specific control work area 221 and the setting value currently set in the setting value counter in the specific control work area 221 are the same. In other words, it is determined whether or not the setting value set before execution of the setting value update process (step S6904) is the same as the setting value set in the current setting value update process. If both setting values are the same (step S5112: NO), the setting maintenance notification described above is performed by executing the notification processing for non-change (step S5113). On the other hand, if the two setting values are different (step S5112: YES), the already explained setting change notification is performed by executing the change notification processing (step S5114).

In a configuration in which set value update processing is executed when a set value abnormality occurs, setting maintenance notification is performed when a set value set before execution of the set value update processing is the same as a set value set by the set value update processing. Thus, even if the set value update processing is executed due to the set value abnormality, setting maintenance information is performed by resetting the set value set in the previous situation, and even if the set value update processing is executed due to the set value abnormality, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the set value has not changed. Incidentally, since it is common to record the set values of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall, it is possible to execute the set value update processing due to the set value abnormality so as to achieve the recorded set values.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), after executing the setting monitoring process in step S6820, the management process is executed in step S6821. When the management process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the management process set in the specific control program is executed. When the subroutine program is executed, information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process after execution of the management process is written in the specific control stack area 222 by a push instruction. Then, when the management process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop instruction, and the program for the timer interrupt process indicated by the return address is returned to.

FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the processing of steps S7001 to S7005 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 103), interrupt prohibition is set (step S7001). As a result, it is possible to prevent timer interrupt processing (FIG. 103), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of management execution processing, which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, which will be described later.

Thereafter, as "LD (_PSWBUF), PSW", the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the PSW buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by the load instruction (step S7002). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving the information of the flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, it is possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before being changed after the subroutine is called or the subroutine is started, in the work area 221 for specific control.

After that, the management execution processing is started by reading out the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution processing set in the non-specific control program (step S7003). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the specific control stack area 222 by the push instruction. Then, when the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop command, and the program for the management process indicated by the return address is returned to.

When returning to the management processing program after the execution of the management execution processing, "LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)" is executed, and the flag register information saved in the PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S7002 is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7004). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S7002 was executed last time. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

After that, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 103) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, interrupt permission is set (step S7005). This enables a new execution of timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing management execution processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps S7101 to S7116 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

In steps S7101 to S7108 and steps S7110 to S7116, the same processes as steps S4501 to S4515 of the management execution process (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment are executed. Further, in step S7109, another monitoring process is executed. When executing the separate monitoring process, a subroutine program corresponding to the separate monitoring process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the subroutine program, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after execution of the separate monitoring process is written in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the separate monitoring process ends, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop command, and the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address is returned to.

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing another monitoring process. It should be noted that the processes of steps S7201 to S7206 in the separate monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In the separate monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the value of the pointer indicating the processing position of the process being executed in the non-specific control program exceeds the normal numerical range (step S7201). Also, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is obviously abnormal information (step S7202). For example, in the normal counter area 231, when the value of the normal winning counter 231a is 1000 or more while the value of the normal out counter 231e is "0", it is determined as abnormal. Also, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is clearly abnormal information (step S7203). For example, if any one of the 62nd to 64th parameters is not "0" even though the 61st parameter is "0", it is determined to be abnormal.

If an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S7201 to S7203, it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and processing for partially clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S7204). In the partial clear processing, the storage areas other than the management start flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". In this case, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Also, by preventing the management start flag from being cleared to '0', it is possible to maintain the state in which '1' has already been set to the management start flag, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being regulated at the shipping stage with respect to the collection of history information even though the pachinko machine 10 has already been continuously used in the game hall. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire work area 223 for non-specific control including the management start flag may be cleared to "0" in step S7204.

Also, in step S7204, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0". In the stack area 224 for non-specific control, information of various registers used in processing corresponding to specific control is saved in steps S7102 to S7107 in the management execution processing (FIG. 106). In this case, by not clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0", it is possible to prevent erasure of information of various registers used in processing corresponding to this specific control and saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. In the non-specific control stack area 224, the return address information of the management execution process (FIG. 106) after the end of the separate monitoring process is stored. By not clearing the non-specific control stack area 224 to "0", it is possible to prevent the return address information from being erased.

After that, initialization processing is executed (step S7205). In the initialization process, initialization is performed for the storage area that was cleared to "0" in step S7204 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

After that, clear notification processing is executed (step S7206). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the non-specific control work area 223 has been cleared to "0" is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . By receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission part 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clearing of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and also outputs the sound "history information is forcibly cleared" from the speaker part 54. - 特許庁In addition, the character image "history information has been forcibly cleared" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

If negative determinations are made in all of steps S7201 to S7203, or if the process of step S7206 is executed, the separate monitoring process is ended and the process returns to the monitoring execution process (FIG. 106).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the program monitoring unit 252 determines that the address specified when writing information by the load instruction is an abnormal address, the reset signal output unit 251 turns the reset signal from OFF to ON, and the main CPU 63 executes the main processing (FIG. 100) in the same manner as when the supply of operating power is newly started. When the reset signal is turned from OFF to ON, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" and the checksum at the time of power failure is not stored in the work area 221 for specific control, so clear processing (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is forcibly executed. In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the storage areas other than the storage area storing the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are cleared to "0" in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the initial setting process for these areas is executed. As a result, when there is a possibility that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the information abnormality can be resolved by executing the "0" clearing process and the initial setting process for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control.

When the program monitoring unit 252 identifies that the program counter value of the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value, the reset signal output unit 251 turns the reset signal from OFF to ON so that the main CPU 63 executes the main processing (FIG. 100) in the same manner as when the supply of operating power is newly started. When the reset signal is turned from OFF to ON, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" and the checksum at the time of power failure is not stored in the work area 221 for specific control, so clear processing (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is forcibly executed. In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the internal storage area of the main side CPU 63 including various registers is cleared to "0" and the initial setting process is executed. Thus, when there is a possibility that an information abnormality has occurred in the internal storage area of the main side CPU 63, the information abnormality can be eliminated by executing "0" clearing and initial setting processing for the internal storage area of the main side CPU 63.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0" in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update. As a result, even if the internal storage area of the main CPU 63, the work area 221 for specific control, and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0" and initialized due to the information abnormality being identified by the program monitoring unit 252 as described above, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being erased, and to prevent the game history management result information from being erased.

In the main processing (FIG. 100) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" or if the checksum does not match, the clear processing (step S6607) is executed when the program monitoring unit 252 detects an information abnormality. 0) is executed. This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality identified by the program monitoring unit 252 by using the configuration for eliminating the information abnormality when the supply of operating power is started.

In the configuration in which whether or not the checksum is normal is monitored in the main process (FIG. 100) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the checksum calculation target includes the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but does not include the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, it is possible to specify whether or not an information abnormality has occurred only in the storage area corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 .

When it is specified that the checksum is abnormal in the main processing (FIG. 100) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the clear processing at the time of non-setting update (step S6607) is executed. 224 is not cleared to "0". As a result, it is possible to prevent the process corresponding to the specific control from being continuously executed in the state in spite of an information abnormality occurring in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and to prevent the storage area corresponding to the non-specific control in the main side RAM 65 from being cleared to "0" when the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is triggered.

In the power failure processing (steps S6709 to S6712) of the power failure information storage processing (FIG. 101), the checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, whereas the checksum is not calculated for the storage area corresponding to the non-specific control of the main side RAM 65. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing period required to complete the power failure processing from becoming excessively long.

When an abnormality is identified in the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107) executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting process is executed in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107) corresponding to the non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the non-specific control from being executed while the information in the work area 223 for non-specific control is held as it is, even though some abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control. In addition, since the processing for clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and the processing for initializing are executed in the processing corresponding to non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the processing corresponding to specific control from intervening in updating the information in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

In the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and when an abnormality has occurred, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized. As a result, the monitoring of whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the non-specific control work area 223 and the initialization of the non-specific control work area 223 can be executed as a series of processes in the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

When the occurrence of an abnormality is specified in the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control in another monitoring process (FIG. 107) executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized, but the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0" and initialized. As a result, information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control can be eliminated, while information of various registers used in processing corresponding to specific control saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control and return address information after completion of separate management processing can be prevented from being erased.

The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" and initializing them is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, and the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and initializing it is executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, even with respect to such initialization processing, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control can be treated as storage areas dedicated to processing corresponding to specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control can be treated as a storage area dedicated to processing corresponding to non-specific control.

In the main processing (FIG. 100), it is configured to monitor whether the set values are normal in steps S6608 and S6614, but the configuration may be such that the processing for monitoring whether these set values are normal is not executed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the processing at the start of supply of operating power, which is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In addition, even if it is not monitored whether or not the setting value is normal in the processing when the supply of operating power is started, it is monitored whether the setting value is normal or not in the setting monitoring processing (step S6820) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 103) which is executed after the processing when the supply of the operating power is started is completed.

Also, the setting monitoring process (step S6820) is not limited to the configuration in which it is executed each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is started. In this case, it is possible to reduce the frequency of execution of the monitoring while periodically monitoring whether or not the set values are normal.

Alternatively, the setting monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed in the remaining processes (steps S6610 to S6613) in the main process (FIG. 100). In this case, it becomes possible to monitor whether or not the set value is normal by using idle time in a situation where timer interrupt processing is not being executed.

Further, the configuration may be such that the setting monitoring process (step S6820) is executed when a game round is newly started. More specifically, when a game round is newly started, the setting monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed before the success/failure determination process is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the suitability determination process from being executed in a situation where the set value is abnormal.

Further, when it is specified that the setting value is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S6820), instead of moving to the setting value update process (step S6904), the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control may be set to "1". In this case, if affirmative determination is made in step S6807 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), the processes of steps S6808 to S6821 are not executed, so if the set value is abnormal, the progress of the game is stopped. However, since the processing of steps S6801 to S6806 is executed, power failure monitoring is executed, and the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is executed. Further, when the game stop flag is set to "1", a notification indicating that the set value should be updated may be executed to prompt execution of the set value update process. In this case, the manager of the game hall confirming the notification performs the power OFF operation and then performs the power ON operation in the manner in which the set value update processing is executed, whereby the game stop flag is cleared to "0" and the state in which the progress of the game is stopped is released, and the set value update processing is executed to set the normal set value.

Further, when it is specified that the setting value is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S6820), the main process (FIG. 100) may be started with the setting error flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control set to "1". In this case, even if no operation is performed in the main process (FIG. 100) to execute the setting value update process, if the setting error flag is set to "1", the setting value update process is forcibly executed, so that the setting value update process set in the main process (FIG. 100) can be used to force new setting of the setting value.

Further, when the occurrence of information abnormality is specified by the program monitoring part 252 and the reset signal is forcibly turned from OFF to ON, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 may be set to "setting 1" by executing the initialization process for the work area 221 for specific control. Further, when the occurrence of an information abnormality is identified by the program monitoring unit 252 and the reset signal is forcibly turned from OFF to ON, the setting value update processing may be executed after the initialization processing is executed for the work area 221 for specific control.

Further, when the program monitoring unit 252 identifies the occurrence of an information abnormality, the reset signal is not forcibly turned from OFF to ON, and the clear processing (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update may be executed, or the clear processing (step S6620) and the setting value update processing (step S6621) at the time of setting update may be executed.

In addition, in the clearing process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 may be set to "setting 1" by initializing the storage area for storing setting value information in the work area 221 for specific control, or may be set to a predetermined setting value other than "setting 1". As a result, when the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed, the preset setting value can be set.

Also, in the clearing process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0", but may be configured to be cleared to "0".

Also, in step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the management start flag is not cleared to "0", but the management start flag may be cleared to "0". Further, in step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to "0", and the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0".

Further, in step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the configuration may be such that not only the work area 223 for non-specific control but also the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0" and initialized. In this case, it is preferable not to erase the information of the return address of the management execution process after the end of the separate monitoring process in the stack area 224 for non-specific control and the information of various registers used in the process corresponding to the specific control saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Further, in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), it is possible to monitor whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized. In this case, it is preferable not to delete the information of the return address of the management execution process after the end of the separate monitoring process in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which both the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are subject to checksum calculation, and the configuration may be such that only the work area 221 for specific control is subject to checksum calculation, or only the stack area 222 for specific control is subject to checksum calculation.

<Thirty-first embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirtieth embodiment in the processing configuration of the main process executed by the main CPU 63 . The configuration different from that of the thirtieth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirtieth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps S7301 to S7322 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S7301). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. The start of operation and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S7302).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S7303). If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S7303: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7304). The checksum calculation method is the same as step S6604 of the main process (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment.

Thereafter, the checksum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 is read from the specific control work area 221, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S7304 (step S7305). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S7306).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7306, the processing of steps S7307 to S7320 is executed. In this case, the processing contents of steps S7307 to S7314 are the same as steps S6614 to S6621 of the main processing (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment, and steps S7316 to S7320 are the same as steps S6609 to S6613 of the main processing (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment.

If the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S7308: YES), but if a negative determination is made in any of steps S7309 to S7311, clear processing at non-setting update is executed (step S7315). The processing contents of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update are the same as step S6607 of the main processing (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment. However, in this embodiment, after executing the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the process proceeds to steps S7316 to S7320 without determining whether or not the setting value is normal. Only when a negative determination is made in any one of steps S7309 to S7311, the clear processing for non-setting update (step S7315) is executed. However, since it is determined in step S7307 whether or not the setting value is normal before the processing of steps S7309 to S7311 is executed, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the setting value is normal after executing the clear processing for non-setting update.

If a negative determination is made in step S7303 or step S7306, i.e., if the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" or if a checksum error occurs, an error clearing process is executed (step S7321). FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing clear processing at the time of abnormality. The processing of steps S7401 to S7405 in the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, clear processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S7401). In the clearing process, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the area cleared to "0" is initialized except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to '0', so the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game cycle is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display part 38a is not variably displayed and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general electricity reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the reservation information for the general figure display unit 38a is erased.

After that, clear processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S7402). In the clear processing, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized.

Thereafter, as "PUSH PSW", the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction (step S7403). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving the information of the flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the clear processing for non-specific control is started, the information of the flag register in the state before changing after the subroutine is called or the subroutine is started can be saved in the stack area 222 for the specific control. The amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

After that, by reading out the program of the subroutine corresponding to the clearing process for non-specific control set in the program for non-specific control, the clearing process for non-specific control is started (step S7404). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the clear processing in the event of an abnormality after execution of the clear processing for the non-specific control is written in the stack area 222 for the specific control by the push instruction. When the clear processing for non-specific control ends, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop command, and the program for the clear processing for abnormal times indicated by the return address is returned.

After the execution of the clear processing for the non-specific control, when the program for the clear processing in the abnormal state is returned to, the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for the specific control in step S7402 is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 by the pop instruction as "POP PSW" (step S7405). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S7402 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing clear processing for non-specific control. The processing of steps S7501 to S7516 in the non-specific control clearing process is executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

First, as "LD SP, Y(u+2)", Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S7501). In this case, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, information of the last address in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer.

Thereafter, as "LD (_WABUF), WA", the information in the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the WA buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S7502). Also, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the information in the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the BC buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S7503). Also, "LD
(_DEBUF), DE”, the information in the DE register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the DE buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by a load instruction (step S7504). Also, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the HL buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S7505). Also, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", the information in the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the IX buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S7506). Also, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the information in the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the IY buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S7507).

The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the already-described flag registers. In this case, in steps S7502 to S7507, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, is saved in the corresponding buffer in the non-specific control work area 223. The amount of information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register is all 2 bytes.

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are used in the partial clearing process (step S7508) and initialization process (step S7509) of the work area 223 for non-specific control, which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers to the work area 223 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the partial clearing process (step S7508) and the initial setting process (step S7509) of the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to save the information of these registers used for specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, the information saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control is returned to these registers when the non-specific control is finished, so that the state of these registers can be restored to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

Instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers to the non-specific control work area 223, the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register to be used in the non-specific control work area 223 clearing process (step S7508) and initialization process (step S7509) selectively saved to the non-specific control work area 223. By saving, it is possible to reduce the capacity to be secured for saving register information in the non-specific control work area 223 . Therefore, it is possible to save the register information as described above while securing a large capacity of the work area 223 for non-specific control that can be used in the partial clearing process (step S7508) and the initial setting process (step S7509) of the work area 223 for non-specific control. Of course, among the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main CPU 63, for registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, the information set before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is stored and held until the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is finished and the processing corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

In addition, by saving register information in the work area 223 for non-specific control instead of saving it in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control can be reduced accordingly. In addition, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, as already explained, the later information is read out first in the writing order of the information. Therefore, if the information reading order is deviated due to some noise or the like, all the information in the subsequent reading order will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above event even when there is a large amount of information to be saved.

After executing the processing of steps S7502 to S7507, the work area 223 for non-specific control is partially cleared (step S7508). In the partial clearing process, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, the storage areas other than the storage area where the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the specific control are saved are cleared to "0". Specifically, the WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer among the storage areas of the non-specific control work area 223 are not cleared to "0", while the storage areas other than these various buffers are cleared to "0".

In this case, the normal counter area 231, open/close execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233, calculation result storage area 234, and management start flag are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control. In addition, by not clearing the storage area in which the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the specific control is saved to "0", when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished and the process corresponding to the specific control is returned, the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control can be restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

Also, in step S7508, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0". The stack area 224 for non-specific control stores the information of the return address of the clear processing (FIG. 109) at the time of abnormality after the completion of the clear processing for non-specific control, but by not clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0", it is possible to prevent the information of this return address from being erased.

After that, initialization processing is executed (step S7509). In the initialization process, initialization is performed for the storage area that was cleared to "0" in step S7508 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

After that, Y(r+α) is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as a fixed address when returning to the specific control (step S7510), similarly to step S3909 of the management execution processing (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment. The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "LD WA, (_WABUF)", the WA register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the WA buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S7511). Also, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the BC buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S7512). Also, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the DE buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S7513). Also, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the HL buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S7514). Also, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the IX buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S7515). Also, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the IY buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S7516). By executing the processes of steps S7511 to S7516, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 can be restored to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

According to the above configuration, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" in the main process (FIG. 108) executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, or if the checksum is abnormal, the abnormal clearing process (step S7321) is executed to clear not only the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 but also the non-specific control work area 223 to "0" and initialize them. When information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, there is a possibility that information abnormality has also occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control. However, by initializing the work area 223 for non-specific control in the clearing process at the time of abnormality, it is possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the non-specific control from being executed in that state even though the work area 223 for non-specific control has information abnormality.

Even when the process of clearing "0" and the process of initializing the work area 223 for non-specific control in the clearing process at the time of abnormality (step S7321), the information of various registers used in the process corresponding to the specific control saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0". Thus, it is possible to perform processing of clearing "0" and initializing the work area 223 for non-specific control while preventing information used in processing corresponding to specific control from being erased after the processing corresponding to non-specific control is completed.

Even if the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting process is executed in the clearing process at the time of abnormality (step S7321), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0" or initialized. This makes it possible to prevent the return address information from being erased after the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 110) is completed.

The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" and the process of initializing are executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, and the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and the process of initializing are executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, regarding the "0" clearing process and the initial setting process, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

The configuration in which both the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are subject to checksum calculation is not limited, and the configuration may be such that only the work area 221 for specific control is subject to checksum calculation, or only the stack area 222 for specific control is subject to checksum calculation.

Also, the non-specific control work area 223 may be configured to be the checksum calculation target. In this case, the specific control work area 221 and the non-specific control work area 223 may be checksum calculation targets, the specific control stack area 222 and non-specific control work area 223 may be checksum calculation targets, and the specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222, and non-specific control work area 223 may be checksum calculation targets.

Also, the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured to be a checksum calculation target. In this case, the specific control work area 221 and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be checksum calculation targets, the specific control stack area 222 and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be checksum calculation targets, and the specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222, and non-specific control stack area 224 may be checksum calculation targets.

Further, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured to be checksum calculation targets. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured to be checksum calculation targets. The stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured to be a checksum calculation target.

Also, in steps S7508 and S7509 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 110), the configuration may be such that not only the work area 223 for non-specific control but also the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0" and initialized. In this case, it is preferable not to erase the information of the return address of the clear processing at the time of abnormality after the completion of the clear processing for non-specific control.

Also, in step S7508 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 110), the management start flag is cleared to "0", but the management start flag may not be cleared to "0". Further, in step S7508 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 110), the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to "0", and the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0".

<Thirty-Second Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirtieth embodiment in the processing configuration for monitoring information abnormality in the main RAM 65 using checksums. The configuration different from that of the thirtieth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirtieth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing power failure information storage processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The power failure information storage process is executed in step S6801 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103). Further, the processes of steps S7601 to S7613 in the power failure information storage process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

Steps S7601 to S7608 in the power failure information storage process are the same as steps S6701 to S6708 in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 101) in the thirtieth embodiment. If the occurrence of a power failure is identified, an affirmative determination is made in step S7608, and power failure processing in steps S7609 to S7613 is executed.

Specifically, first, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7609). As a result, when the power failure processing is normally executed and information is normally stored and held in the main RAM 65, the power failure flag of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted.

Thereafter, a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7610). In this case, the storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, which are the objects of calculation when calculating the checksum for specific control, are the same as the storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, which are the objects for calculation of the checksum for specific control in step S7701 of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) described later. In addition, the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum for the specific control includes an area (specifically, a set value counter) in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for the specific control. Then, the calculated checksum for specific control is stored in a storage area for storing the checksum for specific control in the work area 221 for specific control and excluded from the checksum calculation target for specific control.

After that, a checksum is calculated for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S7611). In this case, the storage areas in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, which are the objects of calculation when calculating the checksum for non-specific control, are the same as the storage areas in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, which are the objects for the calculation of the checksum for non-specific control in step S7706 of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) described later. Then, the calculated checksum for non-specific control is stored in a storage area for storing the checksum for non-specific control in the work area 221 for specific control and excluded from the checksum calculation target for specific control.

After that, all output port information in the register of the main CPU 63 is set to "0" (step S7612), and access to the main RAM 65 is prohibited (step S7613). Then, the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

Next, the checksum monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the checksum monitoring process is executed instead of steps S6604 to S6606 in the main process (FIG. 100). Further, the processes of steps S7701 to S7711 in the checksum monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, a checksum for specific control is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7701). The calculation method of the checksum for the specific control is the same as step S7610 in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 111). After that, the checksum for specific control calculated in step S7610 of the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and stored in the work area 221 for specific control is read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksum for specific control is compared with the checksum for specific control calculated in step S7701 (step S7702). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums for the specific control match (step S7703).

If the checksum for specific control does not match (step S7703: NO). Clear processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S7704). In the clearing process, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, the area indicating whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display part 38a is not variably displayed and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general electricity reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the reservation information for the general figure display unit 38a is erased. In addition, in the clearing process, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. Also, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initialization is performed (step S7705).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7703, or if the process of step S7705 is executed, the checksum for non-specific control is calculated for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S7706). The method of calculating the checksum for the non-specific control is the same as step S7611 in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 111). After that, the non-specific control checksum calculated in step S7611 of the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 is read from the specific control work area 221, and the read non-specific control checksum is compared with the non-specific control checksum calculated in step S7706 (step S7707). Then, it is determined whether or not the non-specific control checksums match (step S7708).

If the non-specific control checksums do not match (step S7708: NO), the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the specific control stack area 222 by a push instruction as "PUSH PSW" (step S7709). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the clearing process for non-specific control is started, it is possible to save the flag register information in the state before it changes after the subroutine is called or the subroutine is started in the stack area 222 for specific control. The amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

After that, by reading out the subroutine program corresponding to the non-specific control clearing process set in the non-specific control program, the non-specific control clearing process is started (step S7710). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the checksum monitoring process after execution of the clear process for the non-specific control is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction. When the clear processing for non-specific control ends, information for identifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the checksum monitoring processing indicated by the return address.

After the execution of the clear processing for the non-specific control, when the program for the clear processing in the abnormal state is returned to, the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for the specific control in step S7709 is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 by the pop instruction as "POP PSW" (step S7711). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S7709 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing clear processing for non-specific control. The processing of steps S7801 to S7818 in the non-specific control clearing process is executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

Steps S7801 to S7807 in the clearing process for non-specific control are the same as steps S7501 to S7507 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 110) in the thirty-first embodiment.

After that, the work area 223 for non-specific control is partially cleared (step S7808). In the partial clearing process, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, the storage areas other than the storage area where the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the specific control are saved are cleared to "0". Specifically, the WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer among the storage areas of the non-specific control work area 223 are not cleared to "0", while the storage areas other than these various buffers are cleared to "0".

In this case, the normal counter area 231, open/close execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233, calculation result storage area 234, and management start flag are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control. In addition, by not clearing the storage area in which the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the specific control is saved to "0", when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished and the process corresponding to the specific control is returned, the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control can be restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

After that, initialization processing is executed (step S7809). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed for the storage area to be cleared to "0" in step S7808 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

After that, the process of partially clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S7810). In the partial clear processing, among the storage areas of the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the storage areas other than the storage area where the return address information of the checksum monitoring processing (FIG. 112) after the completion of the clear processing for non-specific control is stored are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control while preventing the information of the return address of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) from being erased after the clearing process for non-specific control is completed.

Thereafter, initialization processing is executed (step S7811). In the initialization process, initialization is performed for the storage area that was cleared to "0" in step S7810 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

After that, the processing of steps S7812 to S7818 is executed. These steps S7812 to S7818 are the same as steps S7510 to S7516 in the non-specific control clearing process (FIG. 110) in the thirty-first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the checksum for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and the checksum for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are calculated separately. This makes it possible to individually specify an information abnormality for each of the storage area corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 and the storage area corresponding to the non-specific control in the main RAM 65 .

When there is an abnormality in the checksum for the specific control, the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control are cleared to "0" and the initialization process is performed. As a result, it is possible to narrow down the target for executing the "0" clearing process and the initial setting process to the area where the checksum abnormality is specified.

The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" and the process of initializing are executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, and the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and the process of initializing are executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, regarding the "0" clearing process and the initialization process, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

Although the management start flag is cleared to "0" in step S7808 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 113), the management start flag may not be cleared to "0". Further, in step S7808 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 113), the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to "0", and the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0".

<Thirty-third embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 . The configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . It should be noted that the processing of steps S7901 to S7924 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63 .

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step S7901). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during this predetermined waiting period. Also, access to the main side RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S7902). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), which is a process that periodically interrupts the main process, is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is the process that periodically interrupts the main process, is set to a second interrupt period (specifically, 2 milliseconds) that is shorter than the first interrupt period.

In other words, in this embodiment, the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process exist as the timer interrupt process so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are started by interrupting the main process. Also, the second timer interrupt process is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt process. In addition, when both the first interrupt period and the second interrupt period have passed in a situation where neither the first timer interrupt process nor the second timer interrupt process is executed, the second timer interrupt process is started first regardless of the order of passage of these periods. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process.

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt cycles, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1, for example, is executed.

After that, "1" is set to the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S7903). The start-up processing flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the first timer interrupt processing should be terminated without executing various processing set in the first timer interrupt processing even if the first timer interrupt processing is started. By setting "1" to the in-startup processing flag, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, various types of processing set in the first timer interrupt processing are not executed and the first timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step S7904). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt cycle. However, since the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in step S7903, even if the first timer interrupt process is started, the first timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process.

After that, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step S7905). That is, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started by performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 68c is being pressed. Here, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main controller 60 is provided with the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c as in the eleventh embodiment.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S7905: NO), it is determined whether or not the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7906). When power failure processing is executed in power failure information storage processing (step S8202) of first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117), which will be described later, the power failure flag is set to "1". The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power failure process was appropriately performed at the time of the previous power failure.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S7906: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7907). The checksum can be calculated by any method, but the calculation method is the same as the calculation method when the checksum is calculated in the power failure processing in the power failure information storage processing (step S8202) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) described later. The checksum calculated in the power failure processing is stored in the work area 221 for specific control, but the storage area of the work area 221 for specific control in which the checksum is stored is excluded from the storage areas to be calculated when calculating the checksum.

In other words, when calculating the checksum, some storage areas, which are part of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, are subject to calculation. The storage area to be calculated is a storage area in which information is basically not rewritten when power supply such as backup power to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is continued until the checksum is calculated in the power failure processing when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped and the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is restarted and the process of step S7907 is executed. Therefore, if the information in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is not changed after the supply of operating power to MPU 62 is stopped until the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is resumed, the checksum for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is the same as immediately before the supply of operating power to MPU 62 is stopped. In addition, the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum includes an area (specifically, a set value counter) in which set value information indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. Note that the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not included in the checksum calculation target.

Thereafter, the checksum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 calculated in the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 is read from the specific control work area 221, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S7907 (step S7908). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S7909).

If a negative determination is made in step S7906 or step S7909, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" or if the checksum does not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7910). The game stop flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is a situation in which an affirmative determination is made in step S8207 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) described later and the processing of steps S8208 to S8221 is not executed, that is, whether or not the execution of the processing for advancing the game should be stopped. By setting the game stop flag to "1", the process of steps S8208 to S8221 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8207 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) described later. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power interruption, the progress of the game is stopped, and when the checksum does not match due to the change in the storage state of information in at least one of the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control from the time of the previous power interruption, the progress of the game is stopped.

In this case, the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum includes an area (specifically, a set value counter) in which set value information indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control as described above. Therefore, if a setting value abnormality occurs after the previous power shutdown, the checksums do not match, and the progress of the game is stopped.

On the other hand, even if the game stop flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8202 to S8206 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) is executed. Therefore, even when the progress of the game is stopped, the blackout monitoring is performed, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is performed.

Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag or checksum at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S7911). By receiving the abnormality command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission part 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of supply of the operating power, and outputs the sound "Please change the setting" from the speaker part 54. Also, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the notification may be continued until the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed.

The manager of the game hall who confirms the above notification in the state where the progress of the game is stopped temporarily stops the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10, and then performs an operation for executing the set value updating process (step S7918) when restarting the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the power failure flag or checksum at the start of supply of operating power, the setting value can be newly set in the setting value updating process (step S7918).

In particular, the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum includes an area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control as described above. Therefore, if there is an abnormality in the checksum, there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the set value. On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the checksum as described above, execution of the set value update process (step S7918) is prompted to prevent the game from being played with the abnormal set value.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (steps S7906 and S7909: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is ON-operated using the setting key (step S7912), and it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11 (step S7913). The front door open sensor 95 is used to detect whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, as in the thirtieth embodiment, and the main body open sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, as in the thirtieth embodiment. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S7912: YES), the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S7913: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S7914). In the setting confirmation process, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 used to display various parameters, which are the management results of the game history, display that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed and processing for displaying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process. Note that the processing of steps S8001 to S8003 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63 .

First, the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8001). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed. When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", corresponding display control is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) described later. As a result, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off using the setting key (step S8002). In this case, it may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is in the OFF state. If the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned off (step S8002: NO), the process of step S8002 is repeated.

If the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off (step S8002: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8003). As a result, the display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are cancelled. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start to display the management result of the game history.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started and the main processing is started, but the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on. The setting confirmation process is executed while the start process is being executed. As a result, it is possible to check the set value even when no game is being played.

Assuming that the set value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game is continued, for example, when the set value is confirmed during the execution of the game cycle, there is a possibility that the switching to the opening/closing execution mode occurs while the set value is being confirmed. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be shot toward the special electric prize winning device 32 even though the opening/closing execution mode has been started. In addition, when the setting value is confirmed during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode proceeds under the condition that the setting value is being confirmed, so there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be shot toward the special electric prize winning device 32 in this case as well.

Assuming that the progress of the game is stopped when the set value is confirmed, there is a possibility that the processing for stopping the progress of the game will be complicated when the confirmation of the set value is started while the game is being played. For example, if confirmation of a set value is started during execution of a game round and the progress of the game is to be stopped in the middle, processing for stopping the game round in the middle is required. In this case, if the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 is stopped halfway when the confirmation of the set value is started and the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 is restarted when the confirmation of the set value is completed, complicated processing is required accordingly. Further, for example, if confirmation of the set value is started during execution of the opening/closing execution mode and the progress of the game is to be stopped in the middle, processing for stopping the opening/closing execution mode in the middle is required. In addition, if confirmation of the set value is started during execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display part 38a and the progress of the game is to be stopped in the middle, processing for stopping the variable display of the pattern in the middle is required. In addition, if confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of execution of the open execution state of the general electric accessory 34a and the progress of the game is to be stopped in the middle, processing for stopping the open execution state in the middle is required. On the other hand, it is conceivable to wait until all the games are completed before confirming the set value, but in this case, it is necessary to wait until none of the game round, the open/close execution mode, the variable display of the pattern on the general diagram display unit 38a, and the open execution state of the general electric accessory 34a.

On the other hand, since the setting confirmation processing is executed in the state where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, which is the state before the processing enabling the progress of the game is executed in the main processing executed when the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the setting value is confirmed in the state where the progress of the game has already been stopped. As a result, confirmation of the set value can be prevented while the game is in progress, and there is no need to stop the progress of the game or wait until the progress of the game is stopped when confirming the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately confirm the setting value.

Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 114), if the reset button 68c is pressed (step S7905: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step S7915). In the RAM clearing process, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, the area indicating whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display part 38a is not variably displayed and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general electricity reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the reservation information for the general figure display unit 38a is erased. In addition, in the RAM clear processing, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial setting is executed. In addition, in the RAM clearing process, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing (step S7902) of step S7902 is executed.

On the other hand, in the RAM clear processing, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" by the clearing operation by the manager of the game hall.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S7916), and it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S7917). As in the thirtieth embodiment, the front door open sensor 95 is used to detect whether the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, and the main body open sensor 96 is used to detect whether the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, as in the thirtieth embodiment. When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S7916: YES), the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S7917: YES), set value update processing is executed (step S7918).

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing. It should be noted that the processing of steps S8101 to S8107 in the setting value update processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8101). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated. When the setting update display flag is set to "1", corresponding display control is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) described later. As a result, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is 1 or more corresponding to "setting 1" and 6 or less corresponding to "setting 6" (step S8102). If the value of the set value counter is "0" or is 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S8102, and "1" is set to the set value counter (step S8103). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8102 or if the process of step S8103 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off using the setting key (step S8104). In this case, it may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is in the OFF state.

If the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned off (step S8104: NO), on condition that the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S8105: YES), the value of the set value counter in the specific control work area 221 is incremented by 1 (step S8106). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8105: NO) or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S8102. If it is determined in step S8102 that the value of the set value counter is 7 or more, the set value counter is set to "1" in step S8103. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

If the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off (step S8104: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8107). As a result, the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are canceled. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start to display the management result of the game history.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started and the main processing is started In the state where the reset button 68c is pressed, RAM clear processing (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is ON. As a result, the operation content of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is uniquely linked to the execution of the RAM clearing process (step S7915), and the operation content for generating the RAM clearing process (step S7915) can be made easy for the manager of the game hall to understand.

Even if the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0" and the information of the set value counter is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the setting values from being changed even if the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed.

Not only is the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 performed while pressing the reset button 68c, but also the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key insertion portion 68a is ON-operated by the setting key. Based on this, not only the RAM clearing process (step S7915) but also the setting value update process (step S7918) are executed. Also, as already described, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed based on the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while turning ON the setting key inserting portion 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. This makes it possible to share the ON operation for the setting key inserting portion 68a as the operation for executing the processing related to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the manager of the game hall to understand the details of the operation for generating the processing related to the set value.

Also, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key, the setting confirmation process is executed when the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, and the setting value updating process is executed when the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is added. This makes it possible to differentiate between the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the manager of the game hall to understand the operation contents for executing the desired processing out of the setting confirmation processing and the setting value update processing. Further, by increasing the number of operations for executing the setting value updating process rather than the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to illegally perform the setting value updating process.

Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 114), when the process of step S7911 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S7912 or S7913, when the process of step S7914 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S7916 or S7917, or when the process of step S7918 is executed, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S7919). . By clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", even if the first timer interrupt process is started, the state in which various processes set for the first timer interrupt process are not executed is canceled. In step S7919, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

After that, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S7920). The return command includes information indicating the number of pending information for the special figure display unit 37a, information indicating the current success or failure lottery mode, information indicating the current support mode, information indicating whether the open/close execution mode is in the middle of execution, and information indicating whether the game round is in the middle of execution. These information are set based on the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control. By receiving the return command, the sound emission control device 81 makes the display contents of the pattern display device 41, the light emission contents of the display light emitting part 53, and the sound output contents of the speaker part 54 correspond to the various information set in the return command.

Here, when confirming the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key inserting portion 68a with the setting key. Then, for example, when it is necessary to confirm the set value during execution of the game round, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off during the execution of the game round, and then the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on by the setting key. In this case, since backup power is not supplied to the RAM provided in the sound emission control device 81, the information for controlling the performance for the game round in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 is erased when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. On the other hand, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 and the clearing process of the main side RAM 65 is not executed when confirming the setting value, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off during the execution of the game round, and if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on by the setting key, after the setting confirmation process is executed, the fluctuation display of the pattern is resumed on the special figure display part 37a. Then, a situation occurs in which the pattern display device 41 does not perform the variable display of the pattern even though the special figure display unit 37a performs the variable display of the pattern.

On the other hand, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 after the setting confirmation process is completed, and the return command includes information indicating whether or not the game round is being executed. Then, when the sound emission control device 81 receives the return command, the pattern display device 41 starts the variable display of the pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the pattern display device 41 does not perform the variable display of the pattern even though the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display section 37a. The variable display of the symbols is performed at a relatively high speed so that each symbol during the variable display becomes indistinguishable or difficult for the player. In addition, the return command does not include the result of the success/failure determination process and the result of the allocation determination process of the game round to be restarted, and does not include information indicating the end timing of the game round to be restarted. Therefore, when the variable display of symbols on the pattern display device 41 is started based on the return command, the sound emission control device 81 ends the variable display of symbols based on the return command and starts the display corresponding to the newly received command when the command indicating the start of the next game round or the command to start the demonstration display on the symbol display device 41 is received if the game round to be restarted corresponds to the result of losing, and the opening/closing execution mode is started if the game round to be restarted corresponds to the jackpot result. When an opening command indicating the start is received, the variable display of patterns based on the return command is ended to start the opening performance.

When the return command includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the sound emission control device 81 causes the pattern display device 41 to start the display presentation indicating the opening/closing execution mode. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

After that, the remaining processing of steps S7921 to S7924 is performed. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123), but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process. Using such irregular time, the remaining process of steps S7921 to S7924 is repeatedly executed. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S7921 to S7924 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps S7921 to S7924, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the first timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the first timer interrupt process is started periodically with a period of 4 milliseconds, which is the first interrupt period. Also, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8201). As already described, the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in step S7903 of the main processing (FIG. 114). If the start-up flag is set to "1" (step S8201: YES), the first timer interrupt process ends without executing the various processes in steps S8202 to S8221. As a result, even if the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are allowed to be executed early when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started and the main process (FIG. 114) is started, various processes for controlling the progress of the game can be prevented from being executed in the first timer interrupt process until the process for controlling the progress of the game is permitted after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed.

As already described, the start-up processing flag is cleared to "0" in step S7919 when the processing for starting supply of operating power is completed in the main processing (FIG. 114). In the first timer interrupt processing, if the start-up processing flag is not set to "1" (step S8201: NO), the processing from step S8202 is executed.

In steps S8202 to S8219 and S8221, the same processes as steps S3701 to S3719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) in the fifteenth embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. In this case, as already described, when it is determined that the power failure flag is not set to "1" in the main processing (FIG. 114) (step S7906: NO) or when it is determined that the checksum does not match (step S7909: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7910). When "1" is set to the game stop flag, the processing of steps S8201 to S8206 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing, but the processing of steps S8208 to S8221 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8207. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power interruption, the progress of the game is stopped, and when the checksum does not match due to the change in the storage state of the information in at least one of the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control from the time of the previous power interruption, the progress of the game is stopped. For example, shooting of game balls is prohibited by not executing the process of step S8212. Further, execution of the game cycle and opening/closing execution mode is prohibited by not executing the process of step S8214. Also, since the process of step S8218 is not executed, the payout of game balls is prohibited.

On the other hand, even in such a situation where the progress of the game is stopped in this way, power failure monitoring is executed in step S8202, and the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and random number initial value counter CINI are updated in steps S8203 and S8204, and fraud detection is executed in step S8206.

In the first timer interrupt process, setting monitoring process is executed in step S8220. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing setting monitoring processing. The processing of steps S8301 to S8303 in the setting monitoring processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

By checking the value of the set value counter in the specific control work area 221, it is determined whether or not the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal (step S8301). Specifically, when the set value set in the set value counter is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal.

If the set value is abnormal (step S8301: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8302), similarly to step S7910 in the main process (FIG. 114). By setting the game stop flag to "1", the process of steps S8208 to S8221 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8207 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). As a result, when it is specified that the set value is abnormal, the progress of the game is stopped. On the other hand, even in a situation where "1" is set to the game stop flag, the processing of steps S8202 to S8206 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) is executed, so even in a situation where the progress of the game is stopped Power failure monitoring is executed, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is executed.

After that, an abnormality command indicating that the set value is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S8303). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting value abnormality, and outputs a voice saying "Please change the setting" from the speaker unit 54. Also, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the notification may be continued until the setting value update process (step S7918) of the main process (FIG. 114) is executed when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed.

The manager of the game hall who confirms the notification in the state where the progress of the game is stopped temporarily stops the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10, and then performs an operation for executing the set value updating process (step S7918) when restarting the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, when a set value abnormality occurs, a new set value can be set in the set value update process (step S7918).

Here, the process of monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) which is started periodically. As a result, it is possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal even while the game is being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though the set value is abnormal. Moreover, the monitoring of whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed each time a monitoring opportunity occurs. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether the set value is abnormal.

The main process (FIG. 114) does not include any process for monitoring whether the set values are normal. If a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal or not is set in the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 114), it becomes necessary to monitor whether the set value is normal or not, in addition to monitoring the power failure flag and checksum, at the start of supply of the operating power, resulting in an increased monitoring load. Furthermore, if the RAM clearing process (step S7915) and the setting value update process (step S7918) are to be executed when it is specified that the set value is abnormal at the start of the supply of the operating power, the processing configuration will be complicated accordingly. On the other hand, since the main process (FIG. 114) does not include a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal, it is possible to make the process configuration suitable for the process at the start of supply of operating power. In addition, even if the process for monitoring whether the set value is normal or not is not set in the process when the supply of operating power is started, as described above, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), so that if the set value is abnormal, it can be dealt with.

In the configuration in which the first timer interrupt processing is executed as described above, in the present embodiment, as already explained, there is a second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) separate from the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) as timer interrupt processing, and the second timer interrupt processing is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt processing even during execution of the first timer interrupt processing. In this case, although illustration is omitted in the first timer interrupt process, prohibition and permission of timer interrupt process are performed before and after each process of steps S8201 to S8221. For example, the timer interrupt process is prohibited before the lottery random number update process (step S8203) is executed, and the timer interrupt process is permitted after the lottery random number update process (step S8203) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second timer interrupt processing from being interrupted and started while the random number update processing for lottery is being executed. In addition, the timer interrupt processing is prohibited before executing the special figure special electric control processing (step S8214), and the timer interrupt processing is permitted after the special figure special electric control processing (step S8214) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second timer interrupt processing from being interrupted and started while the special figure special electric control processing is being executed.

Next, a configuration for controlling the display of various display units by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 119 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration for controlling the display of various display units by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG.

As targets for display control by the main side CPU 63, there are a special figure display section 37a, a special figure reservation display section 37b, a normal diagram display section 38a, a general diagram reservation display section 38b and the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204. Each of these is provided as a segment display portion in which a plurality of segments for display by LEDs are arranged. These segment display units enter a light-emitting state by setting data corresponding to the light-emitting state (for example, data "1", which is one of the binary data), and enter the light-emitting state by setting data corresponding to the light-off state (for example, data "0", which is the other of the binary data).

The main control board 61 is provided with a first display circuit 261 corresponding to the special figure display unit 37a, a second display circuit 262 is provided in correspondence with the special figure reservation display unit 37b, a third display circuit 263 is provided in correspondence with the general figure display unit 38a, a fourth display circuit 264 is provided in correspondence with the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 A fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to the . In the eleventh embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. However, in the present embodiment, the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 are not provided.

The first display circuit 261 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the special figure display section 37a. As a result, each display segment of the special figure display section 37a becomes a light emitting state or a light emitting state in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261. In this case, although the first display circuit 261 can store and hold the supplied display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), the display data gradually approaches the state of all "0" after the predetermined period. Therefore, the display segment of the special figure display unit 37a which is in the light emitting state by the display data provided to the first display circuit 261 is gradually turned off after a predetermined period has elapsed without new display data being provided to the first display circuit 261. In addition, due to such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the special figure display part 37a are changed but also when the display contents of the special figure display part 37a are not changed, the same display data as the output processing of the previous display data is supplied to the first display circuit 261.

The number of display segments provided in the special figure display portion 37a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the first display circuit 261 as display data for controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a.

The second display circuit 262 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the special figure reservation display section 37b. As a result, each display segment of the special-figure reservation display section 37b becomes a light emitting state or an extinguished state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262. In this case, although the second display circuit 262 can store and hold the supplied display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), the display data gradually approaches the state of all "0" after the predetermined period. Therefore, the display segment of the special figure reservation display part 37b which is in the light emitting state by the display data provided to the second display circuit 262 is gradually turned off after a predetermined period has elapsed without new display data being provided to the second display circuit 262. In addition, with such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the special figure reservation display part 37b are changed but also when the display contents of the special figure reservation display part 37b are not changed, the same display data as the output processing of the previous display data is supplied to the second display circuit 262.

The number of display segments provided in the special figure reservation display portion 37b is four. Therefore, 4-bit data is provided to the second display circuit 262 as display data for controlling the display of the special figure reservation display unit 37b. However, since the display data is provided in 8-bit units, 8-bit data is provided even when the display data is provided to the second display circuit 262, but 4 bits of them are used as display data for controlling the display of the special figure reservation display unit 37b.

The third display circuit 263 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the normal-diagram display section 38a. As a result, each display segment of the general pattern display section 38a is turned on or off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the third display circuit 263. FIG. In this case, although the third display circuit 263 can store and hold the supplied display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), the display data gradually approaches the state of all "0" after the predetermined period. Therefore, the display segment of the normal figure display part 38a which is in the light emitting state by the display data provided to the third display circuit 263 gradually turns off after a predetermined period of time without providing new display data to the third display circuit 263. Further, with such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the normal pattern display part 38a are changed but also when the display contents of the normal pattern display part 38a are not changed, the same display data as the output processing of the previous display data is supplied to the third display circuit 263.

The number of display segments provided in the normal map display portion 38a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the third display circuit 263 as display data for controlling the display of the normal-diagram display section 38a.

The fourth display circuit 264 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the normal figure holding display section 38b. As a result, each display segment of the normal pattern holding display section 38b is turned into a light-emitting state or a light-out state in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264. FIG. In this case, although the fourth display circuit 264 can store and hold the supplied display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), the display data gradually approaches the state of all "0" after the predetermined period. Therefore, the display segment of the normal figure holding display part 38b, which is in the light emitting state by the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264, gradually turns off after a predetermined period of time without providing new display data to the fourth display circuit 264. In addition, due to such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the normal pattern reservation display part 38b are changed but also when the display contents of the normal pattern reservation display part 38b are not changed, the same display data as the output processing of the previous display data is supplied to the fourth display circuit 264.

The number of segments for display provided in the normal figure reservation display portion 38b is four. Therefore, 4-bit data is provided to the fourth display circuit 264 as display data for controlling the display of the normal map holding display section 38b. However, since the display data is provided in 8-bit units, 8-bit data is provided even when the display data is provided to the fourth display circuit 264, but 4 bits of the data are used as display data for controlling the display of the normal figure holding display unit 38b.

The fifth display circuit 265 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of a plurality of display segments provided in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. As a result, each display segment of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is brought into a light emitting state or a non-lighting state in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265 . In this case, although the fifth display circuit 265 can store and hold the supplied display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), the display data gradually approaches the state of all "0" after the predetermined period. Therefore, the display segments of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, which are in the light emitting state due to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265, gradually turn off after a predetermined period of time without providing new display data to the fifth display circuit 265. Further, with such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed but also when the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not changed, the same display data as the previous display data output processing is supplied to the fifth display circuit 265.

Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided with seven display segments. On the other hand, display data is provided in units of 8 bits. When the display data of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided to the fifth display circuit 265, the 7-bit display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is provided as 8-bit unit data, then the 7-bit display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is provided as 8-bit unit data, and then the 7-bit display data corresponding to the third notification display device 203 is provided as 8-bit unit data, and finally. 7-bit display data corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204 is provided as data in 8-bit units.

In the configuration provided with the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 as described above, the main CPU 63 supplies display data to the display IC 266 . That is, one display IC 266 is provided so as to be common to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265, instead of one to one display IC 266 provided to each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. When supplying display data to the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 also supplies the display IC 266 with type data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data corresponds to.

More specifically, the main CPU 63 and the display IC 266 are electrically connected to each other using a type data signal line LN1, a type clock signal line LN2, a display data signal line LN3, and a display clock signal line LN4. All of these signal lines LN1 to LN4 are signal lines for transmitting signals from the main side CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by one-way communication.

The type data is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the type data signal line LN1. In this case, each 1-bit division of the type data by serial communication is indicated by the type clock signal transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the type clock signal line LN2. The type data is data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data to be transmitted corresponds to. The type data is transmitted as 5-bit data consisting of the 1st bit to the 5th bit. When the display data corresponds to the first display circuit 261, the first bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the second display circuit 262, the second bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the third display circuit 263, the third bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fourth display circuit 264, the fourth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fifth display circuit 265, the fifth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level.

Display data is transmitted by serial communication from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the display data signal line LN3. In this case, each 1-bit division of display data by serial communication is indicated by a display clock signal transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the display clock signal line LN4. The display data is transmitted in 8-bit units of 1st to 8th bits.

The main CPU 63 transmits display data corresponding to each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 to the display IC 266 in second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), which will be described later. In this case, display data is transmitted to one display circuit out of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 in one processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing, and the display circuits 261 to 265 to which the display data is transmitted are changed one by one each time a new processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing occurs according to the order of the n-th display circuit → the (n+1)th display circuit. In addition, in the second timer interrupt processing in the processing cycle following the processing cycle in which the display data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265, which is the last sequence in the order, is transmitted, the display data corresponding to the first display circuit 261, which is the first sequence in the above sequence, is transmitted. Only one piece of 8-bit unit display data is transmitted in the second timer interrupt processing cycle for transmitting display data to any one of the first to fourth display circuits 261 to 264, but in the second timer interrupt processing cycle for transmitting display data to the fifth display circuit 265, four 8-bit unit display data are transmitted corresponding to the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In the configuration in which the main CPU 63 transmits display data as described above, various storage areas are set in the specific control work area 221 and the non-specific control work area 223 to be referred to by the main CPU 63 in order to transmit display data. FIG. 120(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers 271 to 275 provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and FIG. 120(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various storage areas 234 and 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

As shown in FIG. 120(a), the specific control work area 221 is provided with a first display data buffer 271, a second display data buffer 272, a third display data buffer 273, a fourth display data buffer 274, and a fifth display data buffer 275.

Display data to be supplied to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the first display data buffer 271 . Since the first display circuit 261 is provided corresponding to the special figure display unit 37a as already explained, the display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display in the first display data buffer 271 will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the first display data buffer 271 in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the special figure special electric control process (step S8214) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the first display circuit 261 comes to process, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is changed but also when the display data is not changed.

Display data to be supplied to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the second display data buffer 272 . Since the second display circuit 262 is provided corresponding to the special figure reservation display unit 37b as already explained, the display data for causing the special figure reservation display unit 37b to perform a predetermined display in the second display data buffer 272 will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the second display data buffer 272 in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the special figure special electric control process (step S8214) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the second display circuit 262 comes to process, the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is changed but also when the display data is not changed.

Display data to be supplied to the third display circuit 263 is stored in the third display data buffer 273 . Since the third display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the normal map display unit 38a as already described, the display data for causing the normal map display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display is stored in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, the storage of the display data for the third display data buffer 273 is performed in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the normal/universal power control process (step S8215) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the third display circuit 263 comes to process, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is changed but also when the display data is not changed.

Display data to be supplied to the fourth display circuit 264 is stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 . As already explained, the fourth display circuit 264 is provided corresponding to the normal pattern reservation display unit 38b, so the fourth display data buffer 274 stores the display data for causing the normal pattern reservation display unit 38b to perform a predetermined display. In this case, the storage of the display data for the fourth display data buffer 274 is performed in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the normal/universal power control process (step S8215) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). Further, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the fourth display circuit 264 comes to process, the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is changed but also when the display data is not changed.

Display data to be supplied to the fifth display circuit 265 is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 . Since the fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as already described, the fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined displays. When it is time to process the second timer interrupt process for transmitting display data to the fifth display circuit 265, the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is changed but also when the display data is not changed.

Here, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display corresponding to the management result of the game history is performed, and when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) or the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is executed, the display corresponding to the current setting value is performed. In this case, since the fifth display data buffer 275 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, the process of storing display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed as a process corresponding to specific control. On the other hand, the process for deriving the management result of the game history is performed as a process corresponding to non-specific control, and the 61st parameter to the 68th parameter, which are the management result of the game history, are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 120(b), the non-specific control work area 223 includes not only the calculation result storage area 234 for storing the 61st to 68th parameters, but also a display target setting area 276 for storing the parameters to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 among the 61st to 68th parameters. In the present embodiment, as in the fifteenth embodiment, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds. Therefore, in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, the calculation result of the parameter to be displayed is read from the calculation result storage area 234 according to a predetermined display order every time 10 seconds elapse, and the calculation result of the read parameter is stored in the display target setting area 276. Then, when the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 is read out in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) which is the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the read display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is being executed, the fifth display data buffer 275 stores the display data for displaying that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is the process corresponding to the specific control. Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 116) is being executed, the display data for displaying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 being updated in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

In the configuration in which the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 are provided as described above, the main CPU 63 reads the display data from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to each processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), transmits the read display data to the display IC 266, and transmits to the display IC 266 the type data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data corresponds to. Send. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the display IC 266. As shown in FIG.

The display IC 266 includes a type data buffer 281, a selection signal output section 282, a display data buffer 283, and a display data output section 284, as shown in FIG. Display data received from the main CPU 63 is stored in the display data buffer 283 . The display data output unit 284 transmits the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 to the first to fifth display circuits 261-265. The type data buffer 281 stores the type data received from the main side CPU 63 . The selection signal output unit 282 outputs a selection signal for designating the display circuit 261 to 265 corresponding to the type data stored in the type data buffer 281 among the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 as the reception destination of the display data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119, the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261 are electrically connected using a display signal group 291 . The display signal group 291 is provided so as to enable 8-bit display data to be transmitted at once, and the 8-bit display data is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. A branch signal group 292 is provided by branching from the display signal group 291, and the branch signal group 292 is electrically connected to each of the second display circuit 262, the third display circuit 263, the fourth display circuit 264, and the fifth display circuit 265. The branch signal group 292 is provided so as to enable 8-bit display data to be transmitted at once, similarly to the display signal group 291, and the 8-bit display data is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication.

Since the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 are provided as described above, when the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is transmitted by the display data output unit 284, the display data is supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. In this case, first to fifth selection signal lines 301 to 305 are provided to receive the supplied display data and specify the display circuits 261 to 265 to be used.

The first selection signal line 301 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261 . When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261, the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 through the first selection signal line 301 in order to cause the first display circuit 261 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 are received and used only by the first display circuit 261 .

A second selection signal line 302 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the second display circuit 262 . When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262, the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 through the second selection signal line 302 in order to cause the second display circuit 262 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 are received and used only by the second display circuit 262 .

A third selection signal line 303 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the third display circuit 263 . When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263, the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the third selection signal to the third display circuit 263 through the third selection signal line 303 in order to cause the third display circuit 263 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 are received and used only by the third display circuit 263 .

A fourth selection signal line 304 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fourth display circuit 264 . When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264, the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the fourth selection signal to the fourth display circuit 264 through the fourth selection signal line 304 in order to cause the fourth display circuit 264 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 are received and used only by the fourth display circuit 264 .

A fifth selection signal line 305 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fifth display circuit 265 . When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265, the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the fifth selection signal to the fifth display circuit 265 through the fifth selection signal line 305 in order to cause the fifth display circuit 265 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 are received and used only by the fifth display circuit 265 .

FIG. 122 is a time chart showing how the main CPU 63 transmits the type data and the display data to the display IC 266 and how the display data transmitted from the display IC 266 is received by the first display circuit 261 or the second display circuit 262. 122(a) shows the transmission period of the type data signal from the main side CPU 63 to the display IC 266, FIG. 122(b) shows the transmission period of the type clock signal from the main side CPU 63 to the display IC 266, FIG. 122(c) shows the transmission period of the display data signal from the main side CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and FIG. 122(e) shows the transmission period of the first selection signal from the display IC 266 to the first display circuit 261, FIG. 122(f) shows the transmission period of the second selection signal from the display IC 266 to the second display circuit 262, and FIG. The same applies to the case where the third to fifth display circuits 263 to 265 receive the display data.

At the timing of t1 after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 including the main side CPU 63, the display IC 266 and the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is started, transmission of the type data and the display data from the main side CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122(b), a pulsed type clock signal is transmitted at each of timings t1, t2, t3, t4, and t5, and a pulsed type data signal is transmitted corresponding to the transmission of the pulsed type clock signal at t1 as shown in FIG. 122(a). As a result, information corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281 of the display IC 266 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 122(d), a pulse-shaped display clock signal is transmitted at timings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5, t6, t7, and t8, and a pulse-shaped display data signal is transmitted corresponding to the transmission of the pulse-shaped display clock signals at t2, t3, t5, and t7, as shown in FIG. 122(c). As a result, the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266 stores the display data corresponding to the information format.

When the transmission of the display clock signal for the 8th bit is completed at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 122(d), the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 starts transmitting the first selection signal toward the first display circuit 261 corresponding to the type data stored in the type data buffer 281 at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 122(e). Transmission of the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 by the display data output unit 284 is started. As a result, the display data is received and used by the first display circuit 261 .

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIGS. 122(a) to 122(d), transmission of the type data and the display data from the main side CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is newly started. In this case, at the timing of t10, transmission of the first selection signal from the display IC 266 to the first display circuit 261 is stopped, as shown in FIGS.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122(b), a pulse type clock signal is transmitted at timings t10, t11, t12, t13, and t14, and a pulse type data signal is transmitted corresponding to the transmission of the pulse type clock signal at t11 as shown in FIG. 122(a). As a result, information corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281 of the display IC 266 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 122(d), pulse-like display clock signals are transmitted at timings t10, t11, t12, t13, t14, t15, t16, and t17, and pulses at t10, t11, t12, t15, t16, and t17 as shown in FIG. 122(c). A pulsed display data signal is transmitted corresponding to the transmission of the shaped display clock signal. As a result, the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266 stores the display data corresponding to the information format.

When the transmission of the display clock signal for the 8th bit is completed at the timing t18 as shown in FIG. 122(d), the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 starts transmitting the second selection signal toward the second display circuit 262 corresponding to the type data stored in the type data buffer 281 as shown in FIG. 122(f) at the timing t18. Transmission of the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 by the display data output unit 284 of No. 6 is started. As a result, the display data is received and used by the second display circuit 262 .

For the first to fourth display circuits 261 to 264, only one piece of display data is transmitted in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) to which display data is to be transmitted, but for the fifth display circuit 265, four pieces of display data are transmitted corresponding to the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) to which display data is to be transmitted. As already explained, the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123) is started at the second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds), but each processing time is set so that even if four pieces of display data are transmitted, one processing cycle is completed within the second interrupt cycle.

With the above configuration, it is possible to transmit display data to a plurality of display circuits 261 to 265 using one display IC 266 . Here, as already explained, each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 can store and hold the supplied display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds). In this case, if the reception of the display data in each of the display circuits 261 to 265 exceeds a predetermined period, the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the normal diagram display section 38a, the general diagram reservation display section 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 Even in the situation where the display contents are not changed, the display segment that is in the light emitting state will temporarily approach the extinguished state, and as a result, there is a possibility that the light in the display segment will blink. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, apart from the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 117) which is started at the first interrupt cycle (specifically 4 milliseconds), a second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123) which is started at a second interrupt cycle (specifically 2 milliseconds) shorter than the first interrupt cycle is set, and transmission of display data to the display IC 266 is collectively performed in the second timer interrupt processing.

The second timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processes of steps S8401 to S8413 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, interrupt inhibition is set to inhibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) (step S8401). By prohibiting the generation of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117), it is possible to prevent the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117) from interrupting and starting the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. In addition, by prohibiting the occurrence of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), even if the second interrupt cycle has passed during the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), it is possible to prevent the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) from being started redundantly.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8402). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is being executed by the main CPU 63 . As already explained, the set value update process (FIG. 116) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, while the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. The process (Fig. 123) is interrupted.

A situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1" means that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting the setting value update process (FIG. 116) being executed by the main CPU 63. If an affirmative determination is made in step S8402, setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is executed (step S8403). In the setting process, the display data for displaying the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 being updated on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and displaying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the display shown in FIG. Specifically, when the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display that the setting value is being updated, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has at least one display segment in a light emitting state. In other words, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 enters the display state. Thus, even when the display indicating that the set value is being updated is performed, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are not out of order. Even when the game history management result is displayed, at least one display segment in each of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state, and each of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state.

Specifically, the display contents of each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are as follows. In the first notification display device 201, one central display segment is in a light emitting state, and the remaining display segments are in a non-lit state. Even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, one display segment in the center of the first information display device 201 can be in a light-emitting state, but the display content of the first information display device 201 when the management result of the game history is displayed does not include the display content in which one center display segment is in a light-emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-off state. As a result, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 in the situation where the set value is being updated can be set to the display contents not displayed in the management result of the game history, while using the display segment which can be in the light emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed.

In the second notification display device 202, similarly to the first notification display device 201, one center display segment is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. Even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, one display segment in the center of the second information display device 202 can be in a light emitting state, but the display content of the second information display device 202 when the management result of the game history is displayed does not include the display content in which one central display segment is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in an extinguished state. Thus, it is possible to make the display contents of the second notification display device 202 in a situation where the set value is updated into the display contents which are not displayed in the management result of the game history, while using the display segment which can be in a light emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed.

In the third notification display device 203, some of the display segments are in a luminous state and the rest of the display segments are in a non-lit state so that the character "H" is displayed. In this case, the display segment to be in the luminous state can be in the luminous state even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, but when the management result of the game history is displayed, the display content of the third information display device 203 does not include the display content in which the letter "H" is displayed. Thus, it is possible to make the display contents of the third notification display device 203 in a situation where the set value is updated into the display contents not displayed in the management result of the game history, while using the display segment which can be in a light-emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed. Further, the display content of the third notification display device 203 when the set value is being checked does not include the display content in which the letter "H" is displayed. Thus, by displaying "H" on the third notification display device 203, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall that the setting value is being updated.

In the fourth notification display device 204, some display segments are in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state so that a display corresponding to the current set value is performed. In the case of FIG. 124(a), the current set value is "setting 2", so "2" corresponding to "setting 2" is displayed on the fourth display device 204 for notification. By confirming the fourth notification display device 204, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the current set value. Note that the display contents of the fourth notification display device 204 when the set value is being updated can be displayed both when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the set value is being checked.

Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), if a negative determination is made in step S8402, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8404). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether or not the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is being executed by the main side CPU 63 . As already explained, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 115) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 114) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, while the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. The process (Fig. 123) is interrupted.

A situation in which "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag means that the current processing of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is interrupted and started while the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 115) is being executed by the main CPU 63. If an affirmative determination is made in step S8404, setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step S8405). In the setting process, the display data for displaying the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and displaying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the display shown in FIG. Specifically, when the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display that the setting value is being updated, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has at least one display segment in a light emitting state. In other words, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 enters the display state. Thus, even when the display indicating that the set value is being confirmed is being performed, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are not out of order.

Specifically, the display contents of each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are as follows. In the first notification display device 201, one central display segment is in a light emitting state, and the remaining display segments are in a non-lit state. Even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, one display segment in the center of the first information display device 201 can be in a light-emitting state, but the display content of the first information display device 201 when the management result of the game history is displayed does not include the display content in which one center display segment is in a light-emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-off state. Thus, it is possible to make the display contents of the first notification display device 201 in the state of confirming the set value into the display contents not displayed in the management result of the game history while using the display segment which can be in the light emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed.

In the second notification display device 202, similarly to the first notification display device 201, one center display segment is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. Even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, one display segment in the center of the second information display device 202 can be in a light emitting state, but the display content of the second information display device 202 when the management result of the game history is displayed does not include the display content in which one central display segment is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in an extinguished state. Thus, it is possible to make the display contents of the second notification display device 202 in the situation of confirming the set value into the display contents not displayed in the management result of the game history while using the display segment which can be in the light emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed.

Here, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are the same regardless of whether the setting value is being updated or the setting value is being confirmed. As a result, the display of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 makes it possible to clearly notify the manager of the gaming hall that the display target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not the management result of the game history but the set value.

In the third notification display device 203, some display segments are in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state so that the letter "k" is displayed. In this case, the display segment to be in the luminous state can be in the luminous state even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, but the display content of the third information display device 203 when the management result of the game history is displayed does not include the display content in which the letter "k" is displayed. Thus, it is possible to make the display contents of the third information display device 203 in the situation of confirming the set value into the display contents not displayed in the management result of the game history, while using the display segment which can be in the light emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed. Further, while "H" is displayed on the third notification display device 203 when the setting value is being updated, "k" is displayed on the third notification display device 203 when the setting value is being confirmed. As a result, by confirming the display contents of the third notification display device 203, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall whether the setting value is being updated or the setting value is being confirmed.

In the fourth notification display device 204, some display segments are in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state so that a display corresponding to the current set value is performed. In the case of FIG. 124(b), the current set value is "setting 2", so "2" corresponding to "setting 2" is displayed on the fourth display device 204 for notification. By confirming the fourth notification display device 204, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the current set value. Note that the display contents of the fourth notification display device 204 when the set value is being checked can be displayed both when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the set value is being updated.

Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), if a negative determination is made in step S8404, setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 in normal mode is executed (step S8406). In this case, information is read from the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the display data for causing the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 to display the parameters corresponding to the read information is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. By transmitting the display data to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the calculation results of the currently displayed parameters among the 61st to 68th parameters are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the processing of step S8403, step S8405, or step S8406 is executed, the signal transmission state through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned OFF (step S8407), and the signal transmission state through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is turned OFF (step S8408). Thereafter, update processing of the type counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S8409).

The type counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the transmission target of the display data among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt processing. When the type counter value is "1", the display data in the first display data buffer 271 is to be transmitted; when the type counter value is "2", the display data in the second display data buffer 272 is to be transmitted; when the type counter value is "3", the display data in the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted; In some cases, the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted. In the updating process of the type counter, 1 is added to the value of the type counter, and when the value of the type counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the upper limit value of "5", the value of the type counter is set to "1". As a result, the transmission target of the display data is sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 for each processing of the second timer interrupt processing.

After that, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step S8410). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64; when the value of the type counter is "2", the type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64; when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64; is read from the main-side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read from the main-side ROM 64.

After that, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S8411). Specifically, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271 when the type counter value is "1", the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272 when the type counter value is "2", the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273 when the type counter value is "3", the display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274 when the type counter value is "4", and the fifth display data is read when the type counter value is "5". Display data is read from the display data buffer 275 .

Thereafter, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step S8412). In the transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read out in step S8410 is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG. Also, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read out in step S8411 is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) (step S8413).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 114) is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned on, and the operating power is reduced, which is the state before the main processing is executed to enable the game to proceed. The setting confirmation process is executed while the supply start process is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value.

Assuming that the set value is confirmed while the game continues to progress, for example, if the set value is confirmed during the execution of the game cycle, there is a possibility that the switching to the opening/closing execution mode occurs while the set value is being confirmed. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be shot toward the special electric prize winning device 32 even though the opening/closing execution mode has been started. In addition, when the setting value is confirmed during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode proceeds under the condition that the setting value is being confirmed, so there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be shot toward the special electric prize winning device 32 in this case as well.

Assuming that the progress of the game is stopped when the set value is confirmed, there is a possibility that the processing for stopping the progress of the game will be complicated when the confirmation of the set value is started while the game is being played. For example, if confirmation of a set value is started during execution of a game round and the progress of the game is to be stopped in the middle, processing for stopping the game round in the middle is required. In this case, if the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 is stopped halfway when the confirmation of the set value is started and the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 is restarted when the confirmation of the set value is completed, complicated processing is required accordingly. Further, for example, if confirmation of the set value is started during execution of the opening/closing execution mode and the progress of the game is to be stopped in the middle, processing for stopping the opening/closing execution mode in the middle is required. In addition, if confirmation of the set value is started during execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display part 38a and the progress of the game is to be stopped in the middle, processing for stopping the variable display of the pattern in the middle is required. In addition, if confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of execution of the open execution state of the general electric accessory 34a and the progress of the game is to be stopped in the middle, processing for stopping the open execution state in the middle is required. On the other hand, it is conceivable to wait until all the games are completed before confirming the set value, but in this case, it is necessary to wait until none of the game round, the open/close execution mode, the variable display of the pattern on the general diagram display unit 38a, and the open execution state of the general electric accessory 34a.

On the other hand, since the setting confirmation processing is executed in the state where the processing for starting the supply of the operating power is executed before the processing for enabling the progress of the game is executed in the main processing executed when the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the setting value is confirmed in the state where the progress of the game has already been stopped. As a result, confirmation of the set value can be prevented while the game is in progress, and there is no need to stop the progress of the game or wait until the progress of the game is stopped when confirming the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately confirm the setting value.

By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 114) is started, the reset button 68c is pressed, and the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether the setting key insertion part 68a is ON. As a result, the operation content of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is univocally linked to the execution of the RAM clear processing (step S7915), making it possible for the game hall manager to easily understand the operation content for generating the RAM clear processing (step S7915).

Even if the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0" and the information of the set value counter is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the setting values from being changed even if the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed.

Not only is the power of the pachinko machine 10 turned on while pressing the reset button 68c, but also the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on by the setting key. Based on this, not only the RAM clearing process (step S7915) but also the setting value updating process (step S7918) are executed. Also, as already described, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed based on the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while turning ON the setting key inserting portion 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. This makes it possible to share the ON operation for the setting key inserting portion 68a as the operation for executing the processing related to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make the contents of the operation for generating the processing related to the setting value easy for the manager of the game hall to understand.

When turning on the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key inserting part 68a with the setting key, if the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process is executed, and if the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is added, the set value update process is executed. This makes it possible to differentiate between the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the manager of the game hall to understand the operation contents for executing the desired processing out of the setting confirmation processing and the setting value update processing. Further, by increasing the number of operations for executing the setting value updating process rather than the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to illegally perform the setting value updating process.

A process for monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) which is started periodically. As a result, it is possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal even while the game is being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though the set value is abnormal.

Monitoring as to whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed each time a monitoring trigger occurs. More specifically, it is executed each time the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is activated. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether the set value is abnormal.

The main process (FIG. 114) does not include any process for monitoring whether the set values are normal. If a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal or not is set in the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 114), it becomes necessary to monitor whether the set value is normal or not, in addition to monitoring the power failure flag and checksum, at the start of supply of the operating power, resulting in an increased monitoring load. Furthermore, if the RAM clearing process (step S7915) and the setting value update process (step S7918) are to be executed when it is specified that the set value is abnormal at the start of the supply of the operating power, the processing configuration will be complicated accordingly. On the other hand, since the main process (FIG. 114) does not include a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal, it is possible to make the process configuration suitable for the process at the start of supply of operating power. In addition, even if the process for monitoring whether the set value is normal or not is not set in the process at the start of supply of operating power, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), so if the set value is abnormal, it can be dealt with.

By performing display settings for the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 in the display IC 266 according to the display data transmitted from the main side CPU 63, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are controlled to display. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63 . In this case, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. This makes it possible to increase the number of display units to be subjected to display control while suppressing an increase in the number of display ICs 266 . In addition, the transmission interval of the display data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is set to a transmission interval at which the display IC 266 performs display settings for the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to each display unit before the display corresponding to the display data can not be maintained on each display unit. As a result, even if one display IC 266 is used for a plurality of display units, it is possible to appropriately display corresponding display data on each display unit.

When transmitting display data to the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 transmits to the display IC 266 type data that enables identification of the type of the display circuits 261 to 265 to which the display data is to be set. Accordingly, when display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the display IC 266 may set the display data to the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to the type data transmitted from the main CPU 63. FIG. Therefore, even if one display IC 266 is used for a plurality of display units, the configuration of the display IC 266 can be simplified.

The main CPU 63 transmits the display data so that the update cycle is repeated when one of the update cycles is that the plurality of display units are set as display data once in a predetermined order. As a result, the main CPU 63 can change the display unit to which the display data is to be transmitted in accordance with the predetermined order, so that the processing configuration of the main CPU 63 can be simplified.

Even if the contents of the display data for one display part are the same as the contents of the display data previously transmitted with the display part as the transmission object, the main side CPU 63 transmits the display data when the display part becomes the transmission object. As a result, even if one display IC 266 is used for a plurality of display units, it is possible to continue the same display on a predetermined display unit.

The main CPU 63 executes processing for transmitting display data to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) which is started by interrupting other processing when the second interrupt period comes. Thereby, it is possible to set the cycle in which the display data is set in each display unit to a predetermined cycle. Therefore, even in a configuration in which one display IC 266 is used for a plurality of display units, display data can be set by the display IC 266 for each display unit before the display corresponding to the display data cannot be maintained in each display unit.

Processing for transmitting display data to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 to be set for display by the display IC 266 is concentrated in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123). This makes it possible to set the display data to the same period in the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 .

The main CPU 63 interrupts other processing and executes the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) when the first interrupt period comes. In this case, the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is set to a cycle shorter than the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). This makes it possible to transmit the display data in a shorter cycle than in the configuration in which the processing of transmitting the display data to the display IC 266 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117).

In addition, processing for transmitting display data to the display IC 266 is set in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) having a shorter interrupt cycle than the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) in which the processing for advancing the game is set. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is started at an appropriate period for executing the process for progressing the game, and the excellent effects already described can be obtained.

The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated even when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is being executed. This makes it possible to set the transmission cycle of the display data to a predetermined cycle.

When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) starts, the interrupt of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is prohibited, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) ends, the interrupt of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) from being interrupted and executed while the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the processing for transmitting the display data.

The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated even when the process (steps S7901 to S7918) at the start of supply of operating power is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114). This makes it possible to control the display of a plurality of display units even in a situation in which the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. Further, since the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is configured to be activated by interrupting the processing at the start of supply of operating power, it is possible to control the display of a plurality of display units while the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed without complicating the processing configuration of the processing at the start of supply of operating power.

Even when the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated, and in this situation, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) transmits the display data for displaying the current set value on the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, without complicating the processing configuration of the main processing (FIG. 114), the current setting value can be displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 while the setting value update processing (step S7918) is being executed.

The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated each time the second interrupt period elapses even after the main process (FIG. 114) executes the process for starting the supply of operating power. As a result, by using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), it is possible to control the display of a plurality of display units both in a situation in which the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed and in a situation after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed.

As in the first embodiment, an update button 68b is provided, and in the setting value updating process (FIG. 116), the setting value may be updated by one step each time the update button 68b is pressed instead of being updated by one step each time the reset button 68c is pressed. Further, positions corresponding to "setting 1" to "setting 6" are set as rotation operation positions when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and rotated, and a setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the setting key insertion portion 68a may be set. Further, the setting key insertion portion 68a may be configured to be further rotated than the ON position, and each time the rotation operation is performed beyond the ON position, the setting value in the process of updating is updated to the next setting value.

Further, in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the setting key insertion portion 68a may be turned off to confirm the setting value being selected, and the setting value update process may be terminated by pressing the reset button 68c. In addition, in the configuration in which the update button 68b is provided, in the setting value update processing (FIG. 116), the setting value being selected may be determined by turning off the setting key insertion portion 68a, and the setting value update processing may be terminated by further pressing the update button 68b.

Further, as a condition for executing the setting value updating process (FIG. 116), the configuration may be such that the condition that the game machine body 12 is in the open state is not set, the configuration that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is not set, or both the condition that the game machine body 12 is in the open state and the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open state are not set.

Further, as a condition for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115), the condition that the game machine main body 12 is in the open state may not be set, or the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open state may not be set, or both the condition that the game machine main body 12 is in the open state and the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open state are not set.

Further, when it is specified that the power failure flag is not set to "1" or the checksum is abnormal in the main process (FIG. 114) executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the RAM clear process (step S7915) may be executed. In this case, after the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed, the setting value update process (step S7918) may be executed, the setting value update process (step S7918) may be executed and the progress of the game may be stopped, or the process for controlling the progress of the game may be started.

Further, in the main process (FIG. 114), the setting confirmation process (step S7914) may be executed before these processes instead of the process of determining whether the power failure flag is set to "1" and the comparison process of the checksum. In this case, it is possible to give priority to the process for confirming the setting value.

Also, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is not limited to the configuration in which it is executed each time the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is started. In this case, it is possible to reduce the frequency of execution of the monitoring while periodically monitoring whether or not the set values are normal.

Alternatively, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) may be executed in the remaining processes (steps S7921 to S7924) in the main process (FIG. 114). In this case, it is possible to monitor whether the set value is normal or not by using idle time in a situation where the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) are not executed.

Further, the configuration may be such that the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed when a game round is newly started. More specifically, when a game round is newly started, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) may be executed before the success/failure determination process is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the validity determination process from being executed in a situation where the set value is abnormal.

Further, when it is specified that the setting value is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S8220), it may be configured to move to the setting value update process (step S7918).

Further, when it is specified that the setting value is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S8220), the main process (FIG. 114) may be started with the setting error flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control set to "1". In this case, even if no operation is performed in the main process (FIG. 114) to cause the setting value update process to be executed, if the setting error flag is set to "1", the setting value update process is forcibly executed, so that the setting value update process set in the main process (FIG. 114) can be used to force the setting value to be newly set.

In addition, the holding information acquired when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 and the holding information acquired when the game ball enters the second operation opening 34 are stored separately, and the special figure display part 37a may be provided with the first special figure display part and the second special figure display part corresponding to the reservation information. In this case, the variation display of the pattern in the first special figure display part and the variation display of the pattern in the second special figure display part can be performed in duplicate, and when a predetermined game state is reached, the duration of the variation display of the pattern in one of the special figure display parts may be extremely long. In this configuration, waiting for confirmation of the set value until a situation in which no game is played results in a long waiting time. On the other hand, by executing the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the process of starting the supply of operating power in the main CPU 63, it is possible to confirm the setting value without causing the waiting time as described above.

In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, the duration of the variable display of the pattern in the general pattern display section 38a may be extremely long. In this configuration, waiting for confirmation of the set value until a situation in which no game is played results in a long waiting time. On the other hand, by executing the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the process of starting the supply of operating power in the main CPU 63, it is possible to confirm the setting value without causing the waiting time as described above.

In addition, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is executed are not limited to the display contents in the above embodiment. Alternatively, the first to third information display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off, and the fourth information display device 204 may display a display corresponding to the current set value.

In addition, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the set value update process (FIG. 116) is executed are not limited to the display contents in the above embodiment. Alternatively, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off, and the fourth notification display device 204 may display a display corresponding to the current set value.

Further, instead of transmitting the type data and the display data to the display IC 266 at the same time, the main CPU 63 may be configured to start transmitting the display data after starting to transmit the type data. In this case, the transmission of the display data may be started during the transmission of the type data, or the transmission of the display data may be started after the transmission of the type data is completed. Alternatively, the transmission of the type data may be started after the transmission of the display data is started. In this case, the transmission of the type data may be started during the transmission of the display data, or the transmission of the type data may be started after the transmission of the display data is completed.

Further, the display IC 266 is not limited to the configuration in which only one display IC 266 is provided so as to be common to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265, and may be provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. In this configuration, if the period for storing and holding display data in each of the display ICs provided in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is short, there is a risk that unintended blinking will occur in each display section depending on the cycle of providing display data to each display IC. On the other hand, by consolidating the processing for transmitting the display data to the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) having a relatively short interrupt cycle as in the above embodiment, it is possible to shorten the cycle of providing display data to each display IC and prevent unintended blinking from occurring in each display unit.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the hit random number counter C1 is provided in the main RAM 65, a configuration in which a random number circuit for updating the random number acquired in the win/fail judgment process may be provided. In this case, in the internal function register setting process in the main process (FIG. 114), setting is made to associate the random number of the random number circuit with the random number obtained in the success/failure determination process.

Also, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), prohibition and permission of timer interrupt process are performed before and after each process of steps S8201 to S8221, but this may be changed. For example, before and after a part of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117), timer interrupt processing is prohibited and allowed. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which prohibition of timer interrupt processing and permission of timer interrupt processing are set so as to interpose a plurality of processes included in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117).

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is not set to prohibit the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) from being interrupted. In this case, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is executed with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), it is possible to give priority to the display control of a plurality of display units. Further, in the configuration, in order to prevent the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) from being activated redundantly, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) may be prohibited from interrupting, while the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) may not be prohibited from being interrupted.

Also, when both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) have an interrupt opportunity, the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) may be prioritized over the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). may be configured to start first.

Also, instead of prohibiting execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) while the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) may be interrupted and activated even when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the processing for advancing the game over the display control of the plurality of display units.

Alternatively, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) may not be set, and various processes of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) may be distributed and executed in the main process (FIG. 114) and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) respectively. For example, in the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the main process (FIG. 114), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to perform a display indicating that the setting is being confirmed and a display corresponding to the current setting value. In addition, in the setting value update processing (step S7918) in the main processing (FIG. 114), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to display a display indicating that the setting is being updated and a display corresponding to the current setting value. Further, in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117), the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 4 It may be configured to set the processing for controlling the display.

Further, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is not limited to the configuration in which only the processing for controlling the display of the plurality of display units is executed, and in addition to or instead of the processing for controlling the display of the plurality of display units, a processing different from the processing for controlling the display of the plurality of display units may be executed. For example, a part of the processing for progressing the game may be executed by the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117), and the rest may be executed by the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123). In this case, it is preferable to use the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), which has a relatively short interrupt cycle, to execute the processing that is preferable to have a relatively short execution cycle, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117), which has a relatively long interrupt cycle, to execute the processing that does not cause any problem even if the execution cycle is relatively long. Further, among the processes of steps S8202 to S8221 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) of the above embodiment, the power failure information storage process (step S8202) may be executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and the other processes may be executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). In this case, power outage monitoring can be repeatedly performed in relatively short cycles. In addition to or instead of this configuration, the fraud detection process (step S8206) may be executed by the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and other processes may be executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). In this case, fraud monitoring can be repeatedly performed at relatively short intervals.

Further, the number of display circuits 261 to 265 for which display data display setting is performed by the display IC 266 is not limited to five, and may be two, three, four, or six or more. Further, the fifth display circuit 265 is not limited to the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are associated, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be provided in a one-to-one correspondence.

<Thirty-fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirty-third embodiment in the processing configuration of the setting value updating process executed by the main CPU 63 . The configuration different from that of the thirty-third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted. Further, in this embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with an update button 68b as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing setting value update processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the processing of steps S8501 to S8508 in the setting value update processing is executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8501). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to "setting 1" and 6 or less corresponding to "setting 6" (step S8502). If the value of the set value counter is "0" or is 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S8502, and "1" is set to the set value counter (step S8503). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8502 or if the process of step S8503 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8504). If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S8504: NO), on condition that the update button 68b has been pressed (step S8505: YES), the value of the set value counter in the specific control work area 221 is incremented by 1 (step S8506). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher. If the update button 68b is not pressed (step S8505: NO) or if the value of the setting value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S8502. As a result, when the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

If the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S8504: YES), the current set value is determined and the process proceeds to step S8507. In step S8507, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off using the setting key. In this case, it may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is in the OFF state. If the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned off (step S8507: NO), the process of step S8507 is executed again.

If the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off (step S8507: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8508).

According to the above configuration, the setting value is confirmed by pressing the reset button 68c in the configuration in which the setting value is updated by pressing the update button 68b, and the setting value updating process is completed by turning off the setting key insertion portion 68a. That is, in order to end the setting value update processing after updating the setting values in the setting value update processing, it is necessary to press the reset button 68c as well as turn off the setting key insertion portion 68a. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of trying to play a game with the set values after illegally updating the set values.

<Thirty-Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration regarding the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 executed by the main side CPU 63 is different from that of the thirty-third embodiment. The configuration different from that of the thirty-third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Information of the base value calculated by the main CPU 63 is stored in the calculation result storage area 234 . The base value is the ratio of the total number of game balls to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the big win result nor the high-frequency support mode.

In detail regarding the calculation of the base value, in this embodiment, although the normal counter area 231 is provided in the non-specific control work area 223, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232 and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are not provided. The normal counter area 231 is provided with a normal general winning counter 231a, a normal special electric winning counter 231b, a first normal operation counter 231c, a second normal operation counter 231d, and a normal out counter 231e, as in the fifteenth embodiment. In neither the open/close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode according to the jackpot result, when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31, the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is incremented by 1; The value of 1c is incremented by 1, the value of a normal second operation counter 231d is incremented by 1 when one game ball enters the second operation port 34, and the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1 when one game ball enters the out port 24a. When the values of the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are set to K91 to K95 in neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the big win nor the high-frequency support mode, the base values are as follows.
・Base value: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K91 x “Number of prize balls for winning to general winning port 31” + K92 x “Number of winning balls to win to special electric winning device 32” + K93 x “Number of winning balls to winning to first operating port 33” + K94 x “Number of winning balls to winning to second operating port 34”) / Total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93+K94+K95) ratio.

The calculation of the base value is performed each time the result calculation process (FIG. 130), which will be described later, is executed in the management process (step S8920) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which will be described later. When the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) is cleared to "0" when the control start flag is set to "1" and neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is set, and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number, thereby clearing "0".

The management start reference number is set to 300, which is smaller than the shift reference number, as in the fifteenth embodiment. At the stage of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is sometimes checked before shipment, and at that time, game balls are put in each ball entry section and the operation after that is checked. The base value under such circumstances may be a value different from that under which normal games are played. Therefore, when the management start flag is not set to "1" and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the big win result nor the high-frequency support mode is set to the management start reference number, which is a number smaller than the shift reference number, the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are once cleared to "0". , it is possible to reduce the influence of the operation check on the base value in a situation where a normal game is played. Note that the management start reference number is not limited to 300 and may be any number as long as it is plural, and may be set to a number less than 300 or more than 300.

The shift reference number is set to 60,000. Since the pachinko machine 10 shoots a maximum of 100 game balls per minute, 60000 is the maximum number of shots in 10 hours. In this case, the general business hours of the game hall is about 13 hours, and the time during which the game is played in neither the opening/closing execution mode by the result of the big win nor the high-frequency support mode is about 10 hours. Therefore, the shift reference number is set on the assumption of the maximum number of game balls shot in one business day. By clearing the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 to "0" each time the shift reference number is reached, it is possible to calculate the base value within the range of the shift reference number. Note that the shift reference number is not limited to 60,000, and may be any number as long as it is plural.

The calculation result storage area 234 is provided with a current status area 311, a first history area 312, a second history area 313, and a third history area 314 as storage areas for storing the base value information. Each of these various areas 311 to 314 has the same storage capacity, and specifically, has a capacity of 1 byte so that the base value information can be stored.

A current area 311 stores the base value calculated in the most recent result calculation process (FIG. 130). In other words, the latest base value is stored in the current status area 311 .

The first history area 312 stores the final base value in the previous calculation period. In this case, if the previous calculation period is after the management start flag is set to "1", the first history area 312 stores the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in the previous calculation period in neither the open/close execution mode according to the big win result nor the high frequency support mode becomes the shift reference number. Further, if the management start flag is set to "1" by the lapse of the previous calculation period, the first history area 312 stores the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number during the previous calculation period in neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode.

The second history area 313 stores the final base value in the calculation period two times before. In this case, if the calculation period two times before is after the management start flag is set to "1", the second history area 313 stores the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in the situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the big win result nor the high-frequency support mode is used in the calculation period two times before. Further, if the management start flag is set to "1" by the elapse of the calculation period two times before, the second history area 313 stores the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number in the situation where neither the open/close execution mode due to the big win result nor the high-frequency support mode is performed in the calculation period two times before.

A third history area 314 stores the final base value in the calculation period three times before. In this case, if the calculation period three times before is after the management start flag is set to "1", the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in the situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the big win result nor the high-frequency support mode in the three calculation period before is stored. Further, if the management start flag is set to "1" by the elapse of the calculation period three times before, the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in the three calculation period before the previous calculation period in neither the open/close execution mode according to the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode becomes the management start reference number is stored.

The base values stored in the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. Specifically, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the base values to be notified are switched in a predetermined order of current area 311→first history area 312→second history area 313→third history area 314, and switching of the base values to be notified in the predetermined order is repeated.

127(a) to 127(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 are notified in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1". 127(a) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified, FIG. 127(b) shows an example of the display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the first history area 312 is notified, and FIG. 127(c) shows the base stored in the second history area 313. An example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the value is notified is shown, and FIG. 127(d) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified.

As shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 has eight display segments 321-324. The seven display segments 321 to 324 out of the eight display segments 321 to 324 are rod-shaped light emitting regions of the same shape and size, and are arranged to form the figure "8". On the other hand, one display segment 321 to 324 is a circular light emitting area, and is provided at the lower right position with respect to the seven display segments 321 to 324 arranged in the shape of "8". At least one display segment 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a luminous state even when any of the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 is to be notified.

In the first notification display device 201, a display indicating that the base value is being notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. Specifically, the character “b” is displayed on the first notification display device 201 regardless of which of the base values in the various areas 311 to 314 is to be notified. When information other than the base value is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first notification display device 201 does not display the letter "b". Thus, by confirming that the character "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the base value is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.例文帳に追加

On the second notification display device 202, a display indicating which of the various areas 311 to 314 the base value is being notified is displayed. Specifically, in a situation where the base value of the current area 311 is notified, the character "L." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(a). In the situation where the base value of the first history area 312 is notified, the character "1." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(b). In the situation where the base value of the second history area 313 is notified, the characters "2." are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(c). In the situation where the base value of the third history area 314 is notified, the characters "3." are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(d). As a result, by confirming the characters displayed on the second notification display device 202, the manager of the game hall can grasp which calculation period the base value notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is.

In the second notification display device 202, the circular display segments 321 to 324 are in a luminous state regardless of which base value of the various areas 311 to 314 is being notified. As will be described later, in the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, any number from "0" to "9" is displayed as a display corresponding to the base value. In this case, if any one of the numbers ``1'' to ``3'' is displayed on the second notification display device 202, three numbers are lined up on the second to fourth notification display devices 202 to 204, making it difficult to grasp the base value. On the other hand, when the circular display segments 321 to 324 provided at the lower right of the second notification display device 202 are in a luminous state, even if any number “1” to “3” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, it is possible to distinguish between the numbers displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the numbers displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204.

On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the number of the base value to be notified is displayed. The base value is calculated as a decimal number up to the second decimal place, and the first decimal place of the base value is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the second decimal place of the base value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Here, when the base value is "1.00", the number "0" is displayed on each of the third display device 203 and the fourth display device 204 for notification. On the other hand, when the base value is not yet stored in the areas 311 to 314 to be notified, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. As a result, even when two display devices, the third display device 203 and the fourth display device 204, display a base value calculated as a decimal number up to the second decimal place, it is possible to distinguish display contents between a case where the base value is "1.00" and a case where the base value is not yet stored in the areas 311 to 314 to be notified.

The display contents of the combination of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are the same when the base value is "1.00" and when the base value is "0.00". On the other hand, in order to distinguish between the two, one of the former and the latter may be configured to maintain the light emitting state of "00" display, and the other may be configured to blink the display of "00".

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 129, how the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the management start flag is set to "1" will be described. FIG. 129(a) shows the period during which the base values stored in the current status area 311 are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 129(b) shows the period during which the base values stored in the first history area 312 are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 129(d) shows the period during which the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, and FIG. 129(e) shows the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in a situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode according to the jackpot result is performed after the base value calculation period is newly started (that is, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA). It indicates the period until the total number of game balls) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000).

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 129(a), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start to notify the base values stored in the current state area 311. FIG. 127(a), the first notification display device 201 displays that the base value is the notification target, the second notification display device 202 displays that the base value stored in the current area 311 is the notification target, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311.

Here, as shown in FIG. 129(e), the initial calculation display is performed from timing t1 to timing t2. Specifically, during the period from the new start of the base value calculation period to the time when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000) in neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode, the characters to be displayed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are not kept lit, but are initially displayed for calculation. , the character to be displayed blinks. Immediately after the calculation period starts, there is little game history information for calculating the base value, so the actual base value may deviate greatly from the theoretical value range of the base value. On the other hand, it is possible to make the game hall manager recognize that the calculation period has just started by displaying the calculation initial display immediately after the calculation period has started.

In addition, in the initial display of calculation, the numbers corresponding to the base values are displayed in the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, while the numbers continue to light up. As a result, it is possible to notify that the calculation period has just started without reducing the visibility of the base value. In addition, it is not limited to this, and even if it is an initial display of calculation, at least one of the third information display device 203 and the fourth information display device 204 may be configured to blink. Also, the initial reference number is not limited to 6000, and may be any number as long as it is plural.

At the timing of t2, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000) in a situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the big win result nor the high-frequency support mode from the timing of t1 reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000), and the initial display of calculation is terminated as shown in FIG. 129 (e). As a result, not only the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 but also the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 start lighting display.

After that, at timing t3, when the display continuation period elapses from timing t1, as shown in FIG. 129(a), the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is terminated, and as shown in FIG. 129(b), notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the final calculation result of the base value in the previous calculation period, the calculation initial display is not performed.

After that, at timing t4, when the display continuation period elapses from timing t3, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 ends as shown in FIG. 129(b), and the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 starts as shown in FIG. In this case, since the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the final calculation result of the base value in the calculation period two times before, the calculation initial display is not performed.

After that, at timing t5, when the display continuation period elapses from timing t4, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 ends as shown in FIG. 129(c), and the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 starts as shown in FIG. 129(d). In this case, since the base value stored in the third history area 314 is the final calculation result of the base value in the calculation period three times before, the calculation initial display is not performed.

After that, at timing t6, when the display continuation period elapses from timing t5, as shown in FIG. 129(d), the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 ends, and as shown in FIG. In this case, in order to notify that the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000 pieces) in neither the open/close execution mode due to the big win result nor the high-frequency support mode after the base value calculation period is newly started, the calculation initial display is performed as shown in FIG.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from timing t6 at timing t8, the notification of the base value stored in the current status area 311 ends as shown in FIG. 129(a) and the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 starts as shown in FIG. 129(b). In this case, since the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the final calculation result of the base value in the previous calculation period, the calculation initial display is not performed.

Next, a processing configuration for enabling notification of the base value as described above will be described.

In the management processing (step S8920) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), which will be described later, a program for management execution processing corresponding to non-specific control is read in step S3803 in the same manner as the management processing (FIG. 70) in the fifteenth embodiment. Then, in this management execution process (FIG. 71), a check process is executed in step S3908 as in the fifteenth embodiment.

In the check process, in a situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is performed according to the jackpot result, if the entry of one game ball into the general winning opening 31 is specified, the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is incremented by 1; When specified, the value of the first operation counter 231c for normal use is incremented by 1, when entry of one game ball into the second operation port 34 is specified, the value of the second operation counter 231d for normal use is incremented by 1, and when entry of one game ball into the out port 24a is specified, the value of the out counter 231e for normal use is incremented by 1. In addition, in the check processing, result calculation processing and display processing are executed.

FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing result calculation processing. It should be noted that the processing of steps S8601 to S8615 in the result calculation process is executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, base value calculation processing is executed (step S8601). In the arithmetic processing, the values of various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are used to calculate the base value. The calculation method of the base value is as already explained. Then, the current area 311 is overwritten with the calculated base value (step S8602).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step S8603). The management start flag has a value of "0" when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured. Further, when the work area 223 for non-specific control including the management start flag is cleared to "0" and initialized, the value of the management start flag becomes "0". In a situation where the management start flag has a value of '0' and neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the result of the big hit nor the high-frequency support mode, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number, so that the management start flag is set to '1'. Also, when the management start flag is set to "1", the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" and a new calculation period is started. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the influence of the operation check at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 to affect the base value in a situation where a normal game is played after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

If a negative determination is made in step S8603, the total number is calculated by adding up all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8604). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is greater than 300, which is the management start reference number (step S8605).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8605, the management start flag is set to "1" (step S8606). Thereafter, data shift processing is executed (step S8607). In the data shift process, information stored in the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is shifted in the order of the second history area 313→the third history area 314, the first history area 312→the second history area 313, and the current area 311→the first history area 312. As a result, the final base value in the calculation period two times before is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the calculation period three times before, the final base value in the calculation period one time before is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the calculation period two times before, and the base value calculated last in the current calculation period is stored in the first history area 312 as the final base value in the calculation period one time before. In data shift processing, an LDIR instruction is used to shift information as described above. In the LDIR instruction, by designating the address of the information storage source area and the information storage destination area address, the information stored in the storage source area is shifted (copied) to the storage destination area.

However, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", basically no base value information is stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314. Therefore, in step S8607, only the final base value of the calculation period is substantially shifted to the first history area 312 in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1". After that, the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are all cleared to "0" (step S8608).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8603, the total number is calculated by adding up all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8609). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is greater than the initial reference number of 6000 (step S8610). If a negative determination is made in step S8610, the calculation initial flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step S8611), and if an affirmative determination is made in step S8610, the calculation initial flag is cleared to "0" (step S8612). The calculation initial flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) has reached the initial reference number in a situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the big win result nor the high-frequency support mode has been performed since the base value calculation period is newly started.

If the processing of step S8611 or step S8612 has been executed, it is determined whether or not the total number calculated in step S8609 is equal to or greater than 60000, which is the shift reference number (step S8613). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8613, data shift processing is executed (step S8614). In the data shift process, as in step S8607, the information stored in the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is shifted in the order of second history area 313→third history area 314, first history area 312→second history area 313, current area 311→first history area 312. As a result, the final base value in the calculation period two times before is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the calculation period three times before, the final base value in the calculation period one time before is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the calculation period two times before, and the base value calculated last in the current calculation period is stored in the first history area 312 as the final base value in the calculation period one time before. In data shift processing, an LDIR instruction is used to shift information as described above. In the LDIR instruction, by designating the address of the information storage source area and the information storage destination area address, the information stored in the storage source area is shifted (copied) to the storage destination area. After that, the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are all cleared to "0" (step S8615).

FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing display processing. The processing of steps S8701 to S8714 in the display processing is executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step S8701). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8701, 1 is subtracted from the value of the switching timing counter provided in the non-specific control work area 223 (step S8702). The switching timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the timing of switching the base value to be notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 among the base values stored in the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. As already explained, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the base values to be notified are switched in a predetermined order of current area 311→first history area 312→second history area 313→third history area 314, and switching of the base values to be notified in the predetermined order is repeated.

When the processing of step S8702 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the switching timing counter after subtraction of 1 is "0", thereby determining whether or not the display continuation period has passed since the base value that is the current notification target becomes the notification target (step S8703). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8703, 1 is added to the value of the display object counter provided in the non-specific control work area 223 (step S8704). If the value of the counter to be displayed after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "3" (step S8705: YES), the value of the counter to be displayed is cleared to "0" (step S8706).

The display target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the base value to be notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 among the base values stored in the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. Specifically, when the value of the counter to be displayed is "0", the base value stored in the current area 311 is to be notified; when the value of the counter to be displayed is "1", the base value stored in the first history area 312 is to be notified; when the value of the counter to be displayed is "2", the base value stored in the second history area 313 is to be notified; The value is to be notified.

If a negative determination is made in step S8705, or if the process of step S8706 is executed, a value corresponding to the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) is set as a value corresponding to the switching timing of the next notification target in the switching timing counter of the non-specific control work area 223 (step S8707).

If a negative determination is made in step S8703 or if the processing of step S8707 is executed, processing for setting display data corresponding to the base value to be reported this time in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. Specifically, first, the display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8708). The display type data is display data for causing the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 to display that the notification target is the base value, and causes the second notification display device 202 to display which of the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 corresponds to the base value of the notification target. display data for

After that, the base value is read from the area corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed among the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234, and the calculation result data corresponding to the first and second decimal places in the read base value is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8709). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to display the number in the first decimal place in the base value to be notified, and display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to display the number in the second decimal place in the base value to be notified.

As described above, the display data including the display type data and the calculation result data is set in the display object setting area 276 . By transmitting the display data to the display IC 266 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which will be described later, a display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

Also, the process of step S8709 is executed each time the display process (FIG. 131) is executed regardless of the switching timing of the base value to be notified. As already explained, each time the calculation result storage process (FIG. 130) is executed, the base value is calculated using the current values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, and the calculated base value is stored in the current situation area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234. In this case, the processing in step S8709 for setting the calculation result data in the display target setting area 276 is executed each time the display processing (FIG. 131) is executed regardless of the switching timing of the base value to be notified as described above, so that if the base value in the current area 311 is the base value to be notified and the base value is changed, the changed base value can be notified.

After that, it is determined whether or not the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified based on the value of the display target counter (step S8710), and it is determined whether or not the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8711). As already explained, the calculation initial flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) has reached the initial reference number in a situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode according to the big win result nor the high-frequency support mode has been performed since the base value calculation period newly started. If both steps S8710 and S8711 result in an affirmative determination, the initial display flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step S8712), and if a negative determination is made in either step S8710 or step S8711, the initial display flag is cleared to "0" (step S8713).

The initial display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 should be blinking in order to notify that the base value in the current area 311 is the target of notification and that the base value is the base value at the beginning of the calculation after the start of the calculation period. When it is specified that the initial display flag is set to "1" in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) described later, the display data stored in the display object setting area 276 is not only transmitted to the display IC 266, but also when the display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are blinked and the third notification display device 2 is displayed. 03 and the fourth notification display device 204 are turned on. Incidentally, when it is specified that the initial display flag is not set to "1" in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) described later, all of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are lit and displayed when the display corresponding to the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 is performed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204.

On the other hand, if the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is not set to "1" and a negative determination is made in step S8701, the base value is read from the current status area 311 regardless of the value of the display target counter, and the calculation result data corresponding to the first and second decimal places of the read base value is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). By transmitting the display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the number to the first decimal place in the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the number to the second decimal place of the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. With the above configuration, when the management start flag is not set to "1", only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is notified without notifying the base value in the past calculation period.

In a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", although the calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 276, the display type data is not set. Although the details will be described later, when the base value is notified in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are different from those when the base value is notified in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1".

Next, the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processing of steps S8801 to S8825 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step S8801). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. During this predetermined waiting period, the start of operation and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main side RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S8802). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that periodically interrupts the main process, is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is the process that periodically interrupts the main process, is set to a second interrupt period (specifically, 2 milliseconds) that is shorter than the first interrupt period.

In other words, in the present embodiment, as in the thirty-third embodiment, the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process exist as timer interrupt processes so that the interrupt cycles are relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are started by interrupting the main process. Also, the second timer interrupt process is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt process. Also, when both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have passed in a situation where neither the first timer interrupt processing nor the second timer interrupt processing is executed, the second timer interrupt processing is started first regardless of the order of passage of these cycles. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process may be started with priority over the second timer interrupt process.

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt cycles, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1, for example, is executed.

After that, "1" is set to the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8803). The start-up processing flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the first timer interrupt processing should be terminated without executing the processing for progressing the game, while executing the processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processing set in the first timer interrupt processing even if the first timer interrupt processing is started.

FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing first timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . As already explained, the first timer interrupt process is started periodically at a period of 4 milliseconds, which is the first interrupt period. Also, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

In steps S8901 to S8905, the same processes as steps S301 to S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. That is, power failure monitoring is executed by executing power failure information storage processing in step S8901. Specifically, similarly to the power failure information storage process (FIG. 101) in the thirtieth embodiment, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, an infinite loop occurs after the power failure process is executed. In the power failure process, a power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. In addition, by executing the lottery random number update process in step S8902, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric role counter C4 is updated, and the numerical information of the random number initial value counter CINI is updated by executing the random number initial value update process in step S8903, and the fluctuation type counter update process is executed in step S8904. In addition, by executing fraud detection processing in step S8905, it monitors whether or not an event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that one of the plurality of types of events has occurred, a game stop flag provided in a work area 221 for specific control is set to "1".

After executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8906). When neither the game stop flag nor the start-up processing flag is set to "1" (step S8906: NO), the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is executed. In steps S8907 to S8919, the same processes as steps S8208 to S8220 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. Also, in step S8920, management processing is executed in the same manner as step S8221 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment. In the check process, the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are updated, and the result calculation process (FIG. 130) and the display process (FIG. 131) are executed.

On the other hand, if at least one of the game stop flag and the launching process flag is set to "1" (step S8906: YES), the first timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S8907 to S8920. That is, not only when the game stop flag is set to "1" but also when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing, while the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed.

As in the thirty-third embodiment, the start-up processing flag is set to "1" before the start of supply of operating power (steps S8801 to S8819) is started in the main process (FIG. 132) and before the interrupt is permitted (step S8805), and is cleared to "0" before the start of supply of operating power and the start of the remaining process (steps S8822 to S8825). In this case, as described above, in the first timer interrupt process, by not executing the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 when the start-up process flag is set to "1", it is possible to prevent the processes for progressing the game from being executed in a situation where the processes (steps S8801 to S8819) at the start of supply of operating power are being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt process, even if the start-up flag is set to "1", by executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905, the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps S8801 to S8819) is executed. Fraud detection is performed.

In particular, by executing the power failure information storage process (step S8901) even in a situation where the start-up flag is set to "1", it is possible to execute the power failure process even if a power failure occurs while the operation power supply start process (steps S8801 to S8819) is being executed. As described above, in the power failure process, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Therefore, when the supply of operating power is restarted, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 from being identified. As a result, even if a power failure occurs during the setting value update process (step S8819), the setting value selected at that time can be stored as the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during execution of the setting value updating process, it is not necessary to re-execute the setting value updating process when the supply of operating power is restarted.

By the way, when the set value update process is being executed, the interrupt is not prohibited in either the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134), and the interrupt can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) including the setting value update process is interrupted and activated in the main process (FIG. 132), the return address information of the main process (FIG. 132) for returning after the timer interrupt process to be activated is completed is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before the timer process is activated is stored in the specific control. It is saved in stack area 222 . Then, when the timer interrupt process to be activated ends, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 132) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 132), after setting the startup processing flag to "1" in step S8803, a value corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8804). In this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, each display segment 321 to 324 provided in the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 can normally be in a light emitting state. In order to make the administrator of the game hall confirm whether or not, until the initial check period has passed after the processing of step S8804 is started, check display is performed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, as the check display, all the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the light emitting state as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b). In step S8804, information corresponding to this initial check period is set in the checking counter.

The initial check period is set to a time longer than the longest time required until the process for controlling the progress of the game is started when none of the processes of steps S8811, S8812, S8815 and S8819, which will be described later, are executed in the main process. Therefore, the game may be started while the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step S8805). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. However, since the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in step S8803, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, among the various types of processing of the first timer interrupt processing, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring processing are executed, while the processing for advancing the game is not executed, and the first timer interrupt processing ends.

After that, in steps S8806 to S8825, the same processes as steps S7905 to S7924 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. Specifically, it is determined in step S8806 whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. That is, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started by performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 68c is being pressed. Here, in this embodiment, as in the thirty-third embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with the setting key inserting portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main controller 60 is provided with the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8806: NO), it is determined whether or not the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S8807). When power failure processing is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the power failure flag is set to "1". The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power failure processing was appropriately performed at the time of the previous power failure.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S8807: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S8808). The checksum calculation method is the same as in the thirty-third embodiment. After that, the checksum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 calculated in the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 is read from the specific control work area 221, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S8808 (step S8809). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S8810).

If a negative determination is made in step S8807 or step S8810, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" or if the checksum does not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8811). By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8906. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, or when the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 since the previous power failure, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, but the process for progressing the game is not executed.

Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag or checksum at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S8812). By receiving the abnormality command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission part 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting supply of operating power, and outputs the sound "Please change the settings" from the speaker part 54. - 特許庁Also, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the notification may be continued until the setting value update process (step S8819) is executed when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (steps S8807 and S8810: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is ON-operated using the setting key (step S8813), and it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11 (step S8814). As in the thirtieth embodiment, the front door open sensor 95 is used to detect whether the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, and the main body open sensor 96 is used to detect whether the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, as in the thirtieth embodiment. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S8813: YES), the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S8814: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S8815). Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8806: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step S8816). The content of the RAM clearing process is the same as step S7915 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment. After that, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S8817: YES), and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S8818: YES), set value update processing is executed (step S8819). Details of the set value update process will be described later.

If the process of step S8812 is executed, the determination of step S8813 or step S8814 is negative, the process of step S8815 is executed, the determination of step S8817 or step S8818 is negative, or the process of step S8819 is executed, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8820). By clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", the state in which the processing for progressing the game is not executed even if the first timer interrupt processing is started is canceled. In step S8820, the power failure flag in work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

After that, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S8821). The content of the information contained in the return command and the processing content of the sound emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as in step S7920 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment.

After that, the remaining processing of steps S8822 to S8825 is performed. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134), but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process. Using such irregular time, the remaining process of steps S8822 to S8825 is repeatedly executed. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S8822 to S8825 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps S8822 to S8825, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the second timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processing of steps S9001 to S9014 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, interrupt inhibition is set to inhibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) (step S9001). By prohibiting the generation of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), it is possible to prevent the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) from interrupting and starting the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. In addition, by prohibiting the occurrence of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), even if the second interrupt cycle has passed during the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), it is possible to prevent the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) from being started redundantly.

Thereafter, update processing of the checking counter is executed (step S9002). In the checking counter update process, when the value of the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more, the value of the checking counter is subtracted by one. As a result, when the initial check period is measured using the checking counter, the value of the checking counter is periodically decremented each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S9003). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update process (FIG. 137). As already explained, the set value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, while the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed. The process (Fig. 134) is interrupted.

A situation in which "1" is set in the setting update display flag means that the current process of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started while the set value update process (FIG. 137) is being executed by the main CPU 63. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9003, setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is executed (step S9004). In the setting process, similarly to step S8403 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment, the display data for displaying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed in the fifth display data buffer 275. As a result, as in the thirty-third embodiment, a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

If a negative determination is made in step S9003, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S9005). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136). As already explained, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 136) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 132) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, while the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. The process (Fig. 134) is interrupted.

A situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" means that the current processing of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 137) is being executed by the main CPU 63. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9005, setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step S9006). In the setting process, similarly to step S8405 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment, the display data for displaying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed in the fifth display data buffer 275. As a result, as in the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display the status that the set value is being checked and the current set value.

If a negative determination is made in step S9005, normal setting processing is executed (step S9007). The normal setting process will be described later in detail.

If the processing of step S9004, step S9006, or step S9007 has been executed, the processing of steps S9008 to S9014 is executed. The processing contents of these steps S9008 to S9014 are the same as steps S8407 to S8413 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment.

Specifically, first, the state of transmitting signals through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned off (step S9008), and the state of transmitting signals through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is turned off (step S9009). After that, the type counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is updated (step S9010).

The type counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the transmission target of the display data among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt processing. When the type counter value is "1", the display data in the first display data buffer 271 is to be transmitted; when the type counter value is "2", the display data in the second display data buffer 272 is to be transmitted; when the type counter value is "3", the display data in the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted; In some cases, the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted. In the updating process of the type counter, 1 is added to the value of the type counter, and when the value of the type counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the upper limit value of "5", the value of the type counter is set to "1". As a result, the transmission target of the display data is sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 for each processing of the second timer interrupt processing.

After that, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step S9011). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64; when the value of the type counter is "2", the type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64; when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64; is read from the main-side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read from the main-side ROM 64.

After that, the display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S9012). Specifically, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271 when the type counter value is "1", the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272 when the type counter value is "2", the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273 when the type counter value is "3", the display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274 when the type counter value is "4", and the fifth display data is read when the type counter value is "5". Display data is read from the display data buffer 275 .

Thereafter, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step S9013). In the transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step S9011 is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG. In the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step S9012 is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG.

After that, interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) (step S9014).

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing normal setting processing in step S9007 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134). Note that the processes of steps S9101 to S9109 in the normal setting process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the checking counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is 1 or more (step S9101). If the value of the checking counter is 1 or more (step S9101: YES), it means that it is the initial checking period. In this case, the check display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 (step S9102). The display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is the display data for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as already described. In addition, the check display data is display data for performing check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, that is, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Display data for setting all the display segments 321 to 324 to the light emitting state. By supplying the check display data to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. As a result, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp whether or not the respective display segments 321-324 of the first-fourth notification display devices 201-204 can be in a normal light-emitting state.

Here, the initial check period is configured to be cancelable when confirming settings or updating set values. Such a cancelable configuration will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process executed in step S8815 of the main process (FIG. 132). The processing of steps S9201 to S9206 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, an operation instruction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S9201). Upon receiving the operation instruction command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the speaker unit 54 to output the sound "Please operate the reset button 68c." The notification continues until the reset button 68c is pressed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9202). If the reset button 68c has not been pressed, the process waits in step S9202. If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S9202: YES), the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S9203). This cancels the initial check period.

After that, the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S9204). By setting the setting confirmation display flag to "1", the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) makes an affirmative determination in step S9005 as already explained, and stores the display data for displaying the status of confirming the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9006). . As a result, as in the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display the status that the set value is being checked and the current set value.

Thereafter, on condition that the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off (step S9205: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S9206). As a result, the display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are cancelled. In this case, the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base values.

When the setting confirmation process is started as described above, on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed, the initial check period is canceled in the middle and the current setting values are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 132) is started by the main CPU 63, even if the initial check period is started in the situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main processing is being executed and the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the initial check period is canceled and the first check period is canceled when the set value is checked in the situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. It is possible to display the current setting values on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . Therefore, it is possible to check the set value without waiting for the initial check period to elapse.

In addition, even when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132), the initial check period is started first, so it is possible to confirm the setting value after confirming whether the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally emit light. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value.

FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the set value update process executed in step S8819 of the main process (FIG. 132). It should be noted that the processing of steps S9301 to S9310 in the setting value update processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S9301). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the speaker unit 54 to output a sound saying "The setting is being changed." The notification is continued until this set value update process is terminated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to "setting 1" and 6 or less corresponding to "setting 6" (step S9302). If the value of the set value counter is "0" or is 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S9302, and "1" is set to the set value counter (step S9303). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S9302 or if the process of step S9303 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off using the setting key (step S9304). In this case, it may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or may be configured to determine whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is in the OFF state.

If the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned off (step S9304: NO), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9305). If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S9305: YES), on condition that the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1" (step S9306: NO), the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step S9307), and the checking counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S9308).

The initial check period is canceled by clearing the checking counter to "0". In addition, by setting the setting update display flag to "1", the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) makes an affirmative determination in step S9003 as already described, and stores the display data for displaying the status that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9004). ). As a result, as in the thirty-third embodiment, a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S9306, or if the process of step S9308 is executed, 1 is added to the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9309). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S9305: NO) or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S9302. If it is determined in step S9302 that the value of the set value counter is 7 or more, the set value counter is set to "1" in step S9303. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

If the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off (step 9304: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S9310). As a result, the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are canceled. In this case, the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base values.

When the set value update process is executed as described above, on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed, the initial check period is canceled in the middle and the current set value is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 132) is started by the main CPU 63, even if the initial check period is started in the situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main processing is being executed and the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the initial check period is canceled and the first check period is canceled when the set value is updated in the situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. It is possible to display the current setting values on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . Therefore, it is possible to update the setting value while confirming the current setting value without waiting for the elapse of the initial check period.

In addition, even when the set value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132), the initial check period is started first, so it is possible to update the set values after confirming whether the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally be in the light emitting state. This makes it possible to accurately update the set values.

Also, when the reset button 68c is pressed to update the set values in the set value update process (FIG. 137), the initial check period is canceled. Thus, when the reset button 68c is pressed to update the setting value, the initial check period is canceled accordingly, and the operability for canceling the initial check period can be improved.

Returning to the description of the normal setting process (FIG. 135), if the value of the checking counter is "0" and it is not the initial check period (step S9101: NO), it is determined whether or not the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S9103). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S9103: NO), a pre-management display setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S9104). In the setting process, the display data for making all the display segments 321 and 322 of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 to emit light is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 . In addition, it is not limited to the configuration in which all the display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the light emitting state, and in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, all the display segments 321 and 322 may be configured to perform blinking display.

After that, the calculation result data set in the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control is read (step S9105), and the read calculation result data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 as display data to be applied to the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 (step S9106). As already explained, in the display processing (FIG. 131), if the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S8701: NO), the base value is read from the current status area 311, and the calculation result data corresponding to the first and second decimal places in the read base value is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). In step S9106, this calculation result data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 as display data applied to the third and fourth display devices 203 and 204 for notification.

By supplying the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in steps S9104 and S9106 to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. Along with the number being displayed, the number to the second decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 . By displaying the number corresponding to the base value on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 while all the display segments 321 and 322 of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are put into a light emitting state, respectively, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the currently notified base value is the base value in the situation where the management start flag is not set to "1".

In addition, in the situation where the management start flag is set to "1", the base values to be notified are switched in the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 in the predetermined order of current area 311→first history area 312→second history area 313→third history area 314 each time the display duration period (specifically, five seconds) elapses as described above. A base value of 1 is maintained for notification. Thereby, when the operation check of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to check the current base value at an arbitrary timing.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step S9103: YES), the display data set in the display target setting area 276 in the non-specific control work area 223 is read, and the read display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9107). By supplying the display data to the display IC 266, if the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. If the base value of the second history area 313 is to be notified, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127(c).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the initial display flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step S9108). The initial display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 should be blinking in order to notify that the base value in the current area 311 is the base value of the current area 311 to be notified as described above, and that the base value is the base value at the beginning of the calculation after the start of the calculation period. If the initial display flag is set to "1" (step S9108: YES), blink setting processing is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S9109).

In the blinking setting process, when the display corresponding to the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed by the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the setting is made to blink the display. As a setting for blinking display, specifically, regarding the transmission of display data to the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the data corresponding to the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined lighting period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses. It is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, after which these predetermined lighting periods and predetermined extinguishing periods are alternately repeated. As a result, when the base value in the current area 311 becomes a notification target immediately after the start of a new calculation period of the base value, the initial calculation display is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, making it possible for the manager of the game hall to grasp that the current base values notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are those immediately after the start of the new calculation period.

Next, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 138(a) shows an initial check period, FIG. 138(b) shows a pre-management display period in which the base values are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", and FIG. 138(d) shows a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 during the setting updating display period performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. FIG. 138(f) shows the timing when the reset button 68c is pressed, showing the display period during setting confirmation performed by the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

First, the case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) and the setting value update process (FIG. 137) are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power will be described.

At the timing of t1, the initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b), the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

Thereafter, at timing t2, the initial check period ends without being canceled as shown in FIG. 138(a). In this case, the pre-management display period starts at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 138(b). In the display period before the start of management, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(c), all the display segments 321 and 322 of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are in a light emitting state, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display a number corresponding to the current base value.

After that, at the timing of t3, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the management start reference number which is smaller than the shift reference number in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" and neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the big win result nor the high frequency support mode. As a result, the management start flag is set to "1", and the display period before the start of management ends as shown in FIG. 138(b). In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 138(c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), the base values stored in various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Next, a case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1" and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) and the setting value update process (FIG. 137) are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power will be described.

At the timing of t4, the initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b), the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

After that, at the timing of t5, the initial check period ends without being canceled as shown in FIG. 138(a). In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 138(c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), the base values stored in various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Next, a case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1" and the set value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the process when the supply of operating power is started will be described.

At the timing of t6, the initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b), the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

After that, the set value update process (FIG. 137) is started in the middle of the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed at the timing t7 as shown in FIG. 138(f). As a result, the initial check period ends halfway at the timing t7 as shown in FIG. 138(a), and the setting updating display period starts at the timing t7 as shown in FIG. 138(d).

After that, at the timing of t8, the setting updating display period ends as shown in FIG. 138(d). In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 138(c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), the base values stored in various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Next, the case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1" and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is executed in the process when the supply of operating power is started will be described.

At the timing of t9, the initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b), the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

After that, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is started in the middle of the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 138(f) at the timing of t10. As a result, the initial check period ends halfway at the timing t10 as shown in FIG. 138(a), and the setting-confirming display period starts at the timing t10 as shown in FIG. 138(e).

After that, at the timing of t11, the setting-confirming display period ends as shown in FIG. 138(e). In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing t11 as shown in FIG. 138(c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), the base values stored in various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Note that if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the operation power supply start process and the initial check period is canceled, the pre-management start display period will start after the setting update progress display period or setting check progress display period ends.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

As a check display, there may occur an initial check period in which the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in a light emitting state. As a result, it is possible to check whether each of the display segments 321 to 324 is in a light emitting state, and to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. As a result, when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to quickly confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

Every time the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal each time the supply of operating power is started.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started without requiring any special operation. As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

If a cancellation trigger occurs even if the initial check period has not passed, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is ended halfway. As a result, even during the initial check period, it is possible to terminate the above-mentioned check display and cause the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform other displays.

When the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started and before the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed, the initial check period is started and the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal before the game is started.

In a configuration in which predetermined setting-related processes such as the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) and the setting value update process (FIG. 137) are executed while the operation power supply start process is being executed, the initial check period is started when the operation power supply start process is being executed. This makes it possible to integrate not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the initial check period into the processing at the start of supply of operating power.

In the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) and the setting value update process (FIG. 137), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are configured to display corresponding to the current setting value, and the initial check period is started before the predetermined setting related processing is executed, and the check display is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, after confirming whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal, the current setting values can be confirmed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to accurately confirm the setting value.

Even if the initial check period has not elapsed based on the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the set value update process (FIG. 137) in the initial check period, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is terminated halfway. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed, the current setting values can be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by terminating the above-described check processing in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 without waiting for the elapse of the initial check period. Therefore, it is possible to quickly check the current set value.

When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is ended halfway even if the initial check period has not passed. This makes it possible to end the initial check period at an arbitrary timing after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or setting value update process (FIG. 137) is started. For example, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is started, after the manager of the game hall fully confirms that the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are normal, it is possible to end the check display and start displaying the current setting value in the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204.

Also, in the set value update process (FIG. 137), the set value to be selected is updated by pressing the reset button 68c. In this case, when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 end the check display and start displaying the current set value, thereby eliminating the need for a dedicated operation for ending the check display and starting the display of the current set value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the set values.

The calculation result storage area 234 stores a plurality of base values derived using the information in the normal counter area 231 in different periods. As a result, it is possible to grasp the base value in a plurality of periods, so that it is possible to accurately grasp the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA.

The calculation result storage area 234 is provided with a current status area 311 that stores the most recent base value, and first to third history areas 312 to 314 that store base values derived before that. As a result, it is possible to grasp not only the latest ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA, but also the past ratio.

A base value that is repeatedly calculated at a relatively short cycle before one calculation period elapses is stored in a current status area 311, and base values calculated after one calculation period elapses are stored in first to third history areas 312 to 314. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the most recent ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA, and to grasp the ratio in the past in units of one calculation period. In addition, since base values are stored in units of one calculation period in the first to third history areas 312 to 314, the number of base values to be stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314 can be suppressed.

Various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" based on the passage of one calculation period. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity in the normal counter area 231 . In addition, even if the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" in this way, the base values calculated when one calculation period has elapsed are stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314, so that the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA in the past calculation period can be grasped later.

A plurality of history areas 312 to 314 are provided as areas for storing past base values. This makes it possible to compare base values in a plurality of past calculation periods.

The base values stored in the current status area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, respectively. This makes it possible to individually grasp the base values in a plurality of calculation periods while suppressing the number of the notification display devices 201 to 204 .

Even in a situation where the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed, the power failure information storage process (step S8901) is executed to monitor the occurrence of a power failure, and when the occurrence of the power failure is specified, the power failure process is performed. As a result, if a power failure occurs while the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed, it is possible to deal with it appropriately.

In a configuration in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) includes the power failure information storage process (step S8901), the first timer interrupt process is interrupted and activated even when the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. As a result, it is possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power failure even when the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed.

The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated even in a situation where remaining processes are being executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. As a result, by using the first timer interrupt process that is started by interrupting the remaining process, it is possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power failure while the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed.

When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started while the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed, the process for progressing the game is not executed because the start-up process flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". As a result, in a configuration in which the occurrence of a power failure is periodically monitored by interrupting and starting the first timer interrupt processing even in a situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, the processing for advancing a game can be prevented from being executed in the situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed.

In a configuration in which the set value update process (FIG. 137) is executed while the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed, the power failure information storage process (step S8901) is executed even when the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed. As a result, even if a power failure occurs while the set values to be used are being set, it can be dealt with appropriately.

In addition, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to the configuration in which it ends when the initial check period has passed, and the check display may be continued until an operation is performed to end the check display. As the operation for terminating the process, for example, the reset button 68c may be operated regardless of whether or not either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is being executed, or an operation unit other than the reset button 68c may be operated. In this case, the check display is continued on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 until it is time to check the base value or set value on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to check the base value or set value after checking whether the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are normal. In addition, since the display for check ends based on the operation of the operation unit, it is possible to end the display for check at a desired timing.

Further, regardless of whether or not the supply of operating power is started, when a predetermined operation unit such as the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is operated, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to start. In this case, it is possible to start the check display at a desired timing when checking the base value or the set value. Further, in this configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, or the check display may be terminated when the predetermined operation unit operated to start the check display or another operation unit is operated.

In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68c such as the update button 68b is operated, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started, and when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started without the specific operation unit being operated, the check display may not be started. In this case, in the configuration in which the check display is performed when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to select whether or not to start the check display by the operation of the manager of the game hall.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the base values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 regardless of whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, and the configuration may be such that the base values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when it is specified based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. In this case, when the game machine main body 12 is in an open state, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started first, and then the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to confirm whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal before confirming the base value. Further, in this configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, or the check display may be terminated when the predetermined operation unit operated to start the check display or another operation unit is operated.

Further, when the main process (FIG. 132) is started while the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) are satisfied, the display for checking of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may not be started, and when the main process is started while the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process are not satisfied, the display for checking may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed when it is confirmed that the setting value is to be checked.

In addition, if the main processing (FIG. 132) is started while the conditions for executing the setting value update processing (FIG. 137) are satisfied, the display for checking of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may not be started, and if the main processing is started while the conditions for executing the setting value update processing are not satisfied, the display for checking may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed when it is confirmed that the setting value will be updated.

Further, if the main processing (FIG. 132) is started with any conditions in which the settings (FIG. 136) are executed and the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed (FIG. 132), the checking of the configuration confirmation is executed without the display for checking the first to fourth alarm display device 201 to 204. If the main treatment is started without satisfying both the conditions and the conditions where the set value update processing is executed, the check display may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed when it is confirmed that the setting value will be confirmed or updated.

In addition, the check display is not limited to the configuration in which the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in a light emitting state, and the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be in a blinking state. In addition, in the check display, each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 sequentially emits light one by one or a plurality of some of them sequentially, and each display segment 321 to 324 may be in the light emission state at least once within the initial check period.

In addition, the processing for performing check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to the configuration executed as processing corresponding to specific control, and may be executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Further, if the base value is not stored in any of the first to third history areas 312 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234, the history areas 312 to 314 may be configured not to be notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, for example, if the base values are stored in the current area 311 and the first history area 312 while the base values are not stored in the second history area 313 and the third history area 314, each time the display continuation period elapses, the notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are switched between the current status area 311 and the first history area 312, and the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 are the notification targets. It will not be.

In addition, the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are configured to store base values expressed as decimals up to the second decimal place. 1 x "Number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K92 x "Number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K93 x "Number of winning balls for winning to first operating opening 33" + K94 x "Number of winning balls for winning to second operating opening 34") and total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95) information may be stored. In the former case, the information in the various areas 311 to 314 can be set in the display target setting area 276 as it is, and in the latter case, after calculating the base value using the information in the various areas 311 to 314, the information of the first and second decimal places extracted from the base value is set in the display target setting area 276.

In addition, the calculation result storage area 234 may be configured such that only the current status area 311 and the first history area 312 are provided as areas for storing base values, or that only the current status area 311, the first history area 312 and the second history area 313 are provided. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which four or more areas are provided as history areas for storing past base value information.

In addition, the arithmetic result storage area 234 is not limited to the configuration in which the various areas 311 to 314 are fixed in terms of addresses, and the base value is shifted in the various areas 311 to 314 as necessary, and the various areas 311 to 314 may be provided as a ring buffer.

Further, instead of calculating the base value as the mode information, the 61st to 68th parameters may be calculated as in the fifteenth embodiment. In this case, the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 may store all of the 61st to 68th parameters, or the current area 311 may store the 61st to 68th parameters, but the first to third history areas 312 to 314 may store only the 61st parameter.

In addition to or instead of the base value as the mode information, the probability of occurrence of the big win result may be calculated and stored, or the probability of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode may be calculated and stored.

In addition, the trigger for shifting the base values in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is not limited to when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the shift reference number. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the shift is performed immediately, or a configuration in which the shift is performed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which there are a plurality of types of triggers for shifting.

Further, until the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1", the display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 202 are not limited to the configuration in which they are maintained in a light emitting state, and the display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 202 may be in a blinking state. In addition, until the management start flag is set to "1", the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may display "bL.--" → "b1.--" → "b2.--" → "b3.--" repeatedly.

In addition, until the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1", the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are not displayed in the light emitting state, and the display segments 321 and 322 in the first and second information display devices 201 and 202 are in the light emitting state or the blinking state, respectively, and the third and fourth information display devices. A display corresponding to the fact that the management start flag is not set to “1” may be displayed, such as the display corresponding to the current base value at 203 and 204 .

In addition, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" or the checksum does not match, the game stop flag is set to "1" and the progress of the game is stopped.

In addition, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to the configuration performed by the main CPU 63, and may be configured to be performed by a dedicated control means, or may be configured to be performed by the sound emission control device 81, or may be configured to be performed by the display control device 82. In this case, when the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means which is the main control unit. Further, when the main CPU 63 executes the processing for starting the supply of the operating power, information corresponding to the start of the display for checking is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means, which is the controlling entity, so that the display for checking is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the processing for starting the supply of the operating power is being executed.

<Thirty-sixth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirty-fifth embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 . The configuration that is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . It should be noted that the processing of steps S9401 to S9426 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

In steps S9401 to S9403, the same processes as steps S8801 to S8803 of the main process (FIG. 132) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step S9404). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. However, since the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in step S9403, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, among the various types of processing of the first timer interrupt processing, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring processing are executed, but the first timer interrupt processing is terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game.

Thereafter, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9405). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the same manner as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the checking counter is "0" (step S9406). Then, it waits in step S9406 until the value of the checking counter becomes "0". Thus, until the initial check period set in step S9405 elapses, the check displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are continued.

After that, the processing of steps S9407 to S9426 is executed. The processing contents of these steps S9407 to S9426 are the same as steps S8806 to S8825 of the main processing (FIG. 132) in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main CPU 63 starts the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display and the progress of the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is stopped until the initial check period has passed. This makes it possible to prevent setting confirmation and setting value update from being executed in the middle of the initial check period, thereby suppressing an increase in processing load. Also, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in the middle of the initial check period.

<Thirty-seventh Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirty-fifth embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 . The configuration that is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . It should be noted that the processing of steps S9501 to S9525 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

In steps S9501 to S9518, the same processes as steps S7901 to S7918 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. Thereafter, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the specific control work area 221 (step S9519). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

Then, the process after step S9520 is performed. The processing contents of steps S9520 to S9525 are the same as steps S7919 to S7924 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is started after the main CPU 63 completes the processing (steps S9501 to S9518) at the time of starting the supply of operating power and before the start of the remaining processing (steps S9522 to S9525). As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed.

While the setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the setting value update process (step S9518) are executed as the process at the start of supply of operating power, the initial check period is started after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. As a result, even if the check display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not affected.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, either the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the setting value update process (step S9518) are not executed. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

The main processing (FIG. 140) of the main CPU 63 is a process that is executed in common when either the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, or when neither the setting confirmation process (step S9514) nor the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed. When 1 is executed, the processing for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set as the processing after the setting confirmation processing (step S9514) and the setting value update processing (step S9518). By setting the processing for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a common processing in this way, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while simplifying the processing configuration.

Even when the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are performing the check display, the main CPU 63 can start the processing for progressing the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the start timing of the process for advancing the game from being delayed even in the configuration where the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed.

It should be noted that the processing after step S9520 may not be started until the initial check period has passed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game from being started while the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .

<Thirty-Eighth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirty-fifth embodiment in the processing configuration of the normal setting processing executed by the main CPU 63 . The configuration that is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing normal setting processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the processing of steps S9601 to S9605 in the normal setting processing is executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63 .

First, it is determined whether or not the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step S9601). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S9601: NO), check display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 (step S9602). By supplying the check display data to the display IC 266, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. Specifically, all the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are turned on. As a result, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp whether or not the respective display segments 321-324 of the first-fourth notification display devices 201-204 can be in a normal light-emitting state.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step S9601: YES), the processing of steps S9603 and S9605 is executed. The processing contents of steps S9603 to S9605 are the same as steps S9107 to S9109 in the normal setting processing (FIG. 135) in the thirty-fifth embodiment. By executing the processing of steps S9603 to S9605, the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and when the base value of the current area 311 is notified immediately after the start of a new calculation period, the calculation initial display is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202.

According to the above configuration, when the management start flag is not set to "1", it becomes an initial check period during which check displays are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. This makes it possible to limit the situation of the initial check period when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started to the situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.例文帳に追加

<Thirty-ninth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirty-third embodiment in the configuration relating to set values. The configuration different from that of the thirty-third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

142(a) to 142(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the setting correspondence storage area 325 provided in the main ROM 64. FIG.

In the setting correspondence storage area 325, in correspondence with the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode right/wrong table, a high probability mode right/wrong table, and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 115) and setting value update processing (FIG. 116) are set to display data of setting values used for displaying the current setting values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. More specifically, the setting correspondence storage area 325 includes a first setting information storage area 325a, a second setting information storage area 325b, a third setting information storage area 325c, a fourth setting information storage area 325d, a fifth setting information storage area 325e, and a sixth setting information storage area 325f.

In each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, there are a storage area for storing a low probability mode success/failure table to be referred to when the success/failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, a storage area for storing a high probability mode success/failure table to be referred to when the success/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) and the setting value update process (FIG. 116). A storage area is provided for storing setting value display data used to display the current setting values. In each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, a predetermined multiple-byte area is secured as a storage area for storing the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, a predetermined multiple-byte area is secured as a storage area for storing the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, and a 1-byte area is secured as a storage area for storing the display data of the setting values. Therefore, each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f has a storage capacity of multiple bytes. In this case, the start address of the first setting information storage area 325a is A(1), the start address of the second setting information storage area 325b is A(2), the start address of the third setting information storage area 325c is A(3), the start address of the fourth setting information storage area 325d is A(4), the start address of the fifth setting information storage area 325e is A(5), and the start address of the sixth setting information storage area 325f is A(5). A(6).

In the above configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first form in the present embodiment, the set values of the pachinko machine 10 are set in 6 stages of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as in the thirty-third embodiment. In this case, the probabilities of winning big wins in the low-probability modes are different for each of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", while the probabilities of winning big wins in the high-probability mode are the same. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142(a), in the first setting information storage area 325a, a first low-probability table LT(1) corresponding to "setting 1" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the low-probability mode, a common high-probability table HT common to "setting 1" to "setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the high-probability mode, and "1" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value. display data for displaying is stored. In the second setting information storage area 325b, a second low-probability table LT (2) corresponding to "setting 2" is stored in a storage area for storing a low-probability mode validity table, a common high-probability table HT common to "setting 1" to "setting 6" is stored in a storage area for storing a high-probability mode validity table, and display data for displaying "2" is stored in a storage area for storing display data of setting values.

In the third setting information storage area 325c, a third low-probability table LT (3) corresponding to "setting 3" is stored in the storage area for storing the low-probability mode validity table. In the fourth setting information storage area 325d, a fourth low probability table LT (4) corresponding to "setting 4" is stored in the storage area for storing the low probability mode validity table, a common high probability table HT common to "setting 1" to "setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode validity table, and display data for displaying "4" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value.

In the fifth setting information storage area 325e, a fifth low-probability table LT (5) corresponding to "setting 5" is stored in a storage area for storing a low-probability mode validity table, a common high-probability table HT common to "setting 1" to "setting 6" is stored in a storage area for storing a high-probability mode validity table, and display data for displaying "5" is stored in a storage area for storing display data of setting values. In the sixth setting information storage area 325f, a sixth low-probability table LT (6) corresponding to "setting 6" is stored in a storage area for storing a low-probability mode validity table, a common high-probability table HT that is common to "setting 1" to "setting 6" is stored in a storage area for storing a high-probability mode validity table, and display data for displaying "6" is stored in a storage area for storing display data of setting values.

In the case of the configuration of the first form, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big win result in the low probability mode. On the other hand, in the high-probability mode, the probability of a big win result is the same regardless of the set value. Since the probability of a big win in the high probability mode is 1/30, the probability of a big win in the high probability mode is higher than the probability of a big win in the low probability mode in the “setting 6” even if it is “setting 1”.

In the first form in which "setting 1" to "setting 6" are set as the setting values, in order to execute the success/failure determination process at step S504 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the success/failure table reading process executed at step S503 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing read processing of the success/failure table. It should be noted that the processing of steps S9701 to S9705 in the read processing of the right/wrong table is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63 .

First, the value of the set value counter provided in the specific control work area 221 in the main RAM 65 is read (step S9701). The setting value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which one of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325 should be referred to when reading the validity table and when reading the display data of the setting values.

After that, among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325, the storage area corresponding to the value of the setting value counter read in step S9701 is selected (step S9702). As in the thirty-third embodiment, the setting value counter is configured to take any value from "1" to "6". When the value of the setting value counter is "1", the first setting information storage area 325a is selected. When the value of the setting value counter is "2", the second setting information storage area 325b is selected. The fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected when the value of the setting value counter is "4", the fifth setting information storage area 325e is selected when the value of the setting value counter is "5", and the sixth setting information storage area 325f is selected when the value of the setting value counter is "6".

For this selection, a correspondence table pre-stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to. The correspondence table defines the correspondence between the value of the set value counter and the start addresses of the first to sixth set information storage areas 325a to 325f. Specifically, A(1), which is the start address of the first setting information storage area 325a, is set to correspond to the value "1" of the setting value counter, A(2), which is the start address of the second setting information storage area 325b, is set to correspond to the value "2" of the setting value counter, A(3), which is the start address of the third setting information storage area 325c, is set to correspond to the value "3" of the setting value counter. A(4), which is the start address of the fourth setting information storage area 325d, is set in correspondence with the value of "4", A(5), which is the start address of the fifth setting information storage area 325e, is set in correspondence with the value of "5" of the setting value counter, and A(6), which is the start address of the sixth setting information storage area 325f, is set in correspondence with the value of "6" of the setting value counter.

After that, if the current success/fail lottery mode is the low-probability mode (step S9703: NO), the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is read out from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9704). On the other hand, if the current success/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode (step S9703: YES), the success/failure table for the high probability mode is read out from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9705).

By executing the read processing of the win/loss table as described above, the win/fail table corresponding to the current win/fail lottery mode is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the values of the set value counters. Then, in the success/failure determination process (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the big hit result by using the read success/failure table.

Next, the process when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated while the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63 will be described. In this case, in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during update of the set value is executed (step S8403). FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update. The processing of steps S9801 to S9805 in the setting process is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, the value of the set value counter provided in the specific control work area 221 in the main RAM 65 is read (step S9801). After that, among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325, the storage area corresponding to the value of the setting value counter read in step S9801 is selected (step S9802). As in the thirty-third embodiment, the setting value counter is configured to take any value from "1" to "6". When the value of the setting value counter is "1", the first setting information storage area 325a is selected. When the value of the setting value counter is "2", the second setting information storage area 325b is selected. The fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected when the value of the setting value counter is "4", the fifth setting information storage area 325e is selected when the value of the setting value counter is "5", and the sixth setting information storage area 325f is selected when the value of the setting value counter is "6". At the time of this selection, a correspondence table stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to in the same manner as in the reading process of the success/failure table (FIG. 143).

After that, the display data of the setting values are read out from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9802 (step S9803). Then, the display data of the read setting value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control as display data for applying to the fourth notification display device 204 (step S9804). Also, the display data for displaying the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated on the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9805).

By executing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9805 is performed on the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203, and the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9804 is performed on the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(a), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In the setting process (step S8405) for setting the display data of the set value to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation, which is executed when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and started while the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, the same process as the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update (FIG. 144) is executed. be done.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first form, set values of 6 levels of 'setting 1' to 'setting 6' are set as the set values of the pachinko machine 10, but depending on the model and type of the pachinko machine 10, set values less than 6 levels may be used. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second mode shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142(b), three levels of setting values of "setting 1", "setting 3" and "setting 6" are set, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third mode shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, only one level of set value of "setting 1" is set. In this case, in any pachinko machine 10 of the second to fourth forms, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first form, a setting correspondence storage area 325 having first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f enabling setting of six levels of setting values is used.

In detail about the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second form, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. That is, in the first setting information storage area 325a and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, the first low probability table LT(1) corresponding to "Setting 1" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the low probability mode, the first high probability table HT(1) corresponding to "Setting 1" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the high probability mode, and "1" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value. Display data for display is stored.

Various types of information corresponding to "setting 3" are stored in the second setting information storage area 325b and the fifth setting information storage area 325e. That is, in the second setting information storage area 325b and the fifth setting information storage area 325e, the third low probability table LT(3) corresponding to "setting 3" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the low probability mode, the third high probability table HT(3) corresponding to "setting 3" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the high probability mode, and "3" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value. Display data for display is stored.

Various types of information corresponding to "setting 6" are stored in the third setting information storage area 325c and the sixth setting information storage area 325f. That is, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the sixth setting information storage area 325f, the sixth low probability table LT(6) corresponding to "setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the low probability mode, the sixth high probability table HT(6) corresponding to "setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the high probability mode, and "6" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value. Display data for display is stored.

In the case of the configuration of the second form, even in the configuration in which the setting correspondence storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is used, the number of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, which is the number of six, is the number of these first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. In the low-probability mode, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big win result.In the high-probability mode, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big win result. Note that the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode in "setting 1" is higher than the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode in "setting 6".

In the case of the configuration of the second form, in the read processing of the right/wrong table (FIG. 143), the right/wrong table corresponding to "setting 1" is read regardless of whether the value of the setting value counter is "1" or "4", the right/wrong table corresponding to "setting 3" is read regardless of whether the value of the setting value counter is "2" or "5", and the "setting 6" is supported regardless of whether the value of the setting value counter is "3" or "6". The hit/fail table is read.

In the read processing of the right/wrong table (FIG. 143), the right/wrong table is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the set value counter regardless of the number of steps of the set value. As a result, even when three stages of setting values are set, the processing configuration of the readout process of the right/fail table (FIG. 143) can be made the same processing configuration as when six stages of setting values are set.

In the case of the configuration of the second form, when the setting correspondence storage area 325 capable of setting six levels of setting values is used, three levels of setting values are set. Therefore, the number of levels of setting values that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325 can be divided by the number of levels of setting values to be used. That is, the number of stages of the setting value to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of stages of the setting value that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325, and is a number different from the maximum number of stages. In this case, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are assigned to each of the setting values to be used, and setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f so that the group is repeated when one group is formed by arranging three levels of setting values one by one in ascending order. As a result, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated when the value of the set value counter is "1" in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the set values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed in the order of "1"→"3"→"6"→"1"→"3"→"6"→"1"→. In other words, when the reset button 68c is operated once to change the display to a different set value and the settable set values are displayed once each, one display cycle is repeated in a certain manner. Therefore, it becomes easier to update the setting value.

In the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update (FIG. 144), the display data of the setting value is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. As a result, even when three stages of set values are set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) can be made the same as when six stages of set values are set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second mode, various information corresponding to "Setting 1" are stored in the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b, various information corresponding to "Setting 3" are stored in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, and various information corresponding to "Setting 6" are stored in the fifth setting information storage area 325e and the sixth setting information storage area 325f. may be configured. In other words, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are assigned to each of the setting values to be used, and the same setting values may be set in the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f consecutively in relation to the value of the setting value counter. In this case, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated in the setting value update process (FIG. 116) when the value of the setting value counter is "1", the setting values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed in the order of "1"→"1"→"3"→"3"→"6"→"6"→"1"→.

In detail about the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the third form, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. That is, in the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b, the first low probability table LT(1) corresponding to "setting 1" is stored in the storage area for storing the low probability mode validity table, the common high probability table HT common to "setting 1" to "setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode validity table, and "1" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value. display data for displaying is stored.

Various types of information corresponding to "setting 2" are stored in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d. That is, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, the second low probability table LT(2) corresponding to "Setting 2" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the low probability mode, the common high probability table HT common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the high probability mode, and "2" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value. display data for displaying is stored.

Various information corresponding to "setting 3" is stored in the fifth setting information storage area 325e. That is, in the fifth setting information storage area 325e, a third low-probability table LT(3) corresponding to "setting 3" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the low-probability mode, a common high-probability table HT common to "setting 1" to "setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the high-probability mode, and display data for displaying "3" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value. .

Various types of information corresponding to "setting 4" are stored in the sixth setting information storage area 325f. That is, in the sixth setting information storage area 325f, a fourth low-probability table LT(4) corresponding to "Setting 4" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the low-probability mode, a common high-probability table HT common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the validity table of the high-probability mode, and display data for displaying "4" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value. .

In the case of the configuration of the third form, even in the configuration in which the setting correspondence storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is used, the number of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, which is the number of the six, is the number of these first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. In the low-probability mode, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of a big win result is. Since the probability of a big win result in the high probability mode is 1/30, the probability of a big win result in the high probability mode is higher than the probability of a big win result in the low probability mode in the "setting 4" even with "setting 1".

In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, in the read processing of the right/wrong table (FIG. 143), the right/wrong table corresponding to "setting 1" is read regardless of whether the value of the setting value counter is "1" or "2", the right/wrong table corresponding to "setting 2" is read regardless of whether the value of the setting value counter is "3" or "4", and the right/wrong table corresponding to "setting 3" is read when the value of the setting value counter is "5", When the value of the setting value counter is "6", the right/wrong table corresponding to "setting 4" is read.

In the read processing of the right/wrong table (FIG. 143), the right/wrong table is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the set value counter regardless of the number of steps of the set value. As a result, even when four levels of set values are set, the processing configuration of the readout process of the right/fail table (FIG. 143) can be made the same as when six levels of set values are set.

In the case of the configuration of the third form, when the setting correspondence storage area 325 capable of setting six levels of setting values is used, four levels of setting values are set. Therefore, the number of levels of setting values that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325 cannot be divided by the number of levels of setting values to be used. In this case, two continuous setting information storage areas 325a to 325d are assigned to each of "setting 1" and "setting 2" in relation to the value of the setting value counter, and one setting information storage area 325e, 325f is assigned to each of "setting 3" and "setting 4". As a result, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated when the value of the set value counter is "1" in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the set values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed in the order of "1"→"1"→"2"→"2"→"3"→"4"→"1"→.

In the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update (FIG. 144), the display data of the setting value is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. As a result, even when four levels of setting values are set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) can be made the same as when six levels of setting values are set.

In the setting value update process (FIG. 116), in order to change the display of the setting values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in response to one operation of the reset button 68c, it is preferable that various information corresponding to the same setting value is not set in the consecutive setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in relation to the value of the setting value counter. For example, various information corresponding to "Setting 1" is set in the first setting information storage area 325a, various information corresponding to "Setting 2" is set in the second setting information storage area 325b, various information corresponding to "Setting 3" is set in the third setting information storage area 325c, various information corresponding to "Setting 4" is set in the fourth setting information storage area 325d, various information corresponding to "Setting 1" is set in the fifth setting information storage area 325e, A configuration is conceivable in which various types of information corresponding to "setting 2" are set in the sixth setting information storage area 325f. In this case, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated in the setting value update process (FIG. 116) when the value of the setting value counter is "1", the setting values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "1" → "2" → "1" → .

In detail about the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth form, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. That is, in the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, a first low probability table LT(1) corresponding to "setting 1" is stored in the storage area for storing the low probability mode validity table, a common high probability table HT common to "setting 1" to "setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode validity table, and "1" is displayed in the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value. display data is stored.

In the case of the configuration of the fourth form described above, only one type of setting value is set even in the configuration using the setting correspondence storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. Even in a configuration in which only one type of set value is set in this way, in the read processing of the right/wrong table (FIG. 143), the right/wrong table is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the set value counter. As a result, even when only one type of set value is set, the processing configuration of the readout process of the right/fail table (FIG. 143) can be made the same processing configuration as when six stages of set values are set.

In the case of the configuration of the fourth form, since there is no need to set the set value, basically there is no need to execute the set value update process (FIG. 116), but if an abnormality occurs in the set value, the set value update process (FIG. 116) can be executed. In this case, "setting 1" is assigned to all of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. Therefore, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated in the setting value update process (FIG. 116) when the value of the setting value counter is "1", the setting values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are "1"→"1"→"1"→"1"→"1"→"1"→"1"→ .

In the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update (FIG. 144), the display data of the setting value is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. As a result, even when only one type of setting value is set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) can be the same processing configuration as when six levels of setting values are set.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second to fourth forms, the number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f for storing the success/failure tables corresponding to the setting values is provided in a first predetermined number (specifically 6), and the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to share the configuration of the setting correspondence storage area 325 with the pachinko machine 10 of the first mode in which the number of types of set values to be used is the first predetermined number, and it is possible to easily perform the design work of the pachinko machine 10 when changing the number of types of set values.

In the setting value update process (step S7918), the setting value to be used is changed by changing the numerical information of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control each time the reset button 68c is operated, and the validity determination processing is executed in a mode corresponding to the setting value to be used by using the validity table of the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the changed numerical information in the validity determination process. In this case, each validity table for setting values that can be set is stored in at least one of the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, and the same validity table is stored in the plurality of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, which are part of the first predetermined number. As a result, while using the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f as they are and using the setting value counter to determine the setting values to be used as they are, the number of types of setting values to be used can be made smaller than the first predetermined number.

This is a configuration in which the success/failure table is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the numerical information of the set value counter, and the success/failure determination process is executed using the read success/failure table. As a result, even if the number of types of set values to be used is less than the first predetermined number, it is possible to use the configuration for reading the right/wrong table when executing the right/wrong determination process as it is.

In a situation where the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed, the setting value display data is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the numerical information of the setting value counter, and the display corresponding to the read setting value display data is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Thus, even if the number of types of set values to be used is less than the first predetermined number, the configuration for reading out the display data of the set values when executing the display corresponding to the set values can be used as it is.

The number of stages of the setting value to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of stages of the setting value that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325, and is a number different from the maximum number of stages. In this case, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are assigned to each of the setting values to be used, and setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f so that the group is repeated when three stages of setting values are arranged one by one in ascending order. As a result, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated when the value of the set value counter is "1" in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the set values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed in the order of "1"→"3"→"6"→"1"→"3"→"6"→"1"→. In other words, when the reset button 68c is operated once to change the display to a different set value and the settable set values are displayed once each, one display cycle is repeated in a certain manner. Therefore, it becomes easier to update the setting value.

In a configuration in which the high-probability mode validity table does not change according to the set value, the high-probability mode validity table may be stored in a storage area different from the setting correspondence storage area 325 in the main ROM 64 instead of being stored in the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f of the setting correspondence storage area 325.

Further, when there is only one set value to be used, the right/wrong table corresponding to that set value may be set in only one of the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f and no right/wrong table may be set in the remaining setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. In addition, if the set value to be used has a plurality of stages, but the number of stages is smaller than the number of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, the right/fail table corresponding to each set value may be set only in the corresponding one setting information storage area 325a to 325f, and the rest of the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f may not be set with the right/fail table. In this configuration, the numerical information corresponding to the setting information storage areas 325a to 325 in which the success/failure table is not set is set to be numerical information that cannot be selected by the setting value counter, so that the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in which the success/failure table is not set can be prevented from being selected when reading the success/failure table or reading the display data of the setting values.

<Fortieth Embodiment>
In the thirty-ninth embodiment, the setting correspondence storage area 325 capable of setting six levels of setting values is used, but in this embodiment, the setting correspondence storage area 326 capable of setting three levels of setting values is used.

FIGS. 145(a) to 145(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the setting correspondence storage area 326 pre-stored in the main ROM 64. FIG.

The setting correspondence storage area 326 is provided with a first setting information storage area 326a, a second setting information storage area 326b, and a third setting information storage area 326c. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first form shown in FIG. 145 (a), various information corresponding to "setting 1" is set in the first setting information storage area 326a, various information corresponding to "setting 2" is set in the second setting information storage area 326b, and various information corresponding to "setting 3" is set in the third setting information storage area 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first mode, the maximum number of setting values that can be set are set in the setting correspondence storage area 326 .

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second form shown in FIG. 145(b), various information corresponding to "setting 1" are set in all of the first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second form, only one set value is set by using the setting correspondence storage area 326 in which three stages of set values can be set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third form shown in FIG. 145 (c), various information corresponding to "setting 1" is set in the first setting information storage area 326a and the second setting information storage area 326b, and various information corresponding to "setting 3" is set in the third setting information storage area 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, two levels of setting values are set by using the setting correspondence storage area 326 in which three levels of setting values can be set.

According to the above configuration, the setting correspondence storage area 326 capable of setting the set values in three stages can be used as it is for the pachinko machine 10 of the second and third modes in which the set values of the number of stages smaller than the set values of the three stages are used. Further, similarly to the thirty-ninth embodiment, the processing configuration of the readout processing of the success/failure table (FIG. 143) and the processing configuration of the setting processing (FIG. 144) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update can be commonly used in the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third forms.

<Forty-first embodiment>
In this embodiment, when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) or the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main side CPU 63, the display section visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is different from the thirty-third embodiment in that a predetermined notification is executed. The configuration different from that of the thirty-third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 146(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various display units provided in an area that can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 forming the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As various display parts, a special figure display part 37a, a special figure reservation display part 37b, a general figure display part 38a, and a general figure reservation display part 38b are provided. These functions are the same as those of the first embodiment. The special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a are provided side by side, but the round display part 330 is provided so as to be side by side with respect to the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a.

The round display section 330 has seven display segments 331 to 337, like the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a. The seven display segments 331 to 337 are rod-shaped light-emitting regions having the same shape and size, and are arranged to form the figure "8". Light emission of the seven display segments 331 to 337 is individually controlled.

In the round display section 330, the number of round games generated in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the big win is notified. In this embodiment, as the jackpot results that can be selected when a jackpot is won in the success/fail determination process, there are a first jackpot result that triggers a shift to an opening/closing execution mode in which the number of round game executions is relatively small, and a second jackpot result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the number of round game executions is relatively high. Specifically, the round game is executed twice in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the first jackpot, and the round game is executed 16 times in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the second jackpot.

The first jackpot results include a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and a support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The second jackpot result includes a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and a support mode becomes a low-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

FIG. 146(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the round display section 330. As shown in FIG.

The round display part 330 changes from a non-display state in which all display segments 331 to 337 are extinguished to a display state in which at least some of the display segments 331 to 337 are in a light emitting state when an opening/closing execution mode triggered by one of the jackpot results is started. While the opening/closing execution mode continues, the display contents displayed on the round display portion 330 at the start of the opening/closing execution mode are maintained. Then, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the round display portion 330 changes from the display state to the non-display state.

In the open/close execution mode in which two round games are executed, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display section 330 are turned off, and the fifth to seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned on. In the open/close execution mode in which the round game is executed 16 times, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display section 330 are turned on, and the fifth to seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned off. Thus, the manager of the game hall can grasp which type of opening/closing execution mode the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to by confirming the round display part 330 when the opening/closing execution mode is executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

When the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, the round display section 330 displays a corresponding display. Specifically, when the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed, as shown in FIG. 146B, the first display segment 331, the third display segment 333, the fifth display segment 335 and the seventh display segment 337 of the round display portion 330 are turned off, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334 and the sixth display segment 336 are turned on.

The display on the round display unit 330 corresponding to the setting value update process (step S7918) starts when the setting value update process (step S7918) starts, and ends when the setting value update process (step S7918) ends. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the open/close execution mode is executed, and is also different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) described later is executed. As a result, by checking the round display section 330, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed. In addition, it is possible to grasp such information using the round display section 330 .

When the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, the round display section 330 displays a corresponding display. Specifically, when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed, as shown in FIG. 146B, the first display segment 331, the third display segment 333, the fifth display segment 335 and the seventh display segment 337 of the round display portion 330 are turned on, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334 and the sixth display segment 336 are turned off.

The display on the round display unit 330 corresponding to the setting confirmation process (step S7914) starts when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) starts, and ends when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) ends. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the open/close execution mode is executed, and is also different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the set value update process (step S7918) is executed. As a result, by checking the round display section 330, the administrator of the gaming hall can easily grasp whether or not the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed. In addition, it is possible to grasp such information using the round display section 330 .

When the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) are executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the process for progressing the game is not executed. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) are not executed while the open/close execution mode is being executed. Also, when one of the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed, the other is not executed. Therefore, even if the round display unit 330 is also used as a display unit for performing each display, situations in which each display should be performed do not occur redundantly.

The display content of the round display unit 330 is not limited to the above display content, and it is arbitrary as long as it is possible to distinguish each situation from the display content of the round display unit 330. For example, one of the display corresponding to the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) may be configured so that all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are in a lighting state. In addition, one of the display corresponding to the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) may be configured such that all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are turned on and maintained, and the other is configured to make all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 blink.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and the display corresponding to the setting value update process are performed in the round display unit 330, the special figure display unit 37a may be configured to perform these displays, and the general figure display unit 38a may be configured to perform these displays. In addition, the display corresponding to the setting confirmation process is performed in any one of the special figure display unit 37a, the normal figure display unit 38a and the round display unit 330, and the other one display unit may be configured to display corresponding to the setting value update process.

In addition, the hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first operation opening 33 and the hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second operation opening 34 are stored separately, and as the special figure display unit 37a, a first special figure display unit in which the game round triggered by the holding information corresponding to the first operation opening 33 is executed, and a second special figure display unit in which the game round triggered by the holding information corresponding to the second operation opening 34 are provided. In the configuration, the display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process may be performed in the first special figure display unit, and the display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process may be performed in the second special figure display unit.

Further, a configuration may be employed in which a dedicated display unit is provided for displaying that the setting confirmation process is being executed, a configuration may be employed in which a dedicated display unit is provided for displaying that the setting value update process is being executed, or a dedicated display unit is provided for displaying that the setting confirmation process is being executed or the setting value update process is being executed. In this case, the dedicated display unit may be configured to be display-controlled by the main CPU 63 , or may be configured to be display-controlled by the sound emission control device 81 or the display control device 82 .

<Forty-Second Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirty-third embodiment in the processing configurations of the main processing and the first timer interrupt processing. The configuration different from that of the thirty-third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . It should be noted that the processing of steps S9901 to S9923 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63 .

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step S9901). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during this predetermined waiting period. Also, access to the main side RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S9902). In the internal function register setting process, as in step S7902 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148), which is a process that is periodically interrupted and started with respect to the main process, is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) that is a process that is periodically interrupted and started with the main process is set to the second interrupt period, which is a shorter period than the first interrupt period. Set the interrupt period (specifically, 2 milliseconds).

After that, interrupt permission is set for the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) (step S9903). As a result, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated at the second interrupt period. On the other hand, interrupt permission is not set for the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148). As a result, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) is still maintained in a state in which interrupts are disabled.

After that, the processing of steps S9904 to S9917 is executed. The processing contents of these steps S9904 to S9917 are the same as steps S7905 to S7918 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment.

After completing the processing of steps S9904 to S9917, interrupt permission is set for the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) (step S9918). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) is interrupted and activated at the first interrupt cycle. That is, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. After that, in steps S9919 to S9923, the same processes as steps S7920 to S7924 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed.

FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing first timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . As already explained, the first timer interrupt process is started periodically at a period of 4 milliseconds, which is the first interrupt period. Also, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt process is set as a specific control program.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), interrupt prohibition is set (step SA101). By prohibiting the generation of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148), even if the first interrupt cycle has passed during the execution of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148), it is possible to prevent the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) from being started redundantly. In addition, by prohibiting the generation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), it is possible to prevent the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) from interrupting and starting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) even if the second interrupt cycle has elapsed.

After that, in steps SA102 to SA121, the same processes as steps S8202 to S8221 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step SA107, or if the processing of step SA121 is executed, interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) (step SA122).

According to the above configuration, while the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is permitted to be interrupted while the operation power supply start processing is being executed in the main processing (FIG. 147), the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) is not permitted to be interrupted. As a result, it is possible to execute the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) even in a situation where the processing for starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, but it is possible to prevent the processing for controlling the progress of the game by the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) from being executed.

Further, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is not activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148). This makes it possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing from being started redundantly.

<Forty-third embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirty-fifth embodiment in the configuration for displaying the base values on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification. The configuration that is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a normal counter area 231 is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The normal counter area 231 is provided with a normal general winning counter 231a, a normal special electric winning counter 231b, a first normal operation counter 231c, a second normal operation counter 231d, and a normal out counter 231e, as in the fifteenth embodiment. In neither the open/close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode according to the jackpot result, when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31, the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is incremented by 1; The value of 1c is incremented by 1, the value of a normal second operation counter 231d is incremented by 1 when one game ball enters the second operation port 34, and the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1 when one game ball enters the out port 24a. When the values of the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are set to K91 to K95 in neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the big win nor the high-frequency support mode, the base values are as follows.
・Base value: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K91 x “Number of prize balls for winning to general winning port 31” + K92 x “Number of winning balls to win to special electric winning device 32” + K93 x “Number of winning balls to winning to first operating port 33” + K94 x “Number of winning balls to winning to second operating port 34”) / Total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93+K94+K95) ratio.

The non-specific control work area 223 is provided with a calculation result storage area 234 in addition to the normal counter area 231 . As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the calculation result storage area 234 is provided with a current status area 311, a first history area 312, a second history area 313, and a third history area 314 as storage areas for storing base value information (see FIG. 126). The current state area 311 stores the most recent base value calculated in the result calculation process (FIG. 149). A first history area 312 stores the final base value in the previous calculation period. The second history area 313 stores the final base value in the calculation period two times before. A third history area 314 stores the final base value in the calculation period three times before.

FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing result calculation processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . In the management processing (step S8920) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), the program for management execution processing corresponding to non-specific control is read out in step S3803 as in the management processing (FIG. 70) in the fifteenth embodiment. Then, in this management execution process (FIG. 71), a check process is executed in step S3908 as in the fifteenth embodiment. In this check process, the result calculation process is executed and the display process (FIG. 150), which will be described later, is executed. Further, the processing of steps SA201 to SA217 in the result calculation process is executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, base value calculation processing is executed (step SA201). In the arithmetic processing, the values of various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are used to calculate the base value, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. Here, in the present embodiment, the calculation of the base value is not completed by one result calculation process, but is completed by executing the result calculation process a predetermined number of times.

Specifically, in step SA201, in a predetermined processing cycle of the result calculation process when the calculation of the base value is newly started, when the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are set to K91 to K95, K91 × "the number of prize balls for winning to the general prize winning port 31", K92 × "the number of prize balls for winning to the special electric prize winning device 32", and K93 x "the number of prize balls to the first operation port 33". The number of prize balls for winning", K94×"the number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34", and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91+K92+K93+K94+K95) are calculated, and each calculation result is stored in a storage area during calculation provided in a work area 223 for non-specific control. After that, in step SA201 of the result calculation processing of the processing cycle after the predetermined processing cycle, the total number of game balls to be paid out (K91 x "the number of prize balls for winning to the general winning opening 31" + K92 x "the number of winning balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" + K93 x "the number of winning balls for winning to the first operation opening 33" + K94 x "the second operation opening") is performed by using the various information stored in the storage area during calculation. 34"), and the result of the calculation is stored in the storage area during calculation. After that, in step SA201 of the result calculation process of the second processing cycle after the predetermined processing cycle, the base value is calculated using the various information stored in the storage area during calculation.

That is, in this embodiment, it is necessary to execute the result calculation process three times in order to calculate one base value. In this case, the result calculation process is invoked and executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), so it is executed each time the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds) elapses. Therefore, one base value is calculated at intervals of approximately 12 milliseconds. However, it is not limited to this, and the cycle for calculating one base value may be a cycle shorter than the 12 millisecond cycle or a cycle longer than the 12 millisecond cycle.

By adopting a configuration in which one base value is calculated by executing the result calculation process a plurality of times as described above, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating the base value. In particular, since the result calculation process is executed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control, in order to execute the result calculation process, it is necessary not only to read the program for the non-specific control and the data for the non-specific control, but also to save the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the specific control. In this case, by reducing the processing load for calculating the base value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the result calculation processing, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for executing the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

Even in a configuration in which the result calculation process is executed multiple times to calculate one base value, each piece of information during calculation of the base value in each process time of the result calculation process is written to the work area 223 for non-specific control. As a result, even if the information in the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is erased as the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed between one processing cycle and the next processing cycle of the result calculation processing, it is possible to store and retain each piece of information during the calculation of the base value.

Even in a configuration in which the result calculation process is executed a plurality of times to calculate one base value, all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are extracted in the first process of the result calculation process for calculating a new base value, and the extracted values are used to calculate the base value of the calculation time. Thus, even if the values of various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are changed while calculating one base value, one base value can be calculated without being affected by the change of the values.

After executing the calculation processing of the base value in step SA201, it is determined whether or not the calculation of one base value has been completed in the result calculation processing of this processing round (step SA202). If the calculation of one base value has not been completed (step SA202: NO), by not executing the processing of steps SA203 to SA205, the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234 is not overwritten with the base value.

If the calculation of one base value has been completed (step SA202: YES), the current situation area 311 is overwritten with the calculated base value (step SA203). After that, it is determined whether or not the shift trigger flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA204). In this embodiment, when the calculation of a new base value is completed after the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the big hit result nor the high-frequency support mode has reached the shift reference number (specifically, 60000), data shift processing (step SA216) in the calculation result storage area 234 is executed. In this data shift process, the information stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is shifted in the order of the second history area 313→the third history area 314, the first history area 312→the second history area 313, the current area 311→the first history area 312, and then the current area 311 is cleared to "0". The shift trigger flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to identify the situation after the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number and before the data shift process is executed.

If the shift trigger flag is set to "1" (step SA204: YES), the shift operation completion flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA205). The calculation completion flag at the time of shift is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the calculation of one base value is completed after the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number.

When a negative determination is made in step SA202, when a negative determination is made in step SA204, or when the process of step SA205 is executed, it is determined whether or not the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA206). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step SA206: NO), a pre-management process is executed (step SA207). In the pre-management process, steps S8604 to S8608 of the result calculation process (FIG. 130) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step SA206: YES), it is determined whether or not the shift trigger flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA208). If the shift trigger flag is not set to "1" (step SA208: NO), the total number is calculated by totaling all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step SA209). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is equal to or greater than 60000, which is the shift reference number (step SA210).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SA210, the shift trigger flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA211). Also, the pre-shift display flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA212). The pre-shift display flag is a flag for specifying by the main side CPU 63 that the pre-shift display corresponding to the total number of game balls reaching the shift reference number should be started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

If the shift trigger flag is set to "1" and an affirmative determination is made in step SA208, it is determined whether or not the operation completion flag during shift in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA213). As already explained, the calculation completion flag at the time of shift is set to "1" when the calculation of one base value is completed after the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number. If an affirmative determination is made in step SA213, the shift trigger flag in work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA214). Also, the operation completion flag at the time of shifting in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA215).

Thereafter, data shift processing is executed (step SA216). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is shifted in the order of the second history area 313→the third history area 314, the first history area 312→the second history area 313, the current area 311→the first history area 312, and then the current area 311 is cleared to "0". As a result, the final base value in the calculation period two times before is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the calculation period three times before, the final base value in the calculation period one time before is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the calculation period two times before, and the base value calculated after the total number of game balls in the current calculation period reaches the shift reference number is stored in the first history area 312 as the final base value in the calculation period one time before. . Also, the current area 311 is in a state in which no base value is stored. In data shift processing, LDIR instructions are used when shifting information as described above. In the LDIR instruction, by designating the address of the information storage source area and the information storage destination area address, the information stored in the storage source area is shifted (copied) to the storage destination area. After that, the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are all cleared to "0" (step SA217).

FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing display processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps SA301 to SA320 in the display processing is executed using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the management start flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA301). If a negative determination is made in step SA301, similarly to step S8714 of the display processing (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the base value is read from the current status area 311, and the calculation result data corresponding to the first and second decimal places in the read base value is set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA302). By transmitting the display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the number to the first decimal place in the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the number to the second decimal place of the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. With the above configuration, when the management start flag is not set to "1", only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is notified without notifying the base value in the past calculation period. The display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value is notified in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" are the same as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SA301, the value of the switching timing counter provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is subtracted by 1 (step SA303). The switching timing counter is a counter for specifying the timing of switching the display contents of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 display the base value.

In this embodiment, when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) does not reach the shift reference number in neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode due to the result of the big win, the base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 are notified over the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds). , interval non-display is performed over an interval period (specifically, one second) in order to notify that the base value to be notified will be switched during the notification of these base values. Specifically, as the non-display for the interval, all the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are turned off, so that the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are in the non-display state. Interval non-display is performed before the base value to be notified is switched in the predetermined order of current area 311→first history area 312→second history area 313→third history area 314, so that the manager of the game hall can clearly recognize that the base value to be notified is switched.

In a situation where the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, corresponding pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. Specifically, as the pre-shift display, “A.” is displayed on each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . The display content of "A." is the display content that is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the base value and the interval period of non-display for the interval. As a result, the overall display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the pre-shift display is performed can be different from the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the base value and the interval period of non-display for the interval. Therefore, when the manager of the game hall confirms that the pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to grasp the situation that the base value is shifted because the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number.

The display contents of the pre-shift display are the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the check display is being performed, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the pre-management flag is not set to "1", the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is being executed, and the set value update process (FIG. 137). ) is being executed, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are also different. Also from this point, when the manager of the game hall confirms that the pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to grasp the situation that the base value is shifted because the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number.

The execution period of the pre-shift display is set to be longer than the interval period (specifically, one second) during which the interval non-display is performed. Also, the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to a period longer than the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) of the display corresponding to the base value. Specifically, the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to 8 seconds. However, without being limited to this, the execution period of the pre-shift display may be longer than the interval period and not longer than the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the base value, or may be not longer than the interval period. However, in order to make the game hall manager clearly recognize that the pre-shift display is being performed, it is preferable that the period during which the pre-shift display is performed is set to a period longer than the interval period.

As already explained, in order to complete the calculation of one base value, it is necessary to execute the result calculation process (FIG. 149) multiple times. Specifically, the cycle of calculating one base value is 12 milliseconds. Further, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the data shift processing (step SA216) in which base value information is shifted between various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 is executed after one base value is newly calculated after the shift reference number is reached. In this case, the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to a period longer than the longest period required until the data shift processing (step SA216) is completed when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number. This makes it possible to complete the new calculation of one base value and the data shift processing of the base value (step SA216) in a situation where the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Returning to the description of the display processing (FIG. 150), when the processing of step SA303 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the switching timing counter after subtraction of 1 is "0", thereby determining whether or not the current measurement target period has elapsed among the display continuation period of the base value, the interval period during which the interval non-display is performed, and the execution period of the pre-shift display (step SA304). If an affirmative determination is made in step SA304, it is determined whether or not the pre-shift display flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the pre-shift display should be started (step SA305). If a negative determination is made in step SA305, it is determined whether or not the interval flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA306). The interval flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the interval non-display should be started.

If a negative determination is made in step SA306, it means that the base value is to be notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at this switching timing. In this case, the value of the display object counter provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is incremented by 1 (step SA307). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "3" (step SA308: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step SA309).

The display target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the base value to be notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 among the base values stored in the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. Specifically, when the value of the counter to be displayed is "0", the base value stored in the current area 311 is to be notified; when the value of the counter to be displayed is "1", the base value stored in the first history area 312 is to be notified; when the value of the counter to be displayed is "2", the base value stored in the second history area 313 is to be notified; The value is to be notified.

If a negative determination is made in step SA308 or if the process of step SA309 is executed, a value corresponding to the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) for displaying the base value is set as a value corresponding to the next switching timing in the switching timing counter of the non-specific control work area 223 (step SA310). After that, the interval flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA311). Thus, when the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is not set to "1" by the next switching timing, interval non-display is performed when the next switching timing comes.

After that, a process for setting display data corresponding to the base value to be notified this time is executed in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Specifically, similarly to step S8708 of the display processing (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter is set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA312). The display type data is display data for causing the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 to display that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and causes the second notification display device 202 to display which of the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 corresponds to the base value of the notification target. display data for

After that, similarly to step S8709 of the display processing (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the base value is read from the area corresponding to the value of the display object counter among the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234, and the calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number in the read base value are set in the display object setting area 276 ( step SA313). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to display the number in the first decimal place in the base value to be notified, and display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to display the number in the second decimal place in the base value to be notified.

By setting the display data including the display type data and the calculation result data in the display object setting area 276, the display data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. That is, when the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified, the display shown in FIG. 127(a) is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as an example, and when the base value of the first history area 312 is to be notified, the display as shown in FIG. 127(c) is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as an example, and when the base value of the third history area 314 is to be notified, the display as shown in FIG.

If the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" and the determination in step SA306 is affirmative, it means that the target to start reporting at the switching timing of this time in the first to fourth reporting display devices 201 to 204 is the interval non-display. In this case, interval setting processing is executed (step SA314). In the setting process, a value corresponding to an interval period (specifically, one second) is set as a value corresponding to the next switching timing in the switching timing counter of the non-specific control work area 223 . After that, the interval flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to "0" (step SA315). As a result, when the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is not set to "1" by the next switching timing, the base value is displayed when the next switching timing comes.

Thereafter, interval data is set in the display object setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA316). The interval data is data for causing the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 to perform interval non-display. Specifically, it is data for turning off all the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204. By setting the interval data as the display data in the display object setting area 276, the interval data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all in a non-display state. The manager of the game hall who has confirmed that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the non-display state can grasp that it is the interval period.

If the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" and a positive determination is made in step SA305, it means that the target to start reporting with the switching timing of this time in the first to fourth reporting display devices 201 to 204 is the pre-shift display. In this case, pre-shift display period setting processing is executed (step SA317). In the setting process, a value corresponding to the pre-shift display execution period (specifically, 8 seconds) is set as a value corresponding to the next switching timing in the switching timing counter of the non-specific control work area 223 .

After that, the interval flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to "0", the pre-shift display flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to "0" (step SA318), and the display target counter in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to the maximum value of "3" (step SA319). By clearing the interval flag to "0", when the pre-shift display execution period has elapsed, the next notification target becomes the base value. By setting the maximum value in the display target counter, if a negative determination is made in step SA306 to notify the base value, the value of the display target counter after adding 1 to the display target counter value in step SA307 exceeds the maximum value, and an affirmative determination is made in step SA308 to clear the value of the display target counter to "0". As a result, when the execution period of the pre-shift display has elapsed, the next notification target becomes the base value, and the base value becomes the base value of the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234 .

That is, when the pre-shift display is performed, the notification of the base value is started regardless of whether the target to be notified before the pre-shift display is the base value or the interval non-display. As a result, when the pre-shift display ends, it is possible to check the base value without waiting for the interval period to elapse. Further, even if the last base value to be notified before the pre-shift display is performed in any of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234, the notification is started from the base value of the current area 311 when the pre-shift display ends. As a result, it is possible to restore the notification order of the base values in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 to the initial notification order, and it is possible to make the manager of the game hall easily recognize that the shift of the base value has just occurred.

After that, the pre-shift display data is set in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA320). The pre-shift display data is data for causing the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 to perform pre-shift display, and specifically, the data for causing the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 to display "A." By setting the pre-shift display data in the display target setting area 276 as display data, the pre-shift display data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and "A." is displayed on each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The manager of the game hall who has confirmed that the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can grasp that it is the execution period of the pre-shift display.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 151, how the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the management start flag is set to "1" will be described. FIG. 151(a) shows the period during which the base values stored in the current status area 311 are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 151(b) shows the period during which the base values stored in the first history area 312 are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. FIG. 151(d) shows the period during which the base values stored in the third history area 314 are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 151(e) shows the interval non-display period by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 151(g) shows the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) after the base value calculation period is newly started and neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win results nor the high-frequency support mode.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 151(a), notification of the base values stored in the current state area 311 is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 127(a), the first notification display device 201 displays that the base value is the notification target, the second notification display device 202 displays that the base value stored in the current area 311 is the notification target, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t1 at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. This interval non-display is terminated at timing t3 when the interval period has elapsed from timing t2, as shown in FIG. 151(e).

At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 151(b), notification of the base values stored in the first history area 312 is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. In the case of this alarm, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), the first alarm display device 201 displays indicates that the base value is awarded target, and the second reward display device 202 indicates that the base value stored in the 1st History Area 312 is a notable target, indicating that it is a display target. In the device 203 and the fourth reward display device 204, the display corresponds to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is performed.

After that, at the timing of t4, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t3, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 ends as shown in FIG. This interval non-display is terminated at timing t5 when the interval period has elapsed from timing t4, as shown in FIG. 151(e).

At the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 151(c), notification of the base values stored in the second history area 313 is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. In the case of this alarm, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), the first alarm display device 201 shows a display indicating that the base value is a notified target, and the 2nd reward display device 202 indicates that the base value stored in the second history area 313 is a notable target, and is displayed. In the device 203 and the fourth reward display device 204, the display corresponds to the base value stored in the second history area 313 is performed.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from timing t5 at timing t6, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 ends as shown in FIG. This interval non-display ends at timing t7 when the interval period has elapsed from timing t6, as shown in FIG. 151(e).

At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 151(d), notification of the base values stored in the third history area 314 is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. In the case of this alarm, as shown in FIG. In the device 203 and the fourth reward display device 204, a display corresponding to the base value stored in the third history area 314 is performed.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from timing t7 at timing t8, the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 ends as shown in FIG. This interval non-display is terminated at timing t9 when the interval period has elapsed from timing t8, as shown in FIG. 151(e).

After that, as shown in FIG. 151(a), display corresponding to the base values stored in the current area 311 is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 from timing t9 to timing t10 in the same manner as at timing t1 to timing t2. to the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Then, at the timing of t11, similarly to the timing of t3, as shown in FIG.

After that, at timing t12, which is the timing during which the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is being performed, as shown in FIG. reach. However, at the timing of t12, the display continuation period has not passed since the display corresponding to the base value of the first history area 312 was started at the timing of t11, so the display corresponding to the base value of the first history area 312 continues as shown in FIG. As a result, even if the timing at which the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number is arbitrary, it is possible to start the pre-shift display on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 after the current information target is displayed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 for a period as planned.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t11 at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 151(b), the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is terminated, and as shown in FIG. Even when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while another base value is being notified, the pre-shift display is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the display continuation of the notification of the base value has elapsed. Even when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number while the interval non-display is being performed, the pre-shift display is started by the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 when the interval period for the interval non-display has passed.

After that, at the timing of t14, when the pre-shift display execution period has elapsed from the timing of t13, the pre-shift display ends as shown in FIG. 151(f), and as shown in FIG. That is, even if the target of notification when the pre-shift display is started is the base value of the first history area 312, when the pre-shift display ends, the notification is started from the base value of the current area 311 corresponding to the first notification order in the notification order of the base value.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t14 at the timing of t15, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 ends as shown in FIG. This interval non-display is terminated at timing t16 when the interval period has elapsed from timing t15, as shown in FIG. 151(e), and as shown in FIG.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The base values stored in the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to individually notify each base value corresponding to a different period while suppressing the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . In addition, since each base value is displayed according to a predetermined order, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp the type of base value to be displayed.

The display order of the base values is determined in association with each of the current status area 311 , first history area 312 , second history area 313 and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 . This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of base value to be displayed when the display of the base value is newly started.

Before the state where one base value is displayed changes to the state where the next base value is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 enter the interval non-display state. This enables the manager of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the type of base value to be displayed has been switched.

In the configuration in which the base values are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000 pieces) in a situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode is established after the base value calculation period is newly started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 4, a pre-shift display is performed. As a result, it is possible to notify that the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number by using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .

When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are shifted to storage areas on the rear side of the storage order, and the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" to start calculating the base value for a new calculation period. Therefore, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the information content of the base value in the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 is changed. In this case, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the notification of the base value is resumed after the pre-shift display is performed, so that the manager of the game hall can recognize that the content of the notification of the base value will be changed when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number.

When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while the base value is being displayed, the pre-shift display is started after the display continuation period of the display of the base value has passed. This makes it possible to start the pre-shift display without interfering with the display of the base value that is already being performed.

In a configuration in which a plurality of base values stored in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed according to a predetermined display order, after the pre-shift display is performed, the first base value in the predetermined display order is displayed. As a result, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, it is possible to check again from the first base value in the predetermined display order.

In the configuration in which the base value is calculated in the result calculation process (FIG. 149), the result calculation process is executed multiple times from the start of calculation of one base value until the calculation of the base value is completed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for executing the result calculation process, compared to a configuration in which the calculation of the base value is completed in one result calculation process.

When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the data shift processing (step SA216) of the base value is executed after the base value is newly derived at the timing when the shift reference number is reached. When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thus, in a situation where the base value is newly derived and the data shift processing of the base value is being performed, it is possible to perform the pre-shift display in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and it is possible to prevent the display of the previous base value from being continued as it is even though the shift reference number has been reached.

In addition, until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000) after the start of the calculation period of the base value, when the base value of the current area 311 is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used to initially display the calculation. may be configured to perform.

In addition, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically 60000) in a state where the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are not displayed for intervals, the pre-shift display is started immediately. may be configured such that the pre-shift display is started when the display continuation period of . As a result, it is possible to start the pre-shift display early while preventing the display of the base value that has already been performed from ending halfway.

In addition, the display content of the pre-shift display is not limited to the above, and the display content in at least a part of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is display content that can be displayed in other situations. In addition, when the pre-shift display is performed, at least one display segment 321 to 324 is in a lighting state in each of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204. However, for a part of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, all the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a non-lit state. Further, when the pre-shift display is performed, the display content of the pre-shift display is not limited to the configuration in which the display content of the pre-shift display is maintained over the execution period of the pre-shift display, and the display content of the pre-shift display may be blinked over the execution period of the pre-shift display.

Further, the execution period of the pre-shift display is not limited to the configuration in which it is fixed. For example, the execution period of the pre-shift display may vary according to the period required from the total number of game balls reaching the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) to the calculation of a new base value and the completion of the data shift processing of the base value.

Further, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the pre-shift display may be started after the display of the last base value (that is, the base value stored in the third history area 314) of the display cycles of the base values performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time is completed. As a result, it is possible to start a new cycle of display of each base value via the pre-shift display after the cycle of display of each base value is completed.

Further, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the calculation of the base value is started using the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 at that time, and when the calculation of the base value is completed, the data shift processing (step SA216) may be performed. In this case, it is possible to accurately calculate the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number.

Further, instead of performing interval non-display during the interval period, predetermined display is performed on at least a part of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, and interval display that is different from the display content that can occur in the situation where the base value is notified may be performed as the entire display of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204. For example, in each of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, only the center display segments 321 to 324 are lit, so that "-" is displayed. A part of the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 may display "-" and the remaining display devices may be in a non-display state.

Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the interval period is not set. In this case, when the display continuation period has elapsed for one base value, the display of the base value to be displayed next in order is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .

<Forty-Fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the forty-third embodiment in the start timing of the pre-shift display. The configuration different from that of the forty-third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the forty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

The start timing of the pre-shift display in this embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 152(a) shows the period during which the base values stored in the current status area 311 are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 152(b) shows the period during which the base values stored in the first history area 312 are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. FIG. 152(d) shows the period during which the base values stored in the third history area 314 are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 152(e) shows the interval non-display period on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 152(g) shows the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) in a situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win result nor the high-frequency support mode is performed after the base value calculation period is newly started.

At timings t1 to t11, similarly to the time charts of FIGS. 151(a) to 151(g) in the forty-third embodiment, display corresponding to the base value over the display duration period and non-display for the interval during the interval period are repeated on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the display corresponding to the base value is displayed in the current state area 311→first history area 312→second history area of the calculation result storage area 234. 313 → third history area 314 are repeated. Then, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 152(b), the display corresponding to the base values stored in the first history area 312 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

After that, at timing t12, which is the timing during which the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is being performed, as shown in FIG. reach. In this case, at the timing of t12, the display continuation period has not elapsed since the display corresponding to the base value in the first history area 312 was started at the timing of t11, but the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is terminated as shown in FIG.

Even when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while another base value is being notified, the pre-shift display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that timing. Also, even when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while the interval non-display is being performed, the pre-shift display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that timing.

After that, at the timing of t13, when the pre-shift display execution period has elapsed from the timing of t12, the pre-shift display ends as shown in FIG. That is, even if the target of notification when the pre-shift display is started is the base value of the first history area 312, when the pre-shift display ends, the notification is started from the base value of the current area 311 corresponding to the first notification order in the notification order of the base value.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from timing t13 at timing t14, as shown in FIG. This interval non-display ends at timing t15, which is the timing at which the interval period has elapsed from timing t14, as shown in FIG. 152(e), and as shown in FIG.

According to the above configuration, when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) in a situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the big win result nor the high-frequency support mode is performed after the base value calculation period is newly started, the pre-shift display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that timing. As a result, it is possible to start the pre-shift display at an early stage, and it is possible to quickly notify that the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number.

<Forty-Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirty-fifth embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 . The configuration that is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . It should be noted that the processing of steps SA401 to SA425 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step SA401). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during this predetermined waiting period. Also, access to the main side RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SA402). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that periodically interrupts the main process and is activated, is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is the process that is periodically interrupted and activated to the main process, is set to a second interrupt period (specifically, 2 milliseconds) that is shorter than the first interrupt period.

That is, in this embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) exist so that the interrupt cycle becomes relatively long and short as the timer interrupt processing. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are started by interrupting the main process. Also, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) and is not activated. Also, if both the first interrupt period and the second interrupt period have passed in a situation where neither the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) nor the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) are executed, the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) is started first regardless of the order in which those periods have elapsed. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be started with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt periods, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1, for example, is executed.

After that, "1" is set to the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA403). As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the start-up processing flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) should be terminated without executing the process for progressing the game, while executing the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133).

As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the start-up processing flag is set to "1" before the start of supply of operating power (steps SA401 to SA418) in the main process (FIG. 153) and permitting an interrupt (step SA404), and cleared to "0" before the start of supply of operating power and the start of the remaining process (steps SA422 to SA425). In this case, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, thereby making it possible to prevent the processing for progressing the game from being executed in the situation where the processing (steps SA401 to SA418) at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905, power failure monitoring is executed even when the processing (step SA401 to step SA418) is being executed, and the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated. and fraud detection is performed.

In particular, by executing the power failure information storage process (step S8901) even in a situation where the start-up flag is set to "1", even if a power failure occurs while the operation power supply start process (steps SA401 to SA418) is being executed, the power failure process can be executed. In the power failure process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (step SA415) or the setting value update process (step SA418), it is possible to identify that the power failure occurred during these setting-related processes when the supply of operating power is started next time.

Incidentally, when the setting confirmation process (step SA415) or the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are not prohibited from being interrupted and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) including the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and the set value update process (step SA418) is started by interrupting the main process (FIG. 153), information of the return address of the main process (FIG. 153) for returning after the timer interrupt process to be started is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Information in various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before activation is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be activated ends, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 153) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

After "1" is set in the start-up processing flag at step SA403, interrupt permission is set (step SA404). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. However, since the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in step SA403, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started, the power failure monitoring, the updating of various counters, and the fraud monitoring among the various processing of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) are executed, but the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA405). That is, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started by performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 68c is being pressed. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main controller 60 is provided with the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA405: NO), it is determined whether or not the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA406). When power failure processing is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the power failure flag is set to "1". The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power failure processing was appropriately performed at the time of the previous power failure.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step SA406: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step SA407). The checksum calculation method is the same as in the thirty-third embodiment. After that, the checksum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 calculated in the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA407 (step SA408). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step SA409).

When a negative determination is made in step SA406 or step SA409, that is, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" or the checksum does not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA410). By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8906. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, or when the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 since the previous power failure, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, but the process for progressing the game is not executed.

Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SA411). By receiving the abnormality command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission part 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting supply of operating power, and outputs the sound "Please change the settings" from the speaker part 54. - 特許庁Also, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the notification may be continued when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the set value update process (step SA418) is executed.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (step SA406 and step SA409: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA412). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When the setting update display flag is set to "1", the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value being updated. The setting update display flag is set to "1" when the setting value update process (step SA418) is started, and is cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (step SA418) is terminated. Therefore, the setting update display flag is basically not set to "1" when the setting value update process (step SA418) is not executed. However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the set value update process (step SA418) is being executed, the setting update display flag will be set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started. This state in which the setting update display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed or the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process (step SA418).

If a negative determination is made in step SA412 because the setting update display flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SA413). If the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SA413: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA415). Even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on using the setting key (step SA413: NO), if the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA414: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step SA415). The setting confirmation process will be described later.

The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being confirmed and a display indicating the currently set setting value. The setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is started, and is cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is finished. However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, the setting confirmation display flag will be set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started. The state in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed or the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting confirmation process (step SA415).

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA405: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step SA416). In the RAM clearing process, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial setting is performed except for an area (specifically, a setting reference area 341 to be described later) in which information of setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, the area indicating whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display part 38a is not variably displayed and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general electricity reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the reservation information for the general figure display unit 38a is erased. Also, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". Also, a setting update area 342 (to be described later) provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the RAM clear processing, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial setting is executed. In addition, in the RAM clearing process, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing of step SA402 is executed. For the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the processing for clearing "0" and the processing for initial setting are not executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SA417). If the ON operation is performed (step SA417: YES), set value update processing is executed (step SA418). The set value update process will be described later.

When the process of step SA411 is executed, when the process of step SA414 is made negative, when the process of step SA415 is executed, when the process of step SA417 is negative, or when the process of step SA418 is executed, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA419). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is started after the main CPU 63 completes the processing (steps SA401 to SA418) at the start of the supply of operating power and before the start of the remaining processing (steps SA422 to SA425). As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed.

Further, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and the setting value update process (step SA418) are executed as the process at the start of supply of operating power, whereas the initial check period is started after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. As a result, even if the check display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not affected.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA420). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up process flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906 to execute not only the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 but also the processes of steps S8907 to S8920, thereby canceling the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed. In step SA420, the power failure flag in work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Thereafter, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SA421). The content of the information contained in the return command and the processing content of the sound emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as in step S7920 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment.

After that, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps SA422 to SA425. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134), but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but such irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining process of steps SA422 to SA425. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps SA422 to SA425 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps SA422 to SA425, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, a configuration related to set values in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area relating to set values provided in the work area 221 for specific control.

As shown in FIG. 154, the specific control work area 221 is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342 . The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 by the main side CPU 63 is stored. In step S503 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is specified by the information stored in the setting reference area 341, and the success/failure table corresponding to the specified setting value is read. Then, in step S504, the read right/wrong table is used to execute the right/wrong determination process. In addition, in a situation where the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

Numerical information is stored in the setting reference area 341 as setting value information. Specifically, when numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". When the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". When the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". When numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". When the numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6".

Setting update area 342 stores information about setting values that are being updated in the setting value update process (step SA418). In other words, in the setting value update process (step SA418), the information of the setting value to be selected is updated each time the reset button 68c is pressed. In this updating, the information of the setting value stored in the setting update area 342 is changed without changing the information of the setting value stored in the setting reference area 341. As a result, it is possible to update the setting value while storing and holding the information of the setting value that was set before the setting value update process (step SA418) was started. When the setting value update process (step SA418) ends, the setting reference area 341 is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 at that time. As a result, the setting value updated in the setting value update process (step SA418) is set as the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Further, in a situation where the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

Numerical information is stored in the setting update area 342 as setting value information. Specifically, when the numerical value information "1" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is "setting 1". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "2", the setting value to be updated is "setting 2". When the setting update area 342 stores numerical information of "3", the setting value to be updated is "setting 3". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "4", the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "5", the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "6", the setting value to be updated is "setting 6".

FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process executed at step SA415 of the main process (FIG. 153). The processing of steps SA501 to SA504 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

On condition that the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1" (step SA501: NO), the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SA502). When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), and setting processing (step S9006) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed.

FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation. The processing of steps SA601 to SA603 in the setting process is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, the setting value display data corresponding to the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 of the specific control work area 221 is read (step SA601). Then, the display data of the read setting value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control as display data for applying to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA602). Also, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step SA603).

By executing the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA603 is performed on the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203, and the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA602 is performed on the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(b), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Returning to the description of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), if an affirmative determination is made in step SA501 or if the process of step SA502 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SA503). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion portion 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Therefore, not only when the setting key inserting section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation process is started in a situation where the setting key inserting section 68a is in the OFF state and the OFF state is maintained, a negative determination is made in step SA503. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: NO), the process of step SA503 is repeated.

When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SA504). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), and the setting processing (step S9006) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, the display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are cancelled.

As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 153) is started. The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed in the situation in which the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. As a result, it is possible to check the set value even when no game is being played.

FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing the set value update process executed at step SA418 of the main process (FIG. 153). It should be noted that the processing of steps SA701 to SA710 in the set value update processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SA701). If the setting update display flag is not set to "1" (step SA701: NO), the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SA702). Thereafter, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 in the work area 221 for specific control is overwritten in the setting update area 342 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA703). As a result, the setting value information that was set when the supply of operating power was stopped last time is set in the setting update area 342 .

On the other hand, if the setting update display flag is already set to "1" (step SA701: YES) because the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process is being executed and the setting value updating process is started without executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416) of the main process (FIG. 153), the process of step SA703 is not executed. In this case, the processing from step SA704 onwards is executed while maintaining the setting value information set in the setting update area 342 in the setting value update processing before the supply of operating power is stopped.

If the setting update display flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), thereby executing setting processing (step S9004) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update.

FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update. The processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the setting process is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, the setting value display data corresponding to the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 of the specific control work area 221 is read (step SA801). Then, the display data of the read setting value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control as display data for applying to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA802). Also, the display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step SA803).

By executing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA803 is performed on the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203, and the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA802 is performed on the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (a), the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the setting value selected as the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Returning to the description of the setting value update process (FIG. 157), when the affirmative determination is made in step SA701 or when the process of step SA703 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is one of "1" to "6" (step SA704). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SA704: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SA705). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SA704 or if the process of step SA705 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SA706). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion portion 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state and the setting value update process is started and the OFF state is maintained, a negative determination is made in step SA706.

If a negative determination is made in step SA706, on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA707: YES), 1 is added to the value of the setting update area 342 (step SA708). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA707: NO) or if the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SA704. However, if it is determined in step SA704 that the value in the setting update area 342 is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 in step SA705. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

If it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA706: YES), the setting reference area 341 is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 (step SA709). As a result, the information of the set value updated as a result of this set value update processing is set in the setting reference area 341, and the set value corresponding to the set information becomes the current set value of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Thereafter, the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA710). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), and the setting processing (step S9004) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is not executed. Therefore, the display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the setting value selected as an update target of the pachinko machine 10 are canceled on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.例文帳に追加

As described above, not only is the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 performed while pressing the reset button 68c, but also the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key insertion portion 68a is ON-operated by the setting key. Based on this, not only the RAM clearing process (step SA416) but also the setting value update process (FIG. 157) are executed. Also, as already explained, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed based on the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while turning ON the setting key inserting portion 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. This makes it possible to share the ON operation for the setting key insertion portion 68a as the operation for executing the setting-related processing related to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make the content of the operation for causing the setting-related processing easy to understand for the manager of the game hall.

Also, in the case where the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while ON-operating the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key, the setting confirmation process is executed when the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, and the setting value updating process is performed when the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is added. This makes it possible to differentiate between the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process to be executed depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the manager of the game hall to understand the operation contents for executing the desired process out of the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process. Further, by increasing the number of operations for executing the setting value updating process rather than the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to illegally perform the setting value updating process.

Next, when the power failure process is executed while the set value update process (FIG. 157) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, the contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

First, when the power failure processing is executed in a situation where neither the set value update processing (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is executed, the contents of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed afterward will be described.

If the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON and the reset button 68c is not pressed and the supply of operating power is restarted (i.e., "no operation"), none of the RAM clearing process (step SA416), setting value updating process (step SA418), and setting confirmation process (step SA415) are executed in the main process (FIG. 153). When the supply of operating power is resumed while the reset button 68c is pressed while the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned on (that is, when the "RAM clearing operation" is performed), in the main process (FIG. 153), the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, but the setting value updating process (step SA418) and setting confirmation process (step SA415) are not executed. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON and the supply of operating power is restarted while the reset button 68c is pressed (that is, when the "setting change operation" is performed), in the main process (FIG. 153), the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the set value update process (step SA418) are executed, but the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON but the supply of operating power is restarted without pressing the reset button 68c (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed), the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is executed, but the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the setting value update process (step SA418) are not executed.

Next, when the power failure process is executed while the set value update process (step SA418) is being executed (i.e., the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the details of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed afterward will be described.

When the supply of operating power is restarted while the "RAM clearing operation" has been performed, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed in the main process (FIG. 153), while the setting value updating process (step SA418) and setting confirmation process (step SA415) are not executed. That is, even if the power failure processing is executed while the setting value update processing (step SA418) is being executed, if the "RAM clearing operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, the RAM clearing processing (step SA416) is executed without restarting the setting value update processing (step SA418) and executing it again. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of only the RAM clearing process (step SA416) with respect to the "RAM clearing operation". In this case, if the power failure process is executed before the process of step SA709 is executed in the set value update process (step SA418), the setting value updated in the set value update process (step SA418) (that is, the changed set value) is not set in the setting reference area 341, so the set value that was set before the start of the set value update process (step SA418) is used even after the supply of operating power is resumed. The setting update display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416).

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting change operation" has been performed, in the main process (FIG. 153), the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the set value update process (step SA418) are executed, while the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. That is, even if the power failure processing is executed while the set value update processing (step SA418) is being executed, if the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, the set value update processing (step SA418) is newly started after the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed.

When the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" as already described. Therefore, in the setting value update process (FIG. 157), by making a negative determination in step SA701, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is overwritten in the setting update area 342. Therefore, if the power failure process is executed before the process of step SA709 is executed in the setting value update process (step SA418) before the supply of the operating power is stopped, the setting value information updated in the setting value update process (step SA418) is not set in the setting reference area 341 and is therefore invalidated. In this case, in the set value update process (step SA418) after the supply of operating power is resumed, the set value is updated from the set value set before the start of the set value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power is stopped.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in the state of "no operation" or when the supply of operating power is resumed in the state of "setting confirmation operation", the setting value update process (step SA418) is executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416) by making an affirmative determination in step SA412 on the condition that no abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag and checksum in the main process (FIG. 153). If the RAM clear process (step SA416) is not executed, the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control remains set to "1", so in the setting value update process (FIG. 157), an affirmative determination is made in step SA701, thereby maintaining the setting value information in the setting update area 342 as it is. Therefore, the update of the setting value is resumed from the setting value that is being updated in the setting value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power is stopped. As a result, when the power failure process is executed in the middle of the set value update process (step SA418) and the "RAM clearing operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, the set value update process (step SA418) can be resumed even if the "setting change operation" is not performed.

In particular, it is assumed that the pachinko machine 10 is erroneously turned off during execution of the set value update process (step SA418), and in this case, the pachinko machine 10 is immediately turned on. In this case, it is assumed that the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without pressing the reset button 68c while the setting key insertion part 68a is being turned on, and the supply of operating power is restarted in the situation where the "setting confirmation operation" is performed. In such a situation, the set value update process (step SA418) is executed as described above, and the set value update process (step SA418) is resumed from the setting value that was being updated in the set value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power was stopped. As a result, even if the above event occurs, it is possible to resume updating the setting values without any problem.

Next, when the power failure process is executed while the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed (i.e., the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the details of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is restarted will be described.

When the supply of operating power is restarted while the "RAM clearing operation" has been performed, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed in the main process (FIG. 153), while the setting value updating process (step SA418) and setting confirmation process (step SA415) are not executed. That is, even if the power failure processing is executed while the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, if the "RAM clearing operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed without newly executing the setting confirmation process (step SA415). This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of only the RAM clearing process (step SA416) with respect to the "RAM clearing operation". The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416).

When the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where the "setting change operation" has been performed, in the main process (FIG. 153), the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the set value update process (step SA418) are executed, but the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. That is, even if the power failure process is executed while the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, if the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not newly executed, and the setting value update process (step SA418) is executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the RAM clearing process (step SA416) and the set value updating process (step SA418) for the "setting change operation". In addition, even if the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is not executed in this way, the setting value to be updated is displayed by the execution of the setting value update (step SA418), and the update of the set value update (step SA418) is updated at that time. Since the information of the elephant set value is set to the setting reference area 341, the administrator of the gaming hall can check the setting value of the current pachinko machine 10. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416).

When the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, in the main process (FIG. 153), the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is executed on the condition that no abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag and checksum. As a result, even if the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (step SA415), it is possible to restart the confirmation of the setting value by performing the "setting confirmation operation" when the supply of operating power is restarted.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in the state of "no operation", the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is executed even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is not ON-operated by making an affirmative determination in step SA414 on the condition that no abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag and checksum in the main process (FIG. 153). This makes it possible to resume confirmation of the set value even if the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and the supply of the operating power is resumed after that even if there is no operation.

Next, the end timing of the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) in relation to the operating state of the setting key insertion section 68a will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 160(a) shows the period during which the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, FIG. 160(b) shows the period during which the setting key inserting section 68a is ON-operated, FIG. 160(c) shows the period during which the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, FIG. 160(d) shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, and FIG.

First, the case where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) are executed in the normal flow will be described.

At the timing t1, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and at the timing t2 after that, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160(a). In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is also performed. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the set value update process (FIG. 157) is started as shown in FIG. 160(c). After that, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the state in which the setting key insertion portion 68a has been ON is changed to the state in which it is OFF. As a result, the set value update process (FIG. 157) ends as shown in FIG. 160(c).

At the timing t5, the setting key inserting section 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and at the timing t6 after that, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160(a). In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started as shown in FIG. 160(d). After that, at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the state in which the setting key insertion portion 68a has been ON is changed to the state in which it is OFF. As a result, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) ends as shown in FIG. 160(d).

Next, the case where the power failure process is executed during the execution of the set value update process (FIG. 157) and the "no operation" situation occurs when the supply of operating power is restarted after that will be described.

At the timing t9, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and at the timing t10 after that, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160(a). In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is also performed. Therefore, at the timing of t11, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started as shown in FIG. 160(c). Then, at the timing of t12 during the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 157), the power supply is turned off as shown in FIG. In this case, the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) ends at the timing t12 as shown in FIG. 160(c), and the power failure process ends at the timing t13 as shown in FIG. 160(e).

After that, at timing t14, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(b), and in this state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at timing t15 as shown in FIG. 160(a). In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. That is, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the state of "no operation". However, when the pachinko machine 10 was powered off last time, the power failure processing was executed during the set value update processing (FIG. 157). Therefore, at the timing of t16, the set value update process (FIG. 157) is started as shown in FIG. 160(c). In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is terminated when it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state. Therefore, even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the OFF state from the start timing of the setting value update process (FIG. 157), the termination condition of the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not satisfied.

After that, at timing t17 during execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 157), the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key as shown in FIG. As a result, the set value update process (FIG. 157) ends as shown in FIG. 160(c).

Next, the case where the power failure process is executed during the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the state of "no operation" when the supply of operating power is restarted after that will be described.

At the timing of t19, the setting key inserting section 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. 160(a). In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. Therefore, at the timing of t21, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started as shown in FIG. 160(d). Then, at the timing of t22 during the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), the power supply is turned off as shown in FIG. In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) ends at t22 as shown in FIG. 160(d), and the power failure process ends at t23 as shown in FIG. 160(e).

After that, at timing t24, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(b), and in this state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at timing t25 as shown in FIG. 160(a). In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. That is, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the state of "no operation". However, when the pachinko machine 10 was powered off last time, the power failure process was executed during the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). Therefore, at the timing of t26, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started as shown in FIG. 160(d). In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is terminated when it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF operation state. Therefore, even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the OFF state from the start timing of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), the termination condition of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not satisfied.

After that, at timing t27 during execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key as shown in FIG. As a result, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) ends as shown in FIG. 160(d).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In order to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 157), it is necessary to perform a "setting change operation" by turning ON the setting key insertion portion 68a and pressing the reset button 68c when the supply of operating power is started. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally changing the setting value. In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) can be executed even if the "setting change operation" is not performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the set value update process (FIG. 157).

When the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the "setting confirmation operation" for confirming the setting value is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed instead of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). As a result, it is possible to give priority to the change of the set value over the confirmation of the set value, and to prevent the game from being started even though the change of the set value to be used is not actually completed.

When the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the set values selected as the update targets are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. This makes it possible to change the setting value while grasping the setting value selected as an update target. In addition, by displaying the set value selected as an update target in this way, it is possible to substantially confirm the set value even if the set value update process (FIG. 157) is prioritized even if the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted.

In the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, not only the display corresponding to the setting value selected as the update target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 but also the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed. As a result, even if the set value update process (FIG. 157) is started despite the "setting confirmation operation" being performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp that the set value update process (FIG. 157) has started.

When the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and when the supply of operating power is restarted after that, if there is "no operation" or if a "setting confirmation operation" is performed, the setting value selected before the supply of operating power is stopped is changed. As a result, it is possible to continue changing the set value from the set value selected before the supply of operating power was stopped.

When the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted after that, the setting value is changed from the setting value that is currently used. This makes it possible to change the initial set value when starting to change the set value according to the operation content when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the set value update process (FIG. 157) is not executed if the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed, if there is no need to execute the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) after that, it is possible to prevent the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) from being executed by performing the "RAM clear operation" when the supply of operating power is started.

In order to execute the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), it is necessary to perform a "setting confirmation operation" by turning ON the setting key insertion portion 68a when the supply of operating power is started. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value. In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) can be executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the supply of operation power is restarted. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155).

Even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, if the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed without executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). As a result, it is possible to give priority to the work of changing the set values over the work of confirming the set values.

A setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342 are provided in the specific control work area 221. Information corresponding to setting values to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and information corresponding to setting values that are being changed in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. This makes it possible to change the setting value to be updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 157) while storing and holding the information of the setting value set before the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started in the setting reference area 341.

If the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, if there is no operation or if the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342, and if the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted after that, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341. should be started. This allows each of these situations to occur appropriately.

In order to start the setting value updating process (FIG. 157), it is necessary to use the setting key to turn ON the setting key inserting section 68a. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally start the setting value updating process (FIG. 157). In this case, the set value update process (FIG. 157) is not terminated only by turning off the setting key insertion portion 68a, but is terminated when the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off after being turned on. As a result, even if the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state due to "no operation" when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not terminated immediately, and the setting key insertion part 68a is once turned ON and then further turned OFF. Since the updating process (FIG. 157) is ended, it is possible to end the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) at a timing preferable for the manager of the gaming hall.

In order to start the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), it is necessary to use the setting key to turn ON the setting key insertion part 68a. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally start the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not terminated only when the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off, but is terminated when the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off after being turned on. As a result, even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state due to "no operation" when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not immediately terminated, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not immediately terminated, and the setting confirmation is performed by turning the setting key insertion part 68a ON once and then turning it OFF again. Since the processing for confirmation (FIG. 155) is ended, it is possible to end the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) at a timing preferable for the manager of the gaming hall.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is started after the main CPU 63 completes the processing (steps SA401 to SA418) at the start of the supply of operating power and before the start of the remaining processing (steps SA422 to SA425). As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed.

While the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the set value update process (FIG. 157) are executed as the process at the start of supply of operating power, the initial check period is started after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. As a result, even if check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, it is possible not to affect the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, if either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, or if neither the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) nor the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to check whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

In the main processing (FIG. 153) of the main CPU 63, either the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is executed, or the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is not executed. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157), the process for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set. By setting the processing for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a common processing in this way, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while simplifying the processing configuration.

Even when the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are performing the check display, the main CPU 63 can start the processing for progressing the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the start timing of the processing for progressing the game from being delayed even in the configuration where the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is executed.

In the case where the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the supply of operating power is restarted, in the case of "no operation", the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not limited to the configuration in which the setting value is started from the setting value in the process of being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped. Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and when the supply of operating power is restarted, in the case of "no operation", the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be executed after the RAM clearing process (step SA416), or the RAM clearing process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may not be executed in the case of "no operation" when the supply of the operating power is restarted. In this case, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 may be overwritten in the setting update area 342 when the next setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started.

Further, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may not be executed in the case of "no operation".

Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) may be followed by the set value update process (FIG. 157). In this case, the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) may be configured to start from the setting values that are in the process of being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, or may be configured to start from the current use object setting values stored in the setting reference area 341.

Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be executed without the RAM clearing process (step SA416), or the RAM clearing process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. In this case, the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) may be configured to start from the setting values that are in the process of being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, or may be configured to start from the current use target setting values stored in the setting reference area 341.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and if the "RAM clearing operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) may be executed first, then the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed, or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed without executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416). 55) is executed, the RAM clear processing (step SA416) may be executed.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is configured to start from the setting value of the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341, but the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be configured to start from the setting value that was in the process of being changed before the supply of the operating power was stopped.

Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed without the RAM clear process (step SA416), or the RAM clear process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. In this case, the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) may be configured to start from the setting values that are in the process of being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, or may be configured to start from the current use object setting values stored in the setting reference area 341.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is configured to start from the setting value of the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341, but the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be configured to start from the setting value that was in the process of being changed before the supply of operating power was stopped.

Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed without the RAM clear process (step SA416), or the RAM clear process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed and the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may not be executed, or the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed. 157) is executed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed. Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed and the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may not be executed.

Further, if the operating power supply is suspended in the situation where the set value update (FIG. 157) is executed, if the operating power supply is resumed, the configuration that starts from the setting value (Fig. 157) will start from the setting value before the supply of operating power is stopped. It may not be limited, and it may be a configuration that starts from the current setting value that is remembered in the setting reference area 341 in the setting reference area 341.

Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and if the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the RAM clear process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, or the RAM clear process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed.

Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may not be executed, but the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed. In this case, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 may be overwritten in the setting update area 342 when the next setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started.

Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value update process (FIG. 155) may be executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, or the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed before the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed. Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may not be executed.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the interruption of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted after the predetermined time for waiting in the power-on initial setting process (step SA401). The configuration is not limited to the configuration started by the devices 201 to 204, and the configuration may be such that these displays are started without waiting for the predetermined time for the wait to elapse. Further, even if the setting update display flag is set to "1", the display indicating that the setting value is being updated and the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the condition that the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent these items from being displayed when the set value update process (FIG. 157) is not being executed.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is started in a state where the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the interruption of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is permitted after the predetermined time for waiting in the power-on initial setting processing (step SA401). The configuration is not limited to the configuration started by the devices 201 to 204, and the configuration may be such that these displays are started without waiting for the predetermined time for the wait to elapse. Further, even if the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the display indicating that the setting value is being confirmed and the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the condition that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent these items from being displayed when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not being executed.

Further, in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, an image indicating that the setting value is being updated may be displayed on the pattern display device 41. In addition to or instead of the display, an image showing an operation procedure for updating the setting value may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall clearly recognize that the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed.

Further, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, an image showing that the setting value is being checked may be displayed on the pattern display device 41. Alternatively, in addition to or instead of the display, an image showing an operation procedure for checking the setting value may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to make the game hall manager clearly recognize that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed.

Further, the operation unit operated to update the setting value in the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not limited to the reset button 68c, and may be a dedicated operation unit such as the update button 68b, or may be an operation unit provided in the main controller 60 for canceling the abnormal state. Further, positions corresponding to "setting 1" to "setting 6" are set as rotation operation positions when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and rotated, and a setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the setting key insertion portion 68a may be set. Further, the setting key insertion portion 68a may be configured to be further rotated than the ON position, and each time the rotation operation is performed beyond the ON position, the setting value in the process of updating is updated to the next setting value.

Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, the pachinko machine 10 may output a corresponding signal to the management computer of the game hall. In this case, the signal output may be performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 100 milliseconds), or the signal output may be continued while the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed. As a result, it becomes possible for the management computer of the game hall to grasp that the setting value update process (FIG. 157) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In addition, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to externally output a corresponding signal to the management computer of the game hall. In this case, the signal output may be performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 100 milliseconds), or the signal output may be continued while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being performed. As a result, it becomes possible for the management computer of the game hall to grasp that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Also, the configuration in which the process is terminated when the key insertion unit is changed from the ON state to the OFF state may be applied to processes other than the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157). For example, in order to display the base values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a predetermined key insertion portion needs to be operated to the ON position, and the display may be terminated when it is specified that the predetermined key insertion portion has been changed from the ON state to the OFF state.

Further, as a condition for starting the set value update process (FIG. 157), a condition may be set that at least one of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 to be opened is operated to be opened. In this configuration, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and if "no operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is performed at the time of resuming the supply of operating power, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be started even if the opening operation is not performed for the opening target.

Further, the configuration may be such that the condition for starting the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is that at least one of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is operated to be opened. In this configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and in the case of "no operation" when resuming the supply of operating power, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be started even if the opening target has not been opened.

In addition, the RAM clear processing executed before the set value update processing (FIG. 157) is executed and the RAM clear processing executed without the set value update processing may have different areas to be initialized in the main RAM 65.

Further, when the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started in a situation where the setting update display flag is not set to "1", the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is changed, and the configuration may be such that the setting value is changed from a preset initial value setting value. The initial value may be, for example, "setting 1", "setting 6", or other setting values.

In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed as the process at the start of supply of operating power, a configuration may be adopted in which the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed based on the fact that the "setting change operation" is performed after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. Even with this configuration, if the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is completed before the occurrence of the normal termination trigger, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed even if the "setting change operation" is not performed, so that the setting value change work can be prioritized.

In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed as the process at the start of supply of operating power, the configuration may be such that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed based on the fact that the "setting confirmation operation" is performed after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. Even with this configuration, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is completed before the occurrence of the normal termination trigger, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed, thereby making it possible to give priority to the setting value confirmation work.

<Forty-sixth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the forty-fifth embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 . The configuration different from that of the forty-fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . It should be noted that the processing of steps SA901 to SA925 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

At steps SA901 to SA904, the same processes as steps SA401 to SA404 of the main process (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SA905). When the supply of operating power is restarted after being stopped while the setting value update process (step SA918) is being executed, the main process is started in a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1".

If a negative determination is made in step SA905, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA906). That is, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started by performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 68c is being pressed.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA906: NO), it is determined whether or not the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA907). When power failure processing is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the power failure flag is set to "1". The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power failure processing was appropriately performed at the time of the previous power failure.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step SA907: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step SA908). The checksum calculation method is the same as in the thirty-third embodiment. After that, the checksum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 calculated in the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA908 (step SA909). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step SA910).

When a negative determination is made in step SA907 or step SA910, that is, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" or the checksum does not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA911). Also, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag or checksum at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SA912). The processing contents of steps SA911 and SA912 are the same as steps SA410 and SA411 of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (step SA907 and step SA910: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SA913). If the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SA913: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA914). The contents of the setting confirmation process are the same as those of the forty-fifth embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", the setting confirmation process is not executed unless the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on. Therefore, even if the supply of operating power is stopped under the condition that the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation process is not executed unless the supply of operating power is restarted under the condition that the "setting confirmation operation" is performed.

If the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SA905: YES) or if the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA906: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step SA915). The contents of the RAM clearing process are the same as the RAM clearing process (step SA416) of the main process (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment.

After that, if the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SA916: YES), setting value update processing is executed regardless of whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON (step SA918). On the other hand, if the setting update display flag is not set to "1" (step SA916: NO), setting value update processing is executed on the condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is ON-operated (step SA917: YES) (step SA918). That is, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value update process is being executed, the set value update process (step SA918) is newly started after the RAM clear process (step SA915) is executed, regardless of the operation content when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter.

If the process of step SA912 is performed, if the determination is negative at step SA913, if the process of step SA914 is performed, if the determination is negative at step SA917, or if the process of step SA918 is performed, the processes of steps SA919 to SA925 are performed. The processing contents of steps SA919 to SA925 are the same as steps SA419 to SA425 of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment.

FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the details of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 161) when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power failure processing is executed while the set value update processing (step SA918) or the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) is being executed.

When the power failure process is executed in a situation where neither the set value update process (step SA918) nor the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is executed, the contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) when the supply of operating power is resumed are the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. In other words, when the supply of operating power is restarted in the "no operation" situation, none of the RAM clearing process (step SA915), setting value updating process (step SA918), and setting confirmation process (step SA914) are executed in the main process (FIG. 161). Further, when the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "RAM clearing operation" has been performed, the RAM clearing process (step SA915) is executed in the main process (FIG. 161), but the set value update process (step SA918) and the setting confirmation process (step SA914) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting change operation" has been performed, in the main process (FIG. 161), the RAM clear process (step SA915) and the set value update process (step SA918) are executed, but the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is not executed. When the supply of operating power is restarted in a state where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is executed in the main process (FIG. 161), while the RAM clearing process (step SA915) and the setting value updating process (step SA918) are not executed.

Next, when the power failure process is executed while the set value update process (step SA918) is being executed (i.e., the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the details of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) when the supply of operating power is resumed afterward will be described.

Regardless of whether the supply of operating power is restarted under the condition of “no operation”, when the supply of operating power is restarted under the condition of “RAM clear operation”, when the supply of operating power is restarted under the condition of “setting change operation”, or when the supply of operating power is restarted under the condition of “setting confirmation operation”, the RAM clearing process (step SA915) and the setting value update process (step SA918) are executed in the main process (FIG. 161). Confirmation processing (step SA914) is not executed. In other words, when the power failure process is executed while the set value update process (step SA918) is being executed, the set value update process (step SA918) is newly started after the RAM clear process (step SA915) is executed, regardless of the operation content when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter.

With the above configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting value updating process (step SA918), when the operating power supply is restarted, it is possible to newly start the setting value updating process (step SA918) after the RAM clearing process (step SA915) is executed, regardless of the operation contents of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Thus, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of updating the set value, when the supply of operating power is restarted after that, it is possible to surely generate an opportunity to complete the update after updating the set value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started with the set value before the previous set value update processing (step SA918) is started when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of updating the set value.

Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the set value update process (step SA918), the set value update process (step SA918) is uniquely executed after the RAM clear process (step SA915) regardless of the operation content when the supply of the operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which the content of the process to be executed is changed according to each operation content.

Next, when the power failure process is executed while the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed (i.e., the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the contents of the main process (FIG. 161) will be described when the supply of operating power is resumed.

When the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the main process (FIG. 161) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed. 61). In other words, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed, when the supply of operating power is restarted after that, the process corresponding to the operation contents when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

Unlike changing the setting value, confirmation of the setting value does not affect the game even if it is terminated in the middle and not resumed as it is. Therefore, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of confirming the setting value, the processing corresponding to the operation contents when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, so that the operation contents when turning on the power by the manager of the game hall can be prioritized.

<Forty-seventh Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the forty-fifth embodiment in the details of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 161) when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power failure processing is executed while the set value update processing (step SA918) or the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) is being executed. The configuration different from that of the forty-fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the details of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power failure processing is executed while the set value update processing (FIG. 157) or the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is being executed.

When the power failure process is executed in a situation where neither the set value update process (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, the contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is restarted are the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. Further, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step FIG. 155) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed are the same as in the forty-sixth embodiment.

When the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed (i.e., the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the main process (FIG. 153) when the supply of the operating power is restarted after that is to restart the setting value update process (FIG. 157) in the case of "no operation" and in the case of the "setting confirmation operation", as in the forty-fifth embodiment. In the case of "RAM clear operation" and "setting change operation", the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is restarted after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed. In this case, in the RAM clearing process (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the specific control work area 221 but also the setting update display flag and the setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 are excluded from initialization. Therefore, even if the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed in a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" at the start of the subsequent setting value update process (FIG. 157), and the setting value update is started from the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 at that time.

With the above configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped during updating of the setting value, not only is the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) reliably executed when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter, but also it is possible to restart the updating of the setting value from the setting value that was being updated just before the supply of operating power was stopped. As a result, it is possible to continue the work of changing the setting value.

<Forty-Eighth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the forty-fifth embodiment in the details of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 161) when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power failure processing is executed while the set value update processing (step SA918) or the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) is being executed. The configuration different from that of the forty-fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the details of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power failure processing is executed while the set value update processing (FIG. 157) or the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is being executed.

When the power failure process is executed in a situation where neither the set value update process (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, the contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is restarted are the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. Further, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step FIG. 155) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed are the same as in the forty-sixth embodiment.

When power failure processing is executed in a situation where setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is being executed (i.e., a setting update display flag is set to "1"), the main processing (FIG. 153) is executed when supply of operating power is resumed after that. This is the same as the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed after the time processing has been executed. That is, in the case of "no operation", none of the RAM clearing process (step SA416), the setting value updating process (FIG. 157), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) are executed. In the case of "RAM clearing operation," the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, but the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) are not executed. RAM clear processing (step SA416) and set value update processing (FIG. 157) are not executed.

On the other hand, in the case of the "setting change operation", the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is resumed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed. In this case, in the RAM clearing process (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the specific control work area 221 but also the setting update display flag and the setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 are excluded from initialization. Therefore, even if the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed in a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" at the start of the subsequent setting value update process (FIG. 157), and the setting value update is started from the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 at that time.

With the above configuration, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value is being updated, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the processing corresponding to the operation content by the manager of the game hall when the supply of the operating power is restarted thereafter.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being updated, when the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where the "setting change operation" is performed, it is possible to restart the updating of the setting value from the setting value in the process of updating immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. As a result, it is possible to continue the work of changing the setting value.

<Forty-ninth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the forty-fifth embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 . The configuration different from that of the forty-fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps SB101 to SB128 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step SB101). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during this predetermined waiting period. Also, access to the main side RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SB102). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that periodically interrupts and starts the main process, is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that periodically interrupts and starts the main process, is set to a second interrupt period (specifically, 2 milliseconds) that is shorter than the first interrupt period.

In other words, in the present embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are provided so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long and short as the timer interrupt processing. Both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are started by interrupting the main processing. Also, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) and is not activated. Also, if both the first interrupt period and the second interrupt period have passed in a situation where neither the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) nor the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) are being executed, the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) is started first regardless of the order in which those periods have elapsed. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be started with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt periods, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1, for example, is executed.

After that, "1" is set to the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB103). As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the start-up processing flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) should be terminated without executing the process for progressing the game, while executing the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133).

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122) is started in the main process (FIG. 165), and is cleared to "0" before the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122) ends and the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is started. As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), when the start-up flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed, thereby executing the process for progressing the game in a situation where the later-described setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed among the processes (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power. It is possible to prevent it from being done. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), even when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905, power failure monitoring is executed even in a situation where the later-described setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is being executed among the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), and the hit random number counter C1, The jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is performed.

In particular, by executing the power failure information storage process (step S8901) even in a situation where the start-up flag is set to "1", even if a power failure occurs while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167), which will be described later, is being executed in the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122), the power failure process can be executed. In the power failure process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167), it is possible to identify that the power failure occurred during the setting-related process when the supply of operating power is started next time.

Incidentally, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are not prohibited from being interrupted and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167), the information of the return address of the main process (FIG. 165) for returning after the timer interrupt process to be started is completed is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the various registers of the main CPU 63 just before the timer interrupt process is started. Information is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be activated ends, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 165) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

After "1" is set to the startup processing flag at step SB103, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB104). When power failure processing is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the power failure flag is set to "1". The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power failure processing was appropriately performed at the time of the previous power failure.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step SB104: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step SB105). Specifically, first, checksums are calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. The checksum calculation method is the same as in the thirty-third embodiment. After that, the checksums of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 calculated in the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 are read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the current main processing. Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match.

If the checksums match (step SB105: YES), it is determined whether the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 is within a normal range (step SB106). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area for storing information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main side CPU 63 as in the forty-fifth embodiment. When the numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". When the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". When the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". When numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". When the numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6". At step SB106, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is one of "1" to "6".

If all of steps SB104 to SB106 are affirmative, it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB107). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When the setting update display flag is set to "1", a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a setting value being updated are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The setting update display flag is set to "1" when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, and is cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is terminated. However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the setting update display flag will be set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started. The state in which the setting update display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process (FIG. 167).

If a negative determination is made in step SB107 because the setting update display flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB108). That is, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started by performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 68c is being pressed. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main controller 60 is provided with the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB108: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB109). The game stop flag is set to "1" when the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksum does not match, or the set value is abnormal. By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8906. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, if the checksum does not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 since the previous power failure, or if the set value is abnormal, the process for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but the process for advancing the game is not performed. become. If an affirmative determination is made in step SB109, the processes of steps SB121 and SB122, which will be described later, are executed.

If a negative determination is made in step SB109, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB110). If the setting key inserting portion 68a has been turned on using the setting key (step SB110: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB112). Even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on using the setting key (step SB110: NO), if the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB111: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step SB112).

The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display that the setting value is being confirmed and the currently set setting value. The setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is started, and is cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is terminated. However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started. This state in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), which will be described later, is executed, the setting value update process (FIG. 167), which will be described later, is executed, or the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166).

As described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed not only when the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". Even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the supply is restarted, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. As a result, it is possible to continue to confirm the current set values of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, even if the power failure process is executed while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, if the reset button 68c is pressed when resuming the supply of the operating power after that, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) and the set value updating process (FIG. 167) are executed without executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). This makes it possible to prioritize execution of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) or setting value updating process (FIG. 167) over the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166).

Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step SB112 will be described. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process. The processing of steps SB201 to SB207 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SB201). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period.

In this embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are basically prohibited in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) when the supply of operating power is started, and the interrupt is permitted in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Therefore, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122), execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is prohibited. Execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted. However, when the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) or the set value update process (Fig. 167) is being executed, the start-up process flag is set to "1", so even if the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is started, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) are executed, but the process for advancing the game is not executed and the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133). is terminated.

After that, on condition that the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1", the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SB202). By setting the setting confirmation display flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), and setting processing (step S9006) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed. The contents of the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation are the same as those of the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing the process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(b), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, a confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB203). Upon receiving the confirmation start command, the sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 so that an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed and an image for recognizing the operation content for ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are displayed on the pattern display device 41. As a result, the manager of the game hall can recognize that the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed, and the manager of the game hall can recognize the operation contents required to end the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166). In addition to or instead of the notification being performed by the pattern display device 41, at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 may be configured to perform the notification. Further, it may be configured such that an external output indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed is performed to a device outside the pachinko machine 10 such as a game hall management computer.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB204). Specifically, similarly to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) in the forty-fifth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion portion 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Therefore, a negative determination is made in step SB204 not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is started in the state where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state and the OFF state is maintained. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204: NO), the process of step SB204 is repeated.

When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB205). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), and the setting processing (step S9006) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, the display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are cancelled.

After that, the interrupt inhibition is set (step SB206). As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is finished and the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122) in the main process (FIG. 165) is resumed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

Thereafter, a return command for confirmation is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB207). By receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the sound emission control device 81 identifies that the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) has been completed in the main CPU 63, and also identifies that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) has been executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). Then, the process corresponding to the receipt of the confirmation return command is executed. The contents of the processing will be described later.

As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 165) is started, but the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned ON. The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the situation where the process at the time of supply start of the operating power is being executed. As a result, it is possible to check the set value even when no game is being played.

Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 165), when the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned ON using the setting key and the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1" (step SB110 and step SB111: NO), the normal return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB113). By receiving the normal return command, the sound emission control device 81 identifies that the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) in the main CPU 63 is completed, and in the processing at the start of supply of operating power this time (steps SB101 to SB122), none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166), and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are executed. Identify things. Then, the process corresponding to the reception of the normal return command is executed. The contents of the processing will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined at step SB108 that the reset button 68c has been pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SB108 and step SB114: YES), or if it is determined at step SB107 that the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting value updating process is executed (step SB115). As described above, not only when the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on (i.e., when the "setting change operation" is performed), but also when the setting update display flag is set to "1" regardless of whether the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, whereby the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being performed. In this case, the set value update process (Fig. 167) is executed regardless of whether the operation content is "no operation", "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", or "setting confirmation operation" when the supply of operating power is started thereafter. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the set value update process (FIG. 167).

Here, the setting value updating process executed in step SB115 will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing. It should be noted that the processing of steps SB301 to SB314 in the setting value update processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63 .

First, interrupt permission is set (step SB301). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period.

In this embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are basically prohibited in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) when the supply of operating power is started, and the interrupt is permitted in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Therefore, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122), execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is prohibited. Execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted. However, when the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) or the set value update process (Fig. 167) is being executed, the start-up process flag is set to "1", so even if the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is started, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) are executed, but the process for advancing the game is not executed and the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133). is terminated.

After that, on condition that the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SB302). When the setting update display flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), thereby executing setting processing (step S9004) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update. The contents of the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update are the same as those of the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing the process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (a), the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the setting value selected as the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, initial setting at the start is performed (step SB303). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". As for the game stop flag, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure (step SB104: NO), if the checksum does not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 from the time of the previous power failure (step SB105: NO), or the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is changed. This flag is set to "1" at step SB119 of the main process (FIG. 165) when it is not within the normal range (step SB106: NO). By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8906. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 65 as described above, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but the processing for progressing the game is not executed. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SB303, it becomes possible to cancel the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main side RAM 65 is specified when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed.

Thereafter, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB304). The setting update area 342 is a storage area for storing setting value information that is being updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 167), as in the forty-fifth embodiment. When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "1", the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is "setting 1". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "2", the setting value to be updated is "setting 2". When the setting update area 342 stores numerical information of "3", the setting value to be updated is "setting 3". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "4", the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "5", the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "6", the setting value to be updated is "setting 6".

By setting "1" in setting update area 342 in step SB304, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1". That is, in this embodiment, regardless of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1".

After that, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB305). By receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 so that the pattern display device 41 displays an image indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value, and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for ending the setting value update process (FIG. 167). As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and to recognize the operation content necessary to change the setting value and the operation content necessary to end the setting value update process (FIG. 167). In addition to or instead of the notification being performed by the pattern display device 41, at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 may be configured to perform the notification. Further, it may be configured such that an external output indicating that the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed is performed to a device outside the pachinko machine 10 such as a game hall management computer.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is any one of "1" to "6" (step SB306). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SB306: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB307). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB306 or if the process of step SB307 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB308). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion portion 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state and the setting value update process is started and the OFF state is maintained, a negative determination is made in step SB308.

If a negative determination is made in step SB308, on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB309: YES), 1 is added to the value of the setting update area 342 (step SB310). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB309: NO) or if 1 is added to the setting update area 342, the process returns to step SB306. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

If it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB308: YES), the setting reference area 341 is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 (step SB311). As a result, the setting value information updated as a result of this setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information becomes the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

After that, the interrupt prohibition is set (step SB312). As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is terminated and the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122) in the main process (FIG. 165) is resumed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

After that, the second RAM clear processing is executed (step SB313). In the second RAM clear process, similarly to the RAM clear process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221 (that is, the setting reference area 341). As a result, the area indicating whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display part 38a is not variably displayed and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general electricity reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the reservation information for the general figure display unit 38a is erased. Also, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". Also, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Also, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, in the second RAM clear processing, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial setting is executed. In addition, in the second RAM clearing process, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing of step SB102 is executed. For the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the processing for clearing "0" and the processing for initial setting are not executed.

After that, a return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB314). By receiving the return command at the time of updating, the sound emission control device 81 specifies that the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) in the main CPU 63 has ended, and specifies that the set value update processing (FIG. 167) has been executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). Then, the process corresponding to the reception of the update return command is executed. The contents of the processing will be described later.

The setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed based on not only turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c as described above, but also turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key. Also, as already described, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed based on the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while turning ON the setting key inserting portion 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. This makes it possible to share the ON operation for the setting key insertion portion 68a as the operation for executing the setting-related processing related to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make the content of the operation for generating the setting-related processing easy for the manager of the game hall to understand.

Also, in the case where the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while ON-operating the setting key insertion part 68a by the setting key, if the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, and if the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is added, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. This makes it possible to differentiate the processing to be executed from among the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value updating processing (FIG. 167) depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the manager of the game hall to understand the operation contents for executing the desired process out of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Further, by increasing the operation content for executing the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) rather than the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166), it is possible to make it particularly difficult to illegally perform the setting value update processing (FIG. 167).

Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 165), when it is determined in step SB108 that the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is not ON-operated using the setting key (step SB114: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB116). The game stop flag is set to "1" when the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksum does not match, or the set value is abnormal. By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8906. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, if the checksum does not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 since the previous power failure, or if the set value is abnormal, the process for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but the process for advancing the game is not executed. become.

If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step SB116: NO), first RAM clear processing is executed (step SB117). In the first RAM clear process, similarly to the RAM clear process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed except for the area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221 (that is, the setting reference area 341). As a result, the area indicating whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display part 38a is not variably displayed and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general electricity reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the reservation information for the general figure display unit 38a is erased. Also, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". Also, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, in the first RAM clear processing, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial setting is executed. In addition, in the first RAM clearing process, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing of step SB102 is executed.

For the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the processing for clearing "0" and the processing for initial setting are not executed. Although the processing contents of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) are the same as those of the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) in the set value update process (FIG. 167), a part of these processing contents may be different. For example, an area to be cleared to "0" and initialized in the first RAM clear process (step SB117) may not be cleared to "0" and initialized in the second RAM clear process (step SB313).

Thereafter, a return command for clearing is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB118). By receiving the return command at the time of clearing, the sound emission control device 81 identifies that the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) in the main CPU 63 has ended, and specifies that the first RAM clearing processing (step SB117) has been executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). Then, the process corresponding to the reception of the return command for clearing is executed. The contents of the processing will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main process (FIG. 165), that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1", if the checksum does not match or if the set value is abnormal, the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB119). As already described, by setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8906. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, if the checksum does not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 since the previous power failure, or if the set value is abnormal, the process for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but the process for advancing the game is not performed. become.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB120). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB120: NO), an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, checksum, or set value at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB121). By receiving the abnormality command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission part 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of supply of the operating power, and outputs the sound "Please change the setting" from the speaker part 54. Also, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the notification will be started again when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed.

After that, external output processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step SB122). In the abnormal external output process, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, it is not limited to this, and under the condition that the game stop flag is set to "1", the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and the signal output of the abnormal signal is stopped by clearing the game stop flag to "0". The anomaly signal can also be output when an anomaly other than the anomaly related to the power failure flag, checksum and set value occurs. For example, an abnormal signal is also output externally when it is specified that a fraudulent object to be monitored (illegal radio wave detection or fraudulent magnetism detection) has occurred in the fraud detection processing (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). However, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration in which the abnormality signal is also used, and an abnormality signal dedicated to an abnormality related to the power failure flag, the checksum, or the setting value may be externally output. Alternatively, an abnormality signal corresponding to each of the abnormality related to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the abnormality related to the setting value may be externally output.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB120: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB114). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (steps SB114 and SB120: YES), set value update processing is executed (step SB115). The contents of the set value update process have already been described. That is, when operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 while the "setting change operation" is being performed, the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed even if a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 due to the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65. This makes it possible to give priority to changing the setting value. Also, in the set value update process (FIG. 167), the game stop flag is cleared to "0" by executing the initial setting at the time of start in step SB303 as already described. As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, it is possible to eliminate the state in which the main RAM 65 is abnormal after the update of the set values is completed.

On the other hand, if the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned ON (step SB120: YES, step SB114: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB116). In the processing of step SB116 after the game stop flag is set to "1" at step SB119, as a matter of course, the game stop flag is set to "1", so an affirmative determination is made at step SB116. In this case, an abnormality command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 at step SB121, and an abnormality signal is output to the outside at step SB122.

That is, when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is not executed even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the "RAM clearing operation" is being performed. Further, the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is not executed even when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started under the condition that the game stop flag is set to "1" and the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. Thus, even if the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started under the condition that the ``RAM clearing operation'' is performed, the state in which ``1'' is set to the game stop flag can be prevented from being canceled. On the other hand, when the "setting change operation" is performed, the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" or not, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the initial setting (step SB303) at the start of the set value update process (FIG. 167). As a result, it becomes necessary to execute the set value update process (FIG. 167) in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1". Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, it is possible not only to initialize the work area 221 for specific control, but also to reset the set values.

In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where the game stop flag is set to "1", when "setting change operation" is not performed, that is, when "no operation" is performed, or when "RAM clear operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step SB109 or SB116, and an abnormal command is transmitted in step SB121, and an abnormal external output process is executed in step SB122. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to "1", regardless of the processing results of steps SB104 to SB106 in the subsequent main processing, as long as the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is not executed, an abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and an external output in the event of an abnormality to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 are performed each time the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that the set value should be changed.

When the process of step SB112 is performed, when the process of step SB113 is performed, when the process of step SB115 is performed, when the process of step SB118 is performed, or when the process of step SB122 is performed, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB123). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is started after the main CPU 63 completes the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power and before the start of the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128). As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed.

Further, while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power, the initial check period is started after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. As a result, even if check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, it is possible not to affect the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB124). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up process flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906 to execute not only the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 but also the processes of steps S8907 to S8920, thereby canceling the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed. At step SB124, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

After that, the remaining processing of steps SB125 to SB128 is performed. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134), but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, such irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining process of steps SB125 to SB128. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps SB125 to SB128 are non-periodic processes that are executed non-periodically. In steps SB125 to SB128, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, how the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are allowed to be interrupted while the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power is being executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. Fig. 168(a) shows the period during which the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, Fig. 168(b) shows the period during which the operation power supply start processing (step SB101 to step SB122) is executed, Fig. 168(c) shows the period during which the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", Fig. 168(d) shows the residual processing (step SB125 to step SB12) 168(e) shows the period during which the interrupt is permitted, FIG. 168(f) shows the period during which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed, FIG. 168(g) shows the period during which the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, and FIG. 168(h) shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed.

First, the case where neither the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) nor the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power will be described.

At the timing of t1, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 168(a). In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the state of "no operation" in which none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting confirmation operation" are performed. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the main CPU 63 starts the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power. In addition, as shown in FIG. 168(c), the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1".

After that, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122) ends, and as shown in FIG. 168(d), the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is started. Also, at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 168(c), the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". At the timing when the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is started, the interrupt is not permitted as shown in FIG. 168(e).

Thereafter, at timing t3, the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) ends as shown in FIG. 168(d), and the interrupt is permitted as shown in FIG. 168(e). As a result, timer interrupt processing is started as shown in FIG. 168(f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) ends, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is executed first, and when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) ends, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is executed.

Next, the case where the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power will be described.

At the timing of t4, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 168(a). In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the "setting change operation" is performed. At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the main CPU 63 starts the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power. In addition, as shown in FIG. 168(c), the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1".

After that, at the timing of t5, the set value update process (FIG. 167) is started as shown in FIG. 168(g). In this case, the interrupt is permitted at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 168(e). When the interrupt is permitted, timer interrupt processing is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 168(f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) ends, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is executed first, and when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) ends, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is executed. Also, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is executed, since the start-up processing flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG.

The timer interrupt processing ends at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 168(f), and then the set value update processing (FIG. 167) ends at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 168(g). Then, at the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the operation power supply start processing (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed, and the start-up processing flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 168(c). Also, at the timing of t8, the residual processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is started as shown in FIG. 168(d).

Next, the case where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power will be described.

At the timing of t9, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 168(a). In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" is performed. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the main CPU 63 starts the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power. Further, as shown in FIG. 168(c), the startup processing in progress flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1".

After that, at the timing of t10, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is started as shown in FIG. 168(h). In this case, the interrupt is permitted at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 168(e). When the interrupt is permitted, timer interrupt processing is started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 168(f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) ends, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is executed first, and when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) ends, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is executed. Also, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is executed, since the start-up processing flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG.

The timer interrupt processing ends at the timing t12 as shown in FIG. 168(f), and then the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) ends at the timing t13 as shown in FIG. 168(h). Then, at the timing t13, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the operation power supply start processing (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed, and the startup processing flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 168(c). Also, at the timing of t13, the residual processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is started as shown in FIG. 168(d).

As described above, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are prohibited when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are not executed in the operation power supply start processing (steps SB101 to SB122). and execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is prevented from interrupting the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed, the process corresponding to the operation of the manager of the game hall is executed, so the period of staying in these processes becomes longer. In this case, even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, if the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is still disabled, the execution start timing of the timer interrupt process will be extremely delayed. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution start timing of timer interrupt processing from being extremely late. In addition, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) for performing display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is interrupted and executed, so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can display the setting values using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In addition, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the start-up flag is set to "1". Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) are executed, while the processes for progressing the game are not executed.

Next, the progress of processing when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, checksum, or set value occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. Fig. 169(a) shows the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, Fig. 169(b) shows the period during which the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122) is executed, Fig. 169(c) shows the period during which the residual process (steps SB125 to SB128) is executed, and Fig. 169(d) shows the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) or the second timer interrupt process. (FIG. 134) is executed, FIG. 169(e) shows a period during which the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", FIG.

At the timing of t1, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 169(a). In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the state of "no operation" in which none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting confirmation operation" are performed. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the main CPU 63 starts the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power.

After that, at the timing of t2, by specifying the occurrence of an abnormality related to any one of the power failure flag, the checksum and the set value, the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" as shown in FIG. Also, at the timing of t2, external output of an abnormal signal is started as shown in FIG. 169(f). As a result, it becomes possible for the management computer of the game hall to identify that an abnormality has occurred in any of the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value in the pachinko machine 10 .

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 169(b), the operation power supply start processing (steps SB101 to SB122) ends, and as shown in FIG. 169(c), the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) starts. At the timing of t4, the external output of the abnormal signal is terminated as shown in FIG. 169(f). By continuing the external output of the abnormality signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) from the timing t2 to the timing t4, it becomes possible for the management computer of the game hall to accurately identify the occurrence of an abnormality related to any one of the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value in the pachinko machine 10. Further, since the period during which the abnormal signal is continuously output to the outside is fixed at a predetermined period, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for externally outputting the abnormal signal. It should be noted that not only the abnormal signal is output to the outside, but also the abnormality notification in the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 is executed.

After that, at the timing of t5, the residual processing (steps SB125 to SB128) ends as shown in FIG. 169(c). Then, timer interrupt processing is executed as shown in FIG. 169(d) from timing t5 to timing t6, residual processing (step SB125 to step SB128) is executed as shown in FIG. 169(c) from timing t6 to timing t7, and timer interrupt processing is executed as shown in FIG. However, since the game stop flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 169(e), even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is executed, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but the processing for progressing the game is not executed. At the timing of t8, power failure processing is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), and the pachinko machine 10 is powered off as shown in FIG. 169(a).

After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 169(a), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON again, and as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 169(e), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". Therefore, the abnormal signal is externally output as shown in FIG. 169(f) from timing t10 to timing t12. As a result, it is possible to make the management computer of the game hall recognize again that an abnormality related to any one of the power failure flag, the checksum and the set value has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 . It should be noted that not only the abnormal signal is output to the outside, but also the abnormality notification in the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169(b), the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power ends at timing t11, and the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is executed as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 169(d), timer interrupt processing is executed at the timing of t13. However, since the game stop flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 169(e), even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is executed, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but the processing for progressing the game is not executed. At the timing of t14, power failure processing is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), and the pachinko machine 10 is powered off as shown in FIG. 169(a).

After that, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 169(a), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON again, and as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 169(g), the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed over the period from timing t16 to timing t17. By executing the set value update process (FIG. 167), not only the set value is changed, but also the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 169(e). As a result, the state in which the execution of the processing for progressing the game is blocked due to the occurrence of the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control is resolved. Thereafter, remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is executed as shown in FIG. 169(c) from timing t17 to timing t18, and timer interrupt processing is started as shown in FIG. 169(d) at timing t18.

As described above, when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main process (FIG. 165), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", and the process for progressing the game is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played despite the occurrence of an information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control.

Also, the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" is not resolved unless the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. As a result, it becomes necessary to execute the set value update process (FIG. 167) in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1", and when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, it is possible not only to initialize the work area 221 for the specific control but also to reset the set value.

Next, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 170(a) shows a period during which the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power is executed, FIG. 170(b) shows a period during which the process is executed after the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power, FIG. 170(c) shows an initial check period, and FIG. 170(d) shows a period during which the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. 170(e) shows the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 during the setting updating display period performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204; And the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 indicates the display period during setting confirmation performed by the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification.

First, the case where neither the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) nor the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power will be described.

From timing t1 to timing t2, as shown in FIG. 170(a), the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power is executed. Then, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the processing after the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the setting process of the checking counter at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing t2. As a result, check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128(b)). Since the processing for progressing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be played while the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . After that, at the timing of t3, the initial check period ends as shown in FIG. 170(c). As a result, display of the base value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .

Next, the case where the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power will be described.

At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 170(a), the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power is started. Then, the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed as shown in FIG. 170(d) from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 170(e), the setting updating display period extends from timing t5 to timing t6.

After that, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the processing after the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the setting process of the checking counter at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing of t6. As a result, check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128(b)). Since the processing for progressing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be played while the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . After that, at timing t7, the initial check period ends as shown in FIG. 170(c). As a result, display of the base value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .

Next, the case where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power will be described.

At the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 170(a), the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power is started. Then, from timing t9 to timing t10, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed as shown in FIG. 170(f). In this case, as shown in FIG. 170(g), the setting confirmation display period extends from timing t9 to timing t10.

After that, at timing t10, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the processing after the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the checking counter setting process at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing of t10. As a result, check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128(b)). Since the processing for progressing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be played while the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . After that, at the timing of t11, the initial check period ends as shown in FIG. 170(c). As a result, display of the base value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is started after the main CPU 63 completes the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power and before the start of the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128). As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed.

Further, while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power, the initial check period is started after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. As a result, even if check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, it is possible not to affect the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Next, when the power failure process is executed while the set value update process (FIG. 167) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, the contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 165) when the supply of operating power is resumed will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

First, the details of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 165) when the supply of operating power is resumed when the power failure processing is executed in a situation where neither the set value update processing (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) are executed will be described.

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the "no operation" situation, none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are executed in the main process (FIG. 165). Further, when the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "RAM clearing operation" has been performed, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed in the main process (Fig. 165), while the set value update process (Fig. 167) and the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting change operation" has been performed, the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed in the main process (FIG. 165), while the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the main process (FIG. 165), while the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) and the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) are not executed.

Next, when the power failure process is executed while the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed (i.e., the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the details of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 165) when the supply of operating power is resumed afterward will be described.

Regardless of whether the supply of operating power is restarted under the condition of “no operation”, when the supply of operating power is restarted under the condition of “RAM clear operation”, when the supply of operating power is restarted under the condition of “setting change operation”, or when the supply of operating power is restarted under the condition of “setting confirmation operation”, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the main process (FIG. 165), but the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed. In other words, when the power failure process is executed while the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the set value update process (FIG. 167) is newly started regardless of the operation details when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter.

With the above configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) can be newly started regardless of the operation contents of the setting key insertion part 68a and the reset button 68c when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This makes it possible to reliably generate an opportunity to complete the update of the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started even though the update of the setting value is not completed.

Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is uniquely executed regardless of the operation content when resuming the supply of operating power. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration compared to the configuration in which the content of the processing to be executed is changed according to the content of each operation.

Next, when the power failure process is executed while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed (i.e., the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the details of the processing executed in the main process (FIG. 165) when the supply of operating power is resumed afterward will be described.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "RAM clearing operation" has been performed, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed in the main process (Fig. 165), while the set value update process (Fig. 167) and the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) are not executed. That is, even if the power failure process is executed while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, if the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed without newly executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) with respect to the "RAM clearing operation". The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the first RAM clearing process (step SB117).

When the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where the "setting change operation" has been performed, the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed in the main process (FIG. 165), but the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed. That is, even if the power failure process is executed while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, if the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed without newly executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the set value update process (FIG. 167) for the "setting change operation". In addition, even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed in this way, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed so that the setting value to be updated is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and the information of the setting value to be updated at that time is set in the setting reference area 341 at the end of the setting value update process (FIG. 167), so that the manager of the game hall can confirm the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) in the setting value updating process (FIG. 167).

When the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, in the main process (FIG. 165), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed on the condition that no abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, checksum and setting value. As a result, even if the power failure process is executed during the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), it is possible to restart the confirmation of the setting value by performing the "setting confirmation operation" when the supply of operating power is restarted.

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the state of "no operation", the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is not ON-operated on the condition that no abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, checksum and setting value in the main process (FIG. 165). As a result, even if the power failure processing is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the supply of operating power is resumed after that, even if there is no operation, confirmation of the setting value can be restarted.

Next, processing executed by the sound emission control device 81 will be described. Prior to the description of the processing, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 81 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

The sound emission control device 81 has a sound emission control board 351 . A sound and light side MPU 352 is mounted on the sound emission control board 351 . The sound and light side MPU 352 incorporates a sound and light side ROM 354 and a sound and light side RAM 355 in addition to a sound and light side CPU 353 which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section. In addition to the elements described above, the sound and light side MPU 352 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The sound and light side ROM 354 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside to hold data such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The sound and light side ROM 354 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the sound and light side CPU 353 .

The sound and light side RAM 355 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold data, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound and light side RAM 355 can be randomly accessed, and has a shorter time required for reading than the sound and light side ROM 354 when compared with the same data capacity. The sound and light side RAM 355 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the sound and light side ROM 354 .

An RTC 356 and an RTC memory 357 are mounted on the sound emission control board 351 in addition to the sound and light side MPU 352 . The RTC 356 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date information and time information, and can output the measured date information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date and time information) in accordance with instructions from the sound and light side CPU 353. In addition, the RTC 356 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Also, the RTC 356 is not limited to the configuration in which date and time information is measured, and may be configured to measure only time information.

The RTC memory 357 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold data, and is used for both reading and writing. The date and time information of the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357 according to the instruction from the sound and light side CPU 353 . The date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is read out by the sound and light side CPU 353 as required. A sound and light side CPU 353 grasps a reference time based on date and time information stored in a memory 357 for RTC, and executes processing for executing a performance corresponding to time each time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses with the reference time as a reference. The RTC memory 357 is configured to be supplied with backup power from a backup power supply provided for the RTC 356, so that the date and time information is stored and retained even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. However, it is not limited to this, and the RTC memory 357 may be an EEPROM or the like that does not require power supply from the outside to store and hold information.

Next, the effect control processing executed by the sound and light side CPU 353 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. It should be noted that the effect control process is executed when the supply of operating power to the sound and light side CPU 353 is started.

If an update start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SB401: YES), setting processing for update notification is executed (step SB402). The update start command is transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started by the main side CPU 63 as already described. In the updating notification setting process, the display control device 82 is controlled so that the symbol display device 41 displays an image indicating that the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the set value, and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for ending the set value update process (FIG. 167). As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and to recognize the operation content necessary to change the setting value and the operation content necessary to end the setting value update process (FIG. 167). In addition to or instead of the notification being performed by the pattern display device 41, at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 may be configured to perform the notification.

If the confirmation start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SB403: YES), the process of setting notification at the time of confirmation is executed (step SB404). The confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is started by the main side CPU 63 as already explained. In the setting processing of notification at the time of confirmation, the display control device 82 is controlled so that an image indicating that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is being executed and an image for recognizing the operation content for ending the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) are displayed on the pattern display device 41. As a result, the manager of the game hall can recognize that the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed, and the manager of the game hall can recognize the operation contents required to end the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166). In addition to or instead of the notification being performed by the pattern display device 41, at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 may be configured to perform the notification.

When the processing of steps SB401 to SB404 is executed, it is determined whether or not any of the normal return command, clear return command, confirmation return command, and update return command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB405). The normal return command is sent when the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122) ends without any of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), and setting value update process (FIG. 167) being executed. The return command for clearing is transmitted when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed and the process for starting supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. The return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed and the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. The return command at the time of update is transmitted when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed and the process at the time of starting supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed.

If these return commands have not been received (step SB405: NO), the process returns to step SB401. The main side CPU 63 transmits one of the return commands to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power ends. In this case, as described above, the sound and light side CPU 353 does not execute the processing after step SB406 until it receives any return command from the main side CPU 63 . As a result, while the main side CPU 63 is executing the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the sound and light side CPU 353 can prevent the execution control of the normal effect from being started.

Also, in a situation where no return command has been received, there is a possibility that an update start command or a confirmation start command will be received from the main CPU 63. When the update start command is received, it is necessary to notify that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) will be executed as already described, and if the confirmation start command is received, it is necessary to notify that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) will be executed as already described. In this case, the sound and light side CPU 353 does not execute the processing after step SB406 until it receives any return command from the main side CPU 63, so that when an update start command or a confirmation start command is received, it is possible to suitably start notification corresponding to it.

If any return command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB405: YES), it is determined whether or not the received return command is a normal return command (step SB406). As already described, the normal return command is transmitted when the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ends without any of the first RAM clearing processing (step SB117), setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166), and setting value update processing (FIG. 167) being executed. When the normal return command is received (step SB406: YES), the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read, and the read date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). As a result, the RTC memory 357 stores the date and time information that serves as a reference when specifying the timing for executing the time-based effect.

If the return command received this time is not the normal return command (step SB406: NO) but is the return command at the time of update (step SB408: YES), end processing of the notification at the time of update is executed (step SB409). The return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is terminated by the main side CPU 63 as already described. In the end processing of the update notification, the notification corresponding to the set value update processing (FIG. 167) started in step SB402 is ended.

If the return command received this time is not a return command for updating (step SB408: NO) but a return command for confirmation (step SB410: YES), end processing of notification for confirmation is executed (step SB411). The return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is terminated by the main side CPU 63 as already described. In the end processing of notification at confirmation, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) started at step SB404 is terminated.

When the process of step SB407 is executed, when the process of step SB409 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step SB410, or when the process of step SB411 is executed, a process for performing normal performance execution control is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the time-based effect (step SB412).

The time-based effect is a effect that is executed each time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses based on the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 . In the performance corresponding to time, a light emitting performance corresponding to the performance corresponding to time is performed in a display light emitting part 53, a sound output performance corresponding to the performance corresponding to time is performed in a speaker part 54, and a display performance corresponding to the performance corresponding to time is performed in a pattern display device 41. - 特許庁

When the performance corresponding to the time is started in the state that the performance for the game round is executed, the display light emitting part 53 and the speaker part 54 execute the performance corresponding to the time with priority over the performance for the game round, while the image display corresponding to the performance for the game round is displayed in a reduced size on a part of the display surface of the pattern display device 41, and the image display corresponding to the performance corresponding to the time is performed. In addition, when the performance corresponding to time is started under the condition that the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the performance corresponding to time is executed with priority over the performance for the opening/closing execution mode in the display light emitting part 53 and the speaker part 54, while the image display corresponding to the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is displayed in reduced size on a part of the display surface of the pattern display device 41, and the image display corresponding to the performance corresponding to the time is performed in the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁

By adopting a configuration in which the performance corresponding to the time is executed each time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) passes with reference to the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the memory 357 for RTC, the performance corresponding to the time can be simultaneously started in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 adjacent to each other in the game hall if the reference times of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 match. In addition, since the power of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is turned on at the same time in the game hall, the reference times of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 basically match.

At step SB412, the reference time is grasped based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. FIG. Also, the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the difference between the reference time and the time corresponding to the current date and time information read from the RTC 356 is an integral multiple of the predetermined time. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB412, setting processing for time-based effects is executed (step SB413). In the setting processing of the performance corresponding to time, the display light emitting part 53 and the speaker part 54 are set to execute the performance corresponding to time, and a command for executing the performance corresponding to time in the pattern display device 41 is transmitted to the display control device 82.例文帳に追加It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the content of execution of the time-based presentation differs according to the number of times of execution of the time-based presentation when the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is used as a reference.

If a negative determination is made in step SB412 or if the processing of step SB413 is executed, other processing is executed (step SB414). In the other processing, when a command to start the game round effect is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are set to start the game round effect, and when the situation is to proceed with the game round effect, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are set to proceed with the game round effect, and when the situation is to end the game round effect. 4, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are set to end the effect for the game cycle. In the other processing, when a command to start the opening/closing execution mode effect is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are set to start the opening/closing execution mode effect, and when the situation is such that the opening/closing execution mode effect should be advanced, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are set to proceed with the opening/closing execution mode effect, and in the situation to end the opening/closing execution mode effect. In some cases, settings are made in the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to end the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the operation corresponding to the contents of the processing executed in the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

If no one is performed in the processing (step SB101 -step SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power on the CPU63, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) and the setting value update (Fig. 167) are not executed (Starting). When the up SB101 -Step SB122) is terminated, the main CPU63 usually sends a return command to the sound light CPU353. When the sound/light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command, it does not execute the control related to the notification. On the other hand, when the sound/light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command, it stores the current date/time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357 . As a result, the RTC memory 357 newly stores the information corresponding to the reference time referred to for specifying the timing of execution of the time-based effect.

When the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed in the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122) in the main side CPU 63, the main side CPU 63 transmits a clear return command to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122) ends. When the sound/light side CPU 353 receives the return command for clearing, it does not execute the control related to the notification. Further, the sound/light side CPU 353 does not store the current date/time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357 even if the return command for clearing is received. Since power for backup is supplied to the memory 357 for RTC, the date and time information stored in the memory 357 for RTC before the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off is stored and held as it is when the new storage of the date and time information in the memory 357 for RTC does not occur.

When the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command at the time of update to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ends. When the sound/light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of updating, it terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting value updating process (FIG. 167). Further, even if the sound/light side CPU 353 receives the update return command, it does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357 . Since power for backup is supplied to the memory 357 for RTC, the date and time information stored in the memory 357 for RTC before the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off is stored and held as it is when the new storage of the date and time information in the memory 357 for RTC does not occur.

When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122) in the main side CPU 63, the main side CPU 63 transmits a confirmation return command to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the operation power supply start process (steps SB101 to SB122) ends. When the sound/light side CPU 353 receives the confirmation return command, it terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). Further, the sound/light side CPU 353 does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357 even if it receives the confirmation return command. Since power for backup is supplied to the memory 357 for RTC, the date and time information stored in the memory 357 for RTC before the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off is stored and held as it is when the new storage of the date and time information in the memory 357 for RTC does not occur.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value is changed from the predetermined starting setting value. As a result, in the setting value update process (FIG. 167), regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, it is possible to change the setting value from a certain starting setting value. Therefore, it becomes easy for the operator to understand the work content of the setting value changing operation.

Specifically, the set value corresponding to the start is "setting 1", which has the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value is changed from "setting 1" with the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally terminates the set value update process (FIG. 167) immediately after the start of the set value update process (FIG. 167), the set value has the lowest advantage, so even if the game is started in such a situation, it is possible to prevent unintended disadvantages from occurring in the game hall.

The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. Information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed while the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, it is possible to change the setting value to be updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 167) while storing and holding the information of the setting value set before the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started in the setting reference area 341.

When the supply of operating power is started, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command at the time of clearing when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed, transmits a return command at the time of updating when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, and transmits a return command at the time of confirmation when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. 66) is not executed, a normal return command is sent. As a result, it becomes possible not only for the main side CPU 63 but also for the sound and light side CPU 353 to perform control corresponding to the type of start situation when the supply of operating power is started.

Even if the sound and light side CPU 353 receives any of the normal return command, the return command at the time of clearing, the return command at the time of updating, and the return command at the time of confirmation, the affirmative determination is made in step SB405 of the effect control processing (FIG. 173), and the processing of steps SB412 to SB414 is executed. On the other hand, when the normal return command is received, write processing to the RTC memory 357 (step SB407) is executed, when the return command at the time of update is received, the end processing of the notification at update (step SB409) is executed, when the return command at the time of confirmation is received, the end processing of the notification at the time of confirmation (step SB411) is executed, and when the return command at the time of clear is received, the dedicated processing is not executed. As a result, the control corresponding to each return command can be executed by the sound and light side CPU 353 while the processing corresponding to the progress of the game is started by the sound and light side CPU 353 with the reception of any one of the return commands as a trigger.

After transmitting any of the return commands, the main side CPU 63 ends the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) for starting the supply of operating power, and starts processing (steps S8907 to S8920) for controlling the progress of the game. As a result, after the main side CPU 63 comes to a situation where the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed, the sound and light side CPU 353 can perform the execution control of the performance corresponding to the content of the progress of the game. In this case, the sound and light side CPU 353 executes processing corresponding to each return command. As a result, the sound and light side CPU 353 can be made to recognize the trigger for starting the execution control of the performance corresponding to the progress of the game by using a plurality of return commands for differentiating the execution contents of the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the sound and light side CPU 353.例文帳に追加

Since the performance corresponding to the time is executed when the execution timing of the performance corresponding to the time comes based on the date and time information stored in the memory 357 for RTC, the performance corresponding to the time can be executed at the timing when the predetermined time comes. In this case, if the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, no new storage of the date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, while none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. If not, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357 . Thus, it is possible to create a situation in which date and time information is newly stored in the memory 357 for RTC and a situation in which date and time information is not newly stored in the memory 357 for RTC according to the contents of processing executed by the main CPU 63 when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed when the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is executed when the "setting change operation" is performed, and the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) is executed when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed. On the other hand, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the "no operation" situation, none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), setting value updating process (FIG. 167) and setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are executed. In this case, if the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started as described above, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 does not occur. is not executed, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357 . Thus, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the manager of the game hall can select whether the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 or not.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is started after the main CPU 63 completes the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of operating power and before the start of the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128). As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed.

The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process (steps SB101 to SB122) when the supply of operating power is started, whereas the initial check period is started after the process when the supply of the operating power is started is completed. As a result, even if check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, it is possible not to affect the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, and even if neither the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) nor the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to check whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

In the main processing (FIG. 165) of the main CPU 63, either the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, or the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is not executed. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167), the process for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set. By setting the processing for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a common processing in this way, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while simplifying the processing configuration.

Even when the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are performing the check display, the main CPU 63 can start the processing for advancing the game. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the start timing of the process for advancing the game can be prevented from being delayed.

In the operation power supply start processing (steps SB101 to SB122) executed when the supply of operation power is started in the main CPU 63, a process for monitoring whether or not the set value to be used is within a normal range is executed. Then, when the set value to be used is abnormal, a regulation state is entered in which the processing for progressing the game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being started even though the set value to be used is abnormal.

The process for monitoring whether the set value to be used is within the normal range is executed in step S8919 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) even after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ends. As a result, even if the set value to be used becomes abnormal in the process of progressing the game, it is possible to deal with it.

In the operation power supply start processing (steps SB101 to SB122) which is executed when the supply of the operating power is started in the main CPU 63, not only is it monitored whether the set value to be used is within a normal range, but also whether the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" is executed, and the checksum of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is normal. . Then, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" or if the checksum is abnormal, a regulation state is entered in which the processing for advancing the game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being started even though an information error has occurred in the main RAM 65 .

Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the restricted state is resumed when the supply of operating power is resumed. As a result, the state in which the execution of the processing for progressing the game is restricted due to the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main side RAM 65 can be prevented from being released only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

The restricted state is released by executing the set value update process (FIG. 167). As a result, when the state in which the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of an information abnormality in the main RAM 65 is released, it is possible to set a new set value to be used.

Even in the restricted state, power failure monitoring and various counter updating processes are executed. As a result, it is possible to ensure the execution of the necessary processing even in the state where the progress of the game is restricted as described above. In particular, by executing power outage monitoring, it is possible to appropriately deal with power outages in the event that power outages occur even when the progress of the game is being regulated.

When the restricted state is reached, it is notified that the set value to be used should be changed. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to eliminate it.

When an information abnormality occurs with respect to the main side RAM 65, an abnormality signal is externally output toward the management computer of the game hall. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to eliminate it.

An abnormality signal is externally output toward the management computer of the game hall also when an abnormality different from the information abnormality occurs regarding the main side RAM 65 occurs. This makes it possible to share the configuration for external output.

Even if the supply of operating power to a main side CPU 63 is stopped in a regulated state in which the progress of a game is regulated due to the occurrence of an information abnormality in a main side RAM 65, when the supply of operating power is restarted and the regulated state is not yet released, an abnormality signal is output to the outside again. As a result, in the regulated state, an abnormal signal is output to the outside every time the supply of operating power is restarted. Therefore, it becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to recognize that an information abnormality has occurred with respect to the main side RAM 65 .

In the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) when the supply of operating power is started, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are prohibited when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are not executed. Execution of 2 timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is permitted. When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is prevented from interrupting and starting the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of the operating power, so that the process at the start of supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) can be completed early.

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed, the process corresponding to the operation of the manager of the game hall is executed, so the period of staying in these processes becomes longer. In this case, even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, if the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is still disabled, the execution start timing of the timer interrupt process will be extremely delayed. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution start timing of timer interrupt processing from being extremely delayed. In addition, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) for performing display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is interrupted and executed, so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can display the setting values using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In addition, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the start-up flag is set to "1". Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) are executed, while the processes for progressing the game are not executed.

If none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are executed, date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357. If any one of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), setting value update process (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357. is not limited to a configuration in which For example, if none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are executed, or if the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed, the date and time information may be newly stored in the RTC memory 357. Further, when none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are executed, or when the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed, the date and time information may be newly stored in the RTC memory 357. Further, when none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are executed, or when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the date and time information may be newly stored in the RTC memory 357.

Further, when none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are executed, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the date and time information may be newly stored in the RTC memory 357. Further, if none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are executed, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed, or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the date and time information may be newly stored in the RTC memory 357. Further, if none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are executed, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed, or the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed, the date and time information may be newly stored in the RTC memory 357.

Further, when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed, the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357, and in other cases, the date and time information is not newly stored in the RTC memory 357. Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may occur, and in other cases, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may not occur. Also, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may occur, and in other cases, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may not occur. In addition, when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) or the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may occur, and in other cases, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may not occur. If the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357, and in other cases, the date and time information is not newly stored in the RTC memory 357. Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may occur, and in other cases, the configuration may be such that new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 does not occur.

In addition, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, all areas of the specific control work area 221 including the setting reference area 341 and the setting update area 342 may be cleared to "0" and initialized in the initial setting at the start (step SB303). In this case, the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) may not be executed in the set value updating process (FIG. 167).

Further, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value may be changed from a predetermined setting value other than "setting 1". For example, it may be configured to start changing the setting value from "Setting 2", may be configured to start changing the setting value from "Setting 3", may be configured to start changing the setting value from "Setting 4", may be configured to start changing the setting value from "Setting 5", or may be configured to start changing the setting value from "Setting 6".

Further, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 may be overwritten in the setting update area 342 as in the forty-fifth embodiment, thereby starting to change the setting value from the setting value set to be used until then.

Further, the processing for transmitting various return commands in the main processing (FIG. 165) may be set as processing before the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is started. In this case, when any one of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, a flag corresponding to it is set, and in the process for transmitting the various recovery commands, a recovery command corresponding to the state of the flag may be sent to the sound and light side CPU 353.

In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the time corresponding performance is executed each time a predetermined time elapses based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, it may be configured to monitor whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred each time a predetermined time elapses based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, or to notify the base value each time a predetermined time elapses based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. In this case, the RTC 356 and the RTC memory 357 may be provided on the main control board 61, and the main CPU 63 may perform the abnormality monitoring or the notification of the base value. A plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in a game hall are simultaneously monitored for abnormality, and the results are notified by, for example, a pattern display device 41 or the like, so that the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be periodically monitored collectively to determine whether or not a prescribed abnormality occurs. In addition, the pattern display device 41 or the like simultaneously notifies the base values of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 set in the game hall, so that the base values can be periodically monitored for the plurality of pachinko machines 10 collectively. Note that the various notifications described above are not limited to being performed by the pachinko machine 10 itself, and may be configured to be performed by external output to the management computer of the game hall.

Further, if it is determined in the main process (FIG. 165) that the power failure flag is not set to "1", if it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, or if it is determined that the setting value in the setting reference area 341 is abnormal, the setting value update process (FIG. 165) may be forcibly executed regardless of whether or not the "setting change operation" is performed. As a result, it is possible to immediately change the set value when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65 .

<Fiftieth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the effect control processing executed by the sound and light side CPU 353 is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing effect control processing in this embodiment executed by the sound and light side CPU 353 .

At steps SB501 to SB505, the same processes as steps SB401 to SB405 of the effect control process (FIG. 173) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed. When any one of the normal return command, the return command for clear, the return command for confirmation, and the return command for update is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB505: YES), it is determined whether or not the return command received this time is a return command other than the normal return command (step SB506).

If the return command received this time is one of the return command at the time of clearing, the return command at the time of confirmation, and the return command at the time of update (step SB506: YES), the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read out, and the read date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). As a result, the RTC memory 357 stores the date and time information that serves as a reference when specifying the timing for executing the time-based effect.

At steps SB508 to SB514, the same processes as steps SB408 to SB414 of the effect control process (FIG. 173) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed.

FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the action corresponding to the contents of the processing executed in the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG.

As in the forty-ninth embodiment, when none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) when the main CPU 63 starts supplying the operating power, the main CPU 63 transmits a normal return command to the sound and light side CPU 353, and the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed. If so, the main CPU 63 sends a return command for clearing to the sound and light CPU 353. If the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the main CPU 63 sends a return command for updating to the sound and light side CPU 353. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the main CPU 63 sends a return command for confirmation to the sound and light side CPU 353.

As in the forty-ninth embodiment, the sound and light side CPU 353 terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 167) when the return command for updating is received, and terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) when the return command for confirmation is received. Further, even if the sound/light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command and the return command for clearing, as in the forty-ninth embodiment, it does not execute the control related to the notification.

The sound and light side CPU 353 stores the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357 when any one of the return command for clearing, the return command for updating, and the return command for confirmation is received. As a result, the RTC memory 357 newly stores the information corresponding to the reference time referred to for specifying the timing of execution of the time-based effect. On the other hand, the sound/light side CPU 353 does not store the current date/time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357 even if the normal return command is received. Since power for backup is supplied to the memory 357 for RTC, the date and time information stored in the memory 357 for RTC before the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off is stored and retained as it is when the new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 for RTC does not occur.

According to the above configuration, when any one of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) when the supply of operating power is started, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is rewritten to the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356. B122), if none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are executed, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is not rewritten. Thus, even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off for maintenance or operation check of the pachinko machine 10 during the operation of the game hall, the date and time information stored in the memory 357 for RTC can be prevented from being rewritten by turning on the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 in the state of "no operation" when resuming the supply of operation power thereafter. Therefore, when restarting the supply of operating power after turning off the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 once during the business of the game hall, it is possible to enhance the operability for restarting the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while making the reference time of the performance corresponding to the time the same among the surrounding pachinko machines 10 in the game hall.

In addition, since the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is not rewritten by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the "no operation" situation, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on so that the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is not rewritten, unintended processing such as the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), the setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) are executed. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

<Fifty-first Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . It should be noted that the processing of steps SB601 to SB630 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63 .

Steps SB601 to SB622 execute the same processes as steps SB101 to SB122 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

When the process of step SB612 is performed, when the process of step SB613 is performed, when the process of step SB615 is performed, when the process of step SB618 is performed, or when the process of step SB622 is performed, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB623). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is started after the main CPU 63 completes the processing (steps SB601 to SB622) at the start of the supply of operating power and before the start of the remaining processing (steps SB627 to SB630). As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed.

Further, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process (steps SB601 to SB622) at the start of supply of operating power, whereas the initial check period is started after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. As a result, even if the check display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not affected.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB624). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. When the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started, the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is controlled so that the check display is performed in the situation where the value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the checking counter in the specific control work area 221 is "0" (step SB625). Then, it waits in step SB625 until the value of the checking counter becomes "0". In this case, since the state in which "1" is set to the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processing of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is executed, but the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game. Therefore, until the initial check period set at step SB623 elapses, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB626). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up process flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906 to execute not only the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 but also the processes of steps S8907 to S8920, thereby canceling the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed. At step SB626, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

After that, the remaining processing of steps SB627 to SB630 is performed. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134), but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but such irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining process of steps SB627 to SB630. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps SB627 to SB630 are non-periodic processes that are executed non-periodically. In steps SB627 to SB630, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

According to the above configuration, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the execution of the processing for progressing the game is blocked. As a result, it is possible to check whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal under a situation where no game is played.

<Fifty-Second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . It should be noted that the processing of steps SB701 to SB734 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63 .

Unlike the forty-ninth embodiment, the power-on initialization process is not executed in the main process of this embodiment. Therefore, when the main process is started, the processes after step SB701 are started without waiting for the predetermined wait time to elapse. Although the power-on initialization process is not executed, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted when the main process is started.

In the main process, first, the internal function register setting process is executed (step SB701) in the same manner as in step SB102 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment. After that, on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1", the checksum is normal, the set value is normal, and the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1" (step SB703 to step SB705: YES, step SB706: NO), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB707).

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB707: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB708). If the game stop flag is not set to "1" and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SB708: NO, step SB709: YES), or if the game stop flag is not set to "1" and the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned ON using the setting key but the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB708) and step SB709: NO, step SB710: YES), and a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB711). In the setting confirmation process, steps SB201 to SB202 and steps SB204 to SB207 in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed.

In other words, the confirmation start command is not transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 353 in the setting confirmation processing of this embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the setting confirmation process is executed, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process is not executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. FIG. In this embodiment, as already explained, when the main process is started, the processes after step SB701 are started without waiting for the predetermined time for waiting to pass, so there is a possibility that the operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are not completed at the timing when the setting confirmation process is started. On the other hand, by preventing the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation processing from being executed by the pattern display device 41 as described above, it is possible to prevent the display control of the pattern display device 41 from being started in a situation where the initial setting is not completed. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process is performed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 but not by the pattern display device 41 .

After executing the setting confirmation process, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SB712). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. That is, when the setting confirmation process is executed in the process (steps SB701 to SB729) when the supply of operating power is started, after the setting confirmation process ends, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start the check display, and the check display is performed in a state where the progress of the process is not waiting.

When the reset button 68c is not pressed, the game stop flag is not set to "1", and the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned on using the setting key, and the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" (steps SB707 to SB710: NO), information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is stored in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control. set (step SB713). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB714). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. When the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started, the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is controlled so that the check display is performed in the situation where the value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter.

Thereafter, wait processing is executed (step SB715). The wait process waits until the value of the checking counter in the work area 221 for specific control becomes "0". In this case, since the state in which "1" is set to the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processing of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is executed, but the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game. Therefore, until the initial check period set at step SB713 elapses, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked. In addition, the operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed during the waiting time in the wait process. In other words, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can perform the check display by using the wait period for preventing the execution of the processing for progressing the game until the operation start and the initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed. After the wait process (step SB715) is completed, the normal return command is transmitted to the sound/light side CPU 353 (step SB716) in the same manner as in step SB113 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (steps SB707 and SB717: YES), set value update processing is executed (step SB718). Also, regardless of whether or not the "setting change operation" as described above is performed, if the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB706: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step SB717). In the set value update process, steps SB301 to SB304 and steps SB306 to SB314 in the set value update process (FIG. 167) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed.

In other words, the update start command is not transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 353 in the set value update process of this embodiment. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the set value update process is executed, the notification corresponding to the set value update process is not executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. FIG. In this embodiment, as already explained, when the main process is started, the processes after step SB701 are started without waiting for the predetermined time for waiting to pass, so there is a possibility that the operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are not completed at the timing when the set value update process is started. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the display control of the pattern display device 41 from being started in a situation where the initial setting is not completed by preventing the pattern display device 41 from executing the notification corresponding to the set value update processing as described above. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which notification corresponding to the set value update processing is performed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 but not by the pattern display device 41 .

After executing the setting value updating process, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SB719). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. That is, when the set value update process is executed in the process (steps SB701 to SB729) when the supply of operating power is started, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the set value update process is completed, and the check display is performed in a state where the progress of the process is not waiting.

While the reset button 68c is pressed, if the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned ON (step SB707: YES, step SB717: NO), on condition that the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" (step SB720: NO), the first RAM clearing process is executed (step SB721). The processing contents of the first RAM clear processing are the same as the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

Thereafter, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SB722). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB723). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. When the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started, the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is controlled so that the check display is performed in the situation where the value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter.

Thereafter, wait processing is executed (step SB724). The wait process waits until the value of the checking counter in the work area 221 for specific control becomes "0". In this case, since the state in which "1" is set to the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processing of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is executed, but the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game. Therefore, until the initial check period set at step SB722 elapses, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the execution of the processing for advancing the game is blocked. In addition, the operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed during the waiting time in the wait process. In other words, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can perform the check display by using the wait period for preventing the execution of the processing for progressing the game until the operation start and the initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed. After the wait process (step SB724) is completed, a return command for clearing is sent to the sound/light side CPU 353 (step SB725) in the same manner as in step SB118 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps SB703 to SB705, after setting "1" to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB726), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB727). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON by using the setting key (steps SB717 and SB727: YES), a set value update process is executed in step SB718, and a checking counter setting process is executed in step SB719. The contents of these processes have already been explained.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB727: NO), if it is determined that the game stop flag is set to "1" at step SB720, or if it is determined that the game stop flag is set to "1" at step SB708, the processing of steps SB728 and SB729 is executed. The processing contents of these steps SB728 and SB729 are the same as steps SB121 and SB122 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

When the process of step SB712 is executed, when the process of step SB716 is executed, when the process of step SB719 is executed, when the process of step SB725 is executed, or when the process of step SB729 is executed, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB730). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up process flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906 to execute not only the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 but also the processes of steps S8907 to S8920, thereby canceling the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed. In step SB730, the power failure flag in work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

After that, the remaining processing of steps SB731 to SB734 is performed. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134), but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, such irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining process of steps SB731 to SB734. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps SB731 to SB734 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps SB731 to SB734, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

According to the above configuration, when the setting confirmation process (step SB711) and the setting value update process (step SB718) are not executed in the process (step SB701 to step SB729) when the supply of operating power is started, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the state of waiting for the progress of the process in the wait process. As a result, it is possible to perform the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by utilizing the wait period for preventing the execution of the processing for progressing the game until the operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed. In addition, it is possible to secure an opportunity to confirm the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 before the processing for progressing the game is started.

On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) does not end unless at least the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF by the manager of the game hall. Therefore, by the time the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is ended, the time required for starting the operation of the pattern display device 41 and completing the initial setting has passed. In this case, when the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is executed, the wait process is not executed, so that the time required until the process for advancing the game is started when the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is executed can be prevented from becoming excessively long.

Further, when the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is executed, after the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is completed, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, it is possible to perform check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 while not affecting the display of the set values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

<Fifty-third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . It should be noted that the processing of steps SB801 to SB826 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63 .

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step SB801). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during this predetermined waiting period. Also, access to the main side RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SB802). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that periodically interrupts the main process and is activated, is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is the process that is periodically interrupted and activated to the main process, is set to a second interrupt period (specifically, 2 milliseconds) that is shorter than the first interrupt period.

In other words, in the present embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are provided so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long and short as the timer interrupt processing. Both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are started by interrupting the main processing. Also, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) and is not activated. Also, if both the first interrupt period and the second interrupt period have passed in a situation where neither the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) nor the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) are being executed, the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) is started first regardless of the order in which those periods have elapsed. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be started with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt periods, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1, for example, is executed.

After that, "1" is set to the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB803). As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the start-up processing flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, the main CPU 63 should end the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) without executing the process for progressing the game while executing the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133).

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) is started in the main processing (FIG. 165), and is cleared to "0" before the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed and the remaining processing (steps SB819 to SB822) is started. As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), if the start-up flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed, thereby setting confirmation processing (step SB810) or setting value update processing (FIG. 181) among the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826). is being executed, it is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), even if the startup process flag is set to "1", by executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905, the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value update process (FIG. 181), which will be described later, among the processes (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of supply of operating power are executed. Even so, power failure monitoring is executed, and the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is executed.

In particular, even if the "1" is set in the flag during the startup processing, the processing of the settings described (Steps SB826) is described in the processing (step SB801 -step SB818, Step SB826), as the power outage information memory processing (step S8901) is executed. B810) or even if a power outage occurs in the situation where the set value update processing (FIG. 181) is executed, the power outage processing can be executed. In the power failure process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181), it is possible to identify that the power failure occurred during these setting-related processes at the next start of supply of operating power.

Incidentally, when the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are not prohibited from being interrupted and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181), the information of the return address of the main process (FIG. 179) for returning after the timer interrupt process to be started is completed is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and various types of the main CPU 63 immediately before the timer interrupt process is started Register information is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be activated ends, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 179) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

After setting "1" to the startup processing flag at step SB803, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB804). When power failure processing is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the power failure flag is set to "1". The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power failure process was appropriately performed at the time of the previous power failure.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step SB804: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step SB805). Specifically, first, checksums are calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. The checksum calculation method is the same as in the thirty-third embodiment. After that, the checksum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 calculated in the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the current main processing. Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match.

If the checksums match (step SB805: YES), it is determined whether the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 is within the normal range (step SB806). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area for storing information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main side CPU 63 as in the forty-fifth embodiment. When the numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". When the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". When the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". When numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". When the numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6". At step SB806, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is one of "1" to "6".

If all of steps SB804 to SB806 are affirmative, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB807). That is, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started by performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 68c is being pressed. Here, in this embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with the setting key inserting portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main controller 60 is provided with the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c as in the eleventh embodiment.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB807: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag or setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB808).

The game stop flag is set to "1" when the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksum does not match, or the set value is abnormal. By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8906. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, if the checksum does not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 since the previous power failure, or if the set value is abnormal, the process for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but the process for advancing the game is not performed. become.

As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the setting update display flag is a flag for specifying that the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed by the main CPU 63. When the setting update display flag is set to "1", a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a setting value being updated are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The setting update display flag is set to "1" when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, and is cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is terminated. However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the setting update display flag will be set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started. The state in which the setting update display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process (FIG. 181).

If the game stop flag and the setting update display flag are not set to "1" and a negative determination is made in step SB808, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB809). If the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB809: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB810). The contents of the setting confirmation process are the same as those of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the forty-ninth embodiment. In this embodiment, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation process is not executed unless the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operation power is restarted.

If the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned on using the setting key (step SB809: NO), the normal return command is sent to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB811). The contents of processing executed by the sound emission control device 81 when the normal return command is received are the same as those of the forty-ninth embodiment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and if it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned on using the setting key (steps SB807 and SB812: YES), set value update processing is executed (step SB813). That is, in the present embodiment, even if the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the setting value update process is not executed unless the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Details of the set value update process will be described later.

When it is determined at step SB807 that the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on using the setting key (step SB812: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag or setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB814).

When "1" is not set to both the game stop flag and the setting update display flag (step SB814: NO), first RAM clear processing is executed (step SB815). In the first RAM clear process, similarly to the RAM clear process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed except for the area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221 (that is, the setting reference area 341). As a result, the area indicating whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display part 38a is not variably displayed and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general electricity reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the reservation information for the general figure display unit 38a is erased. Also, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". Also, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, in the first RAM clear processing, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial setting is executed. In addition, in the first RAM clearing process, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing of step SB802 is executed. For the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the processing for clearing "0" and the processing for initial setting are not executed.

Thereafter, a return command for clearing is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB816). The contents of the processing executed by the sound emission control device 81 when the return command for clearing is received are the same as those of the forty-ninth embodiment.

When the process of step SB810 is performed, when the process of step SB811 is performed, when the process of step SB813 is performed, or when the process of step SB816 is performed, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB817). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the display for checking is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is started after the main CPU 63 completes the processing (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of the supply of operating power and before the start of the remaining processing (steps SB819 to SB822). As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed.

Further, while the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the setting value update process (FIG. 181) are executed as the processes (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of supply of operating power, the initial check period is started after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. As a result, even if the check display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not affected.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB818). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up process flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906 to execute not only the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 but also the processes of steps S8907 to S8920, thereby canceling the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed. In step SB818, the power failure flag in work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

After that, the remaining processing of steps SB819 to SB822 is performed. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134), but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but such irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining process of steps SB819 to SB822. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps SB819 to SB822 are non-periodic processes that are executed non-periodically. In steps SB819 to SB822, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806 in the main process (FIG. 179), that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1", if the checksum does not match or if the set value is abnormal, the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB823). As already described, by setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8906. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, if the checksum does not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 since the previous power failure, or if the set value is abnormal, the process for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but the process for advancing the game is not performed. become.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB824). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB824: NO), an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, checksum, or set value at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB825). By receiving the abnormality command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission part 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting supply of operating power, and outputs the sound "Please change the settings" from the speaker part 54. - 特許庁Also, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the notification is resumed when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed.

After that, an external output process at the time of abnormality is executed (step SB826). In the abnormal external output process, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the signal output of the abnormality signal is continued in a situation where an event triggering the execution of the processing of step SB826 occurs, and the signal output of the abnormality signal is stopped when the event triggering the execution of the processing of step SB826 does not occur. Also, the abnormal signal is not only output in step SB826, but can also be output by other processes. For example, an abnormal signal is also output externally when it is specified that a fraudulent object to be monitored (illegal radio wave detection or fraudulent magnetism detection) has occurred in the fraud detection processing (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). However, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration in which the abnormality signal is also used, and a configuration in which an abnormality signal dedicated to step SB826 is output to the outside may be employed.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB824: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB812). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB812 and step SB824: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step SB813). That is, when operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 while the "setting change operation" is being performed, the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed even if a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806 due to the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65. This makes it possible to give priority to changing the setting value.

On the other hand, if the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned ON (step SB824: YES, step SB812: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag or setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB814). In the processing of step SB814 after the game stop flag is set to "1" at step SB823, as a matter of course, the game stop flag is set to "1", so an affirmative determination is made at step SB814. In this case, an abnormality command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 at step SB825, and an abnormality signal is output to the outside at step SB826. After that, without executing the processing of steps SB817 and SB818, the remaining processing of steps SB819 to SB822 is performed.

In other words, when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806, the first RAM clearing process (step SB815) is not executed even if the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started while the "RAM clearing operation" is being performed. Further, the first RAM clearing process (step SB815) is not executed even when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started under the condition that the game stop flag is set to "1" and the "RAM clearing operation" is being performed. Thus, even if the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started under the condition that the ``RAM clearing operation'' is performed, the state in which ``1'' is set to the game stop flag can be prevented from being canceled. On the other hand, when the "setting change operation" is performed, the set value update process (Fig. 181) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" or not, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the initial setting at the start of the set value update process (Fig. 181), details of which will be described later. As a result, it becomes necessary to execute the set value update process (FIG. 181) in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1". Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, it is possible not only to initialize the work area 221 for specific control, but also to reset the set values.

Here, when it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c is not pressed and it is determined in step SB808 that the game stop flag or setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 in step SB825, and an abnormal signal is output to the outside in step SB826. After these processes are executed, the remaining processes of steps SB819 to SB822 are performed without executing the processes of steps SB817 and SB818. Further, even when it is determined at step SB807 that the reset button 68c is being pressed and at step SB812 that the setting key insertion portion 68a is not ON-operated (i.e., when the "RAM clear operation" is performed), if the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made at step SB814, and an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 at step SB825. At step SB826, an abnormal signal is output to the outside. After these processes are executed, the remaining processes of steps SB819 to SB822 are performed without executing the processes of steps SB817 and SB818.

Next, the state of subsequent processing when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the set value update processing (FIG. 181) is being executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. Fig. 180(a) shows the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, Fig. 180(b) shows the period during which the operation power supply start process (steps SB801 to SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is executed, and Fig. 180(c) shows the operation power supply start process (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826). FIG. 180(d) shows the period during which the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed, FIG. 180(e) shows the period during which the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", FIG. indicate.

At the timing of t1, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 180(a). In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the "setting change operation" is performed. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the main CPU 63 starts the processing (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) at the time of starting the supply of operating power, and sets the start-up flag in the work area 221 for specific control to "1" as shown in FIG. 180(f).

After that, at timing t2, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started as shown in FIG. 180(d). In this case, at the timing t2, the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 180(e).

After that, as shown in FIG. 180(d), the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped by performing the power OFF operation of the pachinko machine 10 at the timing of t3, which is the situation in the middle of executing the set value update process (FIG. 181). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the processing (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of supply of operating power ends, and as shown in FIG. 180(d), the set value update processing (FIG. 181) ends.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 180(a), the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the "RAM clear operation" is performed. At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the main CPU 63 starts the processing (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of supply of operating power. Further, as shown in FIGS. 180(e) and 180(f), both the setting update display flag and the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control continue to be set to "1" from before the previous supply of operating power was stopped.

Since the pachinko machine 10 power ON operation is performed in the situation where "RAM clear operation" is performed in the situation where "1" is set to the setting update display flag this time, the first RAM clear process (step SB815) is not executed, and the abnormal signal is externally output over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) from the timing of t5 to the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 180 (g). Also, at the timing of t5, abnormality notification based on the transmission of the abnormality command is started.

As shown in FIG. 180(b), the processing (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of supply of operating power started at timing t4 ends at timing t6. Then, at the timing t6, the processing after the processing (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of supply of operating power is completed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 180(f), the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", so even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, but processing for progressing the game is not executed. After that, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 180(a), the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped by performing the power OFF operation of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Also, at the timing t8, the post-supply processing ends as shown in FIG. 180(c).

After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 180(a), the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the "setting change operation" is performed. At the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the main CPU 63 starts the processing (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of supply of operating power. Further, as shown in FIGS. 180(e) and 180(f), both the setting update display flag and the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control continue to be set to "1" from before the previous supply of operating power was stopped.

After that, the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed as shown in FIG. 180(d) over the period from timing t10 to timing t11. In this case, the set value update process (FIG. 181) ends normally. Then, at the timing of t11, which is the timing of this end, the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 180(e). Also, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the processing (steps SB801 to SB818, SB823 to SB826) at the start of supply of operating power ends. As a result, at the timing of t11, the in-startup processing flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 180(f). Then, at the timing t11, as shown in FIG. 180(c), the processing after the processing (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of supply of operating power is started. In this case, since the start-up processing flag has already been cleared to "0", when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started, not only processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring, but also processing for progressing the game is executed.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed as described above, unless the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) sends an abnormal command to the sound emission control device 81 and outputs an abnormal signal to the outside, Even if the "RAM clearing operation" is performed, the first RAM clearing process (step SB815) is not executed, and even if the "setting confirmation operation" is performed, the setting confirmation process (step SB810) is not executed. Furthermore, when the abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 and the abnormal signal is output to the outside, the processing for clearing the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control to "0" (step SB818) is not executed, and the remaining processing (steps SB819 to SB822) is executed. No processing is executed to advance the game. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, it becomes necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and execute the set value update process (FIG. 181) in the situation where the "setting change operation" is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the setting value.

Next, the setting value update process in this embodiment executed in step SB813 of the main process (FIG. 179) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processes of steps SB901 to SB918 in the set value update process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" (step SB901). The OFF confirmation flag 361 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the setting value update process (FIG. 181) in this embodiment as well, the value in the setting update area 342 of the work area 221 for specific control, ie, the setting value to be updated, is incremented by 1 each time the reset button 68c is pressed. In this case, in order to add only "1" to the set value to be updated for one press operation of the reset button 68c, when the reset button 68c changes from the non-operated state to the operated state, that is, when the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 68c switches from the non-operation detection state to the operation detection state, 1 is added to the value of the setting update area 342 to add 1 to the set value to be updated.

In this configuration, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is a flag for confirming whether or not it is time to start pressing the reset button 68c when confirming whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed in the set value update process (FIG. 181). After executing the determination processing (step SB910) as to whether or not the reset button 68c is being pressed in the set value update processing (FIG. 181), if it is determined that the reset button 68c is being pressed, "1" is set or the set state of "1" is maintained, and if it is determined that the reset button 68c is not being pressed, the "0" is cleared or the "0" state is maintained.

Here, the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed under the condition that it is determined in step SB807 or step SB824 of the main process (FIG. 179) that the reset button 68c is pressed. In step SB807 or step SB824, the main CPU 63 directly monitors the input port to which the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed to determine whether the reset button 68c is being pressed. In this case, it is checked whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed, instead of checking the start timing and end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c. Therefore, in step SB807 or step SB824, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not checked, and if a signal corresponding to pressing of the reset button 68c is input to the input port, an affirmative determination is made.

However, in this configuration, depending on the relationship between the end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for starting the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) and the start timing of the setting value update processing (FIG. 181), the pressing operation may or may not trigger the addition of 1 to the setting value to be updated. Then, the update mode of the setting value to be updated changes according to the end timing of the press operation of the reset button 68c when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the operability deteriorates. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed under the condition that the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "0", the set value to be updated is incremented by 1. When the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" at step SB901 executed prior to the process of determining whether the reset button 68c is pressed. It is possible to prevent the set value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c.

After executing the process of step SB901, the interrupt permission is set (step SB902). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period. In this embodiment, as in the forty-ninth embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are basically prohibited in the processing (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) when the supply of operating power is started, and the interrupt is permitted in the setting confirmation processing (step SB810) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 181). Therefore, when the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the setting value update process (FIG. 181) are not executed in the process (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) when the supply of operating power is started, the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is prohibited, and the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is prohibited. is being executed, the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the start-up process flag is set to "1", so even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, the power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) are executed, but the process for advancing the game is not executed. 3) is terminated.

After that, on condition that the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SB903). When the setting update display flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), thereby executing the setting process (step S9004) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update. The contents of the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update are the same as those of the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing the process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (a), the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the setting value selected as the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, initial setting at the start is performed (step SB904). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". The game stop flag is set when the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure (step SB804: NO), when the checksum does not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 from the time of the previous power failure (step SB805: NO), or the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is changed. This flag is set to "1" at step SB823 of the main process (FIG. 179) when it is not within the normal range (step SB806: NO). By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8906. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 65 as described above, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but the processing for progressing the game is not executed. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SB904, it becomes possible to cancel the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main side RAM 65 is specified when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed.

Thereafter, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB905). The setting update area 342 is a storage area for storing information on setting values being updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 181), as in the forty-fifth embodiment. When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "1", the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is "setting 1". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "2", the setting value to be updated is "setting 2". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information of "3", the setting value to be updated is "setting 3". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information of "4", the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information of "5", the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "6", the setting value to be updated is "setting 6".

By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 in step SB905, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1". That is, in this embodiment, regardless of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1".

After that, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB906). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 so that the pattern display device 41 displays an image indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value, and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for ending the setting value update process (FIG. 181). As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and to recognize the operation content necessary to change the setting value and the operation content necessary to end the setting value update process (FIG. 181). In addition to or instead of the notification being performed by the pattern display device 41, at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 may be configured to perform the notification. Further, it may be configured such that an external output indicating that the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed is performed to a device outside the pachinko machine 10 such as a game hall management computer.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is one of "1" to "6" (step SB907). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SB907: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB908). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB907 or if the process of step SB908 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB909). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion portion 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state.

If a negative determination is made in step SB909, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB910). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is being pressed by directly monitoring the input port to which the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects whether or not the reset button 68c is being pressed. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB910: NO), after clearing the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control to "0" (step SB911), the process returns to step SB907.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB910: YES), it is determined whether the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is "0" (step SB912). If the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" (step SB912: NO), it means that the current confirmation timing is not the start timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, but the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is being continued, so the process returns to step SB907 without adding 1 to the set value to be updated.

If the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is "0" (step SB912: YES), it means that the current confirmation timing is the start timing of pressing the reset button 68c. In this case, after setting "1" to the OFF confirmation flag 361 (step SB913), 1 is added to the value of the setting update area 342 (step SB914). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB910: NO), if the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" (step SB912: NO), or if the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SB914), the process returns to step SB907. 8, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 . As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

If it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB909: YES), the setting reference area 341 is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 (step SB915). As a result, the setting value information updated as a result of this setting value updating process (FIG. 181) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information becomes the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

After that, the interrupt prohibition is set (step SB916). As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is terminated and the operation power supply start process (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) in the main process (FIG. 179) is resumed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

After that, a second RAM clear process is executed (step SB917). In the second RAM clear process, similarly to the RAM clear process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221 (that is, the setting reference area 341). As a result, the area indicating whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display part 38a is not variably displayed and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general electricity reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the reservation information for the general figure display unit 38a is erased. Also, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". Also, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Also, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, in the second RAM clear processing, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial setting is executed. In addition, in the second RAM clearing process, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step SB802 is executed. For the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the processing for clearing "0" and the processing for initial setting are not executed.

After that, a return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB918). The contents of the processing executed by the sound emission control device 81 when the return command at the time of updating is received are the same as those of the forty-ninth embodiment.

Next, how the setting value to be updated is updated will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. Fig. 183(a) shows the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, Fig. 183(b) shows the operation status of the setting key insertion portion 68a, Fig. 183(c) shows the operation status of the reset button 68c, Fig. 183(d) shows the period during which the setting value update process (Fig. 181) is being executed, Fig. 183(e) shows the setting status of the OFF confirmation flag 361, and Fig. 183(f) shows the setting Indicates the update timing of the value.

First, a comparative example in which the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not set to "1" when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started will be described.

At the timing of t1, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 183(b), and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 183(c). Then, at timing t2 in which the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are continued, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON as shown in FIG. 183(a). In this case, since the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the situation where the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started as shown in FIG. 183(d) at the timing of t3.

In the comparative example, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not set to "1" when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started, so the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is "0" at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 183(e). After that, at timing t4 in which the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is continued at the time of the power ON operation, it is specified that the reset button 68c is being pressed while the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is "0", and the set value to be updated is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 183(f). At the timing t4, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 183(e).

That is, in the above comparative example, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c at the time of power ON operation is continued even after the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, and the setting value to be updated is incremented by 1 with the pressing operation as a trigger. In this case, the setting value to be updated is updated even though the administrator of the gaming hall does not intend to update the setting value to be updated.

Next, the present embodiment in which "1" is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started will be described.

At the timing of t5, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 183(b), and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 183(c). Then, at timing t6 in which the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are continued, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON as shown in FIG. 183(a). In this case, since the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the situation where the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started as shown in FIG. 183(d) at the timing of t7. When the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, a process of setting "1" to the OFF confirmation flag 361 is executed at step SB901. Therefore, at timing t7, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 183(e). The timing of setting the OFF confirmation flag 361 to "1" is prior to the timing of determining whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed in the setting value update process (FIG. 181). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183(c), the OFF confirmation flag 361 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 183(e).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 183(c), the reset button 68c is pressed at each of timings t9 to t10, t11 to t12, and t13 to t14. In this case, the reset button 68c is pressed under the condition that the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is "0" at each of timing t9, timing t11, and timing t13. Therefore, as shown in FIG.

After that, at the timing of t15, the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned off as shown in FIG. 183(b), whereby the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) ends as shown in FIG. 183(d) at the timing of t15.

As described above, when it is determined that the reset button 68c is being pressed in a situation where the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "0", the set value to be updated is incremented by 1. When the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" in step SB901 executed prior to the process of determining whether the reset button 68c is being pressed. This makes it possible to prevent the set value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting value is changed from the predetermined starting setting value. As a result, in the setting value update process (FIG. 181), regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, it is possible to change the setting value from a certain starting setting value. Therefore, it becomes easy for the operator to understand the work content of the setting value changing operation.

Specifically, the set value corresponding to the start is "setting 1", which has the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting value is changed from "setting 1" with the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally ends the set value update process (FIG. 181) immediately after the start of the set value update process (FIG. 181), the set value has the lowest advantage, so even if the game is started in such a situation, it is possible to prevent unintended disadvantages from occurring in the game hall.

A setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342 are provided in the specific control work area 221. Information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. This makes it possible to change the setting value to be updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 181) while storing and holding the information of the setting value set before the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started in the setting reference area 341.

When the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, a regulation state is established in which the process for advancing the game is not started when the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is resumed thereafter. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing for progressing the game from being started even though the set value update processing (FIG. 181) has not been completed.

Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, if the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed after that, the regulation state does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the process for progressing the game from being restricted even when the set value is changed.

Even in the restricted state, power failure monitoring and various counter updating processes are executed. As a result, it is possible to ensure the execution of the necessary processing even in the state where the progress of the game is restricted as described above. In particular, by executing power outage monitoring, it is possible to appropriately deal with power outages in the event that power outages occur even when the progress of the game is being regulated.

Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the restricted state is resumed when the supply of operating power is resumed. As a result, the state in which the execution of the processing for progressing the game is regulated by stopping the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 in the situation where the set value update processing (FIG. 181) is being executed can be prevented from being canceled only by stopping the supply of operating power.

When it is determined that the reset button 68c is being pressed in a situation where the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "0", the set value to be updated is incremented by 1. When the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" in step SB901 executed prior to the process of determining whether the reset button 68c is being pressed. This makes it possible to prevent the set value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

If the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting value update process (FIG. 181) and the setting confirmation process (step SB810) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed after that, the setting update display flag may be cleared to "0" and the execution of the process for advancing the game may not be restricted. By executing the setting confirmation process (step SB810), the current setting values to be used are notified, so that the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the setting values to be used. In such a case, even if the execution of the process for advancing the game is not restricted, the game will not proceed with the setting values not assumed by the manager of the game hall.

Further, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting value update process (FIG. 181), the setting value update process (FIG. 181) may be forcibly executed regardless of whether or not the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter. This makes it possible to forcibly change the set value.

Further, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the middle of the setting confirmation process (step SB810), the execution of the process for advancing the game may be restricted when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter. In this case, when the setting confirmation process (step SB810) is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the regulation state may not be entered. In addition to or instead of this arrangement, the regulation state may not be entered when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Further, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting confirmation process (step SB810), the setting confirmation process (step SB810) may be forcibly executed regardless of whether or not the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter. This makes it possible to forcibly confirm the setting value.

In the setting value update process (FIG. 181), when it is specified that the reset button 68c has not been pressed in the preceding processing cycle in two consecutive processing cycles and that the reset button 68c has been pressed in the latter processing cycle, the setting value to be selected is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the setting value to be selected is changed when it is specified in one processing cycle or in a plurality of continuous processing cycles. Even in this case, when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the information about the confirmation history of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c in a plurality of consecutive past processes is rewritten to the information corresponding to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, so that the setting value to be selected in the set value update process (FIG. 181) is not changed by the press operation of the reset button 68c for starting the set value update process (FIG. 181).

<Fifty-Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the fifty-third embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifty-third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps SC101 to SC128 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

At steps SC101 to SC106, the same processes as steps SB801 to SB806 of the main process (FIG. 179) in the fifty-third embodiment are executed. If all of steps SC104 to SC106 are affirmative, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SC107). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SC107: NO), it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SC108). When the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting update display flag is not set to "1" (step SC107 and step SC108: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC109). When the game stop flag is set to "1", an abnormality command is transmitted at step SC127 and an external output process at the time of abnormality is executed at step SC128.

If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step SC109: NO), the process proceeds to step SC110. At steps SC110 to SC112, the same processes as steps SB809 to SB811 of the main process (FIG. 179) in the fifty-third embodiment are executed.

If it is determined at step SC107 that the reset button 68c is being pressed, or if it is determined that the setting update display flag is set to "1" at step SC108, it is determined at step SC113 whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned on using the setting key. If it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a is ON-operated (step SC113: YES), the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SC114), and then the set value update process is executed (step SC115). In steps SC116 to SC128, the same processes as steps SB114 to SB826 of the main process (FIG. 179) in the fifty-third embodiment are executed.

That is, in this embodiment, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during execution of the set value update process (step SC115), if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed in the "no operation" situation or in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the situation in which the process for advancing the game is blocked continues as in the fifty-third embodiment. The set value update process (step SC115) is executed not only when is resumed, but also when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed while the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed. This facilitates execution of the setting value updating process (step SC115) when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is resumed after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped during execution of the setting value updating process (step SC115).

In particular, in a configuration in which it is necessary to turn ON the setting key insertion portion 68a using the setting key and to press the reset button 68c for the "setting change operation" and to turn ON the setting key insertion portion 68a using the setting key for the "setting confirmation operation", when the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON even if the reset button 68c is not pressed, so that the setting value update process (step SC115) is executed. As a result, if the setting value update process (step SC115) is started by turning ON the power of the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where the "setting change operation" is performed, but, for example, the power is erroneously turned OFF during the process, the setting key insertion part 68a is maintained in the ON state in order to quickly return the power to the ON state, and even if the reset button 68c is not pressed, the setting value update process (step SC115) is executed. It becomes possible to

Further, in the present embodiment, if it is determined in step SC112 that the setting key insertion unit 68a is ON-operated, the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" in step SC114 before the set value update process (step SC115) is started. As a result, when the set value update process (step SC115) is started, even if the process of setting "1" to the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not performed, it is possible to prevent the set value to be updated from being incremented by 1 triggered by the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power is turned on. Incidentally, in the set value update process (step SC115) in this embodiment, the process of steps SB902 to SB918 is executed without executing the process of step SB901 in the set value update process (FIG. 181) of the fifty-third embodiment.

In the set value update process (step SC115), when it is specified that the reset button 68c has not been pressed in the preceding processing cycle in two consecutive processing cycles and that the reset button 68c has been pressed in the latter processing cycle, the setting value to be selected is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the setting value to be selected is changed when the operation is identified in one process or in a plurality of consecutive processes. Even in this case, when the set value update process (step SC115) is started, the information regarding the confirmation history of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c in a plurality of consecutive past processes is rewritten to the information corresponding to the press operation of the reset button 68c, so that the setting value to be selected in the set value update process (FIG. 181) is not changed by the press operation of the reset button 68c for starting the set value update process (FIG. 181).

<Fifty-fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps SC201 to SC230 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step SC201). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is activated. During this predetermined waiting period, the start of operation and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main side RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SC202). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that periodically interrupts and starts the main process, is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188), which is a process that periodically interrupts and starts the main process, is set to a second interrupt period (specifically, 2 milliseconds) that is shorter than the first interrupt period.

In other words, in the present embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) exist so that the interrupt cycle becomes relatively long and short as the timer interrupt processing. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are started by interrupting the main process. Also, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) and is not activated. Also, if both the first interrupt period and the second interrupt period have passed in a situation where neither the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) nor the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 188) are executed, the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 188) is started first regardless of the order in which those periods have elapsed. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be started with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt periods, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1, for example, is executed.

After that, "1" is set to the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SC203). As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the start-up processing flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, the main CPU 63 should end the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) without executing the process for progressing the game while executing the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133).

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the operation power supply start process (steps SC201 to SC223) is started in the main process (FIG. 185), and is cleared to "0" before the operation power supply start process (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed and the remaining process (steps SC227 to SC230) is started. As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), when the start-up flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed, thereby preventing the execution of the process for advancing the game in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed among the processes (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of supply of operating power. It becomes possible to On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), even when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905, power failure monitoring is executed even in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) or the set value update processing (step SC216) is being executed among the processing (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power, and the winning random number counter C1 and the jackpot are performed. The type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is performed.

In particular, by executing the power failure information storage process (step S8901) even in a situation where the start-up flag is set to "1", even if a power failure occurs while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed in the process for starting supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the power failure process can be executed. In the power failure process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216), it is possible to identify that the power failure has occurred during these setting-related processes when the supply of operating power is started next time.

Incidentally, when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are not prohibited from being interrupted and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is started by interrupting the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216), the information of the return address of the main process (FIG. 185) for returning after the timer interrupt process to be started is completed is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the main CPU 63 immediately before the timer interrupt process is started. Register information is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be activated ends, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 185) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, the display start flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SC204). The display start flag is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 that the display control of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a should be started after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started.

Thereafter, at steps SC205 to SC225, the same processes as steps SB104 to SB124 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed. In this case, the processing contents executed in the main process (FIG. 185) in relation to the combination of the situation at the time when the supply of the operating power was stopped last time and the operation contents at the time of starting the supply of the operating power this time are the process contents shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 171, as in the forty-ninth embodiment. For example, if the power failure process is executed while neither the setting confirmation process (step SC213) nor the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, or if the power failure process is executed while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, and if the "RAM clearing operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter, the first RAM clearing process (step SC218) is executed in the main process (FIG. 185). In addition, when the power failure process is executed while the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the second RAM clear process (step SB313 in FIG. 167 in the forty-ninth embodiment) is executed in the set value update process (step SC216) regardless of which operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, and even if the power failure process is executed while the set value update process (step SC216) is not being executed, the subsequent supply of operating power will be reduced. When the "setting change operation" is performed at the time of restarting, the second RAM clearing process (step SB313 in FIG. 49 in the forty-ninth embodiment) is executed in the setting value updating process (step SC216).

In the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process, the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed, while the clear non-target area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0" and the initial setting is not performed. FIG. 186 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372 provided in the work area 221 for specific control.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped because the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 as power for memory retention from the power failure power supply section provided in the power supply/launch control device 78. By supplying backup power to the main RAM 65 in this way, backup power is also supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Backup power is supplied to the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372 by supplying backup power to the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, backup power is supplied to the area 371 to be cleared and the area 372 not to be cleared even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped because the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state, and information is stored and held in the area 371 to be cleared and the area 372 not to be cleared.

The clear target area 371 includes a second display data buffer 272 , a fourth display data buffer 274 and a fifth display data buffer 275 . The second display data buffer 272 is an area in which display data for causing the special figure reservation display section 37b to perform a predetermined display is set as in the thirty-third embodiment. When the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is newly stored in the hold storage area 65a in the hold information acquisition process (step S401) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12), the display data corresponding to the number of hold information for the special figure display unit 37a stored in the hold storage area 65a after the storage in the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in the second display data buffer 272. In addition, when the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is digested as the execution trigger of the game round in the data setting process (step S502) in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the display data corresponding to the number of the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a stored in the hold storage area 65a after digestion is set in the second display data buffer 272 by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133).

The fourth display data buffer 274 is an area for storing display data for causing the normal diagram reservation display section 38b to perform a predetermined display, as in the thirty-third embodiment. When the hold information for the general map display unit 38a is newly stored in the general electric reserve area 65c in the normal map general electric control processing (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), display data corresponding to the number of the reserved information for the general map display unit 38a stored in the general electric reserve area 65c after the storage is set in the fourth display data buffer 274 by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). be done. In addition, when the hold information for the normal map display unit 38a is digested as a trigger for the execution of the variable display times of the normal map display unit 38a in the normal map general electric control processing (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), the display data corresponding to the number of the reserved information for the general map display unit 38a stored in the general electric reserve area 65c after the digestion by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is displayed in the fourth. It is set in the display data buffer 274 .

The fifth display data buffer 275 is an area in which display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined displays is set, as in the thirty-third embodiment. Setting of the display data to the fifth display data buffer 275 is executed at steps SC403, SC405 and SC406 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) described later.

In addition to the second display data buffer 272, the fourth display data buffer 274 and the fifth display data buffer 275, the clear target area 371 includes a reservation storage area 65a in which the reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a is stored and a general electric reservation area 65c in which the reservation information for the normal figure display unit 38a is stored. Therefore, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed, the reserved information for the special figure display section 37a and the reserved information for the normal figure display section 38a are erased. In this case, the clear target area 371 includes the second display data buffer 272 and the fourth display data buffer 274 as described above. As a result, when the reserved storage area 65a is initialized and the reserved information for the special figure display unit 37a becomes 0, the display content of the special figure reserved display unit 37b can also be set to the display content of 0 reserved information for the special figure display unit 37a. It is possible to set the display content to have 0 pieces of information.

In addition, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, after the processing (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of supply of operating power is completed, the information of the base value is basically displayed in the same manner as in the forty-ninth embodiment. If the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed together with the setting value, the setting value in the process of updating is displayed, and furthermore, if the process for starting supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, a check display is performed. That is, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, when the supply of operating power is resumed, information different from the base value information displayed before the supply of operating power is stopped will be displayed. Therefore, even if the fifth display data buffer 275 is initialized when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, there is no problem with the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The area to be cleared 371 includes an area for special electric train control and an area for normal electric train control in addition to the above areas. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not executed, the open/close execution mode is not executed, and the normal diagram display part 38a is not variably displayed and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. Also, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Also, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initialization is executed. Also, after various registers of the main side CPU 63 are cleared to "0", initialization is executed. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing of step SC202 is executed.

Although the processing contents of the first RAM clearing process are the same as the processing contents of the second RAM clearing process in the setting value updating process, a configuration may be adopted in which a part of these processing contents are different. For example, an area to be cleared to "0" and initialized in the first RAM clear process may not be cleared to "0" and initialized in the second RAM clear process, and an area to be cleared to "0" and initialized in the second RAM clear process may not be cleared to "0" and initialized in the first RAM clear process.

The non-clearable area 372 includes a first display data buffer 271 , a third display data buffer 273 and an initial display completion flag 373 . The first display data buffer 271 is an area in which display data for causing the special figure display section 37a to perform a predetermined display is stored as in the thirty-third embodiment. Display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (step S8915) by executing the processing for starting the fluctuation display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a at step S513 in the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 13) The display data corresponding to the display at the time of the fluctuation start of the special figure display unit 37a is set in the first display data buffer 271. In addition, the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (step S8915) in the special figure display unit 37a is executed by executing the process for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure fluctuation process (step S407) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12). In addition, the display content of the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure confirmation process (step S408) in the special figure special electric control process (Fig. 12) is performed to make the display content corresponding to the processing result of the success/failure determination process (step S504) and the distribution determination process (step S506) in the game round this time. Display data for displaying the result is set in the first display data buffer 271 . The display data set in this case is the display data selected at step S507 or step S509 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13) at the start of this game round. In addition, the display data set in this case is stored and held in the first display data buffer 271 until a new game round is started in the special figure display section 37a.

The third display data buffer 273 is an area for storing display data for causing the normal diagram display section 38a to perform a predetermined display, as in the thirty-third embodiment. In the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), the normal pattern display unit 38a executes the processing for starting the fluctuation display of the pattern in the normal pattern general electric control processing (step S8914). The display data corresponding to the display at the start of the fluctuation of the general pattern display unit 38a is set in the third display data buffer 273 by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). In addition, the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) by executing the processing for updating the display contents of the general pattern display unit 38a in the general pattern general electric control processing (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) The display data for advancing the variable display of the pattern of the general pattern display unit 38a is set in the third display data buffer 273. In addition, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), the display content of the general map display unit 38a is set to the display content corresponding to the result of the general electric open lottery in the current variable display time in the general map general electric control processing (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). 273. The display data set in this case is stored and retained in the third display data buffer 273 until a new variable display cycle is started in the normal map display section 38a.

The initial display completion flag 373 is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 whether or not it is a situation after completing the initial display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a at the shipping stage of the factory. By including the initial display completion flag 373 in the non-clearable area 372, after confirming the initial display of the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a at the shipping stage of the factory, it is possible to prevent the initial display from being performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter.

Even if the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are included in the area 372 that is not eligible for clearing, even if the first RAM clear process or the second ram clear processing is executed, the special map display portion 37a and the general map display portion 38a are displayed after the supply of operating power has been resumed. In the case of starting, the display contents of these special map display portions 37a and the general diagram display portion 38a can be returned to the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped. As a result, even if the player confirms the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a after the supply of the operating power is resumed, it becomes impossible to specify whether the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed.

In particular, the second RAM clear processing is executed in the set value update processing (step SC216) that allows the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be changed. Therefore, when the display content of at least one of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a becomes the display content corresponding to the execution of the second RAM clear processing or is changed from the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped, the display content becomes the special figure display unit 37a or the normal figure display unit 3 when the second RAM clear process is executed. By confirming 8a, it is possible to predict whether or not the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. On the other hand, even if the second RAM clearing process is executed, when the display of the special figure display portion 37a and the normal figure display portion 38a is started after the supply of the operating power is started, the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the normal figure display portion 38a will be restored to the display contents before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Thereby, even if it confirms the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a, it becomes possible not to specify whether the setting value update process (step SC216) was performed.

In addition to the areas described above, the non-clearable area 372 includes an area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, the setting reference area 341). As a result, even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is. The non-clearable area 372 also includes a work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Incidentally, since backup power is not supplied to the RAMs of the audio emission control device 81 and the display control device 82, the information stored in the RAMs of the audio emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 is erased when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the supply of operating power to the audio emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 is stopped. However, if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the supply of operating power is started, the main CPU 63 sends a command to the audio light emission control device 81 to restore the execution state of the effect to the state immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, so that the contents of the effect execution control in the sound light emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are restored to the state immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped.

Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 185), after executing the process of step SC225, the display start process is executed (step SC226). Thereafter, remaining processing is executed in steps SC227 to SC230. The processing contents of these steps SC227 to SC230 are the same as steps SB125 to SB128 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

Next, the display start processing executed in step SC226 of the main processing (FIG. 185) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processing of steps SC301 to SC305 in the display start processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

When the initial display completion flag 373 is not set to "1" (step SC301: NO), the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC302), and the initial display data for the normal figure is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC303). Then, the initial display completed flag 373 is set to "1" (step SC304).

By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the initial display data for the special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, the initial display is performed in the special figure display section 37a. Although the display content of the initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is arbitrary, for example, all of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a may be configured to be in a light emitting state, and a plurality of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a may be configured to be in a light emitting state. When some of the light-emitting units are in the light-emitting state, the light-emitting units that are in the light-emitting state and the light-emitting units that are maintained in the light-out state may be arranged alternately. Further, by controlling the display of the normal map display unit 38a using the initial display data for the normal map stored in the third display data buffer 273, initial display is performed in the normal map display unit 38a. The display content of the initial display in the normal map display unit 38a is arbitrary, but for example, all of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the normal map display unit 38a may be configured to be in a light emitting state. When some of the light-emitting units are in the light-emitting state, the light-emitting units that are in the light-emitting state and the light-emitting units that are maintained in the light-out state may be arranged alternately.

On the other hand, if the initial display completion flag 373 is set to "1" (step SC301: YES), the processes of steps SC302 and SC303 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is. As already described, the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are provided in the non-clearing area 372. Therefore, even if either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored in the first display data buffer 271 as it is, and the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored in the third display data buffer 273. is stored as is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC301 or if the process of step SC304 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SC305). The display start flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the main side CPU 63 should start the display control of the special figure display portion 37a, the special figure reservation display portion 37b, the general figure display portion 38a and the general figure reservation display portion 38b. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

As already explained, the display start flag is cleared to "0" at step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU63 is started special figure display unit 37a, special figure reservation display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, general figure reservation display unit 38b and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the timing before the first execution timing. Then, as already described, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 187) executed after the end of the operation power supply start process (steps SC201 to SC223). As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are kept in the off state, and the operation power is started.

Next, the second timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processes of steps SC401 to SC415 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG. In the second timer interrupt process, the interrupt is permitted when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is started, and is prohibited when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is terminated. In the second timer interrupt process, the interrupt is permitted when the set value update process (step SC216) is started, and the interrupt is prohibited when the set value update process (step SC216) is finished. Also, in the second interrupt process, the interrupt is permitted until the interrupt prohibition is set at Step SC227 of the main process (FIG. 185) after the interrupt permission is set at Step SC230 of the main process (FIG. 185). The same applies to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133).

At steps SC401 to SC409, the same processes as steps S8401 to S8409 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the type counter is "5" (step SC410). As in the thirty-third embodiment, the type counter is a counter for specifying the target of display data transmission among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 63. When the type counter value is "1", the display data in the first display data buffer 271 is to be transmitted; when the type counter value is "2", the display data in the second display data buffer 272 is to be transmitted; when the type counter value is "3", the display data in the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted; In some cases, the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted.

If the value of the type counter is one of "1" to "4", that is, any of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b If the situation is to display control (step SC410: NO), it is determined whether or not the display start flag of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC411). If the value of the type counter is "5" (step SC410: YES), or if the value of the type counter is any of "1" to "4" and the display start flag is set to "1" (step SC410: NO, step SC411: YES), the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 is executed.

In the processing of steps SC412 to SC414, first, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step SC412). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64; when the value of the type counter is "2", the type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64; when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64; is read from the main-side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read from the main-side ROM 64.

After that, the display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step SC413). Specifically, when the type counter value is "1", the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271; when the type counter value is "2", the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272; when the type counter value is "3", the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273; Display data is read from the display data buffer 275 .

After that, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step SC414). In the transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step SC412 is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG. Also, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step SC413 is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG.

On the other hand, if the value of the type counter is one of "1" to "4" and the display start flag is not set to "1" (step SC410 and step SC411: NO), the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, until the display start flag is set to "1", the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b do not start display control, and the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are maintained in the off state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC411, or if the processing of step SC414 is executed, interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing (step SC415).

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power will be described. FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power.

Since the initial display flag 373 is not yet set to "1" at the factory shipping stage, the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a When the display is started, the initial display is started in the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. The initial display in the special figure display part 37a is continued until the variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display part 37a by the entry of the game ball into the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied. The initial display in the normal pattern display portion 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display portion 38a is started.

If it is not the factory shipping stage, that is, if the initial display completion flag 373 is already set to "1", the first RAM clear processing is executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the setting value update processing is executed, the setting confirmation processing is executed, and these processing are not executed. The display of the portion 38a is controlled. Thereby, even if it confirms the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a, it becomes possible not to specify whether the setting value update process (step SC216) was performed.

In particular, the display contents when the display of the special figure display portion 37a and the normal figure display portion 38a is started, and the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the normal figure display portion 38a just before the supply of the operating power is stopped are the same. As a result, after confirming and remembering the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, even if the display contents displayed first in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are confirmed after the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether the setting value update process (step SC216) has been executed.

In addition, by setting the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the clear non-target area 372 which is not the execution target of the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing in the work area 221 for specific control, the display content when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started is the same as the display content of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a just before the supply of the operating power is stopped. In other words, even if the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a are confirmed, no special processing is required to make it impossible to specify whether or not the set value update processing (step SC216) has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing an increase in the processing load.

The configuration in which both the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are provided in the non-clearing area 372 is not limited, and although the first display data buffer 271 is provided in the non-clearing area 372, the third display data buffer 273 may be provided in the clearing area 371. In this case, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the special figure display unit 37a will start displaying from the display content before the supply of operating power is stopped, but the initial display will be performed in the general figure display unit 38a. Alternatively, the third display data buffer 273 is provided in the non-clearing area 372 , but the first display data buffer 271 may be provided in the clearing area 371 . In this case, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the display will be started from the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped in the normal figure display unit 38a, but the initial display will be performed in the special figure display unit 37a.

Further, in a configuration in which a round display unit for notifying the number of round games generated in the open/close execution mode triggered by the result of a big win is provided as a display unit whose display is controlled by the main CPU 63, an area for storing display data for displaying on the round display unit may be provided in the non-clearable area 372. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the predetermined display is being performed on the round display part, the predetermined display is resumed on the round display part even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started.

In addition, all the display units directly display-controlled by the main side CPU 63 including the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the normal figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b may be configured so that the area in which the display data for displaying is stored is not initialized by the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process. In this case, even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, any of the display units that are directly display-controlled by the main CPU 63 will display the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped. In this configuration, although the display by the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped in the special figure reservation display unit 37b and the normal figure reservation display unit 38b is temporarily started, the corresponding reservation information is 0 after that.

In addition, although the area where the display data for displaying in the special figure reservation display unit 37b and the normal figure reservation display unit 38b is stored is initialized when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, the special figure reservation display unit 37b and the general figure reservation display unit 38b may be displayed in a manner in which the number of corresponding reservation information is difficult for the player to understand. In this case, even if the display indicating that the corresponding reservation information is 0 in each of the special figure reservation display portion 37b and the normal figure reservation display portion 38b by executing the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing, it is difficult for the player to understand that the display indicating that the reservation information is 0 is performed. become difficult.

<Fifty-Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the fifty-fifth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control.

In the clear target area 371, a second display data buffer 272 that stores display data for performing a predetermined display on the special figure reservation display unit 37b, a fourth display data buffer 274 that stores display data for performing a predetermined display on the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and a fifth display data buffer 275 that stores display data for performing a predetermined display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 Not only the special figure display unit 37a. There are provided a first display data buffer 271 for storing display data for causing the display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display, and a third display data buffer 273 for storing display data for performing a predetermined display on the normal diagram display unit 38a. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process (step SC218) is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) or when the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed, the display data corresponding to the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped will be erased.

An initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371 in addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 . The initial display flag 375 is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 whether or not it is in a situation where initial display needs to be performed in the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a. Since the initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371, the initial display flag 375 is cleared to "0" when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed in the main processing (FIG. 185). Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is executed. When the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, the initial display is performed in these special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a.

FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps SC501 to SC511 in the display start processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

When "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC501: NO), the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC502), and the initial display data for the normal figure is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC503). Then, the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SC504).

By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the initial display data for the special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, the initial display is performed in the special figure display section 37a. Although the display content of the initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is arbitrary, for example, all of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a may be configured to be in a light emitting state, and a plurality of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a may be configured to be in a light emitting state. When some of the light-emitting units are in the light-emitting state, the light-emitting units that are in the light-emitting state and the light-emitting units that are maintained in the light-out state may be arranged alternately. Further, the display content of the initial display in the special figure display portion 37a is different from the display content stopped and displayed in order to notify the game result of the game round in the special figure display portion 37a. In addition, the display contents of the initial display in the special figure display section 37a are display contents different from the display contents displayed in the situation where the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display section 37a. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify clearly that the initial display is being performed in the special figure display section 37a.

By controlling the display of the normal map display unit 38a using the initial display data for the normal map stored in the third display data buffer 273, initial display is performed in the normal map display unit 38a. The display content of the initial display in the normal map display unit 38a is arbitrary, but for example, all of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the normal map display unit 38a may be configured to be in a light emitting state. When some of the light-emitting units are in the light-emitting state, the light-emitting units that are in the light-emitting state and the light-emitting units that are maintained in the light-out state may be arranged alternately. In addition, the display content of the initial display on the normal map display unit 38a is different from the display content that is stopped and displayed to notify the result of the vibration open lottery in the variable display time on the normal map display unit 38a. In addition, the display contents of the initial display in the normal pattern display portion 38a are different from the display contents displayed in the situation where the pattern is displayed in the normal pattern display portion 38a. As a result, it is possible to clearly specify that the initial display is being performed in the normal map display section 38a.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC501, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after being stopped during execution of the game round by referring to the storage area storing information indicating whether or not the game round is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC505). Information indicating that the game round is being executed is stored in the storage area when the game round is started, and information indicating that the game round is being executed is erased from the storage area when the game round is ended. The information in the storage area is stored and held when backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and is stored and held even when the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

Further, by referring to the storage area storing information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control, it is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is resumed after being stopped during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SC506). Information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is stored in the storage area when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is erased from the storage area when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated. The information in the storage area is stored and held when backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and is stored and held even if the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

If the previous stop of the supply of operating power was neither during execution of the game cycle nor during execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SC505 and step SC506: NO), the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC507). By using the initial display data for the special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271 to control the display of the special figure display section 37a, the already explained initial display is performed in the special figure display section 37a. On the other hand, when the previous supply of operating power was stopped was either during execution of a game round or during execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SC505 or step SC506: YES), the initial display data for the special figure is not set in the first display data buffer 271, so the display data stored before the supply of the operating power was stopped is stored in the first display data buffer 271 as it is. Therefore, when the display in the special figure display section 37a is started, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a just before the supply of the operating power is stopped will be resumed as it is.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC505, when an affirmative determination is made in step SC506, or when the processing of step SC507 is executed, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power is stopped while the pattern is being variably displayed in the normal pattern display unit 38a by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the normal pattern display unit 38a in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is being changed. (Step SC508). The storage area stores information indicating that the variable display of patterns is being executed in the normal pattern display portion 38a when the variable display of patterns is started in the normal pattern display portion 38a, and the information indicating that the variable display of patterns is being executed in the normal pattern display portion 38a is erased from the storage area when the variable display of patterns is ended in the normal pattern display portion 38a. The information in the storage area is stored and held when backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and is stored and held even if the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

Further, by referring to the storage area in which the information indicating whether or not the normal power disconnection state is being executed is stored in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control, it is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the normal power disconnection state (step SC509). Information indicating that the general electric open state is being executed is stored in the storage area when the general electric open state is started, and information indicating that the general electric open state is being executed is erased from the storage area when the general electric open state is terminated. The information in the storage area is stored and held when backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and is stored and held even if the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

When the previous supply of operating power was stopped was neither during execution of variable display of patterns nor during execution of normal power open state in the normal diagram display unit 38a (step SC508 and step SC509: NO), the initial display data for normal diagram is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC510). By controlling the display of the normal map display unit 38a using the normal map initial display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, the already explained initial display is performed in the normal map display unit 38a. On the other hand, when the supply of the operating power was stopped last time was either during the execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display unit 38a or during the execution of the normal power open state (step SC508 or step SC509: YES), the initial display data for the normal pattern is not set in the third display data buffer 273, so the display data stored before the supply of the operating power was stopped is stored in the third display data buffer 273 as it is. Therefore, when the display on the normal map display unit 38a is started, the display contents of the normal map display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped are resumed as they are.

If the process of step SC504 is executed, if the determination is affirmative at step SC508, if the determination is affirmative at step SC509, or if the process of step SC510 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SC511). Like the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is a flag for specifying whether the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display portion 37a, the special figure reservation display portion 37b, the general figure display portion 38a and the general figure reservation display portion 38b, and the display start flag is set to "1".

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" at step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU63 is started special figure display unit 37a, special figure reservation display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, general figure reservation display unit 38b and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the timing before the first execution timing. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 191) executed after the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the time of starting supply of operating power ends. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the normal figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are kept in the off state, and the operation power is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 191), as already described, even in the situation where both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the first display data buffer 271 may be set with the initial display data for the special map, and the third display data buffer 273 may be set with the initial display data for the normal map. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the initial display will be started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is displayed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. Then, a player who sees such a change in the display contents can understand that the initial display is started in the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a in the situation that both the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 191), the display start flag is set to "1" after the process of setting the display data is completed, and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power will be described. FIG. 192 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power.

When the first RAM clear process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) when the supply of operating power is started or when the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1". Display starts. The initial display in the special figure display part 37a is continued until the variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display part 37a by the entry of the game ball into the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied. The initial display in the normal pattern display portion 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display portion 38a is started. In addition, since "1" is not set to the initial display flag 375 even at the shipping stage of the factory, the initial display is started in the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed based on the "RAM clearing operation" as described above, and when the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed based on the "setting change operation", the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a When the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started, the initial display is performed on these special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a, so that the supply of the operating power is started and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. is started, even if the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a are confirmed, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clearing process and the set value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are confirmed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to specify whether the setting value update process has been executed.

Even if the second RAM clear processing of the first RAM clear processing and the set value update processing is not executed in the processing (step SC201 to step SC223) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the initial display is started in the special figure display section 37a when the display is started in the special figure display section 37a when the situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped is neither during the execution of the game round nor during the execution of the opening and closing execution mode. Further, even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) when the supply of operating power is started, the initial display is started in the normal map display unit 38a when the display is started in the normal map display unit 38a when the situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped is neither during the execution of the fluctuation display of the pattern in the normal pattern display unit 38a nor during the execution of the general electric open state. Then, as already described, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power as described above, the initial display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. Thereby, even if it is confirmed that the initial display is performed in the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to specify that either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed.

On the other hand, the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the game cycle or during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, and the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the process of starting the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223). When the display is started in the special figure display part 37a, the special figure display unit 37a is display-controlled so that the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. In addition, the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a or during the execution of the normal open state, and the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) When the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed, when the display is started in the normal map display unit 38a, the normal map display unit 38a is controlled to display the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Thus, when the supply of the operating power is restarted and the game situation immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is restarted, the display of the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a can be started in a mode corresponding to the restart of the game situation.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the contents of the initial display displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when the first RAM clear process is executed and when the second RAM clear process is executed may be different. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the contents of the initial display displayed on the normal diagram display unit 38a are different between when the first RAM clearing process is executed and when the second RAM clearing process is executed.

Further, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the initial display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a, while the normal figure display unit 38a may be configured to display the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped. Further, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the initial display is performed in the normal figure display unit 38a, while the special figure display unit 37a may be configured to display the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped.

In addition, there are a plurality of types of initial display of the special figure display unit 37a, and when the initial display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a when the supply of the operating power is started, the initial display selected by lottery may be performed in the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, there are a plurality of types of initial display of the general pattern display unit 38a, and when the initial display is performed in the general pattern display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, the initial display selected by lottery may be performed in the general pattern display unit 38a.

In addition, in a configuration in which a round display section is provided as a display section controlled by the main side CPU 63 for notifying the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode triggered by the result of a big win, an initial display may be performed on the round display section when either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of operating power is started, or when both the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed. As a result, even if the round display portion is checked, it cannot be determined whether or not the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process has been executed.

In addition, all the display units directly display-controlled by the main side CPU 63 including the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the normal figure display unit 38a and the normal figure reservation display unit 38b may be configured to perform the initial display even when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, or when both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed. In addition, although the initial display is once started in the special figure reservation display unit 37b and the normal figure reservation display unit 38b in the configuration, it may be configured to switch to the display content corresponding to the fact that the corresponding reservation information is 0 after that.

Further, when the supply of operating power is started, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start processing (FIG. 191) are executed when the first RAM clear processing is executed, whereas steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start processing (FIG. 191) are not executed when the second RAM clear processing is executed. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start processing (FIG. 191) are executed when the second RAM clear processing is executed, while steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start processing (FIG. 191) are not executed when the first RAM clear processing is executed.

<Fifty-seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the fifty-sixth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifty-sixth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifty-sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps SC601 to SC605 in the display start processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG. Further, first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 and an initial display flag 375 are provided in a clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control.

When "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC601: NO), the deviation display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC602), and the deviation display data for the normal figure is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC603). Then, the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SC604).

The deviation display data for the special figure is display data selected in the stop result setting process for the deviation result (step S509) when the result of the right or wrong determination process (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13) is a deviation result. That is, the loss display data for the special figure is the display data for finally performing the loss display in the special figure display section 37a in the game round in which the result of the winning/failure determination process is a loss result. Since only one type of deviating display data for a special figure is set, the type of deviating display in the special figure display section 37a is also one. In addition, a plurality of types of hit displays are finally set in the special figure display part 37a in a game cycle in which the result of the win/fail determination process is a hit result, but the miss display has different display contents from these plurality of types of hit displays.

The display of the special figure display section 37a is controlled using the special figure removal display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, so that the special figure display section 37a performs the removal display. Although the display content of the detachment display is arbitrary, for example, only one of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a may be configured to be in a light emitting state, or a plurality of light emitting units may be in a light emitting state.

The lost display data for the general map is the result of the general electric open lottery in the general electric open lottery control process (step S8914) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is a lost result. Since only one type of deviation display data for the normal pattern is set, there is also one type of deviation display in the normal pattern display section 38a. In addition, only one type of winning display is finally set in the normal drawing display part 38a in the variable display times of the normal drawing display part 38a in which the result of the general electric open lottery is the winning result, but the losing display has different display contents from the winning display.

By controlling the display of the normal map display unit 38a using the normal map loss display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, the normal map display unit 38a performs a loss display. The display content of the deviation display is arbitrary.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC601 or if the process of step SC604 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SC605). Like the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is a flag for specifying whether the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" at step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU63 is started special figure display unit 37a, special figure reservation display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, general figure reservation display unit 38b and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the timing before the first execution timing. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 193) executed after the end of the operation power supply start process (steps SC201 to SC223). As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are kept in the off state, and the operation power is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 193), as already explained, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the first display data buffer 271 is set with the loss display data for the special figure, and the third display data buffer 273 is set with the loss display data for the normal figure. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. Then, a player who sees such a change in the display contents can grasp that the deviated display is started in the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a under the condition that either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 191), the display start flag is set to "1" after the process of setting the display data is completed, and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

On the other hand, if "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC601: YES), the processes of steps SC602 and SC603 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display part 37a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is performed in the special figure display part 37a. Further, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the normal map display part 38a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is performed in the normal map display part 38a.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power will be described. FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed in the operation power supply start process (step SC201 to step SC223) or when the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1". Display starts. The deviation display in the special figure display part 37a is continued until the variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display part 37a by the entry of the game ball into the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 and the condition for starting the game round is satisfied. The missing display in the normal pattern display portion 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display portion 38a is started. In addition, since "1" is not set to the initial display flag 375 even at the shipping stage of the factory, the detachment display is started in the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a.

Even if the first RAM clear processing is executed as described above and the second RAM clear processing of the setting value update processing is executed, when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is performed. , it is not possible to know which of the first RAM clearing process and the set value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are confirmed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to specify whether the setting value update process has been executed.

When the second RAM clearing process of the first RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process is not executed in the operation power supply start process (step SC201 to step SC223), when the display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the display in the special figure display unit 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. be done. Here, at the closing time of the game hall, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is mostly cut off under the condition that neither the game round nor the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and furthermore, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is almost cut off under the condition that neither the variable display times of the normal figure display part 38a nor the normal electric open state is executed. That is, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped are basically off display. Then, as already described, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power as described above, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. Thereby, even if it is confirmed that the off display is performed in the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to specify that either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed.

In addition, in the configuration in which there are a plurality of types of deviation display of the special figure display unit 37a, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, one predetermined type of deviation display out of the plurality of types of deviation display may be performed in the special figure display unit 37a. Further, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of deviation display of the normal pattern display unit 38a, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined one type of deviation display among the plurality of types of deviation display may be performed in the normal pattern display unit 38a.

Further, when the supply of operating power is started, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start processing (FIG. 193) are executed when the first RAM clear processing is executed, while steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start processing (FIG. 193) are not executed when the second RAM clear processing is executed. Further, when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start processing (FIG. 193) are executed when the second RAM clear processing is executed, while steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start processing (FIG. 193) are not executed when the first RAM clear processing is executed.

<Fifty-Eighth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the fifty-fifth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372 of the work area 221 for specific control.

In the clear target area 371, a second display data buffer 272 that stores display data for performing a predetermined display on the special figure reservation display unit 37b, a fourth display data buffer 274 that stores display data for performing a predetermined display on the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and a fifth display data buffer 275 that stores display data for performing a predetermined display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 Not only the special figure display unit 37a. There are provided a first display data buffer 271 for storing display data for causing the display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display, and a third display data buffer 273 for storing display data for performing a predetermined display on the normal diagram display unit 38a. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process (step SC218) is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) or when the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed, the display data corresponding to the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped will be erased.

An initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371 in addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 . The initial display flag 375 is a flag for specifying by the main side CPU 63 whether or not it is in a situation where it is necessary to perform a deviated display as an initial display in the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a. Since the initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371, the initial display flag 375 is cleared to "0" when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed in the main processing (FIG. 185). Therefore, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the operation power supply start process (step SC201 to step SC223) is executed after the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a will be displayed as an initial display.

The non-clearable area 372 is provided with an initial display counter 381 for special maps and an initial display counter 382 for normal maps. A special figure initial display counter 381 is a counter for determining by lottery which kind of special figure loss display out of a plurality of types of special figure loss indications is to be performed when the special figure display part 37a starts to display the special figure display part 37a and performs loss display as an initial display. Although the numerical range that the initial display counter 381 for the special figure can take is "0 to 59", it is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The initial display counter 382 for the normal map is a counter for determining by lottery which type of the lost display for the normal map out of a plurality of types of the lost display for the normal map is to be performed when the normal map display part 38a starts displaying the normal map and performs the lost display as the initial display in the normal map display part 38a. The range of values that the normal map initial display counter 382 can take is "0 to 59", but it is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The initial display counter 381 for the special figure and the initial display counter 382 for the normal figure are provided in the non-clearable area 372 as described above. As a result, if the supply of backup power to the main RAM 65 is continued in a situation where the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the initial display counter 381 for the special map and the initial display counter 382 for the general map are not initialized and the state in which the numerical information immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is maintained.

Numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure and numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for the general figure are regularly updated by the first timer interrupt process in the situation where activation of the first timer interrupt process is permitted. FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing first timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps SC701 to SC722 in the first timer interrupt processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

At steps SC705 and SC705, the same processes as steps S8901 to S8905 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed. After that, an initial display counter update process for a special figure is executed (step SC706). In the update process, the current numerical information is read from the initial display counter 381 for special figures, and after adding 1 to the read numerical information, the initial display counter 381 for special figures is overwritten with the numerical information after the addition of 1. In this case, it is cleared to "0" when the counter value exceeds the maximum value (specifically, "59").

Thereafter, at step SC707, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control. If any flag is set to "1" (step SC707: YES), this first timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes of steps SC708 to SC722. If none of the flags is set to "1" (step SC707: NO), an initial display counter update process for general map is executed (step SC708). In the updating process, the current numerical information is read from the initial display counter 382 for the normal map, and after adding 1 to the read numerical information, the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is overwritten with the numerical information after the addition of 1. In this case, it is cleared to "0" when the counter value exceeds the maximum value (specifically, "59"). At steps SC709 to SC722, the same processes as steps S8907 to S8920 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed.

Here, the initial display counter update process for special figures (step SC706) is set as a process to be executed regardless of whether the game stop flag or the start-up process flag is set to "1", whereas the initial display counter update process for normal figures (step SC708) is set as a process that is not executed when the game stop flag or the start-up process flag is set to "1". As a result, the update frequency can be made different between the initial display counter 381 for the special figure and the initial display counter 382 for the general figure, and the initial display counter 381 for the special figure and the initial display counter 382 for the general figure can be prevented from synchronizing.

FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps SC801 to SC807 in the display start processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

When "1" is not set to the initial display flag 375 (step SC801: NO), a lottery process for the extra display data for the special figure is executed (step SC802). In the lottery process of the deviating display data for the special figure, the deviating display lottery table 383 for the special figure pre-stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to. FIG. 198(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning display lottery table 383 for the special figure. As shown in FIG. 198(a), there are first loss display data for special symbols, second loss display data for special symbols, and third failure display data for special symbols.

The first loss display data for the special figure, the second loss display data for the special figure, and the third loss display data for the special figure are display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process for the loss result (step S509) when the result of the success/failure determination process (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13) is a loss result. That is, the first to third loss display data for the special figure are display data for finally performing a loss display in the special figure display section 37a in the game round in which the result of the success/failure determination process is a loss result. The first exclusion display data for the special figure is data for displaying the first exclusion indication for the special figure on the special figure display section 37a, the second exclusion display data for the special figure is data for displaying the second exclusion indication for the special figure on the special figure display section 37a, and the third exclusion display data for the special figure is data for displaying the third exclusion indication for the special figure on the special figure display section 37a. The display contents of the first failure display for special symbols, the second failure display for special symbols, and the third failure display for special symbols are different from each other. In addition, a plurality of types of winning displays are set to be finally displayed on the special figure display part 37a in the game round in which the result of the winning/failure determination process is the winning result, but the first to third losing displays for special figures have display contents different from those of the plurality of types of winning displays. Also in the stop result setting process for the outlier result (step S509), the initial display counter 381 for the special figure and the outlier display lottery table 383 for the special figure are used to select the type of outlier display to be displayed in the special figure display unit 37a from the first to third outlier displays for the special figure.

In the special figure loss display lottery table 383, the numerical range of the special figure initial display counter 381 is set for each of the first to third special figure loss display data. Specifically, the numerical value range of the special figure initial display counter 381 is set to "0 to 19" for the first special figure display data, the numerical value range of the special figure initial display counter 381 is set to "20 to 39" for the special figure second blank display data, and the numerical value range of the special figure initial display counter 381 is set to "40 to 59" for the special figure third blank display data. That is, the selection probabilities of the first loss display data for the special figure, the second loss display data for the special figure, and the third loss display data for the special figure in the lottery process for the loss display data for the special figure are the same at "1/3".

In the lottery processing of the special figure out display data, after reading out the special figure out indication lottery table 383, the current numerical information of the special figure initial display counter 381 provided in the non-clearable area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information with a loss display lottery table 383 for a special figure, the display data to be displayed this time is selected from the first loss display data for the special figure, the second loss display data for the special figure and the third failure display data for the special figure.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the out-of-order display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC803). By performing display control of the special figure display section 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the deviation display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special figure display section 37a. That is, when the first loss display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first loss display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display portion 37a, when the second loss display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the second loss display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display portion 37a, and when the third loss display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display portion 37a. The 3rd omission display for special figures is performed.

After that, a lottery process for the lost display data for the normal map is executed (step SC804). In the lottery process of the deviation display data for the normal map, the deviation display lottery table 384 for the normal map stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to. FIG. 198(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the misalignment display lottery table 384 for the normal figure. As shown in FIG. 198(b), there are first deviation display data for normal maps, second deviation display data for normal maps, and third deviation display data for normal maps as the deviation display data for normal maps.

The first failure display data for the normal pattern, the second failure display data for the normal pattern, and the third failure display data for the normal pattern are displayed in the normal pattern display unit 3 in the variable display times of the normal pattern display unit 38a when the result of the general/normal pattern opening lottery executed using the general pattern role release counter C4 to determine whether or not to open the general pattern role object 34a in the general pattern/general pattern control process (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 196) is a failure result. This is the display data for finally causing the 8a to perform the deviation display for the normal map. The first deviation display data for the normal map is data for displaying the first deviation display for the normal map on the normal map display unit 38a, the second deviation display data for the normal map is data for displaying the second deviation display for the normal map on the normal map display unit 38a, and the third deviation display data for the normal map is data for displaying the third deviation display for the normal map on the normal map display unit 38a. The display contents of the first deviation display for normal maps, the second deviation display for normal maps, and the third deviation display for normal maps are different from each other. In addition, a plurality of types of winning displays are set to be finally displayed on the normal pattern display part 38a in the variable display times in which the result of the general electric open lottery is the winning result, but the first to third loss displays for the normal pattern have different display contents from these plural types of winning displays. Also in the normal map normal electric control process (step SC716), the normal map initial display counter 382 and the normal map disconnection display lottery table 384 are used to select the type of disconnection display to be displayed on the normal map display unit 38a from among the first to third disconnection displays for the normal map.

In the deviation display lottery table 384 for the normal pattern, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the normal pattern is set for each of the first to third deviation display data for the normal pattern. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is set to "0 to 19" for the first error display data for the normal map, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is set to "20 to 39" for the second error display data for the normal map, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is set to "40 to 59" for the third error display data for the normal map. That is, the selection probabilities of the first failure display data for the normal pattern, the second failure display data for the normal stroke, and the third failure display data for the normal stroke in the lottery process for the failure display data for the normal stroke are the same at "1/3".

In the lottery processing of the loss display data for the normal map, after reading the loss display lottery table 384 for the normal map, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map provided in the non-clearable area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information against a misalignment display lottery table 384 for a normal diagram, display data to be displayed this time is selected from first misalignment display data for a general diagram, second misalignment display data for a normal diagram, and third misalignment display data for a normal diagram.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the lost display data for the normal figure is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC805). The display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is used to control the display of the normal map display section 38a, so that the deviation display corresponding to the display data is performed in the normal map display section 38a. That is, when the first deviation display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first deviation display for the normal map is performed in the normal map display unit 38a, when the second deviation display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the second deviation display for the normal map is performed in the normal map display unit 38a, and when the third deviation display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the normal deviation display 38a is performed. The 3rd out of line display for the normal map is performed.

After executing the processing of steps SC802 to SC805, the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SC806).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC801 or if the processing of step SC806 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SC807). Like the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is a flag for specifying whether the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display portion 37a, the special figure reservation display portion 37b, the general figure display portion 38a and the general figure reservation display portion 38b, and the display start flag is set to "1".

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" at step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU63 is started special figure display unit 37a, special figure reservation display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, general figure reservation display unit 38b and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the timing before the first execution timing. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 197) executed after the end of the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the time of starting supply of operating power. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are kept in the off state, and the operation power is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 197), as already explained, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), any one of the first to third outlier display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, and any one of the first to third outlier display data for the normal figure is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. Then, a player who sees such a change in the display contents can grasp that the off display is started in the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a in the situation where either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 197), the display start flag is set to "1" after the process of setting the display data is completed, and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

On the other hand, if "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC801: YES), the processing of steps SC802 to SC805 is not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display part 37a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is performed in the special figure display part 37a. When the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the normal map display part 38a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is performed in the normal map display part 38a.

As described in detail above, when the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) when the supply of operating power is started or when the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1". An out indication is initiated at 38a. The deviation display in the special figure display part 37a is continued until the variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display part 37a by the entrance of the game ball to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 and the start condition of the game cycle being satisfied. The missing display in the normal pattern display portion 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display portion 38a is started. In addition, since "1" is not set to the initial display flag 375 even at the shipping stage of the factory, the detachment display is started in the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a.

When the first RAM clear process is executed as described above, and when the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed, when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a When the display is started, these display units 37a and 38 when the supply of the operating power is started and the display is started in the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a Even if the display contents of a are confirmed, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clearing process and the set value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are confirmed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to specify whether the setting value update process has been executed.

When the second RAM clearing process of the first RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process is not executed in the operation power supply start process (step SC201 to step SC223), when the display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the display in the special figure display unit 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. be done. Here, at the closing time of the game hall, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is mostly cut off under the condition that neither the game round nor the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and furthermore, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is almost cut off under the condition that neither the variable display times of the normal figure display part 38a nor the normal electric open state is executed. That is, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped are basically off display. Then, as already described, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power as described above, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. Thereby, even if it is confirmed that the off display is performed in the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to specify that either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed.

In particular, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in a configuration in which there are a plurality of kinds of outlier displays for special figures, the kind of outlier displays selected by lottery from among the plurality of kinds of outlier displays is displayed in a special figure display part 37a. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to specify whether or not to execute either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process from the type of deviation display first displayed on the special figure display part 37a when the supply of the operating power is started.

Similarly, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in a configuration in which a plurality of kinds of outlier displays for the normal figure exist, the outlier display of the kind selected by lottery from among the plurality of kinds of outlier displays is performed in a normal figure display part 38a. This makes it difficult to specify whether or not to execute either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process based on the type of deviation display first displayed on the normal diagram display part 38a when the supply of the operating power is started.

The selection probabilities of the first loss display data for special symbols, the second loss display data for special symbols, and the third loss display data for special symbols in the lottery processing (step SC802) of the loss display data for special symbols executed in the display start processing (FIG. 197) are not limited to the same configuration, but may be substantially the same although slightly different, or may be configured to have significantly different selection probabilities.

Further, the selection probabilities of the first, second, and third failure display data for special symbols in the lottery processing (step SC802) of the failure display data for special symbols executed in the display start processing (FIG. 197) are configured to be the same as the respective selection probabilities of the first, second, and third failure display data for special symbols in a game round in which a failure results. Instead, it may be configured to have substantially the same configuration with slight differences, or to have a configuration with greatly different selection probabilities.

Further, the selection probabilities of the first loss display data for normal maps, the second loss display data for normal maps, and the third loss display data for normal maps in the lottery process (step SC804) for the loss display data for normal maps executed in the display start processing (FIG. 197) are not limited to the same configuration, but may be slightly different but substantially the same, or may be configured to have selection probabilities that differ greatly from each other.

Further, the selection probability of each of the first error display data for normal maps, the second error display data for normal maps, and the third error display data for normal maps in the lottery processing (step SC804) of the error display data for normal maps executed in the display start processing (FIG. 197) is configured to be the same as the selection probability of each of the first error display data for normal maps, the second error display data for normal maps, and the third error display data for normal maps in the variable display times that result in a loss, but this is not limitative. Instead, it may be configured to have substantially the same configuration with a slight difference, or to have a configuration with greatly different selection probabilities.

Further, when the supply of operating power is started, steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start processing (FIG. 197) are executed when the first RAM clear processing is executed, whereas steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start processing (FIG. 197) are not executed when the second RAM clear processing is executed. Further, when the supply of operating power is started, steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start processing (FIG. 197) are executed when the second RAM clear processing is executed, while steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start processing (FIG. 197) are not executed when the first RAM clear processing is executed.

In addition, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first to third loss display data for special figures are selected by lottery in step SC802 of the display start process (FIG. 197). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the removal display data for the special figure to be selected is sequentially changed in a predetermined order such as the first removal display data for the special figure.

In addition, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first to third deviation display data for the normal map are selected by lottery in step SC804 of the display start processing (FIG. 197). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the deviation display data for the normal map to be selected is sequentially changed in a predetermined order such as the first deviation display data for the normal map → . . . .

<Fifty-ninth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the fifty-eighth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifty-eighth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifty-eighth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps SC901 to SC907 in the display start processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

When "1" is not set to the initial display flag 375 (step SC901: NO), lottery processing for initial display data for a special figure is executed (step SC902). In the lottery process of the initial display data for the special figure, the initial display lottery table 385 for the special figure stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to. FIG. 200(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial display lottery table 385 for a special figure. As shown in FIG. 200(a), as the initial display data for the special figure, there are the first winning display data for the special figure, the second winning display data for the special figure, the third losing display data for the special figure, the first winning display data for the special figure, the second winning display data for the special figure, and the third winning display data for the special figure.

The first loss display data for the special figure, the second loss display data for the special figure, and the third loss display data for the special figure are display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process for the loss result (step S509) when the result of the success/failure determination process (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13) is a loss result. In addition, the first winning display data for special figures, the second winning display data for special figures, and the third winning display data for special figures are display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process for big winning results (step S507) when the result of the success/failure determination process (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13) is a winning result. In other words, the first to third loss display data for special figures are display data for finally performing a losing display in the special figure display unit 37a in the game round in which the result of the success/failure determination processing is a loss result, and the first to third winning display data for special figures are display data for finally performing a winning display in the special figure display unit 37a in the game round in which the result of the success/failure determination processing is a winning result.

The first exclusion display data for the special figure is data for displaying the first exclusion indication for the special figure on the special figure display section 37a, the second exclusion display data for the special figure is data for displaying the second exclusion indication for the special figure on the special figure display section 37a, and the third exclusion display data for the special figure is data for displaying the third exclusion indication for the special figure on the special figure display section 37a. In addition, the first winning display data for special figures is data for displaying the first winning display for special figures on the special figure display unit 37a, the second winning display data for special figures is data for displaying the second winning display for special figures on the special figure display unit 37a, and the third winning display data for special figures is data for displaying the third winning display for special figures on the special figure display unit 37a. The first hit display for the special figure is finally displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round in which the result of the winning judgment processing (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 13) is the winning result and the result of the distribution judgment processing (step S506) is the low probability big winning result. In addition, the second winning display for the special figure is finally displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round in which the result of the winning judgment processing (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 13) is the winning result and the result of the distribution judgment processing (step S506) is the low winning high probability big winning result. In addition, the third hit display for the special figure is finally displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round in which the result of the winning judgment processing (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 13) is the winning result and the result of the distribution judgment processing (step S506) is the maximum winning result. The display contents of the first win display for the special figure, the second win indication for the special figure, the third lose indication for the special figure, the first win indication for the special figure, the second win indication for the special figure and the third win indication for the special figure are different from each other.

In the special figure initial display lottery table 385, the numerical range of the special figure initial display counter 381 is set for each of the special figure first to third loss display data and the special figure first to third win display data. Specifically, the numerical value range of the special figure initial display counter 381 is set to "0 to 9" for the first special figure display data, the numerical value range of the special figure initial display counter 381 is set to "10 to 19" for the special figure second odd display data, the numerical value range of the special figure initial display counter 381 is set to "20 to 29" for the special figure third odd display data, and the special figure first hit display data. The numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is set to "30 to 39", the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is set to "40 to 49" for the second winning display data for the special figure, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is set to "50 to 59" for the third winning display data for the special figure. That is, the selection probabilities of the first winning display data for special figures, the second winning display data for special figures, the third winning display data for special figures, the first win display data for special figures, the second winning display data for special figures, and the third winning display data for special figures in the lottery process of the initial display data for special figures are the same at "1/6".

In the lottery processing of the initial display data for the special figure, after reading the initial display lottery table 385 for the special figure, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure provided in the non-clearable area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information with an initial display lottery table 385 for special figures, the display data to be displayed this time is selected from first winning display data for special figures, second winning display data for special figures, third winning display data for special figures, first win display data for special figures, second winning display data for special figures and third winning display data for special figures.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC903). By performing display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the off display or hit display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special figure display unit 37a. That is, when the first loss display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first loss display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display portion 37a, when the second loss display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the second loss display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display portion 37a, and when the third loss display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display portion 37a. The 3rd omission display for special figures is performed. In addition, when the first winning display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first winning display for special figures is performed in the special figure display section 37a, when the second winning display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271, the second winning display for special figures is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and when the third winning display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271, in the special figure display section 37a. A third hit display for the special figure is performed.

Thereafter, lottery processing for initial display data for the normal map is executed (step SC904). In the lottery process of the initial display data for the normal map, the initial display lottery table 386 for the normal map pre-stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to. FIG. 200(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial display lottery table 386 for the normal figure. As shown in FIG. 200(b), as the initial display data for normal maps, there are the first loss display data for normal maps, the second loss display data for normal maps, the third loss display data for normal maps, and the hit display data for normal maps.

The first failure display data for the normal pattern, the second failure display data for the normal pattern, and the third failure display data for the normal pattern are displayed in the normal pattern display unit 3 in the variable display times of the normal pattern display unit 38a when the result of the general/normal pattern opening lottery executed using the general pattern role release counter C4 for determining whether or not to open the general pattern role item 34a in the normal pattern/general pattern control process (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) is a failure result. This is the display data for finally causing the 8a to perform the deviation display for the normal map. In addition, the winning display data for the general map is the display data for causing the general map display unit 38a to finally perform the winning display for the general map in the fluctuation display times of the general map display unit 38a when the result of the general electric open lottery is the winning result.

The first deviation display data for the normal map is data for displaying the first deviation display for the normal map on the normal map display unit 38a, the second deviation display data for the normal map is data for displaying the second deviation display for the normal map on the normal map display unit 38a, and the third deviation display data for the normal map is data for displaying the third deviation display for the normal map on the normal map display unit 38a. Also, the winning display data for the normal figure is data for displaying the winning display for the normal figure on the normal figure display section 38a. The display contents of the first outlier display for normal maps, the second outlier display for normal maps, the third outlier display for normal maps, and the hit display for normal maps are different from each other.

In the initial display lottery table 386 for the general pattern, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the general pattern is set for each of the first to third loss display data for the general pattern and the win display data for the general pattern. Specifically, the numerical value range of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is set to "0 to 14" for the first error display data for the normal map, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is set to "15 to 29" for the second error display data for the normal map, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is set to "30 to 44" for the third error display data for the normal map, and the hit display data for the normal map is set to the numerical range. A numerical range of "45 to 59" for the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is set. In other words, the selection probabilities of the first failure display data for the normal pattern, the second failure display data for the normal pattern, the third failure display data for the normal pattern, and the hit display data for the normal pattern in the lottery process for the initial display data for the normal pattern are the same at "1/4".

In the lottery processing of the initial display data for the normal map, after reading the initial display lottery table 386 for the normal map, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map provided in the non-clearable area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information against an initial display lottery table 386 for the normal figure, the display data to be displayed this time is selected from the first outlier display data for the normal figure, the second outlier display data for the normal figure, the third outlier display data for the normal figure and the winning display data for the normal figure.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC905). The display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is used to control the display of the normal diagram display section 38a, so that the normal diagram display section 38a performs the out-of-order display or hit display corresponding to the display data. That is, when the first deviation display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first deviation display for the normal map is performed in the normal map display unit 38a, when the second deviation display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the second deviation display for the normal map is performed in the normal map display unit 38a, and when the third deviation display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the normal deviation display 38a is performed. When the third losing display for the normal pattern is performed and the winning display data for the normal pattern is set in the third display data buffer 273, the winning display for the normal pattern is performed in the normal pattern display unit 38a.

After executing the processing of steps SC902 to SC905, the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SC906).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC901 or if the process of step SC906 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC907). Like the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is a flag for specifying whether the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" at step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU63 is started special figure display unit 37a, special figure reservation display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, general figure reservation display unit 38b and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the timing before the first execution timing. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 199) executed after the end of the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the time of starting supply of operating power. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the normal figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are kept in the off state, and the operation power is started.

In particular, if the main process (FIG. 185) has been executed in the main process (FIG. 185) as described in the display start process (FIG. 199), the first to third display data for special platforms in the first display data buffer 271 and the first to third hit data for special maps. Configure the third display data buffer 273, and set either the first to third extraction data or the hit data for the regular figure. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the operation power in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a will be displayed immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of power is stopped. Then, a player who sees such a change in the display contents can grasp that the winning display or the winning display is started in the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a in the situation where either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed. On the other hand, when the display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 199), the display start flag is set to "1" after the process of setting the display data is completed, and the display of the special figure display portion 37a and the normal figure display portion 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

On the other hand, if "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC901: YES), the processing of steps SC902 to SC905 is not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display part 37a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is performed in the special figure display part 37a. Further, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the normal map display part 38a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is performed in the normal map display part 38a.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power will be described. FIG. 201 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed in the operation power supply start process (step SC201 to step SC223) or when the second RAM clearing process of the set value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1". Display or winning display is started. Loss display or winning display in the special figure display part 37a is continued until the variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display part 37a by the entrance of the game ball to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied. The loss display or winning display in the normal pattern display portion 38a is continued until the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display portion 38a is started. In addition, since "1" is not set to the initial display flag 375 even at the shipping stage of the factory, the off display or hit display is started in the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a.

When the first RAM clear processing is executed as described above, and when the second RAM clear processing of the setting value update processing is executed, when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a When the display is performed, the operation power supply is started and the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are displayed. , 38a, it is not possible to know which of the first RAM clearing process and the set value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are confirmed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to specify whether the setting value update process has been executed.

When the second RAM clearing process of the first RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process is not executed in the operation power supply start process (step SC201 to step SC223), when the display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the display in the special figure display unit 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. be done. That is, when the second RAM clear processing of the first RAM clear processing and the set value update processing is not executed in the processing (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a will depend on the situation at the timing when the supply of operating power is stopped, and the display content will be various. On the other hand, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing of the setting value update processing is executed in the processing (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. Outgoing display or winning display is determined by lottery and displayed. As a result, even when the second RAM clear process of the first RAM clear process or the setting value update process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of the operating power, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a can be diversified as in the case where the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223). Therefore, even if the display is confirmed when the supply of the operating power is started and the display of the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a is started, it is possible to make it difficult to specify that either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed.

In addition, the display data of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a that can be selected when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power is display data that can be selected during normal games. As a result, while preventing the data capacity of the display data of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a from increasing, the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power. It is possible to diversify the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a.

The selection probabilities of the first winning display data for the special figure, the second winning display data for the special figure, the third losing display data for the special figure, the first winning display data for the special figure, the second winning display data for the special figure, and the third winning display data for the special figure in the lottery process (step SC902) of the initial display data for the special figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 199) are not limited to the configuration in which the respective selection probabilities are the same. A configuration with different selection probabilities may also be used. As a configuration with significantly different selection probabilities, for example, the total selection probability of the first to third winning display data for the special figure may be higher than the total selection probability of the first to third winning display data for the special figure.

In addition, the selection probabilities of the first failure display data for normal maps, the second failure display data for normal maps, the third failure display data for normal maps, and the win display data for normal maps in the lottery process (step SC904) for the initial display data for normal maps executed in the display start processing (FIG. 199) are not limited to the same configuration, but may be slightly different but substantially the same, or may be configured to have significantly different selection probabilities.

Further, the display data selected in the lottery process (step SC902) of the initial display data for the special figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 199) may include the display data for performing the display that is not included in the stop result of the game cycle. Further, the display data selected in the lottery process (step SC904) of the initial display data for the normal figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 199) may include display data for performing a display that is not included in the stop result of the variable display times.

Further, when the supply of operating power is started, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start processing (FIG. 199) are executed when the first RAM clear processing is executed, whereas steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start processing (FIG. 199) are not executed when the second RAM clear processing is executed. Further, when the supply of operating power is started, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start processing (FIG. 199) are executed when the second RAM clear processing is executed, while steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start processing (FIG. 199) are not executed when the first RAM clear processing is executed.

Further, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first to third loss display data for special figures and the first to third winning display data for special figures are selected by lottery in step SC902 of the display start process (FIG. 199). The display data to be selected may be sequentially changed in a predetermined order such as display data → third winning display data for special figures → first winning display data for special figures → second winning display data for special figures → third winning display data for special figures → first winning display data for special figures → .

In addition, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first to third loss display data for normal maps and the first to third winning display data for normal maps are selected by lottery in step SC904 of the display start processing (FIG. 199). The display data to be selected may be sequentially changed in a predetermined order such as display data → third loss display data for normal maps → win display data for normal maps → first loss display data for normal maps → .

<Sixtieth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the fifty-ninth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifty-ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps SD101 to SD115 in the display start processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SD101: NO), the processing of steps SD102 to SD106 is executed. The processing contents of steps SD102 to SD106 are the same as steps SC901 to SC906 of the display start processing (FIG. 199) in the fifty-ninth embodiment. As a result, when the second RAM clear processing of the first RAM clear processing or the set value update processing is executed, similarly to the fifty-ninth embodiment, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started. Outgoing display or hit display is performed.

When "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD101: YES), it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after being stopped during the execution of the game round by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the game round is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SD107). Information indicating that the game round is being executed is stored in the storage area when the game round is started, and information indicating that the game round is being executed is erased from the storage area when the game round is ended. The information in the storage area is stored and held when backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and is stored and held when the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

Further, by referring to the storage area storing information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control, it is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is restarted after being stopped during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SD108). Information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is stored in the storage area when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is erased from the storage area when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated. The information in the storage area is stored and held when backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and is stored and held when the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

When the previous supply of operating power was stopped was neither during execution of the game cycle nor during execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SD107 and step SD108: NO), lottery processing for initial display data for special figures is executed (step SD109). The contents of the lottery process for the initial display data for the special figure are the same as in step SD102, and more specifically, the same as in step SC902 of the display start process (FIG. 199) in the fifty-ninth embodiment. As a result, any one of the first winning display data for special figures, the second winning display data for special figures, the third losing display data for special figures, the first winning display data for special figures, the second winning display data for special figures, and the third winning display data for special figures is selected as the display data for causing the special figure display part 37a to perform the losing display or the winning display when the display of the special figures displaying part 37a is started.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD110). By performing display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the off display or hit display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special figure display unit 37a. That is, when the first loss display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first loss display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display portion 37a, when the second loss display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the second loss display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display portion 37a, and when the third loss display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display portion 37a. The 3rd omission display for special figures is performed. In addition, when the first winning display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first winning display for special figures is performed in the special figure display section 37a, when the second winning display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271, the second winning display for special figures is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and when the third winning display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271, in the special figure display section 37a. A third hit display for the special figure is performed.

On the other hand, when the previous supply of operating power was stopped was either during execution of a game cycle or during execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SD107 or step SD108: YES), the initial display data for the special figure is not set in the first display data buffer 271, so the display data stored before the supply of the operating power was stopped is stored in the first display data buffer 271 as it is. Therefore, when the display in the special figure display section 37a is started, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a just before the supply of the operating power is stopped will be resumed as it is.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SD107, when an affirmative determination is made in step SD108, or when the processing of step SD110 is performed, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power has been stopped while the pattern is being variably displayed in the normal pattern display unit 38a by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the normal pattern display unit 38a in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is being displayed. (Step SD111). The storage area stores information indicating that the variable display of patterns is being executed in the normal pattern display portion 38a when the variable display of patterns is started in the normal pattern display portion 38a, and the information indicating that the variable display of patterns is being executed in the normal pattern display portion 38a is erased from the storage area when the variable display of patterns is ended in the normal pattern display portion 38a. The information in the storage area is stored and held when backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and is stored and held when the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

Further, by referring to the storage area in which the information indicating whether or not the general power disconnection state is being executed is stored in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control, it is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the normal power disconnection state (step SD112). Information indicating that the general electric open state is being executed is stored in the storage area when the general electric open state is started, and information indicating that the general electric open state is being executed is erased from the storage area when the general electric open state is terminated. The information in the storage area is stored and held when backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and is stored and held when the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

When the supply of the operating power last time was stopped was neither during the execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display unit 38a nor during the execution of the normal power open state (step SD111 and step SD112: NO), the lottery process for the initial display data for the normal pattern is executed (step SD113). The contents of the lottery process for the initial display data for the normal figure are the same as in step SD104, and more specifically, the same as in step SC904 of the display start process (FIG. 199) in the fifty-ninth embodiment. As a result, any one of the first loss display data for the normal map, the second loss display data for the normal map, the third loss display data for the normal map, and the hit display data for the normal map is selected as the display data for causing the normal map display unit 38a to perform the losing display or the winning display when the display of the normal map displaying unit 38a is started.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD114). The display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is used to control the display of the normal diagram display section 38a, so that the normal diagram display section 38a performs the out-of-order display or hit display corresponding to the display data. That is, when the first deviation display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first deviation display for the normal map is performed in the normal map display unit 38a, when the second deviation display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the second deviation display for the normal map is performed in the normal map display unit 38a, and when the third deviation display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the normal deviation display 38a is performed. When the third losing display for the normal pattern is performed and the winning display data for the normal pattern is set in the third display data buffer 273, the winning display for the normal pattern is performed in the normal pattern display unit 38a.

On the other hand, when the previous supply of operating power was stopped was either during the execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal diagram display unit 38a or during the execution of the normal power open state (step SD111 or step SD112: YES), the initial display data for the normal diagram is not set in the third display data buffer 273, so the display data stored before the supply of the operating power was stopped is stored in the third display data buffer 273 as it is. Therefore, when the display on the normal map display unit 38a is started, the display contents of the normal map display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped are resumed as they are.

If the process of step SD106 is executed, if the determination is affirmative in step SD111, if the determination is affirmative in step SD112, or if the process of step SD114 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD115). Like the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is a flag for specifying whether the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" at step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU63 is started special figure display unit 37a, special figure reservation display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, general figure reservation display unit 38b and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the timing before the first execution timing. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 202) executed after the end of the operation power supply start process (steps SC201 to SC223). As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the normal figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are kept in the off state, and the operation power is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 202), as already explained, even in the situation where both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the initial display data for the special map may be set in the first display data buffer 271 and the initial display data for the normal map may be set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the initial display will be started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is displayed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. Then, a player who sees such a change in the display contents can understand that the initial display is started in the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a in the situation that both the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 202), the display start flag is set to "1" after the process of setting the display data is completed, and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power will be described. FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of supply of operating power.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed in the operation power supply start process (step SC201 to step SC223) or when the second RAM clearing process of the set value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1". Display or winning display is started. Loss display or winning display in the special figure display part 37a is continued until the variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display part 37a by the entrance of the game ball to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied. The loss display or winning display in the normal pattern display portion 38a is continued until the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display portion 38a is started. In addition, since "1" is not set to the initial display flag 375 even at the shipping stage of the factory, the off display or hit display is started in the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a.

When the first RAM clear processing is executed as described above, and when the second RAM clear processing of the setting value update processing is executed, when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a When the display is performed, the operation power supply is started and the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are displayed. , 38a, it is not possible to know which of the first RAM clearing process and the set value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are confirmed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to specify whether the setting value update process has been executed.

Even if the second RAM clear processing of the first RAM clear processing and the set value update processing is not executed in the processing (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power, the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped When the display is started in the special figure display unit 37a when the display is started in the special figure display unit 37a When the situation is neither during the execution of the game round nor during the execution of the opening and closing execution mode, the off display or the winning display is started in the special figure display unit 37a. Further, even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power, the supply of operating power is stopped. If the situation is neither during the execution of the fluctuation display of the pattern in the normal diagram display unit 38a nor during the execution of the general electric open state, the deviation display or the hit display is started at the normal diagram display unit 38a when the display is started at the normal diagram display unit 38a. Then, as already described, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power as described above, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. Thereby, even if it is confirmed that the loss display or the win display is performed in the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to specify that either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing has been executed.

On the other hand, the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the game round or during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, and the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223). When the display is started in the special figure display part 37a, the display of the special figure display part 37a is controlled to be the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. In addition, the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a or during the execution of the normal open state, and the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) When the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed, the display of the normal map display unit 38a is controlled so that the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started in the normal map display unit 38a. Thus, when the supply of operating power is resumed and the game situation immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is resumed, the display of the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a can be started in a mode corresponding to the restart of the game situation.

In addition, in the lottery process (step SD102, step SD109) of the initial display data for the special figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 202), the selection probabilities of the first winning display data for the special figure, the second winning display data for the special figure, the third losing display data for the special figure, the first winning display data for the special figure, the second winning display data for the special figure, and the third winning display data for the special figure are not limited to the configuration in which the respective selection probabilities are the same. A configuration may be used, or a configuration with greatly different selection probabilities may be used. As a configuration with significantly different selection probabilities, for example, the total selection probability of the first to third winning display data for the special figure may be higher than the total selection probability of the first to third winning display data for the special figure.

Further, the selection probabilities of the first loss display data for normal maps, the second loss display data for normal maps, the third loss display data for normal maps, and the winning display data for normal maps in the lottery processing (steps SD104 and SD113) of the initial display data for normal maps executed in the display start processing (FIG. 202) are not limited to the configuration in which the selection probabilities are the same.

Further, the display data selected in the lottery processing (step SD102, step SD109) of the initial display data for the special figure executed in the display start processing (FIG. 202) may include display data for performing a display that is not included in the game round stop result. In addition, the display data selected in the lottery process (step SD104, step SD113) of the initial display data for the normal map executed in the display start process (FIG. 202) may include display data for performing a display that is not included in the stop result of the variable display times.

Further, when the first RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of operating power is started, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start processing (FIG. 202) are executed, while when the second RAM clear processing is executed, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start processing (FIG. 202) may not be executed. Further, when the supply of operating power is started, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start processing (FIG. 202) are executed when the second RAM clear processing is executed, while steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start processing (FIG. 202) are not executed when the first RAM clear processing is executed.

<Sixty-first Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the fifty-sixth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifty-sixth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifty-sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 204 is a flow chart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps SD201 to SD219 in the display start processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

When "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD201: NO), a lottery target counter provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "7" corresponding to the number of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a (step SD202). The lottery target counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is necessary to execute the processing of steps SD203 to SD207 or the processing of steps SD211 to SD215.

After that, a random number value is acquired from the special figure random number circuit corresponding to the value of the lottery target counter (step SD203). In this embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with a number of special figure random number circuits corresponding to the number of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a. Specifically, since the special figure display unit 37a is provided with seven light emitting units, seven special figure random number circuits are provided. These seven special-figure random number circuits are configured to update the random numbers held by themselves in relatively short periods (for example, 1 microsecond to 7 microseconds) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and to update the random numbers held by themselves in different cycles.

When the seven light emitting parts of the special figure display part 37a are the first to seventh light emitting parts and the seven special figure random number circuits are the first to seventh special figure random number circuits, the first special figure random number circuit corresponds to the first light emitting part, the second special figure random number circuit corresponds to the second light emitting part, the third special figure random number circuit corresponds to the third light emitting part, the fourth special figure random number circuit corresponds to the fourth light emitting part, and the fourth special figure random number circuit corresponds to the fourth light emitting part. The 5 special figure random number circuit corresponds to the 5th light emitting part, the 6th special figure random number circuit corresponds to the 6th light emitting part, and the 7th special figure random number circuit corresponds to the 7th light emitting part. In addition, when the value of the lottery counter is "7", it corresponds to the first light emitting part and the first special figure random number circuit, when the value of the lottery counter is "6", it corresponds to the second light emitting part and the second special figure random number circuit, when the value of the lottery counter is "5", it corresponds to the third light emitting part and the third special figure random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery counter is "4", it corresponds to the fourth light emitting part and the fourth special figure random number circuit. When the value of the lottery counter is "3", it corresponds to the fifth light emitting part and the fifth special figure random number circuit, when the lottery counter value is "2", it corresponds to the sixth light emitting part and the sixth special figure random number circuit, and when the lottery counter value is "1", it corresponds to the seventh light emitting part and the seventh special figure random number circuit. The random number circuits for the first to seventh special figures all have the same numerical range of random numbers (for example, "0 to 255").

After that, a lighting lottery process for a special figure is executed (step SD204). In the special figure lighting lottery process, the special figure lighting lottery table is read from the main ROM 64 . In the special figure lighting lottery table, half of the random numbers that can be obtained in the first to seventh special figure random number circuits are set as winning random numbers. Then, the random number obtained in step SD203 is collated with the lighting lottery table for the special figure.

When the result of the lighting lottery process for the special figure is lighting winning (step SD205: YES), the lighting information is stored in the area corresponding to the current lottery object counter value among the clear object areas 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD206). Each area provided corresponding to the lottery counter is cleared to "0" when the process of step SD202 is executed.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the lottery counter (step SD207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step SD208). If a negative determination is made in step SD208, the processing of steps SD203 to SD207 is executed again.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SD208, the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD209). The initial display data for the special figure is determined by the presence or absence of the lighting information corresponding to the value of the lottery target counter "1" to "7". For example, while the lighting information corresponding to the values of the lottery counter is "7", "5" and "1" is stored, when the lighting information corresponding to the other values of the lottery counter is not stored, the first, third and seventh light emitting units of the special figure display unit 37a are in the light emitting state and the second, fourth, fifth and sixth light emitting units are in the extinguished state. Set in the data buffer 271 .

By using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 to control the display of the special figure display section 37a, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special figure display section 37a. The display contents that can be displayed on the special figure display part 37a as the initial display include the display contents that can be displayed on the special figure display part 37a in the normal game, and the display contents that are not displayed on the special figure display part 37a in the normal game. In addition, the display content that can be displayed on the special figure display unit 37a as an initial display and that can be displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in a normal game includes the special figure loss display that is finally displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round of the loss result and the winning display for the special figure that is finally displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round of the winning result.

After that, the lottery target counter provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "7" corresponding to the number of the light emitting units provided in the general pattern display unit 38a (step SD210).

After that, a random number value is acquired from the normal figure random number circuit corresponding to the value of the lottery target counter (step SD211). In this embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with the number of random number circuits for the general pattern corresponding to the number of light emitting units provided in the general pattern display unit 38a. Specifically, since seven light emitting units are provided in the normal map display unit 38a, seven random number circuits for normal map are provided. When the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, these seven random number circuits for normal drawing update the random number values held by themselves in relatively short periods (for example, 1 microsecond to 7 microseconds) with different periods. Further, even when the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped, the random number value immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped by the supply of backup power can be stored and held.

When the seven light emitting units of the normal map display unit 38a are the first to seventh light emitting units and the seven random number circuits for the normal map are the first to seventh random number circuits, the first random number circuit for the normal map corresponds to the first light emitting unit, the second random number circuit for the normal map corresponds to the second light emitting unit, the third random number circuit for the normal map corresponds to the third light emitting unit, the fourth random number circuit for the normal map corresponds to the fourth light emitting unit, and the fourth random number circuit corresponds to the fourth light emitting unit. The random number circuit for the 5th normal figure corresponds to the fifth light emitting part, the random number circuit for the 6th normal figure corresponds to the sixth light emitting part, and the random number circuit for the 7th normal figure corresponds to the seventh light emitting part. When the lottery target counter value is "7", it corresponds to the first light emitting unit and the first normal figure random number circuit, when the lottery target counter value is "6", it corresponds to the second light emitting part and the second normal figure random number circuit, when the lottery target counter value is "5", it corresponds to the third light emitting part and the third normal figure random number circuit, and when the lottery target counter value is "4", it corresponds to the fourth light emitting part and the fourth normal figure random number circuit. When the value of the lottery object counter is ``3'', it corresponds to the fifth light emitting part and the random number circuit for the 5th normal figure, when the value of the lottery object counter is ``2'', it corresponds to the 6th light emitting part and the random number circuit for the 6th normal figure, and when the value of the lottery object counter is ``1'', it corresponds to the 7th light emitting part and the random number circuit for the 7th normal figure. The random number circuits for the 1st to 7th general-purpose diagrams all have the same numerical range of random numbers (for example, "0 to 255").

After that, the lighting lottery process for the normal figure is executed (step SD212). In the lighting lottery process for the normal map, the lighting lottery table for the normal map is read from the main ROM 64 . Half of the random numbers that can be obtained in the first to seventh random number circuits for the normal pattern are set as winning random numbers in the lighting lottery table for the normal pattern. Then, the random number value obtained in step SD211 is collated with the lighting lottery table for the normal figure.

When the result of the lighting lottery process for the normal figure is lighting winning (step SD213: YES), the lighting information is stored in the area corresponding to the current lottery object counter value among the clear object areas 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD214). Each area provided corresponding to the lottery counter is cleared to "0" when the process of step SD210 is executed.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the lottery counter (step SD215), and it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step SD216). If a negative determination is made in step SD216, the processing of steps SD211 to SD215 is executed again.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD216, the initial display data for the normal drawing is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD217). The initial display data for the normal figure is determined by the presence or absence of lighting information corresponding to the value of the lottery target counter of "1" to "7". For example, if the lighting information corresponding to the values of the lottery target counter is "7", "5" and "1" is stored, but if the lighting information corresponding to other values of the lottery target counter is not stored, the first, third and seventh light emitting units of the normal map display unit 38a are in a light emitting state, and the second, fourth, fifth and sixth light emitting units are in an extinguished state. 3 is set in the display data buffer 273 .

The display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is used to control the display of the normal diagram display section 38a, whereby an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the normal diagram display section 38a. The display contents that can be displayed on the normal pattern display portion 38a as the initial display include display contents that can be displayed on the normal pattern display portion 38a in a normal game, and display contents that are not displayed on the normal pattern display portion 38a in a normal game. In addition, the display content that can be displayed on the normal pattern display unit 38a as an initial display and that can be displayed on the normal pattern display unit 38a in a normal game includes the winning display for the normal pattern that is finally displayed on the normal pattern display unit 38a in the fluctuation display times of the losing result and the winning display for the normal pattern that is finally displayed on the normal pattern display unit 38a in the fluctuation display time of the winning result.

After executing the processing of steps SD202 to SD217, the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SD218).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD201 or if the process of step SD218 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD219). Like the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is a flag for specifying whether the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" at step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU63 is started special figure display unit 37a, special figure reservation display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, general figure reservation display unit 38b and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the timing before the first execution timing. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 204) executed after the end of the operation power supply start process (steps SC201 to SC223). As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the normal figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are kept in the off state, and the operation power is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 204), as already explained, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, and the initial display data for the normal figure is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the initial display will be started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is displayed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. Then, a player who sees such a change in display contents can understand that the initial display is started in the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a in the situation where either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 204), the display start flag is set to "1" after the process of setting the display data is completed, and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

On the other hand, if "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD201: YES), the processing of steps SD202 to SD218 is not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display part 37a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is performed in the special figure display part 37a. Further, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the normal map display part 38a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is performed in the normal map display part 38a.

As described in detail above, when the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) when the supply of operating power is started or when the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1". Initial display begins at 38a. The initial display in the special figure display part 37a is continued until the variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display part 37a by the entry of the game ball into the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied. The initial display in the normal pattern display portion 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display portion 38a is started. In addition, since "1" is not set to the initial display flag 375 even at the shipping stage of the factory, the detachment display is started in the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a.

When the first RAM clear processing is executed as described above, and when the second RAM clear processing of the setting value update processing is executed, when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, the initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a, so that the operation power supply is started and the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a These display units 37a and 38 Even if the display contents of a are confirmed, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clearing process and the set value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are confirmed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to specify whether the setting value update process has been executed.

When the second RAM clearing process of the first RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process is not executed in the operation power supply start process (step SC201 to step SC223), when the display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the display in the special figure display unit 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. be done. That is, when the second RAM clear processing of the first RAM clear processing and the set value update processing is not executed in the processing (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a will depend on the situation at the timing when the supply of operating power is stopped, and the display content will be various. On the other hand, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing of the set value update processing is executed in the processing (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power, the initial display is determined by lottery and displayed in the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. As a result, even when the second RAM clear process of the first RAM clear process or the setting value update process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a can be diversified in the same way as when the second RAM clear process of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process is not performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223). Therefore, even if the display is confirmed when the supply of the operating power is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started, it is possible to make it difficult to specify that either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed.

In particular, when determining the display content of the initial display, the lighting lottery process is executed in units of each light emitting unit for each of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. This makes it possible to diversify the display contents that can be selected as the initial display.

Note that even if the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power is started, the processing of steps SD202 to SD218 of the display start processing (FIG. 204) may be executed. In this case, even if the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are confirmed when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not one of the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of operating power is started. In addition, if the variation display of the pattern is being executed in the special figure display unit 37a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped in the configuration, or if it is in the middle of the opening and closing execution mode, the display start processing (FIG. 204) Steps SD202 to SD209 are not executed, so that the display of the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped may be resumed in the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, if the variation display of the pattern is being executed in the normal figure display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped or if it is in the middle of the normal open state, the display start processing (FIG. 204) Steps SD210 to SD217 are not executed, so that the display of the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped may be resumed in the special figure display unit 37a.

In addition, in the special figure lighting lottery process (step SD204) of the display start process (FIG. 204), instead of performing a lottery as to whether each of the light emitting parts of the special figure display part 37a is individually lit, it may be configured to perform a lottery as to whether or not to light in a predetermined plurality of units such as 2 or 3 pieces. In addition, in the lighting lottery process (step SD212) for the normal pattern of the display start process (Fig. 204), a lottery is performed to determine whether or not each of the light emitting units of the normal pattern display unit 38a is individually lit.

Further, when the supply of operating power is started, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start processing (FIG. 204) are executed when the first RAM clear processing is executed, while steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start processing (FIG. 204) are not executed when the second RAM clear processing is executed. Further, when the supply of operating power is started, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start processing (FIG. 204) are executed when the second RAM clear processing is executed, while steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start processing (FIG. 204) are not executed when the first RAM clear processing is executed.

<Sixty-Second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started are different from those of the fifty-eighth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifty-eighth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifty-eighth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 205 is a flow chart showing the setting value updating process in this embodiment executed at step SC216 in the main process of the main CPU 63 (FIG. 185). It should be noted that the processing of steps SD301 to SD316 in the set value update processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SD301). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt cycle.

In the present embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are basically prohibited in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) when the supply of operating power is started, and the interrupt is permitted in the setting confirmation process (step SC213) and the setting value update process (FIG. 205). Therefore, when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) and the setting value update process (FIG. 205) are not executed in the operation power supply start process (steps SC201 to SC223), execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is prohibited. Execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is permitted. However, when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (Fig. 205) is being executed, the start-up process flag is set to "1", so even if the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 196) is started, the processes for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 196) are executed, but the process for advancing the game is not executed. ) is terminated.

After that, on condition that the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SD302). When the setting update display flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step SC402 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188), thereby executing the setting process (step SC403) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update. The contents of the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update are the same as those of the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing the process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (a), the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the setting value selected as the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, initial setting at the start is performed (step SD303). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". As for the game stop flag, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure (step SC205: NO), if the checksum does not match due to a change in the information storage state from the time of the previous power failure for at least one of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step SC206: NO), or the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is normal. This flag is set to "1" at step SC220 of the main process (FIG. 185) if it is not within the range (step SC207: NO). By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps SC701 to SC706 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196), while the processing of steps SC708 to SC722 is not executed by making an affirmative determination at step SC707. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 65 as described above, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but the processing for progressing the game is not executed. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SD303, it becomes possible to cancel the state in which the occurrence of information abnormality in the main side RAM 65 is specified when the set value update process (Fig. 205) is executed.

Thereafter, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD304). The setting update area 342 is a storage area for storing information about setting values that are being updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 205), as in the forty-fifth embodiment. When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "1", the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is "setting 1". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "2", the setting value to be updated is "setting 2". When the setting update area 342 stores numerical information of "3", the setting value to be updated is "setting 3". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "4", the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "5", the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". When the setting update area 342 stores the numerical value information "6", the setting value to be updated is "setting 6".

By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 in step SD304, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1". That is, in this embodiment, regardless of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10, when the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is started, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1".

Thereafter, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SD305). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 so that the pattern display device 41 displays an image indicating that the setting value update processing (FIG. 205) is being executed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value, and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for ending the setting value update processing (FIG. 205). As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and to recognize the operation content necessary to change the setting value and the operation content necessary to end the setting value update process (Fig. 205). In addition to or instead of the notification being performed by the pattern display device 41, at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 may be configured to perform the notification. Also, an external output indicating that the set value update process (FIG. 205) is being executed may be made to a device outside the pachinko machine 10, such as a game hall management computer.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is any one of "1" to "6" (step SD306). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SD306: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SD307). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD306 or if the process of step SD307 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SD308). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion portion 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Therefore, not only when the setting key inserting section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting key inserting section 68a is in the OFF state and the set value update process is started and the OFF state is maintained, a negative determination is made in step SD308.

If a negative determination is made in step SD308, on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SD309: YES), 1 is added to the value of the setting update area 342 (step SD310). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SD309: NO) or if the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SD306. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

If it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SD308: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 is equal to or greater than the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341, so that the setting value equal to or higher than the advantage of the setting value selected before the current setting value update process (FIG. 205) is started is changed to the current setting value update process (FIG. 2). 05) is selected (step SD311). When an affirmative determination is made in step SD311, the rise expectation flag provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD312). The rise expectation flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether or not a setting value that is higher than the advantage of the setting value that has been selected so far has been set in the processing (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of supply of operating power this time.

If a negative determination is made in step SD311, or if the process of step SD312 is executed, the setting reference area 341 is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 (step SD313). As a result, the information of the setting value updated as a result of the current setting value update processing (Fig. 205) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information becomes the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

After that, the interrupt inhibition is set (step SD314). As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 205) is terminated and the operation power supply start process (steps SC201 to SC223) in the main process (FIG. 185) is resumed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are prohibited.

After that, a second RAM clear process is executed (step SD315). In the second RAM clear process, as in the first RAM clear process (step SC218) of the main process (FIG. 185), the area provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initialization is performed. The area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, the setting reference area 341) is provided not in the clear target area 371 but in the clear non-target area 372. FIG.

After that, a return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SD316). By receiving the return command at the time of updating, the sound emission control device 81 identifies that the processing for starting supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) has ended in the main CPU 63, and also identifies that the set value update processing (FIG. 205) has been executed in the processing for starting supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223). Then, as in the forty-ninth embodiment, the process corresponding to the reception of the update return command is executed.

FIG. 206 is a flow chart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps SD401 to SD413 in the display start processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SD401: NO), it is determined whether or not the rise expectation flag of the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SD402). If the rise expectation flag is not set to "1" (step SD402: NO), the first display distribution table 391 for special figures provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD403).

FIG. 207(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display sorting table 391 for special figures, and FIG. 207(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display sorting table 392 for special figures. First initial display data for special figures, second initial display data for special figures, and third initial display data for special figures exist as initial display data for special figures in both the first display distribution table 391 for special figures and the second display distribution table 392 for special figures.

The first initial display data for special figures is data for displaying the first initial display for special figures on the special figure display unit 37a, the second initial display data for special figures is the second initial display for special figures It is data for displaying on the special figure display unit 37a, and the third initial display data for special figures is data for displaying the third initial display for special figures on the special figure display unit 37a. The display contents of the first initial display for these special figures, the second initial display for special figures and the third initial display for special figures are different from each other.

The first initial display data for the special figure, the second initial display data for the special figure and the third initial display data for the special figure are the stop result setting process for the jackpot result (step S507) and the stop result setting process for the outlier result (step S509) in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13). Therefore, the first initial display for the special figure, the second initial display for the special figure, and the third initial display for the special figure are different from the display contents that can be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game cycle. Furthermore, the first initial display for special figures, the second initial display for special figures, and the third initial display for special figures are display contents that are not selected as display objects when the pattern is displayed in the special figure display section 37a in a game round. As a result, the first initial display for special figures, the second initial display for special figures, and the third initial display for special figures are performed when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started and the display in the special figure display unit 37a is started. It is possible to grasp that either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) when the supply of operating power is started this time.

In each of the first display distribution table 391 for special figures and the second display distribution table 392 for special figures, as shown in FIGS. Since the initial display counter 381 for special figures is provided in the non-clearing area 372 as in the fifty-eighth embodiment, if the supply of backup power to the main RAM 65 is continued in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the state in which the numerical information immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is maintained without being initialized even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed. Also, the numerical value information of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is updated at step SC706 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) as in the fifty-eighth embodiment.

In the first display distribution table 391 for special figures, as shown in FIG. 207(a), the numerical value range of the initial display counter 381 for special figures is set to "0 to 39" for the first initial display data for special figures, the numerical range for the initial display counter 381 for special figures is set to "40 to 54" for the second initial display data for special figures, and the numerical range for the initial display counter 381 for special figures is set to "55 to 59" for the third initial display data for special figures. , the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 is set. That is, in the first display distribution table 391 for special figures, the selection probability is the highest because the selection probability of the first initial display data for special figures is 2/3, the selection probability is the second highest because the selection probability of the second initial display data for special figures is 1/4, and the selection probability is the lowest because the selection probability of the third initial display data for special figures is 1/12.

In the second display distribution table 392 for special figures, as shown in FIG. 207(b), the numerical value range of the initial display counter 381 for special figures is set to "0 to 9" for the first initial display data for special figures, the numerical range for the initial display counter 381 for special figures is set to "10 to 39" for the second initial display data for special figures, and the number range for the initial display counter 381 for special figures is set to "40 to 59" for the third initial display data for special figures. A numerical range of the initial display counter 381 is set. That is, in the second display distribution table 392 for special figures, the selection probability is the highest when the selection probability of the second initial display data for special figures is 1/2, the selection probability is the second highest when the selection probability of the third initial display data for special figures is 1/3, and the selection probability is the lowest when the selection probability of the first initial display data for special figures is 1/6.

Returning to the explanation of the display start processing (Fig. 206), after executing the processing of step SD403 or the processing of step SD404, the lottery processing of the initial display data for the special figure is executed (step SD405). In the lottery process of the initial display data for special figures, the current numerical value information of the initial display counter 381 for special figures is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical information is collated with the first display distribution table 391 for special figures read from the main ROM 64 at step SD403 or the second display distribution table 392 for special figures read from the main ROM 64 at step SD404, thereby selecting the display data to be displayed this time from the first initial display data for special figures, the second initial display data for special figures, and the third initial display data for special figures.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD406). By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special figure display section 37a. That is, when the first initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first initial display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, when the second initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the second initial display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and when the third initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display section 37a. A third initial display for the special figure is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the increase expectation flag of the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SD407). If the rise expectation flag is not set to "1" (step SD407: NO), the first display distribution table 393 for the general map provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD408).

FIG. 207(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display sorting table 393 for the normal map, and FIG. 207(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display sorting table 394 for the normal map. Both the first display distribution table 393 for normal maps and the second display distribution table 394 for normal maps have first initial display data for normal maps, second initial display data for normal maps, and third initial display data for normal maps as initial display data for normal maps.

The first initial display data for normal maps is data for displaying the first initial display for normal maps on the normal map display unit 38a, the second initial display data for normal maps is data for displaying the second initial display for normal maps on the normal map display unit 38a, and the third initial display data for normal maps is data for displaying the third initial display for normal maps on the normal map display unit 38a. The display contents of the first initial display for normal maps, the second initial display for normal maps, and the third initial display for normal maps are different from each other.

The first initial display data for the general pattern, the second initial display data for the general pattern, and the third initial display data for the general pattern are display data that are not selected in any of the cases where the results of the general and general electrical open lottery executed using the general electrical role release counter C4 to determine whether or not the general electrical role item 34a is to be put in the open state in the general and general electrical control processing (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196) are either lost results or winning results. Therefore, the first initial display for the normal map, the second initial display for the normal map, and the third initial display for the normal map are different from the display contents that can be finally stopped and displayed on the normal map display section 38a in the variable display times. Furthermore, the first initial display for the normal map, the second initial display for the normal map, and the third initial display for the normal map are display contents that are not selected as display objects when the variable display of the pattern is performed in the normal map display section 38a in the variable display time. As a result, when any one of the first initial display for the normal map, the second initial display for the normal map, and the third initial display for the normal map is performed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display on the normal map display unit 38a is started, it is possible to grasp that either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process has been executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) when the current supply of operating power is started.

As shown in FIGS. 207(c) and 207(d), in each of the first display distribution table 393 for the normal map and the second display distribution table 394 for the normal map, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is set for each of the first to third initial display data for the normal map. As in the fifty-eighth embodiment, the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is provided in the non-clearable area 372, so if the supply of backup power to the main RAM 65 is continued in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, even if the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing of the setting value update processing is executed, the state in which the numerical information immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is maintained without being initialized. Also, the numerical value information of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is updated at step SC708 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) as in the fifty-eighth embodiment.

In the first display distribution table 393 for normal maps, as shown in FIG. 207(c), the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for normal maps is set to "0 to 29" for the first initial display data for normal maps, the numerical range for the initial display counter 382 for normal maps is set to "30 to 49" for the second initial display data for normal maps, and the range for the initial display counter 382 for normal maps is set to "50 to 59" for the third initial display data for normal maps. , the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 is set. That is, in the first display distribution table 393 for normal maps, the selection probability is the highest because the selection probability of the first initial display data for normal maps is 1/2, the selection probability is the second highest because the selection probability of the second initial display data for normal maps is 1/3, and the selection probability is the lowest because the selection probability of the third initial display data for normal maps is 1/6.

In the second display distribution table 394 for the normal map, as shown in FIG. 207(d), the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is set to "0 to 19" for the first initial display data for the normal map, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is set to "20 to 29" for the second initial display data for the normal map, and the numerical range for the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is set to "30 to 59" for the third initial display data for the normal map. , the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 is set. That is, in the second display sorting table 394 for the normal map, the selection probability is the highest because the selection probability of the third initial display data for the normal map is 1/2, the selection probability is the second highest because the selection probability of the first initial display data for the normal map is 1/3, and the selection probability is the lowest because the selection probability of the second initial display data for the normal map is 1/6.

Returning to the explanation of the display start process (Fig. 206), after executing the process of step SD408 or the process of step SD409, the lottery process of the initial display data for the normal figure is executed (step SD410). In the lottery process of the initial display data for the normal map, the current numerical value information of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical information is collated with the first display distribution table 393 for normal maps read from the main ROM 64 in step SD408 or the second display distribution table 394 for normal maps read from the main ROM 64 in step SD409, thereby selecting the display data to be displayed this time from the first initial display data for normal maps, the second initial display data for normal maps, and the third initial display data for normal maps.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD411). The display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is used to control the display of the normal diagram display section 38a, whereby an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the normal diagram display section 38a. That is, when the first initial display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first initial display for the normal map is performed in the normal map display unit 38a, when the second initial display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the second initial display for the normal map is performed in the normal map display unit 38a, and when the third initial display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the normal map display unit 38a is displayed. The third initial display for the normal map is performed.

After executing the processing of steps SD402 to SD411, the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SD412).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD401 or if the process of step SD412 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD413). Like the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is a flag for specifying whether the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" at step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU63 is started special figure display unit 37a, special figure reservation display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, general figure reservation display unit 38b and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the timing before the first execution timing. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 206) executed after the end of the operation power supply start process (steps SC201 to SC223). As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are kept in the off state, and the operation power is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 206), as already explained, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the first display data buffer 271 is set to any one of the first to third initial display data for the special figure, and the third display data buffer 273 is set to any one of the first to third initial display data for the normal figure. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the initial display will be started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is displayed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 206), the display start flag is set to "1" after the process of setting the display data is completed, and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD401: YES), the processing of steps SD402 to SD412 is not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display part 37a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is performed in the special figure display part 37a. When the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the normal map display part 38a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is performed in the normal map display part 38a.

As described in detail above, when the first RAM clear process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power or when the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1". Initial display begins at 38a. The initial display in the special figure display part 37a is continued until the variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display part 37a by the entry of the game ball into the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied. The initial display in the normal pattern display portion 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display portion 38a is started. In addition, since "1" is not set to the initial display flag 375 even at the shipping stage of the factory, the initial display is started in the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above, and when the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, the initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a These display units 37a and 38 when the supply of the operating power is started and the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a Even if the display contents of a are confirmed, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clearing process and the set value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are confirmed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to specify whether the setting value update process has been executed.

On the other hand, when the set value update process (Fig. 205) is executed and the set value above the advantage of the set value so far is selected in the set value update process (Fig. 205), the second display distribution table 392 for the special figure is selected as a table for determining the initial display to be performed by the special figure display unit 37a. When the set value is not selected, the first display distribution table 391 for special figures is selected as a table for determining the initial display to be performed by the special figure display section 37a. The first display sorting table 391 for these special figures and the second display sorting table 392 for special figures differ in the initial display selection mode. Thus, by confirming the content of the initial display when the supply of the operating power is started and the display of the special figure display part 37a is started, it is possible to predict whether or not the set value above the advantage of the set value so far is newly set.

Similarly, when the set value update process (Fig. 205) is executed and a set value higher than the advantage of the set value so far is selected in the set value update process (Fig. 205), the second display distribution table 394 for the normal chart is selected as a table for determining the initial display to be performed by the normal map display unit 38a. When the set value of the degree or more is not selected, the first display distribution table 393 for the normal map is selected as a table for determining the initial display to be performed by the normal map display unit 38a. The initial display selection mode differs between the first display sorting table 393 for the normal map and the second display sorting table 394 for the normal map. Thus, by confirming the content of the initial display when the supply of the operating power is started and the display of the normal map display part 38a is started, it is possible to predict whether or not a set value higher than the advantage of the previous set value is newly set.

Further, as described above, it is possible to predict whether or not a set value higher than the advantage of the set value so far has been newly set depending on the contents of the initial display when the supply of operating power is started and the display is started. As a result, the number of judgment materials for predicting whether or not a new setting value higher than the advantage of the previous setting value is newly set is increased, so that the accuracy of the prediction by the player can be improved.

In the setting value update process (Fig. 205), when a set value higher than the advantage of the previous set value is set, the rise expectation flag is set to "1", and the second display distribution table 392 for the special figure or the second display distribution table 394 for the normal map is referred to during the lottery for the initial display data. It may be configured such that the second display sorting table 392 for special figures or the second display sorting table 394 for normal figures is set and referenced when the initial display data is selected by lottery, and when the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed, the rise expectation flag is set to "1" regardless of which set value is newly set, and the second display sorting table 392 for special figures or the second display sorting table 394 for normal figures is referenced when the initial display data is selected. .

In addition, the initial display data for special figures that can be selected when referring to the first display sorting table 391 for special figures and the initial display data for special figures that can be selected when referring to the second display sorting table 392 for special figures are not limited to a configuration in which they completely match. A configuration in which the data does not completely match may be used. In this case, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a will be clearly different depending on whether "1" is set to the rise expectation flag in the set value update process (Fig. 205). Therefore, by checking the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not the set value above the advantage of the set value so far has been set.

In addition, although the initial display data for special figures that are common to the first display distribution table 391 for special figures and the second display distribution table 392 for special figures are set, the initial display data for special figures that are set in one of the first display distribution table 391 for special figures and the second display distribution table 392 for special figures and are not set in the other may be present. In this case, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for the special figure set only in the first display sorting table 391 for the special figure is executed in the special figure display part 37a, it is possible to specify that the set value above the advantage of the set value so far is not set. On the other hand, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for the special figure set only in the second display distribution table 392 for the special figure is executed in the special figure display part 37a, it is possible to specify that the set value above the advantage of the previous set value is set.

In addition, the initial display data for the general map that can be selected when the first display sorting table 393 for the general map is referred to and the initial display data for the general map that can be selected when the second display sorting table 394 for the general map is referred to are not limited to a configuration in which the initial display data for the general map that can be selected when the second display sorting table 394 for the general map is referred to completely match. A configuration in which the data does not completely match may be used. In this case, the display contents of the general pattern display section 38a are clearly different depending on whether or not the rise expectation flag is set to "1" in the set value update process (FIG. 205). Therefore, by confirming the display contents of the normal diagram display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not a set value that is higher than the advantage of the set value so far has been set.

In addition, although the initial display data for normal maps is set in common to the first display sorting table 393 for normal maps and the second display sorting table 394 for normal maps, there may be initial display data for normal maps that is set in one of the first display sorting table 393 for normal maps and the second display sorting table 394 for normal maps and is not set in the other. In this case, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for the normal map set only in the first display distribution table 393 for the normal map is executed in the normal map display part 38a, it is possible to specify that the set value above the advantage of the set value up to that time was not set. On the other hand, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for the normal map set only in the second display sorting table 394 for the normal map is executed in the normal map display part 38a, it is possible to specify that the set value is set higher than the advantage of the previous set value.

Also, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the initial display data for special figures is determined by lottery, but only one type of initial display data for special figures is selected when the rise expectation flag is set to ``1'', and only one type of initial display data for special figures is selected when ``1'' is not set to the rise expectation flag, and the initial display data for each special figure may be different. In this case, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a will be different depending on whether or not the set value is set more than the advantage of the set value so far.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the initial display data for the normal map is determined by lottery, and only one type of initial display data for the normal map is selected when the rise expectation flag is set to ``1'', and only one type of initial display data for the normal map is selected when the rise expectation flag is not set to ``1'', and the initial display data for each of the normal maps may be different. In this case, the display contents of the general pattern display section 38a differ depending on whether or not the set value is set to be higher than the advantage of the set value up to that point.

<Sixty-third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the 62nd embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 62nd embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the 62nd embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 208 is a flow chart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . The processing of steps SD501 to SD514 in the display start processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SD501: NO), a lottery process for initial display is executed (step SD502). In the initial display lottery process, the same processes as steps SD402 to SD411 of the display start process (FIG. 206) in the 62nd embodiment are executed. Thus, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing of the setting value update processing is executed, the initial display is performed when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started as in the 62nd embodiment. After that, the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SD503).

When "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD501: YES), it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is resumed after being stopped during the execution of the game round by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the game round is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SD504). Information indicating that the game round is being executed is stored in the storage area when the game round is started, and information indicating that the game round is being executed is erased from the storage area when the game round is ended. The information in the storage area is stored and held when backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and is stored and held when the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

Further, by referring to the storage area storing information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control, it is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is resumed after being stopped during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SD505). Information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is stored in the storage area when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is erased from the storage area when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated. The information in the storage area is stored and held when backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and is stored and held when the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

When the previous supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the execution of the game cycle nor during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SD504 and step SD505: NO), the first display distribution table 391 for special figures is read from the main ROM 64 (step SD506). And, lottery processing of the initial display data for the special figure is executed (step SD507). In the lottery process of the initial display data for special figures, the current numerical value information of the initial display counter 381 for special figures is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information against the first display allocation table 391 for special figures read from the main ROM 64 in step SD506, the display data to be displayed this time is selected from the first initial display data for special figures, the second initial display data for special figures and the third initial display data for special figures.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD508). By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special figure display section 37a. That is, when the first initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first initial display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, when the second initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the second initial display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and when the third initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display section 37a. A third initial display for the special figure is performed.

On the other hand, when the previous supply of operating power was stopped was either during execution of a game cycle or during execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SD504 or step SD505: YES), the initial display data for the special figure is not set in the first display data buffer 271, so the display data stored before the supply of the operating power was stopped is stored in the first display data buffer 271 as it is. Therefore, when the display in the special figure display section 37a is started, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a just before the supply of the operating power is stopped will be resumed as it is.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SD504, when an affirmative determination is made in step SD505, or when the process of step SD508 is executed, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power is stopped while the pattern is being variably displayed in the normal pattern display unit 38a by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the normal pattern display unit 38a in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is being changed is stored. (Step SD509). The storage area stores information indicating that the variable display of patterns is being executed in the normal pattern display portion 38a when the variable display of patterns is started in the normal pattern display portion 38a, and the information indicating that the variable display of patterns is being executed in the normal pattern display portion 38a is erased from the storage area when the variable display of patterns is ended in the normal pattern display portion 38a. The information in the storage area is stored and held when backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and is stored and held when the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

Further, by referring to the storage area in which the information indicating whether or not the normal power disconnection state is being executed is stored in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control, it is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the normal power disconnection state (step SD510). Information indicating that the general electric open state is being executed is stored in the storage area when the general electric open state is started, and information indicating that the general electric open state is being executed is erased from the storage area when the general electric open state is terminated. The information in the storage area is stored and held when backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and is stored and held when the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a nor during the execution of the normal power open state (step SD509 and step SD510: NO), the first display distribution table 393 for the normal map is read from the main side ROM 64 (step SD511). Then, lottery processing for the initial display data for the normal map is executed (step SD512). In the lottery process of the initial display data for the normal map, the current numerical value information of the initial display counter 382 for the normal map is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information against the first display allocation table 393 for the normal map read from the main ROM 64 in step SD511, the display data to be displayed this time is selected from the first initial display data for the normal map, the second initial display data for the normal map and the third initial display data for the normal map.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD513). The display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is used to control the display of the normal diagram display section 38a, whereby an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the normal diagram display section 38a. That is, when the first initial display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first initial display for the normal map is performed in the normal map display unit 38a, when the second initial display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the second initial display for the normal map is performed in the normal map display unit 38a, and when the third initial display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the normal map display unit 38a is displayed. The third initial display for the normal map is performed.

On the other hand, when the supply of the operating power was stopped last time was either during the execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a or during the execution of the normal power open state (step SD509 or step SD510: YES), the initial display data for the normal map is not set in the third display data buffer 273, so the display data stored before the supply of the operating power was stopped is stored in the third display data buffer 273 as it is. Therefore, when the display on the normal map display unit 38a is started, the display contents of the normal map display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped are resumed as they are.

If the process of step SD503 is executed, if the determination is affirmative in step SD509, if the determination is affirmative in step SD510, or if the process of step SD513 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD514). Like the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is a flag for specifying whether the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" at step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU63 is started special figure display unit 37a, special figure reservation display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, general figure reservation display unit 38b and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the timing before the first execution timing. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 202) executed after the end of the operation power supply start process (steps SC201 to SC223). As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the normal figure display unit 38a and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are kept in the off state, and the operation power is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 202), as already explained, even in the situation where both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the initial display data for the special map may be set in the first display data buffer 271 and the initial display data for the normal map may be set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the initial display will be started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is displayed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 208), the display start flag is set to "1" after the process of setting the display data is completed, and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

According to the above configuration, even if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) when the supply of operating power is started, the initial display is started in the special figure display part 37a when the display is started in the special figure display part 37a when the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is neither during the execution of the game round nor during the execution of the opening and closing execution mode. Further, even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) when the supply of operating power is started, the initial display is started in the normal map display unit 38a when the display is started in the normal map display unit 38a when the situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped is neither during the execution of the fluctuation display of the pattern in the normal pattern display unit 38a nor during the execution of the general electric open state. Then, as already described, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power as described above, the initial display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. Thereby, even if it is confirmed that the initial display is performed in the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to specify that either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed.

Further, when the initial display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed, the first display distribution table 391 for special figures and the first display distribution table 393 for general figures are referred to during the lottery processing of the initial display data. Thus, only when the set value update process (Fig. 205) is executed and a set value higher than the advantage of the set value up to that point is newly set, the second display distribution table 392 for the special figure and the second display distribution table 394 for the normal figure can be referred to in the lottery processing of the initial display data. Therefore, even if it is configured such that it is not possible to specify that either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process has been executed as described above, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a When the supply of operating power is started, by checking the contents of the initial display when the display is started, it is possible for the player to predict whether a set value higher than the advantage of the set value so far has been newly set.

On the other hand, the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the game round or during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, and the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223). When the display is started in the special figure display part 37a, the display of the special figure display part 37a is controlled to be the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. In addition, the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a or during the execution of the normal open state, and the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) When the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed, the display of the normal map display unit 38a is controlled so that the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started in the normal map display unit 38a. Thus, when the supply of operating power is resumed and the game situation immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is resumed, the display of the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a can be started in a mode corresponding to the restart of the game situation.

<Sixty-fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fifty-sixth embodiment in the details of game execution. The configuration different from that of the fifty-sixth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifty-sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 209 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

An inner rail portion 401 and an outer rail portion 402 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 401 and the outer rail portion 402 constitute a guide rail as a guide means. A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning portion 411, a first operating portion 412, a second operating portion 413, a through winning portion 414, a distribution winning device 415, a special electric winning device 416, a variable display unit 421, a special figure unit 422, a general figure unit 423, and the like. A total of four general prize winning sections 411 are provided, and the others are provided one each.

Even if a game ball enters the through winning portion 414, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters one of the general winning unit 411, the first operating unit 412, the second operating unit 413, the distribution winning device 415, and the special electric winning device 416, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to increase the number of game media that can be used by the player. Specifically, when a game ball enters the general winning portion 411, 10 game balls are put out. When a game ball enters the first operating portion 412, three game balls are put out. When the balls enter, 15 game balls are put out, and when the game balls enter the special electric prize winning device 416, the same 15 game balls as when the balls enter the sorting prize winning device 415 are put out.

The distribution winning device 415 is provided with a discharge passage region 445b and a V winning passage region 445c as will be described later. A game ball entering the distribution winning device 415 passes through either the discharge passage region 445b or the V winning passage region 445c. Ball payout is executed. In addition, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in the first operating unit 412 and the second operating unit 413 may be the same, and the number of prize balls in the distribution winning device 415 may be more or less than the number of prize balls in the special electric winning device 416.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as windmills.

A variable display unit 421 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 421 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area in which the game balls shot to the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the game area PA, an upper area PA1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 421, a left area PA2 that is an area continuous below the upper area PA1 and to the left of the variable display unit 421, a right area PA3 that is an area continuous below the upper area PA1 and to the right of the variable display unit 421, and continuous below each of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 and below the variable display unit 421. and a lower area PA4.

When the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with a rotation amount in a first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first shooting operation, the game ball starts to flow leftward from the lateral center position in the upper area PA1. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1→left area PA2→lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the shooting operation device 28 in the rotation amount of the second range equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second shooting operation, the game ball starts to flow down to the right of the lateral center position in the upper area PA1. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1→right area PA3→lower area PA4. In other words, the player can play the game so that the game balls flow down in the left side area PA2 of the left side area PA2 and the right side area PA3 by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the shooting operation device 28, and can also play the game so that the game balls flow down in the right side area PA3. Incidentally, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated with the maximum amount of rotation, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper area PA1→right area PA3→lower area PA4.

The first operating part 412 is installed in the lower area PA4. The first operating portion 412 is open upward, and a member such as an opening/closing member for blocking entry of game balls into the first operating portion 412 is not provided. Then, in a situation where game balls are shot in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operating section 412 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating portion 412 is always capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area PA toward the first operating portion 412 . In addition, the first operating portion 412 is arranged directly below the stage 421a formed in the variable display unit 421, and the game balls that flow into the stage 421a through the guide passage formed in the variable display unit 421 and are discharged from the center of the stage 421a in the horizontal direction to the outside of the variable display unit 421 easily win the first operating portion 412. A detection sensor 412a is provided in the first operating portion 412, and a game ball that has won the first operating portion 412 is detected by the detection sensor 412a. The detection sensor 412a is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the first operation unit 412 has won a prize based on the detection result of the detection sensor 412a.

As described above, the first operating portion 412 is provided in the lower area PA4, but on the upstream side of the first operating portion 412 toward the right side area PA3, the regulation nail 24c is provided so as to prevent the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 from reaching the first operating portion 412. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 421a is provided for the left side area PA2 and not provided for the right side area PA3. With these configurations, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, winning to the first operation part 412 is possible, but when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, winning to the first operation part 412 is disabled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the control nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 421a is provided in the right side area PA3, so that even when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, the winning to the first operation unit 412 is possible.

The second operating part 413 is installed in the right area PA3. That is, the second operation part 413 cannot win when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, but can win when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3.

The configuration of the second operating portion 413 will be described with reference to FIG. 210(a). FIG. 210(a) is a longitudinal sectional view of the second operating portion 413 in the non-guiding state. The second operation part 413 includes a base unit 431 formed with a discharge passage 433 for discharging the game balls flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24, and a guide unit 432 for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area PA to the discharge passage 433. An entrance portion 433a of the discharge passage 433 has an opening area equal to or larger than one game ball, and is open toward the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加A detection sensor 434 is provided on the exit portion 433 b side of the discharge passage 433 , and the game ball that has won the second operating portion 413 is detected by the detection sensor 434 . The detection sensor 434 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 , and based on the detection result of the detection sensor 434 , the main CPU 63 identifies whether or not the second operation unit 413 has won a prize.

Guidance unit 432 receives game balls flowing down the front area of entrance part 433a in game area PA from below, guide member 435 for guiding the received game balls into discharge passage 433, guide drive unit 436 for displacing guide member 435 between an initial position that disables the guidance of game balls into discharge passage 433 and a guidance position that enables the guidance, and a discharge passage in a situation where guide member 435 is arranged at the initial position. A blocking member 437 is arranged at a blocking position for blocking the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 433 and arranged at a non-blocking position for not blocking the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 433 under the condition that the guide member 435 is arranged at the guiding position. The guide member 435 and the blocking member 437 are opposed to each other with a predetermined gap in the vertical direction so that the guide member 435 faces downward. A transmission unit 438 is provided to transmit the driving force of the guide driving portion 436 to the guide member 435 and blocking member 437 .

When the guide driving portion 436 is in a non-driving state, the guide member 435 is arranged at the initial position and the blocking member 437 is arranged at the blocking position by the biasing force of biasing means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 435 and blocking member 437 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 433 and do not protrude into the game area PA. As a result, the game ball flowing down in the area in front of the entrance portion 433a of the discharge passage 433 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 433 by the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437, that is, the game ball flows downward in the game area PA without entering the second operating portion 413. Further, since the blocking member 437 is arranged at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the inlet portion 433a of the discharge passage 433 is less than one game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second operating portion 413 when the guide member 435 is located at the initial position.

When the guide driving portion 436 is driven, the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437 are displaced against the biasing force of the biasing means, so that the guide member 435 is placed at the guiding position and the blocking member 437 is placed at the non-blocking position. FIG. 210(b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the second operating portion 413 in the guided state.

When the guide member 435 is arranged at the guiding position, the tip side of the guide member 435 protrudes from the entrance portion 433a of the discharge passage 433 toward the game area PA. This amount of protrusion is such that it is possible to receive from below the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance portion 433a in the game area PA. Since the upper surface of the tip side of the guide member 435 slopes downward toward the entrance portion 433a of the discharge passage 433, the game ball received from below on the tip side of the guide member 435 rolls on the upper surface of the guide member 435 and is guided into the discharge passage 433. In addition, when the blocking member 437 is arranged at the non-blocking position, the tip of the blocking member 437 is displaced to a position higher than the blocking position, so that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide member 435 flows into the discharge passage 433 without interfering with the blocking member 437. As a result, the guide driving portion 436 is driven, and the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance portion 433 a in the game area PA enters the second operating portion 413 . Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the guide driving portion 436 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 435 is in the initial position, and the blocking member 437 is in the blocking position is referred to as the non-guiding state of the guide unit 432 or the closed state of the second operating portion 413, and the state in which the guide driving portion 436 is in the driving state, the guide member 435 is in the guiding position, and the blocking member 437 is in the non-blocking position is in the guided state of the guiding unit 432 or the open state of the second operating portion 413. called state.

The second operating portion 413 has a cover member 439 that faces the inlet portion 433a of the discharge passage 433 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The cover member 439 is formed in the shape of a gate so as to form a vertical passage portion 439a in the area in front of the entrance portion 433a in the game area PA, and is provided so as to limit the number of game balls passing through the area in front of the entrance portion 433a at the same time to one and to restrict the movement of the game ball in the front and lateral directions of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, when the guiding unit 432 of the second operating part 413 is in the guided state, a plurality of game balls are prevented from being guided into the discharge passage 433 of the second operating part 413 at the same time, and in the guided state, the game balls passing through the front area of the entrance part 433a can be reliably guided into the discharge passage 433. The guide drive section 436 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 , and the drive control of the guide drive section 436 is executed by the main CPU 63 .

As shown in FIG. 209, a through winning section 414 is provided above the second operating section 413 in the right area PA3. In other words, the through winning part 414 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, but can win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. The through winning portion 414 has a through-hole extending vertically. In addition, a second operating portion 413 is provided at a position vertically below the through winning portion 414, and a special electric winning device 416 and a distribution winning device 415 are provided downstream of the second operating portion 413 in the right area PA3. Therefore, the game ball that has won the through prize winning section 414 can win the second operation section 413 , the special electric prize winning device 416 or the sorting prize winning device 415 .

A right area PA3 in which the second operating part 413 and the through winning part 414 are collectively arranged is defined by a side wall 421b protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 in the variable display unit 421 on the left side, and defined by a regulation wall provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and projecting forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 on the right side. The right side area PA3 is set to have a lateral dimension narrower than that of the lower side area PA4, and the lateral dimension is such that it is impossible to arrange game ball entry devices in the lateral direction at the same height position. As a result, it becomes possible to limit the flow path of the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 to a predetermined range, and the game ball is likely to enter the second operating portion 413 and the through winning portion 414 .

The arrangement of the plurality of nails 24b on the upstream side of the through winning portion 414 in the right area PA3 is set so as to guide the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the through winning portion 414. FIG. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 can easily enter the through winning portion 414, and can easily enter the second operating portion 413 as the ball can easily enter the through winning portion 414.例文帳に追加The through winning portion 414 is provided with a detection sensor 414a, and the game ball that has won the through winning portion 414 is detected by the detection sensor 414a. The detection sensor 414a is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not there is a prize in the through prize winning section 414 based on the detection result of the detection sensor 414a.

The guiding unit 432 of the second operating section 413 is switched from the non-guiding state to the guiding state based on the winning of the through prize winning section 414 . Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with the win to the through winning part 414 as a trigger, and the pattern is displayed in the normal pattern display part 423a of the normal pattern unit 423 provided in the lower left corner, which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is winning of the induction execution state, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the pattern in the general pattern display section 423a is finished, the transition to the induction execution state is made. In the guidance execution state, the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state in a predetermined manner.

The normal figure display section 423a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 424 in the normal map display unit 423a, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the normal map display unit 423a. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the normal figure display unit 423a, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed.

In the normal map unit 423, a normal map reservation display unit 423b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal map display unit 423a. The number of game balls that have won through prize winning section 414 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of normal figure reservation display section 423b. The normal map display unit 423a and the normal map reservation display unit 423b are electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 controls the display of the normal map display unit 423a and the normal map reservation display unit 423b.

Incidentally, the display range of the normal pattern display section 423a is narrower than the display surface of the pattern display device 424. FIG. Furthermore, the display range of both the normal pattern display portion 423a and the normal pattern reservation display portion 423b is also narrower than the display surface of the pattern display device 424. FIG. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the pattern display device 424 rather than the normal pattern display unit 423a and the normal pattern reservation display unit 423b.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of modes are set as support modes so that the occurrence frequency of the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 is different. Specifically, in the support mode, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the guidance unit 432 in the guidance state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in a situation where game balls are continued to be shot in a similar manner to the game area PA.

The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have the same probability (specifically, 4/5) of winning the induction state in the induction state lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the through-winning part 414, but the high-frequency support mode is set such that the number of times the induction unit 432 is brought into the induction state when the induction state is won is set larger than that of the low-frequency support mode, and the upper limit induction period in which the induction unit 432 is maintained in the induction state in one induction control execution is set longer. In this case, when the guidance state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 occurs a plurality of times, the closing period from the end of one guidance state to the start of the next guidance state is set shorter than the one-time upper limit guidance period. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode in the minimum secured time (that is, the display continuation time of one pattern variation display in the normal pattern display part 423a) after one induction state lottery is performed and the next induction state lottery is performed.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating unit 413 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation unit 412 is higher than that of the second operation unit 413, but in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation unit 413 is higher than that of the first operation unit 412. When a prize is awarded to the second operation part 413, a predetermined number of game balls are put out, so that in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has.

The configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequent than the low-frequency support mode to be in the induced state per unit time is not limited to the above, and may be configured to increase the probability of winning the induced state in the induced state lottery, for example. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of secured time (for example, time of variable display executed by the normal figure display unit 423a based on the winning of the through prize winning unit 414) are prepared after one guidance state lottery is performed and the next guidance state lottery is performed, the high frequency support mode may be set so that a shorter secured time is more likely to be selected than the low frequency support mode, or the average secured time is shorter. Furthermore, the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one of the following conditions: increasing the number of times the induction state is executed; lengthening the upper limit induction period; shortening the secured time secured after one guidance state lottery is performed; shortening the average time of this secured time; and increasing the winning probability.

A winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the first operating portion 412 or the second operating portion 413 . When the winning lottery is carried out, the special figure unit 422 performs the variable display of the pattern, and finally the result corresponding to the winning lottery result is displayed.

The special figure unit 422 is provided at a lower right corner of the game area PA at a position where the game ball does not flow forward. Also, the special figure unit 422 is provided at a position that can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 even when the front door frame 14 is arranged at the closed position. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can see the display contents of various display parts 425 to 429 provided in the special figure unit 422 without requiring the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 and the opening operation of the front door frame 14.

FIG. 209(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special figure unit 422. FIG. For the special figure unit 422 in detail, the special figure unit 422 is provided with a first special figure display section 425 and a second special figure display section 426 . In the first special figure display part 425, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of winning to the first operation part 412, and the fluctuation display of the pattern is performed, and finally the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, in the second special figure display part 426, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of the prize winning to the second operation part 413 to display the variation of the pattern, and finally the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The period from when the variable display of the pattern is started in either the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426 to the time when the variable display of the pattern is finished after displaying a predetermined result corresponds to one game cycle.

The first special figure display unit 425 includes seven display segments 425a. Each of these display segments 425a is formed in a bar shape and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. These seven display segments 425a are arranged so that the first special figure display portion 425 becomes a so-called 7-segment display. The first special figure display unit 425 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main side CPU 63 individually controls lighting and extinguishing of each display segment 425a. Although it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 424 in the first special figure display unit 425, the processing load for controlling the display of the first special figure display unit 425 can be reduced.

The display segments 425a may be formed in a circular shape, and the display segments 425a may be arranged linearly or circularly. Also, the first special figure display unit 425 may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the first special figure display unit 425, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed.

The second special figure display section 426 has seven display segments 426a. Each of these display segments 426a is formed in a rod shape and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. These seven display segments 426a are arranged so that the second special figure display portion 426 becomes a so-called 7-segment display. The second special figure display unit 426 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main side CPU 63 individually controls lighting and extinguishing of each display segment 426a. Although it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 424 in the second special figure display unit 426, the processing load for controlling the display of the second special figure display unit 426 can be reduced.

The display segments 426a may be formed in a circular shape, and the display segments 426a may be arranged linearly or circularly. Also, the second special figure display unit 426 may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the second special figure display unit 426, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed can be considered.

In the special figure unit 422 , a first special figure reservation display section 427 is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display section 425 . The number of winning game balls in the first operating section 412 is reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display section 427. - 特許庁Further, a second special figure reservation display portion 428 is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display portion 426 . The number of winning game balls in the second operating section 413 is reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display section 428. - 特許庁The first special figure reservation display unit 427 and the second special figure reservation display unit 428 are electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the display control of the first special figure reservation display unit 427 and the second special figure reservation display unit 428 is executed by the main side CPU 63.

In the special figure unit 422 , a special display section 429 is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display section 426 . When an opening/closing execution mode in which a special electric prize winning device 416 is opened is started, the display of the special display part 429 is controlled so as to be in a predetermined display state, and when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game cycle is started, the special display part 429 is display-controlled so that the predetermined display state is finished and turned off.

The special display section 429 has seven display segments 429a. Each of these display segments 429a is formed in a bar shape and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. These seven display segments 429a are arranged so that the special display portion 429 serves as a so-called seven-segment display. The special display unit 429 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 individually controls lighting and extinguishing of each display segment 429a. Although the special display portion 429 cannot perform a complicated display like the pattern display device 424, the processing load for controlling the display of the special display portion 429 can be reduced.

The display segments 429a may be formed in a circular shape, and the display segments 429a may be arranged linearly or circularly. Also, the special display section 429 may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as the content displayed in the special display portion 429, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed can be considered.

The display range of the first special figure display portion 425 and the second special figure display portion 426 is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 424 . In addition, the entire display range of the first special figure display unit 425, the second special figure display unit 426, the first special figure reservation display unit 427, the second special figure reservation display unit 428 and the special display unit 429 is also a narrower range than the display surface of the design display device 424. Thereby, the player's attention to the symbol display device 424 can be increased more than the first special figure display portion 425, the second special figure display portion 426, the first special figure reservation display portion 427, the second special figure reservation display portion 428 and the special display portion 429.

When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display part 425 or the second special figure display part 426, that is, when the game round is executed, the display effect is performed in accordance with it in the pattern display device 424 provided in the variable display unit 421.例文帳に追加In addition, in the pattern display device 424, not only the display performance triggered by the winning of the first operation part 412 or the second operation part 413, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode which shifts after the result of the big win, the display performance during the distribution execution mode which shifts after the result of the small win, etc. are performed. In addition, in the open/close execution mode, distribution execution mode, and high-frequency support mode, the pattern display device 424 displays a right hitting notification image for notifying that the game ball should be shot aiming at the right area PA3.

The pattern display device 424 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by the display control device 82 . The pattern display device 424 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device.

The contents of the display effect performed by the symbol display device 424 during execution of the game round will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 424 when a game cycle is executed.

As shown in FIG. 211(a), the display surface of the pattern display device 424 is provided with three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower rows as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. In other words, when a game round is executed, the entire display surface of the symbol display device 424 is used to perform the variable display of symbols.

FIG. 212 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the main symbols and sub-symbols that are variably displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As shown in FIGS. 212(a) to 212(j), the pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and secondary patterns consisting of shell-shaped patterns. More specifically, nine types of character patterns such as an octopus are assigned numbers '1' to '9' to form main patterns.

As shown in FIG. 211(b), in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle pattern row Z2, 9 kinds of main patterns of '1' to '9' are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then '4' main pattern is additionally arranged between the '9' main pattern and the '1' main pattern, and one sub-pattern is arranged between each of these main patterns. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display surface, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The symbol display device 424 stops and displays three symbols for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3×3 are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 211(a), the pattern display device 424 is provided with five effective lines, ie, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5.

When the variable display of the symbols is performed on the display surface based on the winning of the first operating part 412 or the second operating part 413, the variable display is started so that the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, basically, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of upper pattern row Z1→lower pattern row Z3→middle pattern row Z2, and finally, predetermined patterns are displayed still in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and finished. Further, when the fluctuation display of symbols is finished, if the result of the internal lottery is a 15R jackpot result to be described later, a combination of "7" symbols is formed on any of the activated lines, if the result of the internal lottery is a 6R jackpot result to be described later, a combination of the same odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol is formed on any of the activated lines, and if the result of the internal lottery is any of the first to third small winning results to be described later, the same even-numbered symbol is formed on any of the activated lines. A combination of symbols is formed.

As described above, in the configuration in which the symbols are varied and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, an expected effect is set as the display effect of the symbol display device 424 when the game cycle is executed. The expected performance means a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in a big win in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbols in the pattern display device 424 is started. There are two types of expectation effects: a ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the occurrence of a big win in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

The ready-to-win display includes a display state in which a combination of ready-to-win patterns is displayed by stopping and displaying patterns of the same kind in an upper pattern row Z1 and a lower pattern row Z3 among a plurality of pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and in this state, patterns are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining middle pattern row Z2. In addition, in a state where the combination of ready-to-win patterns is displayed as described above, patterns are varied in the remaining pattern rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform a ready-to-win effect. The same kind of pattern as the pattern forming the combination of the ready-to-win patterns is stop-displayed on the ready-to-win line in the middle pattern row Z2 in the case of the game round resulting in the big win result or the small win result, and the pattern different in kind from the pattern forming the combination of the ready-to-win pattern is stop-displayed on the ready-to-win line in the middle pattern row Z2 in the game round not to result in either the big win result or the small win result.

The advance notice display includes a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the patterns on the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 in a situation where the patterns are variably displayed in all the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 after the pattern columns are variably displayed in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3, or in a situation in which the patterns are variably displayed in a plurality of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 of some of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. In addition, it also includes a background screen in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such advance notice display can occur in any game cycle when the ready-to-win display is performed and when the ready-to-win display is not performed, but is set to occur with a higher probability when the ready-to-win display is performed than when not to be performed.

When either the 6R big win result or the 15R big win result is selected in the internal lottery executed based on the winning of the first operating part 412 or the second operating part 413, the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to after the game round corresponding to the big winning result is finished. In the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to win a prize to the special electric prize winning device 416 . As shown in FIG. 209, the special electric winning device 416 is provided at a position below the second operating portion 413 and above the distribution winning device 415 in the right area PA3. That is, the special electric prize winning device 416 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, but can win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3.

As shown in FIG. 209, the special electric prize winning device 416 includes a large prize winning opening 416a formed in a size through which game balls can pass, and a special electric side opening/closing member 416b for switching the large prize winning opening 416a between a closed state in which game balls cannot pass and an open state in which game balls can pass. The special electric side opening/closing member 416b is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the special electric drive unit 416c. A special electric prize winning device 416 is provided with a game ball passage with a large prize winning port 416a serving as an entrance portion, and a game ball flowing into the game ball passage through the special electric prize winning port 416a is discharged to the rear of the game board 24 after being detected by a special electric prize winning detection sensor 416d provided in the game ball passage. The special electric prize detection sensor 416d is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not the special electric prize winning device 416 has won a prize based on the detection result of the special electric prize detection sensor 416d. In addition, the special electric drive unit 416c is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main side CPU 63 executes drive control of the special electric drive unit 416c.

In the open/close execution mode, a round game is executed a plurality of times (specifically, 5 times, 6 times, 8 times, 14 times or 16 times). A round game is a game that continues until either condition that the number of opening/closing times of the special electric prize winning device 416 reaches the upper limit or that a predetermined upper limit winning number of game balls wins the special electric prize winning device 416 is satisfied. In this embodiment, the opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 416 is performed once in one round game, and the open continuation period in each round game is set to 29 seconds. Also, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electric winning device 416 is set to ten. When the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds, so that the open continuation period of the round game is set to a time longer than the product of the shooting period of the game balls and the upper limit winning number of one round game. Therefore, it can be expected that game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number of winning prizes will be won by the special electric prize winning device 416 in each round game.

When any one of the results of the first small winning to the third small winning is selected in the internal lottery executed based on the prize winning to the second operating part 413, the mode is shifted to the distribution execution mode after the game round corresponding to the small winning result is finished. In the distribution execution mode, winning to the distribution winning device 415 becomes possible.

As shown in FIG. 209, the distribution winning device 415 is provided at a lower position than the special electric winning device 416 in the right area PA3. In other words, the distribution prize winning device 415 cannot win prizes when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game balls flow down the left side area PA2, but can win prizes when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game balls flow down the right side area PA3.

The configuration of the distribution winning device 415 will be described with reference to FIG. 213 in addition to FIG. FIG. 213 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the distribution winning device 415. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 209, the distribution winning device 415 is provided with a distribution entrance 441 having a size through which game balls can pass, and a distribution side opening/closing member 442 for switching the distribution entrance 441 between a closed state in which game balls cannot pass and an open state in which game balls can pass. The distribution side opening/closing member 442 is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the driving section 443 for the distribution entrance. The drive unit 443 for the distribution entrance is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 , and the drive control of the drive unit 443 for the distribution entrance is executed by the main CPU 63 .

A game ball that has entered the distribution entrance 441 is guided to a branch passage 445 formed in a base body 444 of the distribution winning device 415, as shown in FIG. The branch passage 445 includes an upstream passage area 445a set so that the passage direction slopes downward in the lateral direction from the entrance portion of the branch passage 445 to the middle position of the branch passage 445, a discharge passage area 445b which is continuous with the downstream end of the upstream passage area 445a and is set so that the passage direction is vertically downward, and a game ball which is provided by branching from the middle position of the discharge passage area 445b to a side different from the discharge passage area 445b. It has a V winning path area 445c for guiding. In this case, since the dimension of the upstream passage area 445a in the direction perpendicular to the passage direction is equal to or more than one game ball and less than two game balls, the game balls are prevented from passing through the upstream passage area 445a in a state in which a plurality of game balls are arranged in the direction perpendicular to the passage direction. Therefore, it is prevented that a plurality of game balls simultaneously reach the branch position to the V winning path area 445c in the discharge path area 445b.

A switching piece 446 for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the discharge path area 445b to the V winning path area 445c is provided at the branch point of the discharge path area 445b to the V winning path area 445c. The switching piece 446 is rotatably supported in a region opposite to the V winning passage region 445c side of the base body 444 with respect to the discharge passage region 445b, and is displaceable between a retreat position where the entirety is retreated outside the discharge passage region 445b and a V guiding position where it protrudes into the discharge passage region 445b. A driving force of a switching driving portion 447 is transmitted to the switching piece 446 through a transmission unit (not shown). Switching piece 446 is placed at the retracted position by the urging force of an urging means such as a spring (not shown) when switching drive unit 447 is in the non-driving state. The switching driving portion 447 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 , and the driving control of the switching driving portion 447 is executed by the main side CPU 63 .

When the switching piece 446 is arranged at the retracted position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 445 flows down the discharge passage region 445b without being guided to the V prize passage region 445c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 24 after being detected by a count detection sensor 448 provided downstream of the branch position of the switching piece 446 in the discharge passage area 445b. The count detection sensor 448 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 , and based on the detection result of the count detection sensor 448 , the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not the count detection sensor 448 detects a game ball.

On the other hand, when the switching piece 446 is arranged at the V guide position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 445 is received by the switching piece 446 from below. The upper surface of the switching piece 446 in the state of being arranged at the V guide position slopes downward toward the V winning path area 445c. As a result, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 446 flows into the V winning path area 445c due to its own weight, and flows down the V winning path area 445c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 24 after being detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 provided in the V winning path area 445c. The V winning detection sensor 449 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and based on the detection result of the V winning detection sensor 449, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning path area 445c.

When the distribution side opening/closing member 442 is in an open state, the period in which the open state is maintained is constant at 10 seconds, which is a period longer than the shooting cycle of the game balls, and the upper limit winning number of game balls that can enter the distribution winning device 415 in the distribution execution mode is fixed at 10.例文帳に追加Further, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In addition, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 reaches the position of the distribution side opening/closing member 442 unless it enters the second operating portion 413 or the special electric winning device 416 on the way. Then, when the distribution side opening/closing member 442 is in an open state, if the shooting of the game balls is continued so that the game balls flow down toward the distribution winning device 415, the distribution winning device 415 can be made to win game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number of winning prizes.

On the other hand, the switching piece 446 is moved from the retracted position to the V-guided position two seconds after the distribution-side opening/closing member 442 is opened, and is held at the V-guided position for 12 seconds thereafter. Then, when 12 seconds have passed, the vehicle returns from the V guidance position to the retracted position. In this case, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player as described above, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Therefore, at the timing when the switching piece 446 is arranged at the V guide position, the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 415 has not yet reached the upper limit winning number of the distribution execution mode, and the opening state of the distribution side opening/closing member 442 is maintained. Further, as described above, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 reaches the position of the distribution side opening/closing member 442 unless it hits the second operating portion 413 or the special electric winning device 416 on the way. Therefore, when the distribution side opening/closing member 442 is in an open state, if the game balls continue to be shot so that the game balls flow down toward the distribution winning device 415, the switching piece 446 is arranged at the V guide position at the timing when the game ball winning the distribution prize winning device 415 reaches the position of the switching piece 446 after 2 seconds have passed since the distribution side opening/closing member 442 is in the open state. Therefore, basically, the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 in the distribution execution mode.

The same number of prize balls corresponding to the sorting prize winning device 415 is paid out regardless of whether the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 448 or the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 449. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 in the distribution execution mode, the opening and closing execution mode occurs after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, when the distribution execution mode ends without the game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor 449, the opening/closing execution mode does not occur.

Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

During the game, the main CPU 63 uses various counter information to set the winning lottery, the display settings of the special figure display units 425 and 426, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 424, the setting of the display of the normal figure display unit 423a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. A reach random number counter C3 used for a reach generation lottery when 424 fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of a hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS for determining the display continuation period of game rounds in special figure display parts 425, 426 and a pattern display device 424 are used. Furthermore, it is supposed to use the general electric accessory open counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the guidance unit 432 of the second operation unit 413 is to be in the guidance execution state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure reservation area 451 provided in the main side RAM 65 when the winning to the first operation unit 412 or the second operation unit 413 occurs. The special figure reservation area 451 includes a first special figure reservation area 452, a second special figure reservation area 453, and an execution area 454 for special figures.

The first special figure reservation area 452 includes a first area 452a, a second area 452b, a third area 452c and a fourth area 452d, and according to the winning history to the first operation unit 412, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 452a to 452d as the reservation information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d, when the winning of the first operation unit 412 occurs a plurality of times in succession, each numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the first area 452a→second area 452b→third area 452c→fourth area 452d. Since the four areas 452a to 452d are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating section 412 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3 or 5 or more, or may be singular.

The second special figure reservation area 453 includes a first area 453a, a second area 453b, a third area 453c and a fourth area 453d, and according to the winning history to the second operation unit 413, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 453a to 453d as the reservation information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d, each numerical value information is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area 453a→second area 453b→third area 453c→fourth area 453d when winning to the second operation unit 413 occurs a plurality of times in succession. By providing four areas 453a to 453d in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the second operation unit 413 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 453 is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3 or 5 or more, or may be singular.

Execution area 454 for the special figure is an area in which reservation information of the target for the propriety determination and type determination for the special figure when starting the variable display in one of the special figure display units 425 and 426 is stored. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the first special figure display unit 425, the reservation information stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure reservation area 452 is moved to the special figure execution area 454. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the 2nd special figure display part 426, the reservation information stored in the 1st area 453a of the 2nd special figure reservation area 453 is moved to the execution area 454 for special figures. In the following description, the reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 452 and the reserved information moved from the first special figure reserved area 452 to the special figure execution area 454 are referred to as the first special figure side reserved information, and the reserved information stored in the second special figure reserved area 453 and the reserved information moved from the second special figure reserved area 453 to the special figure execution area 454 are referred to as the second special figure side reserved information.

Information corresponding to the general electronic role release counter C4 is stored in the general pattern reservation area 455 provided in the main side RAM 65 when a prize to the through prize winning section 414 occurs. The general pattern reservation area 455 includes a first area 455a, a second area 455b, a third area 455c and a fourth area 455d, and according to the winning history to the through prize winning section 414, the numerical information of the general pattern role release counter C4 is stored in one of the areas 455a to 455d as reservation information on the general pattern side. In this case, numerical information is stored in the first area 455a to the fourth area 455d in chronological order in the order of the first area 455a→second area 455b→third area 455c→fourth area 455d when winning to the through winning part 414 occurs a plurality of times in succession. Since the four areas 455a to 455d are provided in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the through winning section 414 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the normal drawing reservation area 455 is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3 or 5 or more, or may be singular.

The normal map reservation area 455 is provided with an execution area 456 for the normal map. The execution area 456 for the normal map is an area for storing holding information of a target for conducting a guidance state lottery for determining whether or not to put the guidance unit 432 in the guidance state when starting variable display in the normal map display unit 423a. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 423a is started, the reservation information stored in the first area 455a of the normal map reservation area 455 is moved to the execution area 456 for the normal map.

Each of the above counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 will be explained in detail.

First, the universal electrical role item release counter C4 will be described. The general electric role item release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the general pattern reservation area 455 of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the through prize winning section 414. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a guidance state lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the guidance unit 432 to the guidance state based on the stored value of the general electric role item open counter C4. As already explained, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set as the support mode of the guidance unit 432 (that is, the support mode of the second operating section 413), and the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 (the open state of the second operating section 413) is controlled in a manner corresponding to the type of support mode at that time.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9999, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 9999). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the special figure reservation area 451 of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation part 412 or the second operation part 413. Then, using the stored value of the hit random number counter C1, the win/fail determination process is performed.

The values of the random numbers that are selected in the winning/failure determination process are stored in the main ROM 64 as a winning/failure table. As a right/wrong table, a right/wrong table 461 of the first special figure is provided corresponding to the reservation information of the first special figure, and a right/wrong table 462 of the second special figure is provided corresponding to the reservation information of the second special figure. In addition, in this embodiment, there are not a plurality of types of modes that differ in the probability of a big winning result as a win/fail lottery mode, but one type of mode is set so that the probability of a big winning result is constant if the set value is the same.

FIG. 215(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first special figure right/wrong table 461, and FIG. 215(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second special figure right/wrong table 462. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 215(a) and 215(b), the success/failure results of the success/failure determination process include a big win result, a small win result, and a losing result. The jackpot result is a winning/failing result that can serve as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 416 is controlled to open/close, as well as a trigger for shifting to the support mode. The small winning result is a trigger for shifting to a distribution execution mode in which the distribution prize winning device 415 is controlled to open and close, and when a V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode, a transition to the opening and closing execution mode and the support mode is triggered. The deviation result is a pass/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the distribution execution mode, and does not trigger a transition to the support mode as well.

As shown in FIG. 215(a), the big hit result and the off result are set as the judgment result of the hit/fail judgment process in the hit/fail table 461 of the first special figure, but the small hit result is not set. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states of 'setting 1' to 'setting 6', and the setting is made so that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a big winning result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a losing result.

Specifically, 50 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, which is the result of a big win, and 9,950 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, which is the result of losing, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest set value. In addition, 52 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a big win and 9948 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of losing in the 'setting 2' which is a set value one step higher than the 'setting 1'. In addition, in "setting 3" which is a set value one step higher than "setting 2", 54 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a big winning result, and 9946 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a losing result. In addition, 56 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, and 9944 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of losing in the 'setting 4' which is a set value one step higher than the 'setting 3'. In addition, 58 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, and 9942 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of losing in the 'setting 5' which is a set value one step higher than the 'setting 4'. In addition, 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a big win, and 9940 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of losing the "setting 6" which is the highest set value.

That is, the probability of a big hit result triggered by the holding information on the first special figure side in "setting 1" is 1/200. In "setting 2", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the holding information on the first special figure side is about 1/192. In "setting 3", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the holding information on the first special figure side is about 1/185. In "setting 4", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the pending information on the first special figure side is about 1/179. In "setting 5", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the holding information on the first special figure side is about 1/172. In "setting 6", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the pending information on the first special figure side is about 1/167. The numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of the big winning may be aggregated and set so as to have serial numbers, or at least part or all of them may be dispersed and set so as not to have serial numbers.

As shown in FIG. 215(b), a big hit result, a small hit result and an off result are set in the success/failure table 462 of the second special figure as the determination result of the success/failure determination process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states of 'setting 1' to 'setting 6', and the setting is made so that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a big winning result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a losing result. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same in any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest set value, 50 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a big win, 2000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a small winning result, and 7950 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a losing result. In addition, 52 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 2000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a small winning, and 7948 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a losing result in the "setting 2" which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 1". Further, in "setting 3" which is a set value one step higher than "setting 2", 54 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the big winning result, 2000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the small winning result, and 7946 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the losing result. In addition, 56 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 2000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a small winning, and 7944 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a losing result in the "setting 4" which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 3". In addition, 58 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the big win, 2000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 7942 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the ``setting 5'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 4''. In addition, 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the big win, 2000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 7940 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the "setting 6" which is the highest set value.

That is, in the "setting 1", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is 1/200, which is the same as the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side. In "setting 2", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is about 1/192, which is the same as the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side. In "setting 3", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is about 1/185, which is the same as the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side. In "setting 4", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is about 1/179, which is the same as the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side. In "setting 5", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is about 1/172, which is the same as the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side. In "setting 6", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is about 1/167, which is the same as the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side.

The probability of a small hit result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is 1/5 which is the same regardless of "setting 1" to "setting 6". This probability of a small winning result is higher than the probability of a big winning result in any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". The numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of the big winning may be aggregated and set so as to have serial numbers, or at least part or all of them may be dispersed and set so as not to have serial numbers. Further, the numerical value information of the win random number counter C1 as a result of a small win may be aggregated and set so as to have serial numbers, or at least a part or all of them may be dispersed and set so as not to have serial numbers.

As described above, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big hit result, so that the higher the set value, the higher the advantage for the player, regardless of whether it is triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side or by the hold information on the second special figure side. In addition, the opening/closing execution mode is a period during which the amount of increase in the number of balls possessed by the player per unit time is the largest, and by varying the probability of the result of a big win, which triggers the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, according to the set value, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the set value.

In such a configuration in which the probability of a big win result varies according to the set value, the probability of a small win result is the same for any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it becomes possible for the player to limit the target to which the player pays attention in estimating the setting value to the result of the big win, and it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the setting value.

In addition, in the configuration in which the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the result of winning is larger than the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the result of the small win regardless of the setting value in the success/failure table 462 of the second special figure, the variation due to the set value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the result of the big winning is absorbed by the variation of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the result of losing. From this point as well, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the set value.

Next, the type counter C2 will be explained. The type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the special figure reservation area 451 of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation part 412 or the second operation part 413. The type determination process is performed using the stored value of the type counter C2.

The type determination process using the type counter C2 is performed in each of cases in which a big hit result and a small hit result are obtained in the success/failure determination process. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of big hit results are set and a plurality of types of small hit results are set. Then, when the jackpot result is selected in the winning/failure determination process, the jackpot result type is selected using the jackpot type table 463 and the type counter C2 pre-stored in the main ROM 64 . Further, when a small hit result is selected in the success/failure determination process, the type of small hit result is selected using the small hit type table 464 and the type counter C2 pre-stored in the main ROM 64 . The types of big winning results and the types of small winning results will be described below.

FIG. 216(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a big win type table 463 that is referred to for allocating the types of big win results when a big win result is selected in the success/failure determination process triggered by the holding information on the first special figure side or the holding information on the second special figure side. Moreover, FIG.216(b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each content of the jackpot result of multiple types.

The big win type table 463 is referred to when the big win result is selected in the win/loss determination processing triggered by the hold information for the first special figure, and is referred to when the big win result is selected in the win/fail judgment process triggered by the hold information for the second special figure. In other words, the same jackpot type table 463 is referred to when the big hit result is selected in the success/failure determination process triggered by the reservation information for the first special figure and when the big win result is selected in the success/failure determination process triggered by the reservation information for the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 216(a), in the jackpot type table 463, 6R jackpot results and 15R jackpot results are set as the types of jackpot results. Numerical information of the type counter C2 of "0 to 26" corresponds to the 6R jackpot result, and numerical information of the type counter C2 of "27 to 29" corresponds to the 15R jackpot result. That is, when the jackpot result is selected in the success/failure determination process, the 6R jackpot result is selected with a probability of 9/10, and the 15R jackpot result is selected with a probability of 1/10.

When a 6R jackpot result is obtained, as shown in FIG. 216(b), round games occur six times in the opening/closing execution mode thereafter. Further, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is entered regardless of the support mode before starting the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode is terminated and shifts to a low-frequency support mode when a game cycle triggered by the retention information on the second special figure side is executed once when the retention information triggered by the 6R jackpot result is the first special figure side suspension information. As already explained, the second special figure reservation area 453 is provided with first to fourth areas 453a to 453d, and it is possible to hold and store four pieces of reservation information on the second special figure side. Therefore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the first game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is executed, and the game balls triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side can be executed five times after the opening/closing execution mode ends by entering four game balls into the second operating part 413 controlled in the mode of the high-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, when the hold information triggered the occurrence of the 6R jackpot result is the hold information on the side of the second special figure, when the game cycle triggered by the hold information on the side of the second special figure is executed five times, the game is terminated and shifted to a low frequency support mode. As already explained, the second special figure reservation area 453 is provided with first to fourth areas 453a to 453d, and it is possible to hold and store four pieces of reservation information on the second special figure side. Therefore, in a situation where the fifth game round triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends, by entering four game balls into the second operating part 413 controlled in the mode of the high frequency support mode, it is possible to execute nine game rounds triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When a 15R jackpot result is obtained, a round game occurs 15 times in the subsequent opening/closing execution mode as shown in FIG. 216(b). Therefore, the 15R jackpot result is more advantageous than the 6R jackpot result at least in terms of the number of times the round game is executed. Further, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is entered regardless of the support mode before starting the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode ends and shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the game cycle triggered by the second special-figure side retention information is executed five times, regardless of whether the hold information triggered the occurrence of the 15R jackpot result is either the first special-figure side hold information or the second special-figure side hold information. As already explained, the second special figure reservation area 453 is provided with first to fourth areas 453a to 453d, and it is possible to hold and store four pieces of reservation information on the second special figure side. Therefore, in a situation where the fifth game round triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is executed after the opening/closing execution mode is ended, four game balls are entered into the second operation part 413 controlled in the mode of the high-frequency support mode, so that nine game rounds triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side can be executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

FIG. 216(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a small hit type table 464 that is referred to for sorting the types of small hit results when a small hit result is selected in the success/failure determination process triggered by the pending information on the second special figure side. Moreover, FIG.216(d) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each content of the multiple types of small hit result. In addition, as already explained, since the small hit result is not selected in the success/failure determination processing triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side, the type table 464 for small hits is not referred to in the game round triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side.

As shown in FIG. 216(c), a first small winning result, a second small winning result and a third small winning result are set in the small winning type table 464 as the types of small winning results. Numerical information of the type counter C2 of '0 to 9' corresponds to the first small winning result, numerical information of the type counter C2 of '10 to 19' corresponds to the second small winning result, and numerical information of the type counter C2 of '20 to 29' corresponds to the third small winning result. That is, when a small winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process, the first small winning result is selected with a probability of 1/3, the second small winning result is selected with a probability of 1/3, and the third small winning result is selected with a probability of 1/3.

Regardless of the result of the first small win, the result of the second small win, or the result of the third small win, the distribution execution mode is first started as shown in FIG. 216(d). In this distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 415 is opened and closed once. The open state of the distribution winning device 415 is continued until either one of the cases where 10 seconds, which is the open continuation period, has passed, or when the number of game balls entering the distribution winning device 415 reaches 10, which is the upper limit winning number, is established. Then, by continuing the shooting operation so that the game ball flows down toward the distribution winning device 415 under the condition that the distribution winning device 415 is kept open, the V winning detection sensor 449 detects the game ball entering the distribution winning device 415 generates V winning. Even if a plurality of game balls are detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 in one distribution execution mode, the number of occurrences of the V winning is treated as one.

The open/close execution mode is generated after the V prize is generated. In this case, after the apportionment execution mode triggered by the result of the first small win, the open/close execution mode is executed for five round games, if the apportionment execution mode is triggered by the result of the second small win, the open/close execution mode is executed for eight round games, and if the distribution execution mode is triggered by the result of the third small win, the open/close execution mode is executed for 14 round games. Therefore, the second small winning result is more advantageous than the first small winning result, and the third small winning result is more advantageous than the second small winning result, at least in terms of the number of times the round game is executed.

When one of the first small winning result, the second small winning result and the third small winning result occurs, and V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is generated, the high-frequency support mode is set after the opening/closing execution mode ends regardless of the support mode before the start of the distribution execution mode. This high-frequency support mode ends and shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the game cycle triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is executed five times, even if any of the result of the first small win, the result of the second small win and the result of the third small win is the trigger. As already explained, the second special figure reservation area 453 is provided with first to fourth areas 453a to 453d, and it is possible to hold and store four pieces of reservation information on the second special figure side. Therefore, in a situation where the fifth game round triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends, by entering four game balls into the second operating part 413 controlled in the mode of the high frequency support mode, it is possible to execute nine game rounds triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side after the opening/closing execution mode ends. When no V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode triggered by any of the first small winning result, the second small winning result and the third small winning result, the open/close execution mode does not occur after the distribution execution mode ends, and the support mode before the start of the distribution execution mode is maintained.

A description will be given of the flow of the game when the win/fail tables 461 and 462 and the type tables 463 and 464 are set as described above. When the game hall opens for business, the support mode is basically the low-frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, a shooting operation is performed with the aim of winning a prize in the first operating part 412, and when the winning in the first operating part 412 occurs, the first special figure display part 425 performs the variable display of the pattern, and the pattern display device 424 performs the game cycle in which the variable display of the pattern is performed. The open/close execution mode is generated after the end of the game cycle by selecting the big hit result in the winning/failure determination process executed at the start of the game cycle. In this open/close execution mode, the round game is executed six times if the 6R jackpot result is the trigger, and the round game is executed 15 times if the 15R jackpot result is the trigger.

After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is entered. In this case, the high-frequency support mode ends when the game round in the second special figure display part 426 is executed once if the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode is the 6R jackpot result, and ends when the game round in the second special figure display part 426 is executed five times if the jackpot result that triggers the opening/closing execution mode is the 15R jackpot result. When the high frequency support mode is ended when the game round in the second special figure display part 426 is executed once, the game round triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side can be executed five times, and when the game round in the second special figure display part 426 is executed five times and the high frequency support mode is ended, the game round triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side can be executed nine times.

In the high-frequency support mode, a shooting operation is performed with the aim of winning a prize in the second operating part 413, and when the winning in the second operating part 413 occurs, the second special figure display part 426 executes the variable display of the pattern and the game cycle in which the variable display of the pattern is performed in the pattern display device 424 is executed. In the game round triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side, a small hit result is obtained with a high probability of 1/5. When a small hit result is obtained, a distribution execution mode is entered, and in the distribution execution mode, the shooting operation is continued with the aim of winning a prize to the distribution prize winning device 415, thereby basically generating a V prize. When the V prize is generated, the opening/closing execution mode is generated after that. In this opening/closing execution mode, the round game is executed 5 times when the result of the first small win is generated, the round game is executed 8 times when the result of the second small win is generated, and the round game is executed 14 times when the result of the third small win is generated. After the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of whether the occurrence opportunity is the result of the first small win, the result of the second small win or the result of the third small win, and the high-frequency support mode is ended when the game round in the second special figure display part 426 is executed five times. In this case, it is possible to execute the game times nine times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side.

That is, when the shift to the high-frequency support mode occurs, a small winning result occurs in the game round triggered by the holding information on the side of the second special figure, so that the distribution execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode can be generated, and after that, the game rounds triggered by the holding information on the side of the second special figure can be executed nine times. As a result, the player expects that the shift to the high frequency support mode occurs, and when the shift to the high frequency support mode occurs, the player expects a small winning result in the game cycle triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the opening and closing execution mode occurs when a big hit result can occur even in the game round triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side and a big hit result occurs. In addition, after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, regardless of the type of the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence, the high frequency support mode is set and the high frequency support mode is terminated when the game round in the second special figure display part 426 is executed five times.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the special figure reservation area 451 of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation part 412 or the second operation part 413. Then, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display is to be generated in the game round in which the winning result is obtained by using the stored value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 424. - 特許庁In a game machine provided with a symbol display device 424 capable of variable display of symbols, and in a game round that results in a big win result or a small win result, the final stop result is a grant correspondence result, and the expected performance refers to a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in the grant correspondence result in a stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 424.例文帳に追加Concretely, a combination of symbols having the same number on any of the activated lines is stopped and displayed for the award correspondence result.

There are two types of expectation effects: a ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the occurrence of the grant correspondence result in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

The ready-to-win display includes a display state in which a combination of ready-to-win patterns is displayed by stopping and displaying the patterns of some of the plurality of pattern strings displayed on the display surface of the pattern display device 424, and in this state, patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner. Further, in a state where the ready-to-win pattern combination is displayed as described above, patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform a ready-to-win effect. Alternatively, a ready-to-win effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after the combination of the ready-to-reach symbols is displayed in a reduced size or not displayed.

The advance notice display includes a mode of displaying a character separately from the patterns on the pattern row in a situation where the patterns are variably displayed in all the pattern rows after the pattern is variably displayed on the display surface of the pattern display device 424, or in a situation where the patterns are variably displayed in a plurality of pattern rows in a part of the pattern rows. It also includes a background screen in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern row in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such advance notice display can occur in any game cycle when the ready-to-win display is performed and when the ready-to-win display is not performed, but is set to occur with a higher probability when the ready-to-win display is performed than when not to be performed.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in the game times in which the same combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, that is, in the game times corresponding to the result of the big win or the result of the small win. Also, in the game round corresponding to the result of losing, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 is executed when the reach display corresponds to the generation of the reach display.

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission control device 81 . In this case, the sound emission control device 81 executes lottery processing for notice display so as to satisfy at least one condition that the notice display is more likely to occur in the game round corresponding to either the big win result or the small win result than the game round corresponding to the losing result, or that the notice display with a low appearance rate is likely to occur. Incidentally, the result of the lottery is reflected when the symbol display device 424 executes an effect for a game cycle.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the main side CPU 63 to determine the display continuation period of the variation display of the design in the special figure display units 425 and 426 and the display continuation period of the variation display of the design in the design display device 424 . The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated, and is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the design in the special figure display units 425 and 426 and the start of variation of the design by the design display device 424.

<Public power control processing>
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing normal/universal power control processing executed by the main side CPU63. In addition, normal figure normal electric control processing is performed in step S8914 in 1st timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). In addition, the processing of step SD601 ~ step SD610 in the general map general electric control processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main side CPU63 and the data for specific control.

First, a process of acquiring hold information on the general map side is executed (step SD601). In the acquisition processing, when winning to the through winning part 414 is generated and the holding information on the side of the general pattern for the upper limit number is not acquired in the general pattern holding area 455, the numerical information of the general electric role item opening counter C4 is stored in the general pattern holding area 455.例文帳に追加In this case, the reservation information on the normal map side is stored in the order of the first area 455a→second area 455b→third area 455c→fourth area 455d.

After that, while reading the numerical information of the general/universal electric counter provided in the main side RAM65 (step SD602), the general/universal electric address table provided in the main side ROM64 is read (step SD603). Then, the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the counter for the general/universal electric power is acquired from the general/universal electric power address table (step SD604), and the process indicated by the acquired start address is jumped to (step SD605).

The general electric power counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to grasp which of the processes of steps SD606 to SD610 in the general electric power control process should be executed. In the general electric power address table, the start address in the program for executing each process of steps SD606 to SD610 is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the general electric power counter. If the value of the general electric counter is "0", it jumps to the general electric fluctuation start processing of step SD606.If the value of the general electric electric counter is "1", it jumps to the normal electric fluctuation process of step SD607. When the value of the electric power counter is "4", the process jumps to step SD610 during closing of electric power.

In the normal pattern fluctuation start processing of step SD606, on the condition that the reservation information of the general pattern side is reserved and stored in the general pattern reservation area 455, the processing of shifting the reservation information of the general pattern side reserved and stored in the general pattern reservation area 455 is executed. Specifically, the general map side reservation information stored in the first area 455a of the general map reservation area 455 is shifted to the general map execution area 456, and then the second area 455b → the first area 455a, the third area 455c → the second area 455b, and the fourth area 455d → the third area 455c. Then, the guidance state lottery process is executed with the holding information on the side of the normal pattern newly shifted to the execution area 456 for the normal pattern as the lottery value. In this embodiment, as already explained, there are a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode as support modes. However, the probability of winning the guidance state in the guidance state lottery process is the same between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode (specifically, 4/5).

In the general pattern fluctuation start process, when the guidance state lottery process is executed, the process of starting the fluctuation display of the pattern in the general pattern display unit 423a is executed. In this case, the information of the display continuation period in which the pattern is variably displayed in the normal map display unit 423a is set in the normal map normal electric timer counter provided in the main side RAM65. The value set in the normal/universal electric timer counter is subtracted by 1 each time the timer update process (step S8910) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. In this case, the display continuation period is shorter in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, the display duration is 1 second in the high-frequency support mode, and 10 seconds in the low-frequency support mode. After that, after starting the variable display of the pattern in the general pattern display section 423a, the value of the general pattern general electric counter is updated from "0" to "1". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing time of the normal pattern normal electric control processing becomes the normal pattern fluctuation process.

In the normal pattern fluctuation process of step SD607, a process for updating the display of the pattern in the normal pattern display unit 423a is executed. In addition, when the value set in the normal pattern general electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65 in the general pattern fluctuation start process is "0", the information of the fixed period of the general pattern side is set in the general pattern general electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the guidance state lottery process that triggered the execution of the current pattern fluctuation display in the general pattern display unit 423a. Then, the value of the general/universal/universal electric counter is updated from "1" to "2". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the general pattern general electric control processing becomes the processing during the general pattern determination.

At step SD608, when the value of the general pattern general electric timer counter is ``0'', it is determined whether or not the result of the guidance state lottery processing that triggered the execution of the current pattern variation display is the guidance state winning. If the induction state is not elected, the value of the general/universal electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the normal pattern normal electric control processing becomes the normal pattern fluctuation start process.

In the case of winning the guidance state, a process for setting the guidance unit 432 of the second operating section 413 to the guidance state is executed. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state is set to 3, and the upper limit guidance period for each guidance state is set to 2 seconds. On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, the number of times the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state is set to 1, and the upper limit guidance period for the number of times the guidance state is executed is set to 0.6 seconds. Information on the number of times the guidance state is executed is set in a general/universal power open counter provided in the main side RAM 65, and information on the upper limit induction period is set in a general/universal power timer counter. In addition, the upper limit winning number of game balls to the second operation unit 413 is ten in the case of winning in the induction state in any of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. Information on the upper limit number of winning prizes is set in a general electric prize winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65 . When the value of the general electrical winning prize counter becomes "0", the execution of the induction state triggered by the current induction state winning is ended. In addition, by starting to output a drive signal to the guide driving section 436, the guiding unit 432 is switched from the non-guiding state to the guiding state. After performing the setting for enabling the execution of the guidance state as described above, the value of the general/universal/universal electric counter is updated from "2" to "3". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the normal/universal power control process becomes the process during the normal/universal power opening.

In step SD609 during the general electric power open process, when the winning to the second operating unit 413 is generated, the value corresponding to the number of winning prizes is subtracted from the value of the electric power winning counter of the main side RAM65. When the value of the general/universal electric prize winning counter is '0', the output of the drive signal to the guide driving part 436 is stopped to switch the induction unit 432 from the induction state to the non-induction state, and then the value of the general/universal electric counter is cleared to '0'. As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the normal pattern normal electric control processing becomes the normal pattern fluctuation start process. Further, even when the value of the general electric winning prize counter is not "0", when the value of the general electric timer counter is "0", by stopping the output of the drive signal to the guide driving part 436, the guidance unit 432 is switched from the induction state to the non-induction state, and the value of the general electric open frequency counter is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the counter for the number of times the electric power is opened is not "0", the information of the non-induction continuation period of the induction unit 432 is set in the electric timer counter for the electric power for general electrics, and then the value of the electric electrics counter for the electric electric power for general electrics is updated from "3" to "4". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing time of the general electric power control processing becomes the processing during the general electric power closing. When the value of the general/universal electric open number counter is "0", the value of the general/universal electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the normal pattern normal electric control processing becomes the normal pattern fluctuation start process.

In step SD610, in the general electric power closing process, on the condition that the value of the general electric power timer counter is "0", the guidance unit 432 is switched from the non-induction state to the induction state by starting the output of the drive signal to the guide driving unit 436, and the information of the upper limit induction period is set in the general electric power timer counter. Then, the value of the general/universal electric counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing time of the general electric power control processing becomes the open electric power processing.

As a result of the general electric general electric control processing being executed as described above, with the occurrence of a prize to the through prize winning section 414 as a trigger, the variable display of the pattern is performed in the universal diagram display section 423a. Then, when the guidance state is won in the guidance state lottery process, the guidance unit 432 of the second operating section 413 is brought into the guidance state. The winning of the game ball to the second operating part 413 becomes possible by the second operating part 413 being in the induced state, and the holding information on the side of the second special figure is stored in the second special figure holding area 453 by winning the game ball to the second operating part 413.

<Special special train control processing>
FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process executed by the main side CPU 63. FIG. In addition, special figure special electric control processing is executed in step S8913 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). In addition, the processing of step SD701 ~ step SD713 in the special figure special electric control processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main side CPU63 and the data for specific control.

First, a hold information acquisition process is executed (step SD701). In the reservation information acquisition process, when the winning to the first operation part 412 occurs, the number of the reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 is less than the upper limit storage number (specifically 4). In the storage process, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the first special figure side reservation information, and the first special figure side reservation information is not stored in the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d of the first special figure reservation area 452. When the reservation information on the first special figure side is acquired, data setting is performed for updating the display contents of the first special figure reservation display part 427 in accordance with the increase in the number of pieces of the reservation information on the first special figure side this time. In addition, when the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for notifying the reserved storage number of the reserved information on the side of the first special figure in the symbol display device 424 is updated corresponding to the new acquisition of the reserved information on the side of the first special figure.

When the winning to the second operation part 413 is generated, storage processing of the second special figure side reserved information is executed on the condition that the number of the second special figure side reserved information stored in the second special figure reserved area 453 is less than the upper limit storage number (specifically four pieces). In the storage process, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the second special figure side reservation information, and the second special figure side reservation information is not stored in the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d of the second special figure reservation area 453. In addition, when the reservation information on the second special figure side is acquired, data setting is performed for updating the display contents of the second special figure reservation display part 428 in accordance with the increase in the number of the reservation information on the second special figure side this time. Moreover, when the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Thereby, the image for notifying the number of pending storage of the pending information on the side of the second special figure in the symbol display device 424 is updated corresponding to the new acquisition of the pending information on the side of the second special figure.

After executing the pending information acquisition process, the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD702). Then, the start address corresponding to the numerical value information of the special special electric counter is obtained from the special special electric address table (step SD703), and the process indicated by the obtained start address is jumped to (step SD704).

The special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to grasp which of the processes of steps SD705 to SD713 in the special figure special electric control process should be executed, and the special figure special electric address table corresponds to the numerical information of the special special electric counter, and the start address in the program for executing each process of steps SD705 to SD713 is set. If the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", it jumps to the special figure fluctuation start processing of step SD705, if the value of the special figure special electric counter is "1", it jumps to the special figure fluctuation process of step SD706, if the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2", it jumps to the special figure confirmation processing of step SD707, and if the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3", it jumps to the distribution start processing of step SD708, and special. If the value of the special electric counter is "4", it jumps to the allocation processing of step SD709.If the value of the special electric counter is "5", it jumps to the special electric start processing of step SD710.If the value of the special electric electric counter is "6", it jumps to the special electric open processing of step SD711. If the value is "8", the process jumps to step SD713, which is special call end processing. Each process of steps SD705 to SD713 will be individually described below.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special figure fluctuation start processing of step SD705 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the process of step SD801 ~ step SD818 in the special figure fluctuation start process is executed using the data for specific control and the program for specific control in the main side CPU63.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, on the condition that the first special figure side hold information or the second special figure side hold information is stored (step SD801: YES), data setting processing is executed (step SD802). In the data setting process, when the second special figure side reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 453, regardless of whether the first special figure side reservation information acquired earlier than the second special figure side reservation information is acquired in the first special figure reservation area 452, the reservation information on the second special figure side stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure reservation area 453 is set to the execution area 454 for the special figure to execute the game round. move. Thereby, it is possible to prioritize the hold information on the second special figure side over the hold information on the first special figure side as the execution opportunity of the success/failure determination process, and to give priority to the execution opportunity of the game cycle.

When the second special figure side reserved information stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure reserved area 453 is moved to the special figure execution area 454, processing for shifting the second special figure side reserved information stored in the second special figure reserved area 453 is executed. This data shift process sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted such that the second area 453b→the first area 453a, the third area 453c→the second area 453b, the fourth area 453d→the third area 453c, and the fourth area 453d is cleared to "0". Further, in the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display contents of the second special figure reservation display section 428 are updated in accordance with the fact that the number of the reservation information on the second special figure side has decreased this time. Also, in the data setting process, a hold decrease command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Thereby, the image for notifying the number of pending storage of the pending information on the side of the second special figure in the symbol display device 424 is updated corresponding to the decrease of the pending information on the side of the second special figure.

On the other hand, in the data setting process, when the second special figure side reservation information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 453, the data stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure reservation area 452 is moved to the special figure execution area 454. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 is executed. This data shift process sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas 452a to 452d to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted such that the second area 452b→the first area 452a, the third area 452c→the second area 452b, the fourth area 452d→the third area 452c, and the fourth area 452d is cleared to "0". Also, in the data setting process, data setting is performed for updating the display contents of the first special figure reservation display section 427 in accordance with the fact that the number of the reservation information on the first special figure side has decreased this time. Also, in the data setting process, a hold decrease command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . As a result, the image for notifying the number of reserved storage of the reserved information on the side of the first special figure in the symbol display device 424 is updated corresponding to the decrease of the reserved information on the side of the first special figure.

After executing the data setting process, the propriety judgment process is executed (step SD803). In the success/fail determination process, when the holding information on the first special figure side is stored in the special figure execution area 454 and the current game round is triggered by the holding information on the first special figure side, the first special figure success/failure table 461 (see FIG. 215(a)) corresponding to the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is read from the main side ROM 64. Numerical information about the winning random number counter C1 is read out of the holding information on the side of the first special figure that triggered the start of the current game cycle, and the read numerical information is collated with the winning/failing table 461 of the first special figure to specify whether the result of the winning/failure determination processing this time is the big winning result or the losing result.

On the other hand, in the success/failure determination process, when the hold information on the second special figure side is stored in the execution area 454 for the special figure and the current game cycle is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, the second special figure win/fail table 462 (see FIG. 215(b)) corresponding to the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is read from the main ROM 64. Numerical information about the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the holding information on the side of the second special figure that triggered the start of the current game cycle, and the read numerical information is collated against the hit/fail table 462 of the second special figure to specify whether the result of the hit/fail decision processing this time is a big hit result, a small hit result, or a losing result.

When the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step SD804: YES), the type determination process at the time of the jackpot is executed (step SD805). In the type determination process at the time of the big win, the type table 463 for the big win shown in FIG. Further, when the holding information on the first special figure side is the trigger for the current game round, numerical information about the type counter C2 is read out of the holding information on the first special figure side, and when the holding information on the second special figure side is the trigger for the current game round, the numerical information on the type counter C2 is read out of the holding information on the second special figure side. Then, it is specified whether the numerical value information about the read type counter C2 corresponds to the numerical range of the jackpot results of the 6R jackpot results and the 15R jackpot results set in the jackpot type table 463.例文帳に追加

After executing the type determination process at the time of the big win, "1" is set to the flag of the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the big win result specified in the type determination process (step SD806). The state of the flag set to "1" is cleared to "0" when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

After that, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step SD807). Specifically, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side of the first special figure display part 425 and the second special figure display part 426 which is the execution object of the game round is specified from the stop result table for the big win result stored in advance in the main side ROM 64, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65. - 特許庁In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the types of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed in the first special figure display part 425 or the second special figure display part 426 are set differently for each type of the jackpot result, and in step SD807, the information of the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in step SD805 is stored in the main side RAM65. The pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. Any method can be used to select a stop result for a jackpot result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set. For example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

When the result of the success/failure determination process is a small hit result (step SD808: YES), the type determination process at the time of the small hit is executed (step SD809). In addition, as already explained, when the winning judgment processing is executed for the reserved information on the first special figure side, the small winning result is not selected, and when the winning judgment processing is executed for the reserved information on the second special figure side, the small winning result can be selected. In the type determination process at the time of the small hit, the type table 464 for the small hit shown in FIG. In addition, numerical value information about the type counter C2 is read out of the holding information on the side of the second special figure, which is the trigger for the game round this time. Then, it is specified to which kind of numerical range of the small winning results among the first small winning result, the second small winning result and the third small winning result set in the small winning classification table 464 corresponds to the numerical information of the read type counter C2.

After executing the type determination process at the time of the small hit, "1" is set to the flag of the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the small hit result specified in the type determination process (step SD810). The state of the flag set to '1' is cleared to '0' when the distribution execution mode ends when the opening/closing execution mode does not occur after the distribution execution mode ends, and is cleared to '0' when the opening/closing execution mode ends when the opening/closing execution mode occurs after the distribution execution mode ends.

After that, stop result setting processing for the small hit result is executed (step SD811). Specifically, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the second special figure display part 426 is specified from the stop result table for small win results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65.例文帳に追加In this stop result table for the small winning results, the types of stop modes of the patterns stopped and displayed on the second special figure display part 426 are set differently for each type of the small winning results, and at step SD811, the information of the stopping modes of the patterns corresponding to the types of the small winning results specified at step SD809 is stored in the main side RAM 65.例文帳に追加The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result. The pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each small win result, or a plurality of types of picture stop modes may be set for at least some of the small win results. Any method can be used to select a stop result for small winning results for which a plurality of types of picture stop modes are set.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step SD804 and step SD808: NO), the stop result setting process for the out result is executed (step SD812). Specifically, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side of the first special figure display part 425 and the second special figure display part 426 which is the execution object of the game round is specified from the stop result table for the result of deviation preliminarily stored in the main side ROM 64, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65. - 特許庁In this case, the information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the big win result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the small win result.

After executing one of the stop result setting processes, the display continuation period grasping process is executed (step SD813). In this process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Also, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated on the symbol display device 424 in the current game cycle. Specifically, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs when the game round related to the start of the current variation is any of the big win results or any of the small win results. In addition, even if neither the big winning result nor the small winning result is obtained, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs when the numerical information related to the ready-to-win random number counter C3 stored in the execution area 454 for the special figure is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the ready-to-win.

When it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs, the table for the continuous period for ready-to-win occurrence stored in the main side ROM 64 is referred to, and the display continuing period of the game cycle corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ready-to-win display does not occur, a continuous period table for ready-to-win occurrence non-occurrence stored in the main side ROM 64 is referred to, and the display continuing period of the game cycle corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Incidentally, the display continuation period of the game cycle that can be obtained by referring to the non-reach duration table is different from the display continuation period of the game cycle that can be obtained by referring to the reach generation duration table.

After that, it selects from the main ROM 64 the variation command and the type command corresponding to the result of the validity determination process and the type determination process, the type of the current support mode, and the result of the process of step SD813 (step SD814). Then, the selected variation command and type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SD815). The sound emission control device 81 executes control for executing a game round effect corresponding to the received variation command and type command.

After that, of the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426, the side of the game cycle that is the execution target of the current game round is caused to start the variable display of the pattern (step SD816). As a table to be referred to by the main side CPU 63 when the first special figure display part 425 or the second special figure display part 426 performs the variation display of the pattern, a special figure variation display table common to the first special figure display part 425 and the second special figure display part 426 is stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426, the same variation display table is used regardless of the result of the success/failure determination process and the result of the type determination process. When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display part 425 or the second special figure display part 426, the variation display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variation display table for the special figure is set with the control data for one round of the variation display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the variable display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426, the variation display table for special figures is repeatedly used until the display continuation period of the game round determined in step SD813 elapses.

In addition, the contents of the variable display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 are arbitrary, for example, all the display segments 425a and 426a may be configured to be in a light emitting state in a predetermined order. 425a and 426a may blink to perform the variable display of the pattern, or may be configured to perform the variable display of the pattern by blinking one or two display segments 425a and 426a.

After that, the special display portion 429 is extinguished (step SD817). In the special display portion 429, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, information corresponding to the number of round games occurring in the opening/closing execution mode is displayed. In other words, when the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the result of the 6R jackpot, the special display section 429 displays a display corresponding to six round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started. Further, when the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the result of the 15R jackpot, a display corresponding to 15 round games is performed on the special display portion 429 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs due to the occurrence of the V winning in the apportionment execution mode triggered by the result of the first small win, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the special display part 429 performs the display corresponding to the round game five times. In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs due to the occurrence of the V winning in the distribution execution mode triggered by the result of the second small win, the special display part 429 performs the display corresponding to the round game eight times when the opening/closing execution mode is started. In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs due to the occurrence of the V winning in the apportionment execution mode triggered by the result of the third small win, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display corresponding to the 14th round game is performed on the special display part 429.例文帳に追加In the above configuration, the special display part 429 is extinguished at step SD817 of the special figure variation start process, so that the display corresponding to the number of round games on the special display part 429 started when the opening/closing execution mode is started is ended when a new game round is started after the opening/closing execution mode is finished. Then, the special display portion 429 is maintained in the off state until the opening/closing execution mode is newly generated.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step SD818). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is "0", the value of the special figure special electric counter which is the object of addition by adding 1 becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation processing (step SD706).

<Process during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation which is executed in step SD706 of special figure special electric control processing (Figure 218) is explained.

When the display continuation period of the current game round has not passed and when it is time to update the display contents of the special figure display parts 425 and 426 which are the execution targets of the current game round, data setting for updating the display contents of the special figure display parts 425 and 426 is performed by referring to the variation display table for the special figure. As a result, the display contents of the pattern in the special figure display portions 425 and 426, which are the execution targets of the current game round, are updated to the display contents of the next order. In addition, the main side RAM 65 is provided with a first display order counter referred to for deriving the display contents of the pattern from the variation display table for the special figure when the timing of updating the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 comes. In addition, the main side RAM 65 is provided with a second display order counter referred to for deriving the display contents of the pattern from the variation display table for the special figure when the timing of updating the pattern in the second special figure display unit 426 comes.

The mode at the time of starting the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display units 425 and 426 and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a constant mode regardless of the result of the success determination process and the result of the type determination process, and are performed in a constant mode regardless of the contents of the game round performance in the pattern display device 424. For example, the display contents of the pattern make one cycle by generating update timings a plurality of times, and a display pattern whose display order is in a fixed order is repeated, and when the display continuation period of the game cycle has passed, the stop result determined at the start of the game cycle is displayed regardless of the order in which the display pattern is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 425 and 426.

On the other hand, when the display continuation period of the game round has passed, the information of the pattern stop mode of the special figure display parts 425, 426 stored in the main side RAM 65 at the start of the game round is read out, and the display of the special figure display parts 425, 426 to be executed in the current game round is controlled so that the pattern is stopped. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in a state in which the pattern corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination process and the result of the type determination process of the current game round is displayed in the special figure display parts 425 and 426 which are the execution targets of the current game round. The mode of the design stopped and displayed in the special figure display units 425 and 426 is maintained until the next variation display of the design in the special figure display units 425 and 426 is started regardless of whether it is in the distribution execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode. Also, the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 is set with the information of the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec). Thereby, the measurement of the final stop period is started.

After that, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . When receiving the final stop command from the main CPU 63 , the sound emission control device 81 transmits the final stop command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the final stop command from the sound emission control device 81, it reads out the display pattern table for stopping and displaying the combination of the stop symbols in the current game round over the final stop period. As a result, the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the current game round is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 424 over the final stop period.

After that, add 1 to the value of the special special electric counter. Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation processing is executed is "1", the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2" corresponding to the special figure determination processing (step SD707) by adding 1.

<Processing during special figure confirmation>
Next, the processing during special figure determination executed in step SD707 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 218) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the processing of step SD901 ~ step SD915 in the process during special figure determination is executed using the data for specific control and the program for specific control in the main side CPU63.

When the final stop period has passed and the current game round corresponds to the big win result (step SD901 and step SD902: YES), display start processing of the special display section 429 is executed (step SD903). In the display start processing of the special display part 429, data is set for the display control of the special display part 429 so that the display corresponding to the six round games is started when the big win result of this time is the 6R big win result. In addition, in the display start processing of the special display part 429, data setting is performed to control the display of the special display part 429 so that the display corresponding to the 15th round game is started when the current big win result is the 15R big win result. After that, 3 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step SD904). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure confirmation processing is executed is "2", the value of the special figure special electric counter to be added by adding 3 becomes "5" corresponding to the special figure start processing (step SD710).

When the final stop period has passed and the current game cycle does not correspond to the big win result (step SD901: YES, step SD902: NO), it is determined whether or not the support flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SD905). The support flag is set to "1" in the high frequency support mode, and is set to "0" in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in step SD905, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the high-frequency support mode is set and the support flag is set to "1" (step SD905: YES), it is determined whether or not the game round ended this time is the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side (step SD906). When the game round ended this time is the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side (step SD906: YES), the value of the second special figure counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step SD907), and the total counter value provided in the main side RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step SD908). On the other hand, if the game round ended this time is the game round triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side (step SD906: NO), the value of the first special figure counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step SD909), and the total counter value of the main side RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step SD910). After executing the process of step SD908 or step SD910, it is determined whether the value of any one of the first special figure counter, second special figure counter and total counter is "0" (step SD911). If an affirmative determination is made at step SD911, the support flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step SD912). As a result, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

As already explained, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode is terminated when the number of execution times of game rounds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode reaches the end reference number of times, and shifts to the low-frequency support mode. The first special figure counter, the second special figure counter and the total counter are all counters for specifying the end reference number of times by the main side CPU 63 . The first special figure counter is a counter for measuring the number of game rounds executed triggered by the first special figure side hold information after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the second special figure counter is a counter for measuring the number of game rounds executed triggered by the second special figure side hold information after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the total counter is a game round triggered by the first special figure side hold information and the second special figure side hold information after the opening/closing execution mode ends. It is a counter for measuring the total number of times the game is executed. When the opening/closing execution mode ends, '100' is set to the first special figure counter and the total counter regardless of the type of the big winning result or the small winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. On the other hand, in the second special figure counter, ``1'' is set in the case of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 6R jackpot result by the holding information on the first special figure side, and ``5'' is set in the case of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by other events.

As described above, when the game round triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is executed, the values of the first special figure counter and the total counter are decremented by 1 respectively, and when the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is executed, the values of the second special figure counter and the total counter are each decremented by 1. Then, when the value of any one of the first special figure counter, the second special figure counter and the total counter becomes "0", the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, when the number of game rounds executed triggered by the hold information on the second special side after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 1 or 5 times, when the number of game rounds executed triggered by the hold information on the first special side after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 100, or when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the total number of game rounds triggered by the hold information on the first special side and the number of games triggered by the hold information on the second special side ends when it reaches 100 times.

However, in the high-frequency support mode, the shooting operation is basically performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Therefore, the high-frequency support mode basically ends when the number of executions of the game cycle triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the end of the opening and closing execution mode reaches 1 or 5 times. It should be noted that, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, when the number of executions of the game cycle triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side becomes one, it means that the high frequency support mode ends when the game round triggered by the first holding information on the second special figure side after the opening and closing execution mode ends. In addition, ending when the number of execution times of the game cycle triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the end of the opening and closing execution mode reaches 5 times means that the high frequency support mode ends when the game round triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side for the fifth time after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

If a negative determination is made in step SD905, if a negative determination is made in step SD911, or if the process of step SD912 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a small winning result (step SD913). If the current game round does not correspond to the small hit result (step SD913: NO), the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step SD914). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to special figure variation start processing (step SD705). On the other hand, if the game round this time corresponds to the small hit result (step SD913: YES), the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step SD915). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure determination processing is executed is "2", the value of the special figure special electric counter which is the object of addition by adding 1 becomes "3" corresponding to the distribution start processing (step SD708).

<Distribution start process>
Next, the distribution start processing executed in step SD708 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 218) will be described.

First, a distribution start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . When receiving a distribution start command from the main side CPU 63, the sound emission control device 81 controls the emission of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 so that an effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is in progress is executed. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a distribution start command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the distribution start command from the sound emission control device 81, the display control device 82 displays and controls the pattern display device 424 so that the display performance indicating that the distribution execution mode is started is executed after the display performance indicating that the distribution execution mode is started.

After that, "10" is set in the distribution winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65. - 特許庁The distribution prize winning counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the trigger for switching the distribution prize winning device 415 from the open state to the closed state in relation to the number of game balls entering the distribution prize winning device 415 which is in the open state in the distribution execution mode. In addition, a set processing of the distribution open period is executed. In the distribution open period setting process, information corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 so that the period in which the distribution winning device 415 is maintained in the open state is 10 seconds, which is the distribution open period. Then, in order to bring the distribution winning device 415 into an open state, it starts outputting a driving signal to the driving section 443 for the distribution entrance.

After that, add 1 to the value of the special special electric counter. Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the distribution start processing is executed is "3", the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "4" corresponding to the distribution processing (step SD709) by adding 1.

<Distribution processing>
Next, the distribution processing executed in step SD709 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 218) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the processing of steps SE101 to SE118 in the allocation processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch the switching piece 446 of the distribution winning device 415 from the retracted position to the V guidance position (step SE101). When 2 seconds have passed since the distribution winning device 415 was opened, an affirmative determination is made in step SE101. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE101, a drive signal is output to switching drive unit 447 so that switching piece 446 moves from the retracted position to the V-lead position (step SE102). As a result, the switching piece 446 is arranged at the V guiding position, and the game ball that has reached the position of the switching piece 446 is guided by the switching piece 446 to the V winning path area 445 c and detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 .

When the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 of the distribution winning device 415 (step SE103: YES), the V winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SE104). The V winning flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the V winning detection sensor 449 has detected a game ball. Also, a V winning command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SE105). When receiving the V winning command from the main side CPU 63, the voice light emission control device 81 performs light emission control of the display light emitting part 53 and sound output control of the speaker part 54 so as to execute the performance corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 449. - 特許庁Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a V winning command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the V winning command from the voice emission control device 81, the display control device 82 displays and controls the pattern display device 424 so that the display performance indicating that the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 is executed.

In a situation where the distribution winning device 415 is in the open state, it is determined whether or not the distribution open period measured using the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 has passed (step SE106). When the distribution open period has not passed (step SE106: NO), it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 448 or the V winning detection sensor 449 of the distribution winning device 415, thereby determining whether or not the distribution winning device 415 has won a prize (step SE107). If a prize has been awarded to the distribution winning device 415 (step SE107: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the distribution winning counter in the main RAM 65 (step SE108). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the distribution winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step SE109).

If affirmative determination is made in step SE106 or if affirmative determination is made in step SE109, the conditions for closing the distribution winning device 415 are satisfied, so that the distribution winning device 415 is closed by stopping the output of the drive signal to the driving unit 443 for the distribution entrance (step SE110). After that, in order to wait for the end of the distribution execution mode until there are no more game balls in the distribution winning device 415, information corresponding to the waiting period is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 (step SE111). The standby period is set as a period longer than the longest period required until the game ball entering the distribution winning device 415 is detected by either the count detection sensor 448 or the V winning detection sensor 449 . Specifically, it is set to 4 seconds. By waiting for the end of the distribution execution mode until the waiting period elapses, if the game ball entering the distribution winning device 415 immediately before closing the distribution winning device 415 is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449, it can be treated as valid.

When the standby period measured by the timer counter of the main RAM 65 has passed (step SE112: YES), the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 447 is stopped so that the switching piece 446 returns from the V-lead position to the retracted position (step SE113). As a result, the switching piece 446 returns to the retracted position.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 in the distribution execution mode of this time (step SE114). If the V winning flag is set to "1" (step SE114: YES), display start processing of the special display section 429 is executed (step SE115). In the display start processing of the special display part 429, data is set for display control of the special display part 429 so that the display corresponding to the five round games is started when the distribution execution mode of this time is triggered by the result of the first small win. In the display start processing of the special display part 429, data setting is performed for display control of the special display part 429 so as to start the display corresponding to the eight round games when the distribution execution mode of this time is triggered by the result of the second small win. In addition, in the display start processing of the special display part 429, data setting for display control of the special display part 429 is performed so that the display corresponding to the 14th round game is started when the distribution execution mode of this time is triggered by the result of the third small win. After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step SE116). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the sorting process is executed is "4", the value of the special special electric counter to be added by adding 1 becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric start processing (step SD710). Incidentally, when an affirmative determination is made in step SE114, the V prize flag is cleared to "0".

If the V winning flag is not set to "1" (step SE114: NO), a flag clearing process is executed (step SE117). In the flag clearing process, the flag for specifying the type of small hit result is cleared to "0". After that, the value of the special special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step SE118). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to special figure variation start processing (step SD705).

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing executed in step SD710 of the special electric special electric control processing (FIG. 218) will be described.

In the special electric start process, if it is before the start of the opening period, measurement of the opening period (for example, 4 seconds) is started and an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . When the sound emission control device 81 receives the opening command, it controls the light emission of the display light emission unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 so that the opening effect is executed. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits an opening command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the opening command, it controls the display of the pattern display device 424 so that the opening effect is executed.

In the special electric start process, when the opening period has passed, information corresponding to the number of executions of the round game in the current opening/closing execution mode is set in the round counter provided in the main side RAM 65 . The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the open/close execution mode by the main side CPU 63, and the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1 each time a round game is executed. In addition, the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 is set with the information (specifically, 29 seconds) of the opening continuation period of the round game, and the winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set with the information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the special electric prize winning device 416 in one round game. Then, an open setting process for the special electric is executed. In the open setting process, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c is started so that the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state. After that, add 1 to the value of the special special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step SD711).

<Processing during opening of the special train>
Next, a description will be given of the special electric open processing executed in step SD711 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 218).

In the special electric open processing, when the open continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 416 has passed or when the special electric prize winning device 416 has won the upper limit winning number of game balls, the closing setting processing is executed. In the closing setting process, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c is stopped so that the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the closed state. After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter of the main side RAM 65 .

If the value of the round counter after decrementing by 1 is not "0", information corresponding to the closing duration (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 . After that, add 1 to the value of the special special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "7" corresponding to the special electric closing process (step SD712).

If the value of the round counter after decrementing by 1 is "0", information corresponding to the ending period (specifically 10 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65 . Also, an ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . When the sound emission control device 81 receives the ending command, it controls the light emission of the display light emission unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 so that the ending effect is executed. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits an ending command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the ending command, it controls the display of the pattern display device 424 so that the ending effect is executed. After that, add 2 to the value of the special special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "8" corresponding to the special electric end processing (step SD713).

<Treatment during special train closure>
Next, the processing during special electric closing executed in step SD712 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 218) will be described.

When the closed continuation period has passed, the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 is set with the information of the open continuation period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds), and the information (specifically "10") corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the special electric prize winning device 416 in one round game is set in the winning counter of the main side RAM 65.例文帳に追加Then, the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened by executing the special electric open setting process. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step SD711).

<Special call end processing>
Next, the special electric end processing executed in step SD713 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 218) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the processing of steps SE201 to SE209 in the special electric end processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63 .

If the ending period has passed (step SE201: YES), the total counter of the main RAM 65 is set to "100" (step SE202), and the first special figure counter of the main RAM 65 is set to "100" (step SE203). After that, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side (step SE204). Also, when the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the holding information on the first special figure side (step SE204: NO), it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the 15R jackpot result (step SE205). When affirmative determination is made in step SE204 or step SE205, "5" is set in the second special figure counter of the main side RAM 65 (step SE206), and when negative determination is made in both steps SE204 and SE205, "1" is set in the second special figure counter of the main side RAM 65 (step SE207). By the processing of steps SE202 to SE207, conditions for ending the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended are set.

When the process of step SE206 or step SE207 is executed, the support flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SE208). As a result, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high frequency support mode. After that, the value of the special special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step SE209). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to special figure variation start processing (step SD705).

<Notification that setting-related processing is being executed>
Next, a configuration for notifying that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 185) that is started when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described.

FIG. 223 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control.

A first display data buffer 271, a second display data buffer 272, a third display data buffer 273, a fourth display data buffer 274, and a fifth display data buffer 275 are provided in the clear target area 371 as in the fifty-sixth embodiment. In addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275, the clear target area 371 is provided with a sixth display data buffer 471, a seventh display data buffer 472 and an eighth display data buffer 473. FIG.

The first display data buffer 271 stores display data for causing the first special figure display section 425 to perform a predetermined display. The display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (step S8915) in step SD816 in the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 219) executes the processing for starting the fluctuation display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425. The display data corresponding to the display at the time of the fluctuation start of the first special figure display unit 425 is set in the first display data buffer 271. In addition, the processing for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 425 is executed in the special figure fluctuation process (step SD706) in the special figure special electric control process (Fig. 218). In addition, the display content of the first special figure display unit 425 in the special figure fluctuation process (step SD706) in the special figure special electric control process (Fig. 218) is the success or failure determination process (step SD803) in the game round this time and the display content corresponding to the processing result of the type determination process (step SD805) at the time of the jackpot. Display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 for displaying the result of the current game round. The display data set in this case will be the display data selected at step SD807 or step SD812 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 219) at the start of this game cycle. In addition, the display data set in this case is stored and held in the first display data buffer 271 until the first special figure display section 425 is in a state of starting a new game turn. In addition, the first display circuit 261 is provided in correspondence with the first special figure display unit 425, and the display corresponding to the display data is supplied to the first display circuit 261 by supplying the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271. The display corresponding to the first special figure display unit 425 is performed.

The second display data buffer 272 stores display data for causing the first special figure reservation display section 427 to perform a predetermined display. When the hold information on the first special figure side is newly stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 in the acquisition process (step SD701) of the reservation information in the special figure special electric control process (Fig. 218), the display data corresponding to the number of the reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 after the storage in the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is set in the second display data buffer 272. Also, in the data setting process (step SD802) in the special figure fluctuation start process (Fig. 219), when the first special figure side reserved information is digested as the execution trigger of the game round, the display data corresponding to the number of the first special figure side reserved information stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 after the digestion in the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) is set in the second display data buffer 272. In addition, a second display circuit 262 is provided in correspondence with the first special figure reservation display unit 427, and the display data corresponding to the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is supplied to the second display circuit 262. The first special figure reservation display unit 427 displays.

The third display data buffer 273 stores display data for causing the normal diagram display unit 423a to perform a predetermined display. In the normal pattern fluctuation start processing (step SD606) of the normal pattern general electric control process (Fig. 217), the process for starting the fluctuation display of the pattern in the general pattern display unit 423a is executed. Display data corresponding to the display at the start of fluctuation of the general pattern display unit 423a is set in the third display data buffer 273 by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133). In addition, the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) by executing the process for updating the display contents of the general pattern display unit 423a in the general pattern fluctuation process (step SD607) of the general pattern general electric control processing (FIG. 217) The display data for advancing the variable display of the pattern of the general pattern display unit 423a is set in the third display data buffer 273. In addition, the display data for causing the normal map display unit 423a to perform the display corresponding to the result of the current variable display cycle by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is executed in the normal map fluctuation process (step SD607) of the normal map general electric control process (FIG. 217) to make the display content of the normal map display unit 423a the display content corresponding to the result of the guidance state lottery in the current variable display time. 273. The display data set in this case is stored and retained in the third display data buffer 273 until a new variable display cycle is started in the normal map display section 423a. In addition, a third display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the normal map display unit 423a, and the display data corresponding to the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is supplied to the third display circuit 263. Display is performed on the normal map display unit 423a.

The fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data for causing the normal map reservation display unit 423b to perform a predetermined display. When the reservation information on the general pattern side is newly stored in the general pattern reservation area 455 in the acquisition processing (step SD601) of the reservation information on the general pattern side in the general pattern general electrical control process (FIG. 217), the display data corresponding to the number of the reservation information on the general pattern side stored in the general pattern reservation area 455 after the storage in the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in the fourth display data buffer 274. In addition, if the holding information on the vibration side is digested as an execution of the vibration display of the vibration display part 423a in the general map fluctuation start process (step SD606) of the general map of the general diagram (Fig. 217), the display control means (step S8915) in the first timber interrupt process (Fig. 133) will be used after digestion. The display data corresponding to the number of holding information on the general figure stored in the rear 455 is set to the 4th display data buffer 274. In addition, a fourth display circuit 264 is provided in correspondence with the normal diagram reservation display unit 423b, and the display data corresponding to the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is supplied to the fourth display circuit 264. Display corresponding to the normal diagram reservation display unit 423b is performed.

The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined displays. Setting of the display data to the fifth display data buffer 275 is executed in steps SE303, SE307 and SE310 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) described later. A fifth display circuit 265 is provided in correspondence with the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204, and the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is supplied to the fifth display circuit 265, whereby the display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204.

The sixth display data buffer 471 stores display data for causing the second special figure display section 426 to perform a predetermined display. The display data corresponding to the display at the start of the fluctuation of the second special figure display unit 426 is set in the sixth display data buffer 471 by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (step S8915) by executing the process for starting the variation display of the pattern in the second special figure display unit 426 at step SD816 in the special figure variation start process (Figure 219). In addition, the processing for updating the display contents of the second special figure display unit 426 is executed in the special figure fluctuation process (step SD706) in the special figure special electric control process (Figure 218). In addition, in the special figure fluctuation process (step SD706) in the special figure special electric control process (Fig. 218), the display content of the second special figure display unit 426 is the success/failure determination process (step SD803) in this game round, the type determination process (step SD805) at the time of the big hit, and the display control means (step S8) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133). 915), the display data for causing the second special figure display unit 426 to display corresponding to the result of the current game round is set in the sixth display data buffer 471. The display data set in this case will be the display data selected at step SD807, step SD811 or step SD812 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 219) at the start of this game round. In addition, the display data set in this case is stored and held in the sixth display data buffer 471 until the second special figure display section 426 starts a new game cycle. In addition, a sixth display circuit is provided corresponding to the second special figure display unit 426, and display corresponding to the display data by supplying the display data stored in the sixth display data buffer 471 to the sixth display circuit is performed in the second special figure display unit 426.

The seventh display data buffer 472 stores display data for causing the second special figure reservation display section 428 to perform a predetermined display. When the hold information on the second special figure side is newly stored in the second special figure reservation area 453 in the acquisition process (step SD701) of the reservation information in the special figure special electric control process (Fig. 218), the display data corresponding to the number of the second special figure reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 453 after the storage in the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is set in the seventh display data buffer 472. Also, in the data setting process (step SD802) in the special figure fluctuation start process (Fig. 219), when the second special figure side reserved information is digested as the execution trigger of the game round, the display data corresponding to the number of the second special figure side reserved information stored in the second special figure reservation area 453 after the digestion by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is set in the seventh display data buffer 472. A seventh display circuit is provided corresponding to the second special figure reservation display unit 428, and display corresponding to the display data stored in the seventh display data buffer 472 is supplied to the seventh display circuit. Display corresponding to the second special figure reservation display unit 428 is performed.

The eighth display data buffer 473 stores display data for causing the special display section 429 to perform a predetermined display. When the information on the number of round games is set in the display start processing (step SD903) of the special display unit 429 in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 220) in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, the display data corresponding to the information on the number of round games is stored in the eighth display data buffer 473 by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). Further, when the information of the number of round games is set in the display start processing (step SE115) of the special display section 429 in the distribution processing (FIG. 221) by entering the distribution execution mode, the display data corresponding to the information of the number of round games is stored in the eighth display data buffer 473 by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). Further, when the special figure fluctuation start processing (step SD817) of the special display unit 429 is executed in the special figure fluctuation start processing (step SD817), the display data of the eighth display data buffer 473 is cleared to "0" by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). An eighth display circuit is provided in correspondence with the special display section 429, and display corresponding to the display data is performed on the special display section 429 by supplying display data stored in the eighth display data buffer 473 to the eighth display circuit.

Since the clear target area 371 includes the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473, the display data set in the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473 are cleared to "0" when the first RAM clear processing (step SC218) of the main processing (FIG. 185) or the second RAM clear processing of the set value update processing (step SC216) is executed. In addition to the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473, the area to be cleared 371 includes an area for special electric train control and an area for ordinary electric train control. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode regardless of the support mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game cycle is not executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not executed, and the normal figure display part 423a is not variably displayed and the guidance unit 432 of the second operation part 413 is in the non-guiding state. Also, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Also, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initialization is executed. Also, after various registers of the main side CPU 63 are cleared to "0", initialization is executed.

FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. The processes of steps SE301 to SE317 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG. In the second timer interrupt process, the interrupt is permitted when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) of the main process (FIG. 185) is started, and is prohibited when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is terminated. In the second timer interrupt process, the interrupt is permitted when the set value update process (step SC216) of the main process (FIG. 185) is started, and the interrupt is prohibited when the set value update process (step SC216) ends. Further, in the second timer interrupt processing, the interrupt is permitted until the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed in step SC227 of the main processing (FIG. 185) after the setting of interrupt permission is performed in step SC230 of the main processing (FIG. 185). The same applies to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133).

First, interrupt inhibition is set to inhibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) (step SE301). By prohibiting the generation of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), it is possible to prevent the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) from interrupting and starting the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 224) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. In addition, by prohibiting the occurrence of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224), even if the second interrupt cycle has passed during the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224), it is possible to prevent the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224) from being started redundantly.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SE302). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update process (step SC216). As in the fifty-sixth embodiment, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) is interrupted and activated even when the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE302, setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is executed (step SE303). In the setting process, as in the thirty-third embodiment, display data indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and display data for displaying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are set in the fifth display data buffer 275. As a result, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . This display continues while the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

After that, setting processing to the first display data buffer 271 during setting update is executed (step SE304). FIG. 225(a) is a flow chart showing setting processing for the first display data buffer 271 during setting update. The processes of steps SE401 to SE405 in the process of setting the first display data buffer 271 during setting update are executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63 .

In the setting process, a process is executed for changing the pattern to be displayed in the same manner as when the game round is executed in the first special figure display part 425 in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is executed. Also, in the setting process, in order to perform the variable display of this pattern in the first special figure display unit 425, the special figure variation display table and the first display order counter used in the special figure variation process (step SD706) are used.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not this time is the update timing of the display contents of the first special figure display section 425 (step SE401). The period of updating the display contents of the pattern of the first special figure display part 425 is the same as the period of updating the display contents of the pattern of the first special figure display part 425 in the game round. If it is time to update the display contents (step SE401: YES), the value of the first display order counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step SE402). If the value of the first display order counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value (for example, "20") (step SE403: YES), the value of the first display order counter is cleared to "0" (step SE404). The first display order counter is a counter for specifying the display contents of the pattern to be derived from the variation display table for the special figure when the timing of updating the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 has already been explained.

When a negative determination is made in step E401, when a negative determination is made in step SE403, or when the process of step SE404 is executed, the display contents of the pattern corresponding to the current value of the first display order counter are derived from the variable display table for special figures, and the display data corresponding to the derived display contents of the pattern are set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SE405). As a result, the pattern corresponding to the display data is displayed in the first special figure display section 425 .

Due to the above configuration, when the set value update process (step SC216) is executed, the first special figure display part 425 repeats the fluctuation display of the pattern according to the display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order, similarly to the case where the game round is executed in the first special figure display part 425. In this case, the variation display table for the special figure and the first display order counter used for performing the variation display of the pattern are used when the first special figure display section 425 executes the game cycle. As a result, while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity, it is possible to perform the variable display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224), after executing the setting process for the first display data buffer 271 during setting update (step SE304), the setting process for the eighth display data buffer 473 during setting update is executed (step SE305). In the setting process, display data for performing a predetermined display on the special display portion 429 is set in the eighth display data buffer 473 . Specifically, the same display data as the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 is set in the eighth display data buffer 473 when the display setting corresponding to the number of executions of the round game in the case of a 15R jackpot result is performed in the display start processing (step SD903) of the special display unit 429 in the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 220). As a result, when the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, not only is the first special figure display part 425 performing the variable display of the pattern as in the case of the game round, but the special display part 429 is performing the display corresponding to the 15 round game execution times as in the case of the 15R jackpot result.

The display data set in the first display data buffer 271 in step SE304 and the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE305 are cleared to "0" in the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) executed when the set value update process (step SC216) ends. As a result, when the set value update process (step SC216) is completed, the variation display of the pattern in the first special figure display section 425 and the display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is 15 times in the special display section 429 can be ended. After that, the display start process (FIG. 191) is executed in step SC226 of the main process (FIG. 185), thereby setting the initial display data for the special figure in the first display data buffer 271. FIG. As a result, the initial display is started in the first special figure display section 425 as in the fifty-sixth embodiment. On the other hand, the special display portion 429 is maintained in the off state until the opening/closing execution mode is started next time.

In addition, the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE305 is not limited to the display data for performing the display corresponding to the fact that the round game has been executed 15 times. For example, it may be display data for performing a display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is 6 times as in the case of a 6R jackpot result, display data for performing a display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is 5 times as in the case of the first small winning result, display data for performing a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been performed being 8 times as in the case of the second small winning result, or the same as in the case of the third small winning result. It may be display data for performing display corresponding to the fact that the round game is executed 14 times. Even in these cases, when the open/close execution mode occurs, the special display section 429 can make use of the display data used to cause the special display section 429 to perform a predetermined display, thereby making it possible for the special display section 429 to notify that the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step SE302, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SE306). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation process (step SC213). As in the fifty-sixth embodiment, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) is interrupted and activated even when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE306, setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE307). In the setting process, as in the thirty-third embodiment, display data indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and display data indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are set in the fifth display data buffer 275. As a result, a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. This display continues while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

Thereafter, setting processing to the sixth display data buffer 471 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE308). FIG. 225(b) is a flow chart showing setting processing for the sixth display data buffer 471 during setting confirmation. The processes of steps SE501 to SE505 in the process of setting the sixth display data buffer 471 during setting confirmation are executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63 .

In the setting process, the process for performing the variable display of the pattern is performed in the same way as when the game round is being performed in the second special figure display part 426 in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed. Also, in the setting process, in order to perform the variable display of this pattern in the second special figure display unit 426, the special figure variation display table and the second display order counter used in the special figure variation process (step SD706) are used.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not this time is the update timing of the display contents of the second special figure display section 426 (step SE501). The period of updating the display contents of the pattern of the second special figure display part 426 is the same as the period of updating the display contents of the pattern of the second special figure display part 426 in the game round. If it is time to update the display content (step SE501: YES), the value of the second display order counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step SE502). If the value of the second display order counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value (for example, "20") (step SE503: YES), the value of the second display order counter is cleared to "0" (step SE504). The second display order counter is a counter for specifying the display contents of the pattern to be derived from the variation display table for the special figure when the second special figure display unit 426 comes to the update timing of the pattern as already explained.

When a negative determination is made in step E501, when a negative determination is made in step SE503, or when the process of step SE504 is executed, the display contents of the pattern corresponding to the current value of the second display order counter are derived from the variable display table for special figures, and the display data corresponding to the derived display contents of the pattern are set in the sixth display data buffer 471 (step SE505). Thereby, the design corresponding to the display data is displayed in the second special figure display section 426 .

Due to the above configuration, when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed, the second special figure display part 426 repeats the fluctuation display of the pattern according to the display pattern in which the display order is in a fixed order, similarly to the case where the game round is executed in the second special figure display part 426. - 特許庁In this case, the variation display table for the special figure and the second display order counter used for performing the variation display of the pattern are used when the second special figure display section 426 executes the game cycle. As a result, while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity, it is possible to perform the variable display of the pattern in the second special figure display unit 426 in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224), after executing the setting process for the sixth display data buffer 471 during setting confirmation (step SE308), the setting process for the eighth display data buffer 473 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE309). In the setting process, display data for performing a predetermined display on the special display portion 429 is set in the eighth display data buffer 473 . Specifically, the same display data as the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 is set in the eighth display data buffer 473 when the display setting corresponding to the number of executions of the round game in the case of the 6R jackpot result is performed in the display start processing (step SD903) of the special display unit 429 in the special figure determination processing (FIG. 220). As a result, when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, not only is the second special figure display part 426 performing the variable display of the pattern as in the case of the game round, but also the special display part 429 is performing the display corresponding to the fact that the number of round game executions is 6, as in the case of the 6R jackpot result. The display content of this special display portion 429 differs from the display content of the special display portion 429 when the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

The display data set in the sixth display data buffer 471 in step SE308 and the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE309 are cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends, it is possible to end the variation display of the pattern in the second special figure display section 426 and the display corresponding to the execution count of the round game being 6 times in the special display section 429. After that, the display start process (FIG. 191) is executed in step SC226 of the main process (FIG. 185), thereby setting the initial display data for the special figure in the sixth display data buffer 471. FIG. Thereby, the initial display is started in the second special figure display unit 426 . On the other hand, the special display portion 429 is maintained in the off state until the opening/closing execution mode is started next time.

In addition, the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE309 is not limited to display data for performing a display corresponding to the fact that the round game has been executed six times. For example, it may be display data for performing a display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is 15 times as in the case of a 15R jackpot result, display data to perform a display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is 5 times as in the case of the first small winning result, display data for performing a display corresponding to the number of execution times of the round game being 8 times as in the case of the second small winning result, or in the case of the third small winning result. Similarly, it may be display data for performing display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is 14 times. Even in these cases, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the special display section 429 can notify that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed by using the display data used for causing the special display section 429 to perform a predetermined display.

If a negative determination is made in step SE306, the process of step SE310 is executed. The processing contents of step SE310 are the same as step S8406 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment.

When the processing of step SE305, step SE309, or step SE310 is executed, similarly to the thirty-third embodiment, the transmission state of signals through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned OFF (step SE311), and the transmission state of signals through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is turned OFF (step SE312). After that, the type counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is updated (step SE313).

The type counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the transmission target of the display data among the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt processing. When the type counter value is "1", the display data in the first display data buffer 271 is to be transmitted; when the type counter value is "2", the display data in the second display data buffer 272 is to be transmitted; when the type counter value is "3", the display data in the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted; In some cases, the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is the object of transmission, and if the type counter value is "6", the display data of the sixth display data buffer 471 is the object of transmission; if the type counter value is "7", the display data of the seventh display data buffer 472 is the object of transmission; In the updating process of the type counter, 1 is added to the value of the type counter, and when the value of the type counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the upper limit value of "8", the value of the type counter is set to "1". As a result, the display data transmission targets are sequentially changed in the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473 for each processing of the second timer interrupt processing.

After that, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step SE314). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64; when the value of the type counter is "2", the type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64; when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64; If the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read from the main ROM 64; if the value of the type counter is "6", the type data corresponding to the sixth display circuit is read from the main ROM 64; if the value of the type counter is "7", the type data corresponding to the seventh display circuit is read from the main ROM 64; The type data corresponding to are read from the main ROM 64 .

After that, the display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step SE315). Specifically, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271 when the type counter value is "1", the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272 when the type counter value is "2", the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273 when the type counter value is "3", the display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274 when the type counter value is "4", and the fifth display data is read when the type counter value is "5". The display data is read from the display data buffer 275, the display data is read from the sixth display data buffer 471 when the type counter value is "6", the display data is read from the seventh display data buffer 472 when the type counter value is "7", and the display data is read from the eighth display data buffer 473 when the type counter value is "8".

Thereafter, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step SE316). In the transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step SE314 is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG. Further, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read out in step SE315 is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to permit the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224) to occur (step SE317).

Next, how the display contents of the first special figure display section 425, the second special figure display section 426 and the special figure display section 429 change according to the state of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. Figure 226 (a) shows the period during which the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed, Figure 226 (b) shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed, Figure 226 (c) shows the period during which the variation display of the pattern is executed in the first special figure display section 425, Figure 226 (d) shows the period in which the predetermined design is stopped and displayed in the first special figure display section 425, Figure 226 (e) ) shows the period during which the variable display of the pattern is executed in the second special figure display portion 426, FIG. 226(f) shows the period in which the predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed in the second special figure display portion 426, and FIG.

First, a situation in which the setting value update process (step SC216) and the setting confirmation process (step SC213) are not executed will be described.

At the timing of t1, the state of starting the game cycle triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side starts the fluctuation display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 as shown in FIG. 226(c). Then, when the display continuation period of the game round elapses at the timing of t2, as shown in FIGS. In this case, the 15R jackpot result is selected in the game round. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the stop display of the pattern corresponding to the 15R jackpot result is started in the first special figure display section 425. - 特許庁

After that, when the final stop period of the stop display of the pattern elapses at the timing of t3, the game cycle corresponding to the result of the big win is finished and the opening/closing execution mode is started. In this case, at the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 226(g), the special display portion 429 starts to display that the round game has been executed 15 times. Note that the special display portion 429 is in the off state until the timing of t3.

After that, the open/close execution mode ends at the timing of t4, and as shown in FIG. In this case, the special display section 429 is turned off at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 226(g). Then, when the display continuation period of the game round elapses at the timing of t5, as shown in FIGS. In this case, the first small winning result is selected in the game round. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the second special figure display section 426 starts the stop display of the pattern corresponding to the first small winning result.

After that, when the last stop period of the stop display of the pattern has passed, the distribution execution mode is started, and the distribution execution mode ends at the timing of t6. The open/close execution mode is started at the timing of t6 due to the occurrence of the V winning in the distribution execution mode. In this case, at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 226(g), the special display portion 429 starts to display the fact that the round game has been executed five times. Note that the special display section 429 is in the off state until timing t6. After that, although the opening/closing execution mode ends at the timing of t7, the display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is 5 times in the special display section 429 continues until a new game round is started in the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426.

When the game is being played as described above, the special display portion 429 does not perform the display corresponding to the number of execution times of the round game in the situation where the variation display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display portion 425, and similarly, the variation display of the pattern is not performed in the first special figure display portion 425 in the situation where the display corresponding to the number of execution times of the round game is performed in the special display portion 429. In addition, when the game is performed as described above, the special display portion 429 does not perform the display corresponding to the number of execution times of the round game under the condition that the second special figure display portion 426 performs the variable display of the pattern, and similarly, the second special symbol display portion 426 does not perform the variable display of the pattern under the condition that the special display portion 429 performs the display corresponding to the number of execution times of the round game.

Next, the situation in which the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed will be described.

At the timing of t8, the set value update process (step SC216) is started as shown in FIG. 226(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 226(c) at the timing of t8, the first special figure display unit 425 switches from the off state to the state of performing the variable display of the pattern. Also, at the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 226(g), the special display section 429 switches from the off state to the state in which the display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is 15 times.

After that, at timing t9, the set value update process (step SC216) ends as shown in FIG. 226(a). As a result, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 226(c), the variable display of the pattern in the first special figure display section 425 is terminated. In this case, initial display is started in the first special figure display section 425 as shown in FIG. 226(d). The content of the initial display is the same as the content of the initial display of the special figure display section 37a in the fifty-sixth embodiment. Also, at the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 226(g), the display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is 15 in the special display portion 429 is ended. In this case, the special display section 429 is turned off.

Next, the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed will be described.

At the timing of t10, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is started as shown in FIG. 226(b). In this case, as shown in FIG. 226(e) at the timing of t10, the second special figure display unit 426 switches from the off state to the state of performing the variable display of the pattern. Also, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 226(g), the special display section 429 switches from the off state to the state of displaying the number of executions of the round game being six.

After that, at the timing of t11, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends as shown in FIG. 226(b). As a result, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 226(e), the variable display of the pattern in the second special figure display section 426 ends. In this case, the initial display is started in the second special figure display section 426 as shown in FIG. 226(f). The content of the initial display is the same as the content of the initial display of the special figure display section 37a in the fifty-sixth embodiment. Also, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 226(g), the display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is 6 in the special display portion 429 ends. In this case, the special display section 429 is turned off.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display section 425 displays the changing pattern, and the special display section 429 displays a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game. When a game is being played, the special display portion 429 does not display a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game in a situation where the first special figure display portion 425 is displaying the variation of the pattern. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed by confirming that the first special figure display part 425 is displaying the variation of the pattern and the special display part 429 is displaying the display corresponding to the number of execution times of the round game.

In particular, the first special figure display portion 425 and the special display portion 429 are provided in an area visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 . By performing notification indicating that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being performed in the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429, it is possible to easily check whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being performed.

In addition, when a game is played, an open/close execution mode is generated after the game round is executed, so after the variation display of the pattern is carried out in the first special figure display part 425, the special display part 429 carries out the display corresponding to the number of execution times of the round game. By simultaneously performing the display of the two with different execution periods in the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, it is possible to clearly notify that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

The combination of the display contents of the first special figure display portion 425 and the special display portion 429 informs that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed. As a result, in order to illegally perform notification indicating that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 need to be illegally applied. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the fraudulent act.

The first special figure display portion 425 and the special display portion 429 are display portions used when the game is being executed. By using such a display unit to notify that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, it is possible to perform the notification while suppressing complication of the configuration.

When the notification indicating that the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed is performed, the first special figure display part 425 performs the variable display of the pattern, and the special display part 429 performs the display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game. The variation display of the pattern in the first special figure display part 425 is the display content which occurs even when the game is being executed, and the display corresponding to the number of execution times of the round game in the special display part 429 is the display content which is generated even when the game is being executed. As a result, it is possible to notify that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed by using the display contents that occur when the game is being executed.

The first special figure display portion 425 and the special display portion 429 are provided as a special figure unit 422 in a predetermined range. Thereby, it becomes possible to make it easy to confirm the display contents of each of the first special figure display portion 425 and the special display portion 429 .

In the situation where the game is being executed, the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened and closed when the special display section 429 displays the display corresponding to the number of times the round game is executed. On the other hand, when the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the special electric prize winning device 416 is kept closed while the special display section 429 displays a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game. This makes it possible to notify that the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

In a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display portion 426 displays the changing pattern, and the special display portion 429 displays a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game. When a game is being played, the special display portion 429 does not display a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game in a situation where the second special figure display portion 426 is displaying the variation of the pattern. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp the situation that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed by confirming that the second special figure display part 426 is performing the variable display of the pattern and the special display part 429 is performing the display corresponding to the number of execution times of the round game.

In addition, in both the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the special display section 429 displays a display corresponding to the number of times the round game is executed. In the section 426, the variable display of the pattern is performed. As a result, the manager of the gaming hall can clearly distinguish which of the set value update process (step SC216) and the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

Variation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit result in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the second special figure side is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 determined to be a losing result in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the second special figure side. Thus, it is possible to change the probability of a big winning result in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the second special figure side while not affecting the probability of a small winning result in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the second special figure side.

The number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 determined to be a small hit result in the success/failure determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side is the same regardless of the set value. Thereby, it becomes possible to make constant the probability that the small hit result is selected in the propriety determination process for the reservation information on the second special figure side in all the setting values. In addition, even if the probability that the small winning result is selected in the right or wrong determination process for the reserved information on the second special figure side is constant in this way, the probability that the big hit result is selected in the right or wrong determination process for the reserved information on the second special figure side.

The number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 that is determined to be a result of being out in the right or wrong determination process for the pending information on the second special figure side is the largest regardless of each set value. As a result, the variation in each set value of the probability that the big hit result is selected in the right or wrong determination process for the reserved information on the second special figure side is removed in the right or wrong determination process for the reserved information on the second special figure side.

In addition, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, in the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed, the first special figure display unit 425 performs the variable display of the pattern and the second special figure display unit 426. It may be configured to perform the variable display of the pattern. When a game is being played, if one of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 is performing the variation display of the pattern, the other is not configured to perform the variation display of the pattern. In this case, in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is executed as described above, the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 are each configured to display the pattern in a variable manner. It is possible to notify the administrator of the game hall that the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed. In the case of notifying that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed in the configuration, in addition to the fluctuation display of the pattern in each of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 In addition to the fluctuation display of the pattern in the general figure display unit 423a It may be configured to perform the fluctuation display of the pattern, and in addition to the fluctuation display of the pattern in each of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426, a predetermined display is performed in the special display unit 429. It is good also as a structure performed.

In addition, the display content displayed on the special display unit 429 in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed is not limited to the display content corresponding to the number of executions of the round game, and although the display content does not correspond to the number of executions of the round game, a predetermined display may be performed when at least one display segment 429a in the special display unit 429 becomes a light emitting state. When the first special figure display part 425 is performing the variable display of the pattern when the game is being played, the special display part 429 is in a non-display state in which all the display segments 429a are turned off, so that the special display part 429 is not in the non-display state while the first special figure display part 425 is performing the variable display of the pattern. Further, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display part 426 performs a variable display of the pattern, and the special display part 429 may perform a predetermined display, although it is not a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game.

In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, a dedicated display unit for notifying that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed may be provided in an area that can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14.

In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a dedicated display unit for notifying that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed may be provided in an area visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the game machine body 12 and the front door frame 14.

In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a dedicated display unit for notifying that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a setting confirmation process (step SC213) are being performed.

In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a dedicated display unit for notifying that either the setting value update process (step SC216) or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed may be provided in an area that can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. In this case, the notification is made on the same dedicated display unit regardless of whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. Further, in this configuration, the display contents on the same dedicated display unit may be different depending on whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

Further, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, the same notification may be performed in both the situation in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. Alternatively, one of the status of execution of the setting value update process (step SC216) and the status of execution of the setting confirmation process (step SC213) may be notified, but the other may not be notified.

In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, even if the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed as in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the first special figure display unit 425 resumes the display at the time of the previous power failure after the execution of the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power. The display data may be saved to an area where "0" clearing and initialization are not executed when the clear processing is executed, and the saved display data may be returned to the first display data buffer 271 when the set value update processing (step SC216) is completed. As a result, while the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being executed, the corresponding display is performed in the first special figure display part 425, and after the setting value update processing (step SC216) is completed, the display at the time of the previous power failure can be resumed.

Further, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, a configuration may be provided in which a display section corresponding to distribution execution is provided for displaying a display indicating that the distribution execution mode is in the distribution execution mode. The display part corresponding to the distribution execution is switched from a non-display state (i.e., all off state) to a predetermined display state when the distribution execution mode is started, and is switched from the predetermined display state to the non-display state when the distribution execution mode is terminated. In this configuration, when the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the display section corresponding to distribution execution is in a predetermined display state and the special display section 429 is in a predetermined display state, so that it is possible to notify that the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed. Also, such a notification configuration may be applied to a situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, even when the reservation information on the side of the first special figure becomes the object of the right or wrong determination process, the small hit result may be selected. Even in this case, the variation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot result when the winning determination process is executed for the reserved information on the first special figure side may be absorbed by the variation of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a losing result when the winning determination process is performed on the reserved information on the first special figure side. In this case, the probability that the small hit result is selected when the success/failure determination process is executed with respect to the reservation information on the first special figure side may be configured to be the same for each set value. In addition, instead of the above configuration, the variation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit result when the winning determination process is executed for the reserved information on the first special figure side.

Further, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, each setting value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit result when the winning determination process is executed for the reserved information on the second special figure side.

In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, a configuration may be provided in which there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit result in the success/failure determination process is relatively high or low. Also, in the configuration, a small hit result can be selected even when the winning judgment process is executed for the reserved information on the first special figure side, and the small winning result is selected by performing the winning judgment processing on the reserved information on the first special figure side. In the opening/closing execution mode, the special electric prize winning device 416 is configured to perform a short opening of about one second for a small number of times, about two times. In the above configuration, as the type of jackpot result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened in the same manner as when the small winning result is obtained, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set, but when the support mode before the start of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode, the low-frequency support mode is maintained. In this case, in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, when the special electric prize winning device 416 performs a short opening of about one second about two times with the holding information on the side of the first special figure as a trigger, it is possible for the player to predict which of the result of the small win or the result of the latent probability variable big win is triggered. In addition, in this configuration, the probability of selecting a small winning result when the winning judgment processing is executed at least for the reservation information on the first special figure side is the same or substantially the same regardless of the winning lottery mode and the set value, so that not only the set value but also the winning lottery mode can be prevented from being grasped by the player from the occurrence frequency of the small winning result.

In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, when the opening and closing execution mode is generated by winning V in the distribution execution mode that results in any of the small wins, the distribution execution mode that has already been completed may be displayed corresponding to the number of executions of the round game on the special display part 429 for one round. In this case, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the first small win, a special display part 429 displays a display corresponding to the round game of 6 times, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the second small win, a display corresponding to the round game of 9 times is performed in the special display part 429, and in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the third small win, a display corresponding to the round game of 15 times is performed in the special display part 429.

In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, only one type of small winning results may exist, and the number of round games to occur in the subsequent opening/closing execution mode may be determined by lottery when a V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode. In this case, the player pays attention to the timing when the V winning occurs.

Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of sorting the types of jackpot results varies according to the set value. In this case, the probability of selecting a big winning result in the success/failure determination process may also vary according to the set value, or the probability of selecting the big winning result in the success/failure determination process may be constant without varying according to the set value.

<Sixty-Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the sixty-fourth embodiment in the processing configuration of the second timer interrupt processing. The configuration that is different from the sixty-fourth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the 64th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. The processes of steps SE601 to SE615 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, as in step SE301 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment, the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed (step SE601). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SE602). If the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SE602: YES), setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is executed (step SE603). The contents of the setting process are the same as those in step SE303 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment.

After that, the setting processing of all-lighting display during setting update is executed (step SE604). In the setting process, all display segments of the normal figure display unit 423a, all light emitting units of the normal figure reservation display unit 423b, all display segments 425a of the first special figure display unit 425, all display segments 426a of the second special figure display unit 426, all light emission units of the first special figure reservation display unit 427, all light emission units of the second special figure reservation display unit 428, and all display segments 4 of the special display unit 429 29a is set to a light emitting state. In other words, all of the display sections controlled by the main CPU 63 and visible through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are put into the luminous state. This full lighting state ends when the set value update process (step SC216) ends. The full lighting state as described above does not occur in other situations including the situation where a game is being played. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can grasp whether or not the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed by confirming whether or not the above-described all-lighting state is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step SE602, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SE605). If the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SE605: YES), setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE606). The contents of the setting process are the same as those in step SE307 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment.

After that, a setting process for all lighting display during setting confirmation is executed (step SE607). In the setting process, all display segments 425a of the first special figure display unit 425, all display segments 426a of the second special figure display unit 426, all light emitting units of the first special figure reservation display unit 427, all light emitting units of the second special figure reservation display unit 428, and all display segments 429a of the special display unit 429 are set to the light emitting state. That is, among the display units controlled by the main CPU 63 and visible through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the game machine body 12 and the front door frame 14, all the display units other than the normal pattern display unit 423a and the normal pattern reservation display unit 423b are put into a light emitting state. This full lighting state ends when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends. The full lighting state as described above does not occur in other situations including the situation where a game is being played. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can grasp whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed by confirming whether or not the above-described all-lighting state is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step SE605, the processing of steps SE608 to SE615 is executed. Also, when the process of step SE604 or step SE607 is executed, the process of step SE609 to step SE615 is executed. The processing contents of steps SE608 to SE615 are the same as steps SE310 to SE317 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment.

According to the above configuration, while the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, all of the display sections controlled by the main side CPU 63 and visible through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are in a luminous state. Such a full lighting state does not occur in other situations including the situation in which a game is being played. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can grasp whether or not the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed by confirming whether or not the above-described all-lighting state is performed. In addition, all of the display sections controlled by the main CPU 63 and visible through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are in a light-emitting state, making it easy to identify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

In addition, while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, all the display parts other than the normal pattern display part 423a and the normal pattern reservation display part 423b among the display parts whose display is controlled by the main side CPU 63 and which can be visually recognized through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are in a light emitting state. Such a full lighting state does not occur in other situations including the situation where a game is being played. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can grasp whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed by confirming whether or not the above-described all-lighting state is performed.

It should be noted that the display unit in which all the display segments are in the luminous state while the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed is not limited to the entire display unit visible through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, and may be a part of the display unit. For example, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed, all of the display segments 425a and 429a of the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 may be in a light emitting state, and all of the display segments 425a and 426a of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 may be in a light emitting state, and the normal figure display unit 423a and the special display unit 42 All of the display segments of 9 may be configured to be in a light emitting state, and may be configured to be in a light emitting state. Further, the configuration may be applied as a configuration for notifying that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

<Sixty-sixth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the sixty-fourth embodiment in the processing configurations of the second timer interrupt processing and the set value update processing. The configuration that is different from the sixty-fourth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the 64th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing second timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. The processes of steps SE701 to SE715 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, as in step SE301 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment, the setting of interrupt inhibition is performed (step SE701). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SE702).

If the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SE702: YES), setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is executed (step SE703). The contents of the setting process are the same as those in step SE303 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment. After that, setting processing to the first display data buffer 271 during setting updating is executed (step SE704). The contents of the setting process are the same as those in step SE304 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment. Thereby, the variable display of the pattern is performed in the 1st special figure display part 425 in the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is performed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the process of step SE305 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the special display section 429 does not perform a predetermined display and the light-off state is maintained.

If a negative determination is made in step SE702, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SE705). If the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SE705: YES), setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE706). The contents of the setting process are the same as those in step SE307 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment. Thereafter, setting processing to the sixth display data buffer 471 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE707). The contents of the setting process are the same as those in step SE308 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment. As a result, the second special figure display section 426 performs the variable display of the pattern in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the process of step SE309 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the special display section 429 does not display a predetermined display, and the light-off state is maintained.

If a negative determination is made in step SE705, the processing of steps SE708 to SE715 is executed. Also, when the process of step SE704 or step SE707 is executed, the process of step SE709 to step SE715 is executed. The processing contents of steps SE708 to SE715 are the same as steps SE310 to SE317 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing in this embodiment. It should be noted that the processing of steps SE801 to SE816 in the setting value update processing is executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63 .

First, interrupt permission is set (step SE801). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 228) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period.

After that, the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened (step SE802). In the opening process, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c provided in the special electric prize winning device 416 is started. As a result, the special electric prize winning device 416 is put into an open state. After that, in steps SE803 to SE812, processing for updating the setting value is executed, in step SE813 interrupt prohibition is set, in step SE814 the second RAM clear processing is executed, and in step SE815 a return command at the time of updating is transmitted. The processing contents of these steps SE803 to SE815 are the same as steps SB302 to SB314 of the set value update processing (FIG. 167) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

After that, closing processing of special electric prize winning device 416 is executed (step SE816). In the closing process, output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c provided in the special electric prize winning device 416 is stopped. As a result, the special electric prize winning device 416 is closed.

Due to the above configuration, in the present embodiment, when the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the pattern is displayed in the first special figure display unit 425, and the special electric winning device 416 is in an open state. When the game is played, the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened under the condition that the game cycle corresponding to the big win result is executed and the pattern corresponding to the big win result is stopped and displayed in the first special figure display part 425.例文帳に追加In other words, when a game is being played, the special electric prize winning device 416 will not be in an open state in a situation where the first special figure display unit 425 is performing the variable display of the pattern. On the other hand, in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the variable display of the pattern is executed in the first special figure display unit 425 and the special electric winning device 416 is in an open state. Thereby, using the first special figure display unit 425 and the special electric winning device 416, it is possible to notify that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

In addition, while the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the special display section 429 is maintained in the non-display state even though the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the open state. When a game is being played, if the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state, a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is performed on the special display section 429 . Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed by confirming that the special display part 429 does not display the number of execution times of the round game although the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the open state.

In particular, when the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, all the display segments 429a of the special display section 429 are kept in a non-display state even though the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state, so that the special display section 429 is in a non-display state. As a result, the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp that the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed by confirming whether or not any display is being performed on the special display part 429 in the state that the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the open state.

Here, even in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the open state as in the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed. In addition, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display section 426 performs the variable display of the pattern. When a game is played, a special electric prize winning device 416 is opened in a situation where a game round corresponding to the result of a big win or a result of a small win is executed and a pattern corresponding to the result of a big win or a small win is stopped and displayed in a second special figure display part 426.例文帳に追加In other words, when a game is being played, the special electric prize winning device 416 will not be in an open state while the second special figure display unit 426 is performing the variable display of the pattern. On the other hand, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display unit 426 executes the variable display of the pattern and the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the open state. Thereby, using the second special figure display unit 426 and the special electric winning device 416, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

In addition, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, in order to notify one of the situation in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the normal pattern display unit 423a may be configured to change the pattern and the guidance unit 432 of the second operation unit 413 to be in the guidance state. When a game is being played, the situation in which the normal pattern display unit 423a is performing variable display of the pattern and the situation in which the guidance unit 432 of the second operation unit 413 is in the guidance state do not occur at the same time. By generating these situations at the same time, it is possible to notify that either the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

Further, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, both the distribution winning device 415 and the special electric winning device 416 may be opened in order to notify that either the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. When a game is being played, both the distribution prize winning device 415 and the special electric prize winning device 416 are not in the open state, so by opening both the distribution prize winning device 415 and the special electric prize winning device 416, it is possible to notify that either the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

Further, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a plurality of special electric prize winning devices 416 are provided in an open state in the open/close execution mode, and when a game is being played, the plurality of special electric prize winning devices 416 are not simultaneously opened. It is good also as composition which assumes.

Further, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, in order to notify that either the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened, but the degree of opening is less than that when a game is being played.

In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a display unit corresponding to distribution execution that performs a predetermined display when in the distribution execution mode is provided, and both the special display unit 429 and the display unit corresponding to distribution execution are turned off when the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the open state in order to notify that either the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. Good.

In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, in order to notify that either the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened and a display different from the display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is performed on the special display section 429.

<Sixty-seventh embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the sixty-fourth embodiment in the processing configuration of the second timer interrupt processing. The configuration that is different from the sixty-fourth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the 64th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing second timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. The processes of steps SE901 to SE915 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63 .

First, as in step SE301 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment, the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed (step SE901). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SE902).

If the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SE902: YES), setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is executed (step SE903). The contents of the setting process are the same as those in step SE303 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment.

After that, the setting updating display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SE904). This setting update display data continues to be stored in the first display data buffer 271 until the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value updating process (step SC216), and is cleared to "0" by executing the second RAM clearing process.

The display data during setting update is display data for causing the first special figure display unit 425 to display during setting update. The display during setting update is not included in the display contents displayed when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display part 425 in the game round, and is not included in the display contents of the pattern stop-displayed in the first special figure display part 425 for notifying the result of the winning/failure determination process and the result of the type determination process in the game round. That is, the display during setting update has display contents that are not displayed on the first special figure display section 425 in the situation where the game is being executed. Furthermore, the display during setting update is a display content that is not displayed on the first special figure display section 425 in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is not executed. As a result, by confirming whether or not the display during setting update is performed in the first special figure display unit 425, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

Specifically, the display content of the setting update display is such that all the display segments 425a of the first special figure display portion 425 are in the light emitting state. In other words, in the display during setting update, the display segments 425a which can be in the light emitting state in the state where the game is being played are in the light emitting state, but the combination of the display segments 425a which are in the light emitting state are combinations which are not selected in the state in which the game is being played. Note that the display contents of the setting updating display are not limited to those described above, and display contents may be such that only the display segment 425a that is not in the light emitting state during a game is in the light emitting state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the process of step SE305 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the special display section 429 does not perform a predetermined display and the light-off state is maintained.

If a negative determination is made in step SE902, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SE905). If the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SE905: YES), setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE906). The contents of the setting process are the same as those in step SE307 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment.

After that, the setting confirmation display data is set in the sixth display data buffer 471 (step SE907). This setting confirmation display data continues to be stored in the sixth display data buffer 471 until the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is completed, and is cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is completed.

The display data during setting confirmation is display data for causing the second special figure display unit 426 to display during setting confirmation. The display during setting confirmation is not included in the display contents displayed when the second special figure display part 426 performs the variation display of the pattern in the game round, and is not included in the display contents of the pattern stopped and displayed in the second special figure display part 426 for notifying the result of the winning/failure determination process and the result of the type determination process in the game round. That is, the display during setting confirmation has display contents that are not displayed on the second special figure display section 426 in the situation where the game is being executed. Furthermore, the display during setting confirmation has display contents that are not displayed on the second special figure display section 426 in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is not executed. As a result, by confirming whether or not the display during setting confirmation is performed in the second special figure display unit 426, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

Concretely, regarding the display contents of the display during setting confirmation, all the display segments 426a of the second special figure display portion 426 are displayed in a light emitting state. In other words, in the display during setting confirmation, the display segments 426a which can be in the light emitting state in the state where the game is being played are in the light emitting state, but the combination of the display segments 426a which are in the light emitting state are combinations which are not selected in the state in which the game is being played. The display contents of the setting confirmation display are not limited to those described above, and the display contents may be such that only the display segment 426a which does not enter the light emitting state while the game is being played becomes the light emitting state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the process of step SE309 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the special display section 429 does not display a predetermined display, and the light-off state is maintained.

If a negative determination is made in step SE905, the processing of steps SE908 to SE915 is executed. Also, when the process of step SE904 or step SE907 is executed, the process of step SE909 to step SE915 is executed. The processing contents of these steps SE908 to SE915 are the same as steps SE310 to SE317 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224) in the 64th embodiment.

According to the above configuration, in the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the setting update process display, which is a dedicated display content indicating that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, is performed in the first special figure display unit 425. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed using the first special figure display unit 425.

In addition, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display unit 426 displays the setting confirmation process, which is a dedicated display content indicating that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed using the second special figure display unit 426.

In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a configuration may be employed in which a special display that is not displayed when a game is being played is performed on the special display section 429 in order to notify that either the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, in order to notify that it is one of the situation in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, a dedicated display that is not displayed when the game is being performed in both the first special figure display section 425 and the special display section 429 may be performed.

Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, in order to notify that it is one of the situation in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, a dedicated display that is not displayed when the game is performed in both the second special figure display section 426 and the special display section 429 may be performed.

Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, in order to notify that it is one of the situations in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, a dedicated display that is not displayed when the game is performed in both the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 may be performed.

Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, it may be configured to perform a dedicated display that is not displayed when a game is performed in the general pattern display unit 423a in order to notify that it is one of the situations in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

<Sixty-eighth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the sixty-fourth embodiment in the configuration for notifying that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. The configuration that is different from the sixty-fourth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the 64th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 231(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the special display section 429 in this embodiment.

In the special display portion 429, four light emitting portions 481 to 484 are arranged side by side at regular intervals. The light emitting portion 481 at the left end of the four light emitting portions 481 to 484 is a 15R display portion 481 for informing that the round game is executed 15 times, the display portion 482 adjacent to it to the right is a 9R display portion 482 for informing that the round game is to be executed 9 times, and the display portion 483 adjacent to the right is a 6R display portion 483 for informing that the round game is to be executed 6 times, A display section 484 on the right end is a small hit display section 484 for notifying that it is in the distribution execution mode.

A number "15" is printed at a position adjacent to the 15R display part 481 (specifically, a lower position) as a 15R display part 485 indicating that the 15R display part 481 corresponds to execution of 15 round games. A number "9" is printed at a position adjacent to the 9R display part 482 (specifically, a lower position) as a 9R display part 486 indicating that the 9R display part 482 corresponds to execution of nine round games. A number "6" is printed at a position adjacent to the 6R display part 483 (specifically, a lower position) as a 6R display part 487 indicating that the 6R display part 483 corresponds to execution of six round games. On the other hand, at a position adjacent to the small hit display portion 484, there is no explicit portion indicating that the small hit display portion 484 corresponds to execution of the distribution execution mode.

When the result of the win/fail determination process and the type determination process is the 15R jackpot result and the opening/closing execution mode is started, the 15R display unit 481 changes from the off state to the light emitting state. While the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the 15R display section 481 is maintained in the light-emitting state, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the 15R display section 481 changes from the light-emitting state to the light-out state. In addition, when the open/close execution mode in which the round game is executed 14 times is started due to the occurrence of the V winning in the distribution execution mode triggered by the result of the win/fail determination process and the type determination process becoming the third small winning result, the 15R display part 481 changes from the extinguished state to the luminous state. While the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the 15R display section 481 is maintained in the light-emitting state, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the 15R display section 481 changes from the light-emitting state to the light-out state.

When an open/close execution mode in which round games are executed eight times is started due to occurrence of a V winning in a distribution execution mode triggered by the result of win/fail determination processing and type determination processing being the result of a second small winning, the 9R display part 482 is changed from the extinguished state to the luminous state. While the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the 9R display section 482 is maintained in the light-emitting state, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the 9R display section 482 changes from the light-emitting state to the extinguished state.

When the result of the win/fail determination process and the type determination process is the 6R jackpot result and the opening/closing execution mode is started, the 6R display unit 483 changes from the off state to the light emitting state. While the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the 6R display section 483 is maintained in the light-emitting state, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the 6R display section 483 changes from the light-emitting state to the extinguished state. In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed five times is started due to the occurrence of the V winning in the distribution execution mode triggered by the result of the win/fail judgment processing and the type judgment processing being the result of the first small prize, the 6R display part 483 changes from the extinguished state to the emitting state. While the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the 6R display section 483 is maintained in the light-emitting state, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the 6R display section 483 changes from the light-emitting state to the extinguished state.

When the results of the win/fail determination process and the type determination process are any of the first small win result, the second small win result and the third small win result and the distribution execution mode is started, the small win display unit 484 changes from the off state to the light emitting state. While the distribution execution mode is being executed, the small winning display section 484 is maintained in the light emitting state, and when the distribution execution mode is terminated, the small winning display section 484 changes from the light emitting state to the extinguished state.

Due to the above configuration, a plurality of display portions 481 to 484 out of the 15R display portion 481, 9R display portion 482, 6R display portion 483 and small winning display portion 484 do not simultaneously emit light when a game is being played. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the 15R display section 481, the 9R display section 482, the 6R display section 483, and the small winning display section 484, the plurality of display sections 481 to 484 are simultaneously illuminated.

FIG. 231(b) is a time chart showing the display contents of the 15R display section 481, the 6R display section 483 and the small hit display section 484 when the set value update process (step SC216) or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. 231(b1) shows the period during which the set value update process (step SC216) is executed, FIG. 231(b2) shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed, FIG. 4 indicates the period during which the light is emitted.

At the timing of t1, the set value update process (step SC216) is started as shown in FIG. 231(b1). In this case, as shown in FIG. 231(b3), the 15R display unit 481 switches from the extinguished state to the luminous state at the timing of t1, and the small hit display unit 484 switches from the extinguished state to the luminous state as shown in FIG. 231(b5). The 15R display section 481 and the small hit display section 484 continue to emit light while the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

Thereafter, at timing t2, the set value update process (step SC216) ends as shown in FIG. 231(b1). As a result, at the timing t2, the 15R display section 481 switches from the luminous state to the extinguished state as shown in FIG.

At the timing of t3, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is started as shown in FIG. 231(b2). In this case, at the timing t3, the 15R display unit 481 switches from the off state to the light emitting state as shown in FIG. 231(b3), and the 6R display unit 483 switches from the off state to the light emitting state as shown in FIG. The light emission states of the 15R display section 481 and the 6R display section 483 are continued while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

Thereafter, at timing t4, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends as shown in FIG. 231(b2). As a result, at the timing t4, the 15R display section 481 switches from the luminous state to the extinguished state as shown in FIG. 231(b3), and the 6R display section 483 switches from the luminous state to the extinguished state as shown in FIG. 231(b4).

According to the above configuration, both the 15R display section 481 and the small hit display section 484 are in a light emitting state in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed. A situation in which both the 15R display section 481 and the small hit display section 484 are in a light emitting state does not occur in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is not executed, including a situation in which a game is being executed. As a result, it is possible to notify whether or not the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed using the 15R display section 481 and the small hit display section 484.

Both the 15R display section 481 and the 6R display section 483 are in a light emitting state when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. A situation in which both the 15R display section 481 and the 6R display section 483 are in a luminous state does not occur in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is not executed, including a situation in which a game is being executed. This makes it possible to use the 15R display section 481 and the 6R display section 483 to notify whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

<Sixty-ninth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above 64 embodiments in the execution contents of the game. The configuration that is different from the sixty-fourth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the 64th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 232 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

Even in this embodiment, an inner rail portion 401 and an outer rail portion 402 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 401 and the outer rail portion 402 constitute a guide rail as a guide means. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning portion 411, a first operating portion 412, a second operating portion 413, a through winning portion 414, a special electric winning device 416, a variable display unit 421, a special figure unit 422, a general figure unit 423, and the like. The game area PA is divided by the variable display unit 421 into an upper area PA1, a left area PA2, a right area PA3 and a lower area PA4. The configuration of the general winning portion 411, the first operating portion 412, the second operating portion 413, the through winning portion 414, the special electric winning device 416, the variable display unit 421, the special figure unit 422 and the general figure unit 423 is the same as in the 64th embodiment, and the arrangement position in the game area PA is also the same as in the 64th embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the distribution winning device 415 in the 64th embodiment is not provided.

Even if a game ball enters the through winning portion 414, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters any one of the general winning portion 4111, the first operating portion 412, the second operating portion 413, and the special electric winning device 416, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to increase the number of game media that can be used by the player. Specifically, when a game ball enters the general prize winning portion 411, ten game balls are paid out, when a game ball enters the first operating portion 412, three game balls are paid out, and when a game ball enters the second operating portion 413, one game ball is paid out, and the game is sent to the special electric winning device 416. When a ball is entered, 15 game balls are put out.

A first guide nail 491a for guiding all the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 to the through winning part 414 is provided in an area above the through winning part 414 in the right side area PA3. Since the first guide nail 491a is provided, all game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 pass through the through winning portion 414. FIG. However, since the game ball that has won the through winning part 414 continues to flow down the right side area PA3 as it is, winning to the second operating part 413 and the special electric winning device 416 provided on the downstream side of the through winning part 414 in the right side area PA3 can occur. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to that all the game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 win the through winning section 414, and the game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 may win the through winning section 414 with a high probability such as a probability of 9/10.

A second guide nail 491b for guiding all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the second operation part 413 is provided in the area below the through winning part 414 and above the second operation part 413 in the right area PA3. Since the second guide nail 491b is provided, all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 surely flow into the passage portion 439a formed by the cover member 439 of the second operating portion 413. Therefore, in a situation where the guiding unit 432 of the second operating part 413 is in the guided state, the game ball that flows into the right area PA3 and is guided to the second operating part 413 by the second guide peg 491b will surely enter the second operating part 413. On the other hand, when the guide unit 432 of the second operating portion 413 is in the non-guiding state, the game ball that flows into the right area PA3 and is guided to the second operating portion 413 by the second guide nail 491b flows into the passage portion 439a by the cover member 439 of the second operating portion 413, but does not enter the second operating portion 413. This game ball passes through the passage portion 439a and flows down the downstream side of the second operating portion 413. As shown in FIG. For example, when the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state, the game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 416 with a high probability. In addition, when the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state, the game ball may surely enter the special electric prize winning device 416 .

In the above configuration, the number of game balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the second operating part 413 is one, so even if a ball enters the second operating part 413 frequently, the number of game balls owned by the player does not substantially increase. On the other hand, when the guide unit 432 of the second operating portion 413 is in the non-guiding state, the game ball guided by the second guide nail 491b does not enter the second operating portion 413. FIG. Therefore, even if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode and the induction unit 432 is in the induction state with high frequency, the number of game balls owned by the player does not increase even if it becomes difficult to reduce unless the opening/closing execution mode occurs and the game balls enter the special electric prize winning device 416.例文帳に追加

Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main side CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to set the winning lottery, the display settings of the special figure display units 425 and 426, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 424, the setting of the display of the normal figure display unit 423a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. A reach random number counter C3 used for a reach generation lottery when fluctuating, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS determining the display continuation period of the game machine in the special figure display parts 425, 426 and the pattern display device 424 are used. Furthermore, it is supposed to use the general electric accessory open counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the guidance unit 432 of the second operation unit 413 is to be in the guidance execution state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure reservation area 451 provided in the main side RAM 65 when the winning to the first operation unit 412 or the second operation unit 413 occurs. The special figure reservation area 451 includes a first special figure reservation area 452, a second special figure reservation area 453, and an execution area 492 for special figures.

The first special figure reservation area 452 includes a first area 452a, a second area 452b, a third area 452c and a fourth area 452d, and according to the winning history to the first operation unit 412, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 452a to 452d as the reservation information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d, when the winning of the first operation unit 412 occurs a plurality of times in succession, each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the first area 452a→second area 452b→third area 452c→fourth area 452d. By providing four areas 452a to 452d in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating section 412 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3 or 5 or more, or may be singular.

The second special figure reservation area 453 includes a first area 453a, a second area 453b, a third area 453c and a fourth area 453d, and according to the winning history to the second operation unit 413, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 453a to 453d as the reservation information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d, each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the first area 453a→the second area 453b→the third area 453c→the fourth area 453d when the winning to the second operation unit 413 occurs a plurality of times in succession. Since the four areas 453a to 453d are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the second operating section 413 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 453 is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3 or 5 or more, or may be singular.

The execution area 492 for the special figure is provided with the execution area 493 for the first special figure and the execution area 494 for the second special figure. The execution area 493 for the first special figure is an area in which the reserved information on the side of the first special figure to be subjected to the propriety determination process and the type determination process for the special figure when the variable display of the pattern is started in the first special figure display unit 425 is stored. The execution area 494 for the second special figure is an area in which the reservation information on the second special figure side to be subjected to the propriety determination process and the type determination process for the special figure is stored when the variable display of the pattern is started in the second special figure display unit 426. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425, the reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure reservation area 452 is moved to the execution area 493 for the first special figure. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the pattern in the second special figure display unit 426, the reservation information on the second special figure side stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure reservation area 453 is moved to the execution area 494 for the second special figure.

Information corresponding to the general electronic role release counter C4 is stored in the general pattern reservation area 455 provided in the main side RAM 65 when a prize to the through prize winning section 414 occurs. The general pattern reservation area 455 includes a first area 455a, a second area 455b, a third area 455c and a fourth area 455d, and according to the winning history to the through prize winning section 414, the numerical information of the general pattern role release counter C4 is stored in one of the areas 455a to 455d as reservation information on the general pattern side. In this case, numerical information is stored in the first area 455a to the fourth area 455d in chronological order in the order of the first area 455a→second area 455b→third area 455c→fourth area 455d when winning to the through winning part 414 occurs a plurality of times in succession. Since the four areas 455a to 455d are provided in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the through winning section 414 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the normal drawing reservation area 455 is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3 or 5 or more, or may be singular.

The normal map reservation area 455 is provided with an execution area 456 for the normal map. The execution area 456 for the normal map is an area in which holding information on the normal map side to be subjected to the guidance state lottery for determining whether or not to put the guidance unit 432 in the guidance state when starting the variable display in the normal map display unit 423a is stored. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 423a is started, the reservation information of the normal map side stored in the first area 455a of the normal map reservation area 455 is moved to the execution area 456 for the normal map.

Out of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, and the common electrical goods release counter C4 are the same as those of the 64th embodiment. On the other hand, the configurations relating to the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS are different from those of the 64th embodiment. The configuration of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2 and variation type counter CS will be described below. In the present embodiment, the symbol display device 424 does not display the ready-to-win state in the game cycle corresponding to the result of the small hit, and furthermore, the combination of the same symbols is not stop-displayed after the variable display of the symbols.

First, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9999, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 9999). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the special figure reservation area 451 of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation part 412 or the second operation part 413. Then, using the stored numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the win/fail determination process is performed.

The values of the random numbers that are selected in the winning/failure determination process are stored in the main ROM 64 as a winning/failure table. As a right/wrong table, first right/wrong tables 495 and 496 are provided in correspondence with the reserved information on the first special figure side, and second right/wrong tables 497 and 498 are provided in correspondence with the reserved information on the second special figure side. In addition, in this embodiment, there are a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of winning a big hit is relatively high or low as the win-or-fail lottery mode.

Figure 234 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right or wrong table 495 at the time of low probability referred to when performing the right or wrong determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side in the low probability mode, Figure 234 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right or wrong table 496 at the time of high probability to be referred to when performing the right or wrong determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side in the high probability mode, Figure 234 (c) is the second special figure side in the low probability mode It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second right or wrong table 497 at the time of low probability referred to when performing the right or wrong determination process for the reservation information, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 234(a) to 234(d), similar to the 64th embodiment, the results of the winning/losing determination process include a big winning result, a small winning result, and a losing result. The jackpot result is a winning/failing result that can serve as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode in which a plurality of round games are executed, as well as a trigger for shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a win/fail result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 416 is controlled to open/close, but does not trigger the transition to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. The deviation result is a win/fail result that does not trigger a shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and does not trigger a shift to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode.

As shown in FIG. 234(a), the first success/failure table 495 at the time of low probability is set with a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result as the result of the success/failure determination process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states of 'setting 1' to 'setting 6', and the setting is made so that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a big winning result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a losing result. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same in any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest setting value, 50 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which becomes a big winning result, 1000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which becomes a small winning result, and 8950 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which becomes a losing result. In addition, 52 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 1000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a small winning, and 8948 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a losing result in the "setting 2" which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 1". Further, in "setting 3" which is a set value one step higher than "setting 2", 54 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the big winning result, 1000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the small winning result, and 8946 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the losing result. In addition, 56 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 1000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a small winning, and 8944 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a losing result in the "setting 4" which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 3". In addition, 58 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the big win, 1000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 8942 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the ``setting 5'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 4''. Further, in the "setting 6" which is the highest set value, 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the big winning result, 1000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the small winning result, and 8940 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the losing result.

As shown in FIG. 234(b), the first success/failure table 496 at the time of high probability is set with a big win result, a small win result, and a miss result as the determination result of the win/fail determination. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states of 'setting 1' to 'setting 6', and the setting is made so that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a big winning result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a losing result. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same for any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest setting value, 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a big win, 1000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a small winning result, and 8500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a losing result. In addition, 520 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the big win, 1000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 8480 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the "setting 2" which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 1". In addition, 540 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 1000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a small winning, and 8460 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a losing result in the "setting 3" which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 2". In addition, 560 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 1000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a small winning, and 8440 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a losing result in the "setting 4" which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 3". In addition, 580 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a big win, 1000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 8420 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the ``setting 5'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 4''. In addition, 600 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the big winning result, 1000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the small winning result, and 8400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the losing result in the "setting 6" which is the highest set value.

In "setting 1", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side is 1/200 in the low probability mode and 1/20, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 2", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side is about 1/192 in the low probability mode and about 1/19.2, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 3", the probability of a big win result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side is about 1/185 in the low probability mode and about 1/18.5 which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 4", the probability of a big win result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side is about 1/179 in the low probability mode, and about 1/17.9 which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 5", the probability of a big win result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side is about 1/172 in the low probability mode and about 1/17.2 which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 6", the probability of a big win result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side is about 1/167 in the low probability mode, and about 1/16.7 which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. That is, in any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side is 10 times that in the low probability mode in the high probability mode.

On the other hand, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side is 1/10 which is the same regardless of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In addition, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side is 1/10, which is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In other words, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side is constant regardless of the setting state and the success or failure lottery mode. In addition, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side is a higher probability than the probability of a big hit result regardless of the setting state and the success or failure lottery mode. However, when the hold information on the first special figure side is used as a trigger, the probability that the result will be out is the highest regardless of the setting state and the success or failure lottery mode. In other words, the probability of losing results when the holding information on the first special figure side is a trigger is higher than the combination probability of the big winning result and the small winning result regardless of the setting state and the winning/failing lottery mode.

The numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of the big winning may be aggregated and set so as to have serial numbers, or at least a part or all of them may be dispersed and set so as not to have serial numbers. Further, the numerical value information of the win random number counter C1 as a result of a small win may be aggregated and set so as to have serial numbers, or at least a part or all of them may be dispersed and set so as not to have serial numbers.

As shown in FIG. 234(c), the second success/failure table 497 at the time of low probability is set with a big hit result, a small hit result and a miss result as the result of the success/failure determination process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states of 'setting 1' to 'setting 6', and the setting is made so that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a big winning result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a losing result. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same in any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest set value, 50 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a big win, 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a small winning result, and 550 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a losing result. In addition, 52 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a small winning, and 548 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a losing result in the ``setting 2'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 1''. In addition, 54 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the big win, 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 546 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the ``setting 3'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 2''. In addition, 56 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a big win, 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 544 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the ``setting 4'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 3''. In addition, 58 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is the result of a big win, 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is the result of a small winning, and 542 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is the result of a losing result in the 'setting 5' which is a set value one step higher than the 'setting 4'. In addition, 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the big win, 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 540 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the "setting 6" which is the highest set value.

As shown in FIG. 234(d), the second success/failure table 498 at the time of high probability is set with a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result as the result of the success/failure determination process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states of 'setting 1' to 'setting 6', and the setting is made so that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a big winning result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a losing result. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same for any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest setting value, 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big win, 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning result, and 100 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a losing result. In addition, 520 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a big win, 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 80 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the ``setting 2'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 1''. In addition, 540 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a small winning, and 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a losing result in the "setting 3" which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 2". In addition, 560 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a big win, 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 40 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the ``setting 4'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 3''. In addition, 580 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a big win, 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 20 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the ``setting 5'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 4''. In addition, 600 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the big win, 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 0 pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result are set to "setting 6" which is the highest set value.

In "setting 1", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is 1/200 in the low probability mode and 1/20, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 2", the probability of a big win result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is about 1/192 in the low probability mode and about 1/19.2, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 3", the probability of a big win result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/185 in the low probability mode and about 1/18.5, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 4", the probability of a big win result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/179 in the low probability mode and about 1/17.9 which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In ``setting 5'', the probability of a big win result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is about 1/172 in the low probability mode and about 1/17.2, which is ten times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 6", the probability of a big win result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/167 in the low probability mode and about 1/16.7 which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In other words, in any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is 10 times that in the low probability mode in the high probability mode. In addition, the probability of a big win result is the same in the case of using the holding information on the side of the first special figure as a trigger and the case of using the holding information on the side of the second special figure as a trigger when comparison is made with combinations in which the combination of the set state and the winning/failure lottery mode is the same.

On the other hand, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/1.06, which is the same for any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In addition, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is 1/1.06, which is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. That is, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the pending information on the second special figure side is constant regardless of the setting state and the success or failure lottery mode. The probability of a small hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is higher than the probability of a small hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side. In addition, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is a higher probability than the probability of a big hit result regardless of the setting state and the success or failure lottery mode. Moreover, when the holding information on the second special figure side is used as a trigger, the probability of becoming a small hit result is higher than the probability of becoming an off result regardless of the setting state and the success or failure lottery mode. In other words, the probability of a small winning result when the holding information on the second special figure side is used as a trigger is higher than the composite probability of the big winning result and the losing result regardless of the set state and the winning/failure lottery mode.

The numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of the big winning may be aggregated and set so as to have serial numbers, or at least part or all of them may be dispersed and set so as not to have serial numbers. Further, the numerical value information of the win random number counter C1 as a result of a small win may be aggregated and set so as to have serial numbers, or at least a part or all of them may be dispersed and set so as not to have serial numbers.

As described above, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of the big winning result is set in both the case of being triggered by the holding information on the first special figure side and the case of being triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side. In addition, the opening/closing execution mode is a period in which the amount of increase in the number of balls possessed by the player per unit time is the largest, and by varying the probability of the result of a big win that triggers the shift to the opening/closing execution mode according to the set value, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the set value.

In addition, in a configuration in which the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result in the high-probability mode is a fixed number times (specifically, 10 times) higher than the probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode, regardless of any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it is possible to make constant the fluctuation rate of the probability of a big win between the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode in any setting state.

In addition, the probability of a big win result is the same in the case of using the holding information on the side of the first special figure as a trigger and the case of using the holding information on the side of the second special figure as a trigger when comparison is made with combinations in which the combination of the set state and the winning/failure lottery mode is the same. As a result, it is possible to prevent a difference in the probability of occurrence of a big hit result between when the holding information on the side of the first special figure is the trigger and when the holding information on the side of the second special figure is the trigger.

In addition, when the reservation information on the first special figure side is used as a trigger, the probability of a small winning result is the same in any of 'setting 1' to 'setting 6', and the win/loss lottery mode is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In addition, when the reservation information on the second special figure side is used as a trigger, the probability of a small winning result is the same in any of 'setting 1' to 'setting 6', and the win/loss lottery mode is the same in both the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to limit the target to which the player pays attention in estimating the setting value to the result of the big win, and it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the setting value.

On the other hand, the probability of becoming a small hit result is higher when the second special figure side reservation information is the trigger than when the first special figure side reservation information is the trigger. As a result, the occurrence frequency of the small winning result can be made different between the case where the game cycle triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side and the case where the game cycle triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side are executed.

Further, in the structure in which the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result is larger than the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result in the first right/wrong table 495, 496, the variation of the probability of the big winning result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation of the number of the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the winning result. The number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the outliers is the largest. As a result, it is possible to reduce the probability variation of the result of winning by the set value in order to absorb the probability variation of the big win result by the set value. Therefore, when the reservation information on the first special figure side is used as a trigger, it is possible for the player to limit the object to which the player pays attention in order to guess the set value to the result of the big winning, and it is possible to make it difficult to guess the set value.

In addition, in a configuration in which the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the winning result is smaller than the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result in the second right/wrong tables 497, 498, the variation of the probability of the big winning result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the winning result. Then, in the case of ``setting 6'', which is a situation in which the combination probability of the big winning result and the small winning result is the highest, and in the high probability mode, in the situation where the success/failure determination processing is performed for the reservation information on the side of the second special figure, the probability of being an out result is 0%. Thereby, in the case of "setting 6" and high probability mode, it is possible to suitably increase the combination probability of the big winning result and the small winning result in the situation where the winning or losing judgment processing is performed for the reservation information on the second special figure side.

Next, the type counter C2 will be explained. The type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the special figure reservation area 451 of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation part 412 or the second operation part 413. The type determination process is performed using the stored value of the type counter C2.

The type determination process using the type counter C2 is performed when a jackpot result is obtained in the success/failure determination process. On the other hand, when a small hit result is obtained in the success/failure determination process, the type determination process is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of big winning results are set, whereas only one type of small winning result is set. When the jackpot result is selected in the success/failure determination process, the type of jackpot result is selected using the type table 499 and the type counter C2 pre-stored in the main ROM 64 . Hereinafter, the contents of each type of jackpot results and the contents of small hit results will be described.

FIG. 235 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table 499 that is referred to for sorting the types of jackpot results when a jackpot result is selected in the success/failure determination process triggered by the first special figure side reservation information or the second special figure side reservation information. Moreover, FIG.235(b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each content of a multiple types of big-hit result, and the content of one kind of small-hit result.

The type table 499 is referred to when a big hit result is selected in the win/loss determination process triggered by the hold information for the first special figure, and is referred to when the big hit result is selected in the win/fail decision process triggered by the hold information for the second special figure. In other words, the same type table 499 is referred to when the big winning result is selected in the winning judgment processing triggered by the holding information for the first special figure and when the big winning result is selected in the winning judgment processing triggered by the holding information for the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 235(a), in the type table 499, 6R normal jackpot results, 6R high-probability jackpot results, and 16R high-probability jackpot results are set as the types of jackpot results. Numerical information of the type counter C2 of ``0 to 10'' corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, numerical information of the type counter C2 of ``11 to 26'' corresponds to the 6R high probability jackpot result, and numerical information of the type counter C2 of ``27 to 29'' corresponds to the 16R high probability jackpot result. That is, when a jackpot result is selected in the success/failure determination process, a 6R normal jackpot result is selected with a probability of 11/30, a 6R high-probability jackpot result is selected with a probability of 16/30, and a 16R high-probability jackpot result is selected with a probability of 3/30.

When the 6R normal jackpot results, as shown in FIG. 235(b), the subsequent round game occurs six times in the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the low probability mode is set regardless of the win/fail lottery mode before starting the opening/closing execution mode, and the high frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before starting the opening/closing execution mode. However, this high-frequency support mode is terminated and shifted to a low-frequency support mode when the total number of game rounds triggered by the holding information on the first special figure side and the game round triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is executed 50 times.

As in the 64th embodiment, the round game is a game that continues until one of two conditions is satisfied: that the number of times the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened and closed reaches the upper limit, or that a predetermined upper limit winning number of game balls wins the special electric prize winning device 416. In this embodiment, the opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 416 is performed once in one round game, and the open continuation period in each round game is set to 29 seconds. Also, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electric winning device 416 is set to ten. When the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds, so that the open continuation period of the round game is set to a time longer than the product of the shooting period of the game balls and the upper limit winning number of one round game. Therefore, it can be expected that game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number of winning prizes will be won by the special electric prize winning device 416 in each round game.

When the 6R high-probability jackpot result is obtained, as shown in FIG. 235(b), the round game is generated six times in the subsequent opening/closing execution mode. After the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the high probability mode is set regardless of the win/fail lottery mode before starting the opening/closing execution mode, and the high frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before starting the opening/closing execution mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the next game round that results in a big win is completed. However, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are not limited to this, and although these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are terminated when the number of execution times of the game rounds reaches the end reference number of times, the end reference number of times is much higher than the probability of the big win result, so that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode may be continued until the next game round resulting in the big win result is substantially completed.

When a 16R high-probability jackpot result is obtained, 16 round games are generated in the subsequent opening/closing execution mode as shown in FIG. 235(b). Therefore, the 16R high-probability jackpot result is the most advantageous jackpot result in terms of at least the number of times the round game is executed. After the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the high probability mode is set regardless of the win/fail lottery mode before starting the opening/closing execution mode, and the low frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before starting the opening/closing execution mode. These high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode continue until the next game round that results in a big win is completed. However, the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode are not limited to this, and although these high probability mode and low frequency support mode are ended when the number of execution times of the game rounds reaches the end reference number of times, the end reference number of times is much higher than the probability of the big win result, so that the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode may be continued until the next game round of the big win result is substantially completed.

When a small hit results, the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened once in the opening/closing execution mode after that, as shown in FIG. 235(b). This single open time ends when either one of two conditions has passed and the number of prizes awarded to the special electric prize winning device 416 has reached ten. In this case, as already explained, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the open round, game balls equal to or more than the upper limit winning number are basically not won in the special electric prize winning device 416, and the special electric prize winning device 416 is closed when 2 seconds, which is the open continuation period, elapses. Further, even if a small winning result occurs, the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode are maintained as they were before the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

As already explained, a small hit result can be selected in the success/failure determination process when triggered by the pending information on the first special figure side and when triggered by the pending information on the second special figure side. However, there is a higher probability that a small hit result is selected than when the second special figure side reservation information is used as a trigger rather than when the first special figure side reservation information is used as a trigger. More specifically, the probability of selecting a small winning result in the success/failure determination process when triggered by the pending information on the second special figure side is higher than the combined probability of the big winning result and the failure result. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode in which the frequency of winning to the second operation unit 413 is high, the probability of a small winning result per unit number of shots is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. However, the expected number of game balls that generate a prize to the special electric prize winning device 416 when the holding information on the second special figure side results in a small hit is higher in the low frequency support mode than in the high frequency support mode. The reason why such an event occurs will be explained below.

FIG. 235(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the support mode. In both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the guidance state in the guidance state lottery for determining whether or not to control the guidance unit 432 of the second operating part 413 to the guidance state is the same at 95%. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode may have substantially the same probability of winning the induction state, and the high frequency support mode may have a higher probability of winning the induction state than the low frequency support mode.

The display continuation period of the variable display of the pattern in the normal figure display part 423a executed when the guidance state lottery is executed is 4 seconds in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is 0.1 seconds in the high frequency support mode. While the variation display of the pattern is performed in the normal pattern display part 423a, even if the reservation information of the normal pattern side is reserved and stored in the normal pattern reservation area 455, the guidance unit 432 of the second operation part 413 does not enter the guidance state. And, when the induction unit 432 of the second operating portion 413 is in the non-inducing state, the game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 reaches the position of the special electric winning device 416 present downstream of the second operating portion 413.

The mode of execution of the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 when the guidance state is won is that in the low-frequency support mode, the guidance unit 432 is in the guidance state only once for 2 seconds, and in the high-frequency support mode, the guidance unit 432 is in the guidance state only once for 6 seconds. The guidance state of the guidance unit 432 also ends when the number of winning prizes to the second operation unit 413 reaches the upper limit of 10 winning prizes, but as already explained, in a situation where the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In mode, the induction unit 432 is in the induction state for 6 seconds.

Due to the above configuration, in the high-frequency support mode, the induction unit 432 has a high probability of winning the induction state of 95%, and the display duration of the pattern in the normal figure display part 423a is 0.1 seconds, which is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball, and in the induction state, the induction unit 432 is in the induction state for 6 seconds. Also, as already explained, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 basically wins through the winning part 414 and basically wins the second operating part 413 if the guiding unit 432 is in the guiding state. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, when the shooting of the game ball is continued so as to flow down the right area PA3, the guiding unit 432 is basically in the guiding state and the winning to the second operating part 413 occurs, so that the game ball does not flow into the downstream side of the second operating part 413. - 特許庁Therefore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, although winning to the second operating part 413 occurs frequently, even if the special electric winning device 416 becomes open due to a small winning result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side, the special electric winning device 416 basically does not win a prize because the game ball does not reach the position where the ball can enter the special electric winning device 416.例文帳に追加Incidentally, since the number of game balls to be put out is one even if a winning to the second operating part 413 occurs, even if winning to the second operating part 413 occurs frequently in the high-frequency support mode, the number of game balls owned by the player does not increase.

On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, the induction unit 432 has a high probability of winning the induction state of 95%, and the pattern display continuation period in the normal figure display part 423a is 4 seconds, which is longer than the shooting cycle of the game ball, and in the induction state, the induction unit 432 is in the induction state for 2 seconds. Also, as already explained, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 basically wins through the winning part 414 and basically wins the second operating part 413 if the guiding unit 432 is in the guiding state. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, when the game ball continues to flow down the right area PA3, the induction unit 432 enters the guidance state, and although the winning to the second operating part 413 may occur, the game ball can reach the position of the special electric winning device 416 on the downstream side of the second operating part 413. Therefore, in the case of the low frequency support mode, although the frequency of winning to the second operation part 413 is lower than in the high frequency support mode, a small winning result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side can generate a prize to the special electric winning device 416 in the open state.

In the low-frequency support mode, in a configuration in which a prize can be generated in the special electric prize-winning device 416 which is in an open state due to a small winning result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side, by making the display continuation period of the game round in the second special figure display unit 426 different between the case where the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the case where it is the high probability mode, Even if the shooting operation is performed so as to flow down the right area PA3 in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the unit time While the profit per hit is extremely low, the profit per unit time is increased when the shooting operation is performed so as to flow down the right area PA3 in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. The configuration will be described below.

The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used to determine the display duration of the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display units 425 and 426 (that is, the variation display period of the pattern) and the display duration of the pattern in the pattern display device 424 (that is, the variation display period of the pattern) in the main side CPU 63 (these display durations are also referred to as the display duration of the game cycle). The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated, and is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special figure display units 425 and 426 and at the start of variation in the design by the design display device 424. The manner of setting the display duration of game rounds will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 236 . Note that the numbers "0 to 99" in FIG. 236 correspond to the values of the variation type counter CS.

In the low probability mode, the setting mode of the display continuation period of the game round in the first special figure display section 425 is the normal setting mode. In the normal setting mode, as shown in FIG. 236, if the result of the success/failure determination process is a result of a failure and the ready-to-win effect is not generated, when a new game cycle is started in a situation where the upper limit number (specifically, 4) of the first special figure side reservation information is stored in the first special figure reservation area 452, 2 seconds is selected as the display continuation period of the game round, and the first special figure reservation area 452 does not store the upper limit number of the first special figure side reservation information. When a new game cycle is started at , one of 10 seconds, 20 seconds and 30 seconds is selected as the display duration of the game cycle. In addition, when the result of the success/failure determination process is a failure result in the normal setting mode but a ready-to-win performance is generated, when the result of the success/failure determination process is either a big winning result or a small winning result, any one of 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 1 minute, 1 minute 30 seconds and 2 minutes is selected as the display continuation period of the game round. In this case, a longer continuation period is more likely to be selected for the result of the big win or the result of the small win than at the time of the win reach, and the average continuation period to be selected is also longer for the result of the big win or the small win than at the time of the win reach.

On the other hand, in the low probability mode, the setting mode of the display continuation period of the game round in the second special figure display section 426 becomes a long-term setting mode. In the long-term setting mode, only one type of display continuation period of the selected game round is selected, and the display continuation period of the one type of game round is selected regardless of the success/failure determination result and type determination result of the target game round. The display continuation period of this selected game round is 10 minutes. The display continuation period is longer than 2 minutes, which is the display continuation period of the longest game round selected in the normal selection mode. As a result, in the low-probability mode, the execution frequency of the game rounds in the second special figure display section 426 becomes lower than the execution frequency of the game rounds in the first special figure display section 425 .

In the high-probability mode, the setting mode of the display continuation period of game rounds is different from that in the low-probability mode. Specifically, in the high-probability mode, only one type is selected as the display continuation period of the game round in the first special figure display part 425 regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win performance is generated when the result of the success/failure determination is an off result, and only one type is subject to selection even when the result of the success/failure determination is the result of the big win or the result of the small win. In this case, the display continuation period of the game round in the case of a big win result or a small win result is set longer than the display continuation period of the game round in the case of a loss result, specifically, the display continuation period of the game round in the case of a loss result is 10 seconds, whereas the display continuation period of the game round in the case of a big win result or a small win result is 30 seconds.

In the high-probability mode, the display continuation period of the game round in the second special figure display part 426 is selected with a probability of 9/10 and 1 minute and 30 seconds with a probability of 1/10 when the success/failure determination result is a loss result or a small hit result. On the other hand, if the win/loss determination result is a jackpot result, only one type of 1 minute and 30 seconds is selected.

When the game rounds are executed in the second special figure display part 426 in the high probability mode and a small winning result is obtained, the display continuation period of the game rounds becomes 0.5 seconds with a high probability, so that the total period of the game rounds including the final stop period of the game rounds becomes 1 second. On the other hand, as already explained, in the low-frequency support mode, the display continuation period of the normal figure display unit 423a is 4 seconds, and the period in which the induction state of the guidance unit 432 continues is 2 seconds. Further, when the winning of the second operation unit 413 occurs, the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the open state in the opening and closing execution mode with a high probability and the small winning result is 2 seconds. Then, in the situation of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, by performing the shooting operation of the game ball so as to flow down the right side area PA3, the frequency of winning to the special electric prize winning device 416 in the open state with the result of the small hit as a trigger becomes higher than other situations. This prize winning frequency is set to such a prize winning frequency that the number of game balls owned by the player increases when the game balls are shot so as to flow down the right area PA3 under the condition of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

As already explained, the 16R high-probability jackpot result is the trigger that causes the high-probability mode to become the low-frequency support mode. In addition, when a 16R high-probability jackpot result is obtained, a state of a high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode continues until a new jackpot result occurs after an opening/closing execution mode in which round games occur 16 times is performed. Then, as described above, in the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, by performing the game ball shooting operation so as to flow down the right side area PA3, the frequency of winning to the special electric winning device 416 which is in the open state triggered by the result of the small hit is set to the winning frequency in which the number of game balls owned by the player increases when the game ball shooting operation is performed so as to flow down the right side area PA3 in the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode. . Therefore, the number of game balls owned by the player increases as the number of times of the game in the second special figure display part 426 executed before the occurrence of a new big win after the 16R high-probability big win results and the end of the opening/closing execution mode increases. Therefore, in this situation, the player expects that no big winning result will occur.

Even if a jackpot result occurs, if it is a 16R high probability jackpot result, the situation of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode occurs again after the open/close execution mode in which the round game occurs 16 times. Therefore, the player expects that the jackpot result will not occur, but expects the 16R high-probability jackpot result if the jackpot result is obtained.

When a 6R high-probability jackpot result occurs, the opening/closing execution mode in which the round game occurs six times is performed, and then the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are established. The situation continues until a new jackpot outcome occurs. In this situation, as already explained, by performing the shooting operation so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, although winning to the second operation unit 413 occurs at high frequency, winning to the special electric winning device 416 which is in the open state triggered by the result of the small hit basically does not occur. Therefore, in this situation, although the number of game balls owned by the player cannot be increased, it is possible to generate the next big win result while not reducing it too much. Therefore, in this situation, the player expects the big win result to occur early.

When a 6R normal jackpot result occurs, the opening/closing execution mode in which the round game occurs six times is performed, and then the low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are established. Even in this situation, by performing the shooting operation so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, although winning to the second operation part 413 occurs at high frequency, winning to the special electric winning device 416 which is in the open state triggered by the result of the small hit basically does not occur. However, the success/fail lottery mode is a low-probability mode, and when the number of times the game is executed reaches 50, the high-frequency support mode ends and shifts to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, in this situation, the player expects that the next big win will occur within the range where the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls owned by the player.

In the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, even if the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, the display continuation period of the game round in the second special figure display part 426 is extremely long 10 minutes. In this case, even if the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, the game digestion efficiency is deteriorated, so the player performs the shooting operation so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2. A game round in the first special figure display section 425 is executed by performing a shooting operation so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2. In this case, the display continuation period of the game round is normally set as described above.

<First Special Special Electric Control Processing and Second Special Special Electric Control Processing>
Next, the 1st special figure special electric control processing and the 2nd special figure special electric control processing which are performed in main side CPU63 are explained. In this embodiment, unlike the 64th embodiment, the game round can be started in the second special figure display unit 426 even when the game round is being executed in the first special figure display unit 425, and the game round can be started in the first special figure display unit 425 even in the situation where the game round is being executed in the second special figure display unit 426. Therefore, the first special figure special electric control processing is set as the special figure special electric control processing for the first special figure display unit 425, and the second special figure special electric control processing is set as the special figure special electric control processing for the second special figure display unit 426. These first special figure special electric control processing and second special figure special electric control processing are executed instead of the special figure special electric control processing in the 64th embodiment, and are executed in step S8913 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133).

FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the first special figure special electric control process, and FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the second special figure special electric control process. It should be noted that the processing of steps SF101 ~ step SF111 in the first special figure special electric control process and the processing of steps SF201 ~ step SF211 in the second special figure special electric control process are executed using a program for specific control in the main side CPU63 and data for specific control.

In the 1st special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 237), the first special figure side hold information acquisition processing is first executed (step SF101). In the acquisition process, when the winning to the first operation unit 412 occurs, the number of the reserved information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 is less than the upper limit storage number (specifically 4). In the storage process, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the first special figure side reservation information, and the first special figure side reservation information is not stored in the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d of the first special figure reservation area 452. When the reservation information on the first special figure side is acquired, data setting is performed for updating the display contents of the first special figure reservation display part 427 in accordance with the increase in the number of pieces of the reservation information on the first special figure side this time. In addition, when the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for notifying the reserved storage number of the reserved information on the side of the first special figure in the symbol display device 424 is updated corresponding to the new acquisition of the reserved information on the side of the first special figure.

In the second special figure special electric control processing (Fig. 238), first, the second special figure side hold information acquisition processing is executed (step SF201). In the acquisition process, when the winning to the second operation unit 413 has occurred, the second special figure side reservation information storage process is executed on the condition that the number of the second special figure side reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 453 is less than the upper limit storage number (specifically 4 pieces). In the storage process, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the second special figure side reservation information, and the second special figure side reservation information is not stored in the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d of the second special figure reservation area 453. In addition, when the reservation information on the second special figure side is acquired, data setting is performed for updating the display contents of the second special figure reservation display part 428 in accordance with the increase in the number of the reservation information on the second special figure side this time. In addition, when the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Thereby, the image for notifying the number of pending storage of the pending information on the side of the second special figure in the symbol display device 424 is updated corresponding to the new acquisition of the pending information on the side of the second special figure.

Returning to the description of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237) and the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238), after executing the pending information acquisition process (step SF101 or step SF201), read out the special figure special electric address table stored in the main side ROM 64 (step SF101, step SF202). Then, in the case of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the first special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step SF103), and the process indicated by the acquired start address is jumped to (step SF104). In addition, in the case of the second special special electric control process (FIG. 238), the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the second special electric counter is acquired from the special special electric address table (step SF203), and the process indicated by the acquired start address is jumped to (step SF204).

The first special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to grasp which of the processes of steps SF105 to SF111 in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237) should be executed. The second special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to grasp which one of the processes of steps SF205 to SF211 in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238) should be executed. In the special figure special electric address table, the start address in the program for executing each process of steps SF105 to SF111 is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the first special figure special electric counter, and the start address in the program for executing each process of step SF205 to step SF211 is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the second special figure special electric counter.

If the value of the first special figure special electric counter or the second special figure special electric counter is "0", jump to the special figure fluctuation start processing of step SF105 or step SF205, if the value of the first special figure special electric counter or the second special figure special electric counter is "1", jump to the special figure fluctuation process of step SF106 or step SF206, and if the value of the first special figure special electric counter or the second special figure special electric counter is "2", step If the value of the first special special electric counter or the second special electric counter is "3", it jumps to the special electric start processing of step SF108 or SF208, and if the value of the first special electric special electric counter or the second special electric counter is "4", it jumps to the special electric opening processing of step SF109 or step SF209, and jumps to the first special electric electric. When the value of the counter or the second special special electric counter is "5", it jumps to the special electric closing processing of step SF110 or SF210, and when the value of the first special special electric counter or the second special electric electric counter is "6", it jumps to the special electric end processing of step SF111 or step SF211. Each process of steps SF105 to SF111 and steps SF205 to SF211 will be individually described below.

<Special figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure fluctuation start processing of step SF105 and step SF205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the process of step SF301 ~ step SF317 in the special figure fluctuation start process is executed using the data for specific control and the program for specific control in the main side CPU63.

In the special figure fluctuation start processing, it is first determined whether or not the processing for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control processing (FIGS. 237 and 238) of this time (step SF301). As already explained, even if one of the first special figure display portion 425 and the second special figure display portion 426 is in a situation where the game round is being executed, the game round can be executed in the other. In this case, step SF301 is executed, and when processing for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the special symbol special electric control processing (FIGS. 237 and 238) of this time, the processing after step SF302 is not executed and the start of a new game round is regulated. As a result, in a situation where the opening and closing execution mode is executed triggered by a game round in one of the first special figure display portion 425 and the second special figure display portion 426, the game round in the other is regulated so as not to be newly started. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 237), it is determined in step SF301 whether the value of the second special figure special electric counter is 3 or more. Also, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special dish control process (Fig. 238), it is determined in step SF301 whether or not the value of the first special figure special dish counter is 3 or more, and if it is 3 or more, the processing after step SF302 is not executed.

If a negative determination is made in step SF301, it is determined whether or not the corresponding pending number is one or more (step SF302). If this time is the special figure fluctuation start processing in the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 237), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of reservation information on the first special figure side are stored in the first special figure reservation area 452, and if this time is the second special figure special electric control processing (Fig. 238), it is determined whether one or more pieces of reservation information on the second special figure side are stored in the second special figure reservation area 453.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SF302, data setting processing is executed (step SF303). In the data setting process, if this time is the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the data stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure reservation area 452 is moved to the execution area 493 for the first special figure. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area 452 is executed. This data shift process sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas 452a to 452d to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted such that the second area 452b→the first area 452a, the third area 452c→the second area 452b, the fourth area 452d→the third area 452c, and the fourth area 452d is cleared to "0". Also, in the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display contents of the first special figure reservation display section 427 are updated in accordance with the fact that the number of the reservation information on the first special figure side has decreased this time. Also, in the data setting process, a hold decrease command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . As a result, the image for notifying the reserved storage number of the reserved information on the side of the first special figure in the symbol display device 424 is updated corresponding to the decrease of the reserved information on the side of the first special figure.

In the data setting process, if this time is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238), the data stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure reservation area 453 is moved to the execution area 494 for the second special figure. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area 453 is executed. This data shift process sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted such that the second area 453b→the first area 453a, the third area 453c→the second area 453b, the fourth area 453d→the third area 453c, and the fourth area 453d is cleared to "0". Further, in the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display contents of the second special figure reservation display section 428 are updated in accordance with the fact that the number of the reservation information on the second special figure side has decreased this time. Also, in the data setting process, a hold decrease command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Thereby, the image for notifying the number of pending storage of the pending information on the side of the second special figure in the symbol display device 424 is updated corresponding to the decrease of the pending information on the side of the second special figure.

After executing the data setting process, the propriety determination process is executed (step SF304). In the success/failure determination process, when the current game cycle is triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side, the first success/failure tables 495 and 496 (see FIGS. 234(a) and 234(b)) corresponding to the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 and the success/failure lottery mode are read from the main ROM 64. Numerical information about the winning random number counter C1 is read out of the holding information on the first special figure side that triggered the start of the current game cycle, and the read numerical information is collated with the first winning/failing tables 495 and 496 to specify whether the result of the winning/failure determination processing of this time is a big win result, a small winning result or a losing result. On the other hand, in the success/failure determination process, when the current game round is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, the second success/failure tables 497 and 498 (see FIGS. 234(c) and 234(d)) corresponding to the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 and the success/failure lottery mode are read from the main ROM 64. Numerical information about the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the holding information on the second special figure side which triggered the start of the current game cycle, and the read numerical information is collated with the second hit/fail tables 497, 498 to specify whether the result of the hit/fail judgment process of this time is a big hit result, a small hit result or a missing result.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step SF305: YES), the type determination process is executed (step SF306). In the type determination process, the type table 499 shown in FIG. Further, when the holding information on the first special figure side is the trigger for the current game round, numerical information about the type counter C2 is read out of the holding information on the first special figure side, and when the holding information on the second special figure side is the trigger for the current game round, the numerical information on the type counter C2 is read out of the holding information on the second special figure side. Then, it is specified whether the numerical value information of the read type counter C2 corresponds to the numerical range of which kind of jackpot results among the 6R normal jackpot results, the 6R high-probability jackpot results and the 16R high-probability jackpot results set in the type table 499.例文帳に追加

After executing the type determination process, "1" is set to the flag of the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in the type determination process (step SF307). The state of the flag set to "1" is cleared to "0" when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

After that, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step SF308). Specifically, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side of the first special figure display part 425 and the second special figure display part 426 which is the execution object of the game round is specified from the stop result table for the result of the big win preliminarily stored in the main side ROM 64, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65. - 特許庁In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the types of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed in the first special figure display part 425 or the second special figure display part 426 are set differently for each type of the jackpot result, and in step SF308, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in step SF306 is stored in the main side RAM65. The pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. Any method can be used to select a stop result for a jackpot result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set. For example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a small hit result (step SF309: YES), the flag of the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the small hit result is set to "1" (step SF310). The state of the flag set to "1" is cleared to "0" when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

After that, stop result setting processing for the small winning result is executed (step SF311). Specifically, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display part 425 or the second special figure display part 426 in this game round is read from the main side ROM 64, and the read information is stored in the main side RAM 65. The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step SF305 and step SF309: NO), the stop result setting process for the out result is executed (step SF312). Specifically, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side of the first special figure display part 425 and the second special figure display part 426 which is the execution object of the game round is specified from the stop result table for the result of deviation preliminarily stored in the main side ROM 64, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65. - 特許庁In this case, the information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the big win result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the small win result.

After executing one of the stop result setting processes, the display continuation period grasping process is executed (step SF313). In this processing, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and information of the display duration corresponding to the current situation and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is selected in the manner shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 236 .

After that, it selects from the main side ROM 64 the variation command and the type command corresponding to the result of the win/fail determination process and the type determination process, the type of the current win/fail lottery mode, the type of the current support mode, and the processing result of step SF313. Then, the selected variation command and type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SF314). The sound emission control device 81 executes control for executing a game round effect corresponding to the received variation command and type command.

Then, of the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426, the variation display of the pattern on the side that is the execution target of the current game round is started (step SF315). As a table to be referred to by the main side CPU 63 when the first special figure display part 425 or the second special figure display part 426 performs the variation display of the pattern, the special figure variation display table common to the first special figure display part 425 and the second special figure display part 426 is stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426, the same variation display table is used regardless of the result of the success/failure determination process and the result of the type determination process. When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display part 425 or the second special figure display part 426, the variation display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variation display table for the special figure is set with the control data for one round of the variation display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the variable display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426, the variation display table for the special figure is repeatedly used until the display continuation period of the game round determined in step SF313 elapses.

After that, the special display portion 429 is extinguished (step SF316). In the special display portion 429, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, information corresponding to the number of round games occurring in the opening/closing execution mode is displayed. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the 6R normal jackpot result or the 6R high-probability jackpot result, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the special display part 429 displays a display corresponding to six round games. In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the 16R high-probability jackpot result, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, a display corresponding to 16 round games is performed on the special display portion 429 . Further, when the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the result of the small winning, the display corresponding to the small winning result is performed on the special display portion 429 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. In the above configuration, the extinguishing process of the special display part 429 is executed in step SF316 of the special figure fluctuation start process, so that the display on the special display part 429 started when the opening/closing execution mode is started is ended when a new game round is started after the opening/closing execution mode is finished. Then, the special display portion 429 is maintained in the off state until the opening/closing execution mode is newly generated.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and if the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (Figure 238), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step SF317). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is "0", the value of the special figure special electric counter which is the object of addition by adding 1 becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation processing (step SF106, step SF206).

<Process during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure fluctuating process executed in step SF106 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237) and step SF206 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238) will be described.

When the display continuation period of the current game round has not passed and when it is time to update the display contents of the special figure display parts 425 and 426 which are the execution targets of the current game round, data setting for updating the display contents of the special figure display parts 425 and 426 is performed by referring to the variation display table for the special figure. As a result, the display contents of the pattern in the special figure display portions 425 and 426, which are the execution targets of the current game turn, are updated to the display contents of the next order. In addition, the main side RAM 65 is provided with a first display order counter referred to for deriving the display contents of the pattern from the variation display table for the special figure when the timing of updating the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 comes. In addition, the main side RAM 65 is provided with a second display order counter referred to for deriving the display contents of the pattern from the variation display table for the special figure when the update timing of the pattern in the second special figure display part 426 comes.

The mode at the time of starting the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display units 425 and 426 and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a constant mode regardless of the result of the success determination process and the result of the type determination process, and are performed in a constant mode regardless of the contents of the game round performance in the pattern display device 424. For example, the display contents of the pattern make one cycle by generating update timings a plurality of times, and a display pattern whose display order is in a fixed order is repeated, and when the display continuation period of the game cycle has passed, the stop result determined at the start of the game cycle is displayed regardless of the order in which the display pattern is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 425 and 426.

On the other hand, when the display continuation period of the game round has passed, the information of the pattern stop mode of the special figure display parts 425, 426 stored in the main side RAM 65 at the start of the game round is read out, and the display of the special figure display parts 425, 426 to be executed in the current game round is controlled so that the pattern is stopped. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in a state in which the pattern corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination process and the result of the type determination process of the current game round is displayed in the special figure display parts 425 and 426 which are the execution targets of the current game round. The mode of the design stopped and displayed in the special figure display units 425 and 426 is maintained until the next variation display of the design in the special figure display units 425 and 426 is started regardless of whether it is the opening/closing execution mode. Also, the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 is set with the information of the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec). Thereby, the measurement of the final stop period is started.

After that, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . When receiving the final stop command from the main CPU 63 , the sound emission control device 81 transmits the final stop command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the final stop command from the sound emission control device 81, it reads out the display pattern table for stopping and displaying the combination of the stop symbols in the current game round over the final stop period. As a result, the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the current game round is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 424 over the final stop period.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 237), add 1 to the value of the first special figure special electric counter, and if the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (Figure 238), add 1 to the value of the second special figure special electric counter. Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation processing is executed is "1", the value of the special figure special electric counter which is the addition target by adding 1 becomes "2" corresponding to the special figure determination in process (step SF107, step SF207).

<Processing during special figure confirmation>
Next, the processing during special figure determination executed in step SF107 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237) and step SF207 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the processing of step SF401 to step SF409 in the special figure determination process is executed using the data for specific control and the program for specific control in main side CPU63.

When the final stop period has passed and the current game round corresponds to the result of the big win (step SF401 and step SF402: YES), a setting process for big win is executed (step SF403). In the big win setting processing, data setting is performed for controlling the display of the special display part 429 so that the display corresponding to the six round games is started when the current big win result is the 6R normal big win result or the 6R high probability big win result. In the big win setting process, data setting is performed for controlling the display of the special display part 429 so that the display corresponding to the 16th round game is started when the big win result of this time is the 16R high probability big win result.

When the final stop period has passed and the current game round corresponds to the small winning result (step SF401 and step SF404: YES), the small winning setting process is executed (step SF405). In the small winning setting process, data setting is performed to control the display of the special display section 429 so that the display corresponding to the small winning result is started.

When the process of step SF403 or step SF405 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control processing (FIGS. 237 and 238) of this time is cleared to "0" (step SF406). As a result, even if the execution control of the game round is performed in the special figure special electric control processing (FIGS. 237, 238) on the side not corresponding to the special figure special electric control processing (FIGS. 237, 238) of this time, the game round is forcibly terminated. That is, in a situation where the game rounds are executed in both the first special figure display part 425 and the second special figure display part 426, when one of the game rounds resulting in the big win result or the small win result ends, the other game round ends in the middle. After that, end processing of the other game round is executed (step SF407). In the end processing, the special figure display units 425 and 426 on the side of the forced end of the game round are made to display corresponding to the result of the deviation.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and if the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (Figure 238), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step SF408). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure confirmation processing is executed is "2", the value of the special figure special electric counter which is the target of addition by adding 1 becomes "3" corresponding to the special figure start processing (step SF108, step SF208).

When the current game round is a result of losing (step SF404: NO), if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0", and if the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (Fig. 238), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step SF409). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to special figure variation start processing (step SF105, step SF205).

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing executed in step SF108 of the first special electric power control processing (FIG. 237) and step SF208 of the second special electric power control processing (FIG. 238) will be described.

In the special electric start process, if it is before the start of the opening period, measurement of the opening period (for example, 4 seconds) is started and an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . When the sound emission control device 81 receives the opening command, it controls the light emission of the display light emission unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 so that the opening effect is executed. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits an opening command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the opening command, the display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 424 so that the opening effect is executed.

In the special electric start processing, when the opening period has passed, if this time is triggered by one of the jackpot results, information corresponding to the number of execution times of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode of this time is set in a round counter provided in the main side RAM 65.例文帳に追加The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the open/close execution mode by the main side CPU 63, and the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1 each time a round game is executed. In addition, the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 is set with the information (specifically, 29 seconds) of the opening continuation period of the round game, and the winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set with the information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the special electric prize winning device 416 in one round game. On the other hand, if this time is triggered by a small winning result, the round counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". In addition, the timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set with the information (specifically, 2 seconds) of the opening continuation period of the small winning result, and the winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set with the information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the special electric winning device 416 in the small winning result.

After that, the special electric release setting process is executed. In the open setting process, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c is started so that the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 237), add 1 to the value of the first special figure special electric counter, and if the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (Figure 238), add 1 to the value of the second special figure special electric counter. Since the value of the special special electric counter when the special electric start processing is executed is "3", the value of the special electric electric counter to be added by adding 1 becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step SF109, step SF209).

<Processing during opening of the special train>
Next, the special electric open process executed in step SF109 of the first special electric power control process (FIG. 237) and step SF209 of the second special electric power control process (FIG. 238) will be described.

In the special electric open processing, when the open continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 416 has passed or when the special electric prize winning device 416 has won the upper limit winning number of game balls, the closing setting processing is executed. In the closing setting process, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c is stopped so that the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the closed state. After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter of the main side RAM 65 .

If the value of the round counter after decrementing by 1 is not "0", information corresponding to the closing duration (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 . After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and if the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (Figure 238), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 1. Since the value of the special special electric counter when the special electric open processing is executed is "4", the value of the special electric special electric counter to be added by adding 1 becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric closed processing (step SF110, step SF210).

If the value of the round counter after decrementing by 1 is "0", information corresponding to the ending period (specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65 . Also, an ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . When the sound emission control device 81 receives the ending command, it controls the light emission of the display light emission unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 so that the ending effect is executed. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits an ending command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the ending command, the display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 424 so that the ending effect is executed. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 237), add 2 to the value of the first special figure special electric counter, and if the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (Figure 238), add 2 to the value of the second special figure special electric counter. Since the value of the special special electric counter when the special electric open processing is executed is "4", the value of the special electric electric counter to be added by adding 2 becomes "6" corresponding to the special electric end processing (step SF111, step SF211).

<Treatment during special train closure>
Next, the special electric closing process executed at step SF110 of the first special electric power control process (FIG. 237) and step SF210 of the second special electric power control process (FIG. 238) will be described.

When the closed continuation period has passed, the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 is set with the information of the open continuation period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds), and the information (specifically "10") corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the special electric prize winning device 416 in one round game is set in the winning counter of the main side RAM 65.例文帳に追加Then, the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened by executing the special electric open setting process. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1, and if the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (Figure 238), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1. Since the value of the special special electric counter when the special electric closed processing is executed is "5", the value of the special electric special electric counter to be subtracted by subtracting 1 becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step SF109, step SF209).

<Special call end processing>
Next, the special electric end processing executed in step SF111 of the first special electric power control processing (FIG. 237) and step SF211 of the second special electric power control processing (FIG. 238) will be described.

If the ending period has passed, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In the transition processing, when the trigger of the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 6R normal jackpot result, the success/fail lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Information for ending the high-frequency support mode when the total number of games played reaches 50 is also set. When the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the 6R high-probability jackpot result, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode and the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode. When the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the 16R high-probability jackpot result, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode and the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the trigger of the opening/closing execution mode this time is the small winning result, the processing for changing the winning/failure lottery mode and the support mode from before the start of the opening/closing execution mode is not executed.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (Fig. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0", and if the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (Fig. 238), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to special figure variation start processing (step SF105, step SF205).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Variation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit result in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the first special figure side is absorbed by the variation of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 determined to be a losing result in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the first special figure side. Thus, the probability of a big winning result in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the first special figure side can be changed while not affecting the probability of the small winning result in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the first special figure side.

The number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 determined to be a small hit result in the success/failure determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side is the same regardless of the set value. Thereby, it becomes possible to make constant the probability that the small hit result is selected in the propriety determination process for the reservation information on the first special figure side in all the set values. In addition, even with such a configuration in which the probability of selecting a small winning result in the right or wrong determination process for the reserved information on the first special figure side is constant, the probability that the big winning result is selected in the right or wrong determination process for the reserved information on the first special figure side.

The number of numerical information of the random number counter C1, which is determined to be a result of deviation in the right or wrong determination process for the reserved information on the first special figure side, is the largest regardless of each set value. As a result, the variation in each set value of the probability that the big hit result will be selected in the right or wrong determination process for the reserved information on the first special figure side is removed in the right or wrong determination process for the reserved information on the first special figure side.

Variation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit result in the success/failure determination processing for the reserved information on the second special figure side is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 determined to be an out result in the success/failure determination processing for the reserved information on the second special figure side. Thus, it is possible to change the probability of a big winning result in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the second special figure side while not affecting the probability of a small winning result in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the second special figure side.

The number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 determined to be a small hit result in the success/failure determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side is the same regardless of the set value. Thereby, it becomes possible to make constant the probability that the small hit result is selected in the propriety determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side in all the set values. In addition, even if the probability that the small winning result is selected in the right or wrong determination process for the reserved information on the second special figure side is constant in this way, the probability that the big hit result is selected in the right or wrong determination process for the reserved information on the second special figure side.

In a situation where the set value is ``set 6'' and the win/loss lottery mode is a high probability mode, which is a situation in which the probability of a big winning result is highest in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the side of the second special figure, the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 determined to be a losing result in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the side of the second special figure becomes 0. As a result, the variation in the set value of the probability of a big hit result in the right or wrong determination process for the reserved information on the second special figure side is absorbed by the variation in the probability that the result will be lost in the right or wrong determination process for the reserved information on the second special figure side.

The probability of a small hit result in the success/failure determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side is the same regardless of the set value and the success/failure lottery mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing both the set value and the winning/failing lottery mode from the probability of a small winning result.

The probability of a small winning result is the same not only in the success/failure determination processing for the reservation information on the first special figure side but also in the success/failure determination processing for the reservation information on the second special figure side, regardless of the set value and the success/failure lottery mode. This makes it possible to prevent the player from guessing both the set value and the success/failure lottery mode from the probability of the result of the small win in either the success/failure determination processing for the reservation information on the first special figure side or the success/failure determination processing for the reservation information on the second special figure side.

The probability that the small hit result is selected in the success/failure determination process for the reservation information on the first special figure side and the probability that the small hit result is selected in the success/failure determination process for the reservation information on the second special figure side are different. Thus, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of a small winning result is different in the configuration in which the probability of a small winning result is the same not only in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the first special figure side but also in the winning judgment processing for the reserved information on the second special figure side regardless of the set value and the winning lottery mode.

In addition, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, each set value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit result when the winning determination process is executed for the reserved information on the first special figure side The variation in the set value may be absorbed by the variation of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small winning result when the winning determination process is performed on the reserved information on the first special figure side.

Further, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, each setting value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit result when the winning determination process is executed for the reserved information on the second special figure side.

In addition, although the configuration is such that a small winning result can be selected when the winning judgment processing is executed for the reserved information on the side of the first special figure, instead of this, the configuration may be such that the small winning result is not selected when the winning judgment processing is executed for the reserved information on the side of the first special figure.

<Seventyth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content of the success/failure table referred to in the success/failure determination process differs from that of the sixty-ninth embodiment. The configuration different from the sixty-ninth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the sixty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 241 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right or wrong table 495 at the time of low probability referred to when performing the right or wrong determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side in the low probability mode, Figure 241 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right or wrong table 496 at the time of high probability referred to when performing the right or wrong determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side in the high probability mode, Figure 241 (c) is the second special figure side in the low probability mode It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second right or wrong table 501 at the time of low probability that is referred to when performing the right or wrong determination process for the reservation information, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 241(a) and 241(b), the contents of the first right/wrong table 495 for low probability and the first right/wrong table 496 for high probability are the same as in the sixty-ninth embodiment. On the other hand, the contents of the second right/wrong table 501 for low probability shown in FIG. 241(c) and the second right/wrong table 502 for high probability shown in FIG. 241(d) are different from those of the sixty-ninth embodiment. The second right/wrong table 501 for low probability and the second right/wrong table 502 for high probability will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the second success/failure table 501 at the time of low probability sets a big win result, a small win result and a miss result as the determination results of the win/fail determination process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states of 'setting 1' to 'setting 6', and the setting is made so that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a big winning result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a losing result. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same in any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest set value, 50 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a big win, 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a small winning result, and 650 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a losing result. In addition, 52 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a small winning, and 648 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a losing result in the ``setting 2'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 1''. Further, in "setting 3" which is a set value one step higher than "setting 2", 54 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a big winning result, 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the small winning result, and 646 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the losing result. In addition, 56 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the big win, 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 644 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the ``setting 4'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 3''. In addition, 58 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is the result of a big win, 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is the result of a small winning, and 642 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is the result of a losing result in the 'setting 5' which is a set value one step higher than the 'setting 4'. In addition, 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the big win, 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 640 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of losing the "setting 6" which is the highest set value.

As shown in FIG. 241(d), the second success/failure table 502 at the time of high probability sets a big win result, a small win result and a miss result as the determination results of the win/fail determination process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states of 'setting 1' to 'setting 6', and the setting is made so that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a big winning result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a losing result. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same in any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest setting value, 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a big win, 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning result, and 200 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a losing result. In addition, 520 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, which is the result of the big win, 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, which is the result of the small winning, and 180 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, which is the result of the losing result, in the ``setting 2'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 1''. In addition, 540 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a small winning, and 160 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a losing result in the "setting 3" which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 2". In addition, 560 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the big win, 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 140 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the "setting 4" which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 3". In addition, 580 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a big win, 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 120 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the ``setting 5'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 4''. In addition, 600 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a small winning, and 100 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a losing result in the "setting 6" which is the highest set value.

In "setting 1", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is 1/200 in the low probability mode and 1/20, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 2", the probability of a big win result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is about 1/192 in the low probability mode and about 1/19.2, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 3", the probability of a big win result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/185 in the low probability mode and about 1/18.5, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 4", the probability of a big win result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/179 in the low probability mode and about 1/17.9 which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In ``setting 5'', the probability of a big win result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is about 1/172 in the low probability mode and about 1/17.2, which is ten times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 6", the probability of a big win result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/167 in the low probability mode and about 1/16.7 which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In other words, in any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is 10 times that in the low probability mode in the high probability mode. In addition, the probability of a big win result is the same in the case of using the holding information on the side of the first special figure as a trigger and the case of using the holding information on the side of the second special figure as a trigger when comparison is made with combinations in which the combination of the set state and the winning/failure lottery mode is the same.

On the other hand, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/1.08, which is the same for any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In addition, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is 1/1.08, which is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. That is, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the pending information on the second special figure side is constant regardless of the setting state and the success or failure lottery mode. The probability of a small hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is higher than the probability of a small hit result triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side. In addition, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is a higher probability than the probability of a big hit result regardless of the setting state and the success or failure lottery mode. Moreover, when the holding information on the second special figure side is used as a trigger, the probability of becoming a small hit result is higher than the probability of becoming an off result regardless of the setting state and the success or failure lottery mode. In other words, the probability of a small winning result when the holding information on the second special figure side is used as a trigger is higher than the combined probability of the big winning result and the losing result regardless of the setting state and the winning/failure lottery mode.

The numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of the big winning may be aggregated and set so as to have serial numbers, or at least a part or all of them may be dispersed and set so as not to have serial numbers. Further, the numerical value information of the win random number counter C1 as a result of a small win may be aggregated and set so as to have serial numbers, or at least a part or all of them may be dispersed and set so as not to have serial numbers.

According to the above configuration, in the second right/wrong table 497, 498, the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small win result is smaller than the number of the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result, and the variation of the probability of the big winning result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the winning result. In this case, in the case of ``setting 6'' which is the situation in which the combination probability of the big win result and the small win result is the highest and in the case of the high probability mode, even in the situation where the winning/losing judgment processing is performed for the reservation information on the side of the second special figure, the probability of becoming a losing result is 1/100. As a result, it is possible to make it possible to select the result of deviation even in the situation where the judgment is made on the holding information on the second special figure side when it is "setting 6" and in the high probability mode.

<71st Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content of the success/failure table referred to in the success/failure determination process differs from that of the sixty-ninth embodiment. The configuration different from the sixty-ninth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the sixty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 242 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right or wrong table 495 at the time of low probability referred to when performing the right or wrong determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side in the low probability mode, Figure 242 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first right or wrong table 496 at the time of high probability to be referred to when performing the right or wrong determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side in the high probability mode, Figure 242 (c) is the second special figure side in the low probability mode It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second right or wrong table 503 at the time of low probability referred to when performing the right or wrong determination process for the reservation information, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 242(a) and 242(b), the contents of the first right/wrong table 495 at low probability and the first right/wrong table 496 at high probability are the same as those in the sixty-ninth embodiment. On the other hand, the contents of the second right/wrong table 503 for low probability shown in FIG. 242(c) and the second right/wrong table 504 for high probability shown in FIG. 242(d) are different from those of the sixty-ninth embodiment. The second right/wrong table 503 for low probability and the second right/wrong table 504 for high probability will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 242(c), the second success/failure table 503 at the time of low probability sets a big win result, a small win result and a miss result as the determination results of the win/fail determination process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states of 'setting 1' to 'setting 6', and is set so that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a big winning result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a small winning result. On the other hand, the probability of the result of being out of range is set to be the same for any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”.

Specifically, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest set value, 50 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a big win, 9450 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a small winning result, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a losing result. In addition, 52 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 9448 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a small winning, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a losing result in the "setting 2" which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 1". In addition, 54 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the big win, 9446 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the ``setting 3'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 2''. In addition, 56 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 9444 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a small winning, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a losing result in the ``setting 4'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 3''. In addition, 58 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is the result of a big win, 9442 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is the result of a small winning, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is the result of a losing result in the ``setting 5'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 4''. In addition, 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the big win, 9440 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the "setting 6" which is the highest set value.

As shown in FIG. 242(d), the second success/failure table 504 at the time of high probability sets a big win result, a small win result and a miss result as the determination results of the win/fail determination process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states of 'setting 1' to 'setting 6', and is set so that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a big winning result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a small winning result. On the other hand, the probability of the result of being out of range is set to be the same for any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”.

Specifically, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest set value, 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a big win, 9000 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a small winning result, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a losing result. In addition, 520 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of a big win, 8980 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a small winning, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a losing result in the "setting 2" which is a set value one step higher than the "setting 1". In addition, 540 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of a big win, 8960 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the ``setting 3'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 2''. Further, in "setting 4" which is a set value one step higher than "setting 3", 560 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a big winning result, 8940 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the small winning result, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the losing result. In addition, 580 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as a big winning result, 8920 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the small winning result, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the losing result in the ``setting 5'' which is a set value one step higher than the ``setting 4''. In addition, 600 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the big win, 8900 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the small winning, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 as the result of the losing result in the "setting 6" which is the highest set value.

In "setting 1", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is 1/200 in the low probability mode and 1/20, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 2", the probability of a big win result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is about 1/192 in the low probability mode and about 1/19.2, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 3", the probability of a big win result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/185 in the low probability mode and about 1/18.5, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 4", the probability of a big win result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/179 in the low probability mode and about 1/17.9 which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In ``setting 5'', the probability of a big win result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is about 1/172 in the low probability mode and about 1/17.2, which is ten times that in the high probability mode. In the "setting 6", the probability of a big win result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/167 in the low probability mode and about 1/16.7 which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In other words, in any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", the probability of a big hit result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is 10 times that in the low probability mode in the high probability mode. In addition, the probability of a big win result is the same in the case of using the holding information on the side of the first special figure as a trigger and the case of using the holding information on the side of the second special figure as a trigger when comparison is made with combinations in which the combination of the set state and the winning/failure lottery mode is the same.

In addition, in the "setting 1", the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side is about 1/1.0582 in the low probability mode and about 1/1.111 in the high probability mode. In "setting 2", the probability of a small winning result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/1.0584 in the low probability mode and about 1/1.113 in the high probability mode. In "setting 3", the probability of a small winning result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/1.0586 in the low probability mode and about 1/1.116 in the high probability mode. In "setting 4", the probability of a small winning result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/1.0589 in the low probability mode and about 1/1.119 in the high probability mode. In "setting 5", the probability of a small winning result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/1.0591 in the low probability mode and about 1/1.121 in the high probability mode. In "setting 6", the probability of a small winning result triggered by the holding information on the second special figure side is about 1/1.0593 in the low probability mode and about 1/1.124 in the high probability mode.

The numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1 as a result of the big winning may be aggregated and set so as to have serial numbers, or at least a part or all of them may be dispersed and set so as not to have serial numbers. Further, the numerical value information of the win random number counter C1 as a result of a small win may be aggregated and set so as to have serial numbers, or at least a part or all of them may be dispersed and set so as not to have serial numbers.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the number of values of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result is larger than the number of values of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result in the first right/wrong table 495, 496, the variation of the probability of the big winning result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the winning result. Moreover, the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier result is the largest regardless of the setting value. As a result, it is possible to reduce the probability variation of the result of winning by the set value in order to absorb the probability variation of the big win result by the set value. Therefore, when the reservation information on the first special figure side is used as a trigger, it is possible for the player to limit the object to which the player pays attention in order to guess the set value to the result of the big winning, and it is possible to make it difficult to guess the set value.

Further, in a configuration in which the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result is larger than the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the winning result in the second right/wrong tables 503, 504, the variation of the probability of the big winning result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation of the number of the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result. Moreover, the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result is the largest regardless of the setting value. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of probability fluctuation of the small winning result due to the set value for absorbing the probability fluctuation amount of the big winning result due to the set value. Therefore, when the holding information on the first special figure side is used as a trigger, it is possible for the player to limit the target to which the player pays attention in order to guess the set value to the result of the big winning, and it is possible to make it difficult to guess the set value.

<72nd Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the forty-ninth embodiment in that it is provided with a configuration that makes it possible to recognize that the setting confirmation process, the set value update process, and the first RAM clear process have been executed. The configuration different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 243 is a front view of main controller 60 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 243, on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 245) described later is executed and the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed. (b)) is executed and the main side RAM 65 is cleared, there is provided a clear notification light emitting device 513 which is turned on. These notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 are all LEDs capable of emitting light, but are not limited to this, and may be liquid crystal display devices or organic EL displays.

The confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512, and the clear notification light-emitting device 513 are installed so that the light-emitting portions face the direction of the element mounting surface of the main control board 61, and are covered by the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. As already explained in the first embodiment, the substrate box 60a is made transparent. Therefore, it is possible to see the light-emitting portions of the notification light-emitting devices 511 to 513 accommodated in the board box 60a from the outside of the board box 60a. Further, as already explained in the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a such that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the game machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the light emitting parts of the notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 can be visually confirmed through the opposing wall part 60b.

As already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key insertion portion 68a is ON-operated by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process is executed in step SB112 of the main process (FIG. 165), and the setting value can be confirmed. Further, as already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step SB112 of the main process (FIG. 165)) is being executed, and then the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned ON. Step SB112) is executed, and the setting value can be checked. As in the forty-ninth embodiment, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 245) described later is started, and is cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 245) described later ends. If the set value confirmation act of confirming the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is carried out by illegally executing the setting confirmation processing, it becomes possible to select the pachinko machine 10 with the higher set value from the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall. In this embodiment, by checking the state of the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511 provided on the main control board 61, it is possible to grasp that the setting value has been improperly confirmed.

As already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key inserting portion 68a is ON-operated by the setting key, and the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting value update process is executed in step SB115 of the main process (FIG. 165), and the setting value can be changed. As already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and then the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the set value update process (step SB115 of the main process (FIG. 165)) is being executed, the set value update process (main CPU 63) is performed regardless of whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on based on the fact that the setting update display flag is set to "1". Step SB115) of the process (FIG. 165) is executed, and the setting value can be changed. As in the forty-ninth embodiment, the setting update display flag is set to "1" when setting value update processing (FIG. 246(a)) described later is started, and is cleared to "0" when setting value update processing (FIG. 246(a)) is terminated. If the set value update process is illegally executed to change the set value of the pachinko machine 10, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed to a set value (for example, "setting 6") advantageous to the player. In contrast, in this embodiment, by checking the state of the change notification light-emitting device 512 provided on the main control board 61, it is possible to grasp that the set value has been illegally changed.

As already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by adding the pressing operation of the reset button 68c without turning ON the setting key insertion portion 68a, the first RAM clearing process is executed in step SB117 of the main process (FIG. 165). As already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, in the first RAM clearing process, the areas other than the setting reference area 341 in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 are cleared to "0" and the initial values are set. In the pachinko machine 10, after the first RAM clearing process (step SB117 of the main process (FIG. 165)) is executed, a fraudulent board (so-called hanging board) that outputs a fraudulent winning detection signal is attached to the main control board 61, and there is a possibility that the fraudulent board is used to fraudulently generate a jackpot winning result.

As already described in the first embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10, when a prize is won in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34, information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 (FIG. 7) is stored in the reserved storage area 65a (FIG. 7). Then, when the stored value of the winning random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the winning of the big win set in the success/failure table, the result of winning the big win is obtained. As already described in the first embodiment, the winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that adds "1" to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value ("599"). After the initial value is set in the winning random number counter C1, when the value of the winning random number counter C1 is updated until it becomes the value one before the initial value, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at the next updating timing of the winning random number counter C1 is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The values of the hit random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI are cleared to "0" by executing the first RAM clearing process (step SB117 of the main process (FIG. 165)).

When the first RAM clearing process is performed, "0" is set as an initial value in the winning random number counter C1, and thereafter, the previous value of the winning random number counter C1 is updated by adding "1" without reading the value of the random number initial value counter CINI as the initial value until the value of the winning random number counter C1 first reaches the maximum value ("599"). Therefore, the number of times the winning random number counter C1 is updated until the value of the winning random number counter C1 first becomes a value corresponding to the winning of the jackpot after the first RAM clearing process is executed is constant. After the execution of the first RAM clearing process, when the value of the winning random number counter C1 first becomes a value corresponding to the winning of the big win, when an illegal board for outputting an illegal prize winning detection signal is mounted, the result of the winning of the big win can be illegally generated by illegally executing the first RAM clearing process. In contrast, in this embodiment, by checking the state of the clear notification light emitting device 513 provided on the main control board 61, it is possible to grasp that the main side RAM 65 has been illegally cleared.

Next, an electrical configuration for emitting light from the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512, and the clear notification light-emitting device 513 under the control of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 244 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for emitting light from the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512, and the clear notification light-emitting device 513 under the control of the MPU 62. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 244, the main control board 61 is provided with a light emission control IC 514 for controlling light emission of the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513. FIG. The light emission control IC 514 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 via a signal path SL41. Further, the light emission control IC 514 is electrically connected to the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 through the signal path SL42, electrically connected to the change notification light emitting device 512 through the signal path SL43, and electrically connected to the clear notification light emitting device 513 through the signal path SL44.

The light emission control IC 514 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the lighting instruction data received from the MPU 62, and the light emission control IC 514 controls light emission of the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 according to the lighting instruction data stored in the storage buffer. The lighting state of these notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 is continued until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

When the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped while the lighting instruction data is stored in the storage buffer of the light emission control IC 514 and then the supply of the operating power is resumed, the lighting instruction data in the storage buffer are all cleared. Therefore, after the supply of operating power is resumed, the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512, and the clear notification light-emitting device 513 are turned off until new lighting instruction data is received from the main CPU 63.

Next, the setting confirmation processing executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting confirmation process is executed at step SB112 in the main process (FIG. 165). Further, the processing of steps SF501 to SF508 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, in steps SF501 to SF505, the same processes as steps SB201 to SB205 of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed. Specifically, first, an interrupt permission is set (step SF501). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period.

After that, on condition that the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1", the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SF502). By setting the setting confirmation display flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), and setting processing (step S9006) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed. As a result, as already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, a confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SF503). Upon receiving the confirmation start command, the sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 so that the pattern display device 41 displays an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 245) is being executed and an image for recognizing the operation content for ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 245).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SF504), and if it is not specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SF504: NO), the processing of step SF504 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SF504: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SF505). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), and the setting processing (step S9006) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, the display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are cancelled.

After clearing the setting confirmation display flag to "0" in step SF505, the first lighting instruction data is output to the light emission control IC 514 (step SF506). The light emission control IC 514 stores and holds the received first lighting instruction data in the storage buffer, and turns on the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 based on the first lighting instruction data. As described above, the lighting state of the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511 is continued until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 ends.

After that, in steps SF507 and SF508, the same processes as steps SB206 and SB207 in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) of the forty-ninth embodiment are executed, and this setting confirmation process ends.

As described above, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 245) is executed and the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed, the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 is turned on. Setting confirmation processing (Fig. 245) is executed not only when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is illegally confirmed, but also when the manager of the game hall confirms the setting value, and the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 is turned on. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can confirm that the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511 can emit light every time the set value is confirmed, that is, that the LED is not disabled due to life or the like.

Next, the setting value updating process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 246(a). Note that the set value update process is executed at step SB115 in the main process (FIG. 165). Further, the processes of steps SF601 to SF610 in the set value update process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, in steps SF601 to SF605, the same processing as steps SB301 to SB305 in the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) of the forty-ninth embodiment is executed. Specifically, first, an interrupt permission is set (step SF601). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period.

After that, on condition that the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SF602). When the setting update display flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), thereby executing the setting process (step S9004) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update. As a result, the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the setting value selected as an update target of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, initial setting at the start is performed (step SF603). In the initial setting, the game stop flag already explained in the forty-ninth embodiment is cleared to "0". By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8906. Thus, when an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 65, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud monitoring is executed, but the processing for progressing the game is not executed. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SF603, the state in which the occurrence of information abnormality in the main RAM 65 is specified can be canceled when the set value update process (FIG. 246(a)) is executed.

Thereafter, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SF604). The setting update area 342 is a storage area for storing information on setting values being updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)), as in the forty-fifth embodiment. As already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, the setting values (“setting value 1” to “setting value 6”) to be updated (selected or changed) are set values corresponding to the numerical information (“1” to “6”) stored in the setting update area 342. By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 in step SF604, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1". That is, in this embodiment, regardless of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10, when the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)) is started, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1".

After that, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SF605). By receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 so that the pattern display device 41 displays an image showing that the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)) is being executed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value, and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for ending the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)). As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and to recognize the operation content necessary to change the setting value and the operation content necessary to end the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)).

After that, setting processing of the setting update area is executed (step SF606). In the process of setting the setting update area, the same process as steps SB306 to SB311 in the setting value update process (FIG. 167) of the forty-ninth embodiment is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in setting update area 342 is any one of "1" to "6" (step SB306). If the setting value information is not one of "1" to "6" (step SB306: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB307). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1". If an affirmative determination is made in step SB306 or if the process of step SB307 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB308).

If the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB308: NO), on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB309: YES), the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SB310). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB309: NO) or if 1 is added to the setting update area 342, the process returns to step SB306. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

On the other hand, if it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB308: YES), the setting reference area 341 is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 (step SB311). As a result, the setting value information updated as a result of this setting value updating process (FIG. 246(a)) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information becomes the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Returning to the description of the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)), after the setting value update area setting process is executed in step SF606, in steps SF607 and SF608, the same processes as steps SB312 and SB313 of the setting value update process (FIG. 167) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed. Specifically, interrupt inhibition is set (step SF607), and the second RAM clear process is executed (step SF608). As already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, in the second RAM clearing process, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221 (that is, the setting reference area 341).

After executing the second RAM clear processing in step SF608, the second lighting instruction data is output to the light emission control IC 514 (step SF609). The light emission control IC 514 stores and holds the received second lighting instruction data in the storage buffer, and turns on the change notification light emitting device 512 based on the second lighting instruction data. As described above, the lighting state of the change notification light-emitting device 512 is continued until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 ends. After that, in step SF610, the same processing as step SB314 of the set value update processing (FIG. 167) in the forty-ninth embodiment is executed, and this set value update processing ends.

As described above, when the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)) is executed and the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes changeable, the change notification light emitting device 512 is turned on. Not only when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is illegally changed, but also when the manager of the game hall changes the setting value, the setting value updating process (Fig. 246(a)) is executed and the change notification light emitting device 512 is turned on. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can confirm that the change notification light emitting device 512 can emit light every time the set value is changed, that is, that the LED is not disabled due to life or the like.

Next, the first RAM clear processing executed by the main CPU 63 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 246(b). Note that the first RAM clearing process is executed at step SB117 in the main process (FIG. 165).

In the first RAM clear process, first, a clear execution process is executed (step SF701). In the clear execution process, similarly to the above-described second RAM clear process (set value update process (step SF608 in FIG. 246(a)), the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the area in which the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the setting reference area 341) is set in the work area 221 for specific control, and the initial setting is performed.

After that, the third lighting instruction data is output to the light emission control IC 514 (step SF702), and the first RAM clearing process ends. The light emission control IC 514 stores and holds the received third lighting instruction data in the storage buffer, and turns on the clear notification light emitting device 513 based on the third lighting instruction data. As described above, the lighting state of the clear notification light-emitting device 513 continues until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 ends.

As described above, when the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 246(b)) is executed, the clear notification light emitting device 513 is turned on. Not only when the first RAM clear processing is illegally executed, but also when the first RAM clear processing is executed by the operation of the manager of the game hall, the clear notification light emitting device 513 is turned on. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can confirm that the clear notification light emitting device 513 can emit light every time the first RAM clearing process is executed, that is, the LED cannot emit light due to the life or the like.

As already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Fig. 245) is being executed, and then the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed, in the main process (Fig. 165), except for the case where the game stop flag is set to "1", the setting confirmation process (Fig. 245), the setting value update process (Fig. 246(a)), and the first RAM clear process ( Either of FIG. 246(b)) is executed. Then, as described above, when the setting confirmation process is executed, the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511 is turned on, when the setting value update process is executed, the change notification light-emitting device 512 is turned on, and when the first RAM clearing process is executed, the clear notification light-emitting device 513 is turned on. Further, as already explained in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the game stop flag is set to "1" (step SB116: YES), an abnormality is notified. For this reason, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is illegally stopped in the middle of the setting confirmation process, and then the supply of operating power is restarted to perform the setting confirmation process (Fig. 245), the setting value update process (Fig. 246(a)), or the first RAM clearing process (Fig. 246(b)). It is possible to grasp that these acts have been performed.

Next, state changes of the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512, and the clear notification light-emitting device 513 will be described in detail.

As already explained in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facilities. A plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be installed in the island facility. The island facility has a power supply device (not shown), and when the power supply device of the island facility is turned on, it is possible to supply operating power to the pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility, and when the power supply device of the island facility is turned off, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is stopped. The supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is started when both the power source of the pachinko machine 10 and the power supply device of the island facility are turned on. The supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped when either one of the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 and the power supply of the island facility is turned off. In the following, a case will be described in which the power supply device of the island facility is turned off while the pachinko machine 10 remains powered on after the business hours of the game hall are over, and the power supply device of the island facility is turned on without turning on the setting key insertion part 68a and the reset button 68c before the start of the next business hour.

As described above, the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512, and the clear notification light-emitting device 513 are turned off when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Then, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started after that, the light-off state of these notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 continues until new lighting instruction data is output from the main side CPU 63 to the light emission control IC 514.

As already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started without turning ON the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c, and the main process (FIG. 165) is executed, the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 246(b)) in step SB117 is not executed. In this case, if the setting confirmation display flag was not set to "1" when the supply of operating power was stopped last time, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 245) in step SB112 is not executed. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 245), the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)), and the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 246(b)) are not executed, the main CPU 63 does not output new lighting instruction data to the light emission control IC 514.

After the end of business hours, the manager of the game hall turns off the power supply device of the island equipment while avoiding the situation in which the setting confirmation process (Fig. 245) or the setting value update process (Fig. 246) is being executed. Business hours can be started with the device 513 turned off.

When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 245), the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)), and the first RAM clear process (FIG. 246(b)) are not executed during business hours, the light-off state of the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 is maintained. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 245) is illegally executed during business hours to create a state in which the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed, the first lighting instruction data is output in step SF506, and the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 is turned on. Further, when the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)) is illegally executed during business hours to create a state in which the setting value can be changed, the second lighting instruction data is output in step SF609, and the change notification light emitting device 512 is turned on. Furthermore, when the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 246(b)) is illegally executed during business hours and the main side RAM 65 is cleared, the third lighting instruction data is output in step SF702, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 is turned on.

Since the lighting state of the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512, and the clear notification light-emitting device 513 is continued until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the manager of the gaming hall visually confirms the state of these notification light-emitting devices 511 to 513 after the business hours are over. Also, it is possible to grasp that an illegal act of clearing the main side RAM 65 has been performed.

Here, the state change of the change notification light-emitting device 512 when the set value is illegally changed during business hours will be specifically described with reference to the time chart of FIG. Fig. 247(a) shows the state of the light emitting device 512 for notifying change, Fig. 247(b) shows the timing of unauthorized change of the setting value, Fig. 247(c) shows the timing when the game hall manager changes the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, Fig. 247(d) shows the state of the power supply of the island facility, Fig. 247(e) shows the business hours of the game hall, and Fig. 247(f) shows the management of the game hall. This indicates the timing at which the operator confirms the state of the change notification light emitting device 512 .

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 247(e), the game hall is out of business hours. At the timing of t1, when the manager of the gaming hall changes the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 as shown in FIG. 247(c), the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)) is executed, so as shown in FIG.

After that, at the timing of t2, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by turning off the power supply of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed as shown in FIG. 247(d). As a result, at the timing t2, the change notification light emitting device 512 is turned off as shown in FIG. 247(a). After that, at timing t3, the power supply of the island facility is turned on as shown in FIG. 247(d), thereby starting supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility. As shown in FIG. 247(a), even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the change notification light-emitting device 512 is kept turned off.

After that, at the timing of t4, business hours start as shown in FIG. 247(e). At the timing t4, the change notification light emitting device 512 is in the off state as shown in FIG. 247(a). At the timing of t5 during business hours, as shown in FIG. 247(b), the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is illegally changed and the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)) is executed. As shown in FIG. The lighting state continues until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

After that, at timing t6, business hours end as shown in FIG. 247(e), and at timing t7, as shown in FIG. At the timing t7, the change notification light emitting device 512 is lit as shown in FIG. 247(a). In this way, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally changed during the business hours of the day by confirming that the light emitting device 512 for change notification is in the lighting state after the business hours are over.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A confirmation notification light emitting device 511 that is turned on when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 245) is executed, a change notification light emitting device 512 that is turned on when the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)) is executed, and a clear notification light emitting device 513 that is turned on when the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 246(b)) is executed are provided. The lighting state of these notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 is continued until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Therefore, by checking the state of these notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 before stopping the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to grasp that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 245) has been illegally executed, the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)) has been illegally executed, and the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 246(b)) has been illegally executed. By turning off the light emitting device 511 for confirmation notification, the light emitting device 512 for change notification, and the light emitting device 513 for clear notification before the start of business hours of the game hall, and by checking the state of these notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 after the end of the business hours and before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is illegally confirmed during the business hours of the day, and the setting value is illegal. It is possible to grasp that a change action has been performed and that an unauthorized clearing action of the main side RAM 65 has been performed.

The confirmation notification light emitting device 511 is provided as a dedicated light emitting device for notifying that the setting value can be confirmed, and the change notification light emitting device 512 is provided as a dedicated light emitting device for notifying that the setting value can be changed. The clear notification light emitting device 513 is provided as a dedicated light emitting device for notifying that the main RAM 65 has been cleared. These informing light-emitting devices 511 to 513 that have turned on are not extinguished for reasons other than stopping the supply of operating power. As a result, the possibility of overlooking an illegal setting value confirmation action, an illegal setting value changing action, and an illegal clearing action of the main-side RAM 65 during business hours is reduced.

The states of the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512, and the clear notification light-emitting device 513 can be visually confirmed. For this reason, the work load for discovering unauthorized confirmation of setting values, unauthorized change of setting values, and unauthorized clearing of main-side RAM 65 is reduced.

Since the light emitting device 511 for confirmation notification is in a lighting state even when the manager of the game hall makes it possible to confirm the setting value, it can be confirmed that the light emitting device 511 for confirmation notification can light up every time the setting value is confirmed. In addition, since the light emitting device 512 for change notification is turned on even when the manager of the game hall makes it possible to change the setting value, it can be confirmed that the light emitting device 512 for change notification can be lighted every time the setting value is changed. Furthermore, since the clear notification light emitting device 513 is lit even when the first RAM clear processing is executed by the operation of the manager of the game hall, it can be confirmed that the clear notification light emitting device 513 can be lit every time the first RAM clear processing is executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of overlooking the illegal act of confirming the set value, the act of changing the set value, and the illegal act of clearing the main side RAM 65 due to the inability to light up the notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 due to the life of the LED or the like.

When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are closed, the power supply unit of the island facility is turned on without turning on the setting key insertion part 68a and the reset button 68c, and the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is started. 6(b)) is not executed, and the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512, and the clear notification light-emitting device 513 do not light up. Therefore, after the end of business hours, the power supply device of the island facility is turned off while the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to stop the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10, and the power supply device of the island facility is turned on before the business hours start, so that the business hours can be started with these informing light emitting devices 511 to 513 turned off. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to grasp the unauthorized act of confirming the set value, the unauthorized change of the set value, and the unauthorized act of clearing the main side RAM 65 during business hours.

The light-emitting device 511 for confirmation notification, the light-emitting device 512 for change notification, and the light-emitting device 513 for clear notification are extinguished by stopping the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10, and the stopping of the supply of operating power is included in a series of operations performed for confirming or changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 after business hours. Since there is no need to add a new operation to turn off the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512, and the clear notification light-emitting device 513, the work burden on the manager of the game hall is reduced.

In the middle of the setting confirmation process (Fig. 245), the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is illegally stopped, and then the supply of operating power is resumed to confirm the setting (Fig. 245), the setting value update process (Fig. 246 (a)), or even when the first RAM clearing process (Fig. 246 (b)) is executed, the notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 corresponding to these processes executed after the resumption of the supply of the operating power are turned on. For this reason, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is illegally stopped in the middle of the setting confirmation process, and then the supply of operating power is restarted to perform the setting confirmation process (Fig. 245), the setting value update process (Fig. 246(a)), or the first RAM clearing process (Fig. 246(b)). It is possible to grasp that these acts have been performed.

When the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (Fig. 246(a)) is being executed, and then the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed, the setting value update process (Fig. 246(a)) is executed again. Also when the set value update process is executed after the supply of operating power is resumed, the change notification light emitting device 512 is turned on. Therefore, even if the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is illegally changed by a method of illegally stopping the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in the middle of the setting value updating process and then resuming the supply of the operating power and executing the setting value update process again, it is possible to grasp that the illegal change of the setting value has been carried out.

In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, the main control board 61 may be provided with a notification light emitting device that turns on when an illegal radio wave is detected or a notification light emitting device that turns on when abnormal vibration is detected. By confirming the state of these notification light emitting devices after the end of business hours, it is possible to grasp that a fraudulent act of transmitting an illegal radio wave or a fraudulent act of adding abnormal vibration has been performed during the business hours of the day.

Further, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the main control board 61 may be provided with only one of the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513. The main control board 61 may be provided with only a combination of any two of these notification light emitting devices 511 to 513.

Further, instead of the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511 and the change notification light-emitting device 512 of the above-described embodiment, one setting-related notification light-emitting device that is lit when either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 245) or the setting value update process (FIG. 246(a)) is executed may be provided. While reducing the number of notification light-emitting devices on the main control board 61, it is possible to grasp that either the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 has been confirmed or changed.

Further, instead of the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 of the above-described embodiment, one notification light emitting device that is lit when any of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 245), the setting value update processing (FIG. 246 (a)), and the first RAM clear processing (FIG. 246 (b)) is executed. While reducing the number of notification light-emitting devices in the main control board 61, it is possible to grasp that either the confirmation of the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, the change of the setting value, or the clearing of the main side RAM 65 has been performed.

Further, in the configuration of the above embodiment, the period in which the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 are in the lighting state may be limited to the period in which the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with a confirmation notification flag set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 245) is executed, a change notification flag set to "1" when the set value update process (FIG. 246(a)) is executed, and a clear notification flag set to "1" when the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 246(b)) is executed.

When a main body opening command is received from a payout side CPU 92 and it is specified that the game machine main body 12 is in an open state, the main side CPU 63 determines whether or not "1" is set to a confirmation notification flag, a change notification flag or a clear notification flag. Then, if there is a flag set to “1”, lighting instruction data corresponding to the flag set to “1” is output to the light emission control IC 514 . The light emission control IC 514 lights any one of the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 based on the received lighting instruction data. Further, when the main side CPU 63 receives a main body closing command from the payout side CPU 92 and identifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state, the main side CPU 63 outputs extinguishing instruction data to the light emission control IC 514 . When receiving the light-off instruction data, the light emission control IC 514 turns off the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512, and the clear notification light-emitting device 513. FIG.

As described above, the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512, and the clear notification light-emitting device 513 do not light up when the gaming machine body 12 is in the closed state. Therefore, when the state of these notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 is illegally confirmed from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 without opening the game machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10, these notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 are in the extinguished state even when the history of confirmation of the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, change of the setting value, or clearing of the main side RAM 65 remains. This reduces the possibility that a person who has performed an act of illegally confirming the set values of the pachinko machine 10, an act of illegally changing the set values, or an act of illegally clearing the main side RAM 65 will notice that the history of these acts remains. Further, by limiting the period in which the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 are in the lighting state to the period in which the game machine main body 12 is open in front of the pachinko machine 10, the life of these notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 can be extended.

Further, in the configuration of the above embodiment, if there are the notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 that were in the lighting state before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 last time was stopped, the gaming machine main body 12 may be configured to return to the lighting state on the condition that the supply of the operating power is started in a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is opened in front. Specifically, in the main RAM 65, a confirmation lighting flag is set to "1" when the first lighting instruction data is output in step SF506 of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 245), a change lighting flag is set to "1" when the second lighting instruction data is output in step SF609 of the setting value updating process (FIG. 246A), and a third lighting instruction is set in step SF702 of the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 246B). A clear lighting flag, which is set to "1" when data is output, is provided.

When the game machine main body 12 is closed and the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the main CPU 63 executes the processing of steps SB101 to SB123 in the main processing (FIG. 165) and then clears the confirmation lighting flag, the change lighting flag and the clear lighting flag to "0". The closed state of the gaming machine main body 12 is specified based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 . On the other hand, when the game machine main body 12 is opened and the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the main CPU 63 executes the processing of steps SB101 to SB123 in the main processing (FIG. 165). If any flag is set to "1", lighting instruction data for lighting the notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 corresponding to the flag set to "1" is output to the light emission control IC 514. As a result, the notification light-emitting devices 511 to 513, which were in the lighting state before the supply of operating power was stopped last time, return to the lighting state.

In a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is powered on before the start of business hours, the manager of the game hall turns on the power supply of the island equipment to start supplying operating power to the pachinko machine 10. Since the supply of operating power is started while the game machine body 12 is closed, the confirmation lighting flag, the change lighting flag and the clear lighting flag are cleared to "0" in the main process (FIG. 165), and the notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 are turned off. It is possible to start business hours in the state where it is set.

On the other hand, after the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is illegally confirmed or changed, or the main side RAM 65 is illegally cleared, and the corresponding notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 are turned on, if the game machine main body 12 is illegally turned off and on after the game machine main body 12 is opened, the operating power supply is started while the game machine main body 12 is open, so that the notification light emitting device that was in the lighting state. 511 to 513 return to the lighting state. In other words, the notification light-emitting devices 511 to 513 cannot be turned off illegally by an illegal power OFF operation and power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 performed with the game machine main body 12 in the open state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512 and the clear notification light-emitting device 513 are illegally extinguished and the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is illegally confirmed or changed or the main side RAM 65 is illegally cleared.

<Seventy-third embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-ninth embodiment in that it is possible to grasp the illegal act of confirming the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, the illegal changing act of the setting value, and the illegal act of clearing the main side RAM 65 without opening the game machine main body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10. The configuration different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

As in the 72nd embodiment, the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 is provided with a confirmation notification light emitting device 511, a change notification light emitting device 512, and a clear notification light emitting device 513. In this embodiment, these notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 are extinguished when a closing operation is performed to close the game machine body 12 from the open state in which the game machine body 12 is opened in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. As already explained in the first embodiment, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state based on the fact that the detection signal input from the main body open sensor 96 is switched from the open detection signal to the closed detection signal, and transmits a main side CPU 63 a main body closing command at the specified timing. The main CPU 63 recognizes that the game machine body 12 has been closed based on the reception of the body closing command.

As already described in the eleventh embodiment, the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 for displaying set values are provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 . When there is a space on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility, there is a possibility that the game machine main body 12 is not opened in front of the pachinko machine 10, and the set values of the pachinko machine 10 are checked, the set values are changed, and the main side RAM 65 is cleared from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. There is a possibility that these fraudulent actions performed without opening the gaming machine main body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10 may be overlooked.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, detection of the closing operation of the gaming machine main body 12 is set as a trigger for turning off the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513. FIG. When an illegal act of confirming the set value of the pachinko machine 10, an act of illegally changing the set value, or an act of illegally clearing the main side RAM 65 is performed from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 without opening the game machine body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the light emitting devices 511 to 513 for notification can be kept on since the closing operation of the game machine body 12 is not followed. As a result, it is possible to grasp these fraudulent acts performed without opening the gaming machine main body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10 .

Next, the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in steps SF801 to SF811, the same processes as steps SB101 to SB111 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed. As already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned ON by using the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c (step SF808: NO, step SF810: YES), the power failure flag is set to "1" (step SF804: YES), the checksum is normal (step SF805: YES), and the setting reference area 34. 1 is within the normal range (step SF806: YES), the setting update display flag is not set to "1" (step SF807: NO), and the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step SF809: NO), setting confirmation processing (step SF812) is executed. In addition, in the main process (FIG. 248) which is executed after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step SF812) is being executed, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SF811: YES) even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the setting key insertion portion 68a (step SF810: NO). , the setting confirmation process is executed (step SF812). As in the forty-ninth embodiment, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249) is started, and is cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249) is terminated.

FIG. 249 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. First, in steps SF901 to SF905, the same processes as steps SB201 to SB205 of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed. Specifically, first, interrupt permission is set (step SF901). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period.

Thereafter, on condition that the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SF902). When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), and setting processing (step S9006) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed. As a result, as already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, a confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SF903). Upon receiving the confirmation start command, the sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 so that the pattern display device 41 displays an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249) is being executed and an image for recognizing the operation content for ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249).

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SF904), and if it is not specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SF904: NO), the processing of step SF904 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SF904: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SF905). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), and the setting processing (step S9006) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, the display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are cancelled.

After clearing the setting confirmation display flag to "0" in step SF905, the setting confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SF906). The setting confirmation flag is a flag that enables the main side CPU 63 to grasp that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed. By setting the setting confirmation flag to "1", the first lighting instruction data is output to the light emission control IC 514 in the notification output process (FIG. 251) to be described later, and the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 is turned on. The setting confirmation flag is cleared to "0" at step SG408 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 252) described later when the gaming machine body 12 is closed.

After setting the setting confirmation flag to "1" in step SF906, in steps SF907 and SF908, the same processes as steps SB206 and SB207 in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) of the forty-ninth embodiment are executed, and this setting confirmation process ends.

Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 248), if a negative determination is made in step SF811, the process proceeds to step SF813. In step SF813, the same process as step SB113 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment is executed. Further, as already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the reset button 68c is pressed in step SF808, if it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SF814: YES), the setting value update process (step SF815) is executed. In the main process (FIG. 248) in which the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (step SF815) is being executed, and then the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started (step SF807: YES), the setting value update process is executed regardless of whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON based on the fact that the setting update display flag is set to "1". (Step SF815). As in the forty-ninth embodiment, the setting update display flag is set to "1" when the setting value update process (FIG. 250(a)) is started, and is cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (FIG. 250(a)) ends.

FIG. 250(a) is a flow chart showing the set value update process executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. First, in steps SG101 to SG105, the same processing as steps SB301 to SB305 in the set value update processing (FIG. 167) of the forty-ninth embodiment is executed. Specifically, first, interrupt permission is set (step SG101). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started at the second interrupt period.

After that, on condition that the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SG102). When the setting update display flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), thereby executing setting processing (step S9004) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update. As a result, the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the setting value selected as an update target of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, initial setting at the start is performed (step SG103). In the initial setting, the game stop flag already explained in the forty-ninth embodiment is cleared to "0". By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S8906. Thus, when an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 65, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and fraud monitoring is executed, but the processing for progressing the game is not executed. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the processing of step SG103, the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main side RAM 65 is specified can be canceled when the set value update processing (FIG. 250(a)) is executed.

Thereafter, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SG104). The setting update area 342 is a storage area for storing information on setting values that are being updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 250(a)), as in the forty-fifth embodiment. As already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, the setting values (“setting value 1” to “setting value 6”) to be updated (selected or changed) are set values corresponding to the numerical information (“1” to “6”) stored in the setting update area 342. By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 in step SG104, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1". That is, in this embodiment, regardless of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10, when the setting value update process (Fig. 250(a)) is started, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1".

After that, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SG105). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 so that the pattern display device 41 displays an image indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 250(a)) is being executed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value, and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for ending the setting value update process (FIG. 250(a)). As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and to recognize the operation content necessary to change the setting value and the operation content necessary to end the setting value update process (FIG. 250(a)).

After that, setting processing of the setting update area is executed (step SG106). In the process of setting the setting update area, the same process as steps SB306 to SB311 in the setting value update process (FIG. 167) of the forty-ninth embodiment is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in setting update area 342 is one of "1" to "6" (step SB306). If the setting value information is not one of "1" to "6" (step SB306: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB307). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1". If an affirmative determination is made in step SB306 or if the process of step SB307 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB308).

If the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB308: NO), on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB309: YES), the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SB310). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to a value one step higher. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB309: NO) or if 1 is added to the setting update area 342, the process returns to step SB306. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", the setting returns to "setting 1".

On the other hand, if it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB308: YES), the setting reference area 341 is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 (step SB311). As a result, the setting value information updated as a result of this setting value updating process (Fig. 250(a)) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information becomes the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Returning to the description of the setting value updating process (FIG. 250(a)), after the setting value update area setting process is executed in step SG106, in steps SG107 and SG108, the same processes as steps SB312 and SB313 of the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed. Specifically, interrupt inhibition is set (step SG107), and the second RAM clear process is executed (step SG108). As already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, in the second RAM clearing process, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221 (that is, the setting reference area 341).

When the second RAM clearing process is executed in step SG108, "1" is set to the setting change flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step SG109). The setting change flag is a flag that enables the main side CPU 63 to grasp that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 has become changeable. By setting the setting change flag to "1", the second lighting instruction data is output to the light emission control IC 514 in the notification output process (FIG. 251) described later, and the change notification light emitting device 512 is turned on. The setting change flag is cleared to "0" at step SG408 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 252) described later when the game machine body 12 is closed. After setting the setting change flag to "1" at step SG109, at step SG110, the same processing as step SB314 of the set value update processing (FIG. 167) in the forty-ninth embodiment is executed, and this set value update processing ends.

Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 248), as already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while pressing the reset button 68c (step SF808: YES), and when it is determined that the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a is not performed using the setting key (step SF814: NO), the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step SF816: NO). , the first RAM clear processing (step SF817) is executed.

FIG. 250(b) is a flow chart showing the first RAM clearing process executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. First, a clear execution process is executed (step SG201). In the clear execution process, similarly to the above-described second RAM clear process (set value update process (step SG108 in FIG. 250(a)), the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed, except for the area (that is, the setting reference area 341) in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221.

After that, the clear execution flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SG202), and the first RAM clear processing ends. The clear execution flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 63 to recognize that the main RAM 65 has been cleared. By setting the clear execution flag to "1", the third lighting instruction data is output to the light emission control IC 514 in the notification output process (FIG. 251) described later, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 is turned on. The clear execution flag is cleared to "0" at step SG408 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 252) described later when the game machine body 12 is closed.

Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 248), after executing the first RAM clear process in step SF817, the process proceeds to step SF818. In step SF818, the same processing as step SB118 in the forty-ninth embodiment is executed. If a negative determination is made in any of steps SF804 to SF806, the process proceeds to step SF819. In steps SF819 to SF822, the same processes as steps SB119 to SB122 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed. As already described in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the reset button 68c is pressed in step SF820 and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON in step SF814, the set value updating process (FIG. 250(a)) described above is executed in step SF815. As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, and the setting change flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1".

When the process of step SF812 is performed, when the process of step SF813 is performed, when the process of step SF815 is performed, when the process of step SF818 is performed, or when the process of step SF822 is performed, a notification output process is performed (step SF823).

FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing notification output processing executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. In the notification output process, when the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SG301: YES), first lighting instruction data is output to the light emission control IC 514 (step SG302). In this embodiment, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249) is executed in step SF812 in the current main process (FIG. 248), since the setting confirmation flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step SG301 and the first lighting instruction data is output (step SG302). In addition, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped while the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 is in a lighting state and the setting confirmation flag is set to "1", and then the supply of operation power is started without pressing the reset button 68c and turning ON the setting key insertion portion 68a, the notification output process (FIG. 251) is executed in step SF823 of the main process (FIG. 248) without clearing the setting confirmation flag to "0". becomes. Also in this case, an affirmative determination is made in step SG301 and the first lighting instruction data is output (step SG302). As already described in the 72nd embodiment, the light emission control IC 514 lights the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 based on the received first lighting instruction data.

Therefore, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249) is executed in step SF812 of the main process (FIG. 248) and the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed, the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 is turned on. In addition, when the supply of operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a state where the setting confirmation flag is set to "1", the light emitting device 511 for confirmation notification returns to the same lighting state as before the last supply of operation power is stopped.

If it is determined in step SG301 that the setting confirmation flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the setting change flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SG303). If the setting change flag is set to "1" (step SG303: YES), the second lighting instruction data is output to the light emission control IC 514 (step SG304). In this embodiment, when the set value update process (FIG. 250(a)) is executed in step SF815 in the current main process (FIG. 248), since the setting change flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step SG303 and the second lighting instruction data is output (step SG304). In addition, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped while the change notification light-emitting device 512 is in a lighting state and the setting change flag is set to "1", and then the supply of operating power is started without pressing the reset button 68c and turning ON the setting key insertion portion 68a, the setting change flag is not cleared to "0" and the notification output process (FIG. 251) is executed in step SF823 of the main process (FIG. 248). becomes. Also in this case, an affirmative determination is made in step SG303 and the second lighting instruction data is output (step SG304). As already described in the 72nd embodiment, the light emission control IC 514 lights the change notification light emitting device 512 based on the received second lighting instruction data.

Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 250(a)) is executed in step SF815 of the main process (FIG. 248) and the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the change notification light emitting device 512 is turned on. Further, when the supply of operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a state where the setting change flag is set to "1", the light emitting device 512 for change notification returns to the same lighting state as before the last supply of operation power is stopped.

If it is determined in step SG303 that the setting change flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the clear execution flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SG305), and if the clear execution flag is not set to "1" (step SG305: NO), this notification output processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the clear execution flag is set to "1" (step SG305: YES), the third lighting instruction data is output to the light emission control IC 514 (step SG306), and this notification output process ends. In this embodiment, when the first RAM clear process is executed in step SF817 in the current main process (FIG. 248), the clear execution flag is set to "1", so an affirmative determination is made in step SG305 and the third lighting instruction data is output (step SG306). In addition, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped while the clear notification light emitting device 513 is in a lighting state and the clear execution flag is set to "1", and then the supply of operating power is started without pressing the reset button 68c and turning ON the setting key insertion portion 68a, the notification output processing (FIG. 251) is executed in step SF823 of the main processing (FIG. 248) without clearing the clear execution flag to "0". becomes. Also in this case, an affirmative determination is made in step SG305 and the third lighting instruction data is output (step SG306). As already described in the 72nd embodiment, the light emission control IC 514 lights the clear notification light emitting device 513 based on the received third lighting instruction data.

Therefore, when the primary RAM 65 is cleared by executing the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 250(b)) in step SF817 of the main process (FIG. 248), the clear notification light emitting device 513 is turned on. In addition, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a state where "1" is set to the clear execution flag, the light emitting device 513 for clear notification returns to the same lighting state as before the last supply of operating power is stopped.

In the above-described second RAM clearing process (set value update process (step SG108 in FIG. 250(a)), the setting check flag, setting update flag, and clear execution flag are cleared to "0". However, as already described, in the set value update process (FIG. 250(a)), the setting change flag is set to "1" (step SG109) after the second RAM clear process (step SG108) is executed.Therefore, it is executed after the set value update process is executed. In the notification output process, the second lighting instruction data is output and the change notification light emitting device 512 is turned on.

After the corresponding notification light-emitting devices 511 to 513 are turned on due to the unauthorized confirmation of the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, the unauthorized change of the setting value, or the unauthorized clearing of the main RAM 65, the change notification light-emitting device 512 is turned on even if the second RAM clear processing (setting value update processing (Fig. 250 (a))) is illegally executed to erase the traces of these unauthorized actions. 0(a)) has been performed fraudulently.

In addition, in the above-described clear execution processing (first RAM clear processing (step SG201 in FIG. 250(b)), the setting confirmation flag, the setting update flag, and the clear execution flag are cleared to "0". However, as already described, in the first RAM clear processing (FIG. 250(b)), the clear execution flag is set to "1" (step SG202) after the clear execution processing (step SG201) is executed. In the notification output process to be executed, the third lighting instruction data is output and the clear notification light emitting device 513 is turned on.

After the corresponding notification light-emitting devices 511 to 513 are turned on due to illegal confirmation of the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, illegal change of the setting value, or illegal clearing of the main side RAM 65, the clear notification light-emitting device 513 is turned on even if the clear execution processing (step SG201 of the first RAM clear processing (FIG. 250(b))) is illegally executed to erase the traces of these illegal acts. This makes it possible to recognize that the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 250(b)) has been performed illegally.

Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 248), after executing the notification output process in step SF823, in steps SF824 and SF825, the same processes as steps SB123 and SB124 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed. After that, in step SF826, residual processing is executed. In the residual process, the same processes as steps SB125 to SB128 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed.

Next, the first timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG. As already explained in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt process is periodically started at a period of 4 milliseconds, which is the first interrupt period. Also, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt process is set as a specific control program.

First, in steps SG401 to SG405, the same processes as steps S8901 to S8905 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not a body closing command has been received (step SG406). When the body closing command is received (step SG406: YES), it means that the closing operation of the gaming machine body 12 has been detected, so the light-off instruction data is output to the light emission control IC 514 (step SG407). The light-off instruction data is instruction data for turning off the light-emitting device 511 for confirmation notification, the light-emitting device 512 for change notification, and the light-emitting device 513 for clear notification. When receiving the light-off instruction data from the main CPU 63, the light-emission control IC 514 clears the first lighting instruction data to turn off the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 when the first lighting instruction data is stored in the storage buffer, and clears the second lighting instruction data to turn off the change notification light-emitting device 512 when the second lighting instruction data is stored in the storage buffer. Further, when the light emission control IC 514 receives the light-off instruction data from the main CPU 63, and when the third light-up instruction data is stored in the storage buffer, the light-emission control IC 514 clears the third light-up instruction data and puts the clear notification light-emitting device 513 in the light-off state. Thus, in this embodiment, the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 are turned off on condition that the closing operation of the gaming machine body 12 is detected.

After outputting the extinguishing instruction data in step SG407, the notification flag is cleared (step SG408). In the notification flag clearing process, the setting confirmation flag, the setting change flag and the clear execution flag in the main RAM 65 are cleared to "0". As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and then the supply of the operating power is resumed, negative determinations are made in steps SG301, SG303, and SG305 of the notification processing (FIG. 251), and the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 are turned off even after the supply of the operating power is resumed.

If a negative determination is made in step SG406, or if the processing of step SG408 has been executed, other processing is executed (step SG409), and the first timer interrupt processing ends. In other processes, the same processes as steps S8906 to S8920 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed.

Next, state changes of the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511, the change notification light-emitting device 512, and the clear notification light-emitting device 513 will be described in detail.

When the manager of the game hall confirms the set value of the pachinko machine 10, after opening the game machine main body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10, he turns on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without adding the pressing operation of the reset button 68c while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a. As a result, as described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249) is executed, and the setting values can be confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. Then, after confirming the setting value, the setting key insertion portion 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, and the closing operation of the game machine body 12 is performed while the pachinko machine 10 is kept in the ON state. In this case, the confirmation notification light-emitting device 511 is turned on by executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249), but is turned off when the closing operation of the game machine main body 12 is detected thereafter. Therefore, when the administrator of the gaming hall performs a series of actions for confirming the set value, the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 is turned off after that.

When the manager of the game hall changes the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, after opening the game machine main body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by adding the pressing operation of the reset button 68c while performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a. As a result, as described above, the setting value update process (FIG. 250(a)) is executed, and the setting value can be changed. After changing the setting value, the setting key insertion portion 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, and the closing operation of the game machine body 12 is performed while the pachinko machine 10 is kept in the ON state. In this case, the change notification light-emitting device 512 is turned on by executing the set value update process (FIG. 250(a)), but is turned off by detecting the closing operation of the gaming machine main body 12 after that. Therefore, when the manager of the gaming hall performs a series of actions to change the setting value, the change notification light emitting device 512 is turned off after that.

When the manager of the game hall executes the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 250(b)) to clear the main side RAM 65, after the game machine main body 12 is opened in front of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the reset button 68c without turning on the setting key insertion part 68a. As a result, as described above, the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 250(b)) is executed to clear the main RAM 65 . After that, the game machine body 12 is closed while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In this case, the clear notification light-emitting device 513 is turned on after the first RAM clear process (FIG. 250(b)) is executed, but is turned off when the closing operation of the gaming machine body 12 is detected thereafter. Therefore, when the manager of the game hall performs a series of actions for clearing the main RAM 65, the clear notification light emitting device 513 is turned off after that.

On the other hand, if the setting confirmation process (Fig. 249), the setting value update process (Fig. 250(a)), or the first RAM clearing process (Fig. 250(b)) is illegally executed without opening the game machine body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10, and the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, or the clear notification light emitting device 513 is turned on, the closing operation of the game machine body 12 is not performed thereafter. In this case, the informing light-emitting devices 511 to 513 which are turned on are not extinguished even after the illegal act of confirming the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, the illegal act of changing the setting value, or the illegal act of clearing the main side RAM 65 is completed.

For this reason, the manager of the game hall starts business hours with the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512 and the clear notification light emitting device 513 turned off, and after the business hours are over, the game machine body 12 is opened in front of the pachinko machine 10 and by visually confirming the states of these notification light emitting devices 511 to 513, the game machine body 12 is opened in front of the pachinko machine 10 during the business hours of the day. It is possible to grasp that an illegal act of confirming the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, an illegal act of changing the setting value, and an illegal act of clearing the main side RAM 65 have been performed.

As described above, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and then the supply of operating power is resumed without pressing the reset button 68c, if the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 was in the lighting state before the supply of operation power was stopped, the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 returns to the lighting state after the supply of operation power is resumed, and if the change notification light emitting device 512 was in the lighting state before the supply of operation power was stopped, the change is made after the supply of the operation power is resumed. The notification light emitting device 512 returns to the lighting state. Further, if the clear notification light emitting device 513 was in the lighting state before the supply of operating power was stopped, the clear notification light emitting device 513 returns to the lighting state after the supply of the operating power is resumed. Therefore, even if a person who illegally confirms or changes the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 or illegally clears the main side RAM 65 without opening the game machine body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10 illegally stops the supply of the operating power and restarts the supply of the operating power without pressing the reset button 68c, the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513. cannot be turned off. As a result, the possibility of overlooking the illegal act of confirming the set values of the pachinko machine 10, the illegal act of changing the set values, and the illegal act of clearing the main side RAM 65 without opening the game machine main body 12 is reduced.

As in the 72nd embodiment, the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed has a power supply device, and when the power supply device of the island facility is turned on, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility becomes possible, and when the power supply device of the island facility is turned off, the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is stopped.

As described above, when the manager of the gaming hall opens the gaming machine main body 12 after business hours and confirms the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, changes the setting value, or clears the main side RAM 65, the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 are turned off by performing the closing operation of the gaming machine body 12 while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. After that, the power supply device of the island equipment is turned off while the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is kept on, and even if the power supply device of the island equipment is turned on before the start of the next business hours, the extinguishing state of these informing light emitting devices 511 to 513 is maintained. Therefore, business hours can be started with these notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 turned off. By confirming the states of these informing light emitting devices 511 to 513 after business hours are over, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally confirmed without opening the game machine main body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10 during the business hours of the day, that the setting value has been illegally changed, or that the main side RAM 65 has been illegally cleared.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 are turned off when the closing operation of the gaming machine body 12 is detected. When the game machine main body 12 is not opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is checked illegally, the setting value is changed illegally, and the main side RAM 65 is illegally cleared, the game machine main body 12 is not closed after that, so that the light emitting devices 511 to 513 corresponding to the information light emitting devices 511 to 513 can be kept lit even after these illegal acts are carried out. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the set values of the pachinko machine 10 have been improperly confirmed, the set values have been improperly changed, and the main side RAM 65 has been improperly cleared without opening the game machine body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

When the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted without pressing the reset button 68c after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, if the light emitting device for confirmation notification 511 was in the lighting state before the supply of operating power was stopped, the light emitting device for confirmation notification 511 returns to the lighting state after resuming the supply, and if the light emitting device for change notification 512 was in the lighting state before the supply of operating power was restarted, the light emitting device for change notification 512 is in the lighting state after the supply is restarted. return to Also, if the clear notification light emitting device 513 was in the lighting state before the supply of operating power was stopped, the clear notification light emitting device 513 returns to the lighting state after the supply is resumed. Therefore, even if a person who illegally confirms or changes the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 or illegally clears the main RAM 65 without opening the game machine body 12 illegally stops the supply of the operating power and resumes the supply of the operating power without pressing the reset button 68c, the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 cannot be turned off illegally. . As a result, the possibility of overlooking an illegal act of confirming the set values of the pachinko machine 10, an act of illegally changing the set values, and an act of illegally clearing the main side RAM 65, which are performed without opening the game machine body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10, is reduced.

In the above embodiment, the configuration that makes it possible to recognize that the main RAM 65 has been cleared is not limited to the configuration in which the clear notification light emitting device 513 is always lit when the main RAM 65 is cleared. For example, when the main RAM 65 is cleared, the light-emitting device 513 for notifying clear may be turned on under the condition that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state. The manager of the game hall opens the game machine main body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10, and performs the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c to execute the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 250(b)) or the second RAM clearing process (step SF817 of the main process (FIG. 248)). When the main side RAM 65 is cleared by the operation of the manager of the game hall, the condition that the game machine main body 12 is in the closed state at the timing when the main side RAM 65 is cleared is not satisfied, so the light emitting device 513 for notifying clear is not lit. On the other hand, when the main side RAM 65 is illegally cleared by illegally operating the reset button 68c from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 without opening the game machine body 12, the condition that the game machine body 12 is in the closed state is satisfied at the timing when the main side RAM 65 is cleared, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 is turned on. In this way, by setting the light-emitting device 513 for clear notification to the lighting state on the condition that the game machine body 12 is in the closed state at the timing when the main side RAM 65 is cleared, the light-emitting device 513 for clear notification can be set to the lighting state only when the main side RAM 65 is illegally cleared without opening the game machine body 12.例文帳に追加As a result, when it is found that the light emitting device 513 for clear notification is turned on, it is possible to uniquely specify that the main side RAM 65 has been illegally cleared without opening the game machine main body 12.例文帳に追加

Further, one setting-related flag is provided instead of the setting confirmation flag and setting change flag in the above embodiment, and one setting-related notification light emitting device is provided instead of the confirmation notification light emitting device 511 and change notification light emitting device 512 in the above embodiment. The setting-related flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" when either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249) or the setting value update process (FIG. 250(a)) is executed. Then, based on the fact that the setting-related flag is set to "1", the setting-related informing light-emitting device is turned on. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration that makes it possible to grasp that either the action of checking the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 or the action of changing the setting value has been performed.

In addition, one execution status flag may be provided instead of the setting confirmation flag, setting change flag, and clear execution flag in the above embodiment, and one execution status notification light emitting device may be provided instead of the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 in the above embodiment. The execution status flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" when any one of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249), the setting value update process (FIG. 250(a)), and the first RAM clear process (FIG. 250(b)) is executed. Then, based on the fact that the execution status flag is set to "1", the execution status notification light-emitting device is turned on. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration that makes it possible to grasp that any one of the action of checking the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, the action of changing the setting value, and the action of clearing the main side RAM 65 has been performed.

Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, when an opening operation is performed to change the gaming machine main body 12 from the closed state to the open state while the setting confirmation flag, the setting change flag, or the clear execution flag is set to "1", the speaker unit 54 may be configured to notify by sound. As a result, the possibility of overlooking the illegal act of confirming the set value of the pachinko machine 10, the act of illegally changing the set value, and the illegal act of clearing the main side RAM 65 without opening the game machine main body 12 can be reduced.

Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the game machine body 12 is closed while the setting confirmation flag, the setting change flag, or the clear execution flag is set to "1" and these flags are cleared to "0", the speaker unit 54 issues a notification by sound. As a result, even if the game machine main body 12 is closed due to forgetting the visual confirmation of the light emitting device 511 for confirmation notification, the light emitting device 512 for change notification and the light emitting device 512 for clear notification and the game machine main body 12 is closed, it is possible to prevent the illegal act of confirming the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, the illegal act of changing the setting value, and the illegal act of clearing the main side RAM 65 from being overlooked.

Further, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, the main control board 61 may be provided with a turn-off operation button operated to turn off the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513. The notification light-emitting devices 511 to 513 are turned off when the operation of the turn-off operation button is detected while the gaming machine main body 12 is opened in front of the pachinko machine 10 . On the other hand, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped in a situation where any of the notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 is in the lighting state and then the supply of the operating power is restarted, the notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 that were in the lighting state before the supply of the operating power are stopped return to the lighting state. In addition, even if the closing operation of the gaming machine main body 12 is detected in a situation where any of the notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 is in a lighting state, the notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 are not turned off. Since the light-emitting devices 511-513 for information are not turned off unless the light-off operation button is operated, the possibility that the light-emitting devices 511-513 for information are turned off without the manager of the game hall noticing the lighting state of the light-emitting devices 511-513 for information is reduced. Further, in order to turn off the notification light emitting devices 511 to 513, it is necessary to operate the turning off operation button after opening the game machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10, so even if the turning off operation button is operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 without opening the game machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the notification light emitting devices 511 to 513 are prevented from being turned off illegally.

<74th Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the 73rd embodiment in that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 notify that the setting confirmation process has been executed, that the set value update process has been executed, and that the first RAM clear process has been executed. The configuration that is different from the seventy-third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the seventy-third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 253 is a front view of main controller 60 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 253, on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61, on the right side of the reset button 68c, there is provided a display switching button 68e that is operated to display information on the execution status of the setting confirmation process, the set value update process, and the first RAM clear process on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a as described in the first embodiment, but the display switching button 68e is not covered by the opposing wall portion 60b. In other words, the opposing wall portion 60b has an opening in a region opposing the display switching button 68e. As a result, the display switching button 68e can be pressed without opening the board box 60a.

A display switching button 68 e is provided on the input side of the MPU 62 . The display switching button 68e is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the display switching button 68e is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the display switching button 68e is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

On the condition that the display switching button 68e is being pressed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display information about the execution status of the setting confirmation process, the setting value update process, and the first RAM clear process. The display of the information starts when the pressing operation of the display switching button 68e starts, and ends when the pressing operation ends. In this embodiment, the main control board 61 does not have the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513.

Next, the second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 2 milliseconds).

First, in step SG501, the same processing as step S9001 in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) in the thirty-fifth embodiment is executed. Specifically, an interrupt prohibition setting is made to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 254) (step SG501).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the display switching button 68e is being pressed (step SG502), and if the display switching button 68e is being pressed (step SG502: YES), a switching setting process for setting the fifth display data buffer 275 during display switching is executed (step SG503).

FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing switching setting processing executed by the main side CPU 63 . In the switching setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SG601). As already described in the seventy-third embodiment, the setting confirmation flag is set to "1" in step SF906 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249) is executed and the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed. The setting confirmation flag is cleared to "0" only when the closing operation of the gaming machine main body 12 is detected, when the clearing execution process (first RAM clearing process (step SG201 in FIG. 250(b))) is executed, and when the second RAM clearing process (setting value update process (step SG108 in FIG. 250(a)) is executed. When the setting confirmation flag is set to "1" (step SG601: YES), the fifth display data The display data for confirmation notification is stored (step SG602) in the buffer 275, and the setting process during switching is ended.The display data for confirmation notification is display data for displaying "-" on the first to third display devices for notification 201 to 203 and for displaying "1" on the display device for fourth notification 204.

If the setting confirmation flag is not set to "1" in step SG601, it is determined whether or not the setting change flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SG603). As already described in the 73rd embodiment, the setting change flag is set to "1" in step SG109 when the setting value update process (FIG. 250(a)) is executed and the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. The setting change flag is cleared to "0" only when the closing operation of the gaming machine body 12 is detected, when the clear execution process (first RAM clear process (step SG201 in FIG. 250(b))) is executed, and when the second RAM clear process (set value update process (step SG108 in FIG. 250(a)) is executed. When the setting change flag is set to "1" (step SG603: YES), the fifth display data The change notification display data is stored (step SG604) in the buffer 275, and the change notification setting process is terminated.The change notification display data is display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display "-" and the fourth notification display device 204 to display "2".

If the setting change flag is not set to "1" in step SG603, it is determined whether or not the clear execution flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SG605). As already described in the seventy-third embodiment, the clear execution flag is set to "1" when the first RAM clear processing (FIG. 250(b)) is executed. The clear execution flag is cleared to "0" only when the closing operation of the gaming machine body 12 is detected, when the clear execution process (first RAM clear process (step SG201 in FIG. 250(b))) is executed, and when the second RAM clear process (set value update process (step SG108 in FIG. 250(a)) is executed. When the clear execution flag is set to "1" (step SG605: YES), the fifth display data The display data for clear notification is stored (step SG606) in the buffer 275, and the setting process during switching is completed.The display data for clear notification is display data for displaying "-" on the first to third display devices for notification 201 to 203 and for displaying "3" on the display device for fourth notification 204.

If none of the setting confirmation flag, the setting change flag, and the clear execution flag are set to "1" (step SG601: NO, step SG603: NO, step SG605: NO), the display data for notifying non-execution is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step SG607), and this switching setting processing is terminated. The non-execution notification display data is display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display "-" and the fourth notification display device 204 to display "0".

When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display the execution status of the setting confirmation processing, the setting value update processing, and the first RAM clear processing in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In this case, in the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203, one center display segment is in a light emitting state, and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. Further, in the fourth notification display device 204, some of the display segments are in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state so that one of the numbers "0" to "3" is displayed. Specifically, the fourth notification display device 204 displays "0" when the display data transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 is display data for non-execution notification, "1" when the transmitted display data is confirmation notification display data, "2" when the transmitted display data is change notification display data, and "3" when the transmitted display data is clear notification display data.

When the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is "---0", the manager of the game hall can understand that the setting confirmation process (Fig. 249), the set value update process (Fig. 250 (a)) and the first RAM clear process (Fig. 250 (b)) are not executed, and set when the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 is "---1". It is possible to grasp that the confirmation process has been executed. In addition, when the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is "---2", it is possible to grasp that the set value update process has been executed, and when the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 is "---3", it is possible to grasp that the first RAM clear processing has been executed.

As already described in the seventy-third embodiment, in the set value update process (FIG. 250(a)), the setting check flag, the setting change flag, and the clear execution flag are cleared to "0" in the second RAM clearing process (step SG108), and then the setting change flag is set to "1." Therefore, only the setting change flag is set to "1" after the setting value updating process is executed. Further, as already described in the seventy-third embodiment, in the first RAM clear process (FIG. 250(b)), the clear execution flag is set to "1" after the setting confirmation flag, the setting change flag, and the clear execution flag are cleared to "0" in the clear execution process (step SG201). Therefore, after the execution of the first RAM clear process, only the clear execution flag is set to "1". On the other hand, after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249) is executed, a state in which the setting confirmation flag and the setting change flag are set to "1" and a state in which the setting confirmation flag and the clear execution flag are set to "1" can occur. Specifically, if the supply of operating power is stopped after the setting change flag is set to "1", and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249) is executed when the next supply of operating power is started, a state in which both the setting confirmation flag and the setting change flag are set to "1" occurs. Further, if the supply of operating power is stopped after the clear execution flag is set to "1" and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249) is executed when the next supply of operating power is started, a state occurs in which both the setting confirmation flag and the clear execution flag are set to "1".

As described above, in the during-switching setting process (FIG. 255) in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step SG601 that the setting confirmation flag is set to "1", only display data for confirmation notification is stored (step SG602) regardless of the states of the setting change flag and the clear execution flag, and the during-switching setting process is terminated. As a result, the number of displays performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is limited to four. By suppressing the number of displays performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and each process (setting confirmation process, set value update process, and first RAM clear process) are prevented from becoming complicated in association with the execution status.

Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 254), if it is determined in step SG502 that the display switching button 68e is not being pressed, the process proceeds to step SG504. In steps SG504 to SG508, the same processes as steps 9003 to S9007 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed. Specifically, when the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SG504: YES), the display data for displaying that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the display data indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step SG505). As a result, a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . Further, when the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SG506: YES), the display data for displaying the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the display data for displaying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step SG507). As a result, a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the current setting value are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 . Furthermore, when neither the setting update display flag nor the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SG504: NO, step SG506: NO), setting processing to the fifth display data buffer in normal mode is executed (step SG508).

If the process of step SG503, the process of step SG505, the process of step SG507, or the process of step SG508 has been executed, other processes are executed (step SG509), and the second timer interrupt process ends. In other processes, the same processes as steps S9008 to S914 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed.

As described above, by pressing the display switching button 68e, information that enables confirmation of the execution status of the setting confirmation process, the setting value update process, and the first RAM clear process can be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 over the period in which the pressing operation is continued. The manager of the game hall opens the game machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 after business hours, presses the display switching button 68e, and confirms the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, thereby grasping the execution status of the setting confirmation process, the setting value update process, and the first RAM clear process. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the setting confirmation process, the setting value update process, and the first RAM clear process were illegally performed during the business hours of the day. Further, the manager of the game hall can clear the setting confirmation flag, the setting update flag and the clear execution flag to "0" by performing the closing operation of the game machine main body 12 thereafter. As a result, the next business hours can be started with the setting confirmation flag, the setting update flag, and the clear execution flag being cleared to "0".

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

By pressing the display switching button 68e to switch the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to grasp the execution status of the setting confirmation process, the set value update process and the first RAM clear process. Compared to a configuration in which a dedicated notification device for notifying the execution status of these processes is provided, the area occupied by the configuration capable of grasping the execution status of these processes in the main control board 61 can be omitted.

When the setting confirmation process (Fig. 249) is executed and the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed, the setting confirmation flag is set to "1", and when the setting value update process (Fig. 250(a)) is executed and the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the setting change flag is set to "1". Also, when the clear execution process (step SG202) is executed in the first RAM clear process (FIG. 250(b)) and the main RAM 65 is cleared, the clear execution flag is set to "1" thereafter. Triggers for clearing the setting confirmation flag, the setting update flag, and the clear execution flag to "0" are limited to when the closing operation of the game machine body 12 is detected, when the clear execution process is executed in the first RAM clear process, and when the second RAM clear process is executed. Even if the operation power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is illegally stopped and resumed by a person who illegally checks the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 without opening the game machine body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10, illegally changes the setting values, or illegally clears the main side RAM 65, if the closing operation of the game machine body 12 is not performed, "1" is set in any of the setting confirmation flag, the setting change flag, and the clear execution flag. It is possible to continue the existing state. As a result, the possibility of overlooking the illegal act of confirming the set values of the pachinko machine 10, the act of changing the set values, and the act of illegally clearing the main side RAM 65, which are performed without opening the game machine body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10, is reduced.

If the first operation of the display switching button 68E is detected instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, the setting confirmation processing processing (FIG. 249), the set value update process (Fig. 249), and the first RAM clear process (Figure 250 (B)). The configuration may end the display when the display of information about the situation is started and the second operation of the displayed button 68E is detected. Further, when the operation of the display switching button 68e is detected, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may start displaying information regarding the execution status of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249), the setting value update process (FIG. 250(a)), and the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 250(b)), and the display may end when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display.

Further, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, when the combination of the setting confirmation flag and the setting change flag is set to "1", and when the combination of the setting confirmation flag and the clear execution flag is set to "1", the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to perform a display different from the case where only the setting confirmation flag is set to "1". Specifically, when "1" is set for the setting confirmation flag and the setting change flag, display data for confirmation notification and display data for change notification are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the setting process during switching (FIG. 255). Further, when "1" is set to the setting confirmation flag and the clear execution flag, the display data for confirmation notification and the display data for clear notification are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the setting process during switching (FIG. 255). In this configuration, the display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is switched each time the display switching button 68e is operated. Specifically, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, when the display switching button 68e is operated for the first time in a state where the confirmation notification display data and the change notification display data are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275, "---1" corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 249) is performed, and when the display switching button 68e is operated for the second time, the setting change processing (FIG. 250 ( A display of "---2" corresponding to the execution of a)) is performed. In addition, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, when the display switching button 68e is operated for the first time in a state where the confirmation notification display data and the clear notification display data are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275, "---1" corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 249) is performed, and when the display switching button 68e is operated for the second time, the first RAM clear processing (FIG. 250 ( A display of "---3" corresponding to the execution of b)) is performed. In this way, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to switch the display corresponding to the combination of two flags set to "1" among the setting confirmation flag, the setting change flag, and the clear execution flag, so that it is possible to grasp the detailed execution status of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249), the setting value change process (FIG. 250(a)), and the first RAM clear process (FIG. 250(b)).

Further, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the configuration may be such that "1" is displayed on the notification display devices 202 to 204 corresponding to the processing executed among the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 249), the setting value change processing (FIG. 250(a)) and the first RAM clear processing (FIG. 250(b)), and "-" is displayed on the remaining notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, when display data for confirmation notification is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275, "1" is displayed only in the rightmost fourth notification display device 204 corresponding to execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249), and "-" is displayed in the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203. Further, when display data for change notification is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275, only the third notification display device 203 second from the right corresponding to the execution of the set value update process (FIG. 250(a)) displays "1", and "-" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the second notification display device 202, and the fourth notification display device 204. Furthermore, when display data for clear notification is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275, "1" is displayed only in the second notification display device 202 corresponding to the execution of the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 250(b)), and "-" is displayed in the first notification display device 201, the third notification display device 203, and the fourth notification display device 204. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the type of processing executed in association with the type of the notification display devices 202 to 204 displaying "1". Further, in this configuration, when "1" is set in the setting confirmation flag and the setting change flag, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249) and the third notification display device 203 corresponding to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 250(a)), and "-" is displayed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. may be configured. Furthermore, when "1" is set to the setting confirmation flag and the clear execution flag, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249) and the second notification display device 202 corresponding to the execution of the first RAM clearing process (FIG. 250(b)), and "-" is displayed on the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203. Good. With these configurations, it is possible to grasp the detailed execution status of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 249), the setting value change process (FIG. 250(a)), and the first RAM clear process (FIG. 250(b)).

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs per unit game round is calculated as a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode, but in addition or instead of this, the result of dividing the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA may be calculated. In addition to or instead of this, a configuration may be employed in which the result obtained by dividing the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode by the total number of balls entering the first operating opening 33 and the number of entering balls entering the second operating opening 34 is calculated. Also, this configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-fourth embodiments.

(2) In the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments, the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode and the number of occurrences of the opening and closing execution mode per unit game time is calculated as a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode. In addition to or instead of this, it may be configured to calculate the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. In addition to or instead of this, a configuration may be adopted in which the result obtained by dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of balls entering the first operating port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is calculated. Also, this configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-fourth embodiments.

(3) As a game result that triggers the opening/closing execution mode, not only the big win result but also the small win result may be present. Although the opening/closing execution mode is generated when a small winning result is obtained, the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode are not changed before and after the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, the open/close execution mode resulting in a small hit may be configured to be a low-frequency winning mode. In this case, when a big winning result occurs, history information corresponding to the occurrence of the big winning result is stored in the history memory 117, and when a small winning result occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the small winning result may be stored in the history memory 117.例文帳に追加Further, in this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 may be used to calculate a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the big winning results and a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the small winning results. Also, this configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-fourth embodiments.

Further, the configuration may be such that the probability of winning a small winning result changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, or may be such a configuration that it does not change. In the case of a configuration in which the probability of winning the small winning result changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the configuration may be such that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the small winning result, or the higher the set value, the lower the probability of winning the small winning result.

In addition, in a configuration in which a small winning result exists, the hold information acquired when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 and the holding information acquired when a game ball enters the second operating port 34 are configured so that the distribution ratio of the type of the big winning result in the case of a big win result is different, and when aiming for the ball entering the first operating port 33, the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the area on the left side of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. When the ball is aimed to enter the second operating port 34, the shooting operation may be performed so that the game ball flows down in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA, and further, a small winning result may be generated based on the hold information acquired when the game ball enters the first operating port 33.

In this configuration, the following 51st parameter may be present as a result of managing the game history. A normal period is defined as the sum of the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result based on the ball entering the first operating port 33 and the execution period of the low-frequency support mode instead of the opening/closing execution mode. The number of balls entering the outlet 24a during the normal period is defined as the number of balls entering K51, the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 during the normal period is defined as the number of balls entering K52, the number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 during the normal period is defined as the number of balls entering K53, the number of balls entering the first operating hole 33 during the normal period is defined as the number of balls entering K54, and the number of balls entering the second operating hole 34 during the normal period is defined as the number of balls entering K55.
51st parameter: Total number of game balls paid out during the normal period (K52 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K53 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K54 x "number of winning balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K55 x "number of winning balls for winning to second operation opening 34") / total number of game balls discharged from game area PA during normal period ( Ratio of K51+K52+K53+K54+K55) In the configuration where the 51st parameter is calculated, if the winning probability of the small winning result varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter will vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used for calculating the 51st parameter is deleted when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. On the other hand, when the winning probability of the small winning result does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used for calculating the 51st parameter is not erased even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

(4) In the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the type of jackpot result, the history information corresponding to the type of jackpot result may be stored in the history memory 117. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency is calculated for each type of jackpot result. Also, this configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-fourth embodiments.

(5) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters and 41st to 42nd parameters) are periodically calculated. Various parameters may be calculated when the supply of operating power to is stopped, and various parameters may be calculated when the number of times the game is executed reaches the calculation trigger number (for example, 1000 times). In this case, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0" at the timing when various parameters are calculated. Also, this configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-fourth embodiments.

(6) In the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters are all calculated at each calculation timing of various parameters. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only some of the various parameters are subjected to calculation at one calculation timing, and the parameter group to be calculated may be sequentially changed at each calculation timing. For example, the 1st to 8th parameters are calculated at one calculation timing, the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, the 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, and thereafter, the change of the calculation target in the above order is repeated at each calculation timing. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating the parameters at one calculation timing. Also, this configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-fourth embodiments.

(7) In the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments, various parameters may be calculated using history information in the history memory 117 on condition that a game is being played. For example, the configuration may be such that calculation of various parameters is executed on the condition that game balls are supplied to the game area PA. As a result, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being wastefully repeated even though the game is not being played. Also, this configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-fourth embodiments.

(8) In the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the management IC 66 is provided separately from the main side CPU 63, and the main side CPU 63 may perform the function of the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence information is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. Alternatively, the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be provided separately from the main RAM 65, or the main RAM 65 may have the functions of the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171. In a configuration in which the functions of the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are performed in the main RAM 65, when the main RAM 65 is cleared (steps S105 and S117), part or all of the areas corresponding to the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be cleared to "0". and the separate storage memory 171 may be excluded from being cleared to "0" and cleared to "0" when the corresponding clear conditions in the above embodiments are satisfied. In the main RAM 65, the manual operation for executing the clear process may differ between the areas corresponding to the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 and the other areas. Alternatively, the function of the management IC 66 may be implemented by the sound emission control device 81 .

(9) In the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information in the history memory 117 is stored without being deleted, while various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 may be deleted. This makes it possible to prevent notification of various parameters calculated before the setting is performed after the setting state is newly set. Also, this configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-fourth embodiments.

(10) In the above-described third to fifth embodiments, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set (that is, even if the setting value update processing is executed by the main side CPU 63), the clearing processing of the history memory 117 may not be executed when the setting value is not changed before and after the setting. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even though the set values have not been changed.

In this configuration, the area for storing the set values in the main RAM 65 is configured to be excluded from "0" clear even if the clear processing (step S117) is executed, so that the main CPU 63 can specify whether or not the set values have been changed before and after the set value update processing (step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the setting value is not changed, the management side CPU 112 outputs a signal so that the setting update recognition process is not executed, and when the main side CPU 63 specifies that the setting value is changed, the management side CPU 112 outputs a signal so that the setting update recognition process is executed.

Further, when a signal indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is received from the main side CPU 63, the management side CPU 112 may refer to the history information stored in the history memory 117 to specify whether or not the setting value has been changed. In this case, when the management side CPU 112 specifies that the setting value is not changed, the clearing process of the history memory 117 is not executed, and when the management side CPU 112 specifies that the setting value is changed, the clearing process of the history memory 117 can be executed.

(11) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set (that is, even if the setting value update processing is executed by the main side CPU 63), if the setting value is not changed before and after the setting, the arithmetic processing of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the setting state may be configured not to be executed. This makes it possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated with a new setting of the setting state as a trigger even though the setting value has not been changed.

In this configuration, the area for storing the setting value in the main RAM 65 is configured to be excluded from the target of "0" clearing even if the all clearing process (step S117) is executed, so that the main side CPU 63 can specify whether the setting value has been changed before and after the setting value update process (step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the setting value is not changed, the management side CPU 112 outputs a signal so that the setting update recognition process is not executed, and when the main side CPU 63 specifies that the setting value is changed, the management side CPU 112 outputs a signal so that the setting update recognition process is executed.

Further, when a signal indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is received from the main side CPU 63, the management side CPU 112 may refer to the history information stored in the history memory 117 to specify whether or not the setting value has been changed. In this case, when the management side CPU 112 specifies that the setting value is not changed, the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state is prevented from being executed, and when the management side CPU 112 specifies that the setting value is changed, the calculation of the various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state can be executed.

(12) In the third to fifth embodiments, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters are not calculated in various calculation processes (step S1807) at that time, but various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 at that time are stored in the areas to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171. ” may be configured to clear. In this case, since it is not necessary to calculate various parameters under the condition that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to quickly complete the storage of various parameters in the separate storage memory 171.例文帳に追加

(13) In the third to fifth embodiments, the contents of various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 may be configured to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c or other display devices by performing a predetermined display start operation. The predetermined display start operation may be performed by operating a dedicated operation unit, or may be performed by performing a predetermined dedicated operation on an operation unit for performing other operations. This makes it possible to easily check various parameters stored in the separate storage memory 171 .

(14) All of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are configured to store the history information (or the ball entry history), but it is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning prize port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 may be configured to store the history information. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, or only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. Even in this case, it is possible to ascertain the manner in which game balls enter the ball-entering portion for which the history information is stored during a predetermined period.

(15) The signal paths 118a to 118c for transmitting the information corresponding to the game ball entry result are set in association with the first prize entry detection sensor 42a, the second prize entry detection sensor 43a, and the third prize entry detection sensor 44a, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may be transmitted as one type of information. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 .

(16) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, there is no need to execute processing for making the management IC 66 recognize the correspondence information, so the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

(17) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the main CPU 63 transmits to the management IC 66 the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o at the start of supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is stored and held in the correspondence memory 116 even if the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

(18) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the respective buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the information on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. A dedicated signal path for transmission from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 may be provided. Thereby, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 by the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(19) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 based on history information may be transmitted to the main side CPU 63 . In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means so as to perform notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters, or may be configured so that the main CPU 63 transmits commands corresponding to the received contents of the various parameters to the sound emission control device 81 so that the notification corresponding to the contents of the various parameters is executed using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54.

(20) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the first to fourteenth embodiments, various parameters may be calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the contents of the calculated various parameters may be notified using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the like. In this case, it is possible to check whether or not the game ball entry state in the game area PA was normal on the business day immediately before the opening of the game hall. Also, this configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-fourth embodiments.

(21) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, if various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 may not be allowed to start the game until the prohibition release operation is performed. The configuration that prevents the game from starting may be, for example, a configuration in which the shooting of the game ball is prohibited, a configuration in which the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are disabled, or a configuration in which even if a prize is won in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34, the winning/failure determination process is not executed. Further, the prohibition release operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the reset button 68c is pressed, or an operation of an operation means that becomes operable when the game machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played in a state where the game ball enters the game area PA in an abnormal manner. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being played in a situation where the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is abnormal. Also, this configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-fourth embodiments.

(22) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, history information corresponding to the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, but the calculation of various parameters using the history information may be configured such that neither the main CPU 63 nor the management CPU 112 executes. In this case, the history information may be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and various parameters may be calculated using the read history information by the operator of the reading work, or the external device may calculate various parameters using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced. Also, this configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-fourth embodiments.

(23) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 is provided with a power supply separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 may be configured to be capable of calculating various parameters using history information and outputting information on the history information or various parameters. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device.

(24) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the reading terminal 68d used for reading the program from the main ROM 64 is configured to be used as a terminal for reading the history information or various parameters in the external device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the external device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 68d for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminals used for reading the history information or various parameters may be provided on the MPU 62 or may be provided at a position different from the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 .

(25) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 are not limited to the configuration in which they are provided as non-volatile storage means such as flash memory. may also be configured to store and hold information. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for the memory, or backup power may be supplied to the memory from a power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65.

(26) In the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 is not limited to the configuration in which the management side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU, and the history information storage processing and the arithmetic processing of various parameters are executed based on the programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113. A hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. Further, for example, in the sixth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main side CPU 63, the value of the counter corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is incremented by 1. In addition, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that point in time when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment. Further, when an external output opportunity to the reading terminal 68d occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters which are the calculation results and also outputs the history information.

(27) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate substrates, or may be provided as separate control devices.

(28) While the number of game balls entered into the out port 24a is counted, history information including RTC information may be stored with respect to the entry of the game balls into the special opportunity ball entry portion that triggers the payout of the game balls and the winning/failure determination process, such as the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball entry part with respect to the total number of discharged game balls while making it possible to extract the entry history of game balls to the privilege opportunity ball entry part.

(29) A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined event that triggers storage of history information includes events other than those in the above embodiments. For example, at least one of the time when the lower tray 56a became full, the timing when the full state started, and the timing when the full state was canceled may be stored as history information, or at least one of the time when the tank 75 became empty, the timing when the empty ball state started, and the timing when the empty ball state was canceled may be stored as history information. At least one of the released timings may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(30) In the above-described first embodiment, it is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. In the above-described first embodiment, the fact that the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the set value update signal is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66. However, it is not limited to this, and the fact that the fifteenth buffer 122o corresponds to the set value update signal may also be recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting a type identification command from the main side CPU 63. In this case, there is no need to set in advance in the management IC 66 the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p.

(31) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 may transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(32) The display device for displaying the set value being updated in the set value update process is not limited to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and may be the pattern display device 41 or a dedicated display device. Further, the display device for displaying the set values in the setting confirmation process is not limited to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and may be the pattern display device 41 or a dedicated display device.

(33) The operation unit operated to update the setting values in the setting value update process is not limited to the update button 68b, and may be the reset button 68c. Further, positions corresponding to "setting 1" to "setting 6" are set as rotation operation positions when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and rotated, and a setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the setting key insertion portion 68a may be set. Further, the setting key insertion portion 68a may be configured to be further rotated than the ON position, and each time the rotation operation is performed beyond the ON position, the setting value in the process of updating is updated to the next setting value.

(34) In the above-described first to tenth and fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are arranged side by side, but they may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction, may be arranged diagonally, or may be arranged in two stages vertically. Further, in the 11th to 14th and 22nd to 63rd embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side, but they may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction, may be arranged diagonally, or may be arranged in two stages vertically. Further, in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be used as the display devices for displaying the management results of the game history.

(35) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, history information used for calculating parameters whose normal values vary according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as variable history information) and history information used for calculating parameters whose normal values do not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as non-variable history information) may be stored in different areas in the history memory 117. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the area storing the history information to be changed in the history memory 117 is cleared to "0", while the area storing the history information to be not changed in the history memory 117 may not be cleared to "0". As a result, it is possible to accurately calculate the parameters whose normal values vary according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 even after the setting values are changed, and to improve the accuracy of the calculation of the parameters whose normal values do not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Also, this configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-fourth embodiments.

(36) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may not be specified in the main RAM 65 in advance. Even in this case, the areas corresponding to these stack areas 222 and 224 are designated in the main side RAM 65 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, but when the storage processing of the information that designates the area is executed exceeding the storage capacity of the area, the information that is not originally intended is written in the area that is not originally intended, so the main side RAM 65 may be cleared to "0".

(37) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, when the main RAM 65 is cleared (steps S105 and S117), the specific control work area 221 and specific control stack area 222 are cleared to "0", but the non-specific control work area 223 and non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to "0". In S117), not only the specific control work area 221 and specific control stack area 222 but also the non-specific control work area 223 and non-specific control stack area 224 may be cleared to "0". In the clearing process of the main RAM 65 (steps S105 and S117), not only the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 but also the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232 and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to "0", but the operation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0". In this case, the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 can be protected.

(38) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, the operation for clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" may be different from the operation for clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0". For example, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0", and when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating the update button 68b, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to selectively erase each piece of information. Further, in this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating both the update button 68b and the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may all be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to improve the workability when collectively erasing the information in the areas 221 to 224 in the configuration that enables selective erasing as described above.

(39) In the fifteenth to eighteenth and twentieth embodiments, as in the nineteenth embodiment, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 may be saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control when starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control, and the saved information may be returned to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. Thereby, even if the information of the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 can be changed when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the state of the stack pointer of the main side CPU 63 can be restored to the state before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is finished.

(40) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, as processing corresponding to non-specific control, processing for collecting game history information, processing for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and processing for notifying the calculation result are executed. In addition to or in place of the processing for collecting game history information, the processing for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and the processing for notifying the calculation results, processing other than these processing may be executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control. For example, at least one of fraud monitoring and notification of monitoring results may be configured to be executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control.

(41) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, when returning to processing corresponding to specific control from a state in which processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed by the main CPU 63, none of the flag register, stack pointer, and various registers of the main CPU 63 are saved in the main RAM 65. At least part of the information of the stack pointer and various registers may be saved in the main side RAM 65, and the saved information may be returned to the corresponding storage area of the main side CPU 63 when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is restarted. As a result, it is possible to carry over and use the information of the main CPU 63 that is used in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

(42) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, various parameters are calculated when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area reaches 6000. However, the total number of game balls which triggers the calculation may be more or less than 6000. For example, when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area reaches 60000, various parameters may be calculated. In this case, the storage capacity required to store the game history information increases. However, by adopting a configuration in which the game history information is stored in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62 as in the twenty-first embodiment, it is possible to flexibly cope with the increase in the storage capacity.

(43) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated as the game history management results. In addition to or instead of this, at least a part of the 31st, 41st and 42nd parameters in the first embodiment may be calculated.

(44) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0".

Further, when the processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, not only the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control but also the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232 and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to "0", but the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0". In this case, the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 can be protected.

Further, when a process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0", but the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". In this case, it is possible to protect the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Further, in the case of having the configuration of (43) above, when the process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, although the history information for calculating the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter and the 42nd parameter in the first embodiment is erased, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are erased. It may be configured not to be cleared to "0".

(45) In the first to seventy-fourth embodiments, instead of using the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA to calculate various parameters, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA may be used. In this case, for example, a detection sensor may be provided to detect game balls that have been shot from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and have reached the game area PA, and the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA may be measured based on the detection result of the detection sensor. In this configuration, since it is not necessary to count the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 24a, the outlet detection sensor 48a may not be provided.

(46) In the fifteenth to seventy-fourth embodiments, at least part of the information of the various registers and the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 may be saved in the stack area 222 for specific control or the stack area 224 for non-specific control by a load instruction. In this case, it is necessary to update the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when saving the information to the stack areas 222 and 224 . Also, the information saved in the stack areas 222 and 224 may be returned to the corresponding storage area of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction. In this case also, it is necessary to update the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when returning the information from the stack areas 222 and 224 .

(47) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the set value update process is executed, the notification corresponding to it may be performed by any one of the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. As a result, the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp that the set value update process is being executed.

(48) In each of the above-described embodiments, the main RAM 65 may be configured to store a history of newly set values. A RAM provided in the sound emission control device 81 may store a history of new setting values. In this case, every time the setting value updating process is completed, a command including the information of the setting value set in the setting value updating process is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81, and the sound emission control device 81 accumulatively stores the information indicating that the setting value is newly set and the information indicating the setting value at that time in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 every time the command is received. In this configuration, the pattern display device 41 may display the setting history of the set values cumulatively stored in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 when a predetermined operation is performed.

(49) In each of the above-described embodiments, the information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out stored in the payout control device 77 is not deleted when the set value is newly set in the setting value updating process. Alternatively, the information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out may be deleted. Further, the information indicating the number of game balls scheduled to be put out is not deleted when the set value is not changed although the set value updating process is executed, and the information indicating the number of game balls scheduled to be put out is deleted when the set value is changed.

(50) In each of the above-described embodiments, if the set value is not changed although the set value update process is executed, the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 are not cleared to "0", and if the set value is changed, at least a part of the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 may be cleared to "0". For example, when the set value is changed, the area other than the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control may be cleared to "0".

(51) In the twenty-second to seventy-fourth embodiments, even when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 87) is being executed by the main CPU 63, the movement of the movable object related to the profit of the game may be continued. For example, in a configuration in which a ball entering means that can enter a ball in an open/close execution mode is provided with a V zone and a non-V zone, and a distribution member for allocating a game ball that has entered the ball entering means to either the V zone or the non-V zone, the operation of the distribution member may be continued even in a situation where a process for confirming a set value is being executed in a setting confirmation process. In this case, even if an attempt is made to illegally cause a situation in which a process for confirming the set value is executed in the setting confirmation process to stop the operation of the sorting member, it is possible to make it impossible. In addition to the above sorting member, a sorting member that sorts a game ball into either an advantageous hole that causes a round game to occur after the game ball enters the ball-entering means or a discharge hole that discharges the game ball that entered the ball-entering means without entering the advantageous hole is conceivable as a movable object that continues to operate even in a situation where the process for confirming the set value is executed in the setting confirmation process.

(52) In the twenty-second to seventy-fourth embodiments, at least one of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may not be monitored for information abnormality. In this case, even if it is specified that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0", thereby preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0" based on the occurrence of information abnormality.

(53) In the twenty-second to seventy-fourth embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the monitoring of whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is all executed in a process corresponding to non-specific control. Further, the processing for clearing the areas 221 to 224 to "0" when an information abnormality occurs may be configured to be executed by the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

(54) In each of the above-described embodiments, the main RAM 65 requires power supply to store and hold information, and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

(55) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the various clearing processes of the main RAM 65, instead of executing the process of clearing to "0" and the process of initializing the target area of the main RAM 65, the target area may be initialized by executing the process of initializing without executing the process of clearing to "0".

(56) In each of the above-described embodiments, if the setting key insertion unit 68a is ON when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the setting value update process may be executed without any other operation. Further, instead of the setting key inserting portion 68a which is turned ON/OFF by the setting key, a setting switch which is directly turned ON/OFF by hand may be provided. Further, when the setting key inserting portion 68a is not provided and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting value update process may be executed without any other operation. In this case, a configuration may be employed in which a cover member is provided so as to be switchable between a closed state covering the reset button 68c and an open state in which it is not covered, or a configuration provided with a locking device for locking the cover member in the closed position.

(57) In the setting value update process, if the setting key insertion unit 68a is kept in the OFF position for a predetermined period of time, the setting value being selected may be confirmed and the setting value update process may be terminated. Further, when the end reference period (for example, 5 minutes) has passed since the setting value update process was started, the setting value being selected may be automatically determined and the setting value update process may be terminated. Further, in the setting value update process, when the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is long-pressed for an end reference period (for example, 10 seconds), the setting value being selected may be confirmed and the setting value update process may be terminated.

(58) In a configuration in which the setting key insertion portion 68a can be turned further beyond the ON position, and the set value being updated is updated to the next set value each time the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned beyond the ON position, when the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned to the ON position and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the setting confirmation process is started to enable confirmation of the setting value, and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned to the OFF position. A configuration in which the confirmation process is terminated may be employed. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the setting value is started, and the setting confirmation process is terminated when the pressing operation of the button is released. Further, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly turned ON/OFF by hand is provided instead of the setting key insertion portion 68a that is turned ON/OFF by a setting key, a setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of a setting value may be started when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state in which the setting switch is turned ON, and the setting confirmation process may be terminated when the setting switch is turned OFF or turned ON after the OFF operation. Further, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly turned ON/OFF by hand is provided instead of the setting key insertion portion 68a that is turned ON/OFF by the setting key, the setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the setting value may be started when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started in a state where the setting switch is turned ON, and the setting confirmation process may be terminated when the reset button 68c is pressed.

(59) When the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is executed in each of the above embodiments, an image corresponding to the procedure may be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and a sound corresponding to the procedure may be output from the speaker unit 54 to assist the process. For example, in the setting value updating process in the thirty-third embodiment, pressing the reset button 68c may notify that the setting value is changed by one level, and turning off the setting key inserting portion 68a may notify that the setting value updating process is terminated. This makes it easier to update the set values. Since the display control of the pattern display device 41 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by the sound emission control device 81, when the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is started, the command corresponding thereto is transmitted from the main side CPU 63, and when the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is ended, the command corresponding to it is transmitted from the main side CPU 63.

(60) In each of the above-described embodiments, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to continue until an operation is performed to end the check display instead of ending when the initial check period has elapsed. As the operation for terminating the process, for example, the reset button 68c may be operated regardless of whether or not either the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is being executed, or an operation unit other than the reset button 68c may be operated. In this case, the check display is continued on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 until it is time to check the base value or set value on the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to check the base value or set value after checking whether the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 are normal. In addition, since the display for check ends based on the operation of the operation unit, it is possible to end the display for check at a desired timing.

(61) Regardless of whether or not the supply of operating power is started in each of the above embodiments, when a predetermined operation unit such as the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is operated, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to start the check display. In this case, it is possible to start the check display at a desired timing when checking the base value or the set value. Further, in this configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, or the check display may be terminated when the predetermined operation unit operated to start the check display or another operation unit is operated.

(62) In each of the above-described embodiments, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68c such as the update button 68b is operated, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be started, and if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started without the specific operation unit being operated, the check display may not be started. In this case, in the configuration in which the check display is performed when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to select whether or not to start the check display by the operation of the manager of the game hall.

(63) In each of the above-described embodiments, instead of displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 regardless of whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the base value may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the gaming machine main body 12 is specified based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 to be in the open state. In this case, when the game machine main body 12 is in an open state, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started first, and then the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to confirm whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal before confirming the base value. Further, in this configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, or the check display may be terminated when the predetermined operation unit operated to start the check display or another operation unit is operated.

(64) In each of the above-described embodiments, if the main processing is started while the conditions for executing the setting confirmation processing are satisfied, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may not be started, and if the main processing is started while the conditions for the setting confirmation processing are not satisfied, the check display may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed when it is confirmed that the setting value is to be checked.

(65) In each of the embodiments described above, if the main processing is started while the conditions for executing the setting value update processing are satisfied, the display for checking of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may not be started, and if the main processing is started while the conditions for executing the setting value updating processing are not satisfied, the display for checking may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed when it is confirmed that the setting value will be updated.

(66) In each of the above-described embodiments, if the main process is started while either the condition for executing the setting confirmation process or the condition for executing the setting value update process is satisfied, the display for checking of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may not be started, and if the main process is started while both the condition for executing the setting confirmation process and the condition for executing the setting value update process are not satisfied, the check display may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed when it is confirmed that the setting value will be confirmed or updated.

(67) In each of the above-described embodiments, the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in the light emitting state in the check display, but the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be in a blinking state. In addition, in the check display, each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 sequentially emits light one by one or a plurality of some of them sequentially, and each display segment 321 to 324 may be in the light emission state at least once within the initial check period.

(68) In each of the above-described embodiments, the processing for performing check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not executed as processing corresponding to specific control, but may be configured to be executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control.

(69) In each of the above embodiments, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be performed by dedicated control means instead of the main CPU 63. It may be configured to be performed by the sound emission control device 81, or may be configured to be performed by the display control device 82. In this case, when the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means which is the main control unit. Further, when the main CPU 63 executes the processing for starting the supply of the operating power, information corresponding to the start of the display for checking is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means, which is the controlling entity, so that the display for checking is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the processing for starting the supply of the operating power is being executed.

(70) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" or the checksum does not match, the game stop flag is set to "1" and the progress of the game is stopped.

(71) In each of the above embodiments, the setting value update process may be executed not only when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, but also when a setting change trigger occurs after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. This makes it possible to eliminate the need to turn off and on the power of the pachinko machine 10 when starting the set value update process.

(72) In each of the above embodiments, the "setting change operation" and the "setting confirmation operation" may be reversed. In other words, it may be configured to specify that the "setting confirmation operation" is being performed when the reset button 68c is being pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is being turned ON, and to specify that the "setting change operation" is being performed when the reset button 68c is not being pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is being turned ON. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the "setting change operation" and the "setting confirmation operation" do not overlap at all.

(73) In each of the above-described embodiments, the setting value update process is started based on the start of supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 while the reset button 68c is being pressed, and in the setting value update process, the setting value to be selected is not changed each time the reset button 68c is pressed.

(74) In the forty-ninth to seventy-fourth embodiments, the second RAM clear processing is executed after the processing of setting the information in the setting update area 342 in the setting reference area 341 in the setting value update processing, that is, the processing of setting the setting values to be used. In this case, the configuration may be such that the second RAM clearing process is executed instead of the initial setting at the start of the set value updating process.

Further, in the set value update process, both the initial setting at the start and the second RAM clear process are not executed, so that even if the set value to be used in the set value update process is set, the clear target area 371 may not be initialized. When this configuration is applied to the fifty-fifth to sixty-third embodiments, the clear target area 371 is initialized when the first RAM clear process is executed by performing the "RAM clear operation", while the clear target area 371 is not initialized when the set value update process is executed. In addition, when the above configuration is applied to the fifty-sixth embodiment, even if the setting value update process is executed, the initial display may be performed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a, and the initial display may be performed. In addition, when the above configuration is applied to the fifty-seventh to fifty-eighth embodiments, even if the set value update process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a may be configured to perform off display, and the off display may not be performed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 59th to 60th embodiments, even if the set value update process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a may be configured to display or hit. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 61st embodiment, even if the set value update process is executed, the lighting lottery process may be performed for each light emitting part of the special figure display unit 37a and each light emitting part of the normal figure display unit 38a. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 62nd to 63rd embodiments, even if the set value update process is executed, the initial display data lottery process (step SD405, step SD410, step SD502) in the display start process (FIGS. 206 and 208) may be executed, and the initial display data lottery process (step SD405, step SD410, step SD502) may not be executed.

(75) In the 49th to 74th embodiments, the display data for displaying the special figure display unit 37a is stored in the main side RAM 65 that requires power supply when storing information. Instead, the display data may be stored in a memory that does not require power supply when storing information and is used for both reading and writing. In this case, the display data stored in the memory may not be erased during the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing, or the clear target area 371 may be initialized and the display data stored in the memory may be erased during the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing. Further, the configuration may be applied to the display data for causing the general pattern display unit 38a to display.

(76) In the fifty-fifth to seventy-first embodiments, a configuration may be applied in which the reserved information on the special figure side acquired due to the occurrence of the winning to the first working opening 33 and the reserved information on the special figure side acquired due to the occurrence of the winning to the second working opening 34 are stored separately, and the reserved information on the second working opening 34 side is preferentially digested. Regardless of whether it is the working port 33 or the second working port 34, a configuration may be applied in which the order of acquisition is digested. Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports may not be vertically arranged side by side, but may be configured such that the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are arranged side by side, or both of these operating ports may be arranged side by side obliquely. Furthermore, both operation openings 33 and 34 may be arranged apart from each other so that only the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 can be aimed at depending on the operation mode of the firing operation device 28. In addition, the profit obtained by the player may be different between the case where the reservation information acquired by the occurrence of the winning to the first operation port 33 is the object of the winning judgment and the case where the holding information acquired by the occurrence of the winning to the second operation port 34 is the object of the winning judgment.

Further, in the above configuration, as the special figure display unit 37a, the first special figure display unit that displays the result of the validity determination of the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34. A second special figure display unit that displays the result of the validity determination of the hold information acquired based on the winning may be provided separately. In this case, prior to the reservation information acquired based on the winning of the first operation port 33 becoming the target of the win-or-fail judgment, or based on the win-or-fail judgment target, the first special figure display unit Starts the fluctuation display of the pattern, displays the stop result corresponding to the win-or-fail judgment, and ends the fluctuation display of one game round. In addition, prior to the reservation information acquired based on the winning of the second operation port 34 becoming the target of the winning judgment or based on the winning judgment, the variation display of the pattern in the second special figure display part is started and the stop result corresponding to the winning judgment is displayed.

In the configuration in which the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit are provided as described above, the configuration of the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a when the supply of the operating power in the 55th to 63rd embodiments is started may be applied to each of the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit, and may be applied to only one of the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit.

In the configuration in which the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit are separately provided as described above, one of the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit may be configured so that the game round with the other one as the target of the variable display of the pattern is not performed when the game round is performed. In addition, a game round in which the first special figure display portion is subjected to the variable display of patterns and a game round in which the second special figure display portion is subjected to the variable display of patterns may be performed in an overlapping manner. In such a configuration in which game rounds can be executed in duplicate, as a result of the game rounds in the second special figure display part, a small winning result in which the number of expected winning prizes of the game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is smaller than in the case of the big winning result is set, and the winning probability of the small winning result is set higher than the big winning result. In this configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped, there is a high possibility that a winning display corresponding to one of the big winning result and the small winning result is performed in the special figure display unit 37a. Therefore, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is preferable to select any one of the first to third loss display data for the special figure and the first to third win display data for the special figure as in the fifty-ninth embodiment.

(77) The configuration of the characteristic display content when the supply of operating power is started in the fifty-fifth to seventy-first embodiments is applied to both the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. For example, the configuration of the characteristic display content when the supply of operating power is started may be configured to be applied only to the special figure display section 37a, or may be configured to be applied only to the normal figure display section 38a.

(78) In the fifty-fifth to seventy-first embodiments, even if the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is not started until the display start flag is set to "1". A configuration in which display is started may be employed. In this case, if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the supply of operating power in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a immediately before the operation power is stopped After the display is started, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are switched to the display corresponding to the execution of the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process.

(79) In the 72nd embodiment and the 73rd embodiment, the configuration that makes it possible to grasp that the setting confirmation process has been executed, that the setting value update process has been executed, and that the first RAM clearing process has been executed is not limited to a configuration in which the confirmation notification light emitting device 511, the change notification light emitting device 512, and the clear notification light emitting device 513 are provided individually. For example, a configuration may be provided in which a single LED of a multicolor emission type that emits blue light when the setting confirmation process is executed, red light when the set value update process is executed, and green light when the first RAM clear process is executed is provided. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration that makes it possible to grasp that the setting confirmation processing has been executed, that the set value update processing has been executed, and that the first RAM clear processing has been executed, and the area occupied by the configuration in the main control board 61 can be reduced. Further, a single segment display having seven display segments may be provided in which "1" is displayed when the setting confirmation process is executed, "2" is displayed when the set value update process is executed, and "3" is displayed when the first RAM clearing process is executed.

(80) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the audio emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60, the display control device 82 may control the audio emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and one of the functions of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are arbitrary.

(81) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, a pachinko machine where a jackpot is generated when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mackerel ball.

Moreover, the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that is provided with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are attached in the circumferential direction, for example, a slot machine that starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and, after the reels are stopped by operating a stop switch or after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, provides a player with a privilege such as payout of medals if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window.

In addition, the present invention can also be applied to a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which a game machine main body that is openably and closably supported by an outer frame is provided with a reservoir and a take-in device, and a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the reservoir are taken in by the take-in device.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, for example, the result of the lottery process executed when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever may be stored as history information, and the actual winning probability of each role may be calculated using the history information. Alternatively, the ratio of the number of staying games in the special game state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by an external device, or the game machine itself may provide notification corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters. In addition, it may be configured such that there are a plurality of setting states such as "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and the probability of winning in the winning lottery process may be changed according to the setting state. In this case, the configuration in each of the above-described embodiments may be applied to the handling of history information, the calculation of various parameters, and the handling of repeated changes when a setting state setting is newly set or a setting value is changed.

(82) The characteristic configurations of the first to seventy-fourth embodiments may be applied to each other in arbitrary combinations. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the thirtieth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the forty-fifth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fifty-fifth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the sixty-fourth embodiment may be combined, or the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the eighth embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the above embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 11th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 33rd embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 43rd embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 58th embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 65th embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 15th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 21st embodiment, and the 29th embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the above 34th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 49th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 60th embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 69th embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration, the characteristic configuration of the fifty-third embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixty-second embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the seventy-first embodiment may be combined. In addition, any combination of the configurations of the different modes may be applied to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to seventy-fourth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (history memory 117);
Information erasing means for erasing at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set (in the third embodiment, the function of executing step S1809 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing step S2109 in the management side CPU 112; in the sixth embodiment, steps S2306 to S2308 in the management side CPU 112). a function of executing processing (a function of executing the processing of step S2608 in the management-side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, at least part of the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is newly set. As a result, it is possible to adjust the contents of the history storage means so that the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed after the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature A2. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination (a function of executing the processing of steps S409 to S412 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that a probability of the award corresponding result in the award determination varies according to the set value.

According to the feature A2, it is possible to change the probability of the award corresponding result according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature A1, it is possible to adjust the contents of the history storage means so that the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed in the situation after the probability of the given correspondence result is changed.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the information erasing means erases all the history information stored in the history storing means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means.

According to feature A3, all the history information stored in the history storage means is erased when the setting value to be used is newly set, so that the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event can be specified based on the timing at which the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the information erasing means erases a part of the history information stored in the history storage means and leaves a part of the history information stored in the history storage means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means.

According to the feature A4, when a setting value to be used is newly set, it is possible to erase history information unnecessary for managing the frequency of occurrence of subsequent predetermined events, and to leave history information necessary for managing the frequency of occurrence of subsequent predetermined events. As a result, it is possible to appropriately manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event after the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature A5. The history information stored in the history storage means includes first history information (history information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has occurred) in which the probability of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the history information varies according to the set value, and second history information (history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA) that does not vary in accordance with the set value.
The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the information erasing means erases the first history information stored in the history storage means and leaves the second history information stored in the history storage means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means.

According to feature A5, when a setting value to be used is newly set, the first history information corresponding to the predetermined event whose occurrence probability varies according to the setting value is deleted, and the second history information corresponding to the predetermined event whose occurrence probability does not vary according to the setting value is not deleted. As a result, if the first history information before the setting value to be used is newly set is taken over after the setting value is newly set, the first history information that is not preferable for specifying the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the first history information can be deleted at the time when the setting value is newly set. On the other hand, since the second history information is not deleted even if the setting value to be used is newly set, it is possible to secure a large number of the second history information to be referred to when specifying the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information.

Feature A6. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination (a function of executing the processing of steps S409 to S412 in the main CPU 63);
A configuration in which the probability of the grant correspondence result in the grant determination varies according to the set value,
The first history information includes information corresponding to the provision of the privilege,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the second history information includes information corresponding to ejection of game balls from the gaming area in a predetermined manner.

According to feature A6, since the probability of awarding a privilege varies according to the setting value, by deleting the first history information when the setting value to be used is newly set, it is possible to specify the frequency of awarding the privilege under the circumstances of the newly set setting value. On the other hand, since the frequency of discharge of game balls from the game area does not vary according to the set value, even if the set value to be used is newly set, the second history information is not erased, so that the frequency of discharge of game balls from the game area in a predetermined mode can be specified with high accuracy.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the information erasing means erases at least a part of the history information when the set value to be used is set by the setting means and when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means.

According to feature A7, if the history storage means does not store a predetermined amount of history information or more, the history information is not deleted even if a new set value to be used is set. This makes it possible to prevent repeated erasure of the history information in the history storage means even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation in which no game is played.

Feature A8. Characteristic features A1 to A7, characterized in that information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to game results for a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means, under at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set (in the third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature A8, in the configuration having the configuration of the feature A1 and at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is newly set, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage means when the setting value to be used is newly set. Thus, even if at least part of the history information is erased with the change of the set value as a trigger, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation before the change of the set value.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the feature A9, when the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage means triggered by the new setting of the set value to be used, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. Thereby, even if the setting value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the mode information storage means can store a plurality of the mode information.

According to feature A10, since a plurality of pieces of mode information can be stored in the mode information storage means, it is possible to grasp the management results of the game history in a plurality of periods based on the timing at which the set value is newly set. In addition, even if new setting of set values is repeated in a situation where a game is not played, it is possible to increase the possibility that the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is actually played remains in the mode information storage means.

Feature A11. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the mode information,
The gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for executing special processing when the setting value to be used by the setting means exceeds the predetermined number of times under predetermined conditions (in the third embodiment, a function for executing repeated change monitoring processing in the management side CPU 112, and in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing repeated change monitoring processing in the main side CPU 63).

According to the feature A11, special processing is executed for a new setting of a set value in a situation in which a game is not played so that the mode information derived by using the history information of the situation in which the game is actually played does not remain in the mode information storage means. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A11, wherein the information derivation means derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means.

According to feature A12, mode information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means, so that mode information can be prevented from being wastefully derived.

Feature A13. The information erasing means does not erase the history information until a specified amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, and erases the history information stored in the history storage means before the setting value is set when the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the characteristic A13, until the specified amount of the predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored before the setting is not deleted. This makes it possible to specify the management result of the game history in the predetermined period even if the setting value is newly set.

Feature A14. The history storage means includes first history storage means (first history memory 191) and second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means is
means for storing the corresponding history information in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means when the predetermined event occurs in a predetermined period from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means until the cancellation condition is satisfied (function for executing the process of step S2604 in the management side CPU 112);
means for storing the corresponding history information in the one of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is set as a storage target when the predetermined event occurs during a period other than the predetermined period (a function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the management side CPU 112);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein, when the cancellation condition is satisfied, the information erasing means erases the history information stored in one of the first history storing means and the second history storing means that has been set as the object of storage until then.

According to the feature A14, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage means, the history information stored before the setting is not erased even if the setting value to be used is newly set. This makes it possible to specify the management result of the game history in the predetermined period even if the setting value is newly set. In addition, it is possible to produce the effect by simply changing the history storage means to store the history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature A15. The gaming machine according to feature A14, further comprising an information deriving means (a function of executing the processing of step S2703 in the management side CPU 112) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game during a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the side set as the storage target out of the first history storing means and the second history storing means.

According to the feature A15, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means by newly setting the setting value, it is possible to appropriately derive the mode information using the history information.

For the configuration of features A1 to A15, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (history memory 117);
with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined history information stored in the history storage means before the setting value to be used is set by the setting means is stored and retained in the history storage means even after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means.

According to the feature B1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage means is stored and held without being erased. Thus, even if the set value to be used is set, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history storage means, and the management result of the game history can be specified by using the history information accumulated in the history storage means over a long period of time.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the history storage execution means includes storage execution means for storing the history information corresponding to the setting value to be used by the setting means in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1307 in the management side CPU 112, and in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2408 in the management side CPU 112).

According to the characteristic B2, in the structure in which the history information is stored and held without being erased even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information corresponding to the fact that the setting value to be used is newly set is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to distinguish between the history information before the new setting of the setting value to be used and the history information after the setting.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the memory execution means at the time of setting causes the history storage means to store information corresponding to the set value as the history information.

According to feature B3, it is possible to specify the content of the setting value that was set in the past by referring to the history information.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the history storage means includes a plurality of correspondence history storage means (history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of setting values that can be set by the setting means.

According to the feature B4, since the correspondence history storage means is provided corresponding to each setting value, it is possible to store the history information separately for each setting value.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to feature B4, further comprising a means (a function of executing the process of step S2406 in the management-side CPU 112) that, when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, stores the corresponding history storage means corresponding to the setting value for which the setting has been performed.

According to the feature B5, when a setting value to be used is newly set, the correspondence history storage means corresponding to the setting value is set as a storage target of subsequent history information, so that the history information can be stored separately for each setting value.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, further comprising an information deriving means (a function of executing display output processing in the management side CPU 112) for deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the correspondence history storage means which is the object of storage.

According to feature B6, in a configuration in which history information is stored separately for each set value, it is possible to derive the mode information corresponding to the currently set set value.

Feature B7. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination (a function of executing the processing of steps S409 to S412 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein a probability of the award correspondence result in the award determination varies according to the set value.

According to the feature B7, it is possible to vary the probability of the award corresponding result in accordance with the set value in a so-called pachinko machine.

In addition, for the configuration of features B1 to B7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (history memory 117);
Post-setting handling means (a function of executing steps S2506 and steps S2605 to S2609 in the management-side CPU 112) that does not erase the history information until at least a specific amount of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. In addition, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, until the specified amount of prescribed history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored before the setting is not erased. This makes it possible to specify the management result of the game history in the predetermined period even if the setting value is newly set.

Feature C2. The post-setting handling means erases the history information stored in the history storage means before the setting value is set when the history information stored in the history storage means exceeds the specific amount after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means.

According to the feature C2, when a specific amount of history information enabling specification of the management result of the game history in a predetermined period after the setting value is newly set is stored in the history storage means, the history information stored in the history storage means before the setting value is newly set is deleted. This makes it possible to prevent useless history information from being continuously stored in the history storage means.

Feature C3. The history storage means includes first history storage means (first history memory 191) and second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means is
means for storing, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the first history storage means and the second history storage means, which is set as a storage object (a function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the management-side CPU 112);
means for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means until the specified amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that are not set as the storage target after the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2604 in the management-side CPU 112);
with
The post-setting handling means includes:
means for changing the storage target between the first history storage means and the second history storage means (a function of executing the process of step S2607 in the management-side CPU 112) when the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is not set as the storage target after the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is performed;
means for deleting the history information of the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that has been set as the storage target until then (a function of executing the processing of step S2608 in the management-side CPU 112), when the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is not set as the storage target after the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is performed;
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic C3, until the specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored before the setting is not erased. This makes it possible to specify the management result of the game history in the predetermined period even if the setting value is newly set. In addition, it is possible to produce the effect by simply changing the history storage means to store the history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C3, further comprising an information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management side CPU 112) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game during a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the side set as the storage target among the first history storing means and the second history storing means.

According to the feature C4, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means by newly setting the setting value, it is possible to appropriately derive the mode information using the history information.

Feature C5. A ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination (a function of executing the processing of steps S409 to S412 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein a probability of the award correspondence result in the award determination varies according to the set value.

According to the feature C5, it is possible to change the probability of the award corresponding result in accordance with the set value in a so-called pachinko machine.

In addition, for the configuration of the features C1 to C5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
special execution means for executing special processing under at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is executed in a special situation (in the third embodiment, a function for executing repeated change monitoring processing in the management side CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing repeated change monitoring processing in the main side CPU 63; in the fifth embodiment, a function for making a negative determination in step S2106 in the management side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature D1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, the special process is executed under at least one condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in a special situation. This makes it possible to deal with the case where the setting values are newly set under unfavorable circumstances.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the special execution means executes the special process under at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed more than a specific number of times in the special situation.

According to feature D2, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is executed in a special situation, if the number of times of execution is less than the specified number of times, special processing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special processing from being executed even when the regular operator performs the new setting of the set value less than a specified number of times in a special situation.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the special execution means executes the special process under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means in a situation in which no game has been played since the setting value to be used by the setting means was set as the special situation or in a situation in which a game exceeding a predetermined standard has not been played since the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means.

According to the feature D3, special processing is executed when a new set value to be used is set in a situation where a game is not played or in a situation where a game is not substantially played.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the special execution means executes notification processing as the special processing.

According to feature D4, the notification process is executed under at least one condition that a new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in a special situation. This makes it possible to prompt the user to deal with the new setting of the setting value under unfavorable circumstances.

Feature D5. History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (history memory 117);
Information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means, under at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set (in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D5, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, when a set value to be used is newly set, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the special execution means prohibits derivation of the mode information by the information derivation means as the special processing under at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is executed in the special situation.

According to the feature D6, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, if the setting is made in an unfavorable situation, the mode information is not derived. This makes it possible to prevent the mode information from being wastefully derived.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D5 or D6, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to the feature D7, when the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage means triggered by the new setting of the set value to be used, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. Thereby, even if the setting value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the mode information storage means can store a plurality of the mode information.

According to the feature D8, it is possible to store a plurality of mode information in the mode information storage means, so that it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods based on the timing at which the setting value is newly set. In addition, even if new setting of set values is repeated in a situation where a game is not played, it is possible to increase the possibility that the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is actually played remains in the mode information storage means.

Feature D9. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the mode information,
The gaming machine according to feature D7 or D8, wherein the special execution means executes the special processing when the set value to be used by the setting means is set more than the predetermined number in the special situation.

According to the feature D9, special processing is executed for a new set value when new setting is repeated under a situation in which the game is not played so that the mode information derived by using the history information of the situation in which the game is actually played does not remain in the mode information storage means. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature D10. A ball entry means (first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the determination that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the determination of granting (a function of executing the processing of steps S409 to S412 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein a probability of the award correspondence result in the award determination varies according to the set value.

According to the feature D10, it is possible to change the probability of the result corresponding to the award according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine.

In addition, for the configuration of features D1 to D10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (history memory 117);
Information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to game results for a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means, under at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means has been set (in the third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, when a set value to be used is newly set, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to the characteristic E2, when the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage means triggered by the new setting of the set value to be used, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. Thereby, even if the setting value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the mode information storage means can store a plurality of the mode information.

According to the feature E3, since a plurality of pieces of mode information can be stored in the mode information storage means, it is possible to grasp the management results of the game history in a plurality of periods based on the timing at which the set value is newly set. In addition, even if new setting of set values is repeated in a situation where a game is not played, it is possible to increase the possibility that the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is actually played remains in the mode information storage means.

Feature E4. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the mode information,
The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for executing special processing when the setting value to be used by the setting means exceeds the predetermined number of times under predetermined conditions (in the third embodiment, a function for executing repeated change monitoring processing in the management side CPU 112, and in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing repeated change monitoring processing in the main side CPU 63).

According to the characteristic E4, special processing is executed for a new setting of a set value in a situation in which a game is not played so that the mode information derived by using the history information of the situation in which the game is actually played does not remain in the mode information storage means. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics E1 to E4, wherein the information derivation means derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means.

According to feature E5, mode information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means, so that mode information can be prevented from being wastefully derived.

Feature E6. A ball entry means (first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the determination that the special information corresponds to the granting information in the determination of granting (a function of executing the processing of steps S409 to S412 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein a probability of the award correspondence result in the award determination varies according to the set value.

According to the characteristic E6, it is possible to change the probability of the result corresponding to the award according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine.

For the configuration of features E1 to E6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, and the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a plate storing part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storing part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area according to the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. A ball entry means (first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S401 in the main side CPU 63);
Attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to attachment information (function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination (a function of executing the processing of steps S409 to S412 in the main CPU 63);
setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
with
The provision determination means has a high probability mode and a low probability mode as modes of the provision determination so that the probability of the provision correspondence result is relatively high and low,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of the award corresponding result varies at least in the low-probability mode according to the set value.

According to the feature F1, it is possible to vary the probability of a given corresponding result at least in the low-probability mode according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine. As a result, even in a single gaming machine, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of the award corresponding result is advantageous or disadvantageous in the low-probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein in the high probability mode, the probability of obtaining the award correspondence result does not vary according to the set value.

According to the feature F2, the probability of giving a corresponding result in the low-probability mode is varied according to the set value, while the probability of giving a corresponding result in the high-probability mode is not changed according to the set value. By doing so, it is possible to limit the influence of the set value to the situation in the low-probability mode.

Feature F3. There are multiple types of benefits,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the mode of selection of the privilege does not change according to the set value.

According to the feature F3, while the probability of giving corresponding results in the low-probability mode is varied according to the set value, the selection mode of the privilege is not varied according to the set value, so that the influence of the set value can be limited to the situation in the low-probability mode.

For the configuration of features F1 to F3, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group F, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a plate storing part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storing part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area according to the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (history memory 117);
information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1402 and S1412 in the management side CPU 112; in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112);
A first information display control means (a function of executing display processing in the management side CPU 112) that controls the display of the information display means (first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments) so that a display corresponding to the mode information derived by the information derivation means is performed;
Second information display control means for controlling the display of the information display means so as to display information different from the mode information (in the first to tenth embodiments, the function of executing steps S202 and S208 in the main CPU 63; in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing steps S3101, S3103, and S3109 in the main CPU 63; in the twelfth embodiment, step S3 in the main CPU 63 201, a function of executing the processes of steps S3202, S3204 and S3210, a function of executing an abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G1, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game during the predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to other information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein a period during which the information display means displays corresponding to the mode information is distinguished from a period during which the information display means displays corresponding to the different information.

According to the feature G2, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed in the information display means by grasping the status of display in the information display means.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, wherein the second information display control means performs display control of the information display means so as to display a display mode different from a display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, so that the display corresponding to the different information is performed.

According to the feature G3, by grasping the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is being performed in the information display means.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G3, characterized in that a plurality of individual information display means (first to third information display devices 69a to 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, and first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments) are provided as the information display means, each of which can perform a plurality of types of display.

According to the feature G4, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information by using a plurality of individual information display means to display corresponding to the mode information. In addition, the existence of a plurality of individual information display means makes it possible to make the display mode significantly different between the case where the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and the case where the display corresponding to the different information is performed.

Feature G5. When the second information display control means performs display corresponding to the different information, predetermined individual information display means (the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 201, the second notification display device 202 and the third notification in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) that does not enter a non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information among the plurality of individual information display means is performed. The gaming machine according to feature G4, wherein the display device 203 for information, and the first display device 201 for information and the second display device 202 for information in the thirteenth embodiment) are put into a non-display state.

According to feature G5, the predetermined individual information display means, which is not in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. Thus, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is being performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state.

Feature G6. When the second information display control means performs display corresponding to the different information, the specific individual information display means (the third information display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth information display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the third information display device 203 and the fourth information display device 204 in the thirteenth embodiment), which is in a display state when the mode information is displayed among the plurality of the individual information display means, is displayed. and
The gaming machine according to feature G5, wherein the display contents of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the different information is performed can be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed.

According to the feature G6, the display contents that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed in the specific individual information display means can also be displayed when the display corresponding to the other information is performed, so that the display contents when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed are not restricted. In addition, even if the specific individual information display means has a configuration that can display the same display content, the predetermined individual information display means that has the configuration of feature G5 and does not enter a non-display state when display corresponding to the mode information is performed becomes non-display state when display corresponding to another information is performed.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, wherein the first information display control means brings each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when performing display corresponding to the mode information.

According to the feature G7, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, so it is possible to clearly distinguish it from the case where the display corresponding to the other information is performed in which the predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state.

Feature G8. The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G7, wherein the first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information on the information display means, and prevents the predetermined individual information display means from being maintained in a non-display state even when changing the display of the mode information.

According to the feature G8, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. This makes it possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed in the plurality of individual information display means regardless of the timing of confirming the plurality of individual information display means.

Feature G9. The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G8, wherein the second information display control means causes one specific individual information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, and the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) to perform display corresponding to the different information, and causes the remaining individual information display means to be in a non-display state.

According to the characteristic G9, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, only one individual information display means is in the display state, so that it becomes easy to grasp whether the display corresponding to the different information is performed.

Feature G10. The plurality of individual information display means are arranged in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to feature G9, wherein the specific individual information display means is present at an end in the predetermined direction among the plurality of individual information display means arranged in the predetermined direction.

According to the characteristic G10, since one individual information display means for displaying corresponding to different information is present at an end in a predetermined direction, it becomes easy to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to different information is being performed.

Feature G11. The first information display control means causes the individual information display means (the first notification display device 69a in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments), which is a part of the plurality of individual information display means, to perform display corresponding to the type of the mode information to be displayed, and the individual information display means to be displayed as a result display means (the second display device). In the 1st to 10th embodiments, the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c, and in the 11th to 14th embodiments, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) are displayed.
The game machine according to any one of features G5 to G10, wherein the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to the individual information display means for the type display target.

According to the characteristic G11, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the display corresponding to the type of the mode information to be displayed is performed in the individual information display means for type display, and the display corresponding to the contents of the mode information to be displayed is performed in the individual information display means for result display. This makes it easier to grasp the mode information to be displayed. In this case, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the individual information display means for the type display object is in the non-display state, so that the state in which the type display is not displayed corresponds to the different information, and it is easy to grasp that the different information is displayed.

Feature G12. The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting parts (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and a combination of unit light emitting parts that are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting parts is configured to perform a predetermined display,
The 2nd information display control means is that the display corresponding to the separate information is performed so that the light emitting portion, which is considered to be the light emitting state, is led to the light emitting state of the multiple unit emission portions above, and the unrealized combination of the unit emitting portion in which the luminous portion is emitted when the display corresponds to the separate information is performed. A feature that is characterized by the fact that it is a combination that does not exist when the corresponding display is performed, is a play machine according to any one of the G1 or G11.

According to the feature G12, the display corresponding to the different information is performed by setting the unit light-emitting portions that can be in the light-emitting state when the display corresponding to the mode information is in the light-emitting state, so that the display contents corresponding to the mode information are not restricted as much as possible in order to diversify the display corresponding to the mode information. On the other hand, the combination of the unit light-emitting portions that are in the light-emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Accordingly, by grasping the combination of the unit light-emitting portions that are in the light-emitting state, it is possible to grasp which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is being performed.

Feature G13. There are a plurality of display modes of display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means,
The gaming machine according to feature G12, wherein none of the plurality of unit light emitting portions does not enter a light emitting state even if all of the display corresponding to the mode information of the plurality of modes is performed.

According to the feature G13, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, any combination of the unit light emitting parts is set to the light emitting state. Therefore, in order to diversify the display corresponding to the mode information, it is possible to limit the contents of the display corresponding to the mode information as much as possible.

Feature G14. A plurality of individual information display means including the specific individual information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 in the thirteenth embodiment),
When the second information display control means performs display corresponding to the different information, predetermined individual information display means (the first information display device 69a and the second information display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, the first information display device 201, the second information display device 202 and the third information in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) that does not enter a non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information among the plurality of individual information display means is performed. The gaming machine according to feature G12 or G13, characterized in that the display device 203 for information, and the display device 201 for information and the display device 202 for information in the thirteenth embodiment) are set to a non-display state.

According to the feature G14, the predetermined individual information display means, which is not in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. Thus, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is being performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state.

Feature G15. A setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, wherein the second information display control means displays a display corresponding to the different information in a situation where the setting value can be changed.

According to the characteristic G15, it is possible to use the information display means for performing the display corresponding to the mode information also as the display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

Feature G16. The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the second information display control means displays information corresponding to the setting value currently selected as the display corresponding to the different information.

According to the feature G16, it is possible to use the information display means for displaying information corresponding to the mode information as a display means for displaying the set values that are being changed.

Feature G17. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G16, wherein the second information display control means displays a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine as a display corresponding to the different information.

According to the feature G17, the information display means for performing the display corresponding to the mode information can also be used as the display means for performing the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine.

Feature G18. The gaming machine according to feature G17, wherein the second information display control means, when performing display corresponding to the abnormal state in a situation where the abnormal state has not occurred, performs display corresponding to the fact that the abnormal state has not occurred.

According to feature G18, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

For the configuration of features G1 to G18, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (history memory 117);
information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1402 and S1412 in the management side CPU 112; in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112);
A first information display control means (function for executing display processing in the management side CPU 112) that controls display of the information display means (first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments) so that a display corresponding to the mode information derived by the information derivation means is performed;
Second information display control means for controlling the display of the information display means so as to display information different from the mode information (in the first to tenth embodiments, the function of executing steps S202 and S208 in the main CPU 63; in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing steps S3101, S3103, and S3109 in the main CPU 63; in the twelfth embodiment, step S3 in the main CPU 63 201, a function of executing the processes of steps S3202, S3204 and S3210, a function of executing an abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment);
with
The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting parts (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and a combination of unit light emitting parts that are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting parts is configured to perform a predetermined display,
The second information display control means makes the display corresponding to the different information be performed by putting the unit light emitting parts which can be in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the mode information is in the light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting parts, and the combination of the unit light emitting parts which are in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed is a combination which does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed.

According to feature H1, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game during the predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to other information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

In addition, display corresponding to other information is performed by setting the unit light-emitting portions that can be in the light-emitting state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, so that the content of the display corresponding to the mode information is not restricted as much as possible in order to diversify the display corresponding to the mode information. On the other hand, the combination of the unit light-emitting portions that are in the light-emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Accordingly, by grasping the combination of the unit light-emitting portions that are in the light-emitting state, it is possible to grasp which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is being performed.

Feature H2. There are a plurality of display modes of display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that none of the plurality of unit light emitting portions does not enter a light emitting state even if all the displays corresponding to the mode information of the plurality of modes are performed.

According to the characteristic H2, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, any combination of the unit light emitting parts is set to the light emitting state, so that it is possible to limit the contents of the display corresponding to the mode information as much as possible in order to diversify the display corresponding to the mode information.

Feature H3. A plurality of individual information display means including the specific individual information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 in the thirteenth embodiment),
When the second information display control means performs display corresponding to the different information, predetermined individual information display means (the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 201, the second notification display device 202 and the third notification in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) that does not enter a non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information among the plurality of individual information display means is performed. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, characterized in that the display device 203 for information, and the display device 201 for information and the display device 202 for information in the thirteenth embodiment, are set to a non-display state.

According to the feature H3, the predetermined individual information display means, which is not in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Thus, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is being performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the first information display control means brings each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when performing display corresponding to the mode information.

According to the feature H4, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, so it is possible to clearly distinguish from the case where the display corresponding to the other information is performed in which the predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4, wherein the first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information on the information display means, and prevents the predetermined individual information display means from being maintained in a non-display state even when the display of the mode information is changed.

According to the feature H5, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. This makes it possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed in the plurality of individual information display means regardless of the timing of confirming the plurality of individual information display means.

Feature H6. A setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the second information display control means displays a display corresponding to the different information in a situation where the setting value can be changed.

According to feature H6, it is possible to use the information display means for performing display corresponding to the mode information as display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the second information display control means displays information corresponding to the setting value currently selected as the display corresponding to the different information.

According to the feature H7, the information display means for displaying the mode information can also be used as the display means for displaying the set values that are being changed.

With respect to the configuration of features H1 to H7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (history memory 117);
information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1402 and S1412 in the management side CPU 112; in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112);
a first information display control means (a function of executing display processing in the management side CPU 112) that controls the display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that a display corresponding to the mode information derived by the information derivation means is performed;
a second information display control means (function for executing abnormality display processing in the main side CPU 63) that controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to that event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game during the predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the second information display control means, when displaying a display corresponding to the abnormal state in a situation where the abnormal state has not occurred, displays a display corresponding to the fact that the abnormal state has not occurred.

According to feature I2, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, characterized in that a period during which the information display means performs display corresponding to the mode information and a period during which the information display means performs display corresponding to the abnormal state are distinguished.

According to feature I3, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed in the information display means by grasping the status of display in the information display means.

Feature I4. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, wherein the second information display control means performs display control of the information display means so that the display mode is different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, so that the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed.

According to feature I4, by grasping the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed in the information display means.

Feature I5. Characteristic features I1 to I4, characterized in that a plurality of individual information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) capable of performing a plurality of types of display are provided as the information display means. A gaming machine according to any one of features.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information by using a plurality of individual information display means to display corresponding to the mode information. In addition, the presence of a plurality of individual information display means makes it possible to make the display mode significantly different between the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein, when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed, the second information display control means causes predetermined individual information display means (the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202), which are not in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, out of the plurality of the individual information display means to be in the non-display state.

According to feature I6, the predetermined individual information display means, which is not in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. Thus, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state.

Feature I7. When the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed, the second information display control means causes a specific individual information display means (the third display device 203 and the fourth display device 204) to be displayed when the mode information is displayed among the plurality of individual information display means, and
The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein the display contents of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed can be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed.

According to the feature I7, the display contents that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed in the specific individual information display means can also be displayed when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed, so that the display contents when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed are not restricted. In addition, even if the specific individual information display means has a configuration that can display the same display content, the predetermined individual information display means that has the configuration of feature I7 and does not enter a non-display state when display corresponding to the mode information is performed becomes a non-display state when display corresponding to an abnormal state is performed.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to feature I6 or I7, wherein the first information display control means puts each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when performing display corresponding to the mode information.

According to the feature I8, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, so it is possible to clearly distinguish from the case where the display corresponding to the abnormal state in which the predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state is performed.

Feature I9. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, wherein the first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information on the information display means, and prevents the predetermined individual information display means from being maintained in a non-display state even when changing the display of the mode information.

According to feature I9, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. This makes it possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed in the plurality of individual information display means regardless of the timing of confirming the plurality of individual information display means.

For the configuration of features I1 to I9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (history memory 117);
information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1402 and S1412 in the management side CPU 112; in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112);
A first information display control means (function for executing display processing in the management side CPU 112) that controls display of the information display means (first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments) so that a display corresponding to the mode information derived by the information derivation means is performed;
with
The first information display control means sequentially changes the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means, and prevents the information display means from being maintained in a non-display state even when the display corresponding to the mode information is changed.

According to the feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game during the predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. This makes it possible to specify the display corresponding to the mode information regardless of the timing of checking the information display means.

Feature J2. As the information display means, the individual information display means (first to third information display devices 69a to 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, and the first to fourth information display devices 201 to 204 in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments) capable of performing a plurality of types of display respectively.

According to the feature J2, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information by using a plurality of individual information display means to display corresponding to the mode information.

Feature J3. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the first information display control means brings each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when displaying corresponding to the mode information.

According to the feature J3, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, and even when the display corresponding to the mode information is changed, the display state is maintained. This makes it easier to grasp the mode information.

Feature J4. The first information display control means causes the individual information display means (the first notification display device 69a in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments), which is a part of the plurality of individual information display means, to perform display corresponding to the type of the mode information to be displayed, and the individual information display means to be displayed as a result display means (the second display device). In the 1st to 10th embodiments, the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c, and in the 11th to 14th embodiments, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204).

According to feature J4, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the display corresponding to the type of mode information to be displayed is performed in the individual information display means for type display, and the display corresponding to the contents of the mode information to be displayed is performed in the individual information display means for result display. This makes it easier to grasp the mode information to be displayed.

For the configuration of features J1 to J4, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. History storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in management side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in history storage means (history memory 117);
The history storage execution means includes means for not storing the history information in the history storage means even if the predetermined event occurs in a restricted situation (a function of making a negative determination in step S3501 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature K1, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, since the history information is not stored even if a predetermined event occurs in the restricted situation, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored in a situation where it is not preferable to store the history information.

Feature K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the restriction condition can occur as a condition from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started until a restriction cancellation event occurs.

According to the characteristic K2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the predetermined event due to the operation check immediately after the supply of operating power is started from being stored as history information.

Feature K3. means for setting the restricted state when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the restriction condition is satisfied (function for executing the process of step S3610 in the main CPU 63);
a means (a function of executing the processing of step S3621 in the main CPU 63) that does not set the restricted condition when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the restriction condition is not satisfied;
The gaming machine according to feature K2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature K3, depending on whether or not the limiting condition is satisfied, there are cases where the limited state is set and cases where it is not set. This makes it possible to prevent the restricted status from being set as necessary.

Feature K4. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein the restricted situation can occur as a situation from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started until the number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches a predetermined reference number or more.

According to the feature K4, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored until the number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches a predetermined reference number or more after the supply of operating power is started.

Feature K5. History storage execution means (a function of executing normal ball entry management processing in the main side CPU 63, ball entry management processing during the opening and closing execution mode, and ball entry management processing during the high frequency support mode) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (normal counter area 231, open/close execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233);
information derivation means (function for executing the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the information deriving means does not derive the mode information in a restricted situation.

According to the feature K5, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game during the predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. In addition, even if a predetermined event occurs in a restricted situation, the mode information is not derived, so that it is possible to prevent the mode information from being derived in a situation in which it is not desirable to derive the mode information.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the restriction status can occur as a status from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started until a restriction release event occurs.

According to the characteristic K6, it is possible to prevent the mode information from being derived using the history information based on the occurrence of the predetermined event in the operation check immediately after the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature K7. The gaming machine according to feature K5 or K6, characterized in that the restricted situation can occur as a situation from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started until the number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches a predetermined reference number or more.

According to the feature K7, it is possible to prevent the mode information from being derived until the number of game balls ejected from the game area reaches a predetermined reference number or more after the supply of operating power is started.

For the configuration of features K1 to K7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature group G, the feature group H, the feature group I, the feature group J, and the feature group K, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a plate storing part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storing part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area according to the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. A control means (main side CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means are
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (function for executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined processing executing means for executing the second predetermined processing among the various types of processing (function for executing management execution processing by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
When the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the predetermined storage means (main side RAM 65). A function of executing the processing of step S4402 in the CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63 in the 17th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the 18th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S4701 and S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the 19th embodiment);
When or after the second predetermined process is terminated, the return executing means for restoring the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3804 and steps S3910 to S3915 in the main CPU 63; in the sixteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, the function of step S45 in the main CPU 63; 10 to step S4515, the function of executing the processing of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the 18th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63 in the 19th embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature L1, at least part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the predetermined storage means when the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed. As a result, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is terminated, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. From the above, it becomes possible to suitably perform various controls.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the predetermined information is part of the information stored in the internal storage means.

According to feature L2, only part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the predetermined storage means, so it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for saving the information in the internal storage means in the predetermined storage means.

Feature L3. the internal storage means comprises at least a first storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register) and a second storage area (registers other than WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register);
The second predetermined process executing means stores information in the first storage area in the second predetermined process, but does not store information in the second storage area,
The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the save execution means saves the information stored in the first storage area to the predetermined storage means.

According to feature L3, when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information in the first storage area to be stored in the second predetermined process in the internal storage means is saved in the predetermined storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined processing is completed, it is possible to execute a processing different from the second predetermined processing from the state of the internal storage means before execution of the second predetermined processing, and at the same time, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for saving the information of the internal storage means in the predetermined storage device.

Feature L4. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
with
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the save executing means saves the predetermined information to the second predetermined storage area.

According to feature L4, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided in the predetermined storage means, so that the information storage destination in the predetermined storage means can be clearly differentiated between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from being erased when the other process is executed. In this case, when the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed or the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, at least part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, it is possible to save the information in the internal storage means immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature L5. The save execution means is
means for saving first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, to the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined processing when the situation changes from the state in which the first predetermined processing is being executed to the state in which the second predetermined processing is to be executed;
Means for saving the second predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, to the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined processing when the situation changes from the state in which the first predetermined processing is being executed to the state in which the second predetermined processing is to be executed. function to execute, a function to execute the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function to execute the processing of steps S4702 and S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature L4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature L5, the first predetermined information, which is part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined information, which is part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process. As a result, each information stored in the internal storage means can be saved at a suitable timing, and the processing for saving the information can be executed by being distributed between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing.

Feature L6. The gaming machine according to feature L5, wherein the first predetermined information is information in a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

According to feature L6, it is possible to appropriately save the information in the flag register in the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

Feature L7. The second predetermined storage area is
a stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
a work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction;
with
The game machine according to any one of features L4 to L6, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to feature L7, when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in one of the stack area and the work area in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, it is possible to consolidate the save destinations of information, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring.

Feature L8. The game machine according to feature L7, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information to the work area.

According to feature L8, since the save destination of at least part of the information stored in the internal storage means is the work area, the information can be saved without cumulatively changing the stack pointer.

Feature L9. The first predetermined storage area can store and read information when the first predetermined process is executed, and can read information but cannot store information when the second predetermined process is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L4 to L8, wherein the second predetermined storage area can store and read information when the second predetermined process is executed, and can read information but cannot store information when the first predetermined process is executed.

According to feature L9, it is possible to treat the first predetermined storage area as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and to treat the second predetermined storage area as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process.

Feature L10. The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
a work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction;
with
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L9, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to the feature L10, it is possible to consolidate the save destinations of the predetermined information, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving the predetermined information and the processing configuration for restoring the predetermined information.

Feature L11. The gaming machine according to feature L10, wherein the retraction executing means retracts the predetermined information to the work area.

According to feature L11, since the predetermined information is saved in the work area, the information can be saved without cumulatively changing the stack pointer.

Feature L12. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means,
The gaming machine according to feature L11, wherein the save execution means includes means for saving specific information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, to the stack area (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63) when a situation changes from a situation where the first prescribed process is being executed to a situation where the second prescribed process is executed or a situation where the second prescribed process is executed.

According to feature L12, the specific information is saved in the stack area in the configuration in which the predetermined information is saved in the work area. As a result, the information stored in the internal storage means can be distributed and saved in the work area and the stack area.

Feature L13. The gaming machine according to feature L12, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

According to the characteristic L13, by saving the predetermined information having a larger amount of information than the specific information in the work area, it is possible to prevent a large amount of information from being accumulated in the stack area when saving the information stored in the internal storage means.

Feature L14. When the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is fixed information,
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L13, wherein the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is not subject to saving by the saving execution means.

According to feature L14, since it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving stack pointer information in the predetermined storage means, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the predetermined storage means. Further, even with such a configuration in which the information of the stack pointer is not saved, when the situation changes from the execution of the first predetermined process to the situation of executing the second predetermined process, or when the situation changes to the situation of executing the second predetermined process, the information of the stack pointer becomes fixed information. Therefore, even if the information of the stack pointer is not saved as described above, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started.

Feature L15. The game according to feature L14, characterized by comprising means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after the second predetermined process is completed (function of executing the process of step S3909 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, function of executing the process of step S4509 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and function of executing the process of step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment). machine.

According to feature L15, when or after the second predetermined process is terminated, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started.

Feature L16. Means for setting the second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process in the stack pointer when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed (a function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4501 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S4501 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment). 3), the gaming machine according to feature L14 or L15.

According to feature L16, when the second predetermined process is started, the second corresponding start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, thereby enabling information to be stored in the stack area of the appropriate address in the second predetermined process.

Feature L17. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L16, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing game history.

According to the feature L17, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that information used in the process for managing the game history can be prevented from being rewritten when the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature L18. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
with
The gaming machine according to feature L17, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and high-frequency support mode counter area 233) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring by executing a game.

According to feature L18, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to that event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the history storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature L19. The gaming machine according to feature L18, wherein the second predetermined process executing means includes information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S4208 in the main side CPU 63) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage area.

According to the characteristic L19, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage area, so that it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event.

Feature L20. The gaming machine according to feature L19, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (computation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the feature L20, when the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the mode information storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

With respect to the configuration of features L1 to L20, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1. A control means (main side CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means are
a first predetermined process executing means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined processing executing means for executing the second predetermined processing among the various types of processing (function for executing management execution processing by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
When the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the predetermined storage means (main RAM 65). 502 to step S4507, a function of executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S4701 and S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment);
When or after the second predetermined process is terminated, the return execution means for restoring the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63; in the eighteenth embodiment, the step S46 in the main CPU 63 05, in the 19th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63);
with
The gaming machine, wherein the save executing means saves the predetermined information to the predetermined storage means by a load command.

According to the feature M1, when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined information, which is at least part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the predetermined storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is terminated, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. When the situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined information is saved in the predetermined storage means by the load command. This makes it possible to save the predetermined information without changing the stack pointer.

Feature M2. The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
a work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction;
with
The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein the retract execution means retracts the predetermined information to the work area.

According to feature M2, since the destination of the predetermined information, which is at least part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is the work area, the information can be saved without cumulatively changing the stack pointer.

Feature M3. the predetermined information is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means;
The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the save execution means includes means for saving specific information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, to the stack area (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63) when the situation changes from the execution of the first predetermined process to the situation of executing the second predetermined process or when the situation changes to the situation of executing the second predetermined process.

According to the feature M3, the specific information is saved in the stack area in the configuration in which the predetermined information is saved in the work area. As a result, the information stored in the internal storage means can be distributed and saved in the work area and the stack area.

Feature M4. The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

According to the characteristic M4, by saving the predetermined information having a larger amount of information than the specific information in the work area, it is possible to prevent a large amount of information from being accumulated in the stack area when saving the information stored in the internal storage means.

Feature M5. The work area is
a first work area (work area 221 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
with
The game machine according to any one of features M2 to M4, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information to the second work area.

According to feature M5, by providing the first work area and the second work area in the work area, it is possible to clearly differentiate the information storage destination in the work area between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from being erased when the other process is executed. In this case, when the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, at least part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the second work area. As a result, it is possible to save the information in the internal storage means immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and to save the information without using the first work area.

Feature M6. The first work area can store and read information when the first predetermined process is executed, and can read information but cannot store information when the second predetermined process is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature M5, wherein the second work area can store and read information when the second predetermined process is executed, and can read information but cannot store information when the first predetermined process is executed.

According to feature M6, it is possible to handle the first work area as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and to handle the second work area as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process.

Feature M7. A control means (main side CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means are
a first predetermined process executing means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined processing executing means for executing the second predetermined processing among the various types of processing (function for executing management execution processing by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
When the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the predetermined storage means (main RAM 65). 502 to step S4507, a function of executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S4701 and S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment);
When or after the second predetermined process is terminated, the return execution means for restoring the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63; in the eighteenth embodiment, the step S46 in the main CPU 63 05, in the 19th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63);
with
The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
a work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the save executing means saves the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to the characteristic M7, when the situation where the first prescribed process is being executed changes to the situation where the second prescribed process is executed or when the situation where the second prescribed process is executed becomes the situation, the prescribed information, which is at least part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the prescribed storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is terminated, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process.

Further, when the situation where the first prescribed process is being executed changes to the situation where the second prescribed process is executed or the situation where the second prescribed process is executed, the prescribed information is saved in one of the stack area and the work area in the prescribed storage means. As a result, it is possible to consolidate the save destinations of information, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring.

For the configuration of features M1 to M7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. A control means (main side CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means are
a first predetermined process executing means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined processing executing means for executing the second predetermined processing among the various types of processing (function for executing management execution processing by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
with
The gaming machine is characterized in that information of a stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is fixed information when a situation changes from a situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed to a situation in which the second predetermined process is to be executed.

According to the feature N1, when the situation changes from the situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation in which the second predetermined process is to be executed, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means becomes fixed information, so there is no need to save the information of the stack pointer when starting the second predetermined process. This eliminates the need to secure a storage area for saving stack pointer information. Further, when the situation changes from the state of executing the first predetermined processing to the state of executing the second predetermined processing, the information of the stack pointer becomes fixed information, so that the information of the stack pointer before the start of the second predetermined processing can be restored without saving the information of the stack pointer as described above.

Feature N2. The gaming machine according to feature N1, characterized by comprising means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after the second predetermined process is terminated (a function of executing the process of step S3909 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4509 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment). .

According to feature N2, when or after the second predetermined process is terminated, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started.

Feature N3. Means for setting the second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process in the stack pointer when the situation changes from the one in which the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation in which the second predetermined process is to be executed. function).

According to feature N3, when the second predetermined process is started, the second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, thereby enabling information to be stored in the stack area of an appropriate address in the second predetermined process.

Feature N4. When the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the predetermined storage means (main side RAM 65). A function of executing the processing of step S4402 in the CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63 in the 17th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the 18th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S4701 and S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the 19th embodiment);
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, a return executing means for restoring the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3804 and steps S3910 to S3915 in the main CPU 63; in the sixteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63; 10 to step S4515, the function of executing the processing of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the 18th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63 in the 19th embodiment);
with
The game machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is not subject to saving by the saving execution means.

According to feature N4, at least part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the predetermined storage means when the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed. As a result, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is terminated, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. Also, since the information of the stack pointer is not saved, it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving the information of the stack pointer in the predetermined storage means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the capacity of the predetermined storage means. Further, even with such a configuration in which the information of the stack pointer is not saved, when the situation changes from the execution of the first predetermined process to the situation of executing the second predetermined process, or when the situation changes to the situation of executing the second predetermined process, the information of the stack pointer becomes fixed information. Therefore, even if the information of the stack pointer is not saved as described above, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started.

Feature N5. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
with
The gaming machine according to feature N4, wherein the save executing means saves the predetermined information in the second predetermined storage area.

According to feature N5, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided in the predetermined storage means, so that the information storage destination in the predetermined storage means can be clearly differentiated between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from being erased when the other process is executed. In this case, when the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed or the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, at least part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, it is possible to save the information in the internal storage means immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature N6. The first predetermined storage area can store and read information when the first predetermined process is executed, and can read information but cannot store information when the second predetermined process is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature N5, wherein the second predetermined storage area is capable of storing and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information but not capable of storing information when the first predetermined process is executed.

According to feature N6, it is possible to treat the first predetermined storage area as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and to treat the second predetermined storage area as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process.

With respect to the configuration of features N1 to N6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group O>
Features O1. A control means (main side CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means are
a first predetermined process executing means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined processing executing means for executing the second predetermined processing among the various types of processing (function for executing management execution processing by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a first state setting means (a function of executing steps S4803 to S4808 in the main CPU 63) that sets the state of a predetermined storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register), which is at least part of the storage area in the internal storage means, to a predetermined state when the situation changes from the situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed;
When or after the second predetermined process is terminated, a second state setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4903 to S4908 in the main CPU 63) that sets the state of the predetermined storage area to the predetermined state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature O1, when the state of executing the first predetermined processing changes to the state of executing the second predetermined processing or when the state of executing the second predetermined processing changes, the state of the predetermined storage area of the internal storage means is set to the predetermined state, and when or after the second predetermined processing ends, the state of the predetermined storage region is set to the predetermined state again. As a result, the state of the predetermined storage area can be set to the predetermined state before and after the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area due to one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from affecting the other process. From the above, it becomes possible to suitably perform various controls.

Feature O2. The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the predetermined state is a state when supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to the feature O2, the predetermined storage area is set to the state when the supply of operating power to the control means is started as the predetermined state, so that the processing configuration for setting the predetermined state can be simplified.

Feature O3. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which the predetermined storage area is cleared to "0".

According to feature O3, the predetermined storage area is set to a state cleared to "0" as the predetermined state, so the processing configuration for setting the predetermined state can be simplified.

Feature O4. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, wherein the predetermined storage area is a partial storage area in the internal storage means.

According to feature O4, only a part of the storage area of the internal storage means is set to the predetermined state, so it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting the predetermined state.

Feature O5. said internal storage means comprises at least said predetermined storage area and another storage area (registers other than WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register);
The second predetermined process executing means stores information in the predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process, but does not store information in the separate storage area,
The gaming machine according to feature O4, wherein the first state setting means and the second state setting means are configured so as not to change the state of the separate storage area.

According to feature O5, when the situation changes from the situation in which the first prescribed process is being executed to the situation in which the second prescribed process is executed, or the situation is changed to the situation where the second prescribed process is executed, the predetermined storage area in which information is to be stored in the second predetermined process is set to a predetermined state in the internal storage means. This makes it possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area resulting from the first predetermined process from affecting the second predetermined process. Also, since the state of the separate storage area is not changed, it is possible to set the predetermined state when the second predetermined processing is started so as not to affect the processing after the second predetermined processing is finished.

Feature O6. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O5, wherein the information in the predetermined storage area before the predetermined state is set by the first state setting means is information that is not used after the second predetermined process is completed.

According to the feature O6, even if the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state when the second predetermined processing is executed or when the second predetermined processing is executed, it is possible to prevent the processing after the second predetermined processing from being affected.

Feature O7. Saving execution means (a function of executing the process of step S4802 in the main CPU 63) for saving predetermined information (flag register information), which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) when the situation changes from the situation where the first prescribed process is being executed to the situation where the second prescribed process is executed, or when the situation is changed to the situation where the second prescribed process is executed;
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, a return execution means (a function of executing the process of step S4810 in the main CPU 63) for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature O7, when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the predetermined storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined processing is executed, the information stored in the internal storage means upon execution of the first predetermined processing and necessary for subsequent execution of the first predetermined processing can be prevented from being rewritten. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is terminated, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process.

Feature O8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

According to the feature O8, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that information used in the processing for managing the game history can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature O9. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
with
The gaming machine according to feature O8, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and high-frequency support mode counter area 233) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring by executing a game.

According to feature O9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to that event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the history storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature O10. The gaming machine according to feature O9, wherein the second predetermined process executing means includes information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage area.

According to the feature O10, by deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage area, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event.

Feature O11. The gaming machine according to feature O10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (computation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the characteristic O11, when the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the mode information storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

With respect to the configuration of features O1 to O11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic P group>
Feature P1. A control means (main side CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means are
a first predetermined process executing means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined processing executing means for executing the second predetermined processing among the various types of processing (function for executing management execution processing by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature P1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased.

Feature P2. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to feature P1, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

According to the feature P2, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that information used in the processing for managing the game history can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature P3. The gaming machine according to feature P2, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and high-frequency support mode counter area 233) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring by executing a game.

According to feature P3, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to that event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the history storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature P4. The gaming machine according to feature P3, wherein the second predetermined process executing means includes information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S4208 in the main side CPU 63) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage area.

According to the feature P4, by deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event.

Feature P5. The gaming machine according to feature P4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (computation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the feature P5, when the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the mode information storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature P6. a first saving means (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment) for saving the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, to the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined process when the situation changes from the state in which the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation in which the second predetermined process is to be executed;
Second saving means for saving second predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, to the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process when the situation changes from the situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed 7, a function of executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S4701 and S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature P6, the first predetermined information, which is part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined information, which is part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process. As a result, each information stored in the internal storage means can be saved at a suitable timing, and the processing for saving the information can be executed by being distributed between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing.

Feature P7. When or after the second predetermined process is finished, a first return executing means (a function of executing the process of step S3804 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment) that restores the first predetermined information saved in the first predetermined storage area to the internal storage means in the fifteenth embodiment;
Second return executing means for returning the second predetermined information saved in the second predetermined storage area to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined processing is finished (function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, function of executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and function of executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment. 3, and in the nineteenth embodiment, the function of executing steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature P6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature P7, when or after the second predetermined process is finished, the first predetermined information saved in the first predetermined storage area is restored to the internal storage means, and the second predetermined information saved in the second predetermined storage area is restored to the internal storage means, so that the state of the internal storage means can be restored to the state before the second predetermined process is started.

Feature P8. The gaming machine according to feature P6 or P7, wherein the first predetermined information includes information of a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

According to feature P8, it is possible to appropriately save the information in the flag register in the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

Feature P9. The gaming machine according to any one of features P6 to P8, wherein the second predetermined information includes information of all registers of the internal storage means.

According to feature P9, since the information of all the registers of the internal storage means is collectively saved, there is no need to selectively save the information of the registers.

Feature P10. The second predetermined storage area is
a stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) where information is written by a push instruction and information is read by a pop instruction;
a work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information is written and read by a load instruction;
with
The gaming machine according to feature P9, wherein the second save execution means saves the second predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to feature P10, information in all registers of the internal storage means is saved in one of the stack area and work area in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, it is possible to aggregate the save destinations of the information of all the registers, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring.

Feature P11. The gaming machine according to feature P10, wherein the second saving executing means saves the second predetermined information to the stack area.

According to feature P11, it is possible to save information in all registers while not using the work area.

Feature P12. The gaming machine according to any one of features P6 to P11, wherein the second predetermined information includes information of a stack pointer of the internal storage means.

According to the feature P12, it is possible to appropriately save the information of the stack pointer in the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

For the configuration of features P1 to P12, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature group L, the feature group M, the feature group N, the feature group O, and the feature group P, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to perform various controls appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic Q group>
Feature Q1. Control means (MPU 62) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in internal storage means (registers of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
History storage means (management RAM 241) provided as a separate chip from the control means and capable of temporarily storing information;
with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means comprises a history storage execution means (a function of performing normal ball entry management processing in the main side CPU 63, ball entry management processing during the open/close execution mode, and ball entry management processing during the high-frequency support mode) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of the game in the history storage means.

According to feature Q1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to that event is stored in the history storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Also, since the history storage means is provided as a separate chip from the control means, it is possible to increase the storage capacity for storing history information while using general-purpose control means.

Feature Q2. The game machine according to feature Q1, wherein the control means comprises predetermined storage means (main side RAM 65) for temporarily storing information when executing various kinds of processing.

According to the feature Q2, in a configuration having history storage means provided as a separate chip from the control means in addition to the predetermined storage means provided in the control means, it is possible to store a large amount of history information by storing the history information in the history storage means.

Feature Q3. The gaming machine according to feature Q2, wherein the control means temporarily stores the information in the predetermined storage means when executing the processing related to the history information.

According to feature Q3, in the configuration in which the history storage means for storing the history information is provided as a separate chip from the control means, when the processing related to the history information is executed, the information is temporarily stored in the predetermined storage means provided in the control means.

Feature Q4. The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3, wherein the control means includes information derivation means (a function of executing the processing of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means.

According to the feature Q4, by deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event.

Feature Q5. The gaming machine according to feature Q4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (computation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the feature Q5, when the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing.

For the configuration of features Q1 to Q5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group Q, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a plate storing part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storing part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area according to the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group R>
Feature R1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Situation generating means (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 in the main CPU 63; in another embodiment, the processing of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63 is executed) function, in the twenty-third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature R1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, in order to set the set value to be used, it is necessary that a plurality of events including the first event and the second event occur when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally force the user to set the setting value to be used.

Feature R2. Open grasping means for grasping that the opening/closing body (front door frame 14) is in the open state (function of executing the processing of step S5005 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, function of executing the processing of step S5505 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, function of executing the processing of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature R1, wherein the situation generating means specifies that the first event has occurred based on the fact that the open/close body is in an open state and is grasped by the open grasping means.

According to feature R2, the opening/closing member must be in an open state in order to set the set value to be used. As a result, when an act of illegally setting a setting value to be used is performed, the illegal act can be made conspicuous, and as a result, the illegal act can be easily found.

Feature R3. A separate opening grasping means for grasping that the separate opening/closing body (game machine main body 12) is in an open state (a function of executing the processing of step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5506 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5704 in the main CPU 63 in the 23rd embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature R2, wherein the situation generating means specifies that the second event has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening/closing body is in the open state is grasped by the separate opening grasping means.

According to feature R3, in order to set the set value to be used, it is necessary to open not only the opening/closing body but also the other opening/closing body. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally force the user to set the setting values to be used, and to make the illegality conspicuous.

Feature R4. The setting means performs at least one of selecting the setting value to be used and setting the setting value to be used based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (update button 68b, reset button 68c),
The game machine according to feature R2 or R3, wherein the predetermined operating means is configured to be operable by opening the separate opening/closing body.

According to the characteristic R4, the set value to be used cannot be set unless the opening/closing body different from the separate opening/closing body that is opened to enable the operation of the predetermined operation means is opened. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally force the user to set the setting values to be used, and to make the illegality conspicuous.

Feature R5. The opening and closing body defines the front side of the game machine in the game area where the game ball flows down,
The game machine according to any one of features R2 to R4, wherein the game area is opened in front of the game machine by opening the opening/closing body.

According to the feature R5, in order to set the set value to be used, it is necessary to open the game area in front of the gaming machine by opening the opening/closing body. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally force the user to set the setting values to be used, and to make the illegality conspicuous.

Feature R6. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R5, wherein the situation generating means specifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the fact that a predetermined operation is performed on the setting key inserting portion (setting key inserting portion 68a) with the setting key.

According to the characteristic R6, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key in the setting key insertion section but also to generate an event other than that. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally force the user to set the setting value to be used.

Feature R7. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R6, wherein the situation generating means specifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the occurrence of a predetermined game event (operation of the shooting operation device 28, entry of the ball into the through gate 35) that occurs when a game is played.

According to the feature R7, in order to set the set value to be used, it is necessary not only to generate a predetermined game event that occurs when a game is played, but also to generate an event different from that. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally force the user to set the setting value to be used.

Feature R8. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R7, wherein the situation generation means specifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on detection of a game ball by a ball entry detection means (gate detection sensor 49a) that detects that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry portion provided in the game area.

According to the feature R8, in order to set the set value to be used, it is necessary to enter the game ball into a predetermined ball entering portion and to generate a separate event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally force the user to set the setting value to be used.

Feature R9. setting value notification means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main side CPU 63) that causes the notification means to notify the setting value to be used set by the setting means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R8, wherein the setting value notification means causes the notification means to notify the setting value to be used set by the setting means based on occurrence of a plurality of events including the first event and the second event.

According to the feature R9, it is possible to make it difficult to check the set value by fraud. In addition, the manager of the game hall only needs to generate the first event and the second event when setting the setting value to be used and when confirming the setting value, so that the work is commonized and each work can be easily grasped.

Feature R10. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Situation generation means (a function of executing steps S5003 to S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, and in another form, the main A function of executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5507 in the side CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of steps S5703 to S5705 and S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature R10, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to generate an event other than performing a predetermined operation with the setting key in the setting key insertion portion. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally force the user to set the setting value to be used.

Feature R11. An open grasping means for grasping that the opening/closing body (front door frame 14) is in an open state (a function of executing the processing of step S5005 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5505 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature R10, wherein the situation generation means specifies that the other event has occurred based on the fact that the open/close body is in an open state ascertained by the opening grasping means.

According to the feature R11, the opening/closing member must be in an open state in order to set the set value to be used. As a result, when an act of illegally setting a setting value to be used is performed, the illegal act can be made conspicuous, and as a result, the illegal act can be easily found.

Feature R12. A separate opening grasping means for grasping that the separate opening/closing body (game machine main body 12) is in an open state (a function of executing the processing of step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5506 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5704 in the main CPU 63 in the 23rd embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature R11, wherein the situation generation means specifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening/closing body is in an open state is grasped by the separate opening grasping means.

According to feature R12, in order to set the set value to be used, it is necessary to open not only the opening/closing body but also the other opening/closing body. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally force the user to set the setting values to be used, and to make the illegality conspicuous.

Feature R13. The setting means performs at least one of selecting the setting value to be used and setting the setting value to be used based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (update button 68b, reset button 68c),
The game machine according to feature R11 or R12, wherein the predetermined operation means is configured to be operable by opening the separate opening/closing body.

According to the feature R13, the set value to be used cannot be set unless the opening/closing body different from the separate opening/closing body that is opened in order to enable the operation of the predetermined operation means is opened. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally force the user to set the setting values to be used, and to make the illegality conspicuous.

Feature R14. The opening and closing body defines the front side of the game machine in the game area where the game ball flows down,
The game machine according to any one of features R11 to R13, wherein the game area is opened in front of the game machine by opening the opening/closing body.

According to the characteristic R14, in order to set the set value to be used, it is necessary to open the game area in front of the gaming machine by opening the opening/closing body. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally force the user to set the setting values to be used, and to make the illegality conspicuous.

Feature R15. The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R14, wherein the situation generation means specifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the occurrence of a predetermined game event (operation of the shooting operation device 28, entry of the ball into the through gate 35) that occurs when a game is played.

According to the feature R15, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion portion but also to generate a predetermined game event that occurs when the game is played. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally force the user to set the setting value to be used.

Feature R16. The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R15, wherein the situation generation means specifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on detection of a game ball by a ball entry detection means (gate detection sensor 49a) that detects that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry portion provided in the game area.

According to the characteristic R16, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key for the setting key insertion portion but also to insert the game ball into a predetermined ball entry portion. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally force the user to set the setting value to be used.

Feature R17. setting value notification means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main side CPU 63) that causes the notification means to notify the setting value to be used set by the setting means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R16, wherein the setting value notification means causes the notification means to notify the setting value to be used set by the setting means based on the occurrence of a plurality of events including both the predetermined operation by the setting key on the setting key insertion portion and the occurrence of the other event.

According to the feature R17, it is possible to make it difficult to check the set value by fraud. In addition, the manager of the game hall can perform a predetermined operation with the setting key for the setting key insertion part and generate another event in either case of setting the setting value to be used or confirming the setting value.

For the configuration of features R1 to R17, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group R, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a plate storing part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storing part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area according to the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to deal with fraudulent actions against the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group S>
Feature S1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Situation generating means for creating a settable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 and steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63; in another embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-third embodiment, steps S5703 to S57 in the main CPU 63 05 and step S5715, the function of executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fifth embodiment);
setting value grasping means for grasping whether or not the setting value before the settable state is the same as the setting value set by the setting means (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S5017 and steps S5111 to S5112 in the main CPU 63; in another form, a function of executing the processes of steps S5611 to S5612 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature S1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is to be used. In this case, it is determined whether or not the set value before entering the settable state and the set value set in the settable state are the same. This makes it possible to execute processing corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same across the settable state. Therefore, when the setting value to be used is set, it is possible to create a favorable situation for the setting result, and it is possible to suitably perform the work of setting the setting value.

Feature S2. The gaming machine according to feature S1, characterized in that it comprises simultaneous means (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5113 in the main CPU 63, and in another form, a function of executing the processing of step S5613 in the main CPU 63) for executing the corresponding simultaneous processing based on the fact that the set value before the settable state and the set value set by the setting means are the same as the set value grasping means.

According to the feature S2, when the set values are the same across the settable state, simultaneous processing is executed, thereby making it possible to create a favorable situation for the set values being the same.

Feature S3. The gaming machine according to feature S2, wherein the simultaneous means executes, as the simultaneous processing, processing for notifying that the set value has not been changed.

According to the feature S3, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall that the setting values are the same across the settable state.

Feature S4. According to any one of features S1 to S3, characterized in that non-simultaneous time means (a function of executing step S5114 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5614 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment) is provided for executing non-simultaneous processing corresponding to the setting value grasped by the set value grasping device that the set value before the settable state is different from the set value set by the setting device is grasped by the set value grasping device. game machine.

According to the feature S4, when the set values are not the same across the settable state, the non-simultaneous processing is executed, thereby making it possible to create a favorable situation for the change of the set values.

Feature S5. The gaming machine according to feature S4, wherein the non-simultaneous means executes, as the non-simultaneous processing, a process for performing notification corresponding to the change of the set value.

According to the feature S5, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall that the set value has been changed across the settable state.

Feature S6. The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S5, wherein the condition generating means causes the settable condition based on a need to erase information in the storage means for storing the set value after the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started.

According to the characteristic S6, when it becomes necessary to erase the information of the storage means for storing the setting value, the setting becomes possible, so that the game can be prevented from being continued even though the information of the setting value is erased. In this case, with the configuration of feature S1, it is determined whether or not the set value before the settable state is the same as the set value set in the settable state. This makes it possible to execute processing corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same across the settable state.

Feature S7. The game according to feature S6, characterized by comprising means (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5113 in the main CPU 63, in another form, a function of executing the processing of step S5613 in the main CPU 63) for notifying that the setting value has not been changed based on the fact that the setting value before the settable state and the setting value set by the setting means are the same as the setting value grasping means. technique.

According to the feature S7, even if a settable state becomes possible as a result of erasing the information in the storage means, if the set values are the same with the settable state in between, notification corresponding to the fact that the set values have not been changed is performed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the setting value is not changed even if the setting becomes possible in the middle of the game, and the player can continue the game without worrying even if the setting becomes possible in the middle of the game.

Feature S8. The situation generating means is
A first situation generating means (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 in the main CPU 63; in another form, a function of executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-third embodiment, steps S5703 to S5705 in the main CPU 63). and a function to execute the process of step S5715);
After the supply of operating power to the control means is started, a second situation generation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63 in the 24th embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63 in the 25th embodiment, and a function of executing the processes of steps S5801 to S5804 in the 25th embodiment) Then, the function of executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main side CPU 63),
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S7, wherein the set value grasping means grasps whether or not the set value before the settable situation is the same as the set value set by the setting means in either of the settable situation generated by the first situation generating means and the settable situation caused by the second situation generating means.

According to the characteristic S8, when it becomes necessary to erase the information of the storage means for storing the set value, the setting becomes possible, so that the game can be prevented from being continued even though the information of the set value is erased. In this case, by using the same processing as when the settable state occurs based on the start of supply of operating power to the control means, when the settable state occurs due to the erasure of the information in the storage means, it is possible to execute the processing corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same across the settable state.

With respect to the configuration of features S1 to S8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the group of features S, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a plate storing part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storing part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area according to the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, when setting values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine are set, it is necessary to create a favorable situation for that, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic T group>
Feature T1. A control means (main side CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means are
a first predetermined process executing means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments);
a second predetermined process executing means for executing the second predetermined process among the various processes (function for executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments);
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
First monitoring execution means for monitoring whether or not the first predetermined storage area is normal (a function of executing the processing of steps S5401 to S5404 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment; a function of executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63 in the 24th embodiment; a function of executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63 in the 25th embodiment; 2, the function of executing the processing of steps S7701 to S7703 in the main CPU 63);
Second monitoring execution means for monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal (in the twenty-second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S5405 to S5408 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing steps S5809, S5810, S5812, and S5813 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-fifth embodiment, step S6101 in the main CPU 63, step a function of executing the processes of S6102, steps S6105 and S6106, a function of executing the processes of steps S7706 to S7708 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-second embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature T1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased. In addition, by monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and also monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal, it is possible to specify whether or not the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process can be performed normally.

Feature T2. The gaming machine according to feature T1, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution means and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution means are executed in either one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process.

According to feature T2, the monitoring of whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and the monitoring of whether the second predetermined storage area is normal are collectively executed in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which the monitoring of each storage area is performed separately for the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing.

Feature T3. The gaming machine according to feature T1 or T2, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution means and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution means are executed in the first predetermined process.

According to feature T3, it is possible to collectively execute the monitoring of whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and the monitoring of whether the second predetermined storage area is normal in the first predetermined process.

Feature T4. Predetermined erasing means for erasing information in the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the first monitoring execution means identifies that the first predetermined storage area is abnormal (a function of executing the process of step S5410 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S5806, S5811 and S5814 in the main CPU 63 in the 24th embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S5806, S5811 and S5814 in the main CPU 63 in the 25th embodiment, and step S5 in the main CPU 63 in the 25th embodiment. 906, a function of executing the processing of steps S6103 and S6107).

According to feature T4, by erasing information in the first predetermined storage area when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined processing from being executed while the first predetermined storage area is in an abnormal state.

Feature T5. The gaming machine according to feature T4, wherein the predetermined erasing means erases the information in the first predetermined storage area and the information in the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the first monitoring execution means specifies that the first predetermined storage area is abnormal.

According to feature T5, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the first predetermined storage area but also the second predetermined storage area are erased. Thereby, when there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the second predetermined storage area, it is possible to erase the information in the second predetermined storage area regardless of the monitoring result by the second monitoring execution means.

Feature T6. The gaming machine according to feature T4 or T5, wherein the predetermined erasing means erases the information in the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the second monitoring execution means specifies that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal.

According to feature T6, by erasing information in the first predetermined storage area when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined processing from being executed while the first predetermined storage area is in an abnormal state.

Feature T7. The gaming machine according to feature T6, wherein the predetermined erasing means erases the information in the second predetermined storage area and the information in the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the second monitoring execution means specifies that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal.

According to feature T7, when the second predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the second predetermined storage area but also the first predetermined storage area is erased. Thereby, when there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the first predetermined storage area, it is possible to erase the information in the first predetermined storage area regardless of the monitoring result by the first monitoring execution means.

Feature T8. The game machine according to any one of features T4 to T7, wherein the process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing means is executed in either one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process.

According to feature T8, the process of erasing information in each predetermined storage area based on the identification of an abnormality is collectively executed in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which the erasing of information in each storage area is performed separately in the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing.

Feature T9. The game machine according to any one of characteristics T4 to T7, wherein the process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing means is executed in the first predetermined process.

According to the feature T9, it is possible to collectively execute the processing of deleting the information in each predetermined storage area in the first predetermined processing based on the identification of the abnormality.

Feature T10. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T9, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing game history.

According to the feature T10, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that information used in the processing for managing the game history can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature T11. The gaming machine according to feature T10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and high-frequency support mode counter area 233) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring by executing a game.

According to feature T11, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to that event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the history storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature T12. The gaming machine according to feature T11, wherein the second predetermined process executing means includes information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage area.

According to the feature T12, by deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage area, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event.

Feature T13. The gaming machine according to feature T12, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (computation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the feature T13, when the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the mode information storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

With respect to the configuration of features T1 to T13, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group U>
Features U1. A control means (main side CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means are
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (function for executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a second predetermined process executing means for executing the second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
State setting means (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S6202 to S6204 and S6211 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-seventh embodiment, steps S6302 to S6 in the main CPU 63) for setting the state of the flag register provided in the internal storage means to a specific state when the situation changes from the situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed. 307 and a function to execute the processing of step S6312);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature U1, when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the state of the flag register of the internal storage means is set to the specific state. This makes it possible to start the second predetermined process in a situation where the state of the flag register is in a predetermined specific state. Therefore, various controls can be preferably performed.

Feature U2. The gaming machine according to feature U1, wherein the specific state is a state when supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature U2, since the flag register is set to the state when the supply of operating power to the control means is started as the specific state, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the specific state.

Feature U3. The gaming machine according to feature U1 or U2, wherein the specific state is a state in which the flag register is cleared to "0".

According to feature U3, the flag register is set to a state cleared to "0" as the specific state, so the processing configuration for setting the specific state can be simplified.

Feature U4. The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3, characterized by comprising a means for setting the state of the flag register to the specific state when or after the second predetermined processing is completed (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6213 to S6218 in the main CPU 63, and in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6314 to S6322 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature U4, the state of the flag register is set to the specific state not only when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, but also when the second predetermined process ends or ends. This makes it possible to resume the first predetermined process in a situation where the state of the flag register is in a predetermined specific state. Also, it is possible to set the state of the flag register to the specific state before and after the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the flag register due to one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from affecting the other process.

Feature U5. Predetermined storage means (main side RAM 65) for temporarily storing information when executing processing in the control means,
The state setting means
Means for setting the state of a predetermined storage area in the predetermined storage means to the specific state (a function of executing the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6307 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-seventh embodiment);
means for storing the information stored in the predetermined storage area in the flag register so that the state of the flag register becomes the specific state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S6211 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S6312 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature U5, even if the configuration is such that the state of the flag register cannot be directly set to the specific state as an instruction of the control means, it is possible to set the state of the flag register to the specific state by using the writing of information to the predetermined storage means and the reading of the information.

Feature U6. The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (specific control stack area 222) in which the control means can write information by a push command and in which the control means can read information by a pop command;
a work area (work area 221 for specific control) in which the control means can write and read information by a load command;
with
The gaming machine according to feature U5, wherein the predetermined storage area is provided in the stack area.

According to feature U6, even in a configuration in which information stored in the work area cannot be directly written to the flag register, it is possible to set the state of the flag register to a specific state by using the writing of information to the stack area and the reading of the information.

Feature U7. Means for making the state of the predetermined register provided in the internal storage unit to be in a predetermined state when the state of executing the first predetermined processing changes to the state of executing the second predetermined processing or the state of executing the second predetermined processing (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6205 to S6210 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6308 to S6311 in the main CPU 63. ),
The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U6, wherein the state setting means sets the state of the flag register to the specific state after the state of the predetermined register is set to the predetermined state.

The state of the flag register can change each time various processes are executed in the control means. In this case, according to feature U7, the state of the flag register is set to the specific state after the state of the predetermined register is set to the predetermined state, so that the flag register can be set to the specific state immediately before the second predetermined processing is started.

Feature U8. A control means (main side CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
A gaming machine characterized in that the control means includes means for setting the state of the flag register to a specific state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S6202 to S6204 and S6211 in the main CPU 63, and in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S6302 to S6307 and S6312 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature U8, it is possible to set the state of the flag register to a specific state as required.

With respect to the configuration of features U1 to U8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group V>
Feature V1. A control means (main side CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means are
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (function for executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a second predetermined process executing means for executing the second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
Saving execution means for saving information in a flag register provided in the internal storage means (main RAM 65) to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) when the situation changes from the execution of the first predetermined process to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed. In the 20th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4802 in the main CPU 63, in the 28th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6402 to S6405 in the main CPU 63, in the 29th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6502 to S6509 in the main CPU 63);
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, the return executing means for restoring the information of the flag register saved in the predetermined storage means to the flag register (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3804 in the main CPU 63; in the sixteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4404 in the main CPU 63; in the 20th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4810 in the main CPU 63; In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6407 to S6415 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6511 to S6518 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature V1, when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information in the flag register is saved in the predetermined storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flag register from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is terminated, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the flag register. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process based on the state of the flag register before execution of the second predetermined process. From the above, it becomes possible to suitably perform various controls.

Feature V2. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
with
The game machine according to feature V1, wherein the saving execution means saves the information of the flag register to the first predetermined storage area.

According to feature V2, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided in the predetermined storage means, so that the information storage destination in the predetermined storage means can be clearly differentiated between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from being erased when the other process is executed. In this case, when the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, the information of the flag register is saved in the first predetermined storage area. As a result, it is possible to save the information in the flag register immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and to save the information without using the second predetermined storage area.

Feature V3. The first predetermined storage area can store and read information when the first predetermined process is executed, and can read information but cannot store information when the second predetermined process is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature V2, wherein the second predetermined storage area can store and read information when the second predetermined process is executed, and can read information but cannot store information when the first predetermined process is executed.

According to feature V3, the first predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process.

Feature V4. The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (specific control stack area 222) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
a work area (work area 221 for specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction;
with
The game machine according to any one of features V1 to V3, wherein the save execution means saves the information of the flag register to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to feature V4, when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information of the flag register is saved in one of the stack area and the work area in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, it is possible to consolidate the save destinations of information, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring.

Feature V5. The gaming machine according to feature V4, wherein the save execution means saves the information of the flag register to the work area.

According to feature V5, since the information of the flag register is saved to the work area, the information can be saved without cumulatively changing the stack pointer.

Feature V6. The save execution means is
means for storing the information of the flag register in a predetermined register provided in the internal storage means (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6402 and S6403 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6502 to S6505 in the main CPU 63);
means for storing the information of the flag register stored in the predetermined register in the predetermined storage means (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S6404 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S6506 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature V6, even in a configuration in which the information in the flag register cannot be directly saved in the predetermined storage means as an instruction of the control means, the information in the flag register can be saved in the predetermined storage means by using the writing of the information in the predetermined register and the writing of the information stored in the predetermined register in the predetermined storage means.

In addition, for the configuration of features V1 to V6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group W>
Feature W1. Equipped with control means (main side CPU 63) that executes various processes,
The control means are
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (function for executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a second predetermined process executing means for executing the second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
abnormal event monitoring means (program monitoring unit 252) for monitoring whether an abnormal event has occurred;
erasing condition generation means (reset signal output unit 251) capable of generating a situation in which information erasing processing is executed for at least the first predetermined storage area based on the identification of the occurrence of the abnormal event by the abnormal event monitoring means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature W1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased. Further, based on the identification of the occurrence of the abnormal event, the information erasing process is performed on at least the first predetermined storage area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed while the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as it is despite the occurrence of an abnormal event.

Feature W2. The control means is
means for executing processing for storing power failure response information when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped (in the thirtieth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6709 and S6710 in the main CPU 63; in the thirty-second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S7609 to S7611 in the main CPU 63;
When the supply of operating power to the control means is started and the process at the time of supply start is executed in a situation where the power failure countermeasure information is not stored, the means for executing the erasing process of the information for at least the first predetermined storage area (in the thirtieth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S6607 in the main CPU 63, in the thirty-first embodiment, the function of executing the clear process at the time of abnormality in the main CPU 63, in the thirty-second embodiment, step S7704 in the main CPU 63, step a function to execute the processes of S7705, steps S7808 and S7810);
with
The gaming machine according to the feature W1, wherein the erasing condition generation means causes the control means to execute the process at the time of supply start in a situation where the power failure countermeasure information is not stored based on the identification of the occurrence of the abnormal event by the abnormal event monitoring means.

According to the feature W2, when the supply of operating power to the control means is started and the process at the time of supply start is executed in a situation where the power failure countermeasure information is not stored, the information erasing process is executed for at least the first predetermined storage area, so that when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started in the situation where the power failure process is not appropriately performed, the first predetermined process is not executed while the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as it is. In this case, based on the identification of the occurrence of the abnormal event, the control means executes the process at the time of supply start in a situation where the power failure countermeasure information is not stored. This makes it possible to execute information erasing processing in response to the occurrence of an abnormal event by utilizing a configuration for executing information erasing processing when processing at the start of supply is executed by the control means in a situation where power failure countermeasure information is not stored.

Feature W3. The control means executes various processes when a reset signal is received, and starts the process at the time of supply start based on the state where the reset signal is received from the state where the reset signal is not received while the operating power is being supplied.
The gaming machine according to feature W2, wherein the erasing condition generation means causes the control means to cause the reset signal to be received after the control means has caused the reset signal not to be received, based on the occurrence of the abnormal event being identified by the abnormal event monitoring means.

According to the feature W3, it is possible to obtain the above-described excellent effects by switching the reception state of the reset signal.

Feature W4. The control means is configured to temporarily store information in the internal storage means (register and program counter of the main CPU 63) when executing the process, and the information stored in the internal storage means can be temporarily saved in the first predetermined storage area.
The abnormal event monitoring means monitors whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the internal storage means as the abnormal event,
The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W3, wherein the erasing condition generating means generates a condition in which the information erasing process is executed for at least both the first predetermined storage area and the internal storage means.

According to the feature W4, since the information stored in the internal storage means can be temporarily saved in the first predetermined storage area, if an abnormality occurs in the information stored in the internal storage means, there is a possibility that the information stored in the first predetermined storage area also has an abnormality. In this case, when an abnormality occurs in the information stored in the internal storage means, the information erasing process is executed not only for the internal storage means but also for the first predetermined storage area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in that state even though there is an abnormality in the information stored in the first predetermined storage area.

Feature W5. The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W4, wherein the erasing condition generating means prevents the erasing process of the information from being executed in the second predetermined storage area even if the abnormal event monitoring means identifies that the abnormal event has occurred.

According to feature W5, it is possible to store and hold information in the second predetermined storage area even if an abnormal event occurs.

Feature W6. The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W4, wherein the erasing condition generating means generates a condition in which the information erasing process is executed for both the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area based on the occurrence of the abnormal event being identified by the abnormal event monitoring means.

According to the feature W6, the information erasing process is executed for both the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area based on the identification that the abnormal event has occurred. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined processing from being executed with the information in the first predetermined storage area held as it is in spite of the occurrence of the abnormal event, and to prevent the second predetermined processing from being executed with the information in the second predetermined storage region held as it is in spite of the occurrence of the abnormal event.

Feature W7. The gaming machine according to feature W6, wherein the information erasing process for the first predetermined storage area is executed in the first predetermined process, and the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area is executed in the second predetermined process.

According to feature W7, regarding the information erasing process as well, the first predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process.

Feature W8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

According to the feature W8, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that information used in the processing for managing the game history can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature W9. The gaming machine according to feature W8, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and high-frequency support mode counter area 233) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring by executing a game.

According to feature W9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to that event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the history storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature W10. The gaming machine according to feature W9, wherein the second predetermined process executing means includes information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S4208 in the main side CPU 63) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage area.

According to the feature W10, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage area, thereby making it possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event.

Feature W11. The gaming machine according to feature W10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (computation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the characteristic W11, when the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the mode information storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

For the configuration of features W1 to W11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group X>
Feature X1. Equipped with control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes,
The control means are
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (function for executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a second predetermined process executing means for executing the second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
with
The second predetermined process execution means is an erasure execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S6103 and S6107 in the main CPU 63 in the 25th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S7204 in the main CPU 63 in the 30th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S7204 in the main CPU 63 in the 31st embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S7204 in the main CPU 63 in the 31st embodiment). 8, and in the thirty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S7808 and S7810 in the main side CPU 63).

According to feature X1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased.

In addition, when an erasing opportunity occurs, information erasing processing is executed for the second predetermined storage area, so that it is possible to prevent the second predetermined processing from being executed while the information in the second predetermined storage area is held as it is in spite of the occurrence of some abnormality in the second predetermined storage area. Further, since the erasing process of the information is executed in the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from intervening in updating the information in the second predetermined storage area.

Feature X2. The gaming machine according to feature X1, wherein the erasure executing means executes the erasing process of the information in the second predetermined storage area while preventing non-erasable information (management monitoring flag, return address information, information of various registers) from being erased.

According to the characteristic X2, the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area is performed while the non-erasable information in the second predetermined storage area is not erased. This makes it possible to execute information erasing processing for the second predetermined storage area while preventing even necessary information from being erased.

Feature X3. The second predetermined process executing means stores, in the second predetermined storage area, the return correspondence information (return address information, various register information) required when returning to the situation of executing the first predetermined process when the situation changes from the situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation is changed to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed. function, in the 31st embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S7502 to S7507 in the main CPU 63, and in the 32nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing in steps S7802 to S7807 in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to feature X2, wherein the erasure executing means executes the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area while preventing the restoration correspondence information from being erased as the non-erasable information.

According to the feature X3, it is possible to execute information erasing processing for the second predetermined storage area while preventing even the return correspondence information necessary when returning from the state of executing the second predetermined processing to the state of executing the first predetermined processing from being erased.

Feature X4. The gaming machine according to feature X3, wherein the storage execution means stores, as the return correspondence information, information of a return address of the program when the second predetermined process is terminated and the game returns to the first predetermined process in the second predetermined storage area.

According to the feature X4, the information erasing process is executed for the second predetermined storage area while preventing the information of the return address of the program from being erased when returning to the first predetermined process. Therefore, even if the information erasing process is executed for the second predetermined storage area, it is possible to return to the predetermined program in the first predetermined process when the second predetermined process is completed.

Feature X5. The control means is configured to temporarily store information in the internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the process,
The gaming machine according to feature X3 or X4, wherein the storage execution means stores information stored in the internal storage means in the second predetermined storage area as the return correspondence information.

According to the characteristic X5, since the information erasing process is performed on the second predetermined storage area while preventing the information in the internal storage means used in the first predetermined process from being deleted, even if the information erasing process is performed on the second predetermined storage area, the information used in the first predetermined process can be returned to the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is completed.

Feature X6. The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X5, wherein the erasure executing means executes the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area as the generation of the erasure trigger based on the occurrence of an abnormality in the second predetermined storage area.

According to the feature X6, since the information erasing process is executed for the second predetermined storage area based on the occurrence of the abnormality in the second predetermined storage area, it is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed while the abnormality is occurring in the second predetermined storage area.

Feature X7. The gaming machine according to feature X6, wherein the second predetermined process executing means includes means for monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal as the second predetermined process (in the thirtieth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S7201 to S7203 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature X7, not only the process of erasing information in the second predetermined storage area, but also the monitoring of whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal is performed in the second predetermined process without intervening the first predetermined process. Therefore, the monitoring of whether the second predetermined storage area is normal and the execution of the process of erasing information in the second predetermined storage area can be executed as a series of processes in the second predetermined process.

Feature X8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing game history.

According to the feature X8, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that it is possible to prevent the information used in the processing for managing the game history from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature X9. The gaming machine according to feature X8, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and high-frequency support mode counter area 233) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring by executing a game.

According to feature X9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to that event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the history storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature X10. The gaming machine according to feature X9, wherein the second predetermined process executing means includes information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage area.

According to the feature X10, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage area, thereby making it possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event.

Feature X11. The gaming machine according to feature X10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (computation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the feature X11, when the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the mode information storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

With respect to the configuration of features X1 to X11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group Y>
Feature Y1. Equipped with control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes,
The control means are
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (function for executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a second predetermined process executing means for executing the second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
a first calculating means for calculating first reference numerical information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the first predetermined storage area (a function of executing the processing of steps S6604 and S6710 in the main CPU 63 in the thirtieth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S7304 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-first embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S7610 and S7701 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-second embodiment); ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature Y1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased. In this case, the first reference numerical value information corresponding to the plurality of information stored in the first predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the first reference numerical value information, it becomes possible to specify whether or not information abnormality has occurred only in the first predetermined storage area.

Feature Y2. Information erasing means (a function of executing the processing of step S6607 in the main CPU 63 in the 30th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S7401 and S7402 in the main CPU 63 in the 31st embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S7401 and S7402 in the main CPU 63 in the 32nd embodiment, and step S770 in the main CPU 63 in the 32nd embodiment) for executing information erasing processing on the first predetermined storage area based on the occurrence of an abnormality in the first reference numerical information calculated by the first calculating means. 4 and step S7705).

According to feature Y2, when the occurrence of an abnormality in the first reference numerical value information is identified, the information erasing process is executed for the first predetermined storage area, so that it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed while the information in the first predetermined storage area is retained as it is in spite of the occurrence of the information abnormality.

Feature Y3. The first calculation means is
a first power failure calculation means for calculating the first reference numerical information when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped (a function of executing the processing of step S6710 in the main CPU 63 in the thirtieth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S7610 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-second embodiment);
a first power-on calculating means for calculating the first reference numerical value information when supply of operating power to the control means is started (a function of executing the processing of step S6604 in the main CPU 63 in the thirtieth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S7304 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-first embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S7701 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-second embodiment);
with
The gaming machine according to feature Y2, wherein the information erasing means executes the information erasing process for at least the first predetermined storage area on the basis that the first reference numerical value information calculated by the first power failure time calculating means and the first reference numerical value information calculated by the first power supply time calculating means do not match.

According to the feature Y3, it is possible to specify whether or not the information in the first predetermined storage area is stored and held while the supply of operating power is stopped by calculating the first reference numerical value information. Then, when the information in the first predetermined storage area is not stored and retained across a situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped, the information erasing process is executed for the first predetermined storage area, so that it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as it is in spite of the occurrence of the information abnormality.

Feature Y4. The gaming machine according to feature Y2 or Y3, wherein the information erasing means does not execute the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area even if an abnormality is identified with respect to the first reference numerical information calculated by the first calculating means.

According to the feature Y4, when an abnormality is identified with respect to the first reference numerical value information, the information erasing process is executed for the first predetermined storage area, while the information erasing process is not executed for the second predetermined storage area. As a result, it is possible to prevent even the information in the second predetermined storage area from being erased in a situation where an information abnormality has occurred in the first predetermined storage area.

Feature Y5. The gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y4, wherein the first reference numerical information is information that does not change according to the information stored in the second predetermined storage area.

According to feature Y5, in a configuration in which a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area exist, it is possible to individually identify an information abnormality related to the first predetermined storage area using the first reference numerical information.

Feature Y6. The gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y5, further comprising second calculation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S7611 and S7706 in the main CPU 63) for calculating second reference numerical information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the second predetermined storage area.

According to feature Y6, second reference numerical information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the second predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the second reference numerical value information, it becomes possible to specify whether or not an information abnormality has occurred only in the second predetermined storage area.

Feature Y7. The gaming machine according to feature Y6, further comprising a means (a function of executing the processes of steps S7808 and S7810 in the main CPU 63) for executing information erasing processing for at least the second predetermined storage area based on the occurrence of an abnormality in the second reference numerical information calculated by the second calculating means.

According to feature Y7, when the occurrence of an abnormality in the second reference numerical information is specified, the information erasing process is executed for the second predetermined storage area, so that it is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed while the information in the second predetermined storage area is held as it is in spite of the occurrence of the information abnormality.

Feature Y8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing game history.

According to the characteristic Y8, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that information used in the processing for managing the game history can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature Y9. The gaming machine according to feature Y8, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and high-frequency support mode counter area 233) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring as a result of the game being executed.

According to feature Y9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to that event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Further, since the history information is stored in the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the history storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature Y10. The gaming machine according to feature Y9, wherein the second predetermined process executing means includes information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S4208 in the main side CPU 63) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage area.

According to the characteristic Y10, by deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage area, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event.

Feature Y11. The gaming machine according to feature Y10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (computation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the feature Y11, when the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. Further, the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and the processing for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined processing, so that the information stored in the mode information storage area can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

For the configuration of features Y1 to Y11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature T group, the feature U group, the feature V group, the feature W group, the feature X group, and the feature Y group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to perform various controls appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature Z group>
Feature Z1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Situation generation means (function for executing the processes of steps S7905, S7916, and S7917 in the main CPU 63) for creating a settable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
setting notification means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting value of the use target in a situation where the setting is not possible in a situation where the supply of operating power to the control means (main CPU 63) having the setting means is started and the process at the time of supply start is being executed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature Z1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, in order to confirm the setting value set as the object to be used, it is necessary to once stop the supply of the operating power to the control means and then restart the supply of the operating power to the control means. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value. In addition, since the set value is notified while the supply start process is being executed, there is no need to notify the set value when the game is interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the setting value.

Feature Z2. The gaming machine according to feature Z1, wherein the condition generating means causes the settable condition to occur in a condition in which the supply start processing is being executed.

According to the feature Z2, it is possible to combine the settable situation in which the set value to be used can be set and the situation in which the set value to be used is notified in a situation in which the set value is not settable into a situation in which the process at the start of supply is being executed.

Feature Z3. A first specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the first trigger event (a function of executing the processing of steps S7912 and S7916 in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to feature Z1 or Z2, wherein the setting notification means notifies the set value of the object to be used in a situation in which the setting is not possible based on a situation in which the process at the time of supply start is being executed and occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means.

According to feature Z3, in order to notify the set value to be used, it is necessary to generate the first trigger event as well as to start supplying operating power to the control means. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value.

Feature Z4. The gaming machine according to feature Z3, wherein the first trigger event is that a predetermined operation is performed with a setting key on the setting key insertion portion (setting key insertion portion 68a).

According to feature Z4, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion portion in order to notify the setting of the use object. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value.

Feature Z5. The setting notification means notifies the set value of the use object in a situation in which the setting is not possible when a notification condition is satisfied based on the fact that the process at the time of supply start is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means,
The condition generating means is configured to enter the settable condition when a setting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the process at the time of supply start is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means,
The gaming machine according to feature Z3 or Z4, wherein the notification condition and the setting condition are different.

According to feature Z5, it is necessary to generate the first trigger event in addition to starting the supply of operating power to the control means in both the case of generating the configurable state and the case of notifying the set value to be used. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform both the act of fraudulently causing the setting value to be used and the act of fraudulently trying to confirm the setting value to be used. On the other hand, since the setting condition for generating the settable state and the notification condition for notifying the set value to be used are different, it is possible to independently generate either the settable state or the state to notify the set value to be used.

Feature Z6. A second identifying means for identifying the occurrence of the second trigger event (a function of executing the processing of step S7905 in the main CPU 63),
The setting condition is established on the basis that, in a situation in which the supply start process is being executed, the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means and the occurrence of the second trigger event is specified by the second specifying means,
The gaming machine according to feature Z5, wherein the notification condition is satisfied on the basis that, in a situation in which the process at the time of supply start is being executed, the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means and the occurrence of the second trigger event is not specified by the second specifying means.

According to feature Z6, in order to generate the settable state, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the control means and generate not only the first trigger event but also the second trigger event. This makes it possible to further complicate the operation for generating the settable state in a configuration in which it is necessary to generate the first trigger event in addition to starting the supply of operating power to the control means in both the case of setting the set value to be used and the case of notifying the set value to be used. Therefore, it is possible to more intensively prevent an act of illegally setting a setting value to be used.

Feature Z7. The gaming machine according to feature Z6, wherein the second trigger event is that a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated.

According to feature Z7, in order to generate the settable state, it is necessary not only to start supplying operating power to the control means and to generate the first trigger event, but also to operate the predetermined operation means. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessively complicated operation for normally generating a settable state while making it difficult to illegally set a set value to be used.

Feature Z8. The gaming machine according to feature Z6 or Z7, further comprising information erasing means for executing information erasing processing based on the fact that the occurrence of the second trigger event is specified by the second specifying means in a situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed (a function of executing the process of step S7915 in the main side CPU 63).

According to feature Z8, it is possible to differentiate the condition for generating the settable state and the condition for notifying the set value to be used in the non-settable state by using the second trigger event necessary for executing the information erasing process.

Feature Z9. The gaming machine according to feature Z8, wherein the information erasing means executes the information erasing process even when the setting possible state occurs.

According to feature Z9, it is possible to execute the information erasing process when the setting becomes possible.

Feature Z10. The gaming machine according to feature Z8 or Z9, characterized in that, in a situation where the second specifying means specifies the occurrence of the second trigger event in a situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed and the first specifying means does not specify the occurrence of the first trigger event, the information erasing process is executed by the information erasing means although the setting is not possible.

According to the feature Z10, depending on whether or not to generate the first trigger event when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, it is possible to select between the case where the information erasing process is executed and the setting possible state occurs, and the case where the information erasing process is executed but the setting possible state does not occur.

For the configuration of features Z1 to Z10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group a>
Features a1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Situation generation means (function for executing the processes of steps S7905, S7916, and S7917 in the main CPU 63) for creating a settable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
Information erasing means for executing information erasing processing (function for executing the processing of step S7915 in the main CPU 63);
setting notification means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main side CPU 63) for notifying the setting value to be used in a situation in which the setting is not possible;
a first identifying means for identifying the occurrence of the first trigger event (a function of executing the processing of steps S7912 and S7916 in the main CPU 63);
a second identifying means for identifying the occurrence of the second trigger event (a function of executing the processing of step S7905 in the main CPU 63);
with
The situation generating means causes the settable situation to occur based on the fact that the first specifying means specifies the occurrence of the first trigger event and the second specifying means specifies the occurrence of the second trigger event in a situation in which supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started and a process at the time of supply start is being executed;
The information erasing means executes the information erasing process based on the fact that the occurrence of the second trigger event is specified by the second specifying means in a situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed,
In a situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed, the occurrence of the second trigger event is specified by the second specifying means and the occurrence of the first trigger event is not specified by the first specifying means, the information erasing process is executed by the information erasing means even though the setting is not possible,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting notification means notifies the setting value of the use object in the situation where the setting is not possible based on the fact that the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means and the occurrence of the second trigger event is not specified by the second specifying means in the situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed.

According to the feature a1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is to be used. In addition, since the information erasing process can be executed, it is possible to prevent the game from being played even though the information abnormality has occurred. In addition, since the setting value set to be used can be notified, it is possible to check the setting value.

In this case, in order to confirm the set value that is set to be used, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the control means and to generate the first trigger event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value.

In addition, in order to generate the settable state, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the control means and generate not only the first trigger event but also the second trigger event. This makes it possible to further complicate the operation for generating the settable state in a configuration in which it is necessary to generate the first trigger event in addition to starting the supply of operating power to the control means in both the case of setting the set value to be used and the case of notifying the set value to be used. Therefore, it is possible to more intensively prevent an act of illegally setting a setting value to be used.

In addition, by using the second trigger event necessary for executing the information erasing process, it is possible to differentiate the condition for generating the settable state and the condition for notifying the set value to be used in the non-settable state.

Further, depending on whether or not to generate the first trigger event when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, it is possible to select the case where the information erasing process is executed and the setting becomes possible, or the case where the information erasing process is executed but the setting is not possible.

Feature a2. The gaming machine according to feature a1, wherein the first trigger event is that a predetermined operation is performed with a setting key on a setting key insertion portion (setting key insertion portion 68a).

According to feature a2, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion portion in order to notify the setting of the use object. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally checking the set value.

Feature a3. The gaming machine according to feature a1 or a2, wherein the second trigger event is operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

According to feature a3, in order to generate the settable state, it is necessary not only to start supplying operating power to the control means and to generate the first trigger event but also to operate the predetermined operation means. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessively complicated operation for normally generating a settable state while making it difficult to illegally set a set value to be used.

For the configuration of features a1 to a3, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the group of features Z and the group of features a, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those illustrated above, there is a demand for a configuration that can appropriately confirm the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group b>
Feature b1. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Situation generation means (function for executing the processes of steps S7905, S7916, and S7917 in the main CPU 63) for creating a settable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
setting monitoring means for executing a setting monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal (function for executing the process of step S8220 in the main CPU 63);
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the start of supply, which is executed when the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started.

According to the feature b1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In addition, since the setting monitoring process is executed to monitor whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal, if the setting value to be used is abnormal, it is possible to deal with it. In addition, since the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the start of supply, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while preventing the processing load from increasing in the process at the start of supply.

Feature b2. The gaming machine according to feature b1, wherein the condition generating means generates the settable condition in a condition in which the supply start processing is being executed.

According to the feature b2, the settable state occurs when the supply start process is being executed, so it is possible to set the set value to be used before the game is started. In this case, since the set values to be used are set in the process at the start of supply, the processing load in the process at the start of supply increases accordingly. On the other hand, since the configuration of the characteristic b1 is provided and the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the start of supply, it is possible to monitor whether or not the set value to be used is abnormal while preventing the processing load of the process at the start of supply from increasing further.

Feature b3. The gaming machine according to feature b1 or b2, wherein the setting monitoring means executes the setting monitoring process after the supply start process is completed.

According to feature b3, since the setting monitoring process is executed after the process at the start of supply is completed, it is possible to monitor whether or not the set value to be used is abnormal while preventing the processing load of the process at the start of supply from increasing.

Feature b4. The gaming machine according to feature b3, wherein the setting monitoring means executes the setting monitoring process each time a monitoring opportunity occurs after the supply start process is completed.

According to the characteristic b4, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time a monitoring trigger occurs after the process at the time of supply start is completed, it becomes easy to identify that the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature b5. Equipped with means for executing periodically activated interrupt processing (function for executing first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b4, wherein the interrupt processing includes the setting monitoring processing.

According to the feature b5, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time it is started periodically, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of monitoring whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature b6. The gaming machine according to any one of the features b1 to b5, wherein the setting monitoring means includes means for regulating the progress of the game (a function of executing the processing of steps S8207 and S8302 in the main CPU 63) based on the fact that the setting value to be used is specified to be abnormal in the setting monitoring process.

According to the feature b6, when it is specified that the set value to be used is abnormal, the progress of the game is regulated, so it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though the set value to be used is abnormal.

Feature b7. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics b1 to b6, wherein the setting monitoring means includes means (a function of executing the processing of step S8303 in the main CPU 63) that enables the player to recognize that the setting possible state should be generated based on the fact that the setting value to be used is specified to be abnormal in the setting monitoring process.

According to the feature b7, when it is specified that the set value to be used is abnormal, the player is informed that the settable situation should be generated, so that when the set value to be used becomes abnormal, it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to eliminate it.

For the configuration of features b1 to b7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic b group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the set values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group c>
Characteristics c1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
a predetermined display control means for controlling the display of the predetermined display means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
with
The predetermined display control means includes check control means for causing the predetermined display means to perform a check display that enables confirmation of whether or not the predetermined display means is normal based on the occurrence of the check opportunity (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S9102 in the main CPU 63, and in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S9602 in the main CPU 63).

According to the characteristic c1, the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of the check opportunity. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal.

Feature c2. The predetermined display means has a plurality of light emitting units (display segments 321 to 324),
The gaming machine according to feature c1, wherein the check display is a display that enables confirmation that each of the plurality of light emitting units can be in a light emitting state.

According to the feature c2, each of the plurality of light-emitting portions of the predetermined display means is in a light-emitting state as a display for checking. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not each of the plurality of light-emitting portions of the predetermined display means is in a light-emitting state.

Feature c3. The gaming machine according to feature c1 or c2, wherein the check opportunity occurs when supply of operating power is started.

According to feature c3, since the check display is performed when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to quickly confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal.

Feature c4. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c3, wherein the check opportunity occurs each time supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature c4, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal every time the supply of operating power is started.

Feature c5. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c4, wherein the check opportunity is generated without requiring an operation for generating the check opportunity when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature c5, when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display is performed without requiring a special operation, so it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal.

Feature c6. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c5, wherein the check control means causes the predetermined display means to perform the check display when the supply of operating power is started and the check opportunity has occurred, and does not allow the predetermined display means to perform the check display when the supply of operating power has started and the check opportunity has not occurred.

According to the characteristic c6, since the check display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started and the check opportunity is generated, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before the game is started in the game machine. On the other hand, even when the supply of operating power is started, the check display is not performed when the check opportunity is not generated, so that the check display can be prevented from being performed in a situation where the check display is unnecessary.

Feature c7. Means (function for executing the processing of step S8606 in the main side CPU 63) for storing information in the use correspondence storage means (management start flag) based on the gaming machine being used in a predetermined manner,
The check control means causes the predetermined display means to perform the check display assuming that the check opportunity has occurred when the supply of operating power is started and the information stored in the use correspondence storage means does not correspond to the use correspondence information, and does not allow the predetermined display means to display the check display assuming that the check opportunity has not occurred when the supply of operating power is started and the information stored in the use correspondence storage means corresponds to the use correspondence information. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature c7, when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display is performed by the predetermined display means until the game machine is used in the predetermined mode, and even if the supply of the operation power is started based on the use of the game machine in the predetermined mode, the check display is not performed by the predetermined display means. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal by displaying the check display on the predetermined display means when the supply of operating power is started at the stage of shipment of the game machine, for example, and prevent the display for check from being performed by the predetermined display means even if the supply of the operation power is started after the game machine is installed in the game hall.

Feature c8. The check control means is
display termination means for terminating the check display on the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of the termination opportunity (function of executing the processing of step S9002 in the main CPU 63 and function of making a negative determination in step S9101);
Cancellation means for terminating the check display on the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of a cancellation opportunity even in a situation where the termination opportunity has not occurred (function of executing the processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101, a function of executing the processing of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c7, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic c8, since the check display is ended based on the occurrence of the cancel trigger even if the check display end trigger is not generated, it is possible to end the check display in the middle and perform another display even in a situation where the check display is being performed in the predetermined display means.

Feature c9. The gaming machine according to feature c8, wherein the cancel opportunity is generated based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

According to the characteristic c9, since the cancellation trigger is generated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is possible to terminate the check display at any timing.

Feature c10. The predetermined display control means includes a separate display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63) that performs a separate display different from the check display when a separate display execution situation occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature c8 or c9, wherein the cancellation opportunity is generated based on the state of execution of the separate display.

According to the feature c10, when a cancellation trigger occurs based on the status of execution of another display, the display for checking ends, so it is possible to give priority to the separate display over the display for checking.

Feature c11. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c10, further comprising means for waiting the progress of processing in a situation in which the check display is being performed by the predetermined display means (a function of executing the processing of step S9406 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature c11, since the check display is performed by the predetermined display means while the progress of the process is on standby, it is possible to perform the check display while suppressing an increase in the processing load.

Characteristic c12. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c11, wherein the check control means causes the predetermined display means to start the check display before a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed when supply of operating power is started.

According to the characteristic c12, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before a game is played in the game machine when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature c13. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
means for executing the processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (function of executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and function of executing the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment);
with
A configuration in which predetermined setting-related processing (setting confirmation processing, setting value update processing) related to the setting value can be executed while the processing for starting supply of operating power is being executed,
The gaming machine according to feature c12, wherein the check control means starts the check display on the predetermined display means in a situation where the process for starting supply of the operating power is being executed.

According to the feature c13, since the set value to be used is set from among multiple stages of set values corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player, the player expects that a more advantageous set value is to be used. Further, a predetermined setting-related process regarding a set value can be executed while the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed. This makes it possible to execute the setting-related process before the game is started. In this case, the check display is started on the predetermined display means while the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed. This makes it possible to integrate not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means with respect to the processing when the supply of operating power is started.

Characteristic c14. The gaming machine according to feature c13, wherein the check control means includes means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the timing at which the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (a function of executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S9404 and S9405 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment).

According to the feature c14, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before the predetermined setting-related processing is executed.

Characteristic c15. The gaming machine according to feature c13 or c14, wherein the predetermined display control means includes means for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature c15, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the current set value by checking the predetermined display means. In this case, the configuration of feature c13 is provided, and not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means is integrated in the processing when the supply of the operating power is started. Therefore, it is possible to collectively perform the work of checking the predetermined display device to determine whether the predetermined display device is normal and the work of checking the predetermined display device to determine the current set value while the processing when the supply of the operating power is started is being executed.

Further, when the configuration of the feature c14 is provided, the display for checking is started on the predetermined display means before the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the current setting value by using the predetermined display means after confirming whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value.

Characteristic c16. The check control means is
means for starting the display for checking on the predetermined display means before the timing at which the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (function for executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
means for terminating the check display based on the fact that a cancellation trigger has occurred in the predetermined setting-related processing while the check display is being performed (the function of executing the processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 and the function of making a negative determination in step S9101, the function of executing the processing of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and the function of making a negative determination in step S9101);
The gaming machine according to feature c15, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature c16, since the display for checking is started on the predetermined display means before the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means, it is possible to confirm the current setting value by using the predetermined display means after confirming whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value. In addition, when the check display is being performed, the check display is terminated when a predetermined setting-related process is executed and a cancellation trigger occurs. Thus, when the prescribed setting-related processing is executed, it is possible to end the display for check and display the current setting value by the prescribed display means without waiting for the end of the display for check. Therefore, it is possible to quickly check the current set value.

Feature c17. The gaming machine according to feature c16, wherein the cancel opportunity is generated based on operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

According to the feature c17, since the cancellation trigger occurs based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is possible to end the check display at any timing.

Characteristic c18. A characteristic characterized by comprising, as the predetermined setting-related processing, means for executing processing for making it possible to change the setting value to be used (a function of making affirmative determinations in steps S8806, S8817, and S8818 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a function of making affirmative determinations in steps S9407, S9418, and S9419 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of c13 to c17.

According to the feature c18, it is possible to integrate not only the process for setting the set value to be used but also the process for starting the check display on the predetermined display means with respect to the process for starting the supply of the operating power.

Feature c19. The setting means updates the set value to be used based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) in the settable state,
The check control means is
means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the settable state is reached (function for executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
means for terminating the check display based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable state in the state where the check display is performed (the function of executing the processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 and the function of making a negative determination in step S9101, the function of executing the processing of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and the function of making a negative determination in step S9101);
with
The gaming machine according to feature c18, wherein the predetermined display control means includes means for displaying the current set value on the predetermined display means after the check display ends in the settable state (a function of executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature c19, since the display for checking is started on the predetermined display means before the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means, it is possible to confirm the current setting value by using the predetermined display means after confirming whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value. In addition, when the setting becomes possible in the state where the check display is being performed and the predetermined operation means is operated, the check display is ended and the current set value is displayed. As a result, when the setting becomes possible, it is possible to end the display for check and display the current set value on the predetermined display means without waiting for the end of the display for check. Therefore, it is possible to quickly check the current set value.

Furthermore, in the configuration in which the set value to be used is updated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable state, the display for check is ended and the current set value is displayed based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable state, so a dedicated operation for ending the display for check and displaying the current set value is not required. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the setting values to be used.

Feature c20. The gaming machine according to any one of features c13 to c19, characterized in that means for executing a process for displaying a current setting value on the predetermined display means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) as the predetermined setting-related process.

According to the feature c20, it is possible to integrate not only the process for confirming the current set value but also the process for starting the check display on the predetermined display means with respect to the process for starting the supply of the operating power.

Feature c21. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c20, wherein the predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function for executing the processes of steps S8708, S8709 and S9107 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature c21, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the management result of the game history. In this case, it is possible to check whether or not the information corresponding to the management result of the game history is displayed correctly on the predetermined display means by performing the check display on the predetermined display means with the configuration of the feature c1.

In addition, for the configuration of features c1 to c21, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group d>
Feature d1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
a predetermined display control means for controlling the display of the predetermined display means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
with
The predetermined display control means includes check control means for causing the predetermined display means to perform a check display that enables confirmation of whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before executing the process for controlling the progress of the game when the supply of the operating power is started (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S9102 in the main CPU 63, and in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S9602 in the main side CPU 63). game machine.

According to the feature d1, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal by performing the check display on the predetermined display means. When the supply of operating power is started, the display for checking is started before the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed, so when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before the game is played in the game machine.

Feature d2. setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
means for executing the processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (function of executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and function of executing the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment);
with
A configuration in which predetermined setting-related processing (setting confirmation processing, setting value update processing) related to the setting value can be executed while the processing for starting supply of operating power is being executed,
The gaming machine according to feature d1, wherein the check control means starts the check display on the predetermined display means in a situation where the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed.

According to the feature d2, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. Further, a predetermined setting-related process regarding a set value can be executed while the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed. This makes it possible to execute the setting-related process before the game is started. In this case, the check display is started on the predetermined display means while the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed. This makes it possible to integrate not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means with respect to the processing when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature d3. The gaming machine according to feature d2, wherein the check control means includes means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the timing at which the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (a function of executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S9404 and S9405 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment).

According to feature d3, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before the predetermined setting-related processing is executed.

Feature d4. The gaming machine according to feature d2 or d3, wherein the predetermined display control means includes means for displaying the current set value on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature d4, the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, so that the manager of the game hall can grasp the current setting value by checking the predetermined display means. In this case, the configuration of feature d2 is provided, and not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means are integrated in the processing when the supply of the operating power is started. Therefore, the work of checking the predetermined display device to determine whether the predetermined display device is normal and the work of checking the predetermined display device to determine the current set value can be performed together in a situation where the processing when the supply of the operating power is started is being executed.

Further, when the configuration of feature d3 is provided, the display for checking is started by the predetermined display means before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that the current set value can be confirmed by using the predetermined display means after confirming whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value.

Feature d5. The check control means is
means for starting the display for checking on the predetermined display means before the timing at which the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (function for executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
means for terminating the check display based on the fact that a cancellation trigger has occurred in the predetermined setting-related processing while the check display is being performed (the function of executing the processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 and the function of making a negative determination in step S9101, the function of executing the processing of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and the function of making a negative determination in step S9101);
The gaming machine according to feature d4, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature d5, since the display for checking is started on the predetermined display means before the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means, it is possible to confirm the current setting value by using the predetermined display means after confirming whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value. In addition, when the check display is being performed, the check display is terminated when a predetermined setting-related process is executed and a cancellation trigger occurs. Thus, when the prescribed setting-related processing is executed, it is possible to end the display for check and display the current setting value by the prescribed display means without waiting for the end of the display for check. Therefore, it is possible to quickly check the current set value.

Feature d6. The gaming machine according to feature d5, wherein the cancel opportunity is generated based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

According to the characteristic d6, since the cancellation trigger occurs based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is possible to end the check display at an arbitrary timing.

Feature d7. A characteristic characterized by comprising, as the predetermined setting-related processing, means for executing processing for making it possible to change the setting value to be used (a function of making affirmative determinations in steps S8806, S8817, and S8818 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a function of making affirmative determinations in steps S9407, S9418, and S9419 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of d2 to d6.

According to the feature d7, it is possible to integrate not only the process for setting the set value to be used but also the process for starting the check display on the predetermined display means with respect to the process when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature d8. The setting means updates the set value to be used based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) in the settable state,
The check control means is
means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the settable state is reached (function for executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
means for terminating the check display based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable state in the state where the check display is performed (the function of executing the processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 and the function of making a negative determination in step S9101, the function of executing the processing of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and the function of making a negative determination in step S9101);
with
The gaming machine according to feature d7, wherein the predetermined display control means includes means for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means after the check display ends in the settable state (a function of executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature d8, since the display for checking is started by the predetermined display means before the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means, it is possible to confirm the current setting value by using the predetermined display means after confirming whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value. In addition, when the setting becomes possible in the state where the check display is being performed and the predetermined operation means is operated, the check display is ended and the current set value is displayed. As a result, when the setting becomes possible, it is possible to end the display for check and display the current set value on the predetermined display means without waiting for the end of the display for check. Therefore, it is possible to quickly check the current set value.

Furthermore, in the configuration in which the set value to be used is updated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable state, the display for check is ended and the current set value is displayed based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable state, so a dedicated operation for ending the display for check and displaying the current set value is not required. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the setting values to be used.

Feature d9. The gaming machine according to any one of features d2 to d8, characterized in that, as the predetermined setting-related processing, means for executing processing for displaying a current set value on the predetermined display means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main side CPU 63) is provided.

According to the feature d9, it is possible to integrate not only the process for confirming the current set value but also the process for starting the check display on the predetermined display means with respect to the process at the start of supply of operating power.

Feature d10. The gaming machine according to any one of features d1 to d9, wherein the predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function for executing the processes of steps S8708, S8709 and S9107 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature d10, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the management result of the game history. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information corresponding to the management result of the game history is displayed accurately on the predetermined display means by providing the configuration of the feature d1 and performing the check display on the predetermined display means.

With respect to the configuration of features d1 to d10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the group of characteristics c and the group of characteristics d, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration that enables confirmation of whether or not the display on the predetermined display means is being performed correctly, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group e>
Features e1. History storage execution means (a function of executing normal ball entry management processing in the main side CPU 63) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (normal counter area 231);
information derivation means (function for executing the process of step S8601 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means;
Mode information storage means (computation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the mode information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the mode information derived at different timings by the information deriving means.

According to feature e1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to that event is stored in the history storage means. Since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized alteration of the history information. Also, mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means, and the derived mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed by using the managed information. Also, the mode information storage means can store a plurality of mode information derived at different timings. As a result, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in a plurality of periods, so that it is possible to accurately grasp the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event.

Feature e2. The mode information storage means is
a recent storage area (current state area 311) for storing the most recent mode information derived by the information deriving means;
and a past storage area (first to third history areas 312 to 314) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means prior to the mode information stored in the latest storage area. The gaming machine according to feature e1.

According to the feature e2, since the most recent mode information and the past mode information derived earlier are stored respectively, it is possible to grasp not only the most recent occurrence frequency of the predetermined event but also the past one.

Feature e3. period elapse specifying means for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the period start trigger to the occurrence of the period end trigger (the function of executing the processing of steps S8605 and S8613 in the main CPU 63);
a most recent storage executing means (a function of executing the process of step S8602 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means in the most recent storage area in a situation where the elapse of the predetermined period has not been specified by the period lapse specifying means;
past memory execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S8607 and S8614 in the main CPU 63) for storing, in the past storage area, mode information corresponding to the period corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period derived by the information derivation means using the history information stored in the history storage means, based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed has been specified by the period lapse specifying means;
The gaming machine according to feature e2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature e3, mode information derived when the predetermined period has not passed is stored in the latest storage area, and mode information derived when the predetermined period has passed is stored in the past storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the most recent frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event, and to grasp the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the past in units of a predetermined period. In addition, since mode information is stored in the past storage area in units of a predetermined period, it is possible to reduce the number of mode information stored in the past storage area.

Feature e4. The gaming machine according to feature e3, further comprising means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means (a function of executing the processes of steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63) based on the fact that the predetermined period of time has passed is specified by the period elapse specifying means.

According to feature e4, since the history information in the history information storage means is deleted when the predetermined period has passed, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity of the history information storage means. Further, even if the history information is erased when the predetermined period has passed, the mode information derived using the history information in the predetermined period is stored in the past storage area, so that the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined period can be grasped afterward.

Feature e5. The gaming machine according to any one of features e2 to e4, wherein the past storage area can store a plurality of pieces of the mode information with different derived timings.

According to feature e5, since a plurality of pieces of mode information are stored in the past storage area, it is possible to compare the occurrence frequencies of predetermined events corresponding to a plurality of periods.

Feature e6. A period elapse specifying means for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of a predetermined period end trigger (a function of executing the processing of steps S8605 and S8613 in the main CPU 63);
past storage executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S8607 and S8614 in the main CPU 63) for storing, in the mode information storage means, mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed has been specified by the period elapse specifying means;
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features e1 to e5, wherein the mode information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of mode information corresponding to each of the different predetermined periods.

According to feature e6, since a plurality of pieces of past mode information derived in units of predetermined periods are stored, it is possible to compare the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events corresponding to a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of pieces of mode information stored in the mode information storage means.

Feature e7. The gaming machine according to feature e6, further comprising means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means (a function of executing the processes of steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63) based on the fact that the predetermined period of time has passed is specified by the period elapse specifying means.

According to feature e7, since the history information in the history information storage means is deleted when the predetermined period has passed, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history information storage means. Further, even if the history information is erased when the predetermined period has passed, the mode information derived using the history information in the predetermined period is stored in the past storage area, so that the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined period can be grasped afterward.

Feature e8. The gaming machine according to any one of features e1 to e7, further comprising means for controlling notification means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that notifications corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the mode information storage means are sequentially executed (a function of executing the processing of steps S8702 to S8709 in the main CPU 63).

According to the characteristic e8, the notification corresponding to the mode information is performed by the notification means. This makes it possible to grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. In addition, since notification corresponding to each of a plurality of pieces of mode information is sequentially executed, it is possible to individually grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in a plurality of periods while reducing the number of notification means.

Feature e9. The mode information storage means includes a first storage area (first history area 312) capable of storing the mode information and a second storage area (second history area 313) capable of storing the mode information,
The game machine according to any one of features e1 to e8, characterized by comprising means for shifting the mode information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area by an instruction including at least an LDIR instruction when an information shift opportunity occurs (a function of executing the processing of steps S8607 and S8614 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature e9, it is possible to shift the mode information between storage areas with a simple processing configuration.

For the configuration of features e1 to e9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group e, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a plate storing part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storing part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area according to the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature f group>
Features f1. means for executing the processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (function of executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and function of executing the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment);
a power failure monitoring means (a function of executing the process of step S8901 in the main CPU 63) that enables a power failure monitoring process for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a situation where the process for starting supply of the operating power is being executed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature f1, the power failure monitoring process is executed even when the process for starting the supply of the operating power is being executed. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the process for starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Feature f2. Equipped with means for executing periodically activated interrupt processing (function for executing first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63),
The interrupt processing includes the power failure monitoring processing,
The gaming machine according to feature f1, wherein the interrupt process can be started by interrupting in a situation where the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed.

According to the feature f2, the interrupt process is periodically interrupted and activated even when the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed, so that it is possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power failure even when the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed.

Feature f3. The gaming machine according to feature f2, wherein the interrupt processing can be interrupted and started even in a situation where post-end processing (steps S8822 to S8825 in the main CPU 63) is being executed after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed.

According to the feature f3, it is possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power failure while the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed by using the interrupt process that can be started by interrupting while the post-end process is being executed.

Feature f4. The interrupt process includes a progress corresponding process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
When the interrupt process is started by an interruption while the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed, the power failure monitoring process is executed, but the progress handling process is not executed.
The gaming machine according to feature f3, characterized in that both the power failure monitoring process and the progress handling process can be executed when the interrupt process is interrupted and started in a situation where the post-end process is being executed.

According to the feature f4, in a configuration in which the occurrence of a power failure is periodically monitored in a state in which the processing for starting supply of operating power is being performed by using the interrupt processing that can be started by interrupting in the state in which the post-end processing is being performed, even if the interrupt processing is interrupted and started in the state in which the processing for starting supply of operating power is being performed, the progress corresponding processing for controlling the progress of the game can be prevented from being executed.

Feature f5. A setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The gaming machine according to any one of features f1 to f4, wherein a setting possible state in which the setting value to be used can be changed in a state in which the processing for starting supply of operating power is being executed.

According to the feature f5, since the power failure monitoring process is executed even when the set values to be used are being set, even if a power failure occurs while the set values to be used are being set, it can be dealt with appropriately.

Feature f6. The gaming machine according to feature f5, characterized in that, when the supply of operating power is stopped after the occurrence of a power failure is identified in the power failure monitoring process, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the game can be played with the set value that was set as the object to be used before the supply of operating power was stopped.

According to the feature f6, even if a power failure occurs in a situation where the set value to be used is set, the occurrence of the power failure is specified by the power failure monitoring process, so when the supply of the operating power is resumed, the game can be played in a situation where the set value selected at the time of the power failure is used. As a result, even if a power failure occurs while the set values to be used are being set, it is not necessary to set the set values again when the supply of operating power is resumed.

For the configuration of features f1 to f6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic f group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a plate storing part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storing part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area according to the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the game machines such as those illustrated above, it is necessary to appropriately deal with the occurrence of a power failure, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group g>
Features g1. Setting correspondence storage means having a plurality of first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas (first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the thirty-ninth embodiment, first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c in the fortieth embodiment) for storing setting correspondence information (low-probability mode success/failure table, high-probability mode success/failure table) corresponding to the player's advantage (setting correspondence storage area 325, fourth setting correspondence storage area in the thirty-ninth embodiment) 0 embodiment, the setting correspondence storage area 326);
setting means for setting the setting value to be used (function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63);
profit-related means for executing profit-related processing (step S504) related to the player's profit using the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (function of executing special figure fluctuation start processing in the main side CPU 63);
with
A gaming machine, wherein the number of types of the setting values that can be set by the setting means is smaller than the first predetermined number.

According to the feature g1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, in a configuration in which a first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to setting values are provided, the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to share the configuration of the game machine having the first predetermined number of types of set values to be used and the setting correspondence storage means, and to easily perform the design work of the game machine when changing the number of types of set values. From the above, it becomes possible to make the configuration regarding the set value suitable.

Feature g2. correspondence information storage means (set value counter in work area 221 for specific control) capable of storing correspondence information corresponding to each of the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas;
The setting means sets the setting value to be used by changing the correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means based on a change operation,
The setting correspondence information of the setting value that can be set by the setting means is stored in at least one of the setting correspondence storage areas, and the same setting correspondence information is stored in a plurality of the setting correspondence storage areas that are part of the first predetermined number, so that the setting correspondence information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of the setting correspondence storage areas.

According to the feature g2, the setting value to be used is changed by changing the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means based on the change operation, and the profit-related processing is executed in a mode corresponding to the setting value to be used by using the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the changed correspondence information in the profit-related processing. In this case, the setting correspondence information of the setting value that can be set by the setting means is stored in at least one setting correspondence storage area, and the same setting correspondence information is stored in the plurality of setting correspondence storage areas that are part of the first predetermined number, so that the setting correspondence information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas. As a result, the number of types of setting values to be used can be reduced to a number smaller than the first predetermined number while using the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas as they are and using the configuration for determining the setting values to be used by using the correspondence information storage means as they are.

Feature g3. The profit-related means are
means for reading out the setting correspondence information from the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means (function for executing a right/wrong table reading process in the main CPU 63);
means for executing the profit-related process using the read setting correspondence information (function for executing the process of step S504 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature g2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature g3, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is less than the first predetermined number, profit-related processing may be executed using the setting correspondence information read out from the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means, so that the configuration for reading the setting correspondence information when executing the profit-related processing can be used as it is.

Feature g4. Predetermined display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S9801 to S9804 in the main side CPU 63) that causes a predetermined display means (fourth notification display device 204) to display corresponding to the current setting value in a situation where the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means can be changed;
The predetermined display control means is
means for reading display information of setting values corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information of the correspondence information storage means (a function of executing the processing of steps S9801 to S9803 in the main CPU 63);
means for causing the predetermined display means to display corresponding to the display information of the read set value (function for executing the process of step S9804 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature g2 or g3, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature g4, when changing the setting value to be used, it is possible to change the setting value while confirming the display corresponding to the current setting value displayed on the predetermined display means. In this case, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is less than the first predetermined number, the display information of the setting values corresponding to the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information of the correspondence information storage means is read and the display corresponding to the read setting value display information is displayed on the predetermined display means. As a result, it is possible to use the configuration for reading the display information of the setting value as it is when executing the display corresponding to the setting value.

Feature g5. the number of types of the setting values that can be set by the setting means is a divisor of the first predetermined number and is different from the first predetermined number;
The gaming machine according to characteristic g4, wherein the number of the setting correspondence storage areas storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to each setting value is the same among the setting values.

According to the feature g5, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is less than the first predetermined number, the frequency with which the display corresponding to the setting values is performed on the predetermined display means can be the same for each setting value.

Feature g6. The gaming machine according to feature g4 or g5, wherein the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information in a continuous order in the change order of the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means does not store the setting correspondence information corresponding to the same set value.

According to the feature g6, it is possible to change the set value to be displayed on the predetermined display means each time the change operation is performed. As a result, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is less than the first predetermined number, it is possible to improve the operability of the change operation.

With respect to the configuration of features g1 to g6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group g, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to optimize the configuration regarding the set values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group h>
Features h1. Display means (special figure display unit 37a, special figure reservation display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, general figure reservation display unit 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265),
Display control means (main side CPU 63) for transmitting display data (display data signal, display clock signal) corresponding to display contents to be displayed on the display means;
display execution means (display IC 266) for setting display on the display means so that display content corresponding to the display data is displayed when the display data is transmitted by the display control means;
In a game machine equipped with
A plurality of the display means are provided,
The display control means comprises sequential transmission means (a function of executing second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) for sequentially transmitting the display data corresponding to each of the plurality of display means to the display execution means,
When the display data is transmitted by the display control means, the display execution means performs the display setting so that display contents corresponding to the display data are displayed on the display means to which the display data is set among the plurality of display means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the transmission interval of the display data from the sequential transmission means to the display execution means is a transmission interval at which the display setting is performed by the display execution means for each display means before the display corresponding to the display data can not be maintained on each display means.

According to the feature h1, the display execution means performs display settings for the display means in accordance with the display data transmitted from the display control means, whereby the display means is controlled to display content corresponding to the display data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the display control means. In this case, in a configuration provided with a plurality of display means, one display execution means is shared for the plurality of display means instead of providing the display execution means corresponding to the plurality of display means on a one-to-one basis. This makes it possible to increase the number of display units while suppressing an increase in the number of display execution units. Further, the transmission interval of the display data from the display control means to the display execution means is set to a transmission interval at which the display setting is performed for each display means by the display execution means before the display corresponding to the display data can not be maintained in each display means. As a result, even in a configuration in which one display executing means is shared by a plurality of display means, it is possible to appropriately perform display corresponding to display data on each display means. From the above, it is possible to make the configuration for controlling the display of the display means suitable.

Feature h2. The gaming machine according to feature h1, characterized in that, when transmitting the display data to the display execution means, the sequential transmission means transmits, to the display execution means, identifiable information (type data signal, type clock signal) that enables identification of the type of the display means for which the display data is to be set.

According to the feature h2, when display data is transmitted from the display control means, the display execution means may set the display data to the display means corresponding to the identifiable information transmitted from the display control means. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration of the display execution means even if one display execution means is used for a plurality of display means.

Feature h3. The gaming machine according to feature h1 or h2, characterized in that the sequential transmission means transmits the display data so that the update cycle is repeated, when the display data is set once for each of the plurality of display means in a predetermined order.

According to the feature h3, the display control means can change the display means to which the display data is to be transmitted according to the predetermined order, so that the processing configuration of the display control means can be simplified.

Feature h4. The gaming machine according to any one of features h1 to h3, wherein the sequential transmission means transmits the display data to one of the display means when the display means becomes the transmission target, even if the contents of the display data are the same as the contents of the display data transmitted last time with the display means as the transmission target.

According to the feature h4, the display data to be transmitted is transmitted even if the content of the display data to be transmitted is not changed. Therefore, even in a configuration in which one display execution means is used for a plurality of display means, the same display can be continued by the predetermined display means.

Feature h5. The gaming machine according to any one of features h1 to h4, wherein the sequential transmission means executes a process for transmitting the display data in a predetermined interrupt process (second timer interrupt process) that is started by interrupting a situation in which the display control means is executing a predetermined process.

According to the feature h5, since the processing for transmitting the display data is executed in the predetermined interrupt processing, it is possible to set the cycle in which the display data is set to each display means to be the predetermined cycle. Therefore, even in a configuration in which one display execution means is shared for a plurality of display means, display data can be set by the display execution means for each display means before the display corresponding to the display data cannot be maintained in each display means.

Feature h6. The gaming machine according to feature h5, wherein a process for transmitting the display data to the plurality of display means for which the display setting is to be performed by the display execution means is integrated into the predetermined interrupt process.

According to the feature h6, it is possible to set the display data to the display means to be set by the display execution means at the same period.

Feature h7. The display control means includes means for interrupting and starting a specific interrupt process (first timer interrupt process) in a situation where the predetermined process is being executed (function for executing the first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to feature h5 or h6, wherein the interrupt cycle of the predetermined interrupt process is shorter than the interrupt cycle of the specific interrupt process.

According to the feature h7, the process of transmitting the display data to the display executing means is executed in the predetermined interrupt process having a cycle shorter than the interrupt cycle of the specific interrupt process. This makes it possible to transmit display data in a shorter cycle than in a configuration in which processing for transmitting display data to the display execution means is executed in specific interrupt processing.

Feature h8. The gaming machine according to feature h7, wherein a process for progressing the game is executed in the specific interrupt process.

According to the feature h8, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while activating the specific interrupt process at an appropriate cycle in executing the process for progressing the game.

Feature h9. The game machine according to feature h7 or h8, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and started even in a situation where the specific interrupt process is being executed.

According to the feature h9, the predetermined interrupt processing is started by interrupting even when the specific interrupt processing is being executed, so even in a configuration in which the specific interrupt processing is started by interrupting, it is possible to set the transmission cycle of the display data to the predetermined cycle.

Feature h10. The gaming machine according to any one of features h7 to h9, wherein the interruption of the specific interrupt process is prohibited when the predetermined interrupt process is started, and the interrupt of the specific interrupt process is permitted when the predetermined interrupt process is terminated.

According to the feature h10, it is possible to prevent the specific interrupt processing from being interrupted and executed in a situation where the predetermined interrupt processing is being executed. This makes it possible to give priority to processing for transmitting display data.

Feature h11. The display control means is means for executing the processing at the start of supply of operating power when the supply of operating power is started (the function of executing the processing of steps S7901 to S7918 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S9501 to S9518 in the main CPU 63, and in the forty-second embodiment, the function of executing the processing in steps S9901 to S9917 in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to any one of features h5 to h10, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed.

According to the feature h11, it is possible to control the display of a plurality of display means even in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. In addition, since the configuration is such that the predetermined interrupt processing interrupts the processing at the start of supply of operating power and is activated, display control of a plurality of display means can be performed in a situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed without complicating the processing configuration of the processing at the start of supply of operating power.

Feature h12. A setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
In a situation in which the processing for starting supply of the operating power is being executed, a setting possible situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed,
The gaming machine according to feature h11, wherein the sequential transmission means transmits to the display execution means the display data for performing display corresponding to the current set value on the predetermined display means in the settable state.

According to the characteristic h12, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means while the setting value to be used is being set, it becomes easy to set the setting value to be used.

Feature h13. The display control means includes means for executing a progress corresponding process (a function of executing a first timer interrupt process in the main side CPU 63) to control the progress of the game after the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is completed,
The sequential transmission means transmits to the display execution means the display data for displaying correspondence corresponding to the execution result of the progress correspondence process on at least a part of the plurality of display means,
The gaming machine according to feature h11 or h12, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and started even after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed.

According to the feature h13, by using the predetermined interrupt process, it is possible to control the display of the plurality of display means both in the situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed and in the situation after the process at the start of supply of the operating power is finished.

With respect to the configuration of features h1 to h13, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature i group>
Features i1. a first interrupt executing means (a function of executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) that executes a first interrupt process by interrupting another process based on the elapse of a first interrupt cycle when another process is being executed;
a second interrupt executing means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) that executes a second interrupt process by interrupting the other process based on the elapse of the second interrupt period while another process is being executed;
with
the second interrupt cycle is a cycle shorter than the first interrupt cycle;
Processing for controlling the display of predetermined display means (special figure display unit 37a, special figure reservation display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, general figure reservation display unit 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) is performed in the second interrupt process.

According to the feature i1, the process for controlling the display of the predetermined display means is executed in the predetermined interrupt process, which has a shorter period than the interrupt period of the specific interrupt process. This makes it possible to control the display of the predetermined display means in a shorter cycle than in the case where the process for controlling the display of the predetermined display means is executed in the specific interrupt process.

Feature i2. The gaming machine according to feature i1, wherein a process for advancing the game is executed in the first interrupt process.

According to the feature i2, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while activating the first interrupt process at an appropriate cycle in executing the process for progressing the game.

Feature i3. The gaming machine according to feature i1 or i2, wherein the second interrupt process is interrupted and started even in a situation where the first interrupt process is being executed.

According to the feature i3, the second interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the first interrupt process is being executed, so even if the first interrupt process is interrupted and started, display control of a predetermined display means can be performed at a predetermined cycle.

Feature i4. The gaming machine according to any one of features i1 to i3, wherein the interruption of the first interruption process is prohibited when the second interruption process is started, and the interruption of the first interruption process is permitted when the second interruption process is terminated.

According to feature i4, it is possible to prevent the first interrupt process from being interrupted and executed while the second interrupt process is being executed. This makes it possible to give priority to the display control of the predetermined display means.

Feature i5. Equipped with means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power when supply of operating power is started (function for executing main processing in main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to any one of features i1 to i4, wherein the second interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature i5, it is possible to control the display of a predetermined display means even in a situation in which the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. In addition, since the second interrupt process is activated by interrupting the process at the start of supplying the operating power, it is possible to control the display of the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed without complicating the processing configuration of the process at the start of supplying the operating power.

Feature i6. A setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
In a situation in which the processing for starting supply of the operating power is being executed, a setting possible situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed,
The gaming machine according to feature i5, wherein the second interrupt executing means executes, in the second interrupt process, a process for displaying a current set value on the predetermined display means in the settable state.

According to feature i6, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means while the setting value to be used is being set, it becomes easier to set the setting value to be used.

Feature i7. The gaming machine according to feature i5 or i6, characterized in that the second interrupt executing means executes the second interrupt process based on the passage of the second interrupt period even after the process at the time of starting supply of the operating power is completed.

According to the feature i7, by using the predetermined interrupt process, it is possible to control the display of the predetermined display means both in the situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed and in the situation after the process at the start of supply of the operating power is finished.

In addition, for the configuration of features i1 to i7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the group h of features and the group i of features, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to have a suitable configuration for performing display on the display means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature j group>
Feature j1. Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (a function of executing the processing of steps S7901 to S7918 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment. , the function of executing the processing of steps S9501 to S9518 in the main side CPU 63 in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S9901 to S9917 in the main side CPU 63 in the forty-second embodiment);
Predetermined interrupt execution means for executing predetermined interrupt processing by interrupting the processing at the start of supply of operating power (function for executing first timer interrupt processing in main CPU 63, function for executing second timer interrupt processing in main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature j1, the predetermined interrupt processing is interrupted and activated even when the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, so that the execution of the processing set as the predetermined interrupt processing can be prioritized even immediately after the start of supply of operating power. Further, since it is not necessary to set the processing set as the predetermined interrupt processing for the processing at the start of supply of the operating power, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the processing set as the predetermined interrupt processing even immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power without complicating the processing configuration of the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power. As described above, it is possible to suitably perform processing when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature j2. The predetermined interrupt executing means is a predetermined display means (special figure display unit 37a, special figure reservation display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, general figure reservation display unit 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

According to the feature j2, it is possible to perform a predetermined display on the predetermined display means even immediately after the supply of operating power is started.

Feature j3. A setting means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
In a situation in which the processing for starting supply of the operating power is being executed, a setting possible situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed,
The gaming machine according to feature j1 or j2, wherein the predetermined interrupt executing means executes, in the predetermined interrupt process, a process for displaying a current set value on a predetermined display means (fourth notification display device 204) in the settable state.

According to the feature j3, the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means while the setting value to be used is being set, which makes it easier to set the setting value to be used.

Feature j4. The gaming machine according to any one of features j1 to j3, wherein the predetermined interrupt executing means executes the predetermined interrupt processing based on the elapse of a predetermined interrupt cycle even after the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is completed.

According to feature j4, by using the predetermined interrupt process, it is possible to execute the process set as the predetermined interrupt process in both the situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed and the situation after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed.

Feature j5. The gaming machine according to any one of features j1 to j4, wherein the predetermined interrupt executing means executes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in the predetermined interrupt process.

According to the feature j5, the power failure monitoring process is executed even when the process for starting the supply of the operating power is being executed. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the process for starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Feature j6. The predetermined interrupt process includes a progress corresponding process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
When the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and started while the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed, the power failure monitoring process is executed, but the progress handling process is not executed.
When the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and started in a situation where the post-end process (steps S8822 to S8825 in the main CPU 63) is being executed after the process at the start of supply of the operating power ends, the gaming machine according to feature j5, wherein both the power failure monitoring process and the progress handling process can be executed.

According to the feature j6, in a configuration in which the occurrence of a power failure is periodically monitored in a situation in which the process for starting the supply of operating power is performed by using the predetermined interrupt process that can be started by interrupting in the situation that the post-end process is being performed, even if the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and started in the situation that the process for starting the supply of the operating power is being performed, it is possible to prevent the execution of the progress corresponding process for controlling the progress of the game.

For the configuration of features j1 to j6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic j group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the game machines such as the above examples, it is necessary to perform the processing appropriately when the supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic k group>
Features k1. History storage execution means (a function of executing normal ball entry management processing in the main side CPU 63) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (normal counter area 231);
information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means;
A mode information display control means (function for executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the main side CPU 63) that controls the display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that a display corresponding to the mode information derived by the information derivation means is performed;
Predetermined response display control means (a function of executing the processing of step SA320 and the second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) that causes the information display means to perform a predetermined response display (pre-shift display) before the display corresponding to the mode information is newly started based on the occurrence of a predetermined display opportunity;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature k1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. Since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized alteration of the history information. Mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means, and display corresponding to the derived mode information is performed on the information display means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. In addition, the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display means before the display corresponding to the mode information is newly started based on the occurrence of the predetermined display opportunity. Thus, when a prescribed display opportunity occurs, the information display means can give priority to the display corresponding to the prescribed correspondence display over the display corresponding to the mode information, and the occurrence of the prescribed display opportunity can be notified by using the information display means.

Feature k2. A period elapse specifying means for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of the predetermined period end trigger (function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to feature k1, wherein the predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to perform the predetermined correspondence display, assuming that the predetermined display opportunity has occurred when the elapse of the predetermined period is identified by the period lapse identification means.

According to the feature k2, when the predetermined period has passed, the information display means displays the predetermined correspondence, and then the information display means newly starts the display corresponding to the mode information. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the mode information displayed by the information display means is after the predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Feature k3. The information derivation means uses the history information corresponding to the predetermined event that occurred after the predetermined period based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed has been identified by the period lapse identification means to derive the mode information,
The gaming machine according to feature k2, wherein the predetermined response display control means causes the information display means to display the predetermined response display before the information display means displays the mode information derived by the information derivation means by using the history information corresponding to the predetermined event occurring after the predetermined period based on the elapse of the predetermined period being identified by the period lapse identification means.

According to feature k3, in a configuration in which new derivation of mode information is performed on the basis of the elapse of a predetermined period of time, when the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the information display means displays a predetermined corresponding display, and after the elapse of the predetermined period of time, display corresponding to the newly derived mode information is performed. Thus, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means is the display corresponding to the mode information newly derived after the lapse of the predetermined period.

Feature k4. The gaming machine according to feature k3, further comprising means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means (a function of executing the processing of step SA217 in the main CPU 63) based on the fact that the predetermined period of time has passed has been identified by the period lapse identification means.

According to the feature k4, since the history information in the history information storage means is erased when the predetermined period has passed, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity of the history information storage means.

Feature k5. storage execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period derived by the information derivation means as mode information corresponding to the period in the mode information storage means (computation result storage area 234) based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed is specified by the period lapse specifying means (the function of executing the processing of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63);
The mode information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information stored in the mode information storage means is performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features k2 to k4, wherein the predetermined response display control means causes the information display means to perform the predetermined response display before the information display means performs the display corresponding to the period response mode information newly stored in the mode information storage means by the storage execution means based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed is specified by the period lapse determination means.

According to the feature k5, past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as period-corresponding mode information, and display corresponding to the period-corresponding mode information is performed by the information display means. Thus, by checking the information display means, the manager of the gaming hall can comprehend the past period correspondence mode information derived in units of a predetermined period. Further, when the predetermined period has passed, after the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display means, the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived due to the lapse of the predetermined period is performed. Thus, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information on the information display means is the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived based on the lapse of the predetermined period.

Feature k6. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of period-corresponding mode information corresponding to each of the different predetermined periods,
The gaming machine according to feature k5, wherein the mode information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to each of the plurality of period corresponding mode information stored in the mode information storage means is performed.

According to the feature k6, a plurality of pieces of past period-corresponding mode information derived in units of predetermined periods are stored, and the information display means displays corresponding to the plurality of period-corresponding mode information. Therefore, it is possible to compare the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to a plurality of predetermined periods.

Feature k7. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k6, further comprising means (a function of executing step SA316 and second timer interrupt processing in the main side CPU 63) for causing the information display means to enter a pre-switching state (an interval non-display state) before performing display corresponding to the mode information different from the mode information from a state in which the display corresponding to the mode information is being performed.

According to the feature k7, when the mode information to be displayed is switched, the information display means is put in the pre-switching state, so that the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp that the mode information to be displayed has been switched. In this case, the configuration of the feature k1 is provided, and a predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means based on occurrence of a predetermined display trigger. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that a predetermined display opportunity has occurred by using the information display means that performs display corresponding to different mode information with the pre-switching state interposed therebetween.

Feature k8. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k7, wherein the predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to start the predetermined correspondence display when the predetermined display opportunity occurs, even if the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the mode information has not elapsed.

According to the feature k8, when a predetermined display opportunity occurs, the predetermined corresponding display is started even if the display corresponding to the mode information is in progress. As a result, it is possible to notify early that a predetermined display opportunity has occurred.

Feature k9. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k7, wherein, when the predetermined display opportunity occurs during a display continuation period of the display corresponding to the mode information, the predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to start the predetermined correspondence display after the display continuation period has passed.

According to the feature k9, even if a predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined corresponding display is started after the display corresponding to the mode information displayed at that time is completed. As a result, it is possible to notify that a predetermined display opportunity has occurred while not interfering with the display corresponding to the mode information that has already been performed.

Features k10. A mode information storage means (computation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means,
The mode information storage means comprises a plurality of specific storage areas (current status area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314) so as to be able to store each of the plurality of modes information derived at different timings by the information derivation means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k9, wherein the mode information display control means controls the information display means so that displays corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas are sequentially executed in accordance with a predetermined display order.

According to the feature k10, since notifications corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information are sequentially executed, it is possible to individually grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of information display means. In addition, since the display corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed according to the predetermined display order, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp the type of the mode information to be displayed.

Feature k11. The gaming machine according to feature k10, wherein a predetermined display order is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

According to the characteristic k11, since the predetermined display order of the display corresponding to the mode information is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of mode information to be displayed when the display corresponding to one mode information is newly started.

Feature k12. The gaming machine according to feature k10 or k11, wherein, when the mode information display control means causes the information display means to perform the display corresponding to the mode information after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, the display corresponding to the mode information corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order is started.

According to the feature k12, after the predetermined corresponding display is performed based on the occurrence of the predetermined display opportunity, the display corresponding to the mode corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order is started. Thereby, when a predetermined display opportunity occurs, it is possible to reconfirm the display corresponding to the mode information from the first order of the predetermined display order.

Feature k13. period elapse specifying means for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of the predetermined period end trigger (function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63);
storage executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed by the period lapse specifying means, as period corresponding mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas;
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features k10 to k12, wherein the storage execution means causes the period correspondence mode information to be stored in the plurality of specific storage areas according to the order derived by the information derivation means.

According to the feature k13, it is possible to confirm the period correspondence mode information according to the derived order.

Feature k14. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k13, wherein the information derivation means executes an information derivation process for deriving the mode information based on the occurrence of a process execution trigger, and executes the information derivation process multiple times from the start of the derivation of the mode information to the completion of the derivation of the mode information.

According to the feature k14, the information derivation process is executed a plurality of times from the start of the derivation of the mode information until the derivation of the mode information is completed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for executing the information derivation process compared to a configuration in which the derivation of the mode information is completed in one information derivation process.

Feature k15. period elapse specifying means for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of the predetermined period end trigger (function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63);
storage executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period derived by the information deriving means by using the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed by the period lapse specifying means, as period corresponding mode information in the mode information storage means (computation result storage area 234);
with
The mode information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information stored in the mode information storage means is performed,
The gaming machine according to feature k14, wherein the predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to perform the predetermined correspondence display, assuming that the predetermined display opportunity has occurred when the elapse of the predetermined period is identified by the period lapse identification means.

According to the feature k15, past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as period-corresponding mode information, and display corresponding to the period-corresponding mode information is performed by the information display means. Thus, by checking the information display means, the manager of the gaming hall can comprehend the past period correspondence mode information derived in units of a predetermined period. Further, when the predetermined period has passed, after the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display means, the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived due to the lapse of the predetermined period is performed. Thus, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information on the information display means is the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived based on the lapse of the predetermined period. In addition, since it is possible to perform the predetermined correspondence display during the period in which the period correspondence manner information is being derived, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the period correspondence manner information from being performed regardless of the fact that the period correspondence manner information is being derived after the predetermined period has passed.

Feature k16. The gaming machine according to feature k15, wherein the predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to perform the predetermined correspondence display for a period longer than the longest period required for deriving the one piece of mode information by the information deriving means.

According to the feature k16, when the predetermined period has passed and the period correspondence mode information is being derived, the information display means displays the predetermined correspondence.

For the configuration of features k1 to k16, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group l>
Features l1. History storage execution means (a function of executing normal ball entry management processing in the main side CPU 63) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (normal counter area 231);
information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means;
Mode information storage means (computation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means;
mode information display control means (function for executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the main side CPU 63) for controlling the display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that the display corresponding to the mode information stored in the mode information storage means is performed;
with
The mode information storage means comprises a plurality of specific storage areas (current status area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, third history area 314) so as to be able to store each of the plurality of mode information derived at different timings by the information derivation means,
The mode information display control means controls the information display means so that displays corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas are sequentially executed according to a predetermined display order.

According to feature l1, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. Since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized alteration of the history information. Mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means, and display corresponding to the derived mode information is performed on the information display means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event.

In addition, since a plurality of mode information with different derived timings are stored in the mode information storage means and notification corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information is sequentially executed, it is possible to individually grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of information display means. In addition, since the display corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed according to the predetermined display order, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp the type of the mode information to be displayed.

Feature l2. The gaming machine according to feature l1, wherein a predetermined display order is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

According to feature l2, since the predetermined display order of the display corresponding to the mode information is determined in association with a plurality of specific storage areas, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of mode information to be displayed when the display corresponding to one mode information is newly started.

Feature l3. Predetermined response display control means (a function of executing step SA320 and second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) that causes the information display means to perform a predetermined response display (pre-shift display) before the display corresponding to the mode information is newly started based on the occurrence of a predetermined display opportunity,
The gaming machine according to feature l1 or l2, wherein, when the mode information display control means causes the information display means to perform the display corresponding to the mode information after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, the display corresponding to the mode information corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order is started.

According to feature l3, after the predetermined corresponding display is performed based on the occurrence of the predetermined display opportunity, the display corresponding to the mode corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order is started. As a result, when a predetermined display opportunity occurs, it is possible to reconfirm the display corresponding to the style information from the first order of the predetermined display order.

Feature l4. period elapse specifying means for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of the predetermined period end trigger (function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63);
storage executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed by the period elapse specifying means, as period corresponding mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas;
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features l1 to l3, wherein the storage execution means stores the period correspondence mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas according to the order derived by the information derivation means.

According to the feature l4, it is possible to check the period correspondence mode information according to the derived order.

Features l5. The gaming machine according to any one of features 11 to 14, further comprising means (a function of executing step SA316 and second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) for causing the information display means to enter a pre-switching state (interval non-display state) before performing display corresponding to the mode information different from the mode information in a state where the display corresponding to the mode information is being performed.

According to the feature l5, when the mode information to be displayed is switched, the information display means is put in the pre-switching state, so that the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp that the mode information to be displayed has been switched.

For the configuration of features l1 to l5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group m>
Features m1. History storage execution means (a function of executing normal ball entry management processing in the main side CPU 63) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event by executing the game in the history storage means (normal counter area 231);
information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means;
with
The information derivation means executes an information derivation process for deriving the mode information based on the occurrence of a process execution trigger, and executes the information derivation process a plurality of times from the start of the derivation of the mode information to the completion of the derivation of the mode information.

According to feature m1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to that event is stored in the history storage means. Since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized alteration of the history information. Further, by deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. In addition, since the information derivation process is executed a plurality of times from the start of the derivation of the mode information until the derivation of the mode information is completed, the processing load for executing the information derivation process can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the derivation of the mode information is completed in one information derivation process.

Feature m2. period elapse specifying means for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of the predetermined period end trigger (function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63);
storage executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period derived by the information deriving means by using the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed by the period lapse specifying means, as period corresponding mode information in the mode information storage means (computation result storage area 234);
Mode information display control means (function for executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the main side CPU 63) for controlling display of information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so as to perform display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information stored in the mode information storage means;
Predetermined response display control means (a function of executing step SA320 and second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) that causes the information display means to perform a predetermined response display based on the elapse of the predetermined period specified by the period elapse specifying means;
The gaming machine according to feature m1, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature m2, past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as period-corresponding mode information, and display corresponding to the period-corresponding mode information is performed by the information display means. Thus, by checking the information display means, the manager of the gaming hall can comprehend the past period correspondence mode information derived in units of a predetermined period. Further, when the predetermined period has passed, after the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display means, the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived due to the lapse of the predetermined period is performed. Thus, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information on the information display means is the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived based on the lapse of the predetermined period. In addition, since it is possible to perform the predetermined correspondence display during the period in which the period correspondence manner information is being derived, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the period correspondence manner information from being performed regardless of the fact that the period correspondence manner information is being derived after the predetermined period has passed.

Feature m3. The gaming machine according to feature m2, wherein the predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to perform the predetermined correspondence display for a period longer than the longest period required for deriving the one piece of mode information by the information deriving means.

According to the feature m3, when the predetermined period has passed and the period correspondence mode information is being derived, the information display means displays the predetermined correspondence.

For the configuration of features m1 to m3, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature k group, the feature group l, and the feature group m, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a plate storing part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storing part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area according to the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature n group>
Features n1. setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of step SA709 in the main side CPU 63);
Situation generating means (in the forty-fifth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA417 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-fifth embodiment, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA417 in the main-side CPU 63 in the forty-fifth embodiment. A function of making an affirmative determination in steps SA905 and SA916 in 63 and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917);
notification generating means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting value to be used set by the setting means based on the second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) being performed when the supply of the operating power is started;
with
The situation generating means includes post-start generating means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 of the main CPU 63 in the forty-fifth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in steps SA905 and SA916 of the main side CPU 63 in the forty-sixth embodiment) for making the settable situation even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable situation and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. machine.

According to the feature n1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In addition, in order to change the set value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the set value to be used. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so that the manager of the game hall can confirm the setting value to be used as necessary.

Further, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, and if the supply of operating power is started after that, even if the second setting-related operation is performed, the settable state is established. Thus, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value to be used is being changed, the change of the set value to be used can be prioritized over the notification of the set value to be used when the supply of the operating power is restarted after that, and the game can be prevented from being started even though the change of the set value to be used is not actually completed.

Feature n2. The gaming machine according to feature n1, characterized by comprising a situation notification means (a function of executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63 and a function of executing a second timer interrupt process) for notifying the set value in the process of being changed in the settable state.

According to the feature n2, since the set value that is being changed is notified when the setting is possible, it is possible to change the set value while grasping the current set value. In addition, by notifying the set value that is being changed in the settable state in this way, even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the settable state is set, and even if the setting value change operation is prioritized, it is possible to substantially confirm the set value.

Feature n3. Characteristic feature n2, characterized in that the situation notification means and the notification generation means are characterized in that the target setting values are displayed on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to.

According to the characteristic n3, the target setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in both cases of changing the setting value and confirming the setting value, so that the predetermined display means can be used for each situation. In addition, even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, even if the setting-enabled state is established, the set value is displayed by the predetermined display means when the set-enabled state is established, so that the manager of the game hall who performed the second setting-related operation can confirm the set value by visually checking the predetermined display means.

Feature n4. The gaming machine according to feature n3, wherein the status notification means causes the predetermined display means to display a display corresponding to the set value being changed and a display corresponding to the setting possible state.

According to the feature n4, when the setting is possible, the predetermined display means not only displays the setting value that is being changed but also displays the setting possible. Thus, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state and the supply of the operating power is started after that and the settable state is reached despite the second setting-related operation, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp the settable state.

Feature n5. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics n1 to n4, wherein the post-start generating means enables a change in the set value from the set value selected when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state when the settable state is set.

According to the feature n5, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, when the supply of the operating power is restarted, it is possible to continuously change the setting value from the state immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped.

Feature n6. setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the settable state;
with
The situation generation means includes means for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change opportunity occurs in the settable situation (function for executing the processing of step SA708 in the main CPU 63),
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an end trigger occurs in the settable situation, thereby setting a setting value that was a selection target in the settable situation as a use target,
The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n5, wherein the post-start generating means enables the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means to be changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the supply of operating power is stopped during the settable condition.

According to feature n6, setting correspondence storage means for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to a setting value to be used and selection correspondence storing means for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to a setting value in the process of being changed in a settable state are provided, thereby making it possible to change the set value in the settable state while storing and holding information on the set value that was set before the settable state was started. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means is changed when the supply of the operating power is stopped. Thus, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the change operation of the set value can be continuously performed from the state immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped.

Feature n7. The situation generation means is means for making it possible to change the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means (in the forty-fifth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination at step SA417 in the main CPU 63, and in the forty-sixth embodiment, making an affirmative determination at step SA917 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature n6, characterized by comprising a function to play.

According to feature n7, if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed after the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, it is possible to restart the change of the setting value from the setting value that was the object of change before the supply of operating power was stopped. The setting value is changed from . This makes it possible to change the initial set value when starting to change the set value according to the operation content when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Feature n8. The game machine according to any one of features n1 to n7, wherein the post-start generating means can cause the settable state to occur even if neither the first setting-related operation nor the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state and then the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature n8, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state and the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the settable state can be reached even if neither the first setting-related operation nor the second setting-related operation is performed. Therefore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, it is possible to positively create a situation in which the setting value can be changed when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Feature n9. The first setting-related operation includes setting the setting key inserting portion (setting key inserting portion 68a) to a predetermined corresponding state (ON-operated state) by the setting key,
The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n8, wherein the situation generation means includes means for terminating the settable situation based on identifying that the setting key insertion unit has been changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state (OFF-operated state) by the setting key (a function of executing the processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature n9, since it is necessary to bring the setting key insertion part into a predetermined corresponding state by using the setting key in order to make the setting possible state, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of illegally changing the setting value to be used. In this case, the settable state does not end only when the setting key insertion portion is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the setting key insertion portion is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thus, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state and then the supply of operating power is started under the condition that the setting key insertion part is in the specific correspondence state, the settable situation is not ended immediately, and the settable situation is ended by changing the setting key insertion part from the specific correspondence state to the predetermined correspondence state and then further changing from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state, so that the settable state can be ended at a timing preferable for the manager of the game hall.

Feature n10. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics n1 to n9, wherein the condition generating means causes the setting possible condition when the first setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is stopped while the notification generating means is informing of the set value to be used and when the supply of operating power is started after that.

According to the feature n10, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value to be used is being notified, the setting becomes possible when the first setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. As a result, it is possible to give priority to the work of changing the set value over the work of confirming the set value.

With respect to the configuration of features n1 to n10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group o>
Features o1. Means for executing profit giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
Setting-related execution means for executing predetermined setting-related processing related to the setting value (function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63, function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63);
Midway restart means for restarting the predetermined setting-related processing from the middle after the supply of operating power is started after the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed (in the forty-fifth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA414 in the main-side CPU 63; in the forty-sixth embodiment, a function of making affirmative determination in steps SA905 and SA916 in the main-side CPU 63. ) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature o1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the predetermined setting-related processing is restarted when the supply of operating power is resumed. Accordingly, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting-related processing, the predetermined setting-related processing can be continued when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Feature o2. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing on the basis of a predetermined setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and pressing of the reset button 68c if the predetermined setting-related processing is setting value update processing, and ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a if the predetermined setting-related processing is setting confirmation processing).
The gaming machine according to feature o1, wherein the midway restarting means restarts the predetermined setting-related processing from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed.

According to the feature o2, when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the predetermined setting-related processing is restarted from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prioritize the restart from the middle of the predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature o3. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on the predetermined setting-related operation being performed when supply of operating power is started,
The midway restart means restarts the predetermined setting-related processing from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature o2, wherein when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started after that, the predetermined setting-related processing is newly started by the setting-related execution unit instead of being restarted from the middle by the midway restarting unit.

According to feature o3, when the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation is performed, so that it is possible to make it difficult to illegally execute the predetermined setting-related processing. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting-related processing, the predetermined setting-related processing is restarted from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed, so that the restart from the middle of the predetermined setting-related processing can be prioritized. On the other hand, when the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the prescribed setting-related processing, when the prescribed setting-related operation is performed, the prescribed setting-related processing is not restarted from the middle but is newly started. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting-related processing, it is possible to select either to restart the predetermined setting-related processing or to restart the predetermined setting-related processing from the middle depending on whether or not the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Feature o4. The predetermined setting-related operation includes setting the setting key inserting portion (setting key inserting portion 68a) to a predetermined corresponding state (ON-operated state) by the setting key,
The gaming machine according to feature o2 or o3, wherein the setting-related execution means includes means for terminating the predetermined setting-related processing on the basis of identifying that the setting key insertion unit has been changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state (OFF-operated state) by the setting key (a function of executing the processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature o4, it is necessary to put the setting key inserting part into a predetermined corresponding state by using the setting key in order to start the predetermined setting-related processing. In this case, the predetermined setting-related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion portion is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the setting key insertion portion is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thus, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and then the supply of operating power is started while the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, the predetermined setting-related processing is not terminated immediately, and the predetermined setting-related processing is terminated by changing the setting key insertion unit from the specific correspondence state to the predetermined correspondence state and then further changing from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. .

Feature o5. The gaming machine according to any one of features o1 to o4, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used.

According to feature o5, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, when the supply of operating power is restarted, it is possible to resume changing the setting value from the setting value in the middle of changing. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the operation of changing the setting value can be continued when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Feature o6. The predetermined setting-related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used,
setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to setting values to be used;
selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the predetermined setting-related processing;
with
The setting-related execution means includes:
means for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs as the predetermined setting-related processing (a function of executing the processing of step SA708 in the main CPU 63);
means for setting, as the predetermined setting-related processing, a setting value to be selected as an object to be used by storing information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an end opportunity occurs (a function of executing the processing of step SA709 in the main CPU 63);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features o1 to o5, wherein the halfway restart means enables a setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means to be changed when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed.

According to feature o6, setting correspondence storage means for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to a setting value to be used and selection correspondence storing means for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to a setting value in the process of being changed in a settable state are provided, so that the setting value can be changed in the settable state while storing and holding the information of the set value set before the settable state is started. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value is being changed, the set value is changed from the set value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the supply of the operating power is stopped. Thus, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value is being changed, when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the setting value can be continuously changed from the state immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped.

Feature o7. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on a predetermined setting-related operation being performed when supply of operating power is started,
The midway restart means restarts the predetermined setting-related process from the middle based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation has not been performed when supply of operating power is started,
The setting-related executing means is means for enabling a setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means to be changed from a setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means (in the forty-fifth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA417 in the main-side CPU 63 in the forty-sixth embodiment, and affirmative in step SA917 in the main-side CPU 63 in the forty-sixth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature o6, characterized by comprising a function of making a judgment.

According to feature o7, when the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, it is possible to restart the change of the setting value from the setting value that was to be changed before the supply of operating power was stopped based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation was not performed. The setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to . This makes it possible to change the initial set value when starting to change the set value according to the operation content when the supply of operating power is restarted.

For the configuration of features o1 to o7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic p group>
Features p1. Means for executing profit giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
setting-related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63 and a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value on the basis of a predetermined setting-related operation (an ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c if the predetermined setting-related processing is a setting value updating process, and an ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a if the predetermined setting-related processing is a setting confirmation process);
The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed after the supply of operating power is started, if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of making an affirmative determination in SA905 and step SA916.

According to the feature p1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. Further, it is possible to execute a predetermined setting-related process by performing a predetermined setting-related operation. In this case, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the prescribed setting-related processing is completed, when the supply of operating power is restarted, the prescribed setting-related processing is executed even if the prescribed setting-related operation is not performed. This makes it possible to give priority to execution of predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature p2. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on the predetermined setting-related operation being performed when supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature p1, wherein the post-supply execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature p2, since the predetermined setting-related processing is executed based on the predetermined setting-related operation being performed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally execute the predetermined setting-related processing. In this case, since the predetermined setting-related processing is executed even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the operating power supply is restarted after the operation power supply is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting-related processing, the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing can be prioritized.

Feature p3. The predetermined setting-related operation includes setting the setting key inserting portion (setting key inserting portion 68a) to a predetermined corresponding state (ON-operated state) by the setting key,
The gaming machine according to feature p1 or p2, wherein the setting-related execution means includes means for terminating the predetermined setting-related processing on the basis of identifying that the setting key insertion unit has been changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state (OFF-operated state) by the setting key (a function of executing the processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63).

According to the characteristic p3, since it is necessary to put the setting key insertion part in a predetermined corresponding state by using the setting key in order to start the predetermined setting-related processing, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related processing. In this case, the predetermined setting-related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion portion is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the setting key insertion portion is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thus, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and then the supply of operating power is started while the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, the predetermined setting-related processing is not terminated immediately, and the predetermined setting-related processing is terminated by changing the setting key insertion unit from the specific correspondence state to the predetermined correspondence state and then further changing from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. .

Feature p4. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics p1 to p3, wherein the post-supply execution means does not execute the predetermined setting-related processing when a specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started after the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed.

According to the feature p4, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed if the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that. Thus, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the prescribed setting-related processing, if there is no need to execute the prescribed setting-related processing thereafter, it is possible to prevent the prescribed setting-related processing from being executed by performing the specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature p5. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p4, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying a setting value to be used.

According to the feature p5, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the notification of the set value, when the supply of the operating power is started after that, the notification of the set value is started again even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed. This makes it possible to give priority to notification of the set value.

Feature p6. setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of step SA709 in the main side CPU 63);
Situation generating means (in the forty-fifth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination at step SA412 and a function of making an affirmative determination at step SA417 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-fifth embodiment, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA417 in the main-side CPU 63 in the forty-sixth embodiment. A function of making an affirmative judgment in steps SA905 and SA916 in and a function of making an affirmative judgment in step SA917);
with
The post-supply execution means does not execute the predetermined setting-related processing even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, and if the specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started after that,
The gaming machine according to feature p5, characterized in that even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, if the specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started after that, the setting-enabled state is established.

According to the feature p6, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, if the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that, the setting value is not notified, but the setting becomes possible to change the setting value. As a result, when a specific related operation is performed to create a settable state in which setting values can be changed, generation of the settable state can be prioritized over notification of set values.

Feature p7. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p6, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used.

According to feature p7, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the setting value can be changed when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the operation of changing the setting value can be continued when the supply of operating power is restarted.

In addition, for the configuration of the features p1 to p7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group q>
Feature q1. Means for executing profit giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
Setting-related execution means for executing predetermined setting-related processing related to the setting value (function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63, function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63);
with
The setting-related execution means does not execute the predetermined setting-related process if a specific related operation (RAM clear operation or setting change operation if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting confirmation process, or RAM clear operation if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting value update process) is performed even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, but when the supply of operating power is started after that.

According to the feature q1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the prescribed setting-related processing, the prescribed setting-related processing is not executed when the specified related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started after that. Thus, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the prescribed setting-related processing, if there is no need to execute the prescribed setting-related processing thereafter, it is possible to prevent the prescribed setting-related processing from being executed by performing the specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature q2. The gaming machine according to feature q1, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying a setting value to be used.

According to the feature q2, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, the setting value is not restarted if the specific related operation is performed when the operating power supply is started after that. Thus, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the notification of the set value, if there is no need to notify the set value after that, it is possible to prevent the notification of the set value by performing a specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature q3. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing on the basis of a predetermined setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and pressing of the reset button 68c if the predetermined setting-related processing is setting value update processing, or ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a if the predetermined setting-related processing is setting confirmation processing). The gaming machine according to feature q1 or q2, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is not executed when the specific related operation is performed.

According to the characteristic q3, it is necessary to perform a predetermined setting-related operation in order to cause the predetermined setting-related processing to be performed, so it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature q4. The setting-related execution means includes means for executing the predetermined setting-related processing even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and when the supply of operating power is started after that, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed (in the forty-fifth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination at step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and a function of making an affirmative determination at step SA414 of the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature q3.

According to feature q4, when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, it is possible to select whether or not to execute the predetermined setting-related processing without performing the predetermined setting-related operation, depending on whether or not to perform the specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature q5. The predetermined setting-related operation includes setting the setting key inserting portion (setting key inserting portion 68a) to a predetermined corresponding state (ON-operated state) by the setting key,
The gaming machine according to feature q4, wherein the setting-related execution means includes means for terminating the predetermined setting-related processing based on the identification that the setting key insertion unit has been changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state (OFF-operated state) by the setting key (a function of executing the processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature q5, it is necessary to use the setting key to put the setting key insertion part into a predetermined correspondence state in order to start the predetermined setting-related processing, so that it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related processing. In this case, the predetermined setting-related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion portion is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the setting key insertion portion is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thus, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and then the supply of operating power is started while the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, the predetermined setting-related processing is not terminated immediately, and the predetermined setting-related processing is terminated by changing the setting key insertion unit from the specific correspondence state to the predetermined correspondence state and then further changing from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. .

Feature q6. When the supply of operating power is started, another execution means for executing a process different from the predetermined setting-related process (if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting confirmation process, only the RAM clearing process is executed in the main CPU 63 without executing the setting value updating process or the RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process are executed in the main CPU 63; if the predetermined setting-related process is the setting value updating process, only the RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the forty-fifth embodiment is executed. The game machine according to any one of features q1 to q5, characterized in that it has a function of not executing set value update processing.

According to the characteristic q6, it is possible to prevent the predetermined setting-related processing from being executed when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and then the supply of the operating power is started by using the specific related operation performed for executing another processing.

Feature q7. The gaming machine according to feature q6, wherein the separate execution means executes the separate process based on the performance of the specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started after the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed.

According to feature q7, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, if the specific related operation is performed after the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to give priority to the execution of another processing over the predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature q8. The gaming machine according to feature q6 or q7, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying a setting value to be used, and the different process is a process for changing the setting value to be used.

According to the feature q8, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, the setting value is not restarted if the specific related operation is performed when the operating power supply is started after that. Thus, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the notification of the set value, if there is no need to notify the set value after that, it is possible to prevent the notification of the set value by performing a specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started. Further, as an operation for preventing notification of the setting value in this way, it is possible to use a specific related operation for executing processing for changing the setting value.

For the configuration of features q1 to q8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic r group>
Feature r1. setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of step SA709 in the main side CPU 63);
Situation generation means for creating a settable situation (situation in which the setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the forty-fifth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 and step SA417; in the forty-sixth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in steps SA905 and SA916 in the main CPU 63 and a function of making a positive determination in step SA917);
setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the settable state;
with
The situation generation means includes means for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change opportunity occurs in the settable situation (function for executing the processing of step SA708 in the main CPU 63),
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an end opportunity occurs in the settable situation, thereby setting the setting value that was the selection target in the settable situation as the use target.

According to the feature r1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, setting correspondence storage means for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used and selection correspondence storage means for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value in the process of being changed in the setting possible state are provided, so that the setting value can be changed in the setting possible state while storing and holding the information of the setting value set before the setting possible state is started.

Feature r2. The gaming machine according to feature r1, wherein the situation generation means comprises a first change execution means (a function of making an affirmative determination at step SA701 in the main CPU 63) that enables a setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the previous settable situation to be changed in the settable situation that occurs after the settable situation ends before the termination opportunity occurs.

Feature r2. When the settable situation is started after the settable situation is terminated before the termination opportunity occurs, the set value is changed from the set value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means. As a result, even if the settable situation ends before the termination opportunity occurs, when the settable situation is restarted, it is possible to continuously change the set value from the set value last selected in the previous settable situation.

Feature r3. The gaming machine according to feature r2, wherein the situation generation means comprises a second change execution means (a function of making a negative determination in step SA701 in the main CPU 63) that enables the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means to be changed in the settable situation that occurs after the setting possible situation ends before the end trigger is generated.

According to the feature r3, when the settable state is started after the settable state ends before the termination opportunity occurs, it is possible not only to restart the change of the set value from the set value last selected in the previous settable state, but also to change the set value from the set value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means when the settable state is started after the settable state ends before the end opportunity occurs. As a result, it is possible to change the initial set value when starting to change the set value according to the situation when the settable state is resumed.

Feature r4. The gaming machine according to feature r3, wherein the second change execution means enables the setting value to be changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the settable state occurring after the settable state terminated by the occurrence of the termination opportunity.

According to the characteristic r4, in a normal setting possible state, the setting value is changed from the setting value of the current use object.

Feature r5. The situation generation means generates one of a situation in which the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means can be changed and a situation in which the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means can be changed based on the fact that a specific related operation is performed when the settable situation starts after the settable situation ends before the end trigger occurs in the settable situation (step SA4 in the main CPU 63). 05, a function of executing the processing of steps SA412 and SA417).

According to the feature r5, when the settable state is started after the settable state ends before the termination opportunity occurs, the administrator of the game hall can select whether to restart the change of the set value from the set value last selected in the previous settable state or to start the change of the set value from the set value of the current use object.

Feature r6. The gaming machine according to any one of features r1 to r5, further comprising a means (a function of executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63) for displaying the set value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the settable state on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

According to the characteristic r6, it is possible to change the setting value while confirming the setting value that is being changed in the settable state.

Feature r7. The gaming machine according to any one of features r1 to r6, further comprising means (a function of executing the processing of steps SA601 to SA603 in the main CPU 63) for displaying the setting values corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in a situation where the setting correspondence storage means is not possible.

According to the feature r7, it is possible to check the setting value of the current use object as needed.

With respect to the configuration of features r1 to r7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature n group, the feature o group, the feature p group, the feature q group, and the feature r group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to optimize the configuration regarding the set values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature s group>
Features s1. Predetermined response start means for starting predetermined response processing (setting confirmation processing, set value update processing) based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion portion (setting key insertion portion 68a) is put into a predetermined response state (ON-operated state) by a predetermined key (in the forty-fifth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA413 of the main CPU 63 and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA417 of the main CPU 63; in the forty-sixth embodiment, making an affirmative determination in step SA913 of the main CPU 63. function and the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917);
Predetermined response termination means (a function of executing the processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63) that terminates the predetermined response process based on specifying that the predetermined key insertion portion has been changed from the predetermined response state to the specific response state (OFF-operated state) by the predetermined key;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature s1, since it is necessary to put the predetermined key inserting part in the predetermined correspondence state by using the predetermined key in order to start the predetermined correspondence processing, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of illegally starting the predetermined correspondence processing. In this case, the predetermined correspondence processing does not end only when the predetermined key insertion portion is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the predetermined key insertion portion is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thus, even if the predetermined correspondence processing is started under the condition that the predetermined key insertion part is in the specific correspondence state for some reason, the predetermined correspondence processing is not terminated immediately, and the predetermined correspondence processing is finished by further changing the predetermined correspondence state from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state after changing the predetermined key insertion part from the specific correspondence state to the predetermined correspondence state, so that the predetermined correspondence processing can be finished at a timing preferable for the manager of the game hall.

Feature s2. Characteristic s1 characterized in that it comprises separate starting means for starting the predetermined correspondence process in a situation where the predetermined key insertion portion is in the specific correspondence state based on the fact that the specific start condition is satisfied (in the forty-fifth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 of the main CPU 63 and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA414 of the main CPU 63, and a function of making an affirmative determination in steps SA905 and SA916 of the main CPU 63 in the forty-sixth embodiment). game machine.

According to the feature s2, even when the predetermined key insertion part is in the specific correspondence state based on the establishment of the specific start condition, the predetermined correspondence processing is started, so that it is possible to diversify the start timing of the predetermined correspondence processing. However, in this configuration, the predetermined correspondence processing is started when the predetermined key insertion portion is in the specific correspondence state, but with the configuration of the feature s1, the predetermined correspondence processing does not end only when the predetermined key insertion portion is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the predetermined key insertion portion is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thus, even if the predetermined correspondence processing is started under the condition that the predetermined key insertion part is in the specific correspondence state, the predetermined correspondence processing is not ended immediately, and the predetermined correspondence processing is finished by further changing the predetermined correspondence state from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state after changing the predetermined key insertion part from the specific correspondence state to the predetermined correspondence state, so that the predetermined correspondence processing can be finished at a timing preferable for the manager of the game hall.

Feature s3. The predetermined response start means starts the predetermined response process based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion portion is in the predetermined response state when supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature s2, wherein the specific start condition is established when the supply of operating power is stopped while the predetermined response process is being executed and then the supply of operating power is resumed.

According to the feature s3, when the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined correspondence processing is started based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion part is in the predetermined correspondence state, so that it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of illegally starting the predetermined correspondence processing. Further, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the state where the predetermined correspondence processing is executed, when the supply of the operation power is restarted and the specific start condition is established, the predetermined correspondence processing is started even if the predetermined key insertion part is not in the predetermined correspondence state. This makes it possible to give priority to the start of the predetermined response process when the predetermined response process ends in the middle.

Feature s4. Means for executing a profit giving process in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features s1 to s3, wherein the predetermined corresponding process is a process related to the set value.

According to the feature s4, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects for the processing related to the setting value.

For the configuration of features s1 to s4, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the group of characteristics s, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to generate a game state advantageous to the player by the control means.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the game machines such as the above examples, it is necessary to favorably progress processing in the control means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic t group>
Features t1. A setting means for setting a set value to be used from a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing the processing of steps S205 to S207 in the main CPU 63 in the first embodiment, function of executing the processing of steps S3106 to S3108 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment, and function of executing the processing of steps S3207 to S3209 in the main CPU 63 in the twelfth embodiment. , the function of executing the processing of steps S5605 to S5607 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB915 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment);
Situation generation means for creating a settable situation (situation in which the setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the first embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step S103 in the main CPU 63; in the 22nd embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63; in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB113 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-third embodiment, A function of making an affirmative determination at step SB812 in the main CPU 63);
When the settable state is reached, start handling means for changing the set value from a preset set value corresponding to the start (in the first embodiment, the function of executing step S201 in the main CPU 63; in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing step S3102 in the main CPU 63; in the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing step S3203 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-second embodiment, step S in the main CPU 63 a function of executing the process of 5601, a function of executing the process of step SB304 in the main side CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB905 in the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature t1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, when the setting becomes possible, the setting value is changed from the predetermined starting setting value. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before entering the settable state, it is possible to change the setting value from a certain starting setting value in the settable state. Therefore, it becomes easy for the operator to understand the work content of the setting value changing operation.

Feature t2. The gaming machine according to feature t1, wherein the set value corresponding to the start is a set value (“setting 1”) with the lowest advantage.

According to the feature t2, when the setting becomes possible, the setting value is changed from the setting value with the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally terminates the settable situation immediately after it becomes the settable situation, the set value of the lowest advantage is obtained, so that even if the game is played in such a situation, unintended disadvantage can be prevented from occurring in the game hall.

Feature t3. setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the settable state;
with
The situation generation means includes means for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change opportunity occurs in the settable situation (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing steps SB307 and SB310 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-third embodiment, the function of executing steps SB908 and SB914 in the main CPU 63);
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an end opportunity occurs in the settable situation, thereby setting a setting value that was a selection target in the settable situation as a use target,
The gaming machine according to feature t1 or t2, wherein the start handling means stores the selection handling information corresponding to the setting value of the start handling in the selection handling storage means when the settable state is reached.

According to feature t3, setting correspondence storage means for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to a setting value to be used and selection correspondence storing means for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to a setting value that is being changed in a settable state are provided, so that the setting value can be changed in the settable state while storing and holding information on the set value set before the settable state is started.

Feature t4. The gaming machine according to feature t3, further comprising a means (a function of executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63) for displaying the set value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the settable state on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

According to feature t4, it is possible to change the setting value while confirming the setting value that is being changed in the settable state.

Feature t5. The gaming machine according to feature t3 or t4, further comprising means (a function of executing the processing of steps SA601 to SA603 in the main CPU 63) for displaying the setting values corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in a situation where the setting correspondence storage means is not possible.

According to the feature t5, it is possible to check the setting value of the current use object as needed.

For the configuration of features t1 to t5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the group of characteristics t, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to optimize the configuration regarding the set values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature u group>
Features u1. a first control means (MPU 62);
a second control means (sound and light side MPU 352) that executes control corresponding to the information transmitted by the first control means;
In a game machine equipped with
The first control means is
a first transmitting means (a function of executing the process of step SB314 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB918 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment) for transmitting the first start correspondence information (return command at the time of updating) based on the fact that the supply of the operating power is started and the first start state is established;
Second transmission means for transmitting second start correspondence information (return command at confirmation or return command at clear) based on the fact that the supply of operating power is in the second start state (a function of executing the process of step SB118 or step SB207 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB618 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, and a function of step SB725 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment. , a function of executing the processing of step SB816 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step SC118 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature u1, in a configuration in which control corresponding to information transmitted by the first control means is executed by the second control means, when the supply of operating power is started, the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start condition, and transmits the second start correspondence information based on the second start condition. As a result, it becomes possible to perform control corresponding to the type of start situation when the supply of operating power is started, not only by the first control means but also by the second control means.

Feature u2. The first control means performs a process (steps SB101 to SB122 in the forty-ninth embodiment, steps SB601 to SB622 in the fifty-first embodiment, steps SB701 to SB729 in the fifty-second embodiment, steps SB701 to SB729 in the fifty-second embodiment, and steps SB801 to step SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826, and in the fifty-fourth embodiment, steps SC101 to SC120 and steps SC125 to SC128) are different in at least a part of the processing contents.

According to the feature u2, when the supply of operating power is started, at least a part of the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the first control means differs depending on whether it is the first start condition or the second start condition.

Feature u3. The second control means is
a start response execution means (a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB405 in the sound and light side CPU 353) that executes the start response process regardless of whether the first start response information is received or the second start response information is received;
Predetermined response execution means (a function of executing steps SB407, SB409, and SB411 in the sound and light side CPU 353) that executes a predetermined response process when one of the first start response information and the second start response information is received, and does not execute the predetermined response process when the other start response information of the first start response information and the second start response information is received;
The gaming machine according to feature u1 or u2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature u3, since the second control means executes the start handling process regardless of whether the first start handling information or the second start handling information is received, the second control means can be made to execute the start handling process when either of the start handling information is transmitted from the first control means. Further, the second control means executes a predetermined response process when receiving one of the first start response information and the second start response information, and does not perform the predetermined response process when receiving the other start response information. As a result, it becomes possible to perform control corresponding to the type of start situation when the supply of operating power is started, not only by the first control means but also by the second control means.

Feature u4. One of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs based on a predetermined start corresponding operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation) being performed when supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature u3, wherein the other of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs based on the fact that the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature u4, it is possible to change the content of the control executed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means depending on whether or not the predetermined start corresponding operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature u5. The first control means is configured to execute processing (steps S8907 to S8920) for controlling the progress of the game after transmitting any one of a plurality of types of start correspondence information including the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information,
The gaming machine according to feature u3 or u4, wherein the second control means is configured to execute processing (step SB412 to step SB414) corresponding to the progress of the game after receiving any one of the plurality of types of start correspondence information.

According to the feature u5, the first control means transmits any start correspondence information before starting the processing for controlling the progress of the game, and the second control means executes the processing corresponding to the contents of the progress of the game after receiving any start correspondence information. Thus, it becomes possible to execute the process corresponding to the progress of the game by the second control means after the first control means executes the process for controlling the progress of the game. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature u3, it is possible to make the second control means recognize the start timing of the process corresponding to the progress of the game by using a plurality of pieces of start correspondence information that differentiates whether or not the predetermined correspondence process is executed in the second control means.

Feature u6. The first control means is
Means for executing the common handling process in either the first start state or the second start state when the supply of operating power is started (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SB101 to SB103 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SB601 to SB603 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-second embodiment, step SB in the main CPU 63 701 and step SB702, the function of executing the processing of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SC101 to SC103 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment);
Means for not executing the specific handling process based on one of the first start condition and the second starting condition when the supply of operating power is started, and not executing the specific handling process based on the other one of the first start condition and the second start condition when the supply of operating power is started (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB112, step SB115, or step SB117 in the main CPU 63; In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB612, step SB615 or step SB617 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB711, step SB718 or step SB721 in the main CPU 63; Then, the function of executing the processing of step SC111, step SC115 or step SC117 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u5, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic u6, the first control means executes the common handling process regardless of whether the starting situation is the first starting situation or the second starting situation, and executes the specific handling process when the starting situation is one of the first starting situation and the second starting situation. As a result, the first control means can execute the common handling process regardless of the start situation, and the first control means can execute the process corresponding to the type of the start situation. In this case, the configuration of feature u1 is provided, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start condition, and transmits the second start correspondence information based on the second start condition. Therefore, it is possible not only for the first control means but also for the second control means to perform control corresponding to the type of start condition when supply of operating power is started.

Feature u7. The first control means is
setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB915 in the main CPU 63);
A first response executing means (a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, and making a setting possible state (a situation in which the setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed as the first start state based on the first setting-related operation (turning on the setting key insertion portion 68a and pressing the reset button 68c) when the supply of operating power is started. a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB614 in the CPU 63, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment;
second response executing means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting value to be used set by the setting means as the second start situation based on the fact that a second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) is performed when the supply of operating power is started;
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u6, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature u7, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In addition, in order to change the set value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the set value to be used. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so that the manager of the game hall can confirm the setting value to be used as necessary. In this case, having the configuration of the feature u1, the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation and transmits the second start correspondence information based on the second start situation, so that the second control means can perform different control depending on whether the setting value to be used is notified or not.

Feature u8. The first control means is
Means for executing profit giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
a first response execution means (a function of executing a setting value updating process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value based on the fact that the supply of operating power is started and the first start situation being established;
Second response execution means for executing a different response process different from the predetermined setting-related process based on the fact that the supply of operating power is in the second start situation (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB117 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB617 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB721 in the main CPU 63; 3 embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB815 in the main CPU 63, and the function of executing the process of step SC117 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u7, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature u8, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. Further, when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the first start condition, and when the supply of operating power is started, a different handling process different from the predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the second start condition. This makes it possible to cause a case where the predetermined setting-related processing is executed and a case where it is not executed according to the start state when the supply of operating power is started. In this case, having the configuration of the characteristic u1, the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation and transmits the second start correspondence information based on the second start situation, so that the second control means can perform different control depending on whether the first control means executes the predetermined setting-related processing or not.

Feature u9. The gaming machine according to characteristic u8, wherein the second response execution means executes a process for initializing a predetermined storage area provided in the first control means as the different response process.

According to feature u9, it is possible to cause a case in which a predetermined setting-related process is executed and a case in which a predetermined storage area of the first control means is initialized depending on the starting situation when supply of operating power is started. In this case, the configuration of feature u1 is provided, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation and the second start correspondence information based on the second start situation, so that the second control means can perform different control depending on whether the first control means executes the predetermined setting-related processing or when the predetermined storage area is initialized.

Feature u10. The second control means is
When one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means (RTC 356) capable of measuring time is stored in the time correspondence storage means (RTC memory 357) (function of executing the processing of step SB407 in the sound and light side CPU 353 in the 49th embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step SB507 in the sound and light side CPU 353 in the 50th embodiment) and
Means for executing the time-related processing when the processing execution timing is reached based on the time-related information stored in the time-related storage device (a function of executing the processing of step SB413 in the sound and light side CPU 353 in the forty-ninth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step SB513 in the sound and light side CPU 353 in the fiftieth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u9, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature u10, the second control means executes the time-related processing when the processing execution timing comes based on the time-related information stored in the time-related storage means, so that the time-related processing can be executed at the predetermined time. In this case, when one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means is stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to select a situation in which the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and a situation in which it is not newly stored.

For the configuration of features u1 to u10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O11. , Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1-l5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1-v8, features w1-w8, features x1-x6, features y1-y9, features z1-z6, features αA1-αA10, features αB1-αB6, features αC1-αC13, features αD1-αD9, features αE1-αE5, features αF1-αF9, features αG1-αG10, features αH1-αH11, features αI1-αI8, features J1-αJ14, features any one of αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 Or multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature v group>
Feature v1. Time storage execution means for storing the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means (RTC 356) capable of measuring time in the time correspondence storage means (RTC memory 357) (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB407 in the sound and light side CPU 353, and in the 50th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB507 in the sound and light side CPU 353);
Time-related execution means for executing time-related processing when it is time to execute processing based on the time-related information stored in the time-related storage device (a function of executing the processing of step SB413 in the sound and light side CPU 353 in the forty-ninth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step SB513 in the sound and light side CPU 353 in the fiftieth embodiment);
with
The time storage execution means stores the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means in the time correspondence storage means based on the first start situation (in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in a state of no operation, in the fiftieth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM clear operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation is performed) when the supply of operating power is started. The second start situation (in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in a situation where the RAM clear operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation is performed, and in the fiftieth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without any operation), the time correspondence information measured by the time measuring means is not stored in the time correspondence storage means.

According to the feature v1, the time-related processing is executed when the processing execution timing comes based on the time-related information stored in the time-related storage means, so that the time-related processing can be executed at a predetermined time. In this case, the time corresponding information measured by the time measuring means is stored in the time corresponding storage means when the supply of the operating power is started and the first start condition occurs, and the time corresponding information is not stored in the time corresponding storage means when the second start condition occurs when the supply of the operating power is started. This makes it possible to select a situation in which the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and a situation in which it is not newly stored.

Feature v2. One of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs based on a predetermined start corresponding operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation) being performed when supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature v1, wherein the other of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs based on the fact that the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when supply of operating power is started.

According to feature v2, depending on whether or not a predetermined start handling operation is performed when supply of operating power is started, it is possible to select a situation in which time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and a situation in which it is not newly stored.

Feature v3. The second start situation occurs based on a predetermined start corresponding operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation) being performed when supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature v1 or v2, wherein the first start situation occurs when the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature v3, when the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the time corresponding information is newly stored in the time corresponding storage means, and when the predetermined start corresponding operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the time corresponding information is not stored in the time corresponding storage means. Thus, when the supply of operating power is started, basically the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means, and the time correspondence information can be prevented from being stored in the time correspondence storage means by performing a predetermined start correspondence operation as required.

Feature v4. Means for not executing the specific handling process based on one of the first start condition and the second starting condition when the supply of operating power is started, and not executing the specific handling process based on the other one of the first start condition and the second start condition when the supply of operating power is started (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB112, step SB115, or step SB117 in the main CPU 63; In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB612, step SB615 or step SB617 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB711, step SB718 or step SB721 in the main CPU 63; The gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v3, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of step SC111, step SC115 or step SC117 in the main side CPU 63.

According to the feature v4, the specific handling process is executed when the starting situation is one of the first starting situation and the second starting situation. In this case, the configuration of feature v1 is provided, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the first start situation, and the time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the second start situation. Thereby, it is possible to associate whether or not specific correspondence processing is executed and whether or not time correspondence information is newly stored.

Feature v5. Means for executing the specific handling process based on the second start condition when the supply of operating power is started, and not executing the specific handling process based on the first start condition when the supply of operating power is started (function of executing the processing of step SB112, step SB115 or step SB117 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, and steps SB612 and SB61 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment. 5 or step SB617; in the fifty-second embodiment, the function of executing step SB711, step SB718, or step SB721 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-third embodiment, the function of executing step SB810, step SB813, or step SB815 in the main CPU 63; 17), the gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v4.

According to feature v5, the specific handling process is executed in the case of the second starting situation out of the first starting situation and the second starting situation. In this case, the configuration of feature v1 is provided, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the first start situation, and the time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the second start situation. This makes it possible to prevent the time correspondence information from being newly stored in the time correspondence storage means when the specific correspondence processing is executed.

Feature v6. Means for executing the common handling process in either the first start state or the second start state when the supply of operating power is started (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SB101 to SB103 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SB601 to SB603 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-second embodiment, step SB in the main CPU 63 701 and step SB702, a function of executing the processing of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps SC101 to SC103 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment).

According to feature v6, the common handling process is executed in either the first starting situation or the second starting situation, while the specific handling process is executed in either the first starting situation or the second starting situation. As a result, it is possible to execute the common handling process regardless of the starting situation, and to execute the process corresponding to the type of the starting situation.

Feature v7. Means for executing profit giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
setting-related execution means for executing predetermined setting-related processing related to the setting value when supply of operating power is started (function for executing setting value update processing or setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v6, wherein the setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on one of the first start state and the second start state when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature v7, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. Further, a predetermined setting-related process is executed based on one of the first start condition and the second start condition when supply of operating power is started. Thereby, it is possible to associate whether or not the predetermined setting-related processing is executed and whether or not the time correspondence information is newly stored.

Feature v8. Means for initializing a predetermined storage area provided in the control means based on one of the first start condition and the second start condition when the supply of operating power is started (the function of executing the processing of step SB117 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, and the processing of step SB721 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment. , a function of executing the processing of step SB815 in the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step SC117 in the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment).

According to feature v8, the predetermined storage area of the first control means is initialized based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition is established when supply of operating power is started. This makes it possible to associate the presence or absence of initialization of the predetermined storage area with the presence or absence of new storage of the time corresponding information.

For the configuration of features v1 to v8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the group of characteristics u and the group of characteristics v, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the game machines such as the above examples, it is necessary to perform the processing appropriately when the supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature w group>
Features w1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
a predetermined display control means for controlling the display of the predetermined display means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
Means for executing profit giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
setting-related execution means for executing predetermined setting-related processing related to the setting value when supply of operating power is started (function for executing setting value update processing or setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63);
with
The predetermined display control means is
means for causing the predetermined display means to display the setting value when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63);
After the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, check control means for causing the predetermined display means to perform a check display that enables confirmation of whether or not the predetermined display means is normal (in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S9519 in the main CPU 63; in the forty-fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SA419 in the main CPU 63; in the forty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SA919 in the main CPU 63; In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB123 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB623 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-second embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps SB712 and SB719 in the main CPU 63; 19) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature w1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. Further, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that the manager of the game hall can grasp the current setting value by checking the predetermined display means. In addition, since the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display means, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal.

In this case, when the supply of operating power is started, a check display is performed by the predetermined display means after predetermined setting-related processing is executed. Thus, it is possible to give priority to the display of the set value over the check display when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed without requiring adjustment processing such as ending the check display in the middle when the predetermined setting-related processing is started.

Feature w2. The gaming machine according to feature w1, wherein the check control means causes the predetermined display means to perform the check display regardless of whether the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, or the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed.

According to the feature w2, when the supply of operating power is started, the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display means regardless of whether or not the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature w3. A common process is set as a process at the start of supply to be executed when the supply of operating power is started, and is a process that is executed in common regardless of whether the predetermined setting-related process is executed or not, and is executed after the predetermined setting-related process when the predetermined setting-related process is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature w1 or w2, wherein a process for starting the check display on the predetermined display means is set as the common process.

According to the feature w3, when the supply of operating power is started, the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display means regardless of whether or not the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power is started. In addition, since the processing for causing the predetermined display means to start the check display is set as a common processing, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature w4. Means for executing processing for advancing the game after the supply of operating power is started and the processing at the time of supply start is completed (function for executing the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w3, wherein the process for advancing the game can be started even in a situation where the display for checking is being executed by the predetermined display means.

According to the feature w4, the processing for progressing the game can be started even in a situation where the display for checking is being executed on the predetermined display means, so that the start timing of the processing for progressing the game can be prevented from being delayed even when the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display means after execution of the predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature w5. A delay execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps SB715 and SB724 in the main CPU 63) that executes delay processing that enables delaying the start of the processing for progressing the game when the supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w4, wherein the check control means causes the predetermined display means to start the check display before the delay process is started when the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed when the supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature w5, by executing the delay processing for delaying the start of the processing for advancing the game when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to start the processing for advancing the game after the initial setting of various devices is completed. In this case, if the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display on the predetermined display means is started before the delay processing is started. As a result, it is possible to perform the check display using the period in which the start of the process for progressing the game is delayed.

Feature w6. The gaming machine according to feature w5, wherein the delay execution means does not execute the delay process when the predetermined setting-related process is executed.

According to the feature w6, it takes a predetermined period of time to execute the predetermined setting-related processing, so it is possible to complete the initial setting of various devices before the processing for progressing the game is started. In this case, by not executing the delay processing when the prescribed setting-related processing is executed, it is possible to prevent the start of the processing for progressing the game from being extremely delayed in the situation where the prescribed setting-related processing is executed.

Feature w7. The setting-related execution means includes:
Situation generation means (a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, and affirmative at step SB614 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment) to create a settable state (situation in which set value update processing is executed) in which the setting values to be used can be changed based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when the supply of operating power is started. a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SC113 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment;
notification generation means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting value to be used based on the second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) being performed when the supply of the operating power is started;
The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w6, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature w7, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so that the manager of the game hall can confirm the setting value to be used as necessary.

Feature w8. The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w7, wherein the predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function for executing the processing of steps S8708, S8709 and S9107 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature w8, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the management result of the game history. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information corresponding to the management result of the game history is displayed accurately on the predetermined display means by performing the check display on the predetermined display means with the configuration of the feature w1.

For the configuration of features w1 to w8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature x group>
Features x1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
a predetermined display control means for controlling the display of the predetermined display means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
Means for executing processing for progressing the game after the supply of operating power is started and the state after the supply is completed (function for executing the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63);
with
The predetermined display control means includes check control means for causing the predetermined display means to perform a check display that enables confirmation of whether the predetermined display means is normal in the situation after the start of supply (a function of executing the processing of step S9405 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps SB713 and SB722 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by a configuration in which a delay situation (a situation in which a negative determination is made in step S9406 in the thirty-sixth embodiment, a situation in which the main CPU 63 executes the processes of steps SB715 and SB724 in the fifty-second embodiment) that can delay the start of the process for advancing the game in a situation where the check display is being performed by the predetermined display means.

According to the feature x1, when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display is performed on the predetermined display means, so that it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. In this case, a delay situation may occur that makes it possible to delay the start of the process for progressing the game while the check display is being performed. As a result, it is possible to secure an opportunity to confirm the check display on the predetermined display means before the processing for progressing the game is started. In addition, it is possible to complete the initial setting of various devices before the processing for progressing the game is started due to the occurrence of the delay situation. Then, it is possible to make the display for checking by the predetermined display means by using this delay condition.

Feature x2. The gaming machine according to feature x1, characterized by comprising means for setting the delay situation in a situation where the display for checking is performed on the predetermined display means (a function of executing the processing of step S9406 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps SB715 and SB724 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment).

According to the characteristic x2, since the display for checking is in a delayed state, it is possible to prevent the start of processing for progressing the game while the display for checking is being performed.

Features x3. The gaming machine according to feature x1 or x2, characterized in that when the supply of operating power is started, the delay situation occurs in the situation where the check display is performed by the predetermined display means based on the first start situation, and the delay situation does not occur in the situation where the check display is performed by the predetermined display means based on the second start situation when the supply of operation power is started.

According to the feature x3, it is possible to prevent the processing for progressing the game from being started in the middle of the check display by being delayed in the state where the check display is performed on the predetermined display means in the first start state, and prevent the start timing of the processing for progressing the game from being extremely late by preventing the delay state in the state where the check display is performed in the predetermined display means in the second start state.

Features x4. Means for executing profit giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
setting-related execution means for executing predetermined setting-related processing related to the setting value when supply of operating power is started (function for executing setting value update processing or setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63);
with
the first start situation is a situation in which the predetermined setting-related process is not executed in the post-supply start situation;
The gaming machine according to feature x3, wherein the second start situation is a situation in which the predetermined setting-related processing is executed in the post-supply start situation.

According to the feature x4, it takes a predetermined period of time to execute the predetermined setting-related processing, so it is possible to complete the initial setting of various devices before the processing for advancing the game is started. In this case, when the prescribed setting-related processing is executed, it is possible to prevent the start of the processing for progressing the game from being extremely delayed in the situation where the prescribed setting-related processing is executed by preventing the delay situation in the situation where the check display is performed by the prescribed display means.

Features x5. The setting-related execution means includes:
Situation generation means (a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, and affirmative at step SB614 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment) to create a settable state (situation in which set value update processing is executed) in which the setting values to be used can be changed based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when the supply of operating power is started. a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SC113 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment;
notification generation means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting value to be used based on the second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) being performed when the supply of the operating power is started;
The gaming machine according to feature x4, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature x5, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting value to be used. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so that the manager of the game hall can confirm the setting value to be used as necessary.

Features x6. The gaming machine according to any one of features x1 to x5, wherein the predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function for executing the processes of steps S8708, S8709 and S9107 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature x6, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the management result of the game history. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information corresponding to the management result of the game history is correctly displayed on the predetermined display means by performing the check display on the predetermined display means with the configuration of the feature x1.

For the configuration of features x1 to x6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the group of features w and the group of features x, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration that enables confirmation of whether or not the display on the predetermined display means is being performed correctly, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group y>
Feature y1. setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63; in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB915 in the main CPU 63);
Situation generating means for creating a settable situation (situation in which the set value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed (the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB114 of the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB614 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment, and the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment. a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB812 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination at step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment);
Setting monitoring means for executing the setting monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal (the function of executing the process of step SB106 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB606 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB705 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment, and the step SB8 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment. 06, in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing step SC106 in the main CPU 63);
with
Processing at the start of supply executed when supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started (steps SB101 to SB122 in the 49th embodiment, steps SB601 to SB622 in the 51st embodiment, steps SB701 to SB729 in the 52nd embodiment, steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB82 in the 53rd embodiment. 6. In the fifty-fourth embodiment, a gaming machine characterized in that the setting monitoring process is included in steps SC101 to SC120 and steps SC125 to SC128.

According to the feature y1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In addition, since the setting monitoring process is executed to monitor whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal, if the setting value to be used is abnormal, it is possible to deal with it. In addition, since the setting monitoring process is included in the process at the start of supply, it is possible to prevent the start of the process for progressing the game even though the set value to be used is abnormal.

Feature y2. The gaming machine according to feature y1, wherein the setting monitoring means executes the setting monitoring process each time a monitoring opportunity occurs even after the supply start process is completed.

According to feature y2, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time a monitoring trigger occurs after the process at the start of supply is completed, it becomes easy to identify that the set value to be used is abnormal.

Feature y3. Equipped with means for executing periodically activated interrupt processing (function for executing first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to feature y2, wherein the interrupt processing includes the setting monitoring processing.

According to feature y3, since the setting monitoring process is executed each time it is started periodically, it is possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature y4. The setting monitoring means sets a regulation state in which execution of a predetermined progress process for progressing a game is restricted based on the fact that the setting value to be used is specified to be abnormal in the setting monitoring process. , a function of executing the process of step SB823 in the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step SC125 in the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment).

According to the feature y4, when it is specified that the set value to be used is abnormal, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for progressing the game is regulated, so that the game can be prevented from being started even though the set value to be used is abnormal.

Feature y5. The gaming machine according to feature y4, characterized by comprising means for canceling the restricted state based on occurrence of the settable state (a function of executing the processing of step SB303 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step SB904 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment).

According to the feature y5, it is possible to set a new set value for use when the situation in which the set value for use is abnormal is resolved.

Feature y6. The gaming machine according to feature y4 or y5, wherein the regulating means sets the regulated state when the supply of operating power is resumed even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the regulated state.

According to the characteristic y6, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progression process is restricted due to the setting value to be used being abnormal from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of the operating power.

Feature y7. The gaming machine according to any one of features y4 to y6, characterized by comprising means for executing a non-restricted process different from the predetermined progress process even in the restricted state (a function of executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature y7, it is possible to execute the non-restricted process even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted due to an abnormal set value to be used. This makes it possible to guarantee the execution of necessary processing even in the restricted state.

Feature y8. The gaming machine according to characteristic y7, wherein the non-restriction process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

According to feature y8, since the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately deal with power failure when it occurs in the restricted state.

Feature y9. The setting monitoring means executes a notification that enables the player to recognize that the settable state should be generated based on the fact that the setting value to be used is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (a function of executing the process of step SB121 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB621 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step SB621 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment. A function of executing the process of B728, a function of executing the process of step SB825 in the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step SC127 in the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment).

According to the feature y9, when it is specified that the set value to be used is abnormal, the player is informed that the settable state should be generated, so that when the set value to be used becomes abnormal, it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to eliminate it.

For the configuration of features y1 to y9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic y group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the set values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature z group>
Feature z1. Predetermined monitoring means for monitoring whether or not a predetermined abnormality occurs in information stored in a predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221) when supply of operating power is started (a function of executing the processing of steps S7906 and S7909 in the main CPU 63 in the 33rd embodiment; a function of executing the processing of steps S8807 and S8810 in the main CPU 63 in the 35th embodiment; The function of executing the processing of steps S9408 and S9411 in the CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of steps S9506 and S9509 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S9905 and S9908 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SA406 and SA409 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-fifth embodiment, In the 49th embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs steps SB104 to SB106. In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs steps SB604 to SB606. In the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs steps SB703 to SB705. in the fifty-third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SB804 to SB806 in the main CPU 63, and in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing in steps SC104 to SC106 in the main CPU 63);
Based on the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality specified by the predetermined monitoring means, a regulation means for setting a regulation state in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is restricted (in the 33rd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S7910 in the main CPU 63; in the 35th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S8811 in the main CPU 63; in the 36th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S9412 in the main CPU 63; In the 42nd embodiment, the function of executing step S9909 in the main CPU 63; in the 45th embodiment, the function of executing step SA410 in the main CPU 63; in the 46th embodiment, the function of executing step SA911 in the main CPU 63; a function of executing the process of step SB619 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment; a function of executing the process of step SB726 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment; a function of executing the process of step SB823 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment;
means for executing non-restricted processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restricted state (a function of executing the processing of steps S8201 to S8206 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps SA101 to SA106 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-second embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature z1, when it is specified that a prescribed abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a prescribed storage area, the execution of prescribed progress processing for progressing the game is regulated, so that the game can be prevented from being started in spite of the occurrence of the prescribed abnormality. Further, even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progression process is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, the non-restriction process can be executed. This makes it possible to guarantee the execution of necessary processing even in the restricted state.

Feature z2. The gaming machine according to feature z1, wherein the non-regulation process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8201 in the thirty-third embodiment, step S8901 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, step SA102 in the forty-second embodiment) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

According to the feature z2, the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, so that if a power failure occurs in the restricted state, it can be dealt with appropriately.

Feature z3. The game machine according to feature z1 or z2, characterized in that the regulating means sets the regulated state when the supply of operating power is resumed even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the regulated state.

According to the feature z3, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progression process is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality from being released only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

Feature z4. setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63; in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB915 in the main CPU 63);
Situation generating means for creating a settable situation (situation in which the set value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed (the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB114 of the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB614 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment, and the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment. a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB812 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination at step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features z1 to z3, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature z4, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is to be used. In this case, if a predetermined abnormality occurs in the information stored in the predetermined storage area, there is a possibility that the set value also has an abnormality. On the other hand, the configuration of the feature z1 is provided, and when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred in information stored in a predetermined storage area, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for progressing the game is regulated, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being started despite the possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the set value.

Feature z5. Means for executing a notification that enables the player to recognize that the settable state should be generated based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has occurred is specified by the predetermined monitoring means (a function of executing the processing of step SB121 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB621 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, and executing the processing of step SB728 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment. a function to execute the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment).

According to the feature z5, when it is specified that the predetermined abnormality has occurred, the player is informed that the settable situation should be generated, so that it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to set the set value when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

Feature z6. The gaming machine according to feature z4 or z5, characterized by comprising means for canceling the restricted state based on occurrence of the settable state (a function of executing the processing of step SB303 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step SB904 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment).

According to the feature z6, it is possible to set a new set value to be used when the situation in which the predetermined abnormality occurs is resolved.

For the configuration of features z1 to z6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, Features P1-P12, Features Q1-Q5, Features R1-R17, Features S1-S8, Features T1-T13, Features U1-U8, Features V1-V6, Features W1-W11, Features X1-X11, Features Y1-Y11, Features Z1-Z10, Features a1-a3, Features b1-b7, Features c1-c21, Features d1-d10, Features e1-e9, Features f 1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w 1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features α any one of K1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, features αW1 to αW12, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αA group>
Feature αA1. Predetermined monitoring means for monitoring whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred in information stored in a predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control) when supply of operating power is started (a function of executing the processing of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment; a function of executing the processing of steps SB604 to SB606 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment; a function of executing the processes of steps SB703 to SB705 in the CPU 63, a function of executing the processes of steps SB804 to SB806 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of executing the processes of steps SC104 to SC106 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment;
Regulating means (a function of executing the process of step SB119 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB619 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step SB619 in the main-side CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment) for making the execution contents of the process at the start of supply of the operating power different from those in the case where the predetermined monitoring means does not identify the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality when the predetermined monitoring means identifies the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. 63, the function of executing the process of step SB823 in the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SC125 in the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment);
Specific output means for outputting a specific output to the outside of the gaming machine based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means (the function of executing the processing of step SB122 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB622 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB729 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment, and the main CPU in the fifty-third embodiment. 63, the function of executing the process of step SC128 in the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αA1, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area, the execution contents of the process at the start of supply of operating power are different from those executed when the predetermined abnormality does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the process from proceeding normally despite the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. Further, a specific output is performed to the outside of the game machine based on the fact that the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is identified. As a result, it becomes possible to urge the manager of the game hall to deal with the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality.

Feature αA2. The gaming machine according to feature αA1, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific output to the outside of the gaming machine even when it is identified that an event different from the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

According to the feature αA2, even when an event different from the predetermined abnormality occurs, the specific output is performed to the outside of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to share the configuration for performing the specific output.

Feature αA3. The gaming machine according to feature αA1 or αA2, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific output to the outside of the gaming machine when the predetermined abnormality occurs when the supply of the operating power is restarted even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the state where the predetermined abnormality occurs.

According to the feature αA3, it is possible to perform a specific output to the outside of the gaming machine each time the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where a predetermined abnormality has occurred. This makes it easier for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

Feature αA4. The gaming machine according to any one of features αA1 to αA3, wherein the regulating means sets a regulating state in which execution of a predetermined progress process for progressing the game is regulated based on the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality being identified by the predetermined monitoring means.

According to the feature αA4, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is regulated, so that the game can be prevented from being started in spite of the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality.

Feature αA5. Means for executing non-restricted processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restricted state (a function of executing the processing of steps S8201 to S8206 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps SA101 to SA106 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-second embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature αA4.

According to the feature αA5, it is possible to execute the non-restricted process even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. This makes it possible to guarantee the execution of necessary processing even in the restricted state.

Feature αA6. The gaming machine according to feature αA5, wherein the non-regulation process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8201 in the thirty-third embodiment, step S8901 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, step SA102 in the forty-second embodiment) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

According to the feature αA6, since the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, if a power failure occurs in the restricted state, it can be dealt with appropriately.

Feature αA7. The gaming machine according to any one of features αA4 to αA6, wherein the regulation means sets the regulation state when the supply of operating power is restarted even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the state of the regulation state.

According to the feature αA7, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progression process is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality from being released only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

Feature αA8. setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63; in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB915 in the main CPU 63);
Situation generating means for creating a settable situation (situation in which the set value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed (the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB114 of the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB614 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment, and the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment. a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB812 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination at step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features αA4 to αA7, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αA8, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, if a predetermined abnormality occurs in the information stored in the predetermined storage area, there is a possibility that the set value also has an abnormality. On the other hand, with the configuration of the feature αA1, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area, the execution contents of the processing at the start of supply of operating power are different from those executed when the predetermined abnormality does not occur, so it is possible to prevent the processing from proceeding as usual despite the possibility that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the set value. Further, since a specific output is performed to the outside of the game machine based on the fact that the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is specified, it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to deal with the possibility of occurrence of the abnormality in the set values.

Feature αA9. Means for executing a notification that enables the player to recognize that the settable state should be generated based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has occurred is specified by the predetermined monitoring means (a function of executing the processing of step SB121 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB621 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, and executing the processing of step SB728 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment. a function to execute the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment).

According to the feature αA9, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, a notification is executed so that the player can recognize that a setting possible situation should be generated, so that it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to set the set value when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

Feature αA10. The regulating means sets a regulating state in which execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing the game is regulated based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means,
The gaming machine according to feature αA8 or αA9, characterized in that this gaming machine is provided with means for canceling the restricted state based on occurrence of the settable state (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB303 in the main CPU 63, and in the fifty-third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB904 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature αA10, it is possible to set a new set value to be used when canceling the situation in which the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

For the configuration of features αA1 to αA10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O 11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9 , features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8 , Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14 , Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to αP7, Features αQ1 to αQ9, Features αR1 to αR8, Features αS1 to αS3, Features αT1 to αT4, Features αU1 to αU14, Features αV1 to αV14, Features αW1 to αW12 or one or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αB group>
Feature αB1. Means for starting the processing at the start of supply of operating power when supply of operating power is started (steps SB101 to SB122 in the 49th embodiment, steps SB601 to SB622 in the fifty-first embodiment, steps SB701 to SB729 in the fifty-second embodiment, steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826 in the fifty-third embodiment, and 54 embodiment, steps SC101 to SC120 and steps SC125 to SC128);
a means for executing periodically activated interrupt processing (a function for executing the first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
Means for executing profit giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
setting-related execution means for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value (a function for executing setting value update processing or setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63) as a part of the processing when the supply of operating power is started;
permission setting means for setting a state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is permitted when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed in the processing when the supply of operating power is started (a function of executing the processing of step SB201 or step SB301 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step SB901 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αB1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In addition, since the predetermined setting-related processing related to the set value is executed as a part of the processing at the start of supply of the operating power, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally execute the predetermined setting-related processing.

In this case, when predetermined setting-related processing is executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power, execution of interrupt processing is changed from a prohibited state to a permitted state. That is, while the execution of interrupt processing is basically prohibited in the processing at the start of supply of operating power, the interrupt processing can be interrupted and activated in predetermined setting-related processing. By basically prohibiting the execution of interrupt processing in the processing at the start of supply of operating power, it is possible to shorten the time required until the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. On the other hand, in the predetermined setting-related processing, since the processing related to the set value is executed, it is expected that the time required to complete the processing will be long, and in the situation where such predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, the execution mode of the processing can be made suitable by permitting the execution of the interrupt processing.

Feature αB2. The gaming machine according to feature αB1, wherein the setting-related execution means terminates the predetermined setting-related processing based on an end trigger operation being performed in the predetermined setting-related processing.

According to the feature αB2, the predetermined setting-related processing continues until the termination trigger operation is performed, so the time required to complete the processing tends to be long. In this case, the configuration of feature αB1 is provided, and execution of interrupt processing is permitted in a situation where predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αB3. The gaming machine according to feature αB1 or αB2, characterized by comprising prohibition setting means (a function of executing the processing of step SB206 or step SB312 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step SB916 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment) for setting a state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is permitted to a state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited when the predetermined setting-related processing ends.

According to feature αB3, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited again when the predetermined setting-related process ends. This makes it possible to limit the period during which the execution of the interrupt process is permitted while the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed to the period during which the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αB4. The gaming machine according to any one of features αB1 to αB3, wherein the interruption process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

According to the feature αB4, the power failure monitoring process is executed even when the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed. Therefore, even in a configuration that may take a long time to complete the predetermined setting-related processing, if a power failure occurs while the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, it can be dealt with appropriately.

Feature αB5. The interrupt process includes a progress corresponding process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
When the interrupt process is interrupted and started while the predetermined setting-related process is being executed, the power failure monitoring process is executed, but the progress handling process is not executed,
The gaming machine according to feature αB4, characterized in that both the power failure monitoring process and the progress handling process can be executed when the interrupt process is interrupted and started after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed.

According to the feature αB5, in a configuration in which the occurrence of a power failure is periodically monitored in a state where the prescribed setting-related processing is being executed, it is possible to prevent the execution of the progress corresponding processing for controlling the progress of the game even if the interrupt processing is interrupted and activated in the situation where the prescribed setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αB6. The setting-related execution means includes:
means for executing changeable processing in which the setting value to be used can be changed as the predetermined setting-related processing (function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) based on the first setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c) when supply of operating power is started;
means for executing setting notification processing for notifying the setting value to be used as the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) is performed when supply of operating power is started (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics αB1 to αB5, wherein the permission setting means sets a state in which the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the execution of the interrupt process is permitted when the changeable process is executed in the process at the start of supply of the operating power, and sets the state in which the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the execution of the interrupt process is permitted when the setting notification process is executed in the process at the start of supply of the operating power.

According to the feature αB6, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally changing the setting value to be used. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so that the manager of the game hall can confirm the setting value to be used as necessary.

For the configuration of features αB1 to αB6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature z group, the feature αA group, and the feature αB group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the game machines such as the above examples, it is necessary to perform the processing appropriately when the supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αC group>
Feature αC1. Means for executing profit giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
setting-related execution means (function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for executing predetermined setting-related processing related to the setting value when supply of operating power is started;
When the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and then the supply of operating power is started, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for progressing the game is restricted (in the fifty-third embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB808 in the main CPU 63, and in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of making affirmative determination at steps SC108 and SC116 of the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αC1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing and then the supply of the operating power is restarted, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for progressing the game is regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game even though the predetermined setting-related processing has not been completed.

Feature αC2. The gaming machine according to feature αC1, wherein the regulating means does not enter the regulated state when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and then the supply of operating power is started thereafter.

According to the feature αC2, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process for progressing the game from being restricted until the predetermined setting-related process is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Feature αC3. The gaming machine according to feature αC1 or αC2, characterized by comprising means for executing non-restricted processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restricted state (function for executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature αC3, it is possible to execute the non-restricted process even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted. This makes it possible to guarantee the execution of necessary processing even in the restricted state.

Feature αC4. The gaming machine according to feature αC3, wherein the non-restriction processing includes power failure monitoring processing (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

According to the feature αC4, the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, so that if a power failure occurs in the restricted state, it can be dealt with appropriately.

Feature αC5. The gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC4, wherein the regulation means sets the regulation state when the supply of operating power is restarted even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the state of the regulation state.

According to the feature αC5, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of the operating power.

Feature αC6. The gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC5, characterized by comprising means for executing a notification that enables a player to recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing should be executed based on the regulation state (in the fifty-third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB825 in the main-side CPU 63, and in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SC127 in the main-side CPU 63).

According to the feature αC6, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to re-execute the predetermined setting-related processing when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed.

Feature αC7. The gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC6, wherein the restricting means does not set the restricted state based on a specific related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c) even when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and then the supply of operating power is started thereafter.

According to the feature αC7, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, by performing the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is restarted, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for progressing the game from being restricted.

Feature αC8. The gaming machine according to feature αC7, wherein the setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that the specific related operation is performed when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αC8, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process for progressing the game from being restricted until the predetermined setting-related process is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Feature αC9. The specific related operation includes setting the setting key insertion portion (setting key insertion portion 68a) to a predetermined corresponding state (ON operation state) by the setting key, and performing another predetermined operation (pressing operation of the reset button 68c).
The gaming machine according to feature αC8, wherein when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and then the supply of operating power is started after that, the setting key insertion portion is in the predetermined corresponding state even if the other predetermined operation is not performed, so that the regulated state is not set.

According to the feature αC9, the setting key insertion part is put in a predetermined correspondence state even if the specific related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted, so that the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game can be prevented from being restricted. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped during the execution of the prescribed setting-related processing, the execution of the prescribed progress processing can be prevented from being restricted even when the power supply is turned on without performing other prescribed operation although the setting key insertion part is in the prescribed correspondence state.

Feature αC10. The gaming machine according to feature αC9, further comprising separate related execution means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for executing another related process related to the setting value based on the setting key insertion unit being brought into the predetermined corresponding state in a situation where the other predetermined operation is not performed when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αC10, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for progressing the game from being restricted by performing an operation for executing another related processing when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

Feature αC11. The gaming machine according to feature αC10, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is executed without executing the other-related process based on the fact that the setting key insertion unit is set to the predetermined correspondence state in a situation where the other predetermined operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed and then the supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αC11, when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, and when the supply of operating power is restarted, if an operation for executing another related process is performed, the predetermined setting-related process is executed instead of the other related process. This makes it possible to give priority to execution of predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature αC12. The predetermined setting-related process is a process that enables the setting value to be used to be changed,
The gaming machine according to feature αC11, wherein the related process is a process for notifying the set value to be used.

According to the feature αC12, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value to be used is being changed, when the supply of operating power is restarted after that, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the process for changing the setting value to be used over the process for notifying the setting value to be used.

Feature αC13. The gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC12, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process that enables the setting value to be used to be changed.

According to the feature αC13, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the process for changing the set value to be used, and when the supply of the operating power is restarted after that, execution of the predetermined progress process for progressing the game is regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process for progressing the game even though the change of the set value has not been completed.

For the configuration of features αC1 to αC13, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O 11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9 , features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8 , Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14 , Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to αP7, Features αQ1 to αQ9, Features αR1 to αR8, Features αS1 to αS3, Features αT1 to αT4, Features αU1 to αU14, Features αV1 to αV14, Features αW1 to αW12 or one or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αD group>
Feature αD1. Means for executing profit giving processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
setting-related execution means (a function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value based on specific related operations (ON operation of the setting key inserting portion 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c) when supply of operating power is started;
another related execution means (a function of executing a set value update process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined another related process related to the setting value based on a predetermined related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) when supply of operating power is started;
When the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and then the supply of operating power is started, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for progressing the game is restricted to a regulated state (a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB808 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of making an affirmative determination at steps SC108 and SC116 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment);
with
The regulating means does not enter the regulated state based on the performance of the specific related operation even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, and does not enter the regulated state based on the performance of the predetermined related operation when the supply of the operating power is started after the supply of the operating power is started even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed.

According to the feature αD1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is to be used. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing and then the supply of the operating power is restarted, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for progressing the game is regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game even though the predetermined setting-related processing has not been completed.

Further, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, execution of the predetermined progress processing is not restricted by performing a specific related operation when resuming the supply of operating power. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process for progressing the game from being restricted until the predetermined setting-related process is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Further, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, the execution of the predetermined progress processing is not restricted even if the predetermined related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progression process from being restricted when an operation for executing the process related to the set value is performed.

Feature αD2. The gaming machine according to feature αD1, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is executed without executing the other-related processing based on the performance of the predetermined related operation when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and when the supply of operating power is started thereafter.

According to feature αD2, when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, and when the supply of operating power is restarted, if an operation for executing another related processing is performed, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed instead of the other related processing. This makes it possible to give priority to execution of predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature αD3. The specific related operation includes setting the setting key inserting portion (setting key inserting portion 68a) to a predetermined corresponding state (ON operation state) by the setting key, and performing another predetermined operation (pressing operation of the reset button 68c).
The gaming machine according to feature αD2, wherein the predetermined related operation includes setting the setting key insertion portion to the predetermined correspondence state by the setting key, and does not include performing the other predetermined operation.

According to the feature αD3, even if the specific related operation is not performed at the time of resuming the supply of the operating power, the setting key insertion part is put in the predetermined corresponding state, so that the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game can be prevented from being restricted. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped during the execution of the prescribed setting-related processing, the execution of the prescribed progress processing can be prevented from being restricted even when the power supply is turned on without performing other prescribed operation although the setting key insertion part is in the prescribed correspondence state.

Feature αD4. The predetermined setting-related process is a process that enables the setting value to be used to be changed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD3, wherein the another related process is a process for notifying the set value to be used.

According to the feature αD4, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the process for changing the setting value to be used, and when the supply of the operating power is restarted after that, the execution of the predetermined progress process for progressing the game is regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process for progressing the game even though the change of the set value has not been completed. Further, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value to be used is being changed, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progression process from being restricted not only when an operation is performed to allow the process to change the set value to be used but also when an operation to notify the set value to be used is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

Feature αD5. The gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD4, characterized by comprising means for executing a non-restricted process different from the predetermined progress process even in the restricted state (a function of executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63).

According to the characteristic αD5, it is possible to execute the non-restricted process even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted. This makes it possible to guarantee the execution of necessary processing even in the restricted state.

Feature αD6. The gaming machine according to feature αD5, wherein the non-restriction process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

According to the feature αD6, the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, so that if a power failure occurs in the restricted state, it can be dealt with appropriately.

Feature αD7. The gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD6, wherein the regulation means sets the regulation state when the supply of operating power is restarted even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the state of the regulation state.

According to the feature αD7, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of operating power.

Feature αD8. The gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD7, characterized by comprising means for executing a notification that enables a player to recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing should be executed based on the regulation state (in the fifty-third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB825 in the main-side CPU 63, and in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SC127 in the main-side CPU 63).

According to the feature αD8, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to re-execute the predetermined setting-related processing when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed.

Feature αD9. Means for executing profit giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
setting-related execution means (a function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value based on specific related operations (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c) when supply of operating power is started;
When the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and then the supply of operating power is started, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for progressing the game is restricted (in the fifty-third embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB808 in the main CPU 63, and in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of making affirmative determination at steps SC108 and SC116 of the main CPU 63);
with
The specific related operation includes a first related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) and a second related operation (press operation of the reset button 68c),
The regulating means does not enter the regulated state based on the specific related operation being performed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and the supply of the operating power is started after that, and does not enter the regulated state based on the fact that the first related operation among the first related operation and the second related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after the supply of the operating power is started even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature αD9, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing and then the supply of the operating power is restarted, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for progressing the game is regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game even though the predetermined setting-related processing has not been completed.

Further, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, execution of the predetermined progress processing is not restricted by performing a specific related operation when resuming the supply of operating power. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process for progressing the game from being restricted until the predetermined setting-related process is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Further, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the prescribed setting-related processing is completed, the execution of the prescribed advancing processing is not restricted if the first related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progression process from being restricted when a part of the operation for executing the predetermined setting-related process is performed.

For the configuration of features αD1 to αD9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αE group>
Feature αE1. Means for executing profit giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
Situation generation means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SC113 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment) to create a settable state (situation in which set value update processing is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on the fact that a specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is performed when the supply of operating power is started;
an operation specifying means (function for executing the process of step SB910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated;
an operation correspondence storage means (OFF confirmation flag 361) that changes a storage state to a non-operation corresponding state when the operation identifying means identifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is not operated, and changes a memory state to an operation corresponding state when the operation identifying means identifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated;
selection target changing means (a function of executing the process of step SB914 in the main CPU 63) for changing a set value to be selected based on the fact that the operation identifying means identifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is being operated in a situation where the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is the non-operation correspondence state in the settable state;
with
A configuration in which the set value to be selected is the set value to be used when an end opportunity occurs in the settable state,
This game machine is characterized by comprising state setting means (a function of executing the processing of step SB901 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step SC114 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment) for setting the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means to the operation correspondence state when the settable state is started or when the settable state is started.

According to the feature αE1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In addition, in order to generate a settable state in which the set value to be used can be changed, it is necessary to turn on the power in a state in which the specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is performed, so that it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the set value to be used. In addition, since the set value to be selected is changed based on the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means operated to generate the settable state, the number of operation means required for changing the set value can be suppressed. In addition, in the settable state, the set value to be selected is changed based on the fact that the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated under the condition that the storage state of the operation corresponding storage means is the non-operation corresponding state, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value to be selected from being changed multiple times for one operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means.

In this case, when the settable state is started or when the settable state is started, the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is set to the operation correspondence state. Thus, when the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means for creating the settable state is continued even after the start of the settable state, the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means can be prevented from changing the set value to be selected.

Feature αE2. The gaming machine according to feature αE1, wherein, when the detection state of the means for detecting the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is the operation detection state, the situation generation means specifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is being operated regardless of the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means.

According to the characteristic αE2, when specifying whether or not a specific related operation has been performed, it is configured to specify whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means has been operated, rather than to specify whether or not the state in which the predetermined corresponding operation means has been switched from the state in which it is not operated to the state in which it has been operated.

Feature αE3. setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used;
selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be selected;
with
The selection object changing means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the set value to be selected is changed, based on the fact that the operation identification means identifies that the predetermined correspondence operation means is being operated in a state in which the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is the non-operation correspondence state in the settable state,
The gaming machine according to feature αE1 or αE2, wherein, when the termination opportunity occurs in the settable situation, the situation generation means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means, thereby setting the setting value that was the selection object in the settable situation as the use object.

According to the characteristic αE3, setting correspondence storage means for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to a setting value to be used and selection correspondence storing means for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to a setting value in the process of being changed in a settable state are provided, thereby making it possible to change the set value in the settable state while storing and holding the information of the set value set before the settable state is started.

Feature αE4. The gaming machine according to any one of features αE1 to αE3, further comprising a means (a function of executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63) for displaying the set value to be selected in the settable state on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

According to the feature αE4, it is possible to change the set value while checking the set value that is being changed in the settable state.

Feature αE5. Means for executing profit giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main side CPU 63);
Situation generation means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SC113 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment) to create a settable state (situation in which set value update processing is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on the fact that a specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is performed when the supply of operating power is started;
an operation specifying means (function for executing the process of step SB910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated;
selection target changing means (a function of executing the processing of step SB914 in the main CPU 63) for changing a setting value to be selected based on the fact that the operation specifying means specifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is being operated in the settable state;
with
A configuration in which the set value to be selected is the set value to be used when an end opportunity occurs in the settable state,
This gaming machine is characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the processing of step SB901 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step SC114 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment) for preventing the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means when the supply of operating power for generating the settable state is started as an operation that triggers the change of the setting value to be selected in the settable state.

According to the feature αE5, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is to be used. In addition, in order to generate a settable state in which the set value to be used can be changed, it is necessary to turn on the power in a state in which the specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is performed, so that it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the set value to be used. In addition, since the set value to be selected is changed based on the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means operated to generate the settable state, the number of operation means required for changing the set value can be suppressed.

In this case, the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means when the supply of the operating power for generating the settable state is started is not treated as the operation triggering the change of the set value to be selected in the settable state. Thus, when the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means for creating the settable state is continued even after the start of the settable state, the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means can be prevented from changing the set value to be selected.

For the configuration of features αE1 to αE5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the features αC group, the features αD group, and the features αE group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to optimize the configuration regarding the set values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αF group>
Feature αF1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, normal figure display unit 38a),
display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63);
a specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63);
Initialization means (function of executing the second RAM clear processing of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth embodiment) for initializing a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the fifty-fifth embodiment) based on the start of supply of operating power;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means.

According to the feature αF1, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of the supply of operating power, so that the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized, the display storage area in which the display data for causing the specific display means to display is set is not initialized by the initialization means. Thereby, the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started can be the display contents before the supply of the operating power is stopped regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means.

Feature αF2. setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of levels of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (a function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature αF1, wherein the initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means or after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means.

According to the feature αF2, when the setting value to be used is newly set when the supply of the operating power is started, or by initializing the predetermined storage area by the initializing means accompanying the setting, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the game can be started in a state in which the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means accompanying the new setting of the set value to be used, the display storage area in which the display data for causing the specific display means to display is set is not initialized by the initialization means. Thereby, the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started can be the display contents before the supply of the operating power is stopped, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is newly set or not. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature αF3. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (when a "RAM clear operation" is performed in a situation where an information abnormality related to the main side RAM 65 does not occur and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1"), another initialization means (a function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth embodiment) is provided for initializing the predetermined storage area even when the setting value to be used is not set by the setting means. ,
The game machine according to feature αF2, wherein the display storage area is not initialized by the separate initialization means.

According to the feature αF3, when the supply of the operating power is started and the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the predetermined storage area is initialized even if the setting value to be used is not newly set. Therefore, even if the setting value to be used is not newly set, the game can be started in the state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the display storage area in which the display data for causing the specific display means to perform display is set is not initialized, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is newly set or the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Thus, the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started can be the display contents before the supply of the operating power is stopped, regardless of whether the setting value is newly set, when the setting value is not newly set, when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, or when the predetermined initialization condition is not satisfied. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the setting value is newly set and whether or not the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied.

Feature αF4. The gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF3, further comprising means (power supply/emission control device 78) for supplying backup power to the display storage area and the predetermined storage area in a situation where operating power is not supplied to the specific display control means.

According to the feature αF4, even if the display storage area and the predetermined storage area are configured to require operating power supply for storing and holding information, backup power is supplied to the display storage area and the predetermined storage area when operating power is not supplied to the specific display control means. Therefore, even when operating power is not supplied to the specific display means, information can be stored and held in these display storage areas and the predetermined storage area.

Feature αF5. grant determining means (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player, and for storing privilege granting information (information of "1" set to a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) in the predetermined storage area when granting a privilege to the player;
privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area;
with
The display data setting means sets display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means in the display storage area when it is time to display the determination result,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF4, wherein the specific display control means controls the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the result-corresponding display data stored in the display storage area is displayed, so that a display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is performed on the specific display means.

According to the feature αF5, the player's attention is drawn to the specific display means by displaying the result of determination as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player on the specific display means. In this case, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started, the display storage area in which the display data for causing the specific display means to display is set is not initialized by the initialization means. Thereby, the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started can be the display contents before the supply of the operating power is stopped regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means.

Feature αF6. The gaming machine according to feature αF5, wherein the display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means even when the privilege provision information is erased from the prescribed storage area by the initialization means by the initialization means.

According to the feature αF6, if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the privilege provision information is erased from the predetermined storage area, so that even if the privilege provision information was stored in the predetermined storage area before the supply of the operating power is stopped, the game can be started in a state in which the privilege provision information is erased when the supply of the operating power is restarted. In this case, even when the privilege provision information is erased from the predetermined storage area in this way, the display storage area in which the display data for causing the specific display means to display is set is not initialized by the initialization means. Thus, it is possible to give priority to preventing the player from specifying whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αF7. As the specific display means, a first specific display means (special figure display section 37a) and a second specific display means (general figure display section 38a),
As the display storage area, a first display storage area (first display data buffer 271) and a second display storage area (third display data buffer 273) are provided,
The display data setting means
First display data setting means for setting display data in the first display storage area (function of executing the processing of step S8915 in the main side CPU63 with respect to the special figure display unit 37a),
Second display data setting means for setting display data in the second display storage area (function for executing the processing of step S8915 in the main side CPU 63 with respect to the normal diagram display unit 38a);
with
The specific display control means is
A first specific display control means for controlling the display of the first specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display storage area is performed (function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main side CPU 63 with respect to the special figure display unit 37a),
A second specific display control means for controlling the display of the second specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the second display storage area is performed (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main side CPU 63 with respect to the normal diagram display unit 38a);
with
The game machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF6, wherein the first display storage area and the second display storage area are not initialized by the initialization means.

According to the feature αF7, the display contents when the supply of the operating power is started for both the first specific display means and the second specific display means can be the display contents before the supply of the operating power is stopped regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display contents of the first specific display means and the second specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means.

Feature αF8. A configuration in which processing at the start of supply of operating power is executed when supply of operating power is started, and processing for initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is included in the processing at the start of supply of operating power;
The gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF7, wherein, when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means causes the specific display means to start displaying after the processing at the time of starting supply of the operating power is completed.

According to the feature αF8, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, it is possible to start the display on the specific display means at the timing after the processing for starting the supply of the operating power is completed.

Feature αF9. Situation generating means (a function of executing step SC216 of the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth embodiment) for creating a settable situation in which a setting value to be used can be set from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage based on the start of supply of operating power;
The initialization means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the settable situation occurs or after the settable situation occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature αF8, wherein the settable state occurs in a state in which a process for starting supply of operating power is being executed.

According to the feature αF9, it is possible to start the display on the specific display means at the timing after the processing for starting the supply of the operating power ends, regardless of whether the settable state occurs or not.

With respect to the configuration of features αF1 to αF9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αG group>
Feature αG1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, normal figure display unit 38a),
display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63);
a specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63);
Initializing means (a function of executing a second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-sixth embodiment) for initializing a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the fifty-sixth embodiment) including the display storage area based on the start of supply of operating power;
with
The display data setting means is a correspondence setting means (steps SC502, SC503, SC507 and SC51 of the main CPU 63) for setting specific correspondence display data for causing the specific display means to perform a specific correspondence display in the display storage area when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started and when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operation power is started. A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of 0).

According to the feature αG1, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of the supply of operating power, so that the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started, the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means both when the predetermined storage area is initialized and when it is not initialized. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means.

Feature αG2. A setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (a function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-sixth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature αG1, wherein the initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means or after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means.

According to the feature αG2, when the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or the predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting value to be used is set, the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting value to be used is newly set. In this case, regardless of whether or not the predetermined storage area is initialized along with the new setting of the set value to be used, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature αG3. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (when an information abnormality related to the main side RAM 65 does not occur and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1" and the "RAM clear operation" is performed), another initialization means (a function of executing the first RAM clear processing of the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-sixth embodiment) is provided to initialize the predetermined storage area even when the setting value to be used is not set by the setting means. ,
The gaming machine according to feature αG2, wherein the correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area even when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started.

According to the characteristic αG3, when the supply of the operating power is started and the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the predetermined storage area is initialized even if the setting value is not set. Therefore, even if the setting value is not newly set, the game can be started with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, when the set value is newly set, when the set value is not newly set, when the predetermined initialization condition is established, or when the predetermined initialization condition is not established, the specific display means performs the display corresponding to the specific. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the setting value is newly set and whether or not the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied.

Feature αG4. The game according to any one of features αG1 to αG3, wherein the correspondence setting means does not set the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area when the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined regulation situation (during execution of a game cycle, during execution of an open/close execution mode, during execution of a variable display cycle in the normal figure display unit 38a, during execution of a normal open state), and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started and the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means. technique.

According to the feature αG4, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined restricted situation and then the supply of operating power is started, if the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the display data corresponding to the specific is not set in the display storage area. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined regulation situation and the supply of operating power is started after that, if the predetermined storage area is not initialized, it is possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is stopped.

Feature αG5. grant determining means (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player, and for storing privilege granting information (information of "1" set to a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) in the predetermined storage area when granting a privilege to the player;
privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area;
with
The display data setting means sets display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means in the display storage area when it is time to display the determination result,
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics αG1 to αG4, wherein the specific display control means controls the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the result-corresponding display data stored in the display storage area is performed, so that a display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is performed on the specific display means.

According to the feature αG5, the player's attention is drawn to the specific display means by displaying the result of determination as to whether or not to give the player a privilege on the specific display means. In this case, by providing the configuration described in the feature αG1, when the supply of the operating power is started, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized or not. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means.

Feature αG6. The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that the display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is performed after the start of the variable display of the pattern,
The gaming machine according to feature αG5, wherein the correspondence setting means does not set the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the specific display means is performing the variable display of the pattern and the supply of the operating power is started after that, if the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means.

According to the feature αG6, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the specific display means is performing the variable display of the pattern, and the supply of the operating power is started after that, if the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the display data corresponding to the specific is not set in the display storage area. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation in which the specified display means performs the variable display of the pattern, and when the supply of the operating power is started after that and the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the variable display of the pattern on the specified display means can be restarted.

Feature αG7. When the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area, the privilege granting means grants the privilege after a display corresponding to the granting of the privilege is performed on the specific display means,
The gaming machine according to feature αG5 or αG6, wherein the correspondence setting means does not set the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area if the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means and then the supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αG7, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the privilege is granted and the supply of the operating power is started after that, if the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the display data corresponding to the specific is not set in the display storage area. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a privilege is given and when the supply of operating power is started after that and the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the display of the specific display means can be started from the display contents corresponding to the situation where the privilege is given.

Feature αG8. The gaming machine according to any one of features αG1 to αG7, wherein the specific display control means causes the specific display means to start displaying after the specific display data is set in the display storage area when the specific display means performs the specific correspondence display when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αG8, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being displayed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature αG9. A configuration in which a process at the start of supply of operating power is executed when supply of operating power is started, and a process for initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is included in the process at the start of supply of operating power,
The gaming machine according to feature αG8, wherein the specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started.

According to the feature αG9, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, it is possible to start the display on the specific display means at the timing after the end of the process at the start of supply of operating power.

Feature αG10. setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (a function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-sixth embodiment);
The initialization means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use object is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the use object is set by the setting means,
The game machine according to feature αG9, wherein the setting of the set value to be used by the setting means occurs in a situation where the process for starting supply of the operating power is being executed.

According to the feature αG10, regardless of whether the set value to be used is newly set or not, it is possible to start the display on the specific display means at the timing after the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is finished.

With respect to the configuration of features αG1 to αG10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O. 11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9 , features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8 , Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14 , Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to αP7, Features αQ1 to αQ9, Features αR1 to αR8, Features αS1 to αS3, Features αT1 to αT4, Features αU1 to αU14, Features αV1 to αV14, Features αW1 to αW12 or one or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αH group>
Features αH1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, normal figure display unit 38a),
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (function of executing the processing of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth to fifty-seventh embodiments, and function of executing the processing of step SC717 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-eighth to the sixtieth embodiments);
a specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63);
setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (function for executing the processing of step SC216 of the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth to sixtieth embodiments);
with
The game machine is characterized in that the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started is display content that makes it impossible to distinguish between that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means when the supply of operating power is started and that the setting value to be used has not been set by the setting means when the supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αH1, the set value to be used is set in the settable state generated based on the start of the supply of the operating power, so that it becomes necessary to newly start the supply of the operating power in order to set the set value to be used. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started becomes the display content that makes it impossible to distinguish between the setting of the setting value to be used when the supply of the operating power is started and the predetermined situation in which the setting value to be used is not set when the supply of the operating power is started. Thus, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the set value to be used has been set.

Feature αH2. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, normal figure display unit 38a),
display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (a function of executing the processing of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-sixth to fifty-seventh embodiments, and a function of executing the processing of step SC717 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-eighth to the sixtieth embodiments);
a specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63);
setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (function for executing the processing of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-sixth to sixtieth embodiments);
with
The display data setting means sets, in the display storage area, specific correspondence display data for causing the specific display means to perform a specific correspondence display (in the fifty-sixth embodiment, steps SC502 and SC503 in the main CPU 63; The function of executing the processing of steps SC507 and SC510, the function of executing the processing of steps SC602 and SC603 in the main CPU 63 in the 57th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SC802 to SC805 in the main CPU 63 in the 58th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SC902 to SC905 in the main CPU 63 in the 59th embodiment, and the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps SD102 to SD105, step SD109, step SD110, step SD113 and step SD114 in .

According to the feature αH2, since the set value to be used is set in the settable state generated based on the start of the supply of the operating power, it becomes necessary to newly start the supply of the operating power in order to set the set value to be used, which makes it difficult to illegally set the set value to be used. In this case, when the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started, and when the setting value to be used is not set when the supply of the operating power is started, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence. Thus, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the set value to be used has been set.

Feature αH3. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (when an information abnormality related to the main side RAM 65 does not occur and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1", the "RAM clear operation" is performed), another initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area (a function of executing the first RAM clear processing of the main side CPU 63 in the 56th to 60th embodiments);
The gaming machine according to feature αH2, wherein the correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area both when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started and when the setting means sets the set value to be used when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αH3, when the supply of the operating power is started and the predetermined initialization condition is met, the predetermined storage area is initialized, so that the game can be started in the state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when the setting value to be used is set and when the predetermined storage area is initialized, when the supply of the operating power is started, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from distinguishing between the new setting of the setting value to be used and the initialization of the predetermined storage area.

Feature αH4. The gaming machine according to feature αH2 or αH3, further comprising initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means or after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means (the function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-sixth to sixtieth embodiments).

According to the feature αH4, when the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or the predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting value to be used is set, the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting value to be used is newly set. In this case, when the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started, and when the setting value to be used is not set when the supply of the operating power is started, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence. Thus, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the set value to be used has been set.

Feature αH5. grant determining means (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player, and for storing privilege granting information (information of "1" set to a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) in the predetermined storage area when granting a privilege to the player;
privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area;
with
The display data setting means sets display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means in the display storage area when it is time to display the determination result,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αH2 to αH4, wherein the specific display control means controls the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the result-corresponding display data stored in the display storage area is displayed, so that a display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is performed on the specific display means.

According to the feature αH5, the player's attention is drawn to the specific display means by displaying the result of determination as to whether or not to give the privilege to the player on the specific display means. In this case, by providing the configuration described in the feature αH1, the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means both in the case where the set value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started and in the predetermined situation in which the set value to be used is not set when the supply of the operating power is started. Thus, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the set value to be used has been set.

Feature αH6. The gaming machine according to feature αH5, wherein the specific correspondence display data is display data used as result correspondence display data.

According to the feature αH6, when the supply of the operating power is started using the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the decision result of the provision determining means, the specific display means performs the specific correspondence display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the set value to be used has been set even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started while suppressing the increase in the capacity of the display data.

Feature αH7. The gaming machine according to feature αH6, wherein the display data corresponding to the specific result is display data used when the award determination means determines not to award the privilege to the player, among the display data corresponding to the result.

When the game hall is closed, the power supply of the game machine is normally cut off in a situation where the specific display means displays the display contents corresponding to the decision not to give the privilege to the player by the giving decision means. In this case, according to the feature αH7, in both the case where the set value to be used when the supply of the operating power is started is set and the set value to be used when the supply of the operating power is started is not set in a predetermined situation, the display content of the specific display means is the display content corresponding to the decision not to give the privilege to the player by the giving decision means. Thus, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, the player can be made to recognize that the display contents are the display contents displayed before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the set value to be used has been set.

Feature αH8. A plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data exist,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αH2 to αH7, wherein the correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data to be used from among a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area.

According to the feature αH8, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific correspondence display of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αH9. The gaming machine according to any one of features αH2 to αH8, wherein the specific display control means causes the specific display means to start displaying after the specific display data is set in the display storage area when the specific display means performs the specific correspondence display when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αH9, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being displayed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started.

Features αH10. The setting means sets the set value to be used in a situation where the process for starting supply of operating power is being executed,
The gaming machine according to feature αH9, wherein when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means causes the specific display means to start displaying after the processing at the time of starting supply of the operating power is executed.

According to the feature αH10, regardless of whether the set value to be used is set or not set, it is possible to start the specific correspondence display on the specific display means at the timing after the processing for starting the supply of the operating power is completed.

Features αH11. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (when "RAM clear operation" is performed in a situation where an information abnormality related to the main side RAM 65 does not occur and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1"), a separate initialization means (a function of executing the first RAM clear processing of the main side CPU 63 in the 56th to 60th embodiments) that initializes the predetermined storage area even if the setting value is not set by the setting means. prepared,
The separate initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area in a situation in which the processing at the time of starting supply of the operating power is being executed,
The correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area both when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started and when the set value is set by the setting means when supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature αH9 or αH10, wherein when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means causes the specific display means to start displaying after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is executed.

According to the feature αH11, when the supply of the operating power is started and the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the predetermined storage area is initialized. Therefore, even if the setting value to be used is not newly set, the game can be started in the state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when the setting value to be used is set and when the predetermined storage area is initialized, when the supply of the operating power is started, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from distinguishing between the new setting of the setting value to be used and the initialization of the predetermined storage area. In addition, regardless of whether the set value to be used is set or the predetermined storage area is initialized, it is possible to start the specific correspondence display on the specific display means at the timing after the processing for starting the supply of operating power is completed.

For the configuration of features αH1 to αH11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O. 11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9 , features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8 , Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14 , Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to αP7, Features αQ1 to αQ9, Features αR1 to αR8, Features αS1 to αS3, Features αT1 to αT4, Features αU1 to αU14, Features αV1 to αV14, Features αW1 to αW12 or one or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αI group>
Feature αI1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, normal figure display unit 38a),
Giving determination means (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and storing privilege giving information (information of "1" set to the flag corresponding to the type of the jackpot result) in a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the 57th to 60th embodiments) when giving a privilege to the player;
privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area;
Display data setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-seventh embodiment, and step SC71 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-eighth to sixtieth embodiments) for setting the display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the result corresponding to the determination result of the provision determining means in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) when the display timing of the determination result comes. 7), and
a specific display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) that controls the display corresponding to the result-corresponding display data stored in the display storage area so that the display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is performed by the specific display means;
Initializing means (a function of executing a second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-seventh to sixtieth embodiments) for initializing a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in fifty-seventh to sixtieth embodiments) including the display storage area based on the start of supply of operating power;
with
The display data setting means is a correspondence setting means for setting, in the display storage area, specific corresponding display data to be used as the display data corresponding to the result when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when supply of operating power is started (a function of executing the processes of steps SC602 and SC603 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps SC802 to SC805 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-eighth embodiment, and In the 59th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SC902 to SC905 in the main side CPU 63, and in the 60th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SD102 to SD105, step SD109, step SD110, step SD113, and step SD114 in the main side CPU 63).

According to the feature αI1, the player's attention is drawn to the specific display means by displaying the result of determination as to whether or not to give the player a privilege on the specific display means. Further, by initializing a predetermined storage area based on the start of supply of operating power, it is possible to start a game in a state in which the predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the application determination means is set in the display storage area. Thus, even when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means becomes the display content displayed when notifying the determination result of the application determination means. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αI2. A setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (a function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-seventh to sixtieth embodiments);
The gaming machine according to feature αI1, wherein the initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means or after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means.

According to the feature αI2, when the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or the predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting value to be used is set, the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting value to be used is newly set. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized accompanying the new setting of the setting value to be used, the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the grant determination means is set in the display storage area. Thus, even when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means becomes the display content displayed when notifying the determination result of the application determination means. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature αI3. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (when a "RAM clear operation" is performed in a situation where an information abnormality related to the main side RAM 65 has not occurred and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1"), another initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area even when the setting value of the use object is not set by the setting means (performs the first RAM clear processing of the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-seventh to sixtieth embodiments) function),
The gaming machine according to feature αI2, wherein the correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area even when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started.

According to the characteristic αI3, when the supply of the operating power is started and the predetermined initialization condition is established, the predetermined storage area is initialized even if the setting value to be used is not set. Therefore, even if the setting value to be used is not newly set, the game can be started in the state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the grant determination means is set in the display storage area in either case when the setting value to be used is newly set or when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the establishment of the predetermined initialization condition. Thus, the display content of the specific display means becomes the display content displayed when notifying the determination result of the grant determination means, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is newly set or the predetermined storage area is initialized by the establishment of the predetermined initialization condition. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the setting value to be used is newly set and whether or not the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied.

Feature αI4. The gaming machine according to any one of features αI1 to αI3, wherein the display data corresponding to the specific result is display data used when the award determination means determines not to award the privilege to the player, among the display data corresponding to the result.

When the game hall is closed, the power supply of the game machine is normally cut off in a situation where the specific display means displays the display contents corresponding to the decision not to give the privilege to the player by the giving decision means. In this case, according to the feature αI4, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means becomes the display content corresponding to the fact that the grant determination means has determined not to grant the privilege to the player. Thus, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, the player can be made to recognize that the display contents are the display contents displayed before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αI5. A plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data exist,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αI1 to αI4, wherein the correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data to be used from among a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area.

According to the feature αI5, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific correspondence display of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αI6. The gaming machine according to any one of features αI1 to αI5, wherein the specific display control means causes the specific display means to start displaying after the specific display data is set in the display storage area when the specific display means performs the specific correspondence display when the supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αI6, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being displayed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature αI7. A configuration in which a process at the start of supply of operating power is executed when supply of operating power is started, and a process for initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is included in the process at the start of supply of operating power,
The gaming machine according to feature αI6, wherein when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means causes the specific display means to start displaying after the processing at the time of starting supply of the operating power is executed.

According to the feature αI7, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, it is possible to start the display on the specific display means at the timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed.

Feature αI8. A setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (a function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-seventh to sixtieth embodiments);
The initialization means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use object is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the use object is set by the setting means,
The game machine according to feature αI7, wherein the setting of the set value to be used by the setting means occurs in a situation where the process for starting supply of the operating power is being executed.

According to the feature αI8, regardless of whether or not a new set value to be used is set, it is possible to start the display on the specific display means at the timing after the processing for starting the supply of the operating power is finished.

For the configuration of features αI1 to αI8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αJ group>
Features αJ1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, normal figure display unit 38a),
display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (function of executing the processing of step SC717 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-eighth to sixtieth embodiments, and function of executing the processing of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 in the sixty-first embodiment);
a specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63);
Initializing means (a function of executing a second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-eighth to sixty-first embodiments) for initializing a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the fifty-eighth to sixty-first embodiments) based on the start of supply of operating power;
Correspondence setting means for making the display content of the specific display means to be a specific correspondence display when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started (the function of executing the processing of steps SC802 to SC805 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SC902 to SC905 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-ninth embodiment, and the steps in the main CPU 63 in the sixtieth embodiment. a function of executing the processes of SD102 to step SD105, step SD109, step SD110, step SD113 and step SD114, a function of executing the process of step SD202 to step SD217 in the main CPU 63 in the 61st embodiment);
with
A gaming machine, wherein a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display exist.

According to the feature αJ1, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of the supply of operating power, so that the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started becomes the specific correspondence display. A plurality of types of the specific correspondence display exist. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means are diversified when the predetermined storage area is initialized. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized even if the display contents of the specific display means are confirmed when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αJ2. The correspondence setting means sets, in the display storage area, specific correspondence display data for causing the specific display means to perform the specific correspondence display when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature αJ1, wherein a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data exist.

According to the characteristic αJ2, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means by setting any of the specific correspondence display data among the plurality of types of specific correspondence display data in the display storage area. As a result, it is possible to cause the specific display means to perform specific correspondence display only by selecting one type of specific correspondence display data from among a plurality of types of specific correspondence display data determined in advance and setting it in a display storage area, so that it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for causing the specific display means to perform one kind of specific correspondence display among a plurality of types of specific correspondence display.

Feature αJ3. grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player, and for storing privilege grant information (information of "1" set in the flag corresponding to the type of the jackpot result) in the predetermined storage area when granting the privilege to the player;
privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area;
with
The display data setting means sets display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means in the display storage area when it is time to display the determination result,
The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is performed, so that a display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is performed on the specific display means,
The gaming machine according to feature αJ2, wherein the specific correspondence display data is display data used as result correspondence display data.

According to the feature αJ3, the player's attention is drawn to the specific display means when the specific display means displays the result of determination as to whether or not the privilege is given to the player. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is started using the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the decision result of the provision determining means, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence. As a result, while suppressing an increase in the capacity of display data, even if a player confirms the display contents of a specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to make it difficult to specify whether or not a predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αJ4. The gaming machine according to feature αJ3, wherein the display data corresponding to the specific result is display data used when the award determination means determines not to award the privilege to the player, among the display data corresponding to the result.

When the game hall is closed, the power supply of the game machine is normally cut off in a situation where the specific display means displays the display contents corresponding to the decision not to give the privilege to the player by the giving decision means. In this case, according to the feature αJ4, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means becomes the display content corresponding to the fact that the grant determination means has determined not to grant the privilege to the player. Thus, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, the player can be made to recognize that the display contents are the display contents displayed before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αJ5. The gaming machine according to feature αJ3, wherein the specific correspondence display data includes both display data used when the award determination means determines not to award the privilege to the player, and display data used when the award determination means determines to award the privilege to the player, among the display data corresponding to the result.

According to the feature αJ5, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, either the display when the award determination means decides not to award the privilege to the player or the display when the award determination means decides to award the privilege to the player is performed by the specific display means as the specific correspondence display. Thus, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, the player can be made to recognize that the display contents are the display contents displayed before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αJ6. A setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (a function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-eighth to sixty-first embodiments);
The gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ5, wherein the initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area when the set value to be used is set by the setting means or after the set value to be used is set by the setting means.

According to the feature αJ6, when the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or by initializing the predetermined storage area accompanying the setting, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when a predetermined storage area is initialized accompanying the new setting of the set value to be used, one of a plurality of types of specific correspondence displays is displayed by the specific display means. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means are diversified when the setting value to be used is newly set, and even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature αJ7. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (when the "RAM clear operation" is performed in a situation where an information abnormality related to the main side RAM 65 has not occurred and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1"), a separate initialization means (a function of executing the first RAM clear processing of the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-eighth to sixty-first embodiments) for initializing the predetermined storage area even when the setting value is not set by the setting means. prepared,
The gaming machine according to feature αJ6, wherein the correspondence setting means sets the display content of the specific display means to the specific correspondence display both when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when the supply of operating power is started and when the setting means sets the set value to be used when the supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αJ7, when the supply of the operating power is started and the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the predetermined storage area is initialized even if the setting value is not set. Therefore, even if the setting value is not newly set, the game can be started in the state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when a new set value is set or when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and a predetermined storage area is initialized, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the setting value is newly set and whether or not the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied.

Feature αJ8. The gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ7, wherein the correspondence setting means causes the display content of the specific display means to be the specific correspondence display even when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αJ8, when the supply of operating power is started, the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means both when the predetermined storage area is initialized and when it is not initialized. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means.

Feature αJ9. The correspondence setting means does not set the specific correspondence display data for performing the specific correspondence display in the display storage area when the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined regulation situation (during execution of the game round, during execution of the open/close execution mode, during execution of the variable display time in the normal figure display unit 38a, during execution of the normal open state), and when the supply of the operating power is started after that, and the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means. technique.

According to the feature αJ9, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined restricted situation and then the supply of operating power is started, and if the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the display data corresponding to the specific is not set in the display storage area. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined regulation situation and the supply of operating power is started after that, if the predetermined storage area is not initialized, it is possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is stopped.

Features αJ10. The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that the display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is performed after the start of the variable display of the pattern,
The gaming machine according to characteristic αJ8 or αJ9, wherein the correspondence setting means does not set the specific correspondence display data for performing the specific correspondence display in the display storage area when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the state where the variable display of the pattern is performed by the specific display means and the supply of the operating power is started after that, and the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means.

According to the feature αJ10, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the specific display means is performing the variable display of the pattern, and if the supply of the operating power is subsequently started and the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the display data corresponding to the specific is not set in the display storage area. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation in which the specified display means performs the variable display of the pattern, and when the supply of the operating power is started after that and the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the variable display of the pattern on the specified display means can be restarted.

Features αJ11. When the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area, the privilege granting means grants the privilege after a display corresponding to the granting of the privilege is performed on the specific display means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αJ8 to αJ10, wherein the correspondence setting means does not set the specific correspondence display data for performing the specific correspondence display in the display storage area when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the privilege is granted by the privilege providing means and then the supply of the operating power is started and the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means.

According to the characteristic αJ11, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the privilege is granted and the supply of the operating power is started after that, if the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the specific display data is not set in the display storage area. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a privilege is given and when the supply of operating power is started after that and the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the display of the specific display means can be started from the display contents corresponding to the situation where the privilege is given.

Feature αJ12. The gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ11, characterized in that, when the specific display means performs the specific correspondence display when supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means causes the specific display means to start displaying in a state in which the specific correspondence display is performed.

According to the feature αJ12, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being displayed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature αJ13. A configuration in which processing at the start of supply of operating power is executed when supply of operating power is started, and processing for initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is included in the processing at the start of supply of operating power;
The gaming machine according to feature αJ12, wherein the specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started.

According to the feature αJ13, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, it is possible to start the display on the specific display means at the timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed.

Feature αJ14. A setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (a function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-eighth to sixty-first embodiments);
The initialization means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use object is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the use object is set by the setting means,
The gaming machine according to characteristic αJ13, wherein the setting of the set value to be used by the setting means occurs in a situation where the process for starting supply of the operating power is being executed.

According to the characteristic αJ14, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is newly set or not, it is possible to start the display on the specific display means at the timing after the processing for starting the supply of the operating power is finished.

For the configuration of features αJ1 to αJ14, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O. 11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9 , features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8 , Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14 , Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to αP7, Features αQ1 to αQ9, Features αR1 to αR8, Features αS1 to αS3, Features αT1 to αT4, Features αU1 to αU14, Features αV1 to αV14, Features αW1 to αW12 or one or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αK group>
Features αK1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, normal figure display unit 38a),
Giving decision means (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and for storing privilege giving information (information of "1" set in the flag corresponding to the type of the jackpot result) in a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the 61st embodiment) when giving a privilege to the player;
privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area;
Display data setting means (function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) for setting the display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) when the display timing of the determination result comes;
a specific display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) that controls the display corresponding to the result-corresponding display data stored in the display storage area so that the display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is performed by the specific display means;
initialization means for initializing a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the 61st embodiment) including the display storage area based on the start of supply of operating power (a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 61st embodiment);
correspondence setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps SD202 to SD217 in the main CPU 63) for setting the display content of the specific display means to a specific correspondence display when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started;
with
There are a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display,
A gaming machine, wherein the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include display contents that are not selected as displays corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means.

According to the feature αK1, a predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of supply of operating power, so that a game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started becomes the specific correspondence display. A plurality of types of specific correspondence displays exist, and the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include display contents that are not selected as the display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determining means. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means are diversified when the predetermined storage area is initialized. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized even if the display contents of the specific display means are confirmed when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αK2. The gaming machine according to feature αK1, wherein the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include display contents that can be selected as display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means and display contents that are not selected as display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means.

According to the feature αK2, since the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include both display contents that can be selected as displays corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means and display contents that are not selected, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific display means when the predetermined storage area is initialized.

Feature αK3. The specific display means has a plurality of light emitting parts,
The gaming machine according to feature αK1 or αK2, wherein the correspondence setting means performs a lottery process (step SD204, step SD212) to determine whether or not each of the plurality of light emitting units is to be turned on individually, and sets display data of a lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery processing for each of the plurality of light emitting units in the display storage area, thereby performing the specific correspondence display.

According to the feature αK3, a lottery process is executed to determine whether each of the plurality of light emitting parts in the specific display means should be turned on or not, and the display contents of the lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process are displayed on the specific display means as a specific correspondence display when a predetermined storage area is initialized. As a result, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific display means when the prescribed storage area is initialized, and to make the display contents of the specific display means irregular when the prescribed storage area is initialized.

Feature αK4. A setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (a function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main side CPU 63 in the 61st embodiment),
The gaming machine according to any one of features αK1 to αK3, wherein the initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area when the set value to be used is set by the setting means or after the set value to be used is set by the setting means.

According to the feature αK4, when the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or the predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting value to be used is set, it is possible to start the game in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting value to be used is newly set. In this case, when a predetermined storage area is initialized accompanying the new setting of the set value to be used, one of a plurality of types of specific correspondence displays is displayed by the specific display means. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means are diversified when the setting value to be used is newly set, and even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature αK5. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (when the "RAM clearing operation" is performed in a situation where an information abnormality related to the main side RAM 65 does not occur and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1"), another initialization means (a function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main side CPU 63 in the 61st embodiment) is provided for initializing the predetermined storage area even when the setting value of the use target is not set by the setting means. ,
The gaming machine according to feature αK4, wherein the correspondence setting means sets the display content of the specific display means to the specific correspondence display both when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when the supply of operating power is started and when the setting means sets the set value to be used when the supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αK5, when the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined initialization condition is met, the predetermined storage area is initialized even if the setting value is not set. Therefore, even if the setting value is not newly set, the game can be started in the state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when a new set value is set or when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and a predetermined storage area is initialized, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the setting value is newly set and whether or not the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied.

Feature αK6. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics αK1 to αK5, wherein, when the specific display means displays the specific correspondence display when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means in a state in which the specific correspondence display is performed.

According to the feature αK6, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being displayed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature αK7. A configuration in which processing at the start of supply of operating power is executed when supply of operating power is started, and processing for initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is included in the processing at the start of supply of operating power;
The gaming machine according to feature αK6, wherein the specific display control means causes the specific display means to start displaying after the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started.

According to the characteristic αK7, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, it is possible to start the display on the specific display means at the timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed.

Feature αK8. A setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (a function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main side CPU 63 in the fifty-sixth embodiment);
The initialization means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use object is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the use object is set by the setting means,
The gaming machine according to the feature αK7, wherein the setting of the set value to be used by the setting means occurs in a situation where the processing for starting supply of the operating power is being executed.

According to the feature αK8, regardless of whether the set value to be used is newly set or not, it is possible to start the display on the specific display means at the timing after the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is finished.

For the configuration of features αK1 to αK8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the features αF group, the features αG group, the features αH group, the features αI group, the features αJ group, and the features αK group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make the operation at the start of supply of operating power suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αL group>
Feature αL1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, normal figure display unit 38a),
a specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63);
setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (a function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 62nd to 63rd embodiments);
with
The specific display control means sets the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started based on a suggestion target situation, which is one of the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means and the setting value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the setting value before the supply of operating power is stopped or the setting value that is more advantageous than the setting value before the supply of operating power is stopped is set by the setting means as the setting value to be used. Mode determining means (in the 62nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SD402 to SD411 in the main side CPU 63, in the 63rd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SD502 in the main side CPU 63).

According to the feature αL1, by confirming the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to predict that the setting value to be used has been newly set, or that the advantage of the setting value to be used has become higher than or higher than the advantage of the previous setting value. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to predict the setting value by using the display contents of the specific display means, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature αL2. The mode determination means determines, in a determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started based on the fact that a set value equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value before the supply of operating power is stopped or a set value that is more advantageous than the set value before the supply of operating power is stopped is set by the setting means as the set value to be used, and a set value lower than the advantage of the set value before the supply of operating power is stopped is the set value to be used as the set value to be used. The gaming machine according to feature αL1, wherein the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started based on the setting by the setting means is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation (a mode of referring to the first display distribution table 391 for special figures, a mode of referring to the first display distribution table 393 for general maps).

According to the characteristic αL2, when the advantage of the setting value to be used becomes equal to or higher than the advantage of the previous setting value or higher than the advantage of the previous setting value, the display content of the specific display means is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation, and when the advantage of the setting value to be used becomes lower than the previous setting value, the display content of the specific display means is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation. This makes it easier to predict whether or not the advantage of the set value to be used is greater than or higher than the advantage of the previous set value.

Feature αL3. The gaming machine according to feature αL2, wherein the mode determination means determines the display content of the specific display means in a determination mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation when the supply of operating power is started based on the fact that the setting value to be used is not set by the setting means.

According to feature αL3, even if the setting value to be used is not newly set when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is determined when the supply of operating power is started in the determination mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation. Therefore, if the display content of the specific display means is determined in the determination mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation, is this situation a situation in which the setting value to be used has not been newly set, or is the advantage of the setting value to be used greater than before? It is possible to make it impossible to identify whether the situation has become low.

Feature αL4. The gaming machine according to any one of features αL1 to αL3, wherein, in the case of the suggested situation, the mode determining means determines the display content of the specific display means by lottery in a lottery mode corresponding to the suggested situation.

According to the feature αL4, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific display means in the suggestion target situation. This makes it possible to make it impossible to clearly specify whether or not the situation is the suggestion target even if the specific display means is confirmed.

Feature αL5. The gaming machine according to feature αL4, wherein, in the case of a non-suggestion target situation that is not the suggestion target situation, the mode determination means determines the display content of the specific display means by a lottery mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation.

According to the feature αL5, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific display means in the non-suggestion target situation. This makes it possible to make it impossible to clearly specify whether or not the non-suggestion target situation exists even if the specific display means is confirmed.

Feature αL6. Common display contents (first to third initial displays for special maps, first to third initial displays for normal maps) are present in both the display content that can be selected by lottery of the display content of the specific display means in the lottery mode corresponding to the suggested target situation and the display content that can be selected by lottery of the display content of the specific display means in the lottery mode corresponding to the non-suggested target situation, and the selection probability of the common display content is in the case of the lottery mode corresponding to the suggested target situation and the case of the lottery mode corresponding to the non-suggested target situation. The game machine according to feature αL5, which is characterized by being different.

According to the feature αL6, the common display content is displayed by the specific display means regardless of whether the situation is the suggested situation or the non-suggested situation, so it is possible to make it impossible to clearly specify whether the situation is the suggested situation or the non-suggested situation. On the other hand, since the selection probability of the common display content differs between the suggestive target situation and the non-suggestive target situation, it is possible to predict from the display content of the specific display means whether the suggestive target situation or the non-suggestive target situation.

Feature αL7. Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (function for executing the processing of step S8915 in the main CPU 63),
The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics αL1 to αL6, further comprising an initialization means (a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 62nd to 63rd embodiments) for initializing a predetermined storage area including the display storage area when the setting value for the use object is set by the setting means or after the setting value for the use object is set by the setting means.

According to the feature αL7, when the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or the predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting value to be used is set, the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting value to be used is newly set. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature αL1, it is possible to predict whether or not the situation is a suggestion target situation based on the display contents of the specific display means by using the situation where the display storage area is initialized along with the initialization of the predetermined storage area.

Feature αL8. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started (when an information abnormality related to the main side RAM 65 does not occur and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1", the "RAM clear operation" is performed), another initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area (a function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main side CPU 63 in the 62nd to 63rd embodiments);
The gaming machine according to feature αL7, wherein the mode determination means determines the display content of the specific display means in a determination mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means and when the supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αL8, when the supply of the operating power is started and the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the predetermined storage area is initialized, so that the game can be started in the state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation, so that it becomes easy to predict whether the suggestion target situation or not.

Feature αL9. Giving determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S508 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and for storing privilege giving information (information of "1" set to the flag corresponding to the type of the jackpot result) in a predetermined storage area when giving the privilege to the player;
privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area;
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features αL1 to αL8, wherein the specific display control means causes the specific display means to display the result of determination by the award determination means.

According to the feature αL9, the player's attention is drawn to the specific display means by displaying the result of determination as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player on the specific display means. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature αL1, it is possible to obtain the above-described excellent effects by using the specific display means.

Feature αL10. The gaming machine according to feature αL9, wherein the display content of the specific display means determined in the determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation is display content that is not displayed when the display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is performed by the specific display means.

According to the feature αL10, it is possible to distinguish the display content determined by the determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation from the display content corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means.

Feature αL11. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics αL1 to αL10, wherein the specific display control means causes the specific display means to start displaying in a state in which the display content determined by the mode determination means is displayed when the specific display means displays the display content determined by the mode determination means when the supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αL11, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being displayed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the display contents determined by the mode determining means are displayed when the supply of the operating power is started.

With respect to the configuration of features αL1 to αL11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O. 11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9 , features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8 , Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14 , Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to αP7, Features αQ1 to αQ9, Features αR1 to αR8, Features αS1 to αS3, Features αT1 to αT4, Features αU1 to αU14, Features αV1 to αV14, Features αW1 to αW12 or one or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic αL group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αM group>
Feature αM1. setting means (function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main side CPU 63) for setting the set value to be used from among the set values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage;
In a situation where predetermined setting-related processing (setting value update processing, setting confirmation processing) related to the setting value is being executed, corresponding operation control means (in the sixty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SE304, SE305, steps SE308, and SE309 in the main CPU 63, and steps SE604 and SE607 in the main CPU 63 in the sixty-fifth embodiment In the sixty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps SE704, SE707, SE802 and SE816 in the main CPU 63. In the sixty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps SE904 and SE907 in the main CPU 63. In the sixty-eighth embodiment, the 15R display section 481, the 6R display section 483 and the small prize display section 48 in the main CPU 63. 4), and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αM1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, the state of the predetermined area visible from the front of the gaming machine is the corresponding operation state in a situation where predetermined setting-related processing relating to the set value is being executed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αM2. Predetermined operation means provided in the predetermined area that can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine (in the 65th embodiment, the normal figure display unit 423a, the first special figure display unit 425, the second special figure display unit 426 and the special display unit 429, and the 67th embodiment, the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426),
The gaming machine according to feature αM1, wherein the corresponding action control means sets the state of the predetermined area to the corresponding action state by setting the action state of the predetermined action means to an action state that does not occur when the game is being executed in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

According to the feature αM2, the operation state of the predetermined operation means is an operation state that does not occur when the game is being executed while the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed. As a result, it is possible to perform notification indicating that the predetermined setting-related processing is being performed by using the predetermined operation means that operates when the game is being performed.

Feature αM3. A plurality of predetermined operation means (first special figure display portion 425, second special figure display portion 426 and special display portion 429 in the 64th embodiment, normal figure display portion 423a, general figure reservation display portion 423b, first special figure display portion 425, second special figure display portion 426, first special figure reservation display portion 427, second special figure reservation display portion 428 and special Display unit 429, special electric winning device 416, first special figure display unit 425 and second special figure display unit 426 in the 66th embodiment, 15R display unit 481, 6R display unit 483 and small hit display unit 484) in the 68th embodiment,
The game machine according to feature αM1 or αM2, wherein the corresponding action control means sets a combination of the action states of the plurality of predetermined action means as the corresponding action state.

According to the feature αM3, a notification is executed to indicate that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed using a combination of operation states of a plurality of predetermined operation means. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to illegally issue a notification indicating that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αM4. The gaming machine according to feature αM3, wherein the corresponding operating state is a combination of operating states of the plurality of predetermined operating means that does not occur when a game is being played.

According to the feature αM4, a combination of operation states of a plurality of predetermined operation means is set to a combination that does not occur when a game is being executed, thereby executing notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed. As a result, it is possible to use a plurality of predetermined operation means that operate when a game is being executed to make a notification that a predetermined setting-related process is being performed.

Feature αM5. The gaming machine according to feature αM4, wherein each of the individual operation states in the corresponding operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation means is an operation state that can occur when a game is being executed, and those individual operation states are operation states that do not occur simultaneously when the game is being executed.

According to the feature αM5, each of the individual operation states in the corresponding operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation means is an operation state that can occur when the game is being executed, so that it is possible to use the operation state that can occur when the game is being executed to notify that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αM6. The game machine according to any one of features αM3 to αM5, wherein the first predetermined operation means among the plurality of predetermined operation means is display means, and the second predetermined operation means is movable means.

According to the feature αM6, since the combination of the individual operation states of the display means and the movable means indicates that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, it is possible to easily grasp that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αM7. The corresponding operation control means is
In a situation where a first setting-related process is being executed as the predetermined setting-related process, a first corresponding operation control means (a function of executing the processes of steps SE304 and SE305 in the main CPU 63 in the 64th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SE604 in the main CPU 63 in the 66th embodiment, and a step in the main CPU 63 in the 66th embodiment) SE704, the function of executing the processing of steps SE802 and step SE816, the function of controlling the display of the 15R display unit 481 and the small winning display unit 484 in the main side CPU 63 in the 68th embodiment);
In a situation where a second setting-related process is being executed as the predetermined setting-related process, a second corresponding operation control means (a function of executing the processes of steps SE308 and SE309 in the main CPU 63 in the 64th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SE607 in the main CPU 63 in the 66th embodiment, and a step in the main CPU 63 in the 66th embodiment) SE707, a function of executing the processes of steps SE802 and SE816, a function of controlling the display of the 15R display unit 481 and the 6R display unit 483 in the main CPU 63 in the 68th embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features αM3 to αM6, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αM7, it is possible to notify that the first setting-related process is being executed and that the second setting-related process is being executed using a combination of the operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation means.

Feature αM8. The first setting-related process is a process that enables setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means,
The gaming machine according to feature αM7, wherein the second setting-related process is a process for notifying the current setting value.

According to the feature αM8, it is possible to notify that a process is being executed to enable setting of a set value to be used by utilizing a combination of operation states of a plurality of predetermined operation means, and that a process to notify the set value to be used is being executed.

For the configuration of features αM1 to αM8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αN group>
Feature αN1. a first period generating means (a function of executing the processing of steps SD815 and SD816 in the main CPU 63) that generates a first period (game round) in a situation where a game is being executed;
First predetermined operation control means (first special figure display unit 425, second special figure display unit 426) to control the first predetermined operation means (the first special figure display unit 425, the second special figure display unit 426) so as to be in the first period corresponding state (state in which the pattern is displayed fluctuating) in the first period (The function of executing the processing of step SD706 in the main side CPU 63),
a second period generating means (a function of executing the processes of steps SD904 and SE116 in the main CPU 63) for generating a second period (opening/closing execution mode) in a situation where the game is being executed;
A second predetermined operation control means (a function of executing the processing of steps SD710 to SD712 in the main side CPU 63) that controls the second predetermined operation means (special electric winning device 416) so as to be in the second period corresponding state (open state) in the second period;
setting means (function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main side CPU 63) for setting the set value to be used from among the set values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage;
response operation control means (a function of executing steps SE704, SE707, steps SE802 and SE816 in the main CPU 63) that causes the first predetermined operation means to be in the corresponding state for the first period and the second predetermined operation means to be in the corresponding state for the second period in a situation where predetermined setting-related processing (setting value update processing, setting confirmation processing) related to the setting value is being executed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αN1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, in a situation where a game is being executed, a first period in which the first predetermined operation means is in a state corresponding to the first period and a second period in which the second predetermined operation means is in a state corresponding to the second period may occur, and in a situation in which predetermined setting-related processing relating to a set value is being executed, the first predetermined operation means is in the state corresponding to the first period and the second predetermined operation means is in the state corresponding to the second period. As a result, it is possible to use the first predetermined operation means and the second predetermined operation means which operate when the game is being executed to notify that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

In addition, it is possible to perform notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed by using the first period corresponding state and the second period corresponding state that can occur when the game is being executed. Further, in order to illegally issue a notification indicating that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, it is necessary to illegally perform both the first predetermined operation means and the second predetermined operation means. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to illegally issue a notification indicating that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αN2. The gaming machine according to feature αN1, wherein the second period generating means generates the second period after the first period.

According to the feature αN2, since the second period occurs after the first period in the situation where the game is being played, when the first predetermined operation means is in the state corresponding to the first period and the second predetermined operation means is in the state corresponding to the second period, it is possible to give the manager of the game hall the recognition that it is a special situation different from the situation in which the game is being played. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing regarding the setting value is being executed.

Feature αN3. The game machine according to the feature αN1 or αN2, wherein one of the first predetermined operation means and the second predetermined operation means is display means and the other is movable means.

According to the feature αN3, since the combination of the period corresponding states of the display means and the movable means indicates that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, it is possible to easily grasp that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αN4. Means for executing a period lottery for determining whether to generate the second period after the first period (function for executing the process of step SD803 in the main CPU 63),
The first predetermined operation control means notifies the result of the lottery during the period after the first predetermined operation means is in the state corresponding to the first period in the first period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αN1 to αN3, wherein the second predetermined operation control means controls the second predetermined operation means so that the state corresponding to the second period is established after the end of the first period when the result of the lottery for the period is the result of causing the second period.

According to the feature αN4, it is possible to perform notification indicating that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed by using the first predetermined operation means for notifying the result of the lottery during the period and the second predetermined operation means that becomes the state corresponding to the second period when the result of the lottery during the period is the winning result.

Feature αN5. The first predetermined operation means is a pattern display means (first special figure display section 425, second special figure display section 426) that variably displays the pattern,
The second predetermined operation means is variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 416) provided switchable between an open state and a closed state,
The first predetermined operation control means puts the picture display means into a state corresponding to the first period by performing a variable display of the picture during the first period,
The gaming machine according to characteristic αN4, wherein the second predetermined operation control means puts the variable ball-entering means in the state corresponding to the second period by opening the state during the second period.

According to the feature αN5, when the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, the variable ball entry means is in the open state when the pattern display means is performing the variable display of the pattern. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αN6. The gaming machine according to any one of features αN1 to αN5, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is processing for enabling the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means, or processing for notifying the current setting value.

According to the characteristic αN6, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that the processing for enabling setting of the setting value to be used is being executed or the processing for notifying the current setting value is being executed while exhibiting the excellent effects already explained.

For the configuration of features αN1 to αN6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αO group>
Features αO1. Predetermined display means (first special figure display unit 425, second special figure display unit 426) that performs a predetermined display in the situation where the game is being executed,
setting means (function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main side CPU 63) for setting the set value to be used from among the set values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage;
Execution notification control means (in the sixty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps SE304 and SE308 in the main CPU 63, and in the sixty-fifth embodiment, the processes of steps SE604 and SE607 in the main CPU 63 are performed to notify that the predetermined setting-related processes are being executed using the predetermined display means in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processes (setting value update process, setting confirmation process) related to the setting value are being executed. In the sixty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SE704 and SE707 in the main CPU 63; in the sixty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SE904 and SE907 in the main CPU 63;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αO1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is to be used. In this case, in a configuration provided with a prescribed display means for performing a prescribed display in a situation where a game is being executed, in a situation where prescribed setting-related processing relating to set values is being executed, the prescribed display means is used to notify that the prescribed setting-related processing is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall aware that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, and to make this notification using the predetermined display means.

Feature αO2. The gaming machine according to feature αO1, wherein the execution notification control means causes the predetermined display means to display a specific display that does not occur when a game is being executed in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value is being executed.

According to the feature αO2, a specific display that does not occur in a situation where a game is being executed on a prescribed display means is performed in a situation where a prescribed setting-related process is being executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp from the display contents of the predetermined display means that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αO3. Specific display means (special display unit 429 in the 64th and 65th embodiments, 6R display unit 483 and small hit display unit 484 in the 68th embodiment) that performs a specific display in the situation where the game is being executed,
The gaming machine according to feature αO1 or αO2, wherein the execution notification control means causes the predetermined display means and the specific display means to notify that the predetermined setting-related processing related to the setting value is being executed in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

According to the characteristic αO3, if an attempt is made to fraudulently issue a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, it is necessary to perform fraudulent actions on both the predetermined display means and the specific display means. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to illegally issue a notification indicating that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αO4. The game machine according to feature αO3, wherein the predetermined display means and the specific display means are concentrated in a predetermined range (special figure unit 422) visible from the front of the game machine.

According to the feature αO4, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the display contents in a configuration in which a combination of the display contents of the predetermined display means and the display contents of the specific display means is used to notify that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αO5. The execution notification control means causes the predetermined display means to perform a predetermined correspondence display and the specific display means to perform a specific correspondence display in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value is being executed,
The predetermined correspondence display on the predetermined display means is display content that can occur in a situation where a game is being played,
The specific corresponding display on the specific display means is a display content that can occur in a situation where a game is being played,
The gaming machine according to feature αO3 or αO4, wherein the predetermined correspondence display on the predetermined display means and the specific correspondence display on the specific display means do not occur simultaneously while a game is being played.

According to the feature αO5, it is possible to make use of the predetermined correspondence display on the predetermined display means and the specific correspondence display on the specific display means, which can occur when the game is being executed, to notify that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αO6. Means for executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a predetermined game state (function for executing the process of step SD803 in the main side CPU 63);
means for controlling the display of the predetermined display means so that the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the shift lottery is displayed after the pattern variation display is started (the function of executing the processing of step SD706 in the main CPU 63);
Means for shifting the game state to the predetermined game state after the stop result corresponding thereto is displayed on the predetermined display means when the lottery result of the transition lottery is a result corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state (a function of executing the processing of step SD904 and step SE116 in the main CPU 63);
Means for controlling the display of the specific display means so that state correspondence display is performed in the predetermined game state (function for executing the processing of steps SD903 and SE115 in the main side CPU 63);
with
The gaming machine according to feature αO5, wherein the predetermined correspondence display is a variation display of the pattern, and the specific correspondence display is the state correspondence display.

According to the feature αO6, in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, a state-corresponding display indicating a predetermined gaming state is performed on a specific display means in a situation where a predetermined display means performs a variable display of patterns. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αO7. The gaming machine according to any one of features αO1 to αO6, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process that enables setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means, or a process that notifies the current setting value.

According to the feature αO7, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that the processing for enabling the setting of the setting value to be used is being executed or the processing for notifying the current setting value is being executed while exhibiting the excellent effects already explained.

For the configuration of features αO1 to αO7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αP group>
Feature αP1. First corresponding state execution means (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps SD903 and SE115 in the main CPU 63, and in the 66th embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps SD710 to SD712 in the main CPU 63 so that the first specific operation means (the special display unit 429 in the 64th embodiment, the special electric winning device 416 in the 66th embodiment) enters the first corresponding state while the game is being executed. ) and
Second corresponding state execution means (in the 64th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SD706 in the main CPU 63, in the 66th embodiment, a step of the main CPU 63 in which the second specific action means (the special display portion 429 and the second special figure display portion 426 in the 64th embodiment, the special display portion 429 in the 66th embodiment) is brought into the second corresponding state when the first specific action means is in the first corresponding state while the game is being executed. function to execute the processing of SD903 and step SE115);
setting means (function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main side CPU 63) for setting the set value to be used from among the set values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage;
Specific response control means (in the sixty-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps SE304, SE305, SE308, and SE309 in the main CPU 63 in the sixty-fourth embodiment, and the main-side CPU in the sixty-sixth embodiment) 63), and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αP1, since the set value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is to be used. In this case, when the first specific action means is in the first corresponding state in a situation where the game is being executed, the second specific action means is in the second corresponding state, and in the situation where the predetermined setting-related processing relating to the setting value is being executed, the first specific action means is in the first corresponding state, whereas the second specific action means is in a different state from the second corresponding state. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, and to make this notification by using the first specific operation means and the second specific operation means.

Feature αP2. The game machine according to feature αP1, wherein one of the first specific action means and the second specific action means is display means and the other is movable means.

According to the feature αP2, since a notification indicating that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed is performed by combining the respective states of the display means and the movable means, it becomes easy to grasp that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αP3. The second specific operation means is a variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 416) that is switched between an open state and a closed state in a predetermined game state,
the second corresponding state is a state in which the second specific operation means is switched between an open state and a closed state;
The first specific action means is a display means (special display portion 429) that displays a display indicating that the predetermined game state is reached by entering the first corresponding state in the predetermined game state,
The gaming machine according to feature αP1 or αP2, wherein the specific response control means maintains the second specific action means in the closed state while the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

According to the feature αP3, the second specific operation means is maintained in the closed state in spite of the fact that the first specific operation means displays the predetermined game state in the situation where the predetermined setting related processing is being executed. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αP4. The first specific operation means is a variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 416) that is switched between an open state and a closed state in a predetermined game state,
The first corresponding state is the open state,
The gaming machine according to feature αP1 or αP2, wherein the second specific action means is a display means (special display portion 429) for performing a display indicating that the predetermined game state is established by entering the second corresponding state in the predetermined game state.

According to the feature αP4, in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, the second specific action means does not display the predetermined game state even though the first specific action means is in the open state. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αP5. The gaming machine according to feature αP4, wherein the specific handling control means sets the second specific action means to a non-display state while the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

According to the feature αP5, in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, the second specific operation means is not only not displayed but also is in a non-display state even though the first specific operation means is in the open state. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αP6. Equipped with means for executing a transition lottery for determining whether to transition the game state to a predetermined game state (function for executing the processing of step SD803 in the main side CPU 63),
The second correspondence state execution means controls the display of the second specific operation means so that after the start of the variable display of the pattern, a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the transition lottery is displayed,
This game machine has means for shifting the game state to the predetermined game state after the transition stop result, which is the stop result corresponding to the transition lottery result corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state, is displayed by the second specific action means (function for executing the processing of steps SD904 and SE116 in the main CPU 63),
The first corresponding state executing means switches the first specific action means between an open state and a closed state in the predetermined game state,
The first corresponding state is the open state,
The gaming machine according to feature αP1 or αP2, wherein the second corresponding state is a state in which the transition stop result is displayed by the second specific action means.

According to the feature αP6, when the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, the transition stop result is not displayed in the second specific action means even though the first specific action means is in the open state. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

Feature αP7. The gaming machine according to any one of features αP1 to αP6, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for enabling the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means or a process for notifying the current setting value.

According to the feature αP7, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that the processing for enabling the setting of the setting value to be used is being executed or the processing for notifying the current setting value is being executed while exhibiting the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features αP1 to αP7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αQ group>
Feature αQ1. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 416) provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
updating means (function for executing the process of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) for updating the update numerical information each time an update opportunity occurs;
Predetermined acquisition means for acquiring the update numerical information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SD701 regarding the holding information on the second special figure side in the main side CPU 63, in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step SF101 in the main side CPU 63);
Predetermined transition determination means for determining whether the update numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state (opening/closing execution mode) (In the 64th embodiment, the function of executing step SD803 for the second special figure side hold information in the main side CPU 63, In the 69th to 71st embodiments, the main side CPU 63 performs the process of step SF304 for the first special figure side hold information. function) and
Switching control means for switching the variable ball entry means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined game state (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SD710 to SD712 in the main side CPU 63, in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps SF108 to SF110 and steps SF208 to SF210 in the main side CPU 63);
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being the first winning result (jackpot result), the transition to the predetermined game state is performed, and the game mode that affects the player's advantage is changed after the predetermined game state is finished. 8, in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps SF306 to SF308 and step SF403 for the holding information on the first special figure side in the main side CPU63),
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being the second winning result (small hit result), the second transition means (in the 64th embodiment, the process of step SD809 to step SD811 and step SD915 for the second special figure side reservation information in the main side CPU 63 for the second special figure side reserved information in the main side CPU 63 to move to a state in which a transition opportunity to the predetermined game state can occur, or to move to the predetermined game state and to continue the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state after the end of the predetermined game state) Function to be executed, in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps SF310, SF311 and SF405 for the hold information on the first special figure side in the main side CPU63),
setting means (function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main side CPU 63) for setting the set value to be used from among the set values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage;
with
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a result of deviation, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur,
A second setting value (e.g., "setting 6") among the setting values of the plurality of stages is larger than a first setting value (e.g., "setting 1") in the number of the update numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination by a first specific number,
The number of the update numerical information determined to be the deviation result in the predetermined transition determination is smaller than the first set value by a second specific number,
A gaming machine, wherein the second specific number is greater than or equal to the first specific number.

According to the feature αQ1, when the predetermined transition determination results in the first winning result or the second winning result, the game moves to a predetermined game state in which the variable ball-entering means is opened, so that the player plays the game while expecting the first winning result or the second winning result. In addition, since the mode of the subsequent game state is different between the case of the first winning result and the case of the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination, the transition mode of the game state can be diversified. In addition, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is to be used.

In this case, the variation in the number of update numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination between the first set value and the second set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of update numerical information determined to be the wrong result in the predetermined transition determination. Thus, it is possible to change the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition judgment between the first set value and the second set value while not affecting the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined transition judgment.

Feature αQ2. The gaming machine according to feature αQ1, wherein a variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by a variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the lost result in the predetermined transition determination in all of the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature αQ2, it is possible to change the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transitional judgment while not affecting the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined transitional judgment in all of the set values of the plurality of stages.

Feature αQ3. The gaming machine according to characteristic αQ1 or αQ2, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the same for all of the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature αQ3, it is possible to make the probability of the second winning result constant in the predetermined transition determination for all of the set values of the plurality of stages. In addition, even if the probability of obtaining the second winning result in the predetermined transitional judgment is set constant, the fluctuation of each set value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transitional judgment is absorbed by the fluctuation of the probability of the losing result, so that the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transitional judgment can be set to the probability corresponding to the set value.

Feature αQ4. The gaming machine according to any one of features αQ1 to αQ3, wherein the number of the update numerical information determined to be the deviation result in the predetermined transition determination is the largest for any of the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature αQ4, in a configuration in which the number of update numerical information determined to be a failure result in the predetermined transition determination is the largest for any set value, the variation in the number of update numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the number of update numerical information determined to be a failure result in the predetermined transition determination. As a result, even if the variation in each set value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition judgment is absorbed by the variation of the probability of the failure result in the predetermined transition judgment, the probability of the failure result in the predetermined transition judgment can be prevented from greatly varying among set values of a plurality of stages.

Feature αQ5. As the game mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high and low,
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics αQ1 to αQ4, wherein the number of the update numerical information determined to be the losing result in the predetermined transition determination is 0 in a situation where the set value of the plurality of stages has the highest probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination and the game mode is the high-probability mode.

According to the feature αQ5, the number of update numerical information determined to be a failure result in the predetermined transition determination is 0 in the state of the highest set value and the high-probability mode, which is the state in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is highest. Thus, in the configuration in which the variation in the set value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of the failure result in the predetermined transition determination, it is possible to maximize the probability of the first winning result in the situation where the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is highest as described above.

Feature αQ6. As the game mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high and low,
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics αQ1 to αQ4, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the losing result in the predetermined transition determination is one or more in a situation in which the setting value of the plurality of stages of set values has the highest probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination and the game mode is the high-probability mode.

According to the feature αQ6, in the situation of the highest set value and the high probability mode, which is the situation in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition judgment is the highest, the number of updated numerical value information judged to be a losing result in the predetermined transition judgment is 1 or more. Thus, in the configuration in which the variation in each set value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of the losing result in the predetermined transition determination, it is possible to select the losing result in the predetermined transition determination even in the situation where the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the highest as described above.

Feature αQ7. Specific acquisition means for acquiring the update numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 69th to 70th embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63);
Specific transition determination means for determining whether the update numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to the numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state (in the 69th to 70th embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF304 for the second special figure side reserved information in the main side CPU 63);
with
The first transition means shifts to the predetermined game state based on the fact that the result of the specific transition determination is the first winning result, and changes the game mode after the predetermined game state ends from before the start of the predetermined game state,
The second transition means, based on the result of the specific transition determination being the second winning result, transitions to a state in which a transition opportunity to the predetermined game state can occur, or transitions to the predetermined game state After the predetermined game state ends, the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state is continued,
When the result of the specific transition determination is the deviation result, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αQ1 to αQ6, characterized in that a variation due to a difference in the set value of the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is absorbed by a variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the lost result in the specific transition determination.

According to the feature αQ7, not only the predetermined transition determination but also the specific transition determination can vary the probability of the first winning result between set values while not affecting the probability of the second winning result.

Feature αQ8. The gaming machine according to characteristic αQ7, wherein the number of the update numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the specific transition determination is the same for all of the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature αQ8, it is possible to make the probability of the second winning result constant for all of the set values of the multiple stages not only for the predetermined transition determination but also for the specific transition determination. In addition, even if the probability of obtaining the second winning result in the specific transition determination is constant, the variation of each set value of the probability of obtaining the first winning result in the specific transition determination is absorbed by the variation of the probability of losing result, so that the probability of obtaining the first winning result in the specific transition determination can be made the probability corresponding to the set value.

Feature αQ9. The gaming machine according to characteristic αQ7 or αQ8, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the deviation result in the specific transition determination is the largest among the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature αQ9, in a configuration in which the number of updated numerical information determined to be a false result in the specific transition determination is the largest for any set value, the variation in the number of updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the number of updated numerical information determined to be a false result in the specific transition determination. As a result, even if the variation in each set value of the probability of becoming the first winning result in the specific transition judgment is absorbed by the variation of the probability of losing the result in the specific transition judgment, it is possible to prevent the probability of losing the result in the specific transition judgment from causing a large fluctuation in the probability.

For the configuration of features αQ1 to αQ9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αR group>
Features αR1. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 416) provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
updating means (function for executing the process of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) for updating the update numerical information each time an update opportunity occurs;
Predetermined acquisition means for acquiring the update numerical information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SD701 regarding the holding information on the second special figure side in the main side CPU 63, in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step SF101 in the main side CPU 63);
Predetermined transition determination means for determining whether the update numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state (opening/closing execution mode) (In the 64th embodiment, the function of executing step SD803 for the second special figure side hold information in the main side CPU 63, In the 69th to 71st embodiments, the main side CPU 63 performs the process of step SF304 for the first special figure side hold information. function) and
Switching control means for switching the variable ball entry means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined game state (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SD710 to SD712 in the main side CPU 63, in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps SF108 to SF110 and steps SF208 to SF210 in the main side CPU 63);
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being the first winning result (jackpot result), the first transition means for shifting to the predetermined game state (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SD805 to step SD807, step SD904 and steps SE202 to step SE208 for the second special figure side reservation information in the main side CPU 63, in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the first special figure side reservation information in the main side CPU 63 Step SF306 to step SF308 and a function to execute the processing of step SF403);
setting means (function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main side CPU 63) for setting the set value to be used from among the set values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage;
with
As a result of the predetermined transition determination, there is another winning result other than the first winning result and the out-of-range result in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
A second set value (e.g., "setting 6") among the set values of the plurality of stages is larger than a first set value (e.g., "setting 1") by a first predetermined number of the update numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination,
The number of the update numerical information determined by the predetermined transition determination to be a predetermined target result (losing result) different from the first winning result is the largest for each of the first set value and the second set value,
The number of the update numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination is smaller than the first set value by a second predetermined number,
A gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined number is greater than or equal to the first predetermined number.

According to the feature αR1, when the first winning result is obtained in the predetermined transition determination, the variable ball entering means shifts to the predetermined game state in which the variable ball entering means is opened, so the player plays the game while expecting the first winning result. In addition, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is to be used.

In this case, in a configuration in which the number of updated numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination is the largest regardless of whether the first set value or the second set value, the variation in the number of updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination between the first set value and the second set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of updated numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination. As a result, even if the variation in each set value of the probability of becoming the first winning result in the predetermined transition judgment is absorbed by the variation of the probability of becoming the predetermined target in the predetermined transition judgment, the probability of becoming the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition judgment can be prevented from greatly changing. Therefore, while it is possible to predict the set value from the probability that the first winning result is selected in the predetermined transition judgment, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value from the probability that the predetermined target result is selected, the probability of which varies according to the variation of the probability of the first winning result.

Feature αR2. A configuration in which the number of the update numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination is the largest for any of the set values of the plurality of stages,
The gaming machine according to feature αR1, wherein a variation in the number of updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by a variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination in all of the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature αR2, it is possible to absorb the variation in the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination by the relatively small variation in the probability of the predetermined target result with the highest selection probability in all of the set values of the multiple stages.

Feature αR3. There are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high and low,
The gaming machine according to feature αR1 or αR2, characterized in that even in a situation in which the probability of the first winning result is the highest among the set values of the plurality of stages in the predetermined transition determination and the high-probability mode is set, the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination is the largest.

According to the feature αR3, even in the situation of the highest set value and the high probability mode, which is the situation in which the probability of the first winning result is highest in the predetermined shift determination, the number of update numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined shift determination becomes the largest. As a result, even in a high-probability mode with the maximum set value, which is a situation in which the probability of obtaining the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the highest, the probability of obtaining the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination does not fluctuate greatly, and the fluctuation of the probability of obtaining the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination can be absorbed by the fluctuation of the probability of obtaining the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination.

Feature αR4. Specific acquisition means for acquiring the update numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 69th to 70th embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63);
Specific transition determination means for determining whether the update numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to the numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state (in the 69th to 70th embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF304 for the second special figure side reserved information in the main side CPU 63);
with
The first transition means transitions to the predetermined game state based on the fact that the result of the specific transition determination is the first winning result,
As a result of the specific transition determination, there is another winning result other than the first winning result and the outlier result that does not cause the transition to the predetermined game state,
There is a specific target result (outlier result) as a lottery result that is not the lottery result with the highest probability of being selected in the specific transition determination for each of the first set value and the second set value,
A configuration in which the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is larger than the first set value by a first specific number,
A configuration in which the number of the update numerical information determined to be the specific target result in the specific transition determination is smaller than the first set value by a second specific number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αR1 to αR3, wherein the second specific number is greater than or equal to the first specific number.

According to the feature αR4, the variation in the probability of the specific target result, which is not the highest selection probability in the specific transition determination, absorbs the variation in the probability of each set value for the first winning result in the specific transition determination. As a result, in the specific transition determination, the player can guess the setting value by using the selection probability of the first winning result and the selection probability of the specific target result.

Feature αR5. The gaming machine according to feature αR4, wherein the specific target result is the predetermined target result.

According to the feature αR5, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the setting value depending on the selection probability of the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination, and to make it easy to guess the setting value depending on the selection probability of the predetermined target result in the specific transition determination.

Feature αR6. A configuration in which the specific target result is not the lottery result with the highest probability of being selected in the specific transition determination in all of the multiple stages of set values,
The gaming machine according to feature αR4 or αR5, wherein a variation in the number of updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is absorbed by a variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the specific target result in the specific transition determination in all of the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature αR6, it is possible to absorb the variation in the probability of the first winning result in the specific transition determination due to the relatively large variation in the probability of the specific target result in all of the set values of the multiple stages.

Feature αR7. specific acquisition means for acquiring the update numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 71st embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SF201 in the main CPU 63);
specific transition determination means for determining whether the update numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to the numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state (in the 71st embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SF304 for the second special figure side hold information in the main side CPU 63);
with
The first transition means transitions to the predetermined game state based on the fact that the result of the specific transition determination is the first winning result,
As a result of the specific transition determination, there is another winning result other than the first winning result and the outlier result that does not cause the transition to the predetermined game state,
The number of the updated numerical information determined by the specific transition determination to be a specific target result (small winning result) different from the first winning result is the largest in each of the first set value and the second set value,
A configuration in which the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is larger than the first set value by a first specific number,
A configuration in which the number of the update numerical information determined to be the specific target result in the specific transition determination is smaller than the first set value by a second specific number,
wherein the second specific number is greater than or equal to the first specific number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αR1 to αR3, wherein the predetermined target result and the specific target result are different.

According to the feature αR7, even if the lottery result with the highest selection probability is different between the predetermined transition judgment and the specific transition judgment, the variation of the selection probability of the lottery result with the highest selection probability in each of the predetermined transition judgment and the specific transition judgment absorbs the fluctuation between each set value of the selection probability of the first winning result. This makes it possible to estimate the set value from the probability that the first winning result is selected in both the predetermined transition judgment and the specific transition judgment, but makes it difficult to estimate the setting value from the probability that the lottery result is selected, the probability of which varies according to the fluctuation of the probability of the first winning result.

Feature αR8. A configuration in which the number of the update numerical information determined to be the specific target result in the specific transition determination is the largest for any of the set values of the plurality of stages,
The gaming machine according to feature αR7, characterized in that a variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is absorbed by a variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the specific target result in the specific transition determination in all of the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature αR8, it is possible to absorb the variation of the probability of the first winning result by the relatively small variation of the probability of the lottery result with the highest selection probability in all of the set values of a plurality of stages in both the predetermined transition determination and the specific transition determination.

For the configuration of features αR1 to αR8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αS group>
Features αS1. updating means (function for executing the process of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) for updating the update numerical information each time an update opportunity occurs;
a predetermined acquisition means for acquiring the updated numerical value information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 70th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SF201 in the main CPU 63);
Predetermined transition determination means for executing a predetermined transition determination for determining whether the update numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to the transition to a predetermined game state (opening/closing execution mode) (in the 70th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SF304 for the second special figure side hold information in the main side CPU 63);
Based on the fact that the result of the predetermined transition determination is the first winning result (jackpot result when the second special figure side reservation information in the 70th embodiment is the target of the success/failure determination process), the first transition means (in the 70th embodiment, the second special figure side reservation information in the main side CPU 63 in the main side CPU 63 The function of executing the processing of steps SF306 to SF308 and step SF403),
setting means (function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main side CPU 63) for setting the set value to be used from among the set values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage;
with
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a result of deviation, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur,
There are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high and low,
In the high-probability mode, the variation between the set values of the number of the update numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the number of the update numerical information determined to be the outlier in the predetermined transition determination.
The number of the updated numerical value information determined to be a failure result in the predetermined transition determination among the set values of the plurality of stages is set so that the number of the update numerical information determined to be the lost result in the predetermined transition determination is one or more in a situation in which the set value has the highest probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination among the set values in the plurality of stages and in the high probability mode. A gaming machine characterized in that

According to the feature αS1, the transition to the predetermined game state becomes possible when the first winning result is obtained in the predetermined transition determination, so the player plays the game expecting the first winning result. In addition, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is to be used.

In this case, in the high-probability mode, the variation between the set values of the number of updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the number of updated numerical information determined to be the wrong result in the predetermined transition determination. Then, in the situation of the highest set value and the high-probability mode, which is the situation in which the probability of becoming the first winning result in the predetermined shift judgment is the highest, the number of updated numerical value information judged to be a failure result in the prescribed shift judgment becomes one or more. Thus, in the configuration in which the variation in each set value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of the losing result in the predetermined transition determination, it is possible to select the losing result in the predetermined transition determination even in the situation where the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the highest as described above.

Feature αS2. Based on the fact that the result of the predetermined transition determination is the second winning result (the small hit result when the reservation information on the second special figure side in the 70th embodiment is the target of the winning judgment process), the second transition means (in the 70th embodiment, the second special diagram in the main CPU 63 in the main side CPU 63 in the 70th embodiment) that shifts to a state in which the opportunity to shift to the predetermined game state can occur, or transitions to the predetermined game state and continues the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state after the end of the predetermined game state. a function to execute the processing of steps SF310, SF311 and SF405 for the pending information on the side),
The gaming machine according to feature αS1, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination in the high-probability mode state is the same among the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature αS2, it is possible to make the probability of the second winning result constant in the predetermined transition determination for all of the set values of the plurality of stages. In addition, even if the probability of obtaining the second winning result in the predetermined transitional judgment is set constant, the fluctuation of each set value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transitional judgment is absorbed by the fluctuation of the probability of the losing result, so that the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transitional judgment can be set to the probability corresponding to the set value.

Feature αS3. Based on the fact that the result of the predetermined transition determination is the second winning result (the small hit result when the reservation information on the second special figure side in the 70th embodiment is the target of the winning judgment process), the second transition means (in the 70th embodiment, the second special diagram in the main CPU 63 in the main side CPU 63 in the 70th embodiment) that shifts to a state in which the opportunity to shift to the predetermined game state can occur, or transitions to the predetermined game state and continues the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state after the end of the predetermined game state. a function to execute the processing of steps SF310, SF311 and SF405 for the pending information on the side),
The gaming machine according to feature αS1 or αS2, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination in the state of the high probability mode is the largest in each of the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature αS3, even if the probability of selecting the second winning result in the predetermined transition judgment is the highest in the high probability mode, it is possible to select the losing result in the predetermined transition judgment in the situation where the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition judgment is the highest.

For the configuration of features αS1 to αS3, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αT group>
Feature αT1. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 416) provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
updating means (function for executing the process of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) for updating the update numerical information each time an update opportunity occurs;
a predetermined acquisition means for acquiring the update numerical information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs (in the sixty-ninth to seventy-first embodiments, a function of executing the processing of step SF101 in the main CPU 63);
Predetermined transition determination means for determining whether the update numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to the transition to a predetermined game state (opening and closing execution mode) (69th to 71st embodiments In the 69th to 71st embodiments, a function of executing the processing of step SF304 for the first special figure side hold information in the main side CPU 63),
Switching control means for switching the variable ball entry means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined game state (in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps SF108 to SF110 and steps SF208 to SF210 in the main side CPU 63);
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being the first winning result (jackpot result), the transition to the predetermined game state is performed, and the game mode that affects the player's advantage is changed after the predetermined game state is finished. ) and
Based on the result of the predetermined transition determination being the second winning result (small hit result), the second transition means (in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the reservation information on the first special figure side in the main side CPU 63 in the main side CPU 63 Step SF310, Step SF311 and Step S for shifting to a state in which a transition opportunity to the predetermined game state can occur, or transitioning to the predetermined game state and continuing the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state after the end of the predetermined game state function to execute the process of F405);
setting means (function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the main side CPU 63) for setting the set value to be used from among the set values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage;
with
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a result of deviation, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur,
As the game mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high and low,
A game machine, wherein the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the same regardless of the set value to be used set by the setting means and the game mode.

According to the feature αT1, when the predetermined transition determination results in the first winning result or the second winning result, the game machine shifts to a predetermined game state in which the variable ball entry means is opened, so that the player plays the game expecting the first winning result or the second winning result. In addition, since the mode of the subsequent game state is different between the case of the first winning result and the case of the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination, the transition mode of the game state can be diversified. In addition, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is to be used.

In this case, the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the same regardless of the set value and the game mode. This makes it possible to prevent the player from guessing both the set value and the game mode from the probability of the second winning result.

Feature αT2. Specific acquisition means for acquiring the update numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 69th to 70th embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63);
Specific transition determination means for determining whether the update numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to the numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state (in the 69th to 70th embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF304 for the second special figure side reserved information in the main side CPU 63);
with
The first transition means shifts to the predetermined game state based on the fact that the result of the specific transition determination is the first winning result, and changes the game mode after the predetermined game state ends from before the start of the predetermined game state,
The second transition means, based on the result of the specific transition determination being the second winning result, transitions to a state in which a transition opportunity to the predetermined game state can occur, or transitions to the predetermined game state After the predetermined game state ends, the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state is continued,
When the result of the specific transition determination is the deviation result, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur,
The gaming machine according to feature αT1, wherein the probability of the second winning result in the specific transition determination is the same regardless of the set value to be used set by the setting means and the game mode.

According to the feature αT2, the probability of the second winning result is the same not only in the predetermined transition determination but also in the specific transition determination regardless of the set value and the game mode. This makes it possible to prevent the player from guessing both the set value and the game mode from the probability of the second winning result, regardless of whether it is the predetermined transition determination or the specific transition determination.

Feature αT3. The gaming machine according to feature αT2, wherein the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination and the probability of the second winning result in the specific transition determination are different.

According to the feature αT3, in a configuration in which the probability of the second winning result is the same not only in the predetermined transition determination but also in the specific transition determination regardless of the set value and the game mode, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of the second winning result fluctuates.

Feature αT4. Specific acquisition means for acquiring the update numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step SF201 in the main CPU 63);
Specific transition determination means for determining whether the update numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to the numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state (in the 69th to 71st embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF304 for the second special figure side reserved information in the main side CPU 63);
with
The first transition means shifts to the predetermined game state based on the fact that the result of the specific transition determination is the first winning result, and changes the game mode after the predetermined game state ends from before the start of the predetermined game state,
The second transition means, based on the result of the specific transition determination being the second winning result, transitions to a state in which a transition opportunity to the predetermined game state can occur, or transitions to the predetermined game state After the predetermined game state ends, the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state is continued,
When the result of the specific transition determination is the deviation result, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur,
The gaming machine according to feature αT1, wherein the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination and the probability of the second winning result in the specific transition determination are different.

According to feature αT4, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of the second winning result fluctuates.

With respect to the configuration of features αT1 to αT4, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O1. 1, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14, Any of features αK1 to αK8, features αL1 to αL11, features αM1 to αM8, features αN1 to αN6, features αO1 to αO7, features αP1 to αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU14, features αV1 to αV14, and features αW1 to αW12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature αM group, the feature αN group, the feature αO group, the feature αP group, the feature αQ group, the feature αR group, the feature αS group, and the feature αT group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a plate storage part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to optimize the configuration regarding the set values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αU group>
Features αU1. starting means for executing start processing when supply of operating power is started (function for executing main processing in main CPU 63);
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification (confirmation notification light emitting device 511, change notification light emitting device 512, and clear notification light emitting device 513 in the 72nd to 73rd embodiments, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the 74th embodiment);
Predetermined notification control means (in the 72nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SF506 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step SF609 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the process of step SF609 in the main CPU 63 and step SF7 in the main CPU 63). 02, a function of executing the processing of steps SG301 to SG306 in the main CPU 63 in the 73rd embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps SG601 to SG607 in the main CPU 63 in the 74th embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αU1, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined process has been executed in the start process by confirming the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means. When the prescribed processing is illegally executed in a situation where the start processing is not usually executed (for example, during business hours), it is possible to grasp that the prescribed processing is illegally executed by confirming the prescribed notification of the prescribed notification means after that.

Feature αU2. There are multiple stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The gaming machine according to feature αU1, wherein the predetermined process is a predetermined setting-related process (setting confirmation process, setting value update process) relating to the setting value.

According to the feature αU2, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined setting-related processing has been executed in the start processing by confirming the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means. When the prescribed setting-related processing is illegally executed in a situation where the start processing is not normally executed (for example, during business hours), it is possible to grasp that the prescribed setting-related processing has been illegally executed by confirming the prescribed notification by the prescribed notification means after that. As a result, it is possible to grasp an act of fraudulently creating a situation in which setting values advantageous to the player are set.

Feature αU3. A setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main side CPU 63) for executing a setting process for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage as the predetermined process,
The gaming machine according to feature αU1 or αU2, wherein the predetermined notification control means causes the predetermined notification means to perform setting execution notification as the predetermined notification based on the execution of the setting process in the start process, or sets the predetermined notification enable state to a setting execution notification possible state that enables the predetermined notification means to perform the setting execution notification in response to occurrence of the predetermined execution opportunity.

According to the feature αU3, it is possible to grasp that the setting process has been executed in the start process by confirming the setting execution notification by the predetermined notification means. When the setting process is illegally executed in a situation where the start process is not normally executed (for example, during business hours), it can be grasped that the setting process is illegally executed by confirming the setting execution notification by a predetermined notification means after that. As a result, it is possible to detect an act of illegally changing the set value set in the game machine to a set value that is advantageous to the player.

Feature αU4. There are multiple stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage,
A setting confirmation means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main side CPU 63) that executes a setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the currently set setting value as the predetermined process,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU3, wherein the predetermined notification control means causes the predetermined notification means to perform confirmation execution notification as the predetermined notification based on the execution of the setting confirmation process in the start process, or sets the predetermined notification possible state to a confirmation execution notification possible state that enables the predetermined notification means to perform the confirmation execution notification in response to the occurrence of the predetermined execution opportunity.

According to the feature αU4, it is possible to grasp that the setting confirmation process has been executed in the start process by confirming the confirmation execution notification from the predetermined notification means. When setting confirmation processing is executed illegally in a situation where start processing is not normally executed (for example, during business hours), it can be grasped that the setting confirmation processing has been illegally executed by confirming confirmation execution notification in a predetermined notification means after that. As a result, it is possible to grasp the act of illegally confirming the setting values currently set in the game machine and illegally discerning the game machines in which the setting values that are advantageous to the player are set.

Feature αU5. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes,
a predetermined storage means (main side RAM 65) for temporarily storing information when the control means executes various processes;
with
The control means comprises an initialization means (a function of executing a first RAM clear process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined initialization process for initializing a predetermined storage area in the predetermined storage means as the predetermined process,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU4, wherein the predetermined notification control means causes the predetermined notification means to perform initialization execution notification as the predetermined notification based on the execution of the predetermined initialization processing in the start processing, or sets the predetermined notification enable state to an initialization execution notification enable state that enables the predetermined notification unit to perform the initialization execution notification in response to occurrence of the predetermined execution opportunity.

According to the feature αU5, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined initialization process has been executed in the start process by confirming the initialization execution notification from the predetermined notification means. When the prescribed initialization processing is illegally executed in a situation where the start processing is not usually executed (for example, during business hours), it can be grasped that the prescribed initialization processing has been illegally executed by confirming the initialization execution notification by the prescribed notification means after that.

Feature αU6. There are multiple stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The control means includes, as the predetermined processing, setting-related means for executing predetermined setting-related processing related to the setting value (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63, function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
The predetermined notification control means sets, as the predetermined notification enable state, a setting-related notification enable state in which setting-related notification can be performed as the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification unit in response to the occurrence of a first predetermined trigger, based on the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing in the start processing, and based on the execution of the predetermined initialization processing in the start processing, the predetermined notification enable state is set to the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification unit as the predetermined notification in response to the occurrence of a second predetermined trigger in the start processing. The gaming machine according to feature αU5, characterized in that the game machine is set to an initialization execution notification enable state that enables notification to be performed.

According to the feature αU6, even if the predetermined initialization process is illegally executed in an attempt to erase traces of the illegal execution of the predetermined setting-related process in a situation where the setting-related notification-enabled state is set based on the illegal execution of the predetermined setting-related process, the initialization-execution-notification-enabled state is set based on the execution of the predetermined initialization process. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of overlooking that the predetermined initialization process and the predetermined setting-related process have been performed illegally.

Feature αU7. The gaming machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU6, characterized in that the predetermined notification or the predetermined notification enabled state is maintained until the supply of operating power is stopped, and ends when the supply of operating power is stopped.

According to the feature αU7, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined process has been executed by checking the state of the predetermined notification means before stopping the supply of the operating power. This reduces the possibility that the unauthorized execution of the predetermined process will be overlooked.

Further, for example, by stopping the supply of the operating power after the end of the business hours and starting the supply of the operating power before the start of the next business hours, the business hours can be started in a state where the predetermined notification or the predetermined notification possible state is terminated. Thereby, when the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means is confirmed after the end of the business hours, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined processing was illegally executed during the business hours of the day.

Feature αU8. Provided with a predetermined opening and closing body (game machine main body 12) that can be opened and closed,
The predetermined process is a process that is executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the predetermined operation means (setting key insertion portion 68a, reset button 68c) located on the back side of the predetermined opening/closing body or behind the predetermined opening/closing body,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU6, characterized by comprising a notification termination means (a function for executing the processing of steps SG406 to SG408 of the main CPU 63 in the 73rd to 74th embodiments) for terminating the predetermined notification or the predetermined notification possible state based on the closing operation of changing the predetermined opening/closing body from the open state to the closed state.

According to the feature αU8, by confirming the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means, it is possible to confirm that the predetermined processing has been executed in the start processing and that the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing member has not been performed thereafter. Since the predetermined processing is executed based on the predetermined operation performed with the predetermined opening/closing member in the open state, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined processing without the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing member has been performed illegally by confirming the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means.

Feature αU9. The predetermined notification means is provided at a position that can be confirmed by opening the predetermined opening/closing body,
The game machine according to feature αU8, wherein the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means is maintained even when the predetermined opening/closing body is changed from the closed state to the open state.

According to the feature αU9, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined process has been executed in the starting process by confirming the predetermined notification means with the predetermined opening/closing body in the open state, and at the same time, it is possible to terminate the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means with the predetermined opening/closing body in the closed state. As a result, it is possible to simplify the confirmation work of the predetermined notification means and reduce the work burden on the manager of the game hall.

Features αU10. The predetermined notification control means is
Information setting means for setting predetermined execution information in the information storage means (setting confirmation flag, setting change flag, clear execution flag of the main RAM 65 in the 73rd to 74th embodiments) based on the execution of the predetermined process in the start process (the function of executing the process of step SF906 of the main CPU 63 in the 73rd to 74th embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SG109 of the main CPU 63, and the function of step SG202 of the main CPU 63. function to perform processing) and
Predetermined notification execution means for causing the predetermined notification means to perform the predetermined notification under at least one condition that the predetermined execution information is set in the information storage means (in the 73rd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SG301 to SG306 in the main CPU 63, and in the 74th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SG601 to SG607 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU9, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic αU10, the predetermined execution information remains in the information storage means even after the predetermined notification is started by the predetermined notification means. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined process has been executed in the start process based on the predetermined execution information remaining in the information storage means even after the predetermined notification is started.

Feature αU11. The gaming machine according to feature αU10, wherein the predetermined notification execution means causes the predetermined notification means to perform the predetermined notification based on occurrence of a predetermined start opportunity in a situation where the predetermined execution information is set in the information storage means.

According to the feature αU11, the period during which the predetermined notification is performed by the predetermined notification means can be limited to the period after the predetermined start opportunity occurs. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means only when necessary.

Feature αU12. A specific operation means (display switching button 68e) operated to cause the predetermined notification means to perform the predetermined notification,
The gaming machine according to feature αU11, wherein the predetermined start opportunity is that the specific operation means is operated.

According to the feature αU12, it is possible to grasp the execution status of the predetermined process by operating the specific operation means as necessary and confirming the presence or absence of the predetermined notification. Further, it is also possible to configure the predetermined notification means to perform notification other than the predetermined notification until the specific operation means is operated.

Feature αU13. The gaming machine according to any one of features αU10 to αU12, wherein the predetermined notification execution means causes the predetermined notification means to perform the predetermined notification on condition that the predetermined execution information is set in the information storage means when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αU13, even if the supply of the operating power is illegally stopped in a state where the predetermined notification is being performed by the predetermined notification means, and then the supply of the operating power is restarted, the state in which the predetermined notification is being performed by the predetermined notification means can be restored. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the unauthorized execution of the predetermined process will be overlooked.

Feature αU14. Provided with a predetermined opening and closing body (game machine main body 12) that can be opened and closed,
The predetermined process is a process that is executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the predetermined operation means (setting key insertion portion 68a, reset button 68c) located on the back side of the predetermined opening/closing body or behind the predetermined opening/closing body,
The game machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU13, wherein the predetermined notification means can be confirmed when the predetermined opening/closing body is opened.

According to the feature αU14, when the predetermined opening/closing body is opened, the predetermined notification means can be confirmed. Therefore, after the predetermined opening/closing body is opened, the predetermined notification means can be confirmed before the predetermined operation means is operated. Therefore, when the predetermined notification is given based on the illegal execution of the predetermined processing, the possibility of operating the predetermined operation means and executing the predetermined processing without noticing the predetermined notification is reduced.

For the configuration of features αU1 to αU14, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O 11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9 , features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8 , Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14 , Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to αP7, Features αQ1 to αQ9, Features αR1 to αR8, Features αS1 to αS3, Features αT1 to αT4, Features αU1 to αU14, Features αV1 to αV14, Features αW1 to αW12 or one or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αV group>
Feature αV1. There are multiple stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage,
setting-related means for executing predetermined setting-related processing related to the setting value (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main side CPU 63, function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63);
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification (confirmation notification light emitting device 511 and change notification light emitting device 512 in the 72nd to 73rd embodiments, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the 74th embodiment),
Predetermined notification control means (in the 72nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SF506 in the main CPU 63 and the function of executing the process in step SF609 of the main CPU 63, in the 73rd embodiment, the main CPU 63). 63, the function of executing the processing of steps SG301 to SG304 in the 74th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SG601 to SG604 in the main CPU 63 in the 74th embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αV1, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined setting-related processing has been executed by confirming the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means. When the prescribed setting-related processing is illegally executed in a situation where the prescribed setting-related processing is not normally executed (for example, during business hours), it is possible to grasp that the prescribed setting-related processing is illegally executed by confirming the prescribed notification of the prescribed reporting means after that. As a result, it is possible to grasp an act of fraudulently creating a situation in which setting values advantageous to the player are set.

Feature αV2. The setting-related means includes, as the predetermined setting-related processing, setting means for executing setting processing for setting the set value to be used from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing set value update processing in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to feature αV1, wherein the predetermined notification control means causes the predetermined notification means to perform setting execution notification as the predetermined notification based on the execution of the setting process, or sets the predetermined notification enable state to a setting execution notification possible state that enables the predetermined notification means to perform the setting execution notification in response to occurrence of the predetermined execution opportunity.

According to the feature αV2, it is possible to grasp that the setting process has been executed by confirming the setting execution notification from the predetermined notification means. When the setting process is illegally executed in a situation where the setting process is normally not executed (for example, during business hours), it can be grasped that the setting process is illegally executed by confirming the setting execution notification by a predetermined notification means after that. As a result, it is possible to detect an act of illegally changing the set value set in the game machine to a set value that is advantageous to the player.

Feature αV3. The setting-related means includes, as the predetermined setting-related processing, setting confirmation means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63) that executes setting confirmation processing that enables confirmation of the currently set setting value,
The gaming machine according to feature αV1 or αV2, wherein the predetermined notification control means causes the predetermined notification means to perform confirmation execution notification as the predetermined notification based on the execution of the setting confirmation process, or sets the predetermined notification possible state to a confirmation execution notification possible state that enables the predetermined notification means to perform the confirmation execution notification in response to occurrence of the predetermined execution opportunity.

According to the feature αV3, it is possible to grasp that the setting confirmation process has been executed by confirming the confirmation execution notification from the predetermined notification means. When the setting confirmation process is executed illegally in a situation where the setting confirmation process is not normally executed (for example, during business hours), it can be grasped that the setting confirmation process has been illegally executed by confirming the confirmation execution notification by a predetermined notification means after that. As a result, it is possible to grasp the act of illegally confirming the setting values currently set in the game machine and illegally discerning the game machines in which the setting values that are advantageous to the player are set.

Feature αV4. Start means for executing start processing when supply of operating power is started (function for executing main processing in main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to any one of features αV1 to αV3, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is executed in the start processing.

According to the feature αV4, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined setting-related processing has been executed in the start processing by confirming the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means. When the prescribed setting-related processing is illegally executed in a situation where the start processing is not normally executed (for example, during business hours), it is possible to grasp that the prescribed setting-related processing has been illegally executed by confirming the prescribed notification of the prescribed notification means after that.

Feature αV5. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes,
a predetermined storage means (main side RAM 65) for temporarily storing information when the control means executes various processes;
with
The control means includes an initialization means (a function of executing the first RAM clear process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined initialization process for initializing a predetermined storage area in the predetermined storage means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics αV1 to αV4, wherein the predetermined notification control means sets the predetermined notification means to perform initialization execution notification based on the execution of the predetermined initialization process, or sets an initialization execution notification enable state that enables the predetermined notification means to perform the initialization execution notification in response to occurrence of a specific execution trigger.

According to the feature αV5, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined initialization process has been executed by confirming the initialization execution notification from the predetermined notification means. When the prescribed initialization processing is illegally executed in a situation where the prescribed initialization processing is not usually executed (for example, during business hours), it can be grasped that the prescribed initialization processing has been illegally executed by confirming the initialization execution notification by the prescribed notification means after that.

Feature αV6. The gaming machine according to feature αV5, wherein the predetermined notification control means sets the predetermined notification enable state based on execution of the predetermined setting-related processing, and sets the initialization execution notification enable state based on execution of the predetermined initialization processing.

According to the feature αV6, even if the predetermined initialization process is illegally executed in an attempt to erase the traces of the illegal execution of the predetermined setting-related process in a situation where the predetermined notification-enabled state is set based on the illegal execution of the predetermined setting-related process, the initialization-execution-notification-enabled state is set based on the execution of the predetermined initialization process. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of overlooking that the predetermined initialization process and the predetermined setting-related process have been performed illegally.

Feature αV7. The gaming machine according to any one of features αV1 to αV6, wherein the predetermined notification or the predetermined notification enabled state is maintained until the supply of operating power is stopped, and ends when the supply of operating power is stopped.

According to the feature αV7, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined setting-related processing has been executed by confirming the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means before stopping the supply of the operating power. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the unauthorized execution of the predetermined setting-related processing is overlooked.

Further, for example, by stopping the supply of the operating power after the end of the business hours and starting the supply of the operating power before the start of the next business hours, the business hours can be started in a state where the predetermined notification is finished. As a result, when the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means is confirmed after the end of the business hours, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined setting-related processing has been illegally executed during the business hours of the day.

Feature αV8. Provided with a predetermined opening and closing body (game machine main body 12) that can be opened and closed,
The predetermined setting-related process is a process executed when a predetermined operation is performed on predetermined operation means (the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c) located on the back side of the predetermined opening/closing body or behind the predetermined opening/closing body.
The gaming machine according to any one of features αV1 to αV6, characterized by comprising a notification termination means (a function of executing the processing of steps SG406 to SG408 of the main side CPU 63 in the 73rd to 74th embodiments) for terminating the predetermined notification or the predetermined notification possible state based on the closing operation of changing the predetermined opening/closing body from the open state to the closed state.

According to the characteristic αV8, by confirming the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means, it is possible to confirm that the predetermined setting-related processing has been executed and that the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body has not been performed after that. Since the predetermined setting-related processing is processing executed based on the fact that the predetermined opening/closing body is opened and the predetermined operation is performed, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined setting-related processing without the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body has been illegally performed by confirming the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means.

Feature αV9. The predetermined notification means is provided at a position that can be confirmed by opening the predetermined opening/closing body,
The game machine according to feature αV8, wherein the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means is maintained even when the predetermined opening/closing body is changed from the closed state to the open state.

According to the feature αV9, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined setting-related processing has been executed by confirming the predetermined notification means with the predetermined opening/closing body in the open state, and to terminate the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means with the predetermined opening/closing body in the closed state. As a result, it is possible to simplify the confirmation work of the predetermined notification means and reduce the work burden on the manager of the game hall.

Feature αV10. The predetermined notification control means is
information setting means for setting predetermined execution information in the information storage means (setting confirmation flag and setting change flag of the main RAM 65 in the 73rd to 74th embodiments) based on the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing (the function of executing the processing of step SF906 of the main CPU 63 in the 73rd to 74th embodiments and the function of executing the processing of step SG109 of the main CPU 63);
Predetermined notification execution means for causing the predetermined notification means to perform the predetermined notification under at least one condition that the predetermined execution information is set in the information storage means (in the 73rd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SG301 to SG304 in the main CPU 63; in the 74th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SG601 to SG604 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features αV1 to αV9, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αV10, the predetermined execution information remains in the information storage means even after the predetermined notification is started in the predetermined notification means. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined process has been executed in the start process based on the predetermined execution information remaining in the information storage means even after the predetermined notification is started.

Feature αV11. The gaming machine according to feature αV10, wherein the predetermined notification execution means causes the predetermined notification means to perform the predetermined notification based on occurrence of a predetermined start opportunity in a situation where the predetermined execution information is set in the information storage means.

According to the feature αV11, the period during which the predetermined notification is performed by the predetermined notification means can be limited to the period after the predetermined start opportunity occurs. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means only when necessary.

Feature αV12. A specific operation means (display switching button 68e) operated to cause the predetermined notification means to perform the predetermined notification,
The gaming machine according to feature αV11, wherein the predetermined start opportunity is that the specific operation means is operated.

According to the feature αV12, it is possible to grasp the execution status of the predetermined process by operating the specific operation means as necessary and confirming the presence or absence of the predetermined notification. Further, it is also possible to configure the predetermined notification means to perform notification other than the predetermined notification until the specific operation means is operated.

Feature αV13. The gaming machine according to any one of features αV10 to αV12, wherein the predetermined notification execution means causes the predetermined notification means to perform the predetermined notification on condition that the predetermined execution information is set in the information storage means when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αV13, even if the supply of the operating power is illegally stopped in a state where the predetermined notification is being performed by the predetermined notification means and then the supply of the operating power is resumed, the state in which the predetermined notification is being performed by the predetermined notification means can be restored. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the unauthorized execution of the predetermined setting-related processing is overlooked.

Feature αV14. Provided with a predetermined opening and closing body (game machine main body 12) that can be opened and closed,
The predetermined setting-related process is a process executed when a predetermined operation is performed on predetermined operation means (the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c) located on the back side of the predetermined opening/closing body or behind the predetermined opening/closing body.
The game machine according to any one of features αV1 to αV13, wherein the predetermined notification means can be confirmed when the predetermined opening/closing body is opened.

According to the feature αV14, when the predetermined opening/closing body is opened, the predetermined notification means can be confirmed. Therefore, after the predetermined opening/closing body is opened, the predetermined notification means can be confirmed before the predetermined operation means is operated. Therefore, when the predetermined notification is performed based on the illegal execution of the predetermined setting-related processing, the possibility of operating the predetermined operating means and executing the predetermined setting-related processing without noticing the predetermined notification is reduced.

With respect to the configuration of features αV1 to αV14, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O 11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9 , features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8 , Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14 , Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to αP7, Features αQ1 to αQ9, Features αR1 to αR8, Features αS1 to αS3, Features αT1 to αT4, Features αU1 to αU14, Features αV1 to αV14, Features αW1 to αW12 or one or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αW group>
Feature αW1. a predetermined opening/closing body (game machine main body 12) that can be opened and closed;
Predetermined control means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63, a function of executing a setting value change process in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing a first RAM clearing process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined process executed based on a predetermined operation performed on the predetermined operation means (the setting key insertion portion 68a, the reset button 68c) located on the back side of the predetermined opening/closing body or behind the predetermined opening/closing body;
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification (confirmation notification light emitting device 511, change notification light emitting device 512, and clear notification light emitting device 513 in the 72nd to 73rd embodiments, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the 74th embodiment);
Information setting means for setting predetermined execution information in the information storage means (setting confirmation flag, setting change flag, clear execution flag of the main RAM 65 in the 73rd to 74th embodiments) based on the execution of the predetermined processing (the function of executing the processing of step SF906 of the main CPU 63 in the 73rd to 74th embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step SG109 of the main CPU 63, and the processing of step SG202 of the main CPU 63. function) and
Predetermined notification execution means for causing the predetermined notification means to perform the predetermined notification under at least one condition that the predetermined execution information is set in the information storage means (in the 73rd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SG301 to SG306 of the main side CPU 63; in the 74th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SG601 to SG607 of the main side CPU 63);
information erasing means for erasing the predetermined execution information set in the information storage means (a function of executing the processing of steps SG406 to SG408 of the main side CPU 63 in the 73rd to 74th embodiments) based on the closing operation of changing the predetermined opening/closing body from the open state to the closed state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αW1, by confirming the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means, it is possible to confirm that the predetermined process has been executed and that the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body has not been performed after that. The predetermined process is a process executed based on a predetermined operation performed with the predetermined opening/closing body opened, and the predetermined execution information set in the information storage means is erased when the predetermined opening/closing body is closed. When the predetermined opening/closing body is opened and the predetermined processing is executed, and then the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body is performed, the predetermined execution information is not set in the information storage means. On the other hand, if the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing member is not performed after the predetermined process is executed, the predetermined execution information is set in the information storage means. Therefore, by confirming the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined processing without the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing member has been performed illegally.

Further, even after the predetermined notification is started by the predetermined notification means, the predetermined execution information can be left in the information storage means until the predetermined opening/closing member is closed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined process has been executed based on the predetermined execution information remaining in the information storage means even after the predetermined notification is started.

Feature αW2. There are multiple stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The gaming machine according to feature αW1, wherein the predetermined process is a predetermined setting-related process (setting confirmation process, setting value update process) relating to the setting value.

According to the feature αW2, by confirming the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined setting-related processing has been executed and that the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body has not been performed after that. When the predetermined opening/closing body is opened and the predetermined setting-related processing is executed and then the predetermined opening/closing member is closed, the predetermined execution information is not set in the information storage means. As a result, it is possible to grasp an act of fraudulently creating a situation in which setting values advantageous to the player are set.

Feature αW3. The predetermined control means includes, as the predetermined process, a setting means for executing a setting process for setting a set value to be used from a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing set value update processing in the main side CPU 63),
The information setting means sets setting execution information as the predetermined execution information in the information storage means based on execution of the setting process,
The gaming machine according to feature αW1 or αW2, wherein the predetermined notification executing means causes the predetermined notification means to perform setting execution notification as the predetermined notification under at least one condition that the setting execution information is set in the information storage means.

According to the feature αW3, it is possible to grasp that the setting process has been executed and that the predetermined opening/closing member has not been closed after that by confirming the setting execution notification from the predetermined notification means. When the predetermined opening/closing body is set in an open state and then the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body is performed, the setting execution information is not set in the information storage means, so that it is possible to grasp that the setting process without the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body has been illegally performed by confirming the setting execution notification in the predetermined notification means. As a result, it is possible to detect an act of illegally changing the set value set in the game machine to a set value that is advantageous to the player.

Feature αW4. There are multiple stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The predetermined control means includes, as the predetermined process, a setting confirmation means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that executes a setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the currently set setting value,
The information setting means sets setting confirmation execution information as the predetermined execution information in the information storage means based on the execution of the setting confirmation process,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αW1 to αW3, wherein the predetermined notification execution means causes the predetermined notification means to perform confirmation execution notification as the predetermined notification under at least one condition that the setting confirmation execution information is set in the information storage means.

According to the feature αW4, it is possible to grasp that the setting confirmation process has been executed and that the predetermined opening/closing member has not been closed after that by confirming the confirmation execution notification from the predetermined notification means. When the predetermined opening/closing body is set in an open state and the setting confirmation processing is executed, and then the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body is performed, the setting confirmation execution information is not set in the information storage means, so that it is possible to grasp that the setting confirmation processing without the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body has been illegally performed by confirming the confirmation execution notification in the predetermined notification means. As a result, it is possible to grasp the act of illegally confirming the setting values currently set in the game machine and illegally discerning the game machines in which the setting values that are advantageous to the player are set.

Feature αW5. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes,
a predetermined storage means (main side RAM 65) for temporarily storing information when the control means executes various processes;
with
The predetermined control means includes an initialization means (a function of executing a first RAM clear process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined initialization process for initializing a predetermined storage area in the predetermined storage means as the predetermined process,
The information setting means sets initialization execution information as the predetermined execution information in the information storage means based on execution of the predetermined initialization process,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αW1 to αW4, wherein the predetermined notification execution means causes the predetermined notification means to perform initialization execution notification as the predetermined notification, under at least one condition that the initialization execution information is set in the information storage means.

According to the feature αW5, by confirming the initialization execution notification by the predetermined notification means, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined initialization process has been executed and that the predetermined opening/closing member has not been closed after that. When the predetermined opening/closing body is closed after the predetermined initialization process is executed with the predetermined opening/closing body in an open state, the initialization execution information is not set in the information storage means, so that it is possible to grasp that the predetermined initialization process without the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body has been illegally performed by confirming the initialization execution notification in the predetermined notification means.

Feature αW6. There are multiple stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The predetermined control means includes, as the predetermined processing, setting-related means for executing predetermined setting-related processing related to the setting value (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63, function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
The information setting means
Setting-related information setting means for setting setting-related execution information as the predetermined execution information in the information storage means based on the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing (function of executing the processing of step SF906 of the main CPU 63 in the 73rd to 74th embodiments, function of executing the processing of step SG109 of the main CPU 63);
initialization information setting means for setting initialization execution information as the predetermined execution information in the information storage means based on the execution of the predetermined initialization processing (function for executing the processing of step SG202 of the main CPU 63 in the 73rd to 74th embodiments);
and
The gaming machine according to feature αW5, wherein the predetermined notification executing means causes the predetermined notification means to perform setting-related execution notification as the predetermined notification under at least one condition that the execution information related to setting is set in the information storage means, and causes the predetermined notification means to perform initialization execution notification as the predetermined notification under at least one condition that the initialization execution information is set in the information storage means.

According to the feature αW6, by confirming the setting-related execution notification by the predetermined notification means, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined setting-related processing has been executed and that the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body has not been performed thereafter, and by confirming the initialization execution notification by the predetermined notification means, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined initialization processing has been executed and that the predetermined opening/closing body has not been closed after that. In a situation where setting-related execution information is set in an information storage means based on the illegal execution of the prescribed setting-related processing, even if the prescribed initialization processing is illegally executed to erase traces of the illegal execution of the prescribed setting-related processing, the initialization execution information is set in the information storage means based on the execution of the prescribed initialization processing. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of overlooking that the predetermined initialization process and the predetermined setting-related process have been performed illegally.

Feature αW7. Start means for executing start processing when supply of operating power is started (function for executing main processing in main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to any one of features αW1 to αW6, wherein the predetermined process is executed in the start process.

According to the feature αW7, by confirming the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined processing has been executed in the start processing and that the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body has not been performed after that. When the predetermined processing is executed illegally in a situation where the start processing is not usually executed (for example, during business hours) and the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body is not performed after that, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined processing has been illegally executed by confirming the predetermined notification of the predetermined notification means.

Feature αW8. The predetermined notification means is provided at a position that can be confirmed by opening the predetermined opening/closing body,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αW1 to αW7, wherein the predetermined execution information set in the information storage means is maintained even when the predetermined opening/closing body is changed from a closed state to an open state.

According to the feature αW8, it is possible to grasp that the predetermined processing has been executed by confirming the predetermined notification means by changing the predetermined opening/closing body from the closed state to the open state, and to erase the predetermined execution information set in the information storage means by performing the closing operation of the predetermined opening/closing body. As a result, it is possible to simplify the confirmation work of the predetermined notification means and reduce the work burden on the manager of the game hall.

Feature αW9. The gaming machine according to any one of features αW1 to αW8, wherein the predetermined notification execution means causes the predetermined notification means to perform the predetermined notification based on occurrence of a predetermined start opportunity in a situation where the predetermined execution information is set in the information storage means.

According to the feature αW9, the period during which the predetermined notification is performed by the predetermined notification means can be limited to the period after the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification means only when necessary.

Feature αW10. A specific operation means (display switching button 68e) operated to cause the predetermined notification means to perform the predetermined notification,
The gaming machine according to feature αW9, wherein the predetermined start opportunity is that the specific operation means is operated.

According to the feature αW10, it is possible to grasp the execution status of the predetermined process by operating the specific operation means as necessary and confirming the presence or absence of the predetermined notification. Further, it is also possible to configure the predetermined notification means to perform notification other than the predetermined notification until the specific operation means is operated.

Feature αW11. The gaming machine according to any one of features αW1 to αW10, wherein the predetermined notification execution means causes the predetermined notification means to perform the predetermined notification on condition that the predetermined execution information is set in the information storage means when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature αW11, even if the supply of the operating power is illegally stopped in a state where the predetermined notification is being performed by the predetermined notification means and then the supply of the operating power is restarted, the state in which the predetermined notification is being performed by the predetermined notification means can be restored. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the unauthorized execution of the predetermined process will be overlooked.

Feature αW12. The predetermined process is a process that is executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the predetermined operation means (setting key insertion portion 68a, reset button 68c) located on the back side of the predetermined opening/closing body or behind the predetermined opening/closing body,
The game machine according to any one of features αW1 to αW11, wherein the predetermined notification means can be confirmed when the predetermined opening/closing body is opened.

According to the feature αW12, when the predetermined opening/closing body is opened, the predetermined notification means can be confirmed. Therefore, after opening the predetermined opening/closing body, the predetermined notification means can be confirmed before operating the predetermined operation means. Therefore, when the predetermined notification is given based on the illegal execution of the predetermined processing, the possibility of operating the predetermined operation means and executing the predetermined processing without noticing the predetermined notification is reduced.

For the configuration of features αW1 to αW12, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, and features O1 to O. 11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9 , features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8 , Features w1-w8, Features x1-x6, Features y1-y9, Features z1-z6, Features αA1-αA10, Features αB1-αB6, Features αC1-αC13, Features αD1-αD9, Features αE1-αE5, Features αF1-αF9, Features αG1-αG10, Features αH1-αH11, Features αI1-αI8, Features αJ1-αJ14 , Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to αP7, Features αQ1 to αQ9, Features αR1 to αR8, Features αS1 to αS3, Features αT1 to αT4, Features αU1 to αU14, Features αV1 to αV14, Features αW1 to αW12 or one or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the features αU group, the features αV group, and the features αW group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a plate storing part for storing game balls awarded to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storing part are guided by a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area according to the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Also, in the pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as plate storage portions, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage portion are guided to a game ball shooting device, and surplus game balls in the upper plate storage portion are discharged to the lower plate storage portion.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to deal with fraudulent actions against the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: A gaming machine comprising an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game part arranged in the game area, and giving a privilege to the player when the game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: A game machine which includes a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a privilege is given to a player according to the pattern after the stop.

10 Pachinko machine 12 Game machine main body 14 Front door frame 28 Shooting operation device 33 First operation opening 34 Second operation opening 35 Through gate 37 a Special figure display unit 38 a General figure display unit 49 a Gate detection sensor 62 MPU 63 Main CPU 65 Main RAM 68 a Setting key insertion unit 68 b Update button 68 c Reset button, 68e Display switching button 69a First notification display device 69b Second notification display device 69c Third notification display device 78 Power/fire control device 112 Management side CPU 117 History memory 171 Separate storage memory 181 to 186 History memory for settings 1 to 6 191 First history memory 192 Second history memory 201 First report Information display device 201a to 201g Display segment 202 Second notification display device 202a to 202g Display segment 203 Third notification display device 204 Fourth notification display device 221 Work area for specific control 222 Stack area for specific control 223 Work area for non-specific control 224 Stack area for non-specific control 231 Normal counter area 232 Open/close execution mode counter area 233 High-frequency support mode counter area 234 Calculation result storage area 241 Management RAM 251 Reset signal output unit 252 Program monitoring unit 266 Display IC 271 First display data buffer 273 Third display data buffer 311 Current status area 312 First history area 313 Second history area 314 Third history area 321- 324 Display segment 325 Setting correspondence storage area 325a to 325f First to sixth setting information storage area 326 Setting correspondence storage area 326a to 326c First to third setting information storage area 341 Setting reference area 342 Setting update area 352 Sound and light side MPU 353 Sound and light side CPU 356 RTC 357 RTC memory 361 OFF confirmation flag, 371... Area to be cleared, 391... First display sorting table for special figures, 392... Second display sorting table for special figures, 393... First display sorting table for general figures, 394... Second display sorting table for general figures, 416... Special electric winning device, 423a... General figure display unit, 425... First special figure display unit, 426... Second special figure display unit, 429... Special display unit , 481... 15R display section, 483... 6R display section, 484... small hit display section, 511... light emitting device for confirmation notification, 512... light emitting device for change notification, 513... light emitting device for clear notification.

Claims (1)

a history storage execution means for storing history information of a game corresponding to a game ball flowing down a game area between a door body and a game board when it enters a predetermined ball entry means in a history storage means;
information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to game results by using the history information stored in the history storage means;
mode information storage means for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means;
mode information display control means for controlling display corresponding to the mode information stored in the mode information storage means on the information display means;
a predetermined response display control means for performing control so that the information display means displays a predetermined response display before the display corresponding to the mode information is newly started based on the occurrence of a predetermined display opportunity;
with
The mode information storage means comprises a plurality of specific storage areas so as to be able to store each of the plurality of mode information derived at different timings by the information derivation means,
The mode information display control means performs control so that the information display means sequentially displays the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas in accordance with a predetermined display order, and when the information display means is caused to perform the display corresponding to the mode information after the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display means, the display corresponding to the mode information corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order is started.
The history storage execution means stores history information corresponding to when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means in either the closed state or the open state of the door, in the history storage means.
This game machine is
a control means capable of executing various processes including a predetermined progress process for progressing a game and temporarily storing information in a predetermined internal storage means when executing the process;
means for executing a display output process for enabling the information display means to perform a check display for confirming whether or not the information display means is normal after the supply of operating power is started;
with
A configuration in which the predetermined progress process can be executed even in a situation where control is being performed so that the check display is performed on the information display means,
The control means is
In-area processing executing means for executing in-area processing, which is processing using a program stored in a storage area of a predetermined address range in the program storage means;
an out-of-area process execution means for executing an out-of-area process, which is a process using a program stored in a storage area of an address range outside the predetermined address range in the program storage means;
saving executing means for saving information stored in the predetermined internal storage means to a saving storage means when or after the out-of-area processing is started;
a return execution means for returning the information saved in the save storage means to the predetermined internal storage means when or after the out-of-area processing is finished;
with
The display output processing is included in the intra-region processing,
The information derivation means executes a derivation process for deriving the mode information when a process execution trigger occurs, and executes the derivation process a plurality of times from the start of the derivation of the mode information to the completion of the derivation of the mode information.

Images